Designer User's Guide V4x
This document was uploaded by user and they confirmed that they have the permission to share it. If you are author or own the copyright of this book, please report to us by using this DMCA report form. Report DMCA
Overview
Download & View Designer User's Guide V4x as PDF for free.
More details
- Words: 140,951
- Pages: 676
RSWire Designer TM
User’s Guide
Contacting Rockwell Software
Technical Support Telephone—1–440–646–7800 Technical Support Fax—1–440–646–7801 World Wide Web—www.software.rockwell.com
Copyright Notice
© 2000 Rockwell Software Inc. wishes to ackknowledge the use of copyrighted material provided under license from ECT International, Inc. Printed in the United States of America Portions copyrighted by Allen–Bradley Company,LLC, a Rockwell Automation company. This manual and any accompanying Rockwell Software products are copyrighted by Rockwell Software Inc. Any reproduction and/or distribution without prior written consent from Rockwell Software Inc. is strictly prohibited. Please refer to the license agreement for details.
Trademark Notices
The Rockwell Software logo, RSAlarm, RSAnimator, RSAssistant, RSBatch, RSBreakerBox, RSButton, RSChart, RSCompare, RSControlRoom, RSData, RSDataPlayer, RSEventMaster, RSGauge, RSJunctionBox, RSLogix Emulate 5, RSLogix Emulate 500, RSGuardian, RSHarmony, RSKeys, RSLadder, RSLadder 5, RSLadder 500, RSLibrary Builder, RSLinx, RSLogix 5, RSLogix 500, RSLogix Frameworks, RSLogix SL5, RSMailman, RSNetWorx for ControlNet, RSNetWorx for DeviceNet, RSPortal, RSPower, RSPowerCFG, RSPowerRUN, RSPowerTools, RSRules, RSServer32, RSServer, RSServer OPC Toolkit, RSSidewinderX, RSSlider, RSSnapshot, RSSql, RSToolbox, RSToolPak I, RSToolPak II, RSTools, RSTrainer, RSTrend, RSTune, RSVessel, RSView32, RSView, RSVisualLogix, RSWheel, RSWire, RSWorkbench, RSWorkshop, SoftLogix 5, A.I. Series, Advanced Interface (A.I.) Series, AdvanceDDE, AutomationPak, ControlGuardian, ControlPak, ControlView, INTERCHANGE, Library Manager, Logic Wizard, Packed DDE, ProcessPak, View Wizard, WINtelligent, WINtelligent LINX, WINtelligent LOGIC 5, WINtelligent Series, WINtelligent VIEW, WINtelligent RECIPE, WINtelligent VISION, and WINtelligent VISION2 are trademarks of Rockwell Software Inc., a Rockwell Automation company. Data Highway Plus, DH+, DHII, DTL, MicroLogix, Network DTL, PLC, PLC–2, PLC–3, PLC–5, PowerText, Pyramid Integrator, PanelBuilder, PanelView, PLC–5/250, PLC–5/20E, PLC–5/40E, PLC–5/80E, SLC, SLC 5/01, SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, SLC 5/05, and SLC 500 are trademarks of the Allen–Bradley Company, LLC, a Rockwell Automation company. Microsoft, MS–DOS, Windows, and Visual Basic are registered trademarks, and Windows NT, Windows 98, Microsoft Access, and Visual SourceSafe are trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. ControlNet is a trademark of ControlNet International. DeviceNet is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendors Association. Ethernet is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation, Intel, and Xerox Corporation. Pentium is a registered trademark of the Intel Corporation. Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. AIX, PowerPC, Power Series, RISC System/6000 are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/ Open Company Limited. AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc.
Warranty
All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged. This Rockwell Software product is warranted in accord with the product license. The product’s performance will be affected by system configuration, the application being performed, operator control and other related factors. The product’s implementation may vary among users. This manual is as up–to–date as possible at the time of printing; however, the accompanying software may have changed since that time. Rockwell Software reserves the right to change any information contained in this manual or the software at anytime without prior notice. The instructions in this manual do not claim to cover all the details or variations in the equipment, procedure, or process described, nor to provide directions for meeting every possible contingency during installation, operation, or maintenance.
Technical Support:
Rockwell Software provides technical support to RSWire Designer users currently under warranty or support contracts. Technical support is available Monday through Friday from 8 am to 5 pm Eastern Standard Time. Phone (440) 646–7800
Fax (440) 646–7801
Please have your RSWire Designer serial number available when contacting Rockwell Software Technical Support. For Additional Support Services such as support contract renewal and product information, contact the following: 440–646–7700 SW Services Phone 440–646–7701 SW Services Fax 440–646–7777 AutoFax Product Info Email: [email protected] Information on RSWire training courses is available by contacting: 414–321–8000 Chris Sessions [email protected]
Table of Contents
Table of Contents 1
Installation and Start–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting RSWireTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exiting From RSWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unload Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Aliases (AutoCAD Add–On Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphics Tablet Configuration (AutoCAD Add–On Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-6 1-7
2
Introduction to RSWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSWire Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The RSWire Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSWire Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menus and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional Software Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using RSWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1 2-1 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-12 2-14 2-16
3
Project Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Preselect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lock and Unlock Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1 3-2 3-5 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-16 3-17
i
Table of Contents
ii
Rename Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup and Restore Projects and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup a Symbol Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup Selected Symbols, Macros, or Device Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restore a Project or Symbol Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Reorganize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Page Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-19 3-20 3-21 3-22 3-22 3-23 3-24 3-25 3-26
4
Page Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Pages (Select, Refresh, Next, Previous) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Page Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save As Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clear Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Page Variables Globally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Page Variables in Title Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Browse Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigator Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-8 4-8 4-9 4-11 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-20 4-23 4-25 4-27 4-28 4-30 4-32 4-35 4-38 4-39 4-40 4-42 4-43 4-49
5
Schematic Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire/Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1 5-3 5-3 5-10 5-11
Table of Contents
Multiple Placement of Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Search Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parent and Child Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Macro Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Invisible Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreign Language Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circles and Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal Cross Reference – JIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal Cross Reference – IEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Wire Number Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Wire Number Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicate Wire Numbers Using Invisible Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repositioning Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text File on Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Schematic Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replace Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clear Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replace Device IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replace Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replace Symbol Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replace Part Number Globally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Wire Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linetype Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19 5-20 5-23 5-25 5-27 5-31 5-34 5-40 5-41 5-47 5-52 5-56 5-58 5-65 5-66 5-66 5-72 5-75 5-76 5-77 5-78 5-79 5-83 5-85 5-88 5-92 5-92 5-94 5-105 5-106 5-108 5-110 5-110 5-114 5-115 5-118 5-119 5-120 5-121 5-122 5-123 iii
Table of Contents
iv
Selecting Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSWire Layer Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Object Function (for drawing elements) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-124 5-125 5-127 5-132
6
Create Schematic Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Libraries and Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Creation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Part Number During Symbol Creation (for automatic assignment) . . . . Creating a Symbol from an AutoCAD DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DXF Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Creation Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Example Parent Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Example Child Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Example Cross Reference Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Example Device Type Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Example Programmable Controller (Parent) Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Example PLC (Child) Symbol (JIC Format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Example PLC (Child) Symbol (IEC Format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Example Terminal Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Pin Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Form C Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Signal Cross Reference Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Title Block Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Device Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete, Copy, Rename for Symbols, Macros, and Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Symbol, Macro, or Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Symbol, Macro, or Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename Symbol, Macro, or Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Symbol, Macro, or Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiline Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1 6-2 6-2 6-4 6-6 6-18 6-21 6-22 6-24 6-24 6-28 6-31 6-34 6-39 6-52 6-57 6-63 6-66 6-72 6-77 6-81 6-83 6-89 6-93 6-93 6-95 6-96 6-97 6-100
7
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grid Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Report Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Report Format Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1 7-2 7-2 7-4 7-5 7-7
Table of Contents
8
Printer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable Controller Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal and Plug ID Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device ID Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Plan Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin–Plug Plan Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Macro Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire/Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Styles (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Styles (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preferences (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preferences (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preferences (Standalone Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9 7-11 7-13 7-15 7-17 7-19 7-19 7-27 7-29 7-37 7-40 7-43 7-45 7-47 7-47 7-48 7-48 7-48 7-48 7-49 7-52 7-53 7-61 7-64 7-69
Plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Current Page (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Current Page (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Multiple Pages (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Multiple Pages (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plotting to Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLT Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWG Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DXF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plotting Selected Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Selecting Layer Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Custom Drawing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1 8-2 8-3 8-5 8-10 8-15 8-18 8-21 8-21 8-22 8-23 8-24 8-26 8-26 8-31 v
Table of Contents
9
vi
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Lists from RSWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Library Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device Type Full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device Type Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreign Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connections Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminals Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC–List Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compile Parts File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bill of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purchase Order List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Job Costing List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS Access Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comma Separated Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Checking Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unreferenced Signals Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device Without Parent Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1 9-3 9-4 9-4 9-4 9-4 9-4 9-5 9-5 9-6 9-6 9-6 9-6 9-7 9-7 9-7 9-9 9-10 9-10 9-18 9-18 9-18 9-18 9-19 9-19 9-19 9-20 9-21 9-21 9-22 9-23 9-24 9-25 9-27 9-28 9-29 9-30 9-30 9-30
Table of Contents
10 Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preliminary Panel Layout Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel Layout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel Layout/Schematic Comparison Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Layout Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-1 10-2 10-3 10-8 10-9
11 Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Plan Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steps of Terminal Plan Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal/External Connections and Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Plan Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Plan Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editor Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Editing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphical Terminal Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphical Terminal Plan Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphical Terminal Plan Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphical Terminal Plan Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin–Plug Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin–Plug Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphical Pin–Plug Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1 11-2 11-2 11-3 11-5 11-6 11-8 11-9 11-20 11-20 11-24 11-30 11-31 11-31 11-31
12 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Cable in the Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Cable in the Terminal Plan Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Cable Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Cable Device Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Cable Cross Reference Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1 12-2 12-7 12-8 12-11 12-14 12-21
13 Parts Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS–Access Database Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UI.mdb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ARTICLE.mdb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TDB.mdb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USER.mdb and DEFAULT.mdb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing the Parts Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Database Edit Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Database Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a Parts Database Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a Parts Database Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-1 13-2 13-3 13-10 13-14 13-17 13-18 13-19 13-20 13-23 13-24
vii
Table of Contents
Find a Parts Database Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit a Parts Database Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table View of Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Database Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Database Manipulation Outside of RSWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing the Database Outside of RSWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Field Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Database Complete Restructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Previewing the Parts Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing the Parts Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing from MS–Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing from RSWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-25 13-27 13-28 13-29 13-30 13-30 13-32 13-34 13-36 13-37 13-39 13-39 13-40
14 List Generator Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning List Generator Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List File Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sort Criteria Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Variable Data in Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arithmetic Operations With Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . String Manipulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Static Filter for Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab Formatting in Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Generator Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Database Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field Wiring Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Checking Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-1 14-3 14-6 14-11 14-14 14-15 14-17 14-22 14-23 14-28 14-29 14-32 14-34 14-36 14-37 14-41 14-45
15 Alternate Search Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15-1
A
RSWire Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
B
RSWire Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
C
Creating Symbol Icon Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1
Index
viii
Installation and Start–up
1 Installation and Start–up Unpacking The following items are included in the RSWireTM Designer package. When unpacking, if any of these items are missing or damaged, contact Rockwell Software or your RSWire distributor. Package contents:
Software CD Activation Floppy Disk(s) w/Serial Numbers (Not applicable for RSWire Detailer) Document On–Line and Resource CD
All Rockwell Software Inc. products include a serial number which identifies the software. For RSWire , these serial numbers will be on the Activation Software disk(s). These serial numbers are required to access technical support for your RSWire software, so please store the serial number in a secure location.
1-1
Installation and Start–up
Installation To install the software, follow the instructions in the Installation Guide booklet. Refer to the section of the Installation Guide that covers the version of RSWire (AutoCAD–compatible or Standalone) that you purchased. The installation process creates the following directory structure on your hard disk. Some of these directories may contain additional subdirectories. Rs
Bmp (not applicable to RSWire Standalone)
toolbar button bitmap files
Catalog
JIC (or other catalog)
block definitions device definitions macro definitions icon selection group files
Db
Custom Lg Logos
address files foreign language files title block logo files
Dbs
Db
parts database files font directory
Fonts Menu
Dialog Mnu
dialog (prompt) & help files menu files DWG and PLT plot files
Plot
1-2
Block Device Macro Wmf
Program
System
executables and DLL files
Project
Work
user’s project files
Syscon
List System
list generator files configuration files
Tmp
temporary (scratch) files
User
user interface files (upgrades only)
Work
working directory
Installation and Start–up
Starting RSWire 1.
In Windows you can run RSWire from the Start button menu or, if you have created an icon (shortcut) for RSWire on the desktop, you can double click on the icon.
2.
The RSWire set of menus (File, Edit, View, Insert, Format, etc.) will appear on the screen. RSWire is now ready to operate.
1-3
Installation and Start–up
Exiting From RSWire To exit from RSWire: Select the Exit function in the File pull–down menu. File New Open Close Break Save Save As Next Page Previous Page Print/Plot DXF Import Backup/Restore ACAD Menu Exit
You will then exit from RSWire. Exit without saving: RSWire will automatically save any changes you have made to the current drawing page when you exit from the software using the File > Exit function. If you wish to exit without saving the changes to the current drawing page, execute the File > Break function before exiting with the File > Exit function. Note
1-4
In RSWire version 4.0, if you use the “X” button in the upper right corner of the window to exit from the AutoCAD add–on version of RSWire, the software will ask if you wish to save changes to the current drawing. If you select Yes, the RSWire menu will be displayed the next time you enter AutoCAD. If this happens, you can select the File > Exit function to return to the AutoCAD menu.
Installation and Start–up
VBA The add–on version of RSWire functions as an application inside AutoCAD. This allows access to Visual Basic Applications (VBA) pertaining to RSWire. (The standalone version of RSWire does not support VBA functionality.) The Tools > VBA pull–down menu provides functions which allow a variety of parameters to be set within VBA.
Tools VBA Load Project Unload Project Run Macro Load Editor
Load Project Provides access to VBA.
Unload Project Takes the user out of VBA
Run Macro Allows the user to choose a subroutine or function to run and debug its VBA code while in VBA Run Mode.
Load Editor Allows the user to edit and debug VBA code and to create forms while in the Design Mode.
Reference Guide For an explanation of VBA within RSWire, refer to the RSWire Visual Basic Application (VBA) Reference Guide.
1-5
Installation and Start–up
Command Aliases (AutoCAD Add–On Version) Keyboard command aliases (shortcuts) are available for functions in the AutoCAD add–on version of RSWire. To see a list of these aliases, view the ACAD.PGP file in the RS\MENU\MNU directory.
1-6
Installation and Start–up
Graphics Tablet Configuration (AutoCAD Add–On Version) A graphics tablet (digitizer) can be used with the AutoCAD add–on version of RSWire for drawing and for selecting symbols, macros, menu functions, etc. A tablet template drawing named RSWIRETAB.DWG is provided in the RS\WORK directory. This drawing is sized for a 11 x 11 inch tablet and contains a variety of JIC symbols, macros, and RSWire commands. You can plot this drawing and use it on your tablet. Configure the Template: 1.
Mount the template drawing on your tablet.
2.
Open a new or existing drawing in AutoCAD (not RSWire).
3.
On the command line enter the command: TABLET
4.
When prompted for an option (ON/OFF/CAL/CFG), enter: CFG
5.
When prompted for the number of tablet menus desired, enter: 4
6.
You will be prompted to pick three points for each menu area on the template followed by prompts for number of column and rows. Pick the points indicated on the following diagram and enter the indicated column and row values.
7.
When prompted to define the Screen Area, select the two points indicated in the diagram.
1-7
Installation and Start–up
MENU AREA 1 25 Columns 9 Rows
MENU AREA 2 11 Columns 8 Rows
SCREEN AREA
MENU AREA 3 3 Columns 8 Rows
MENU AREA 4 25 Columns 7 Rows
Refer to the AutoCAD manual for additional information on configuring tablets.
1-8
Introduction to RSWire
2 Introduction to RSWire This section introduces RSWireTM Designer and explains the use and conventions of this reference manual. A description of menu functions and their use is included.
RSWire Overview The RSWire Concept RSWireTM Designer is an advanced productivity tool for designers of electrical control systems. Because of its customizable, open architecture, RSWire can also be adapted to other applications such as hydraulics, pneumatics, and process control. RSWire allows schematic diagrams to be rapidly constructed using pre–defined symbols and macros. Wires are automatically broken at symbol connection points and sections of drawings can be cut and pasted to save time. Many functions are performed automatically by the software including the generation of unique device IDs for each symbol, cross referencing of related symbols (such as contacts and coils), and numbering of wires. RSWire recognizes logical interconnections between devices in a schematic. A wire is recognized as a wire and not just a graphic line. The system can check for errors such as duplicate device IDs while the schematic is being created. The software can perform automatic cross referencing and wire numbering. In combination with a parts database,the software can automatically generate a variety of support documentation such as terminal diagrams, cable plans, panel layouts, bills of material, and a job costing analysis. Because work is divided into projects, many related drawing pages can be included in these automatic functions. The AutoCAD add–on version of RSWire runs as an application inside AutoCAD to take advantage of that software’s drawing capabilities. There are add–on versions for AutoCAD Release 14 and AutoCAD 2000. RSWire Standalone is a self–contained software system: it does not run inside another CAD software package. There are standalone versions that incorporate the AutoCAD “OEM engines” for AutoCAD Release 14 and AutoCAD 2000, offering DWG file compatibility with the corresponding RSWire add–on versions.
2-1
Introduction to RSWire
RSWire Functionality This chart shows the interrelationship of RSWire functions.
RSWire
CUSTOMIZE:
Page Format Title Block Dialog Boxes Pull–down Menus Language Lists List Formats Symbol Libraries
STRUCTURE
Project Installations Locations
SCHEMATIC DRAWINGS
Symbols Device Types Lines Macros Fields Cross References
CREATE TERMINAL / CABLE PLAN
EXTERNAL INTERFACES
LAN Operation CAD Software (DXF, DWG Files) PLC Programming Software
2-2
LISTS
Master Parts List Quantified Parts (PO) List Bill of Material Job Costing List Wiring List Labels
Introduction to RSWire
Using This Manual Purpose This manual is a reference for the operation of the RSWire system. Information provided in this manual is sufficient for learning how to use the majority of the software’s operating functions and advanced customization capabilities. However, to realize the full potential of RSWire it is recommended that you participate in the training programs offered by Rockwell Software. These training programs are accelerated learning courses designed to ensure quick startup for users, and mastery of the software’s advanced customizing and interfacing features for system administrators and key operators.
Manual Organization The sections of this manual are organized into four main groups: I.
II.
III.
IV.
INSTALLATION / INTRODUCTION 1. Installation and Start–up 2. Introduction to RSWire PROJECTS AND SCHEMATICS 3. Project Management 4. Page Management 5. Schematic Elements 6. Create Schematic Elements 7. Settings 8. Plotting LAYOUTS, LISTINGS, TERMINAL PLANS AND CABLES 9. Reports 10. Panel Layout 11. Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan 12. Cables CONFIGURATION AND CUSTOMIZATION 13. Parts Database 14. List Generator Configuration 15. Alternate Search Paths
2-3
Introduction to RSWire
Manual Conventions RSWire Functions Various functions are available from pull–down menus at the top of the screen. They are accessed by pointing the cursor and clicking the mouse button. In this manual, the first reference to a pull–down menu function is shown as a series of commands in bold type separated by arrows that indicate different levels of the menu. For example:
Draw Wire 3 Phase The above command indicates that one should go to the Draw pull–down menu, select the Wire function and then select the 3 Phase function on the submenu. Draw Wire Text Logical Box Field Graphic Dimension Hatch...
Continuous Center Dashed 3 Phase 90 Degree Down 90 Degree Up Multiline Repeat Last
Keyboard Use If a specific key on the keyboard is to be pressed. The name of the key will be shown enclosed in < > characters. For example: <Enter> (press the Enter key)
2-4
Introduction to RSWire
Menus and Functions RSWire functions are accessible through pull–down menus at the top of the screen. Functions can also be activated by selecting them in dialog boxes. The AutoCAD add–on version of RSWire also allows functions to be entered on the command line. These command line functions are listed in the RSWire help file under Commands. Pull–down menu functions are shown on the following page. The numbers following the first level menu functions indicate which submenu will appear. In the AutoCAD add–on version of RSWire, some of these functions are also displayed as side menu functions to provide faster access during work sessions. The initial side menu is: MAIN Sym–Crea Symbol Macro Icon
the Manage > Symbol (create) submenu the Insert > Symbol by Name function the Insert > Macro by Name function the Insert > Select Icon function
Continuous Wire 3 Text Box Field
the Draw > Wire > Continuous function the Draw > Wire > 3 Phase function the Draw > Text function functions from Draw > Graphic > Box and Draw > Logical Box menus the Draw > Field function
Delete Move Stretch Copy
the Modify > Delete function the Modify > Move function the Modify > Stretch function the Modify > Copy function
System
the Tools > System Settings function
Sym–Edit Page Undo Zoom
the Modify > Symbol function functions from Manage > Page menus the Edit > Undo function the View > Zoom > Window function
You can return to the initial side menu from one of the other side menus by selecting the MAIN menu header.
2-5
Introduction to RSWire
Pulldown Menus: Below are the main pulldown menus and their submenus.
File Edit View Insert Format Draw Modify Manage Tools Reports Help File
New --------------> Page Open Project Close Break Save Preview... Save As Plot Config... Next Page Current Page... Previous Page Print/Plot --------------> Multiple Pages... DXF Import ------------------------------------> Backup/Restore ACAD Menu Exit
Edit
Undo Cut to Clipboard Copy Clipboard Paste Paste Special Browse Copy...
Save Current Page New DXF Page... DXF Import... Save as DWG... Save as Block...
View
Refresh Page Redraw Regen Zoom -------------------------------------------> Pan ----------------------> Real Time Aerial View Point Quadrant... Left Navigator Right List Up Command Dispatch Down Toolbars...
2-6
Insert Real Time Previous Window Dynamic Scale Center In Out All Extents
Select Icon... Symbol by Name... Macro by Name... Raster Image... Text On Drawing... Insert... Modify... Block --------------------> Explode Image... -------------------------------------> Frame Image Clip
Introduction to RSWire
Format
Layer... Color... Linetype... Text Style Dimension Style... Multiline Style...
Draw
Wire -----------------------------------------------------------> Create Text... Logical Box ---> Conn. Point Delete Conn. Point Field Graphic ------------------------------------> Line Dimension ---------> Linear Polyline Aligned Hatch... Box Empty Ordinate Box Filled Radius Arc Diameter Circle Angular Ellipse Baseline Continue Leader Tolerance Center Mark Oblique Align Text Style Override Update
Continuous Center Dashed 3 Phase 90 Degree Down 90 Degree Up Multiline Repeat Last
Modify
Power-Editor Symbol Line Text Field Wire Number Delete Copy Move Stretch Properties...
Manage
Project 1> Installation 2> Page 3> Symbol 4> Macro 5> Device Type 6> Parts Database 7> Foreign Language 8>
1> 2> Delete... Delete Copy... Copy Modify... Rename Rename... Project Preselect Page Count... Reorganize
6> New/Modify... Delete... Copy... Rename...
3> Clear Delete Copy Rename Move Modify Page Variables Update
7> Edit Form... Edit Table... Duplicates Check...
4> New/Modify... Reference Point Device ID Connection Point Delete Conn. Point Cross Ref. Position Save Cancel Delete... Copy... Rename...
5> New/Modify... Reference Point Select Items Save Cancel Delete... Copy... Rename...
8> New... Delete... Edit Phrases...
2-7
Introduction to RSWire
Tools
Project Settings... System Settings... Wire Number ------------------------------------------------------------> Automatic... Terminal/Pin-Plug Plan ---> Edit Terminals/Pin-Plugs... Manual... Panel Layout... Generate Graphical Plan... Delete... Wiring Diagram Layout Create Icon I/O Device ID Replace --------------------------------------------------------> Part Number... Wire Number... Osnap Symbol... VBA * -------------------------> Load Project Unload Project Text... Install Tablet Run Macro Symbol Text... Customize Menus... Load Editor Device ID... Preferences... * Not in Standalone version
Reports
Project 1> Libraries 2> Connections 3> Terminals 4> PLC-List... Parts 5> MS Access Reports 6> Comma Separated 7> Error Checking 8>
1> Project Full... Project Brief... Installations... Page Full... Page Brief... Table of Contents...
4> Terminals... Terminal Strips... 6> Preview... 9> Print... 9>
Help
RSWire Help AutoCAD Help Connect to Internet About RSWire...
2-8
2> Macros... Symbols... Device Type Full... Device Type Brief... Parts Foreign Languages... Page Formats...
5> Compile Parts File Master List... Bill of Materials... Purchase Order... Job Costing... Dimension List...
7> Project Libraries Connections Terminals PLC-List... Parts Error Checking
3> Wire List... Wire Labels... Cable List.. Field Wire... Signals... 8> Unreferenced Signals... Device Without Parent... 9> Master List... Bill of Materials... Purchase Order... Job Costing... Dimension List...
Introduction to RSWire
Third Mouse Button Menu If your mouse has a third (middle) button configured to function in Windows, you can press the third button to display the following pop–up menu. This menu includes a selection of functions found in the pull–down menus. (On Standalone systems, this menu appears when the right mouse button is clicked – the third button activates the pan function.) Delete Move Copy Modify Symbol Select Icon... Navigator Browse Copy... Open New Page... Refresh Page Pan Window Zoom Extents OSNAP >
Note
If the third button menu does not appear, enter the command mbuttonpan on the AutoCAD command line. Then enter the value 0. (Entering a value of 1 makes the third button activate the Pan function.)
Toolbars Toolbars are groups of buttons that can be positioned along the edge of the drawing area or as floating “palettes.” These buttons allow a variety of RSWire functions to be accessed more quickly than using a pull–down menu. When you place the cursor over one of these buttons and pause for a few seconds, a label will appear describing the function.
Toolbar Toolbar Handle
2-9
Introduction to RSWire
Each toolbar has a handle. By placing the cursor on the handle, you can drag the toolbar to different positions at the edge of the drawing area. You can also drag a toolbar into the drawing area to create a floating toolbar. Once the toolbars are positioned you can set the position so that the toolbars will always appear in the same place. Use the Tools > Preferences function. Select the Profiles tab, make sure the RSWire profile is highlighted and then select the Set Current button. Command Line / Text Window The command line is an area at the bottom of the drawing screen where the most recently executed commands are displayed. The software also displays prompts here for certain functions. By placing the cursor on its border, the command line area can be dragged to the top of the drawing screen or out onto the desktop to become a floating text window. The floating window can display more lines and therefore is useful for such functions as View > List. You can drag the floating window back to the drawing screen to reattach it. You can also display a floating text window without moving the command line by pressing the key. AutoCAD Text Window Edit
Regenerating drawing. Command: ECS_START
Text Window Command Line
Command: Command: Command: All/Center/Dynamic/Extents/Left/Previous/Vmax/W First corner: Other corner: Command:
2-10
Introduction to RSWire
Help Screens Online help information is available to describe RSWire functions. Many of the dialog boxes displayed by RSWire have a Help button which can be selected to display information. Windows Help File Edit Bookmark Options Help Contents Index
Back
Print
Device Types A device type is a definition that specifies how many and what type of child symbols are associated with a parent symbol. For example, 2 normally open and 2 normally closed contacts for a 4 pole relay. The device type can also specify a cross reference symbol to indicate contact usage near the parent symbol.
The following buttons are available in the Windows help screens: Contents – Select a topic from the help table of contents. Index – View a list of indexed topics in the help file. Back – Display the previously selected help screen. Print – Print the current help screen. The help file can also be accessed through the “Help” pull–down menu in the upper right corner of the screen. This provides a function called RSWire Help which displays the main help file screen (from which you can select the Contents or Index tab). Help RSWire Help AutoCAD Help Connect to Internet About RSWire
2-11
Introduction to RSWire
Dialog Boxes When the software requires information from you, a dialog box will be displayed that contains fields for the appropriate data. For example, the following New/Modify Symbol dialog box allows you to specify various parameters for a new symbol. New/Modify Symbol Symbol Name:
Radio Button Checkbox
List...
XCAB4REF
Preferred Direction Vertical
Horizontal
Snapmode: Endpoint
Data Field Description: Example cable cross reference symbol Search Language Text... Symbol Group:
Buttons
CS3 Cable Cross Reference Symbol OK
Cancel
Help...
You can select a data field by pointing the cursor and clicking the button. You can also move from field to field by pressing the key. Radio button and checkbox functions within a dialog box have only two states: on or off, selected or de–selected, etc. Radio buttons are selected) when they contain a dark center. Checkboxes are selected when they contain a checkmark. Buttons are provided in the dialog boxes to confirm information that has been entered, or to provide additional selections. Generally, selecting the OK button will confirm the information that has been entered, load it into the system and close the dialog box. In many (but not all) dialog boxes, pressing the <Enter> key has the same effect as selecting OK. Selecting the Cancel button will abandon the information that was entered and will exit the current function. In many (but not all) dialog boxes, pressing the <Esc> (Escape) key has the same effect as selecting Cancel. Selecting the Help button will display descriptive text about the functions in the current dialog box. 2-12
Introduction to RSWire
You can change the label text that appears in the dialog boxes by editing the file Rs\Menu\Dialog\Dcl_eng.txt (for English versions).
2-13
Introduction to RSWire
Optional Software Modules RSWire is available as a base system to which optional modules are added. RSWire Base System Functions include:
2-14
Schematic creation and editing Single and 3 phase lines (wires) Logical and drawing lines Move and modify routines Real time cross referencing Real time error checking Auto device ID assignment Auto wire break Parent/child symbol relationships Fields (remote location areas) Electrical symbol library Macro library Multi–page view (Cut & Paste) function Text on drawing function Programmable Controller List Automatic wire number assignment Multiple language text DWG and DXF file support
Introduction to RSWire
Optional Modules Parts Database – Parts database functions and panel layout Allows access to the parts database and master list function. Allows assignment of part numbers to device IDs. Auto generation of: Master parts list, Bill of materials, P.O. list, Job costing list. Allows creation and editing of language text database. Panel Layout mode. Prompts the user with layout symbols for creation of panel layout drawings based on schematics. Wire List – Allows creation of a wire (connection) list and related output. Point to point wire list Wire labels
Terminal Plans – Edit and graphically display terminal information.
Terminal plan editor Graphical terminal plan drawings Cable list Field wiring list Terminal connection list
Wiring Diagram/Shortest Distance Generator – Generates wiring diagrams based on schematics. Requires Parts Database and Wire List options. Separate instructions provided.
Wiring diagrams Connection list on wiring diagram Shortest distance on wire list
DeviceNet Module – Allows generation of DeviceNet layout drawings and related connection lists. Requires Parts Database and Wire List options. Separate instructions provided.
Network layout diagrams Symbol library Component parts data Connection list generator
PLC Schematic Generator – Allows automatic generation of PLC I/O module wiring diagrams. Separate instructions provided.
Automatic PLC drawing generation
2-15
Introduction to RSWire
Using RSWire Generally, doing a job with RSWire involves the following stages:
2-16
1.
If the optional database is to be used to allow the automatic generation of support documentation, component (parts) information must be entered or imported into the database. This information includes catalog numbers, manufacturer, price, dimensions, etc. If the same database is to be used for all jobs, this data entry step will not be necessary for subsequent projects unless new components are to be included. Part numbers can be assigned to symbols in the schematics.
2.
Create the schematic drawings. For the first project, most RSWire users create custom page formats, title blocks, symbols, etc., to match existing company standards. This customization is not necessary for subsequent projects.
3.
Generate panel layout drawings. RSWire has an optional semi–automatic panel layout mode that will prompt the user for each component in the schematic diagram. The user then positions the component as desired in the layout drawing.
4.
Generate a connection list. This automatically generated list contains connection information used in the terminal plan and other documentation lists.
5.
Generate terminal plan. RSWire automatically places terminal connection information on a graphical diagram page. The user can edit this plan as desired, for example, to assign cables and conduits.
6.
Generate documentation lists. Using information in the schematics and in the database, RSWire can automatically generate other useful lists such as bills of material, wire lists, wire labels, component labels, job cost analysis, programmable controller lists, and so on.
Project Management
3 Project Management This section explains the concept of projects, which is how work is organized in RSWireTM Designer. Project organization is presented first followed by sections on how to create, delete, copy, modify, rename and back up projects. The following sections are included:
Project Organization Create New Project Project Preselect Lock and Unlock Project Delete Project Copy Project Modify Project Renumber Project Rename Project Project List Backup and Restore Projects and Symbols Project Reorganize Project Page Count
3-1
Project Management
Project Organization A project is a collection of work done in RSWire, all of which relates to the same job. This work includes both graphical drawings (schematics, layouts, etc.) and support documentation (part lists, labels, connection information). By associating every drawing and list with a specific project, the software is able to recognize which information to use when performing automatic functions such as list generation, cross referencing, wire numbering, cost analysis, and so on. PROJECT Drawings
Schematic diagrams Panel layouts Graphical terminal plans
Documentation
Bill of materials Wire list Terminal list Purchase order list Wire and device labels Job cost analysis etc.
Installations and Locations – Projects can be subdivided into installations and locations. These usually correspond to physical locations. For example, the project could consist of an entire production facility while each production line within the facility is designated as an installation and each control cabinet on a line is a location.
3-2
Project Management
PROJECT
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION LOCATION
LOCATION
LOCATION
LOCATION
When graphical (drawing) pages are created, they are assigned to a specific installation and location. (This is what creates the installation and location.) When support documentation is generated, it can also be sorted by installation and location. Drawing page numbers within a single installation must be unique, even if they are in different locations (see Project 1, Installation 2 in the following illustration – page numbers in the second location continue from the first). PROJECT 1
INSTALLATION 1
INSTALLATION 2
LOCATION
LOCATION
4
8
3
2
4
7
2 1
(No Installation or Location)
LOCATION
4
3 1
PROJECT 2
6 5
3
Drawing Pages
2 1
3-3
Project Management
The use of installations and locations is optional. In Project 2 shown in the previous figure, no installations or locations have been assigned. All drawing pages in the project, therefore, are part of the same number sequence. Also, an installation does not have to be divided into locations. Some RSWire functions require an installation and location name. In these cases, if the user has not assigned an installation or location name, the system will use the default installation name NO_INST and location name NO_LOC. When a project is created (see page 3-5) the system creates a directory for it in the RS\PROJECT\WORK subdirectory. Project directories are assigned a short name such as: ______10.EC1 ______11.EC1 The file NAMES.EC2 in the RS\PROJECT\WORK directory describes which of these directories belongs to each project. In each project’s directory, separate subdirectories are automatically created for each installation and also for various support documentation.
3-4
Project Management
Create New Project To create a new project, use the File > New > Project function. Select:
File New Project The following New Project dialog box will appear. New Project Project
Title Block Macro
Default Page Macro
Select ...
Select ...
Symbol Library JIC Use Parameters From: Address File
Project Description Job Number Drawing Number Search Language Text... Description...
Parameter... OK
Settings... Cancel
Parts Database...
Help...
The following fields are provided in this dialog box: Project – Enter the name of the project, up to 14 characters (no spaces allowed). Symbol Library – The name of the subdirectory containing the graphic symbols to be used in this project. The selection here will be JIC, IEC, or another library of control symbols that exists under the RS\CATALOG directory.
3-5
Project Management
Use Parameters From – You may use parameters and settings from an existing project. This eliminates the need to make the same settings for the new project. If you wish to do this, select the name of the existing project from the drop–down list. The parameters that carry over will include the Project Description, Job Number, Drawing Number, as well as the settings from the Project Parameters and Project Settings dialogs (see below). Title Block Macro – The name of a macro file (a stored combination of drawing elements) that will automatically be placed on the drawing as a title block. The default entry is TITLED. This is one of the title block macros provided with RSWire. The user can also create custom title block macros. Use the Select button to display the macro list from which selections can be made (you can make wildcard entries). Note
Before you can use the Select button you must first have opened a page that uses the current symbol catalog. You must also remove any default entry from the Title Block Macro field. Default Page Macro – This field allows a macro to be named that will automatically be placed on every page of the project. Use the Select button to display the macro list from which selections can be made. Address File – A text file containing information such as the user’s street address which the software can automatically place on lists so that the user need not enter it manually. These files can be created or edited with the Tools > System Settings function (Address File tab). Project Description – A brief project description (49 characters) may be entered in this field which can be placed in title blocks of drawings and on various lists created by the system. Job Number, Drawing Number – These fields for project descriptions or identifiers which can be included in drawings and documentation. Project Description 4 through 20 – These are additional fields for project descriptions or identifiers which can be included in drawings and documentation. These fields are accessed through the use of the scroll bar to the right of the fields. Search Language Text – Selecting this button accesses the language text database, allowing you to insert language text phrases into the Project Description fields (put the cursor in the desired field first). See page 5-32 for more on language text. Four option buttons, Description, Parameters, Settings, and Parts Database are available in the New Project dialog box. These allow additional information and settings to be entered.
3-6
Project Management
Description Button – Selecting this button produces a dialog box with fields for entering ten lines (49 characters per line) of additional project description. There is also a Search Language Text button that allows you to select and enter language text phrases (see page 5-32). Enter the desired description and select OK to continue. Project Description Description Description Description Description Description Description Description Description Description Description Search Language Text... OK
Cancel
Parameter Button – Selecting this button displays the Project Parameters dialog box which allows various project–wide default values to be altered.
3-7
Project Management
Project Parameters Default Device ID Display:
Device ID – Page – Line No.
Signal Cross Reference Analysis Type:
Ascending by Inst. and Pages Language
Default Text Size Device ID
0.1250
Connection Point
0.1250
Strip/Plug Device ID
0.0000
2:
Terminal/Plug ID Cross Reference
0.1250 0.1250
3:
Signal Cross Reference
0.1250
1:
English
Default Grid Default Text Style
ROMANS
Adjust Device ID When Symbols Are Moved
X
0.5000
Y
0.5000
Wire Numbering Mode: Wire Number Same Over Terminal Connection List/Term. Plan: Replace CP With I/O Address OK
Note
Cancel
Help...
Values shown in inches. The following fields are available in this dialog box:
3-8
Project Management
Default Device ID Display – This field allows the user to select the format that the system will use to assign device IDs. By clicking on the down arrow button, the following device ID formats will be listed: Device ID Format
Description
Example
Device ID - Seq.No.
Device ID tag and sequential number
PB1
Device ID - Page - Line No.
Device ID tag, page number, line number
PB109
Page-Device ID - Line No.
Page number, Device ID tag, line number
1PB09
Device ID - Continuous Line No.
Device ID tag, continuous line number
PB86
Group-Device ID - Seq.No.
Prompt, Device ID tag, sequential number
APB1
Seq.No. - Device ID
Sequential number, Device ID tag
1PB
Page - Line No. - Device ID
Page number, line number, Device ID tag
109PB
Page Line - Device ID - Seq. No.* Page line, Device ID tag, sequential number
10PB1
Page-Device ID - Seq. No.
1PB1
Page number, Device ID tag,sequential number
* There are three versions of this format: Page Checked, Line Checked and Project Checked. These differ in what the the software checks for duplicate IDs: the current page, the current line, or the entire project. Note
“Device ID tag” is the mnemonic abbreviation (such as PB for pushbutton) associated with a given type of symbol. The “Continuous Line No.” format causes line numbering on each page to begin where the previous page ended. The “Group” format will place a number (or other character) in front of every device ID. When the user changes this character when placing a symbol, all similar symbols placed thereafter (in the same work session) will have the new character in the device ID. Signal Cross Ref. Analysis Type – This field determines how signal cross references are analyzed. Choices include Ascending Order by installations and pages (default), Pairs (signal cross references that exist only in pairs – page order not taken into account), or Ascending Numbers (ascending number order for all cross references – page order not taken into account). Language 1, 2, 3 – Certain descriptive text strings in a drawing can be displayed in up to three different languages simultaneously. In the Language fields, the user selects which languages will be used. By selecting the down arrow button the following list of languages can be selected from: English, German, French, Spanish, Dutch, Italian.
3-9
Project Management
Default Text Style – Allows the user to define the size of various types of drawing text. Fields are provided for Device ID, Connection Point, Strip/Plug Device ID, Terminal Device ID, Cross Reference, and Signal Cross Reference. These values will be used provided that the Use Text Height from Project Parameters checkbox is set in the General Defaults dialog box (see page 7-19). If this checkbox is not set, text heights defined for each symbol will be used. Default Grid – Allows the user to define the default size of the grid in the drawing area. Adjust Device ID When Symbols Are Moved – This checkbox determines if the device ID of an existing symbol will be adjusted automatically if the symbol is moved to a new position (with the Modify > Move function). This affects only projects that use one of the device ID formats based on page and line number. Select the checkbox to enable automatic device ID adjustment. Note
The device IDs of symbols that have a cross reference relationship are not changed when moved. This must be done with the Modify > Symbol > Device ID function. Wire Numbering System: Wire Number Same Over Terminal – Selects whether or not the same wire number will be assigned before and after a terminal when wires are numbered. When a checkmark appears in the box, the same wire number will appear before and after the terminal symbol. If the box is empty, a different wire number will be assigned after the terminal as shown below. 15
TB2
16
Connection List/Term. Plan: Replace CP With I/O Address – Selects whether or not to replace PLC connection point text in the connection list with the full PLC I/O address. For example, for input 05 of a PLC module (rack 01, module 02) selecting this toggle will replace “05” in the connection list with “I0102/05.” When the project parameters are entered as desired, select the OK button to enter them and return to the New Project dialog box. Settings Button – Selecting this button displays the Project Settings dialog box which allows various page and display setting values to be altered. These settings are described in Section 7 (see Page 7-19). Parts Database Button – Selecting this button allows you to select or create an ODBC data source name that points to database file other than the default parts database. No setting is necessary here if you plan to use the default parts database.
3-10
Project Management
To finish creating the project, select the OK button in the New Project dialog box. The system will create the necessary directory for the project and drawing pages can then be created. Immediately after creating the new project, the software will display the New Page dialog box allowing you to begin creating drawing pages. See page 4-11.
3-11
Project Management
Project Preselect Certain functions that affect an entire project require you to select a project so that the software knows which project to act upon. When you open a drawing page (with the File > Open functions) the software will treat the project to which the page belongs as the currently selected project. However, at the beginning of a work session before any pages have been opened, or if you have been working on one project and wish to make settings in a different project, you can use the Manage > Project > Project Preselect function to select another project.
Manage Project Project Preselect The Project Preselect dialog box will appear listing the names of all the projects on your system. Project Preselect Project: TOOL ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE WEB
Search... Lock Project OK
Unlock Project Cancel
Help...
Select a project from the list by pointing the cursor and clicking the left mouse button. The selected project name will be highlighted in the list and will appear in the Project field above the list. Use the Search button to display a list of projects with descriptions. You can also make selections from this list. Select the OK button to open the project, making it the currently selected project.
3-12
Project Management
Lock and Unlock Project When operating RSWire on a network you can use the Lock Project toggle in the Project Preselect dialog box (see previous page) to prevent another user on the network from accessing the same project. This is important during such critical operations as automatic wire numbering, project renumbering, project parameter modification, project/installation deletion, or project/installation renaming. To Lock a Project: 1.
Select the File > Project Preselect function. The Project Preselect dialog box will appear.
2.
Select the desired project name from the displayed list.
3.
Select the Lock Project checkbox.
4.
Select the OK button to lock the project.
The project will remain locked to other users until you unlock the project. To Unlock a Project: 1.
Select the File > Project Preselect function. The Project Preselect dialog box will appear.
2.
Select the desired project name from the displayed list.
3.
Select the Unlock Project checkbox.
4.
Select the OK button to unlock the project.
3-13
Project Management
Delete Project The Manage > Project > Delete function will erase a set of project files from the system. Warning: Deleting a project will erase all the files for the selected project from the computer.
Select:
Manage Project Delete The Select: Project dialog box will appear, listing all the projects currently on your system. Select: Project Project: TOOL ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE WEB
Search...
OK
Cancel
Help...
Select a project from the list by pointing the cursor and clicking the left mouse button. The selected project name will be highlighted in the list and will appear in the Project field above the list. Use the Search button to display a list of projects with descriptions. You can also make selections from this list.
3-14
Project Management
To delete the selected project, select the OK button. The message “Select OK to delete the project:” will appear in a dialog box along with the project name. Select the OK button in this dialog box to delete the project. Select the Cancel button to cancel the deletion.
3-15
Project Management
Copy Project The Manage > Project > Copy function creates a copy of an existing project under a different name. Select:
Manage Project Copy The Copy Project dialog box will appear, listing all the projects currently on your system. Copy Project From:
To:
TOOL ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE WEB
Search... OK
Cancel
Help...
Select the project to be copied. Its name will appear in the From field. Use the Search button to display a list of projects with descriptions. Enter the name that the copy of the project is to have in the To field. Select the OK button to create a copy of the project.
3-16
Project Management
Modify Project The Manage > Project > Modify function allows you to alter project parameters (descriptions, device ID format, etc.) that were entered when the project was originally created. Select:
Manage Project Modify The Select: Project dialog box will appear, listing all the projects currently on your system. Select: Project Project: TOOL ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE WEB
Search...
OK
Cancel
Help...
Select a project from the list by pointing the cursor and clicking. The selected project name will be highlighted in the list and will appear in the Project field above the list. Use the Search button to display a list of projects with descriptions. Select the OK button to continue. The Modify Project dialog box will appear.
3-17
Project Management
Modify Project Project
Title Block Macro
Default Page Macro
Select ...
Select ...
Symbol Library JIC
Address File No. of Pages:
1
Project Description Job Number Drawing Number Search Language Text... Description...
Parameter... OK
Settings... Cancel
Parts Database...
Help...
This dialog box is the same as the New Project dialog box, except that the Project name field cannot be accessed or changed. A No. of Pages field also appears. The other fields, including those accessed with the Description, Parameter, Settings and Parts Database buttons, will display information for the selected project, and this may be modified. For descriptions of these fields, see page 3-5, New Project. When the desired modifications have been made, select the OK button to put the modifications into effect.
3-18
Project Management
Rename Project The Manage > Project > Rename function allows you to assign a new name to an existing project. Select:
Manage Project Rename The Rename Project dialog box will appear, listing all the projects currently on your system. Rename Project From:
To:
TOOL ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE WEB
Search... OK
Cancel
Help...
Select the project to be renamed. Its name will appear in the From field. Use the Search button to display a list of projects with descriptions. Enter the new name that the project is to have in the To field. Select the OK button to rename the project.
3-19
Project Management
Project List To generate a list of all the projects currently on your system, use the Reports > Project > Project Full function. Select:
Reports Project Project Full For more information on this function, see page 9-4.
3-20
Project Management
Backup and Restore Projects and Symbols The Backup/Restore function allows you to make backup copies of project files and symbol catalogs. The backups are stored as .ZIP files. The symbol catalog backup will also store macros and device types found in the selected symbol catalog directory. The restore function allows you to load backed–up projects or catalogs back into your system. Select:
File Backup/Restore When you select the Backup/Restore function, the Backup/Restore dialog box appears. Backup/Restore Backup/Restore Path: Browse
A: Backup Select Project
Restore Select Catalog
Selected: Symbol
Macro
Device
Available for Restoring
Selected: OK
Cancel
Help
Save...
3-21
Project Management
Backup a Project
Note
1.
In the Backup/Restore Path field, enter the drive and path to the directory where the backup is to be stored. The default path is A:. Use the Browse button to locate an existing directory on your system. Select the Save button to save the path you have entered for future work sessions.
2.
Select the Backup button.
3.
Pick the Select Project button.
4.
The Select Project dialog box will appear. Select the project that you wish to back up and select the OK button. The name of the selected project will be displayed in the Selected field of the Backup/Restore dialog box.
Do not enter project names directly in the Selected field, use the Select Project button. 5.
Select the OK button in the Backup/Restore dialog box to create the backup .ZIP file.
For each backup file created, a similarly named file with a .EC3 extension will be created which contains the name of the project contained in the .ZIP file. Important
It is recommended that you only save one project per floppy disk set. (If you backup one or more projects on a floppy disk and then do another backup that fills the first disk and extends to a second disk, you will only be able to restore the last project – the other projects on the first disk will become inaccessible.)
Note
Whenever project settings are saved (the various tabs under Tools > Project Settings), configuration files are created in a Config subdirectory under the directory for that project. These configuration files are automatically saved with a project backup and are restored automatically when the project is restored.
Backup a Symbol Catalog
3-22
1.
In the Backup/Restore Path field, enter the drive and path to the directory where the backup is to be stored. The default path is A:. Select the Save button to save the path you have entered for future work sessions.
2.
Select the Backup button.
3.
Pick the Select Catalog button.
Project Management
4.
Note
The Select Path–Catalog dialog box will appear. Select the catalog that you wish to back up and select the OK button. The name of the selected catalog will be displayed in the Selected field of the Backup/Restore dialog box.
Do not enter catalog names directly in the Selected field, use the Select Catalog button. 5.
Select the OK button in the Backup/Restore dialog box to create the backup .ZIP file.
For each backup file created, a similarly named file with a .EC3 extension will be created which contains the name of the catalog contained in the .ZIP file. Important
It is recommended that you only save one catalog per floppy disk set. (If you backup one or more catalogs on a floppy disk and then do another backup that fills the first disk and extends to a second disk, you will only be able to restore the last catalog –– the other catalogs on the first disk will become inaccessible.)
Backup Selected Symbols, Macros, or Device Types You can back up selected symbols, macros or device types. You can then restore the selected items on another computer or in a different symbol catalog without copying over an entire catalog. Use the following procedure: 1.
In the Backup/Restore Path field, enter the drive and path to the directory where the backup is to be stored. The default path is A:. Use the Browse button to locate an existing directory on your system. Select the Save button to save the path you have entered for future work sessions.
2.
Select the Backup button.
3.
Pick the Select Catalog button.
4.
The Select Path–Catalog dialog box will appear. Select the catalog from which you wish to make the backup and select the OK button. The name of the selected catalog will be displayed in the Selected field of the Backup/Restore dialog box.
5.
Select the Symbol, Macro or Device Type button depending on the type of item you wish to back up. (If you are not backing up the entire catalog you must create separate files for each type of item.)
6.
The Select Files dialog box will appear, listing all the symbols, macros, or device types in the selected catalog. Select (highlight) the items you wish to include in the backup file. Select the OK button to continue. 3-23
Project Management
7.
Select the OK button in the Backup/Restore dialog box to create the backup file.
For each backup file created, a similarly named file with a .EC3 extension will be created which contains the names of the symbols, macros or device types contained in the .ZIP file. When you restore the backed up items (see following procedure), they will be added to the selected catalog path. Any existing item in the catalog having the same name as an item in the backup file will be overwritten by the backed up item.
Restore a Project or Symbol Catalog
3-24
1.
In the Backup/Restore Path field, enter the drive and path to the directory where the backup files are stored. Use the Browse button to locate an existing directory on your system.
2.
Select the Restore button.
3.
Names of the available projects or catalogs will be displayed in the Available for Restoring field. Pick the desired project or catalog. The selected name will appear in the Selected field.
4.
Select the OK button in the Backup/Restore dialog box to restore the project or catalog.
5.
If a project with the same name already exists on your system you will be prompted “Project already exists. Overwrite?” Select the Yes button to overwrite the existing project. Select No or Cancel to abort the restore operation.
Project Management
Project Reorganize This function re–creates the project database file, Oldb.mdb. The function is only needed in cases where your project data becomes corrupted. Select:
Manage Project Reorganize The software will display the Project Preselect dialog box. Select the project that you wish to reorganize and select OK. The software will open each page in the project and store the relevant information in the project’s Oldb.mdb file. When this process is complete the software will display a text logfile that lists all the pages that were processed.
3-25
Project Management
Project Page Count This function updates the total page count for the project. Ordinarily this is done automatically, but occasionally after performing multiple page move and delete functions, the page count can become inaccurate. If you notice an error in the page total for a project (for example in the “page __ of __” field in a title block) use the Manage > Project > Page Count function. Select:
Manage Project Page Count The software will update the total page count for the project.
3-26
Page Management
4 Page Management This section describes functions related to RSWireTM Designer drawing pages. The first section covers how pages are organized within the project. Other sections describe how to display (open), create, delete and copy pages. Installation functions allow all the pages within an installation to be copied, deleted, or renamed as a unit. For information on configuring page formats, see page 7-29 (Tools > Project Settings > Page Format function). The following sections are included:
Page Organization
Page Storage
Displaying Pages (Open, Refresh, Next Page, Previous Page)
Save Page
Save As Page
Create New Page
Quit Page
Clear Page
Delete Page
Copy Page
Modify Page
Rename Page
Move Page
Viewing Pages
Browse Copy
Page List
Delete Installation
Copy Installation
Rename Installation
Navigator Function
Page Count 4-1
Page Management
Page Organization As described in Section 3, projects can be (optionally) divided into installations and locations. An installation or location does not exist until a drawing page is created and assigned to that installation and location. A page need not be assigned to an installation or location, but it must be associated with an existing project. Page numbering for each installation can be independent. Two locations in the same installation can not have the same page numbers (see Project 1, Installation 2 in the illustration below). PROJECT 1
INSTALLATION 1
INSTALLATION 2
LOCATION
LOCATION
4
8
3
2
4
7
2 1
(NO INSTALLATION OR LOCATION)
LOCATION
4
3 1
PROJECT 2
6 5
3
DRAWING PAGES
2 1
If no installations or locations have been created in a project, all the pages in the project will be part of the same numbering series (see Project 2 in the above illustration). Page numbering need not be continuous; there can be “gaps.”
4-2
Page Management
Page Storage When a RSWire drawing page is created and stored, the graphical information is stored in a DWG file while the logical information is stored in the project’s Oldb.mdb file.
stored as
Drawing Page
.DWG file (graphics) Oldb.mdb file (project logical data)
The DWG file contains the graphical information for the drawing: everything that is seen when the drawing is plotted. The Oldb.mdb file contains logical information about all the drawings in the project. This data includes device IDs, wire coordinates, and connection information and is used by various software functions. By having this information in the Oldb.mdb file, the software is able to perform project–wide operations such as cross referencing and list generation without having to open and analyze every DWG file. When changes are made in the currently open page that affect another page in the project, the software will place the change in the Oldb.mdb file. The next time the user opens the second drawing page, the DWG file is updated from the information in the Oldb.mdb file. Within the DWG file the software follows a layering standard that places different types of information on separate layers. See page 5-125. The Oldb.mdb and DWG files are stored in the directory for the project to which they belong. As each page in an installation is created, the software assigns a name to the DWG files in the following format: _______1.DWG The number in the filename is incremented for each new page in the installation that is created. When you create a new installation, the filename numbering begins again. 4-3
Page Management
Displaying Pages (Select, Refresh, Next, Previous) Four functions are available for displaying drawing pages. These functions are Open, Refresh, Next Page, and Previous Page.
Open Page The File > Open function allows an existing drawing page to be loaded into RSWire and displayed on the screen for viewing and editing. To open a page, select:
File Open The Select Page dialog box will appear, listing all the currently available projects. Select Page Project:
Installation:
Page:
MACHINE1 ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE WEB Search...
Search...
Search...
Preview Description:
User: Date: Format: Page Type: Installation: Location: OK
4-4
Cancel
Online: Scale:
Help...
Page Management
Select the desired project from the list by pointing the cursor and clicking. The names of all the installations in the selected project will appear in the Installation column. When you select an installation, the existing pages in that installation will be listed in the Page column. You can then select the desired page. When you select a page, a thumbnail view of the page will appear in the preview area of the dialog box. In the following example, page 1 of the installation LINE1 in the project MACHINE1 has been selected. Information about the page appears in the lower right corner of the dialog box. Select Page Project:
Installation:
Page:
LINE1 LINE2
1 2 3 4 5 6
MACHINE1 ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE WEB Search...
Search...
Search...
Preview Description: Motor Control Center
User: Date: Format: Page Type: Installation: Location: OK
Cancel
USER 8/10/98 D–2COL Circuit Diagram LINE1 ENC1
Online: Off Scale: 1
Help...
In each column you can use the Search button to display a list of projects, installations or pages with descriptions. You can also make selections from these lists. Select the OK button to proceed. The selected page will be displayed on the screen. 4-5
Page Management
Page Name Field – There is a page name field that indicates the project name, installation name, location name, page name, and online/offline status of the currently displayed page. This field appears in the lower left corner of the window. In the following example, the current page is page 1 of the project Machine1, installation LINE1, location EN1 and the page is an online page (On). (See page 4-14 for an explanation of the Online function.) If the page is assigned to no particular installation or location the words NO_INST and NO_LOC will appear in this field. .................................... .................................... ....................................
Page Name Field
LED
181
LED
182
LED
183
Command: Command: MACHINE1, LINE1, EN1, 1, On
2.5000, 0.5000
Refresh Page If, during an RSWire session, the drawing screen is cleared, selecting the View > Refresh Page function will bring back the last drawing page that was displayed. Select:
View Refresh Page
4-6
Page Management
Next and Previous Page The File > Next Page and Previous Page functions allow you to display the next and previous drawing pages in numerical order without having to enter the specific page name. Select:
File Next Page or
File Previous Page
4-7
Page Management
Save Page Use the File > Save function to save (store) a drawing page onto disk. After saving, the page remains on screen, available for further editing. Select:
File Save When the save operation is complete, the message “The page was saved” appears on the command line.
Automatic Page Save You can configure the software to automatically save the currently open page at a regular time interval. Use the following procedure:
4-8
1.
Using Notepad or another text editor, create an ASCII text file named autosave.cfg containing a time interval value in minutes. In other words, if the file contains the number 15, the page will be saved every 15 minutes. The file need only contain this number.
2.
Place the autosave.cfg file in the RS\SYSCON\SYSTEM directory.
Page Management
Save As Page Use the File > Save As function to save an RSWire drawing as a DWG file under another name for use outside of RSWire. The logical information for the DWG file that is created with this function will not be saved in the project Oldb.mdb file and therefore will not work with the RSWire logical functions (error checking, cross referencing, etc.). It will only be a graphical view of the drawing page. You can also save drawings as DXF or DWT files. Therefore, do not use the Save As function to create files that you wish to use later in RSWire. Use the Manage > Page > Copy command to make copies of pages for use inside RSWire. Warning: Use the Save As functions only for DWG files that will be used outside of RSWire. The logical information for the DWG file that is created with this function will not be saved and therefore will not work with the RSWire logical functions if you attempt to use the new DWG file later in RSWire. The File > Save As function will save an AutoCAD DWG file in the following formats: AutoCAD 2000, Release 14/LT98/LT97, AutoCAD Release 13/LT95. You can also select to save as a Drawing Template File (*.dwt) or as a DXF file in the following formats: AutoCAD 2000, R14/LT98/LT97, R13/Lt95, R12/LT2. To use this command, first display the RSWire drawing page that you wish to save. Then, select:
File Save As The Save Drawing As dialog box will appear.
4-9
Page Management
Save Drawing As Save in
Work
_______1.dwg
File Name:
_______1.dwg
Save as type:
AutoCAD R14/LT98 Drawing (*.dwg)
Save Cancel Options
In the Save in Field, select the path and folder in which you want to save the drawing from the dropdown list. The drawing’s current name is indicated in the File Name field. Enter the new name under which you wish to save the drawing in this field. Do not enter the .DWG extension; it will be added automatically. In the Save as type: field, select the file type that you want the file saved as, from the dropdown list. Select the Save button to save the new DWG file. Select Cancel to abort the Save As function. Select Options to save proxy images of custom objects. The Export Options dialog box will appear. If you save to the Release 14 or Release 13 file type, and the drawing contains custom objects from another application, you can select the Save Proxy Images of Custom Objects checkbox. Images of the custom objects are saved in the drawing file. If you do not choose this option, a frame for each object is saved in the drawing file. Refer to your AutoCAD manual for more information.
4-10
Page Management
New Page Use the File > New > Page function to create a new drawing page. Select:
File New Page The New Page dialog box will appear. New Page Project:
Select...
Installation:
Select...
Location:
Select...
Format Name
D–2COL
Select Page Format... Scale 1:
1
Online Page Type
Page:
Schematic Diagram Title Block
Select ...
Page Macro
Select ... OK
Parameters 1...
2...
3...
4...
5...
6...
7...
8...
9...
10...
Cancel
Help...
If a project is currently active, the name of the project (and installation) will be prompted in the Project and Installation fields. These can be changed if desired. Project – In this field, enter the name of the project to which the page will belong. An entry must be made in this field and the project must exist, otherwise the error message “Project does not exist” will be displayed. Use the Select button to view and pick from a list of existing projects. Installation – In this field enter the name of the installation to which the drawing page will belong. An entry in this field is optional. If the installation name entered does not yet exist, a new installation will be created. (See page 4-2 for more information on installations and locations.) The installation name can have up to 14 characters. Use the Select button to view and pick from a list of existing installations. 4-11
Page Management
Location – In this field enter the name of the location to which the page will belong. An entry in this field is optional. If the location name entered does not yet exist, a new location will be created. The location name can have up to 14 characters. Use the Select button to view and pick from a list of existing locations. Page – In this field enter the page number (name). If you wish to be automatically prompted for the next available page number in the specified installation, place the cursor in the Page field, delete any existing number, and then point and click at a different field – the next available number will then appear in the Page field. Note
Do not use any of the following reserved characters in the installation, location, or page names that you enter: # = + – ^ / : ~.@ (includes spaces and periods). These characters are used for various purposes by the software and may cause unexpected results if entered in these fields. Format Name – This field selects the page size format. Fifty different formats are possible. The pre–defined formats provided with RSWire are as follows:
4-12
Page Management
Format Name
Dimensions/Description
DEFAULT
1180.0 x 810.0 in. - System Default (do not modify)
A-0VCOL
8.5 x 11 in. - A Size Vertical Without Line Numbers
A-0HCOL
11.0 x 8.5 in. - A Size Horizontal Without Line Numbers
B-0COL
17.0 x 11.0 in. - B Size Without Line Numbers
C-0COL
22.0 x 17.0 in. - C Size Without Line Numbers
D-0COL
34.0 x 22.0 in. - D Size Without Line Numbers
E-0COL
44.0 x 34.0 in. - E Size Without Line Numbers
A-1VCOL
8.5 x 11.0 in. - A Size 1 Line Number Column
A-1HCOL
11 x 8.5 in. - A Size 1 Line Number Column
B-1COL
17.0 x 11.0 in. - B Size 1 Line Number Column
C-1COL
22.0 x 17.0 - C Size 1 Line Number Column
D-1COL
34.0 x 22.0 in. - D Size 1 Line Number Column
E-1COL
44.0 x 34.0 in. - E Size 1 Line Number Column
B-2COL
17.0 x 11.0 in. - B Size 2 Line Number Columns
C-2COL
22.0 x 17.0 - C Size 2 Line Number Columns
D-2COL
34.0 x 22.0 in. - D Size 2 Line Number Columns
E-2COL
44.0 x 34.0 in. - E Size 2 Line Number Columns
D-3COL
34.0 x 22.0 in. - D Size 3 Line Number Columns
E-3COL
44.0 x 34.0 in. - E Size 3 Line Number Columns
E-4COL
44.0 x 34.0 in. - E Size 4 Line Number Columns
A0
1189.0 x 841.0 mm - IEC Size A0
A1
841.0 x 594.0 mm - IEC Size A1
A2
594.0 x 420.0 mm - IEC Size A2
A3
420.0 x 297.0 mm - IEC Size A3
A4V
210.0 x 297.0 mm - IEC Size A4 vertical
A4H
297.0 x 210.0 mm - IEC Size A4 horizontal
ZONE
34.0 x 22.0 in. - Zone Cross Referencing
HEX-LAD-D1
34.0 x 22.0 in. - D Size Hexagon Ladder
HEX-LAD-D2
34.0 x 22.0 in. - D Size Hexagon Ladder
HEX-LAD-C1
22.0 x 17 in. - C Size 1 Column Hexagon Ladder
HEX-LAD-C2
22.0 x 17 in. - C Size 2 Column Hexagon Ladder
HEX-LAD-B1
17.0x11.0 in. - B Size 1 Column Hexagon Ladder
HEX-LAD-A1V
8.5 x 11 in. - A Size Vertical, Hexagon Ladder
HEX-LAD-A1H
11.0x8.5 in. - A Size Horizontal, Hexagon Ladder
UNDEFINED
0.0 x 0.0 - The remaining formats are undefined
4-13
Page Management
To display the list of page formats, use the Select Page Format button. This will display a dialog box from which you can select a format. Any formats with a width and height of 0.0 are undefined (unused) formats. Undefined page formats are available to the user for custom page formats. These can be set up using the Tools > Project Settings function (see page 7-29) and selecting the Page Format tab. Existing page formats also can be re–defined using this function. Note
You must assign a name to a page format before you can create a page with the format.
Note
Do not re–define the first (“DEFAULT”) page format. The system requires this format in its default state for certain display functions. You can also display or print a list of page formats with the Reports > Libraries > Page Formats function. Scale – This optional field specifies the drawing scale to be used for the page being defined. This is mainly used for panel layout drawings so that symbols can be placed at less than full size. Online – This checkbox determines whether or not logical functions are active on the page. When the Online checkbox is selected, the page is online, meaning that automatic functions such as error checking and cross referencing will be performed on the drawing. When the Online box is empty, the page is not online (it is “offline”). The software does not recognize the connections on offline pages. The Online checkbox should be turned off only when no logically connected control devices will be placed on the page, such as for panel layouts, creating new symbols, or general mechanical CAD work where no error checking or cross referencing is required. You can change the online status of a page after it is created by using the Manage > Page > Modify function. Page Type – This field provides a number of page type options: Schematic Diagram is for online schematic diagram pages. This type should be selected for the majority of RSWire drawings. Select Panel Layout for panel layout diagrams. The Graphical Terminal Plan is assigned to pages generated by the graphical terminal plan function. The Graphical Contents List type is assigned to pages generated when a report is sent as output to a project page. Select the Wiring Diagram Layout type when creating a wiring diagram layout drawing. Page Macro – This optional field allows a macro to be placed on the page automatically. Unlike the Default Page Macro specified when a project is created, the Page Macro here only applies to the page currently being created. A Select button under the field allows the macro list to be displayed and selected from.
4-14
Page Management
Title Block – This optional field specifies the title block macro to be used only on the page being created. A title block named on the New Page dialog box will override the title block specified on the New Project dialog box when the project was created. A Select button under the field allows the macro list to be displayed and selected from. Parameters – This area of the dialog box contains ten buttons labeled 1 through 10. Selecting any of these buttons will display a list of ten page information parameters (selecting 1 will display parameters 1 through 10, selecting 2 will display parameters 11 though 20, and so on). These parameters are associated with and stored with the page. Some are used in title blocks. When a button is activated the following Page Parameter dialog box will appear. Page Parameter 2 11. Para 12. Para 13. Para 14. Para 15. Para 16. Para 17. Para 18. Para 19. Para
,
20. Para Search Language Text OK
Cancel
Help...
Select the Search Language Text button to access the language text database, allowing you to insert language text phrases into the page parameter fields (put the cursor in the desired field first). See page 5-32 for more on language text. Enter the desired information in the parameter fields and select the OK button to continue. When the desired information is entered in the New Page dialog box, select the OK button to create the page. The blank page will then appear on the screen, ready for further editing. 4-15
Page Management
Page Break The File > Break function removes the currently active drawing page from the screen without saving any changes that have been made since the page was opened (or since it was last saved). Warning: You will lose any edits that have been made since the page was last saved.
To exit from a drawing page without saving any changes that have been made, select:
File Break The current drawing page will be removed from the screen without being saved. The software will display a dialog box asking you to confirm the page break function. Select the OK button to proceed. Select the Cancel button to cancel the break function.
4-16
Page Management
Clear Page The Manage > Page > Clear function erases all drawing elements from the currently active drawing page. The page becomes blank as if it had just been created. This function therefore should be used with caution. Warning: This function deletes all current page data completely.
To erase everything from the current drawing page, select:
Manage Page Clear The software will display a dialog box asking you to confirm the Page Clear. Select the OK button to proceed. Select the Cancel button to cancel the clear operation. Note
If you perform Manage > Page > Clear by accident, you can recover the data by performing the File > Break function immediately after the Manage > Page > Clear.
4-17
Page Management
Delete Page The Manage > Page > Delete function allows you to delete RSWire drawing pages. Note
You can also use the Manage > Installation > Delete function to delete an entire installation of pages. Select:
Manage Page Delete The following Delete Page(s) dialog box will appear. Select a project name and a list of installations will appear. Select an installation name and a list of pages in that installation will appear. You can then select (highlight) the pages that you wish to delete. Delete Page(s) Project:
Installation:
Page:
MACHINE1 ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE WEB Search...
Search...
Search...
Preview Description:
User: Date: Installation: Format: Online: OK
Cancel
Location: Scale: Page Type: Help...
In each column you can use the Search button to display a list of projects, installations or pages with descriptions. 4-18
Page Management
When the desired pages have been selected, select the OK button. The message “Delete the selected pages?” will appear. Select the OK button again to delete the pages, or select Cancel to abort the page deletion.
4-19
Page Management
Copy Page The Manage > Page > Copy function allows you to copy drawing pages. Note
You can also use the Manage > Installation > Copy function to copy an entire installation of pages. Select:
Manage Page Copy The following Copy Page(s) dialog box will appear. Copy Page(s) From: Project:
Installation:
Page:
ABACK TOOL Search...
Search...
To: Project:
Search...
Installation:
Location:
TOOL Page:
Convert Device IDs to New Page/Line Number Reference Set Pages Online Renumber All Terminals Modify Field Settings Wire Numbers: Maintain
Add Prefix: OK
4-20
Add Suffix: Cancel
Help...
Page Management
In the From: fields, select the pages you wish to copy. Select a project name and a list of installations will appear. Select an installation name and a list of pages in that installation will appear. You can then select (highlight) the pages that you wish to copy. In each column you can use the Search button to display a list of projects, installations or pages with descriptions. In the To: fields select the installation in which the copy is to reside (the “To” project will always be the currently selected project). A location and page number can also be specified. If you selected multiple pages to be copied, the number entered in the To: Page field will be assigned to the lowest numbered page being copied. The spacing of the copied pages will be maintained; in other words, if you select pages 1 and 3 and assign a destination of page 5, the copies will become pages 5 and 7. The Convert Device IDs to New Page/Line Number Reference checkbox determines whether device IDs on the copied pages will be automatically changed to match the new page number. When the checkbox is selected, the device IDs will be converted. When the checkbox is not selected, device IDs will remain the same if the page is copied to an offline page. If you copy to an online page you will be prompted for a new device ID for each item (see important note below). The Set Pages Online checkbox determines whether the copied pages will be online or offline. Select the checkbox to make the copied pages online pages. If the pages are offline no error checking or cross referencing will be performed. Important
If you turn off the Convert Device IDs... checkbox and copy to an online page (i.e., the Set Pages Online checkbox is turned on) the software’s error checking will detect duplicate device IDs on the copied page and will prompt you for a new ID for each item on the page. This can be time–consuming if the schematic is large. It may be preferable to let the system automatically convert the device IDs (i.e., leave the Convert Device IDs checkbox on) and then manually change IDs as needed with the Edit > Symbol function. The Renumber All Terminals checkbox determines whether or not terminals in the copied page will be renumbered automatically to avoid duplication. Select the checkbox to automatically renumber terminals. If the checkbox is not selected, you will be prompted to enter a new ID for each terminal that is duplicated within the same installation. The Modify Field Settings checkbox determines whether or not field settings of the existing page will be duplicated into the copied page. If the checkbox is selected, you will be prompted with the Field Parameters dialog box to make modifications to the field settings of the copied page. If the checkbox is not selected, existing field settings will copy into the copied page. 4-21
Page Management
The Wire Numbers area of the dialog box allows you to set how existing wire numbers in the copied page will be copied. Because the software considers duplicate wire numbers to be an error, the system will alter any wire numbers (as described below) that already exist in the project receiving the copied page. The Maintain checkbox determines whether or not wire numbers will be copied. If you do not select the Maintain checkbox, wire numbers will not be copied. If you do select the Maintain checkbox, wire numbers will be copied under the following rules: 1.
If the copied wire numbers do not exist in the destination project, the wire numbers will be maintained without changes.
2.
If copied wire numbers are connected to a signal cross reference connecting to an existing wire number, the existing wire number will be used on the copied portion.
3.
If copied wire numbers duplicate existing wire numbers in the destination project, the system will add a question mark (?) to any copied wire number that duplicates an existing wire number. For example, if wire number 100 is copied to a project that already has a wire number 100, the copied wire number will be changed to 100?. (This can be avoided by adding a prefix or suffix to the copied numbers. See the following paragraph.)
The Add Prefix and Add Suffix fields allow you to specify a prefix or suffix that will be added to all copied wire numbers. The added prefix and/or suffix will make the copied wire numbers unique, thus avoiding duplicate numbers (unless the prefix or suffix is already used in the destination project.) Select the OK button to copy the pages. Note
Part numbers that are assigned to device IDs on the original page will be assigned to corresponding IDs on the copied pages.
Note
Pages can only be coped into the open project.
4-22
Page Management
Modify Page The Manage > Page > Modify function allows you to change the title block used on an existing drawing page and also change the page parameters and turn the Online function off and on. To modify a drawing page, first display the page (File > Open Page) and then select:
Manage Page Modify The Modify Page Data dialog box will appear. This dialog box is similar to the New Page dialog box (see page 4-11) except that only the Title Block, Page Format, Online, and Parameters fields are accessible for modification. See pages 4-12 through 4-15 for a description of these fields. Modify Page Data Format Name D–2COL
Select
Select Page Format...
Select Select
Online Page Type
Title Block
Page Macro
Select
Select OK
Parameters 1...
2...
3...
4...
5...
6...
7...
8...
9...
10...
Cancel
Help...
Make the desired changes to the title block, page macro, parameters and online status and select the OK button to load the changes. Set Page Online When you use the Manage > Page > Modify function to turn a page from offline to online, the page is once again subject to error checking for conditions such as duplicate device IDs. When you select the Online checkbox in the Modify Page Data dialog box and select OK, the following dialog box will appear. 4-23
Page Management
Online Page Keep existing Device IDs Rename Device IDs Automatically
OK
Cancel
Help...
Select the Keep existing Device IDs checkbox to keep device IDs as they currently exist on the page. De–select the Keep existing Device IDs checkbox to allow the software to change device IDs to match the currently selected device ID format (i.e., page/line number, sequential number, etc.). Select the Rename Device IDs Automatically checkbox to allow the software to change device IDs without prompting you. De–select the Rename Device IDs Automatically checkbox to cause the software to prompt you before changing each device ID. Select OK to complete setting the page online.
4-24
Page Management
Modify Page Variables Globally The Manage > Page > Page Variables function allows you to globally change page parameter text across a range of pages, installations, or across an entire project. Select:
Manage Page Page Variables The Page Variables dialog box is displayed. Page Variables Select Pages... Select Text 1...
2...
3...
4...
5...
6...
7...
8...
9...
10...
OK
Cancel
Help...
Select the Select Pages button in the Page Variables dialog box. The Exchange Title Block Text dialog box will appear, listing the projects on your system. Exchange Title Block Text Project:
Installation:
Page:
ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE WEB
Search...
Search... OK
Cancel
Search... Help...
4-25
Page Management
This dialog box allows you to select which pages are affected by the text change. Select the desired project from the list by pointing the cursor and clicking. The names of all the installations in the selected project will then appear in the Installation column. When you select an installation, the existing pages in that installation will be listed in the Page column. Then select the desired pages. If you select only a project name, all pages in that project will be affected. If you select only the installation name (and no pages) then all pages in that installation will be affected. Select OK to continue with the change function. Select Text – This area of the dialog box contains ten buttons labeled 1 through 10. Selecting any of these buttons will display a list of ten page information parameters (selecting 1 will display parameters 1 through 10, selecting 2 will display parameters 11 though 20, and so on). These parameters are associated with and stored with the page. Some are used in title blocks. When a button is activated the following Page Parameter dialog box will appear. Page Parameter 2 11. Para 12. Para 13. Para 14. Para 15. Para 16. Para 17. Para 18. Para 19. Para
,
20. Para Search Language Text OK
Cancel
Help...
Enter the text that you wish to assign globally in the desired field. Note
This text will replace any existing parameter text for the selected pages. Select the OK button when the text has been entered. You will return to the Page Variables dialog box and a different group of parameters can be selected. Select the OK button in Page Variables dialog box to execute the change title block text function.
4-26
Page Management
Modify Page Variables in Title Block You can modify the values of page variables that appear in page title blocks by pointing the cursor at the desired value and clicking the right mouse button. DRAWN BY
PROJECT Warehouse
DRAWING NO. 900–178–01
D. Smith
Unit One Storage LIne
JOB NO. 178
DATE
PAGE DESCRIPTION
SHEET
03/04/2000
Line Cabinet A
1 OF 3
Right click on value to modify
An appropriate dialog box will appear that will allow you to edit the variable value. Note
You can also edit the page description, page number, and project description by right clicking on the value in the title block.
4-27
Page Management
Rename Page The Manage > Page > Rename function allows you to rename RSWire drawing pages within a project. Select:
Manage Page Rename The following Rename Page dialog box will appear. Rename Page From: Project:
Installation:
Page:
ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE Search...
Search...
To: Project:
Search...
Installation: Location:
Page:
Convert Device IDs to New Page/Line Number Reference OK
Cancel
Help...
In the From: fields, select the pages you wish to rename. First select a project name and a list of installations will appear. Select an installation name and a list of pages in that installation will appear. You can then select (highlight) the page that you wish to rename. In each column you can use the Search button to display a list of projects, installations or pages including descriptions. 4-28
Page Management
In the To: fields, enter the installation, location, and page number that the renamed page is to have. The location assignment is optional. The Convert Device ID to New Page/Line Number Reference checkbox determines whether device IDs on the renamed page will be automatically changed to match the new page number. When a checkmark appears in the box, the device IDs will be converted. When the box is empty, device IDs will remain the same. Select the OK button to rename the page.
4-29
Page Management
Move Page The Manage > Page > Move function allows you to move drawing pages within an installation. You may wish to move pages to rearrange the page order or to make room for inserting new pages. Or, you may wish to move pages to close gaps in the page order. Note
If you wish to move a page to another installation, or to another project, use the Manage > Page > Copy function and then delete the original page. To move a page, select:
Manage Page Move The Move Page(s) dialog box will appear. Move Pages(s) From: Project:
Installation:
Page:
ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE Search...
Search...
Search...
Increment Page Numbers By +/–: Convert Device IDs to New Page/Line Reference OK
Cancel
Help...
Use the Project and Installation fields to identify the project and installation containing the page(s) to be moved. In the Page field select one or more pages to be moved. In each column you can use the Search button to display a list of projects, installations or pages including descriptions. Use the Increment Page Numbers By field to specify the number of positions forward (+) or backward (–) you wish to move the pages. For example, enter “2” to move the page(s) two page positions forward, or enter “–1” to move them one position backward. 4-30
Page Management
The Convert Device IDs to New Page/Line Number Reference checkbox allows you to select whether or not the device IDs in the moved drawings will be automatically changed to reflect the new page number. When a checkmark appears in the checkbox, IDs will be renamed automatically. When the checkbox is empty, the original IDs will be retained. Select the OK button to perform the page move operation. Rules for Page Move: A page cannot be moved into a position already occupied by another page. This will cause a “Page already exists” error message to appear. A page cannot be moved backward to a page number of less than zero. If this is attempted, the message “Incorrect input” is displayed on the command line. The following illustration shows an installation containing five drawing pages, numbered 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6. There is no page 3. Pages 1 and 2 could be moved forward one position (+1) in which case they would become pages 2 and 3, respectively. They could not be moved forward two positions (+2) because this would conflict with the existing page 4. However, they could be moved ahead six positions (+6) where they would become pages 7 and 8. Pages 6
Move Pages 1 and 2:
5 4
+1 Allowed +2 Not Allowed
2 1
+6 Allowed –1 Allowed –2 Not Allowed (+ = forward, – = backward)
Pages 1 and 2 could also be moved backward one position (–1) where they would become pages 0 and 1. They could not be moved back any further than this.
4-31
Page Management
Viewing Pages The View pull–down menu contains a number of functions that control the user’s view of drawing pages.
View Refresh Page Redraw Regen Zoom Pan Aerial View Quadrant... Navigator List Command Dispatch Toolbars... Refresh Page – If, during an RSWire session, the drawing screen is cleared, selecting the View > Refresh Page function will bring back the last drawing page that was displayed. Redraw – Redraws the current drawing. Regen – Regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen coordinates for all objects. Zoom – There are a number of zoom functions: Real Time Zoom – This option is used for interactive zooming. With this Zoom function, you can zoom in or out of the drawing by holding down the left button of the pointing device and moving the cursor vertically up or down. Press <Esc> to exit this mode. Zoom Previous – Displays the previous zoom view of the drawing. Zoom Window – Allows the user to enlarge (zoom) the view of a selected area of the drawing. When selected, the software prompts you to select the first corner followed by the opposite corner. This allows you to define a rectangular area on the drawing which will be enlarged to fill the screen. Zoom Dynamic – Allows the user to zoom out as well as in. Selecting the function produces a reduced view of the entire drawing with a square area window. Position the area window and click the left button. The window can now be re–sized as desired by moving the mouse. Click the right button to zoom to the selected area. 4-32
Page Management
Zoom Scale – Allows you to zoom at a specified scale factor. When you select this function you will be prompted on the command line to enter a scale factor. Entering a value followed by “x” specifies a scale relative to the current view (“2x” magnifies objects to twice their current size). Entering a value followed by “xp” specifies a scale relative to paper space units (the first view is considered 1xp). Zoom Center – Zooms to display a window defined by a center point and a magnification factor or height. When you select the function you will be prompted to specify a center point and then enter a height or magnification factor. Zoom In – Zooms in to the drawing in 2X increments. Zoom Out – Zooms out from the drawing in .5X increments. Zoom All – Zooms to the smallest view that includes everything in the drawing. Zoom Extents – Zooms to display the drawing extents. Pan – The following Pan functions are available: Real Time – This option is used for interactive panning. You can pan the drawing image to a new location by holding down the left button of the pointing device and moving the cursor. Press <Esc> to exit this mode. Point – Moves the view of the drawing by the specified distance. Left – Moves the drawing to the left. Right – Moves the drawing to the right. Up – Moves the drawing up. Down – Moves the drawing down. When you are using the Real Time option of Zoom or Pan, you can right–click the pointing device and use the cursor menu to move quickly between zooming and panning. Aerial View – Aerial View is a navigation tool that displays a view of the drawing in a separate window so that you can quickly move to that area. If you keep the Aerial View window open as you work, you can zoom and pan without selecting a command. In the Mode menu you can choose Pan or Zoom. Pan mode allows you to move a rectangle to the part of the drawing you wish to view. Zoom mode allows you to define a window to move and resize the drawing at the same time. 4-33
Page Management
Quadrant – Allows you to zoom to a specific quadrant of the drawing page. The following Select Quadrant dialog box is displayed. Select the radio button for the desired page quadrant. Select the All radio button to display the entire page. Select Quadrant
2–Upper Left
1–Upper Right
3–Lower Left
4–Lower Right
All OK
Cancel
Help...
Navigator – The Navigator function allows you to move quickly from one drawing page to another by clicking on a device ID, a cross reference or a signal. For more information, see page 4-43. List – The List function allows you to view data relating to specific entities in a drawing. See page 5-132. Command Dispatch – Displays a drop down list containing RSWire commands. Select the desired command and then select the checkmark button to execute the command. Toolbars – This function allows you to select which toolbars are displayed on the screen.
4-34
Page Management
Browse Copy The Edit > Browse Copy function allows you to simultaneously display up to four drawing pages. It is possible to copy portions from these pages and paste them onto the current drawing page. The pages copied from can exist in the same or in a different project from the current page. To use the Browse Copy function: 1.
Display the page that you wish to receive the copied items.
2.
Then select the Edit > Browse Copy function.
Edit Browse Copy The Browse Copy dialog box will appear. This dialog box operates in a similar manner to the File > Open dialog box, except that multiple pages can be selected that will be displayed on the screen. These selected pages must exist in the same project and installation (however they can be in a different project or installation from the currently active page). 3.
Select the name of the Project and Installation that contains the pages you wish to view and/or copy from. The pages in the selected installation will be listed. In each column you can use the Search button to display a list of projects, installations or pages including descriptions.
4.
Select the page (number) of the first page that you wish to view. This page and the three pages that follow it in numerical order will be displayed in the Browse Copy dialog box. The number of each page is displayed above the thumbnail view. In the following figure, page 2 has been selected, so pages 2 through 5 are displayed.
4-35
Page Management
Browse Copy Project
Page
C2HOUSE C2HOUSE EX2 EXAMPLE MACHINE1
1 2 3 4 5 6
Preview Select... 2
Select... 3
Search...
Installation
Select...
LINE1 LINE1
Select... 5
4
Single Selection
Search...
Search...
Maintain Device IDs As Created OK
Cancel
Previous
Next
Help...
Display Page To Be Copied In This Quadrant
You can use the Next button to display the next four pages in the installation (if any). Use the Previous button to display the previous group of four pages. You can check the Single Selection checkbox to display individual pages in the order they were selected in the page column. If this checkbox is not selected, the next pages (if any) in the installation will be displayed. 5.
Note
4-36
Check the Maintain Device IDs As Created checkbox if you wish to maintain the existing device ID of the copied portion. If this checkbox is not selected, the device IDs will acquire the numbering sequence of the destination page.
If you are copying symbols within the same project, the Maintain Device ID As Created checkbox option has no effect. RSWire will not allow duplicate device IDs within the same project.
Page Management
Note
Note
6.
Display the page from which you wish to copy in the upper left quadrant of the Browse Copy dialog box. Do this by selecting the desired page number in the Page column.
7.
Select the OK button. The selected page will fill the screen.
You can also select a page to copy from by selecting the Select button above the thumbnail view. 8.
You will be prompted to “Define Base Point.” Select a reference point for the copied portion.
9.
Just as with the standard copy function, you will be prompted to “Select objects.” Select the portion of the drawing that you wish to copy and click the right mouse button (or press the <Enter> key).
If you want to exit this function, select Edit > Browse Copy. You will return to the original page that you wanted to receive copied items. 10. The destination page (selected in the first step) will fill the screen. Select a position for the copied elements. 11. The Device ID Assignment dialog box will appear with a device ID shown for each copied symbol (the copied items are treated as a macro by the software). You can accept the prompted IDs or enter new ones.
Note
If you copy a field, the destination page must have an installation and location assigned or the field will not be copied.
4-37
Page Management
Page List To generate a list of drawing pages for a given project, use the Reports > Project > Page Full function. See page 9-4 for more information. Select:
Reports Project Page Full
4-38
Page Management
Delete Installation The Manage > Installation > Delete function allows you to delete an installation from a project. Warning: All drawing pages in the selected installation will be deleted.
To delete an installation, select:
Manage Installation Delete The following Select Project–Installation dialog box will appear, listing all projects currently on your system. Select Project – Installation Project:
Installation:
ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE WEB
Search...
Search... OK
Cancel
Help...
When you select a project name, a list of all installations in the project will appear in the installation column. Select the installation that you wish to delete. Use the Search button to display a list of projects or installations including descriptions. Select the OK button to proceed with the deletion. The software will prompt “Delete the selected installation?” Select the OK button to delete the installation or select Cancel to abort the deletion. 4-39
Page Management
Copy Installation The Manage > Installation > Copy function allows you to copy an installation (and all the drawing pages it contains). To copy an installation, select:
Manage Installation Copy The following Copy Installation dialog box will appear. In the From: fields, select the installation you wish to copy. First select a project name and a list of installations will appear. You can then select (highlight) the installation that you wish to copy. The Search buttons display a list of projects or installations with descriptions. Copy Installation From: Project:
Installation:
ABACK TOOL Search...
Search... To: Project:
Installation:
TOOL Location:
Set Pages Online Wire Numbers: Add Prefix:
Maintain
Add Suffix: OK
4-40
Cancel
Help...
Page Management
In the To: fields, the current project is automatically selected as the destination. Enter the name that the copied installation is to have. Optionally, a location can also be assigned which will apply to all the pages in the copied installation. The Set Pages Online checkbox determines whether the copied pages will be online or offline. Select the checkbox to make the copied pages online pages. If the pages are offline no error checking or cross referencing will be performed. The Wire Numbers area of the dialog box allows you to set how existing wire numbers in the copied installation will be copied. Because the software considers duplicate wire numbers to be an error, the system will alter any wire numbers (as described below) that already exist in the project receiving the copied installation. The Maintain checkbox determines whether or not wire numbers will be copied. If you do not select the Maintain checkbox, wire numbers will not be copied. If you do select the Maintain checkbox, wire numbers will be copied under the following rules: 1.
If the copied wire numbers do not exist in the destination project, the wire numbers will be maintained without changes.
2.
If copied wire numbers are connected to a signal cross reference connected to an existing wire number, the existing wire number will be used on the copied portion.
3.
If copied wire numbers duplicate existing wire numbers in the destination project, the system will add a question mark (?) to any copied wire number that duplicates an existing wire number. For example, if wire number 100 is copied to a project that already has a wire number 100, the copied wire number will be changed to 100?. (This can be avoided by adding a prefix or suffix to the copied numbers. See the following paragraph.)
The Add Prefix and Add Suffix fields allow you to specify a prefix or suffix that will be added to all copied wire numbers. The added prefix and/or suffix will make the copied wire numbers unique, thus avoiding duplicate numbers (unless the prefix or suffix is already used in the destination project). Select the OK button to copy the installation.
4-41
Page Management
Rename Installation The Manage > Installation > Rename function allows you to assign a new name to an installation. To rename an installation, select:
Manage Installation Rename The following Rename Installation dialog box will appear. Rename Installation From: Project:
Installation:
ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL
Search...
To: Project:
Search...
Installation:
Location:
OK
Cancel
Help...
In the From: fields, select the installation you wish to rename. First select a project name and a list of installations will appear. You can then select (highlight) the installation that you wish to rename. The Search buttons display a list of projects or installations with descriptions. In the To: fields, enter the new installation name. Optionally, a location can also be assigned which will apply to all pages in the renamed installation. Select the OK button to rename the installation. 4-42
Page Management
Navigator Function The Navigator function allows you to move quickly from one drawing page to another by clicking on a device ID, a cross reference or a signal. It is useful when you wish to go from one place where a particular ID is used to another place in the project where the same ID occurs. The Navigator can also jump from a displayed part number to the parts database screen for that part. To activate the Navigator, select:
View Navigator (There is also a navigator button in the toolbar – the one with binoculars on it.) You will then be prompted to “Select attribute,” which means you can now pick an ID or cross reference to initiate a navigator “jump”. You must re–activate the Navigator function for each jump that you make. The following types of navigator jumps are possible: Signal Cross References – By clicking on the signal cross reference you will jump from the current page to the page where the signal continues (or originates). The point of continuation is marked with an inverted triangle. 125
CR124
AH126
126 127 128
Select Signal Cross Reference L1/2.01
L2/2.01
4-43
Page Management
Device Cross References – When clicking on symbol cross reference information, the display will jump to the page containing the symbol to which the cross reference refers. If you select the cross reference at a parent symbol you will jump to the page containing the selected child symbol. Similarly, if you select the cross reference at the child symbol you will jump to the page containing the parent symbol. The parent or child symbol that is jumped to is marked with an inverted triangle. CR112 220
Select Cross Reference To Parent Or Child symbol (JIC)
CR112
112
13
A1
–K1 /3.2
3 –K1 4
13 21
4-44
14
A2
14 22
/2.6
Select Cross Reference To Parent Or Child Symbol (IEC)
Page Management
Schematic/Panel Layout/Wiring Diagram – Clicking on a symbol’s device ID in a schematic page will cause the display to jump to the panel layout page or wiring diagram page containing the same device ID. (Wiring diagrams are generated by the optional Wiring Diagram Generator routine.) If you select the device ID on a panel layout page or wiring diagram page, you will jump to the schematic page containing that device ID.
PB206
WIRE 1381
WIRE
PB206 1
1441
2
PB206
Schematic Drawing
Panel Layout Drawing
Wiring Diagram Drawing
Select Device ID (JIC) WIRE 1381 2 –S1
–S1 10250T101 –51X
1
–S1
Schematic Drawing
Panel Layout Drawing
WIRE 1441
Wiring Diagram Drawing
Select Device ID (IEC)
4-45
Page Management
Terminal Device ID – By selecting a terminal device ID or number, you can jump between the schematic, panel layout, or terminal plan pages containing that ID.
Select Device ID TB2
W21
4
W73
FROM SOURCE
WIRE NO.
TERMINAL STRIP =L1+CAB1–TB2
WIRE NO.
LS101:4
W10
1
W62
LS103:4
W14
2
W66
LS105:4
W18
3
W69
LS107:4
W21
4
W73
Select Terminal Number Schematic (or Panel Layout) Page
Terminal Plan Page JIC Terminal
FROM SOURCE
4
W21
Select Device ID
–X2
WIRE NO.
TERMINAL STRIP =L1+CAB1–X2
WIRE NO.
LS101:4
W21
1
W21
LS103:4
W22
2
W22
LS105:4
W23
3
W23
LS107:4
W24
4
W24
Select Terminal Number
Terminal Plan Page
Schematic (or Panel Layout) Page IEC Terminal
When you select a terminal device ID in the schematic or panel layout pages, the following dialog box will appear, allowing you to select which type of page you wish to go to. (The current page type will be unavailable for selection.) 4-46
Page Management
Select Page Schematic Terminal Plan Panel Layout Wire Diagram Layout OK
Cancel
Help...
When you select the terminal number in the terminal plan page, you will be returned automatically to the schematic page. Part Number – Another function of the Navigator is to jump from a displayed part number to the Parts Database window. When part numbers are displayed on the schematic screen, you can activate the Navigator, select a part number, and the parts database will be displayed with the complete information for that part.
Select Displayed Part Number
PB118 800T–B6D2 118 JIC Example
–S1 10250T10151X
IEC Example
Navigator Search – You can also use the Navigator to search for and go to any device ID or function text in the current project. To use it, first select the Navigator function and then click in any empty area of the drawing screen. The following Navigator dialog box will appear.
4-47
Page Management
Navigator Installation:
Search...
Location:
Search...
Device ID:
Search...
Function Text:
Search... OK
Cancel
Help...
If you wish to narrow your choices down to a specific installation and location, make entries in the Installation and Location fields. Use the Search button next to each field to display a list of installations or locations from which you can pick. (You must select an installation before you can select a location.) When you select the Search button for Device ID, the following Select Device dialog box will appear, listing the device IDs that currently exist. Select Device
Installation LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1
Location BAY1 BAY1 BAY1 BAY1 BAY2 BAY2 BAY3 BAY3 BAY3 CAB1 CAB1
Device ID MTR110 TB1 MTR117 TB1 MTR124 TB1 IAD247 TB CR2 CR164 CR166
Device Type Function Text CONVEYOR PUMP MOTO
OK Cancel Help
PRESS MOT 1771-IAD 22 22 40
Select the desired device ID followed by the OK button. The selected ID will appear in the Navigator dialog box. Select OK in the Navigator dialog box to display the page containing the selected device ID.
4-48
Page Management
Page Count In some cases, after copying or moving pages, the software’s internal page count for a given project will need to be updated. Use the Manage > Project > Page Count function. 1.
Select the following pull–down menu:
Manage Project Page Count 2.
The Select: Project dialog box will appear. Select (highlight) the desired project name(s).
3.
Select the OK button. The project(s) will be internally updated.
4.
Select the following pull–down menu:
Manage Project Page Count 5.
Select the Search button. A list of all the projects with page counts will appear.
6.
Select the OK button. The Select: Project dialog box will appear.
7.
Select the Cancel button. The Select: Project dialog box will close.
4-49
Page Management
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
4-50
Schematic Elements
5 Schematic Elements This section covers schematic elements within RSWireTM Designer: the various lines, symbols, macros, texts, and other items that make up a drawing. Included are sections on the various types of elements as well as sections on placing, deleting, copying, and moving the schematic elements. See Section 6 for information on how to create custom schematic elements. The following sections are provided:
Wire/Line Drawing Wires Drawing Lines Symbol Select Symbol Settings Parent and Child Symbols Macro Select Entering Text Text Settings Invisible Text Foreign Language Text Box Field Circles and Arcs Signal Cross Reference Wire Numbers Part Numbers Dimensions Text File on Drawing
5-1
Schematic Elements
5-2
Edit Schematic Elements Edit Menu Modify Menu Replace Symbol Clear Page Replace Device IDs Replace Text Replace Symbol Text Edit Part Number Replace Part Number Globally Deleting Wire Number I/O Device ID Linetype Properties Layers List Object Function (for drawing elements)
Schematic Elements
Wire/Line RSWire is capable of creating two types of lines: wires and drawing lines. Wires – Wires are lines that have logical properties. Wires must be used to connect the symbols in schematic drawings. Wires will break automatically at symbol connection points. Wires allow RSWire to recognize the connections between symbols and perform other functions such as automatic wire numbering. Drawing Lines – Drawing lines are simple graphic lines with no logical properties. They should only be used for borders or for drawing when you create a new symbol. They should not be used to represent wires. Select the Draw > Wire function when you wish to create wires on the drawing screen. (A drawing page must be active before selecting this function.) Select the Draw > Graphic > Line function to create drawing lines.
Wires Use the Draw > Wire function to draw wires, pipes or other elements that connect the symbols on a drawing. Wires are necessary for RSWire to recognize the from/to connections between the symbols. When wires are drawn over symbols (or when symbols are placed on a wire), the line is broken automatically at the symbol connection points. When two wires are connected, the connection points are drawn automatically. Important
You must draw wires using the Wire functions in order for RSWire to recognize connections and perform other automatic functions. Drawing lines will not work for this purpose.
Draw Wire Continuous Center Dashed 3 Phase 90 Degree Down 90 Degree Up Multiline Repeat Last
5-3
Schematic Elements
The following wire drawing functions are available: The Continuous function is used when you wish to create single wire segments or two or more connected wire segments. The Center and Dashed functions create dash–dot and dashed wires, respectively. The 3 Phase function allows automatic drawing of three parallel wires. With the 90 Degree Down and 90 Degree Up functions, you can connect two points with wire segments at a 90 degree angle in one step. The angle is either above or below the vertical wire. The Multiline function allows multiple parallel wires to be drawn in a single step. Multilines can have various combinations of solid, dashed and dotted lines in various colors. These are called multiline styles. You can select and customize multiline styles using the Format > Multiline Style function. See page 6-100. The Repeat Last function allows you to draw a wire parallel to the previously drawn wire. Only the end point needs to be entered. For horizontal wires the X coordinate is the same as for the previous wire, for vertical wires the Y coordinate is the same as for the previous wire. To Draw a Single Wire: Select the Draw > Wire > Continuous function. 1.
Locate the starting point of the wire by clicking the left mouse button.
2.
Click on end point with the left mouse button.
3.
Click the right mouse button to complete the wire.
Click On Start And End Points 117 PB118
PB118.1
CR118
118 119
Connection Points (Drawn Automatically)
Symbol Connection Points (Wire Broken Automatically)
JIC Single Wires
5-4
Schematic Elements
Click On Start Point 21 13
–S5
–K1
/.6
22 14
21
21 –S6
–S4
22
22
3 –H4
–K1 4
13 21
Click On End Point
14 22
/.4
IEC Single Wires
Adjusting Wire Length – You can extend an existing parallel wire by drawing another line and connecting it to the first. The system will treat the two wires as a single wire. You can also adjust wire length by stretching the wire’s endpoint (Modify > Stretch function). Note
If a wire is drawn over one or more symbols, the wire will automatically break between symbols. Wire/Line Coordinates Display – While wires and lines are being drawn, x–y coordinates of the line endpoint are displayed on the status line below the drawing area.
5-5
Schematic Elements
To Draw 3–Phase Wires: Use the Draw > Wire > 3 Phase function to automatically draw 3 parallel wires spaced one grid unit apart. 3–phase wires are used for power circuit diagrams. Select the Draw > Wire > 3 Phase function. 1.
Locate starting point of wires by clicking left mouse button.
2.
Click the left mouse button again on the desired end point. 3–Phase Drawing Example: 101
Wire Starting Point
102 T1
103
M1
M
PUMP 5 HP 1000 RPM
T2
104
7.2 AMP
T3
105
Wire End Point
106 107
Wire Starting Point 101
Wire End Point
102
T1
M
103 104
3–Phase Connections 105 (Drawn Automatically) 106 107
JIC 3–Phase Wires
5-6
M1
PUMP 5 HP
T2
1000 RPM
T3
7.2 AMP
Schematic Elements
Wire Starting Point
Wire End Point
3–Phase Connections (Drawn Automatically)
Wire End Point
Wire Starting Point U
–M1
V
W
PE
U
M 3~
–M1
V
PE
M 3~
PUMP
PUMP
5 HP
5 HP 7.2 AMP
7.2 AMP 1000 RPM
W
1000 RPM
IEC 3–Phase Wires
Note
The software automatically connects two intersecting sets of 3 phase wires. However, you must draw the second set of wires into the first set. See the above examples.
5-7
Schematic Elements
To Draw Repeat Wires: Use the Repeat Last function to repeatedly draw parallel wires. Once a wire is drawn, only the end points of subsequent wires need to be defined. For horizontal wires the X coordinate is the same as for the previous wire, for vertical wires the Y coordinate is the same as for the previous wires. Wires or drawing lines can be drawn using the Repeat option. Select the Draw > Wire > Repeat Last option.
Note
1.
Draw the first wire (using the Draw > Wire > Continuous function).
2.
Select the Draw > Wire > Repeat Last option.
3.
Click on end points of all subsequent parallel wires.
The starting points for wires are along the x or y axis of the starting point of the first wire. Repeat Wires Example: Y–AXIS
First Wire Starting Point
End Point Click Here To Draw Second Wire Click Here To Draw Third Wire
Click Here To Draw Fourth Wire
To Draw Continuous Wires or Lines: The Continuous function allows you to draw multiple, connected wire segments. Select the Draw > Wire > Continuous function.
5-8
1.
Locate starting point of the first wire by clicking the left mouse button.
2.
Click on end point of first wire with the left mouse button.
3.
Create second and all subsequent lines by clicking on the destination point of each wire segment with the left mouse button.
Schematic Elements
4.
Complete the last segment by clicking the right mouse button (or pressing the <Enter> key).
Step 1
First Segment
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
To Draw Wires Using 90 Degree Up / Down: Use the Draw > Wire > 90 Degree Up and 90 Degree Down options to draw right angles automatically. This allows a pair of wires to be drawn in one operation. See examples below for procedure. “90 Degree Up” means the angle is above the diagonal. “90 Degree Down” places the angle below the diagonal. 90 Degree Up Example:
3) Angle Drawn Automatically
1) Click On Start Point 2) Click On End Point
90 Degree Down Example:
1) Click On Start Point
2) Click on End Point 3) Angle Drawn Automatically
5-9
Schematic Elements
Drawing Lines Use the Draw > Graphic > Line function to create drawing lines. Note
Unlike wires, RSWire does not recognize drawing lines as having any electrical or connective properties. Drawing lines are used for mechanical layouts, device layouts, assembly layouts, borders, etc. Connection points are not automatically drawn.
Draw Graphic Line Polyline The following line drawing functions are available: The Single function allows a single graphic line segment to be drawn by defining a start and end point with the left mouse button. You can create multiple, connected line segments in a manner similar to the continuous wire drawing function. Click the right mouse button to complete the line. The Polyline function activates the AutoCAD Polyline function.
5-10
Schematic Elements
Symbol Select There are two functions for selecting symbols located under the Insert menu.
Insert Select Icon Symbol By Name Select Icon allows you to select symbols by picking a graphical representation of the symbol. Symbol By Name allows you to select symbols by entering the symbol name. Both options display the following symbol selection dialog box.
5-11
Schematic Elements
Select Icon On the lower left side of the dialog box is a list of symbol groups. Selecting one of these groups displays graphical images of the symbols in the selected group. Individual symbols can be selected by pointing and clicking on the icons. When you place the cursor on one of the icons, a pop–up symbol description tag will appear. Pull–down menus are provided in the select icon window. The Edit menu provides a function to delete symbol groups from the list (caution: this function will delete the WMF file for the symbol group) and a function to refresh the display. The Settings menu gives access to the symbol and macro setting dialog boxes, and to a background color function for the Select Icon window. The Exit menu will close the window. The user can create his or her own symbol groups for use in the Select Icon mode. The procedure for creating these groups is described in an appendix. See page C-1. Symbol by Name If you know the symbol name, you can enter it in the Name field of the Select Icon dialog box and select OK. Otherwise, wildcard searches can be made by making entries containing asterisks (*) in the Name or Description fields. For example, enter *PUSHBUTTON* in the Description field to search for any symbols with the word PUSHBUTTON in the description. If any symbols matching the search string are found they are displayed on screen in a list which can be selected from by pointing and clicking. You can also select the Search button to see a list of all the symbols in the current project’s symbol catalogs. As shown in the following figure, this Symbol Database dialog includes the symbols’ Catalog, Name, Type and Description. By clicking on one of these column headings you can determine how the listed symbols are sorted. In the Path field you can select which catalogs are displayed. The available selections are those listed in the catalog path line of the ecs.cfg file in the Rs\Work directory.
5-12
Schematic Elements
Symbol Database
All Catalogs
Path:
Catalog JIC JIC JIC JIC JIC JIC JIC JIC
Name CRNO CRNC CRC CR CP COS CONN CI
OK
Type PS2 PS2 PS2 PS1 CP1 GS1 TS5 GS1
Description NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACT CONTROL RELAY FORM C CON CONTROL RELAY COIL NECESSARY SYMBOL FOR LIB CABLE-OPERATED (EMERG.) CHILD PIN CONNECTOR CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER 3PHAS
Symbol Settings Also displayed in the Select Icon dialog box under Symbol Settings are the current Angle, Scale, and Mirror settings. If you wish to change these settings, click inside the desired field. For more on these symbol settings, see page 5-23. Placing a Symbol Once a symbol is selected, its outline is visible on the drawing screen at the cursor location. Position the symbol by pointing the cursor at the desired location and pressing the left mouse button. The symbol is then placed in the diagram. The reference point of the symbol will snap to the nearest grid line. If the symbol is placed on a wire, the wire will break automatically at the symbol connection points. If a symbol is placed first and a wire is drawn over the symbol, the wire will also break automatically. The symbol will be rotated automatically to match the horizontal or vertical alignment of a wire. (For this to occur, symbol rotation must be set to 0 degrees and the symbol reference point must be on the wire. Certain 3–phase symbols will not be rotated automatically.) Note
No more than one wire should be connected to a single symbol connection point.
5-13
Schematic Elements
PB118
PB118
Wrong
Right
Auto Device ID Assignment Once the symbol is placed, the Device ID Assignment dialog box appears. You can accept the prompted device ID, or you can type a different ID in the fields provided. A device ID can have up to 14 characters. (The drop–down list beside the Device ID field will show all the device IDs that have been assigned in the current work session.) The format of the device ID can consist of sequential numbers or letters, in combination with page and/or line numbers. The device ID format is selected in the Project Parameters dialog box when the project is created (see page 3-9). The prompted device ID is the lowest available ID. Device ID Assignment Installation:
Search...
Location:
Search...
Device ID:
Search Device ID
Suppress Device ID
Duplicate Device ID
Multiple Placement
Part Number Assigned Part No./Select to Delete
Search... Addit.Part Number
OK
5-14
Cancel
Help...
Schematic Elements
Note
Do not use any of the following reserved characters in the device ID that you enter: # = + – ^ / : ~.@ (includes spaces and periods). These characters are used for various purposes by the software and may cause unexpected results if entered in the device ID. (You can use dashes if you intend to use the Nested Device IDs function. See page 7-44.) If you wish the device ID to be hidden on the screen and on plots of the drawing, select the Suppress Device ID checkbox. The device ID will still be assigned to the symbol; it will simply not be shown. Selecting the Duplicate Device ID checkbox allows you to place two symbols with the same device ID (ordinarily, the software’s error checking prevents duplicate IDs). The two symbols must belong to the GS1 symbol group. You must select the Duplicate Device ID checkbox when placing both symbols. Cross referencing will appear at both symbols indicating the page and line number where the other symbol appears. If you place more than two symbols with the same ID using this method, some of the symbols will have two cross references, one indicating the related symbol that comes before it and one indicating the symbol that comes after it (in page/line order). If you wish to avoid duplicate part numbers, you should only assign a part number to one of the symbols. The Multiple Placement checkbox applies only when placing a series of similar symbols (allows automatic placement on consecutive lines). See page 5-19. The Search Device ID button is active when parent or child symbols are placed (see page 5-25 for more on parent and child symbols). It allows you to search for existing device IDs of a given type (see page 5-20). To assign a part number to a symbol, select the Search button in the Device ID Assignment dialog box. This will display a list of part numbers in the Assign Part Number screen. You can select one or more of the displayed part numbers. See page 5-79 for more information on the Assign Part Number screen. If you wish to assign additional part numbers to the same symbol you can simply use the Search button again to return to the Assign Part Number screen. Or, if you know the part number, you can type the additional part number in the the Additional Part Number field and select the Addit. Part Number button. Selected part numbers for the current device ID are listed in the Assigned Part No./Select to Delete field. To delete (un–assign) part numbers that have already been assigned simply click on the part number you wish to delete. Select the OK button to accept the device ID and any part numbers that have been selected. This ID will be placed on the symbol in the drawing.
5-15
Schematic Elements
If the symbol has symbol text associated with it, the Symbol Text dialog box will appear displaying the text. Symbol text is functional attribute text that is associated with a specific symbol (rather than ordinary text which can be placed anywhere in a drawing). If a symbol text entry is required, the text will be displayed as a “?”. Enter the desired symbol text and select OK. Symbol Symbol Text: Full load current:
? AMP
Attributes Only Next
Note
Previous
OK
Cancel
Help...
Some symbols have fixed symbol text which does not require an entry. If you only wish to have the “?” symbol text displayed in the Symbol Text dialog box, select the Attributes Only checkbox in the symbol text dialog box. This reduces the chance that someone might make an entry in the wrong text field. The system will check for duplicate device IDs unless the Online function is turned off for the page. The online function is selected when the page is created by activating the Online checkbox in the New Page dialog box (see page 4-14). You can activate the Online function for an existing page through the Manage > Page > Modify function. If you attempt to assign a duplicate device ID (when the Online function is active), the message “Device ID already exists” is displayed on the screen along with the ID and page/line location of the existing symbol. After selecting the OK button, the next available device ID will be displayed.
5-16
Schematic Elements
Parent Symbols – If the symbol you are placing is a “parent” symbol (one that may have associated contacts elsewhere in the diagram such as a relay), you will also be prompted to select a “Device Type.” This device type is a definition that associates a parent symbol, one or more child symbols, and a cross reference symbol. By selecting a device type you tell the software how many child symbols are to be associated with this parent symbol and which cross reference symbol to place next to the parent. (See page 5-25 for more on parent and child symbols.) The following Device Type dialog box will appear. Device Type Device Type: Description: OK
Search...
Cancel
Help...
Enter the desired device type in the Device Type field. The drop–down list in this field will show all the device types that have been assigned in the current work session. Select the Search button to display a list of device names and descriptions that are associated with the symbol type you are currently placing. After you enter the device type, the Connection Points dialog box is displayed which lists the connection point designations for the parent symbol and its associated child symbols. Connection Points Select Connection Points Device ID: =LINE1+EN1–CR108 Device:
Installation
22
Pg.Line
Symbol CR CRNO CRNO CRNC CRNC
Modification Field
Connection Points A1 A2 13 14 23 24 31 32 11 12 41 42 21 22
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 OK
Cancel
Help
5-17
Schematic Elements
This dialog box displays the connection point designations for the parent symbol and each child symbol. If desired, you can select the parent symbol line (“CR A1 A2” in the example above) to display the connection point designations in the modification field. These designations can be reversed if desired by entering the designations in reverse order (“A2 A1”). The designations will then appear on the opposite sides of the symbol. Select the OK button to place the parent symbol in the drawing. A cross reference box will appear next to the parent symbol which will be automatically updated as each child symbol is placed. Child Symbols – When placing a child symbol (such as a relay contact) the software will prompt a device ID containing a “?”. For example, “CR?”. You must enter the same device ID as the parent symbol to allow the software to recognize the relation between the parent and child symbol. After entering the child symbol device ID, the same Connection Points dialog box shown for the parent symbol will be displayed. The connection point designations of the first available child symbol of the selected type (CRNO or CRNC) will be displayed in the modification field. If desired, you can select a different child symbol of the same type if you prefer that these connection designations be assigned to the symbol you are currently placing (for example, 23 and 24 rather than 13 and 14). You can also enter the connection designations in reverse order in the modification field. Select the OK button to place the symbol in the drawing. If you select the wrong child symbol type or enter connection designations that were not defined for this symbol the error message “Connection point description not possible” will be displayed. As each child symbol is placed, its position (page and line number) will be automatically placed in the cross reference box beside the parent symbol.
5-18
Schematic Elements
Multiple Placement of Symbols When the Multiple Placement checkbox in the Device ID Assignment dialog box is enabled you can automatically place symbols on parallel wires. Device ID Assignment Installation:
Search...
Location:
Search...
Device ID:
Search Device ID
Suppress Device ID
Duplicate Device ID
Multiple Placement
Part Number Search...
Assigned Part No./Select to Delete
Multiple Placement checkbox
Addit.Part Number
Cancel
OK
Help...
To place multiple symbols use the following steps: 1.
Select a symbol (such as X1) using the Insert > Select Icon or Insert > Symbol By Name function.
2.
Place the symbol on the first wire of the range of wires to be included.
3.
The Device ID Assignment dialog box will appear (see above). Enter the desired device ID in the Device ID field.
4.
Select the Multiple Placement checkbox.
5.
Select the OK button to continue. The symbol will appear on the wire.
6.
Press the <Esc> key to end the Insert Symbol function.
5-19
Schematic Elements
7.
Select the last wire in the range of wires by pointing the cursor and clicking on the desired terminal position (do not select a symbol draw function again). If terminal symbols are being placed, consecutively numbered terminals will appear on all wires between the first and last selected wires. For non–terminal symbols, a device ID will be prompted for the symbol on each wire. –TB4
1
Place First Symbol Here
2 3
Click On Last Line
Terminals 2 And 3 Placed Are Numbered Automatically
Note
For terminal symbols: when grid lines are visible between wires, the device ID of the terminal will be displayed on all terminal symbols placed with the Multiple Placement function. When no grid line is displayed between wires then the function will automatically suppress the device ID of all multiple terminal symbols except the first (as shown above).
Search Device ID Related parent and child symbols share the same device ID. Therefore, when placing a parent or child symbol it is useful to know which device IDs have already been used. For this purpose, a Search Device ID button is provided in the Device ID Assignment dialog box. This button is only active when a parent or child symbol is being placed.
5-20
Schematic Elements
Device ID Assignment Installation:
Search...
Location:
Search...
Device ID:
Search Device ID
Suppress Device ID
Duplicate Device ID
Multiple Placement
Part Number Search...
Assigned Part No./Select to Delete
Search Device ID Button
Addit.Part Number
Help...
Cancel
OK
When you select the Search Device ID button, the following Search Device ID dialog box will appear. Search Device ID Installation: Location: Device ID: Function Text: OK
Cancel
Help...
The Device ID field will contain a wildcard string based on the symbol that is currently being placed. This determines what kind of device IDs will be included in the search. You can also narrow the search by entering installation and location names in the Installation and Location fields. In addition the Function Text field allows your search to be based on existing function text. 5-21
Schematic Elements
When you select the OK button, all existing device IDs that match the search parameters will be displayed along with their installation, location, device type, and function text. This search will cover the entire project.
If desired, you can pick one of these device IDs and it will appear in the Device ID Assignment dialog box to be assigned to the symbol you are currently placing. If this ID cannot be used because the parent symbol already exists or because all the child symbols have been assigned, an error message will appear when you place the symbol.
5-22
Schematic Elements
Symbol Settings Various settings can be made that govern how the symbol appears on the drawing. In general, these settings remain in effect until a different setting is made. Symbol Scale, Rotation, and Mirroring – Use the Symbol Settings function to set symbol scale, rotation and mirroring. (These settings do not affect symbols that already exist on a drawing, only those symbols placed after the setting is made.) First, right click on the desired symbol, then, from the pop–up menu, select:
Block Settings Symbol Settings The following Symbol dialog box will be displayed. Symbol Scale Factor
Rotate
1.000
0
2.000
45
5.000
60
0.500
90
0.250
180
Mirror None x–axis y–axis
Current Values 1.000 OK
Note
0 Cancel
Help...
Save
You can also make these settings in the Select Icon dialog box when placing symbols. See page 5-13. Scaling and rotation values can be selected from the Scale Factor and Rotate fields by pointing and clicking. The currently selected values appear in the Current Values fields. The Scale values allow the symbol to be reduced (0.500) or enlarged (2.000). Rotate values allow rotation of the symbol in degrees. If desired, you can enter other scale and rotation values in the fields (including negative rotation values) and then select them. Use the Save button to store any values you enter in the selection fields for future work sessions.
5-23
Schematic Elements
Note
When scaling symbols with the AutoCAD R14 Add–on version of the software, do not use a scale that results in symbol connection points being spaced at a distance that involves units smaller than one thousandth of an inch (.001 inch). The software cannot correctly position such symbols on a grid and will not be able to recognize connections. The AutoCAD 2000 Add–on version of the software provides an additional decimal place of precision (.0001 inch). The Mirror radio buttons allow the symbol to be mirrored on the X or Y axis. Select None for no mirroring (normal orientation).
None – No Mirroring
X Axis Mirroring
Y Axis Mirroring
Other Symbol Settings: Suppressing Device ID Sign (–) – Use the Tools > Project Settings function, Device ID Style tab to display the Device ID Style dialog box. Then turn on the Suppress Device ID Sign checkbox to remove the leading “–” from the device ID on the schematic drawing.
5-24
Schematic Elements
Parent and Child Symbols Certain symbols can have a “parent” or “child” relationship with other symbols in a schematic. Examples include relays and motor starters (parent) which have related contacts (child) appearing throughout a drawing. If child symbols are given the same device ID as the parent, the system can automatically provide cross referencing.
Parent Symbol CR112 114
(Line 112) Cross Reference To Child Child Symbol
CR112
(Line 114)
Cross Reference To Parent 112
JIC Cross Reference
21 –K1
/.6
22 A1
Parent Symbol
A2
Cross Reference To Parent
3
Child Symbol –K1
4
13 21
14 22
/.4
Cross Reference To Child IEC Cross Reference
You may wonder how the system knows how many children a parent symbol has. This is accomplished with a “Device Type” definition that establishes the type and number of child symbols that are associated with the parent and which cross reference symbol to place next to the parent symbol.
5-25
Schematic Elements
When you place a parent symbol on a drawing, the software will ask what its device type is. Once the system knows the device name, it can also perform error–checking functions by keeping track of how many of the available child symbols have been used. The same symbol types can be assigned to different devices. For example, you can use the CR parent symbol with various device types to represent relays with different combinations of normally open and normally closed contacts. Or, you can create devices for a relay and a motor starter that both use the same cross reference symbol. A number of device type definitions are provided with RSWire (you can list them with the Reports > Libraries > Device Type Full function), or the user can create custom device definitions. The example above could use the standard device type named “20.” This device consists of a parent relay with two normally open and no normally closed contact children. Put simply, the device type definition contains the following information: Device Name: 20 Parent Symbol Name: CR Cross Reference Symbol Name: Q20 Child Symbol: CRNO Child Symbol: CRNO
5-26
Schematic Elements
Macro Select A macro is a collection of symbols and other elements that can be placed on a drawing in one step. A number of macros are provided with RSWire. You can also create your own macros. See page 6-81 for instructions on creating a macro. To select a macro, use one of these functions.
Insert Select Icon Macro By Name Selecting Insert > Select Icon function allows you to select pictorial representations (icons) of macros. Selecting Insert > Macro By Name function allows macro selection by entering the macro name. Both options display the following Select Icon dialog box.
5-27
Schematic Elements
To select macros by graphical icon, select one of the macro groups from the list in the lower left side of the dialog box. Then select one of the displayed macros by pointing and clicking on the icons. The macro groups provided with the software begin with the word “MACRO_”. To select macros by name, first select the Macro radio button in the Select Icon dialog box. Then enter the name in the Macro Name field and select OK. Otherwise, wildcard searches can be made by making entries containing asterisks (*) in the Name or Description fields and selecting the Search button. For example, enter *MOTOR* in the Description field to search for any macros with the word MOTOR in the description. If any macros matching the search string are found, they are displayed on screen in a list which can be selected from by pointing and clicking.
5-28
Schematic Elements
In the Macro Settings area of the Select Icon dialog box, there is a field labeled Maintain Device IDs as Created. You can click inside this field to select between “Yes” and “No” values. If you select “Yes,” the device IDs of any symbols in the macro will not be automatically updated to reflect their new position (however you will still be prompted with the original device ID). This is useful when using a macro (such as for L1 and L2 lines) that will always have the same device IDs. Also displayed in the Select Icon dialog box under Macro Settings are the current Rotate and Scale settings. If you wish to change these settings, click in the desired field and enter a value. These settings do not affect macros that already exist on a drawing, only those macros placed after the setting is made. Scale and rotation values are selected similar to symbol scaling and rotation (see page 5-23). No mirroring is possible with macros. Placing a Macro Once a macro is selected, its outline is visible on the drawing screen at the cursor location. Position the macro by pointing the screen cursor at the desired location and pressing the left mouse button. The macro is then placed in the diagram and the following Device ID Assignment dialog box appears. Device ID Assignment Installation:
Search...
Location:
Search...
Device ID:
Search Device ID
Suppress Device ID
Duplicate Device ID
Part Number Search...
Assigned Part No./Select to Delete
Addit.Part Number
OK
Accept All
Cancel
Help...
5-29
Schematic Elements
Device ID – The device IDs of the symbols within the macro are prompted one by one in the Device ID Assignment dialog box. The prompted IDs will reflect the new position of the symbols unless you selected the Maintain Device IDs as Created checkbox when the macro was selected. Select the Suppress Device ID checkbox if you wish the device ID to be hidden on the screen and on plots of the drawing. The device ID will still be assigned to the symbol; it simply will not be shown. Selecting the Duplicate Device ID checkbox allows you to place two symbols with the same device ID (ordinarily, the software’s error checking prevents duplicate IDs). The two symbols must belong to the GS1 symbol group. You must select the Duplicate Device ID checkbox when placing both symbols. Cross referencing will appear at both symbols indicating the page and line number where the other symbol appears. If you wish to avoid duplicate part numbers, you should only assign a part number to one of the symbols. Selecting the Accept All button causes all the default device IDs to be accepted and entered in one step. You will not be prompted for symbol text. You can assign part numbers to each symbol with the Search button. This will display the Assign Part Number dialog box for part selection. See page 5-79. Any special symbol text (such as Amp and horsepower values) will also be prompted. The example dialog box shows the prompt for a text requiring an Amp value. Simply replace the “?” with the desired value and select OK. Values entered here can be changed with the Modify > Symbol function. Symbol Symbol Text: Full load current:
? AMP
Attributes Only Next
Previous
OK
Cancel
Help...
Macro Wire Numbers – If wire numbers were stored as part of the macro, these will appear when the macro is placed. If the macro’s wire numbers are connected to or duplicate existing wire numbers in the project, the existing wire numbers will take precedence. See page 6-81 for more information. 5-30
Schematic Elements
Entering Text Although RSWire automatically enters device IDs and other descriptive labels when placing symbols, the user may wish to include additional text to further describe various drawing elements. Text can be entered on a drawing by selecting the Draw > Text function.
Draw Text Entering Text – To enter text on a drawing, first select the Draw > Text function. The following Text dialog box will appear. Text Text
Function Text Language Text Number:
Text:
Search...
Height:
0.1500
Select...
Position X:
0.0000
Angle:
0
Select...
Position Y:
0.0000
Slant:
0
Select...
Attribute Number:
Ratio:
0.0000
Select...
Label Origin:
5
Select...
Color:
0
Select...
Object Default Settings Disable Settings
Font: OK
Cancel
Help...
In the Text field, enter the desired text. Text strings up to 256 characters in length can be entered (the text will scroll within the field).
5-31
Schematic Elements
Multi–line text – If you wish to enter multi–line text, enter a “^” character to cause a line break. For example, the entry “EMERGENCY^STOP” will be displayed as: EMERGENCY STOP The Function Text checkbox allows you to assign the text from the Text Input field as function text to be associated with a particular device ID in the Master List. When this checkbox is selected and you select OK to close the Text dialog box, you will be prompted to “Select objects” on the drawing screen. Select the desired symbol and press <Enter>. The software will prompt you to “Define point.” Select a point near the symbol. The text that was entered in the Text Input field will appear here. This text will then be associated with the symbol’s device ID when a Master List is generated. For parent/child symbols, assign the function text to the parent symbol. If you have used the Duplicate Device ID checkbox in the Device ID Assignment dialog box to allow a duplicate device ID, you should assign function text to only one of the two symbols. If you wish to place a text string more than once, you can select the down arrow button next to the Text field to see a drop–down list of text strings that have been entered in the current work session. You can select from this list. Use the Language Text fields to search for entries from the RSWire language text lists (see page 5-41). Enter either the text number in the Number field or the text itself in the Text field (wildcard searches are permitted) and select the Search button. Any text matching the entered value will be displayed and can be selected by pointing and clicking. The list that is accessed will be the number 1 language selected when the project was created. Note
If you wish to enter a language text number directly in the Text Input field, the text number must be preceded by a tilde (~) character. The Position X and Position Y fields indicate the coordinates of the last text to be entered, and by making an entry you can determine the coordinates of the next text to be entered. The Attribute Number field is used when creating a new symbol to define a sequence of text attributes. When you are not in the symbol–create mode, the field is not accessible. See page 6-14 for more information. The remainder of the dialog box consists of fields and buttons that allow various text parameters to be set. These are described in the following subsection, Text Settings.
5-32
Schematic Elements
Selecting the Object Default Settings checkbox will change the text parameters to match the settings listed in the Object Defaults tab in the Project Settings dialog box under Tools > Project Settings. If this checkbox is not selected, the text parameters can be changed. The Disable Settings checkbox will remove the text parameter fields and buttons (Height, Angle, Slant, etc.) from the Text dialog box on subsequent text entries. The figure below shows how this reduced Text dialog box will appear. The parameters can be returned by selecting an Enable Settings checkbox which will then be present. Text Text
Function Text Position X:
23.5000
Position Y: 15.0000
Attribute No.
Language Text Number:
Search...
Text:
Enable Settings OK
Cancel
Help...
To place the text, select the OK button. If you have not entered coordinates in the dialog box, the system will prompt, “Define point or select parameter” allowing you to choose a point for placing text on the drawing.
5-33
Schematic Elements
Text Settings When you select the Draw > Text function, the Text dialog box that appears contains fields for various text parameters. Parameters are entered with the Select buttons that list available values for these parameters and allow selections to be made. The Disable Settings checkbox will remove the text parameter fields (Height, Angle, Slant, etc.) from the Text dialog box on subsequent text entries. The parameters can be returned by selecting an Enable Settings checkbox which will then be present. The following parameters are available: Height – This option allows you to set the height of the text characters. When you select the Choice button, the following Height dialog box appears. Height Text Height Text Height 1:
0.1000
Text Height 2:
0.1250
Text Height 3:
0.2500
Text Height 4:
0.5000
Text Height 5:
0.7500
Text Height 6:
1.0000
Text Height 7:
0.2500
Last Selection: OK
Note
0.250 Cancel
Help...
Save
Values shown in inches. This dialog box provides seven different height values which can be selected. If desired, you can also enter new values in these fields (use the Save button to save these newly entered value so they will be available in future work sessions). To select a value, point and click so that the cursor appears in the desired field. Then select the OK button. The currently selected value is displayed in the Last Selection field.
5-34
Schematic Elements
Angle – This option sets the angle at which text strings will appear on the drawing. Selecting Select displays the following Angle dialog box. Angle Text Angle Text Angle 1:
0
Text Angle 2:
90
Text Angle 3:
–90
Text Angle 4:
180
Text Angle 5:
0
Last Selection: OK
0 Cancel
Help...
Save
Five angle values (in degrees) are available for selection. If desired, you can also enter new values in these fields (use the Save button to save any newly entered values so they will be available in future work sessions). To select a value, point and click so that the cursor appears in the desired field. Then select the OK button. The currently selected value is displayed in the Last Selection field.
5-35
Schematic Elements
Slant – This option selects the text slant – the angle that individual characters will have. Selecting Select displays the following Slant dialog box. Slant Text Slant Text Slant 1:
0
Text Slant 2:
15
Text Slant 3:
30
Text Slant 4:
0
Last Selection: OK
0 Cancel
Help...
Save
Four slant values (in degrees) are available for selection. If desired you can also enter new values in these fields (use the Save button to save any newly entered values so they will be available in future work sessions). To select a value, point and click so that the cursor appears in the desired field. Then select the OK button. The currently selected value is displayed in the Last Selection field.
5-36
Schematic Elements
Ratio – This option allows selection of a width–to–height ratio for text characters. For example, a ratio value of 4 would produce characters 4 times wider than their height. Selecting Select displays the following Ratio dialog box. Ratio Text Ratio Text Ratio 1:
1.0000
Text Ratio 2:
0.0000
Text Ratio 3:
0.0000
Text Ratio 4:
0.0000
Text Ratio 5:
0.0000
Last Selection: OK
Ratio 0.000
Cancel
Help...
Save
Five ratio values are available for selection. If desired, you can enter new values in these fields (use the Save button to save any newly entered values so they will be available in future work sessions). To select a value, point and click so that the cursor appears in the desired field. Then select the OK button. The currently selected value is displayed in the Last Selection field.
5-37
Schematic Elements
Label Origin – This option allows you to set where the text will appear in relation to the reference point you select on the drawing. When you select Select, the following Label Origin dialog box will be displayed. Label Origin 7 Top Left
8 Top Center
9 Top Right
4 Middle Left
5 Middle Center
6 Middle Right
1 Bottom Left
2 Bottom Center
3 Bottom Right
10 Baseline Left
11 Baseline Center
12 Baseline Right
Last Selection: OK
5 Cancel
Help...
Save
The current label origin is shown in the Last Selection field. Select the desired label origin by pointing and clicking on the appropriate button. Then select the OK button. Text will be placed in relation to the origin point as shown in the following illustration. Top Left:
TEXT
Top Center:
TEXT
Top Right:
TEXT
Middle Left:
TEXT
Middle Center:
TEXT
Middle Right:
TEXT
Baseline Left:
TEXT
Baseline Center:
TEXT
Baseline Right:
TEXT
Bottom Left:
TEXT
Bottom Center:
TEXT
Bottom Right:
TEXT
5-38
Schematic Elements
Color – This parameter sets the color of the text. When you select the Select button, the following Select Color dialog box appears. Select Color Standard Colors
Gray Shades
Logical Colors BYLAYER
BYBLOCK
Full Color Palette
Color: OK
BYBLOCK Cancel
Help...
Select a color either from the Standard Colors or the Full Color Palette areas. The selected color is indicated by a square to the right of the Color: field. The BYLAYER and BYBLOCK buttons allow selection of these two methods of coloring. The current selection is indicated in the Color field. Font – This field indicates the currently selected font. To set the text font, use the Format > Text Style function and select one of the displayed fonts.
5-39
Schematic Elements
Invisible Text It is possible to hide all or part of a text string on a drawing by beginning and ending the text to be hidden with an “@” character. The text is otherwise entered as normal using the Draw > Text function. Example: Text as entered: Text as it appears on drawing:
Main @Class B@Motor Main Motor
The hidden text will be visible only when editing the text using the Modify > Text function. Note
5-40
Invisible text can also be used in symbol (function) text and in wire number prefixes.
Schematic Elements
Foreign Language Text RSWire has the capability to automatically display selected text words and phrases in multiple languages. RSWire includes a file containing lists of commonly used technical words and phrases in six languages (English, German, French, Spanish, Italian and Dutch). The words and phrases in each list are numbered, and the corresponding term is given the same number in each language list. By entering the number for the word or phrase in the drawing (instead of the word itself), the software can automatically display the word or phrase in up to three of the available languages. The text is entered on the drawing (using the Draw > Text function) as a tilde character “~” followed by the desired text number. For example, ~187. The user can edit and add to any of the word lists and can create new word lists for additional languages. Up to 20 language lists can be stored. The text in each language is restricted to 80 characters per phrase. Selecting Languages To select which languages will appear in a drawing, one first specifies up to three languages in the Language fields of the Project Parameters dialog box when creating a project. See page 3-9. (You can change these settings with the Manage > Project > Modify function.) In the following Project Parameters dialog box, English has been chosen as Language 1, French as Language 2, and German as Language 3.
5-41
Schematic Elements
Project Parameters Default Device ID Display:
Device ID – Page – Line No.
Signal Cross Reference Analysis Type:
Ascending by Inst. and Pages
Language Fields
Language
Default Text Size Device ID
0.1250
Connection Point
0.1250
Strip/Plug ID Terminal/Plug ID
1:
English
0.0000
2:
French
Cross Reference
0.1250 0.1250
3:
German
Signal Cross Reference
0.1250 Default Grid
Default Text Style
ROMANS
Adjust Device ID When Symbols Are Moved
X
0.5000
Y
0.5000
Wire Numbering Mode: Wire Number Same Over Terminal Connection List/Term. Plan: Replace CP With I/O Address OK
Note
Cancel
Help...
Values shown in inches.
Placing Language Text Text codes are placed on the drawing in the form of a number preceded by a “~”. This text is displayed in the languages selected in the Project Parameters dialog box. Example: Text number 380 is “YES/NO” in English. If the selected languages are English–French–German as shown previously, and the text “~380” is placed on a drawing the following text will be displayed: YES/NO OUI/NON JA/NEIN
5-42
Schematic Elements
Viewing Language Lists Functions for viewing the contents of the language lists are accessed through the Reports > Libraries > Foreign Languages function. See page 9-7 for more information.
5-43
Schematic Elements
Language List Phrases To view a list of language phrases, select the Manage > Foreign Language > Edit Phrases function. Select:
Manage Foreign Language Edit Phrases The contents of the language phrase lists are accessed through Microsoft Access. The following form will appear. TEXT: Form
Language Database Text Number
1
Find Text Number
English:
DRIVE
German:
ANTRIEB
French:
ENTRAINEMENT
Spain:
DRIVE
Italy:
AZIONAMENTI
Dutch:
AANDRIJVING
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
The dialog lists a selected text phrase in all the languages for which a translation exists in the language text database. To display a specific text number – Enter the number of the desired phrase in the Find Text Number field and select the Find Text Number button (the button with the binoculars icon). You can step forward or backward through the list in numerical order by using the Next Record and Previous Record buttons at the bottom of the dialog box (the buttons with the triangle icons). To edit a phrase – Edit the displayed phrases as desired. To save your changes, select the Save Record button (the button with the disk and pencil icon). 5-44
Schematic Elements
To add a new phrase – Select the Add Record button (the button with the triangle and asterisk). Enter an unused text number at the prompt. Enter the desired words for each language. Select the Save Record button (the button with the disk and pencil icon). Language List Additions To add a language to the language list, use the Manage > Foreign Language > New function. Select:
Manage Foreign Language New... The result will be the New Language dialog box with a list of current languages. Add the additional language(s) to the list. The list can accept up to 20 languages. Select the OK button to save the changes. New Language Index Language
Font
Index Language
1.
English
11.
2.
German
12.
3.
French
13.
4.
Spanish
14.
5.
Italian
15.
6.
English
16.
7.
17.
8.
18.
9.
19.
10.
20. OK
Cancel
Font
Help
If desired, you can use the Font field to assign a text style for each language. This allows you to distinguish each language on a drawing with a different font.
5-45
Schematic Elements
Language List Deletions To delete a language from the language list, use the Manage > Foreign Language > Delete... function. Select:
Manage Foreign Language Delete... The result will be the Delete Language dialog box with a list of current languages. Select (highlight) the language(s) to be deleted from the list. Select the OK button to save the changes. Delete Language Language English German French Spanish Italian Dutch
OK
5-46
Cancel
Help...
Schematic Elements
Box You can draw two types of boxes: Logical boxes and Drawing boxes. Logical boxes are processed like symbols and include a device ID and connection points. Drawing boxes are simple graphic elements with no logical properties. Filled or empty drawing boxes can be drawn.
Draw Logical Box Graphic
Box Empty Box Filled
Logical Boxes Logical boxes are used as symbols in a schematic drawing. Like other symbols, they are assigned a device ID and have connection points.
Connection Point D426
A
B
Connection Point Text
Device ID
Logical Box
There are a number of functions in the Draw > Logical Box submenu.
Draw Logical Box Create Conn. Point Delete Conn. Point To draw a logical box, select the Draw > Logical Box > Create function. The software will prompt you to define the first corner of the box and then the opposite corner. Then the software will display the Device ID Assignment dialog box and prompt you to enter a device ID for the logical box. The device ID is entered in the same way as for a symbol. If desired, you can also assign a part number to the logical box.
5-47
Schematic Elements
The default position for the device ID is to the left of the logical box. It can be moved with the Modify > Symbol function. Next, select the Draw > Logical Box > Conn. Point function and select a connection point by pointing and clicking. You will be prompted to select the location for connection point text. (If you don’t want connection point text, pick any point near the symbol.) Then you will be prompted to enter the connection point text in the following dialog box. Connection Point Parameters Device ID:
–D426
Device ID at Connection Point Connection Point:
?
Label Origin:
5
Select...
Height:
0.1500
Select...
Angle:
0
Select...
Color:
0
Select...
Conn.Pt. X Offset:
0.0000
Conn.Pt. Y Offset:
0.0000
Text X Offset:
0.0000
Text Y Offset:
0.0000
OK
Cancel
Help...
Select the Device ID at Connection Point checkbox if you wish the symbol’s device ID to be part of the connection point label. For example, if the device ID is D426 and if you enter “A” in the Connection Point field, the full connection point label will then be –D426:A. Select OK to enter the connection point parameters. Enter additional connection points as required. Important
5-48
To delete the connection point of a logical box, you must select the Draw > Logical Box > Delete Conn. Point function. Then click directly on the connection point you wish to delete. The Modify > Delete function will not affect these connection points.
Schematic Elements
Logical Box With Nested Symbols It is possible to place symbols inside a logical box. This allows the symbols inside the box to have a device ID that combines the ID of the logical box with the ID of the nested symbol. One application of this feature would be to use the box to represent a circuit board and then insert pin/plug symbols to represent the connectors on the board. The box could also represent a special controller module with terminal symbols inside that are related to that module.
Symbols inside logical box can have combined device IDs
LB1
LB1–TB1
Logical Box LB1–TB2
Nested Symbols
LB1–TB3
To correctly display the combined device IDs of the nested symbols, you must use the Tools > Project Settings function, select the Device ID Style tab, and then select the Complete radio button in the Nested Device ID section. Drawing Boxes Drawing boxes are simple graphic objects. The software does not recognize drawing boxes as having any logical properties. Empty or filled drawing boxes can be created. (To change the fill color, use the Tools > Project Settings > Object Defaults function.) To create a drawing box, select the Draw > Graphic function and either the Box Empty or Box Filled option.
Draw Graphic Box Empty Box Filled The software will prompt you to define the first corner of the box and then the opposite corner.
5-49
Schematic Elements
Box Settings To set the line type and fill of boxes that are not yet drawn: 1.
Select the Tools > Project Settings function.
2.
Select the Object Defaults tab.
3.
Select the Activate Object checkbox.
4.
Select “Drawing Box” from the drop down list of objects.
5.
Select the desired linetype or color.
These functions display the available color and line type options which may be selected. The color selection affects both the border and fill of the box when drawing filled boxes. To set the line type and fill of existing boxes: AutoCAD 14 1.
Select the Modify > Properties function.
2.
Select the desired box in the drawing.
3.
Select the desired color.
AutoCAD 2000
5-50
1.
Select the Tools > Preferences function.
2.
Select the Selection tab.
3.
Select the Enable grips checkbox.
4.
Select OK.
5.
Select the desired box in the drawing.
6.
Select the Modify > Properties function.
7.
In the Properties dialog, select the desired color.
8.
Close the Properties dialog.
Schematic Elements
9.
Turn off the Enable grips function.
5-51
Schematic Elements
Field RSWire software has the ability to recognize devices on a schematic that originate from a remote location, in other words, devices that exist in a different physical locale than the other devices on the schematic page. One way the user can identify these remote devices is by placing them in a “field.” (Another way is to use the Modify > Symbol function to change a symbol’s device ID to a different installation and location.) Overview – RSWire is an intelligent software package that can identify locations as well as logical connections. However, in the two–dimensional schematic world, the user must provide RSWire with the means to distinguish between real–world, physical locations and theoretical callouts on the drawing. To allow the software to recognize remote devices, the user can assign a field as an area of the schematic to contain the remote devices. A different Installation and Location can then be assigned to the field. RSWire will associate the devices in the field with this new Installation and Location rather than the Installation and Location of the page where the field appears. Rules for Field Creation: 1.
Fields can only be created on a page that has been given an Installation or Location name when created.
2.
A field can be drawn around existing devices, or devices can be drawn inside an existing field.
3.
A field can be drawn within another field.
Procedure for Field Creation: 1.
Select the Draw > Field function.
Draw Field Note
If you cannot select the Field function, the page may not have an installation or location assigned. See “Rules for Field Creation” above. 2.
5-52
On the command line, you will be prompted to define the first corner and opposite corner of the field in the desired area of the drawing. A box will indicate the field area.
Schematic Elements
3.
Next a prompt will appear on the Command Line asking you to “Locate the text position.” This means to select a point near the field where the field’s Installation/Location name will be printed. Select the point by pointing the cursor and clicking.
4.
The following Field Parameters dialog box will then appear. Field Parameters Installation:
Search...
Location:
Search...
Rename existing symbols to Inst./Loc. of the field
Text Color:
0
Select...
Label Origin:
5
Select...
Height:
0.2500
Select...
Angle:
0
Select...
Slant:
0
Select...
Ratio:
1.0000
Select...
Font: Text–X–Offset:
0.5000
Text–Y–Offset:
0.5000
Line Color:
1
Select...
Line Type:
CENTER
Select...
OK
Note
Cancel
Help...
Values shown in inches. At the top of this dialog box you can enter the Installation and/or Location name to which you wish the field to be assigned. This can be an existing installation/location, or one that has not yet been used. (The field can have the same installation name as the drawing page where it appears, but it should have a different location name if the field is to indicate remote devices.) Use the Search buttons to display a list of existing installations and locations.
5-53
Schematic Elements
Note
Do not use any of the following reserved characters in the installation and location names that you enter: # = + – ^ / : ~.@ (includes spaces and periods). These characters are used for various purposes by the software and may cause unexpected results if entered in these fields. The Rename existing symbols to inst/loc of the field checkbox determines whether or not any existing symbols in the field area will be renamed (reassigned) to the field’s installation and location. When the checkbox is on, existing symbols are renamed. The Text Position checkbox is only available with the Modify > Field function. It is used to change the position of the field’s installation/location label. There is also a set of fields for determining the characteristics of the text that will label the field on the drawing. See page 5-34 for more information on these text functions. The Text–Offset values indicate the distance from the field reference point (first corner) to the reference point (write position) of the text. These values can be altered if desired. The Line Color and Line Type fields allow the characteristics of the field border line to be set. Buttons are available on the right side of the dialog box for displaying and selecting most of these text and line parameters. 5.
When the desired values are entered, select the OK button to complete creation of the field.
Mixed Device Assignment – In some cases, you may wish to have some devices within a field remain associated with the Installation and Location of the drawing page, i.e., be local rather than remote devices. In such a case, use the following procedure:
5-54
1.
Before creating the field, draw the devices that are to remain local.
2.
Draw the field around the local devices. During the field creation process, set the Rename symbols to inst/loc to name of the field checkbox to off (no checkmark). This will cause the symbols to remain associated with the Installation/Location of the current page.
3.
Add the remote devices to the field area. Any new devices will be assigned to the Installation/Location of the field.
Schematic Elements
Deleting a Field – To delete a field, you must select the Modify > Delete function and then click on the border of the field. Note
The logic functions of RSWire ordinarily do not allow two devices with the same name to be assigned to the same Installation/Location. However, you may wish the devices in a field to represent devices that exist on another page, and therefore you would give the field the same Installation name as the other page where the devices appear. As shown in the following illustration, the device PB123 appears in Installation A, Location B as a local device and also as a remote device in Installation X, Location Y. The remote field has been assigned to Installation A, Location B.
Installation A Location B
PB123
Installation X Location Y
Field Assigned To Inst. A Location B
PB123
Ordinarily, when the device ID PB123 was entered a second time for the same Installation/Location, a “Device already exists” error would be displayed and the ID would not be allowed. This restriction can be overridden by selecting the Duplicate Device ID checkbox in the Device ID Assignment dialog box when both symbols are placed. Therefore in the example above, the ID PB123 would be assigned to both pushbuttons when they are placed (or after they have been placed by using the Modify > Symbol > Device ID function). Note
To avoid duplication, part numbers should only be assigned to one of the devices.
5-55
Schematic Elements
Circles and Arcs Functions are included in the Draw > Graphic pull–down menu for drawing Circles and Arcs. Circles – Selecting the Circle function displays the following submenu which provides a variety of methods for circle drawing:
Draw Graphic Circle Center, Radius Center, Diameter 2 Points 3 Points Tan, Tan, Radius Tan, Tan, Tan Filled Circle Center, Radius – Creates a circle by defining a center point and radius on the drawing. Center, Diameter – Creates a circle by defining a center point and a diameter on the drawing. 2 Points – Creates a circle by defining two endpoints of the circle’s diameter. 3 Points – Creates a circle by defining three points on the surface of the circle. Tan, Tan, Radius – (Tangent/Tangent/Radius) creates a circle by selecting two lines or arcs to which the circle is to be tangent and then entering a radius value. Filled Circle – Creates a circle with a fill color. Select the fill color with the Arcs – Use the Draw > Graphic > Arc functions to draw arcs. You will be prompted to select a center point (of the arc’s circle), a start point for the arc and an endpoint that establishes the length of the arc.
5-56
Schematic Elements
Draw Graphic Arc 3 Points Start, Center, End Start, Center, Angle Start, Center, Length Start, End, Angle Start, End, Direction Start, End, Radius Center, Start, End Center, Start, Angle Center, Start, Length Continue Filled Arc Arcs are drawn by making three selections on the drawing, as determined by the name of the specific arc function. Use the Draw > Graphic > Arc > Filled Arc function to create an arc with a filled interior.
5-57
Schematic Elements
Signal Cross Reference – JIC To allow RSWire to cross reference the devices in long schematics that extend over multiple columns and pages, the wires at the end of a column must be logically connected to the wires in the next column or next page so that the software knows that they are to be treated as one continuous circuit. To make this connection, a Signal Cross Reference symbol is placed at the end of the lines in one column and at the beginning of the next column. Note
Because they are used to bring wires together, signal cross references should be assigned before wire numbers are assigned.
125
CR124
AH126
126 127 128
Signal Cross Reference Symbols
129 L1/1
L2/1
If different page formats are used within a project, be sure to use identical cross referencing. When referencing from page to page, use the same reference on each page such as L1. The signal lines leaving or entering a location can be in the horizontal or in the vertical direction (shown below). When the reference is to be within the same sheet, the reference input used must be followed with /1, /2, etc. For example:
5-58
Schematic Elements
JIC Single Page Signal Cross Reference Vertical Layout Three Columns
L1
L2
L1/2
L2/2
L1/4
L2/4
L1/1
L2/1
L1/3
L2/3
L1
L2
Incoming Signal
Outgoing Signal
The following signal cross reference symbols are provided with the software (in the JIC symbol catalog). The user can also create custom symbols (see page 6-77). Symbol name
Description
SIG1
Outgoing, horizontal, right side of drawing, ID to right
SIG2
Incoming, horizontal, left side of drawing, ID to left
SIG3
Incoming, vertical, top of drawing, ID above
SIG4
Incoming, vertical, bottom of drawing, ID below
SIG5
Outgoing, vertical, top of drawing, ID above
SIG6
Outgoing, vertical, bottom of drawing, ID below
SIGIN
Incoming, vertical, ID in box
SIGOUT
Outgoing, vertical, ID in box
STARHEX2L
(Star type) for use with the HEXOUT2L macro
STARHEX2R
(Star type) for use with the HEXOUT2R macro
STARHEXOUT5
(Star type) for use with the HEXOUT5 macro
STARIN1
(Star type) Incoming, printed on 1 line
STARIN2
(Star type) Incoming, printed on 2 lines
STAROUT5
(Star type) Outgoing, 5 references
STAROUT10
(Star type) Outgoing, 10 references
STAROUT15
(Star type) Outgoing, 15 references
These symbols are selected and placed like other symbols. After the signal cross reference symbols are placed, they will automatically display the current cross reference values (i.e., they will indicate where the circuit continues or originates). 5-59
Schematic Elements
Note
If a signal cross reference ID appears in the wire list (see page 9-10) this is an indication that the signal is not matching correctly with its mate. Signal Cross Reference Notation Formats – You can select the format of the signal cross reference with the Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function (see page 7-22). The following formats for the cross reference information are available in the Signal Cross Ref. Type field
Note
Where you see the character string <=Inst/> in the following format names it means the installation name will be included in the cross reference only if it differs from the installation where cross reference symbol is located): Notation Format:
DevID/<=Inst/>Page.Linenumber Shows signal designation with page.line number. Example: L1/1.42 Installation is shown only when cross reference is outside current installation.
DevID=Inst/Page.Linenumber Shows signal designation, installation, and page.line number. Example: L1/=INST1/1.8
DevID/Page.Linenumber Shows signal designation, page.line number. Never shows installation. Example: L1/1.8
DevID/<=Inst/>Page Linenumber Shows signal designation, page and line number (without period between page and line number). Example: L1/1218 (for signal 1 on page 12, line 18)
<=Inst/>Page Linenumber Shows page and line number (without period or signal designation). Example: 1218 (for page 12, line 18)
Note
Page^Linenumber Do not use with star type references. Shows page and line number on separate lines. Example: 12 18 (for page 12, line 18)
5-60
<=Inst/>Page.Linenumber
Schematic Elements
Shows page.line number (without signal designation). Example: 1218 (for page 12, line 18) The device ID of the signal can take any form (L1, L2, etc.); the program suggests the identification letters based on the device ID tag entered when the symbol was created. The cross reference symbol you choose (see above) determines whether the cross–reference is printed on one or two lines. Cross Reference Device ID Format – The symbol group that was selected when the cross reference symbol was created (see list below) determines whether the cross–reference is printed on one or two lines. In the case of groups SG2 and SG4, it can be placed according to definition (the cross reference will appear at the connection text location designated when the signal cross reference symbol was created). See page 6-6 for more on symbol creation. Symbol Group
Description
SG1
Incoming signal (1 line combined label)
SG2
Incoming signal (2 line separated label)
SG3
Outgoing signal (1 line combined label)
SG4
Outgoing signal (2 line separated label)
SG5
Incoming signal (star configuration, 1 line label)
SG6
Incoming signal (star configuration, 2 line label)
SG7
Outgoing signal (star configuration, written upwards)
SG8
Outgoing signal (star configuration, written downwards)
Signal Analysis Types – When creating a project (or when using the Manage > Project > Modify function) the user can select from three types of signal cross referencing analysis in the Project Parameter dialog box. Choices include Ascending by Installations and Pages (default), Pairs (signal cross references that exist only in pairs – page order not taken into account), and Ascending Numbers (ascending order for all cross references). Ascending By Inst. and Pages – Signal cross–references are analyzed in ascending order for all installations and pages. Note
The outgoing symbol must be placed ahead of the incoming signal in the page order.
5-61
Schematic Elements
Example: Ascending By Inst. and Pages Signal Cross Reference L1
L2 L1/1.22
2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
L1/2.01
L2/2.01
L2/1.22
2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
L1/2.22
L1/3.01
Page 1
L2/3.01
Page 2
L2/2.22
2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
L1 Page 3
L2
Pairs Analysis – The signal cross–references only exist in pairs. Each pair is recognized and analyzed as such. Installation and sequence of the pages are not taken into account. The sub–group (incoming/outgoing) is ignored. Example: Pairs Signal Cross Reference L1
L2 L5/3.22
2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
L3/3.01
L4/3.01
2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
L3/1.22
P.1 P.2
L3 And L4 On Page 1 Lead To L3 And L4 On Page 3 Which Lead To Page 2.
5-62
L6/3.22 L4/1.22
2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
L5/2.01 P.3
L6/2.01
Schematic Elements
Ascending Numbers Analysis – These signal cross–references link outgoing and incoming signals regardless of page and installation order if the signals have a slash followed by the same number. For example, you can have the outgoing signal L1/3 on page 10 and the incoming signal L1/3 on page 2. Signal symbols need not be placed in page order. Example: Ascending Numbers Signal Cross Reference L1
L2 L1/3
2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
L1/3 P.3
L2/3
L2/3
2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
L1/4 P.1
L1/3 And L2/3 On Page 3 Lead To L1/3 And L1/3 On Page 1 From Which L1/4 and L2/4 Lead To Page 2.
L2/4
L1/4
L2/4
L1/5
L2/5
2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
P.2
Star Type Signal Processing: The symbols for star–type signal processing are created as symbols in Symbol Groups SG5, SG6, SG7 and SG8. They must have a connection point and a write position for connection point text. The cross–reference will later be entered at this write position. The format of the cross–reference depends on the symbol group: Incoming Signals – Symbol group SG5 – cross–reference is printed on one line. SG6 – cross–reference is written on two lines. Outgoing Signals – With star–type signal processing there is only one outgoing signal but several incoming signals. The outgoing signal has references to all incoming signals. The outgoing signal does not have to be placed on a page before the first incoming signal; it can be correctly analyzed in other positions as well. The software includes outgoing star type symbols that can accommodate 5, 10 and 15 references (symbol names STAROUT5, STAROUT10, STAROUT15).
5-63
Schematic Elements
Example: Star Type Signal Processing (Ascending Order Analysis) L1 2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
P.1
L2 L1/1.22
L1 2.01 3.01 4.01
L2 2.01 3.01 4.01
Outgoing Signals On Page 1 Lead To Incoming Signals On Pages 2, 3 And 4
2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
L2/1.22 L1/1.22
P.2
2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
L2/1.22 L1/1.22
P.3
L2/1.22
2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
P.4
Notes on Star Type Signal Cross Reference: If you are cross referencing within a single page with star type symbols, it is not necessary to use the “/” character in the device IDs. Important
It is important not to mix star type signal cross references with regular signal cross references using the same device ID. For example if you use a SIG3 incoming signal symbol and a STAROUT5 outgoing signal symbol on the same page, they must not have the same device ID.
Each outgoing star type cross reference symbol must have a unique device ID. For example, you cannot have outgoing signals on two different pages both called L1.
5-64
Schematic Elements
Signal Cross Reference – IEC To allow RSWire to cross reference the IEC devices in long schematics that extend over multiple pages, the wires at the end of a page must be logically connected to the wires in the next page so that the software knows that they are to be treated as one continuous circuit. To make this connection, the software requires a Signal Cross Reference symbol to be placed at the end of the lines in one page and at the beginning of the next page. Note
Because they are used to bring wires together, signal cross references should be assigned before wire numbers are assigned.
IEC Signal Cross Reference Symbols P1/1
P1/2
P1/3
N1/2
N1/3
N1/1
Page 1
Page 2
5-65
Schematic Elements
Wire Numbers RSWire schematic diagrams are created with wire lines which the system can recognize as wires (unlike drawing lines which are not recognized as having any logical properties). The Tools > Wire Number > Automatic function allows the software to automatically assign wire numbers throughout the project. The format of the wire numbers is user–selectable: it can be based on line numbers or sequential numbers with alphanumeric prefixes or suffixes. Color and gauge (size) also can be assigned to each wire. Wire numbers can be assigned automatically or manually as described in the following sections.
Automatic Wire Number Assignment The software can automatically assign wire numbers. The automatic wire numbering function does not overwrite existing wire numbers. Therefore, if you wish to redo the wire numbers, you must first delete the existing numbers using the Tools > Wire Number > Delete function (see page 5-77). Important
Before the system can assign wire numbers across columns and pages, signal cross reference symbols must be placed in the drawing to tie together the “hot” and “common” lines on each column and page. See page 5-58. If this step is performed, automatic wire numbering can extend across the pages of a project. To automatically assign wire numbers, first use the Tools > Project Preselect function to select a project for numbering (otherwise the currently selected project will be numbered). Then select:
Tools Wire Number Automatic The following Wire Number Automatic dialog box will appear.
5-66
Schematic Elements
Wire Number Automatic Select Pages
Numbering Format:
Page – Line Number
Parameters
Values
Prefix
Wire Number Gauge Color
Suffix
Color...
0
Height...
0.1250
Text Position Additional
Beginning
Additional
Middle
End
Wire Numbering System
Additional
Wire Number = I/O Address
Additional
Terminal = Wire Number Wire Number With Suffix Over Terminal
Additional
Wire Numbering Omitted on Cables OK
Cancel
Help...
Save
Select Pages – Activating the Select Pages checkbox allows you to select the pages on which the automatic wire numbering will be performed. After you make the other wire number settings and select the OK button in the Wire Number Automatic dialog box, a page select dialog box will appear, allowing you to pick the project, installation, and pages to which the automatic wire numbering will be applied. If you do not select the Select Pages checkbox, the automatic wire numbering will apply to the entire project. Note
If you select individual pages for wire numbering, you may be using different wire number formats in different parts of the project. Be aware that wire numbers can pass through signal cross referencing and may come from or go to a page having a different format from the current page.
5-67
Schematic Elements
Wire Numbering Formats – The Numbering Format field allows you to select one of the following five formats. Note
You can add a prefix or suffix to any of these formats. Page–Line Number – Page and line number plus sequential number. Example: 123
LS124
1241
LS124.1
1242
CR124
124 125
CR124
1261
LS126
1262
AH126
126
Page–Line Number – ABC suffix – Page and line number plus letter. Example: 123
LS124
124A
LS124.1
124B
CR124
124 125
CR124
126A
LS126
126B
AH126
126
Sequential Wire Numbers – sequential number. Example: 123
LS124
17
LS124.1
18
CR124
124 125 126
5-68
CR124
19
LS126
20
AH126
Schematic Elements
Seq. Wire Number – Page Number – Sequential number plus page number. Example (page 5): 523
LS124
175
LS124.1
CR124
185
524 525
CR124
195
LS126
AH126
205
526
Branch Numbering – The wire numbers have a prefix consisting of the first two letters of the installation name. This is followed by the page number and a sequential number beginning with 00. For each branch of a potential that connects to an additional device, the software adds a decimal point and a sequential number. In order to see the decimal point wire number extensions, you must select Branch Numbering in the Wire Number Display field in the Tools > Project Settings General Defaults tab. ZB0100
LS124
ZB0101
LS124.1
CR124 ZB0102.1 ZB102.2
124 125 126
ZB0103.1 AH126
127 AH128
Installation Name “ZBX” Page Number 01
ZB0102.3
ZB0103.2
The Values column of the Wire Number Automatic dialog contains a group of fields that allow the following parameters to be assigned.
5-69
Schematic Elements
JIC Wire Number – When numbering formats involving sequential numbers are selected, the value entered in this field is the first sequential number that will be assigned. If no value is entered, numbering will start with 1. This field does not affect the Branch Numbering format which always starts with 0100. IEC Wire Number – On IEC format pages, wires are automatically numbered from left to right and then from top to bottom within a column, and by column from left to right across the page. When a 3–phase circuit is drawn, the placement of all three wire phases will determine the automatic wire numbering sequences. The following illustrates the wire numbering of a 3–phase circuit placed within two columns and within one column.
U
–M1
1
W
PE
U
M 3~
–M1
W3 W6 V
W
PE
M 3~
PUMP
PUMP
5 HP
5 HP
7.2 AMP 1000 RPM
7.2 AMP 1000 RPM
Placement Within Two Columns
Placement Within One Column
IEC 3–Phase Wire Numbering
5-70
W9
W1 W7
W4
W7 W9 V
3
W2
2
W5
3
W5
W4 W6 W8
W3
W2
W1
2
W8
1
Schematic Elements
Gauge (Size in IEC version) – Allows a wire gauge (size) value to be assigned which will be associated with the wires. Color – This field (left side of the dialog box) allows a wire color to be assigned which will be associated with the wires. Additional – Five additional fields are available for any other information the user may wish to associate with wires. The Prefix and Suffix fields allow you to specify an alphanumeric prefix or suffix that will be added to each wire number. If, for example, a prefix of “WN” and a suffix of “A” is entered for a sequential wire numbering format, the numbers will appear on the drawing as “WN1A, WN2A”, etc. The Color button and field (right side of dialog box) allow a color to be assigned to the wire numbers that appear on the drawing. Enter the color number in the field or select the button to select from a display of colors. The Height button and field allow a text height value to be assigned to the wire numbers that appear in the drawing. Enter the height value in the field or select the button to display a dialog box of height values to select from. Text Position – These three radio buttons, Beginning, Middle, and End, allow you to set a default position on the wire segment for the wire number. On wires having multiple segments, the number will be placed on the first segment. Note
After wire numbers have been assigned, individual wire numbers can be repositioned with the Modify > Wire Number function and Wire Number Manual dialog box (Text Position checkbox). Wire Numbering System – The following checkboxes determine how wire numbering will interact with certain symbols such as terminals and PLCs. Wire Number = I/O Address – This checkbox selects the format of the wire numbering for wires connected to PLC I/O module symbols. If the checkbox is selected, the PLC I/O address will be used for the wire number. If the checkbox is not selected, the wire numbering sequence used in the rest of the project will be continued through the PLC symbol. Attribute text in the PLC symbol must have been set for Address when the symbol was created for this numbering to work (see page 6-44).
5-71
Schematic Elements
Terminal = Wire Number – Determines whether or not terminals will take on the same number as the wire connected to them. This happens when the wire number function is executed. If this feature is disabled, terminals will keep the number assigned when the terminal symbol is placed. When a checkmark appears in the box, the terminal will take the same number as the wire. When the box is empty, terminals will keep the same number assigned when the terminal symbol was placed. Wire Number With Suffix Over Terminal – When wire numbering is set to be the same over terminals in the Project Parameters dialog box, selecting this checkbox will add an incrementing letter suffix (A, B, C, etc.) to the wire number after each terminal. 1A
TB2
1B
TB3
1C
Wire Numbering Omitted on Cable – When this function is selected, wire numbering will not be performed on any wires that are assigned as conductors of a cable. Select the Save button if you wish to save the wire numbering settings for future work sessions. When all wire number parameters are entered, select the OK button to proceed with the wire numbering.
Manual Wire Number Assignment To manually assign wire numbers, select:
Tools Wire Number Manual You can also use the Modify > Wire Number function. The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Select the wire that you wish to number by clicking the left mouse button and then click the right mouse button (or press the <Enter> key. The following dialog box will appear.
5-72
Schematic Elements
Wire Number Manual Values
Parameters Manual
Duplicate Text Position
Wire Number Gauge Color
Beginning
Change All Middle
End
Additional Color...
Additional Additional
Angle...
Additional Height...
Additional
Label Origin... OK
Cancel
Help...
Save
The Wire Number field displays the number currently assigned to the wire (if any) and allows you to enter a new number. Up to 20 characters can be entered. This field corresponds to the variable ?pot1 listed on page 14-36. The Gauge (Size in IEC version) and Color fields display the selected wire’s current gauge (size) and color. Changes can be made here that affect only the selected wire. These fields correspond to the variables ?pot2 and ?pot3 listed on page 14-36. The Additional fields display any additional data associated with the selected wire. New information can be entered. These fields correspond to the variables ?pot4 through ?pot8 listed on page 14-36. The Duplicate checkbox allows you to place a copy of an existing wire number on a different segment of a wire (potential) with multiple segments. This checkbox is only available when the selected potential is multi–segment with a wire number already assigned. After a wire number has been assigned to one segment, you can: 1.
Select the Tools > Wire Number > Manual function
2.
Select the segment on which the duplicate number is to appear
3.
Select the Duplicate checkbox in the Manual Wire Number dialog box
4.
Select the OK button. 5-73
Schematic Elements
If you attempt to place a duplicate wire number on a segment that is connected to a signal cross reference an error message will appear indicating this fact. If you select the OK button in the error message dialog box you will still be allowed to duplicate the wire number. Note
After you assign duplicate wire numbers, you can modify any of the segments so that they have different color or gauge values (or any of the five Additional wire description fields). Use the Tools > Wire Number > Manual function to assign color and gauge values. Assigning different values to the segments can result in unpredictable results in the wire list unless there is a terminal symbol separating the segments having different values. Select the Text Position checkbox if you wish to change the position of the wire number. After the OK button is selected, you will be prompted to “Define target position” on the drawing. Select the desired new position for the wire number. The Manual checkbox determines whether the software considers this wire number to be manually assigned or automatically assigned. This is relevant when using the delete wire numbers function (Tools > Wire Number > Delete) where you are given the option of deleting all wire numbers (both manually and automatically assigned) or just the automatically assigned numbers. When this checkbox is checked the software considers the wire number a manually assigned number. When the checkbox is unchecked, the wire number is considered automatically assigned. If you select a group of wires for modification, the Change All checkbox determines whether or not the parameters you change will apply to all the selected wires. When the checkbox is checked, the parameters will be assigned to all the selected wires in one step. When the checkbox is unchecked, you will be prompted for each wire separately. The three position radio buttons, Beginning, Middle and End, allow you to set a default position on the wire segment for the wire number that is about to be assigned. The Color, Angle, Height and Label Origin buttons allow you to alter these attributes of the wire number to change its appearance on the drawing. Selecting each button will display a list of available values to choose from. Select the Save button to save the wire number parameters as a default for future work sessions. Select the OK button to load the new wire number parameters. If you selected more than one wire, the Wire Number Manual dialog box will be displayed for each wire in turn.
5-74
Schematic Elements
Note
This function should not be used to modify the number of a wire with a signal cross reference (an error may result). For these wires you should use the Tools > Replace > Wire Number function (see page 5-76 ).
Duplicate Wire Numbers Using Invisible Text The software’s error checking functions prevent two different wires in the same project from having the same wire number. However some users may wish to have duplicate wire numbers (for example if they wish each installation to start with the same wire number). It is possible to have what appear to be duplicate numbers by using invisible text in the wire number prefix. Any text beginning and ending with an “@” character will not be visible in the drawing. Therefore, the user can run the automatic wire number function for different parts of the project with different invisible text in the wire number prefix. The visible part of the wire number will be the same. For example if one page was sequentially numbered from 1 with the prefix W@AA@ and another page was similarly numbered with the prefix W@BB@ both pages would appear to have wire numbers W1, W2, etc. Wire numbers with invisible prefixes can also be assigned using the manual wire numbering function. The hidden text will not be visible in the wire list. It will be visible only when editing the wire number using the Tools > Wire Number > Manual function. Note
Invisible text can also be used in symbol (function) text and in normal text.
5-75
Schematic Elements
Changing Wire Numbers The Tools > Replace > Wire Number function allows existing wire colors and gauges to be changed on a project–wide basis. A single wire number can also be changed. Select:
Tools Replace Wire Number
Replace Wire Numbers Select One Wire Number
Color
Gauge
Installation Old Values
New Values
Wire Number
Wire Number
Gauge
Gauge
Color
Color Additional Additional Additional Additional Additional OK
Cancel
Help...
In the Select group of checkboxes, select whether you wish to change Wire Number, Color, or Gauge. There is also an Installation button and field that allows you to restrict the wire number replace function to a selected installation. Select the button to view a list of installations in the current project. You can select from this list. In the Old Values field, enter the existing value that you wish to change. In the New Values field, enter the new value that you wish to assign.
5-76
Schematic Elements
Color and Gauge changes affect all wires. Number changes affect only the single wire number that is changed. Select OK to make the change. If you enter an old color or gauge value to change without entering a new value, the software will ask if you wish to delete the old value. Select the OK button to delete the old value. Select No to return to the change dialog box.
Deleting Wire Numbers To delete a single wire number: You can delete the wire itself, or use the Modify > Wire Number function, select the wire, and delete the existing wire number from the Wire Number field of the dialog box. Then select OK. To globally delete existing wire numbers, use the following procedure: Select:
Tools Wire Number Delete The following Delete Wire Numbers dialog box will appear. Delete Wire Numbers All (including manually assigned) Only Automatically assigned Select Pages OK
Cancel
Help...
The All radio button will cause all wire numbers to be deleted including those that were manually assigned. The Only Automatically Assigned radio button will cause only those wire numbers that were automatically assigned to be deleted.
5-77
Schematic Elements
Activating the Select Pages checkbox allows you to select the pages on which the wire numbering will be deleted. After you select the OK button in the Delete Wire Numbers dialog box, a page select dialog box will appear, allowing you to pick the project, installation, and pages on which the wire numbering will be deleted. If you do not select the Select Pages checkbox, wire numbering (of the selected type) will be deleted throughout the entire project. Select the OK button to proceed with wire number deletion. The software will ask “Are you sure?” Select OK to delete the wire numbers.
Repositioning Wire Numbers If you wish to reposition wire numbers, use the Tools > Wire Number > Manual function and select the Text Position checkbox in the Wire Number Manual dialog box. See page 5-74. The software will then prompt “Define target position.” Click at the point where you wish the wire number to be moved.
5-78
Schematic Elements
Part Numbers The parts database allows RSWire users to assign part numbers to device IDs in the schematic. This allows the system to generate bills of material and other informative lists based on the items in the schematics and the information in the database. See Section 13 for information on accessing and editing the parts database. See page 5-119 for information on the Replace Part Number function (replacing one assigned part number with another throughout a project). Assigning Part Numbers – Part numbers can be assigned when a symbol is placed or at a later time. Note
You can also assign a part number when a symbol is created so that the part number is always prompted whenever the symbol is placed. See page 6-18. Part numbers are assigned to device IDs within a given project. They are not automatically assigned to the same symbols in a new project unless you use the Edit > Browse Copy function to copy part of an existing project with part numbers assigned.
Note
If you create a macro containing elements which have been assigned part numbers, these part numbers will be stored with the macro. (If desired, they can be altered after the macro is placed by right clicking on the symbol and selecting the Part Number function from the pop–up menu.) When a symbol is placed, the Device ID Assignment dialog box appears, prompting the user with a device ID for the symbol. This dialog box also contains a Part Number field and a part number Search button.
5-79
Schematic Elements
Device ID Assignment Installation:
Search...
Location:
Search...
Device ID:
Search Device ID
Suppress Device ID
Duplicate Device ID
Multiple Placement
Part Number Assigned Part No./Select to Delete
Search... Addit.Part Number
OK
Cancel
Use To Select Part Numbers From Parts Database
Help...
Delete Assigned Part Numbers By Clicking On Part Number
To assign a part number from the parts database select the Search button. This will display the Assign Part Number dialog box, which allows you to search the database and make part number selections (see next page). If you wish to assign additional part numbers to the same symbol you can simply use the Search button again to return to the Assign Part Number screen. Or, if you know the part number, you can type the additional part number in the the Additional Part Number field and select the Additional Part Number button. To delete (un–assign) part numbers that have already been assigned (listed in the Delete area of the Device ID Assignment dialog box) simply click on the part number you wish to delete.
5-80
Schematic Elements
_
Assign Part Number Device ID Filter SYMB_REF =
SYMB_REF PREGROUP PARTNUMBER DESCR MANUFACT
CR Refresh
SYMB_REF PREFGROUP
PARTNUMBER
CR CR CR CR CR
500FL-COA93 500FL-COB93 500FL-COC93 500FL-COD93 500FL-COF93
SYMB_REF PREFGROUP
PARTNUMBER
CR
500FL-COA93
DESCR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR DESCR
=”CR” = = = =
MANUFACT
TECHDATE_1
A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B
AC CONTACTOR (NE AC CONTACTOR (NE AC CONTACTOR (NE AC CONTACTOR (NE AC CONTACTOR (NE
MANUFACT
TECHDATE_1
CONTACTOR A-B
AC CONTACTOR (NE
Selected Part Numbers Are Listed Here . . . OK
Cancel
Help...
The Assign Part Number dialog box above shows a part selection that could be displayed when a control relay (JIC symbol name “CR”) is entered on a drawing. The Assign Part Number dialog box contains the following fields and columns: Device ID – The device ID of the currently selected symbol. (This field will be blank if the symbol has not yet been placed.) The Filter area allows you to to select criteria that determine the parts that are displayed. To to filter the parts, select one of the database field names (SYMB_REF, PARTNUMBER, etc.) and enter a specific value (PBNO, A–B, etc.) in the left field. To remove parameters, select one of the database field names and delete the parameter listed in the left field. Use the Refresh button to update the parts display after each parameter has been entered or deleted. You can enter wildcard (*) strings in the left field – for example, select the DESC field and enter *MOTOR* to display all parts with the word “MOTOR” in the description.
5-81
Schematic Elements
The part number information is listed in columns. The width of these columns can be adjusted by pointing the cursor at the dividing line in the column heading area and dragging the column wider or narrower. The following columns of information are available: SYMB_REF – This column indicating what symbol name the part number is usually associated with. (The Ref Symbol field is the primary search criteria when you first enter the Assign Part Number dialog box. If you get a message “No data found”, try searching by an entry in a different field.) PREFGROUP – This column indicates which Preferred Manufacturer’s Group (PMG) product category the part number is associated with. (See page 13-20 for more information.) PARTNUMBER – This column is the product part number. DESCR – Product part description. MANUFACT – Part manufacturer name. TECHDATE_1 – An additional part description. To select a part number, click twice on the desired part in the list. The selected part will be listed in the area just below the part list. (You can select multiple part numbers.) Then select the OK button. The Assign Part Number dialog box will close and the selected part number will be displayed in the part number field of the Device ID Assignment dialog box. Existing Symbols: Assigning or Modifying Part Number – To change the part number assigned to a symbol (or assign one to an existing symbol), Right click on the desired symbol and select Part Number from the pop–up menu. The Assign Part Number dialog box will then appear, allowing you to select a new or different part number. To remove a part number when multiple part numbers have been assigned, simply click on the part number you wish to remove in the list of assigned part numbers.
5-82
Schematic Elements
Dimensions The Draw > Dimensions function provides a submenu of the various AutoCAD dimension functions. These are useful for adding dimensions to panel layout diagrams and for drawing leader lines to annotate items. Consult the AutoCAD User’s Guide for additional information. To make settings to the dimension function, use the Draw > Dimension > Style function. See page 7-52.
Draw Dimensions Linear Aligned Ordinate Radius Diameter Angular Baseline Continue Leader Tolerance Center Mark Oblique Align Text Style Override Update The dimensioning function allows one to pick two points on a drawing and automatically display the distance between the two. Angular dimensions display the angle between two lines.
5-83
Schematic Elements
Parts of a Dimension Dimension Text Arrowhead
Dimension Line
1.50 in
22 mm
Extension Line
JIC
IEC
The following dimension function are available: Linear – Measures the distance between two points. Aligned – Creates an aligned linear dimension. Ordinate – Measures the perpendicular distance from an origin point called a datum to another point. The current UCS is used to determine the distance. Radius – Creates radius dimensions for a circle or arc. Diameter – Creates a diameter dimension for circles and arcs. Angular – Measures the angle between two lines or three points. Baseline – Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the previous dimension or a selected dimension. Continue – Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the second extension line of the previous dimension or a selected dimension. Leader – A leader is a line that connects annotation text to some item in a drawing. This leader is not the same as the leader that is generated automatically as part of a dimension line. Tolerance – Creates geometric tolerances. Tolerances specify the required accuracy for proper function and fit of the objects you draw. The software adds geometric tolerances to a drawing in feature control frames. These are frames divided into compartments that contain the geometric characteristic symbols followed by one or more tolerance values.
5-84
Schematic Elements
Center Mark – Creates a center mark for circles and arcs. Oblique – Makes the extension line of linear dimensions oblique. Align Text – Submenu: Home moves dimension text back to its default position. Angle rotates dimension text to an angle. Left will left justify dimension text. Center will center dimension text. Right will right justify dimension text. Style – Creates and modifies dimension styles. Override – Overrides dimension system variables. Update – Updates dimensions so they use the most current dimension style settings.
Drawing a Dimension Use the following procedures to draw the various dimension types. Note
After you select a dimensioning function the software will prompt the steps on the command line.
Linear Dimension 1.
Select Draw > Dimensions > Linear or one of the following related dimension functions: Aligned – The dimension line runs parallel to the dimensioned distance. Baseline – Multiple dimensions measured from the same baseline. Continue – Multiple dimensions placed end to end.
2.
Select the first extension line origin point (i.e., one end of the distance to be dimensioned).
3.
Select the second extension line origin point (the other end of the distance to be dimensioned).
4.
Select a location for the dimension line. This determines the length of the extension lines.
5-85
Schematic Elements
Circle/Arc Dimensions 1.
Select Draw > Dimensions > Radius or one of the following related dimension functions: Diameter – The diameter of a circle or arc. Center Mark – Marks the center point of a circle or arc.
2.
Select the circle or arc.
3.
Select a position for the dimension line.
4.
Press the <Enter> key (or click the right mouse button).
Ordinate Dimensions
5-86
1.
Select Draw > Dimensions > Ordinate. The software automatically determines whether the datum is X or Y.
2.
Select the feature location.
3.
Select an endpoint for the leader.
4.
The software will display the dimension text (distance) on the command line.
Schematic Elements
Angular Dimensions To measure the angle between two lines: 1.
Select Draw > Dimensions > Angular.
2.
Select the first line.
3.
Select the second line.
4.
Select a position for the dimension line arc.
Leader Lines To draw a leader line between two objects, 1.
Select Draw > Dimensions > Leader.
2.
Select a position for the arrowhead end of the leader.
3.
If you wish the leader to have sections (bends), select a point for each bend and continue the leader from there.
4.
Press <Enter> to complete the leader line.
5.
Enter annotation text string(s).
6.
Press <Enter> to complete the leader.
5-87
Schematic Elements
Text File on Drawing Lists, reports and other text file information can be placed on drawing pages. This would, for example, allow a bill of material to appear on the same page with a panel layout drawing. Important
You must place the text first on a blank page because the Text On Drawing function will erase any existing elements on that page. Two methods for placing text on drawings are given below: A) for information that is already in a text file, and B) for sending text directly from an RSWire report function to a drawing page. To Use an Existing Text File – To place an existing text file on a drawing, first select the Insert > Text on Drawing function. The Text On Drawing dialog box will then appear. To Place an RSWire Report on a Drawing – To send an RSWire list to a drawing page, first select the Tools > System Settings > Report Settings function and select the Project radio button in the Output section. This will cause the list generator to access the Text On Drawing function whenever a list is created. The Text On Drawing dialog box will appear after the desired list function is selected. X
System Settings Report Settings
Filter
OFF
Reports: Description Files
Printer Configuration
Sort
Command Protec
Output
Screen
OFF
Printer File ON
Project
ON
Interactive
Graphic Output
Select Project Output Option OK
5-88
Cancel
Save
Help...
Schematic Elements
Text On Drawing Dialog Box – The Text On Drawing dialog box appears as a result of having the Project output radio button selected under Tools > Systems Settings > Report Settings (or by executing the Draw > Text on Drawing function). Text On Drawing File:
C:\BOM.TXT
Search...
Text: Height:
0.1
Select...
Angle:
0
Select...
Slant:
0
Select...
Ratio:
0.000
Select...
Label Origin:
1
Select...
Color:
0
Select...
Font: Lines: Line Spacing:
.2
First Line:
18
Last Line:
2.5
Columns: 1:
20
OK
2: Cancel
3:
4: Help...
Save
The following fields are provided: File – Enter the name of the text file to be placed on a page. When the Project output radio button has been selected, this field will automatically contain the name of an ASCII file in the RS\TMP directory. The Search button allows you to look through various directories and select a file name. Text – This group of fields allow you to set various text parameters. See page 5-34 for descriptions of these parameters. For each parameter there is a Search button that provides a selection dialog box.
5-89
Schematic Elements
Note
The Label Origin setting affects how the text lines will appear on the drawing (centered, left justified, etc.) in relation to the values entered in the Column fields. Lines – This group of fields allows entries for Line Spacing (space between lines), First Line (distance from the bottom of the page where text will begin), and Last Line (distance from the bottom of the page where text will stop). In the example above, text will start 18 inches from the page bottom and stop 2.5 inches from page bottom.
Note
If the text area defined by the Lines fields is not large enough to hold the entire text file, the software will create one or more additional pages to accommodate the rest of the file. Columns – This group of fields allows up to four text columns to be defined on the drawing page. The values entered in the fields represent the distance from the left side of the drawing page. In the previous example, there will be only one column located 20 inches from the left side of the drawing. Text appears at the column positions according to the value entered in the Label Origin field (i.e., centered, left justified, etc.). When the desired parameters have been entered in the Text On Drawing dialog box, select the OK button. A dialog box will appear that indicates how many pages will be required to hold the text according to the settings you have made. For example, “Create Pages: 3”. Select Cancel to abort the process or select OK to continue. The New Page dialog box will then appear, allowing you to specify the (first) page on which the text is to appear.
5-90
Schematic Elements
New Page Project:
Select...
Installation:
Select...
Location:
Select...
Format Name
D–2COL
Select Page Format... 1
Scale 1: Online Page Type
Page:
Schematic Diagram Title Block
Select ...
Page Macro
Select ... OK
Parameters 1...
2...
3...
4...
5...
6...
7...
8...
9...
10...
Cancel
Help...
Enter the desired Project, Installation, and Page name just as you would when creating a new page. You can also select page formats, title blocks, etc. Warning: if you specify an existing drawing page to receive the text, any existing elements on that page will be erased and replaced with the text. Be aware that the software will create multiple pages in the specified range if the text does not fit on one page. Select OK to create the pages to receive the text. If more than one page is required to receive the text, RSWire will create additional pages continuing from the specified page number. You can view the newly created pages with the File > Open function.
5-91
Schematic Elements
Edit Schematic Elements The Edit and Modify pull–down menus contain functions for editing existing schematic elements in a drawing. These functions are described in the following sections.
Edit Menu Edit Undo Cut to Clipboard Copy Clipboard Paste Paste Special Browse Copy... Undo The Edit > Undo function will remove the most recently placed drawing element from the screen. Select:
Edit Undo If you execute Edit > Undo multiple times, items will be removed in the reverse order in which they were placed. This will only affect the most recently selected drawing element type. For example, if you draw some lines, a box, and then more lines, only the lines will be affected by the Undo function.
5-92
Schematic Elements
Cut to Clipboard The Edit > Cut to Clipboard function will remove a drawing element and place it in the Windows clipboard where it can be pasted into another application. Copy to Clipboard Use the Edit > Copy Clipboard function to copy portions of an RSWire drawing to the Windows clipboard. The copied portion exists as a Windows metafile in the clipboard and can be pasted as graphics into other Windows applications. Select:
Edit Copy Clipboard The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Select the portion of the drawing that you wish to copy either by selecting individual objects or by windowing an area. Press the <Enter> key when all the desired objects have been selected. The objects will be copied to the Windows clipboard where they will be available for pasting into other applications. Warning: It is strongly recommended that you exit from RSWire before pasting the copied items into another application. The pasted items have a link to the original drawing which can cause the original drawing to be inadvertently affected.
Paste Selecting the Edit > Paste function will allow the user to paste items copied or cut from a non–RSWire application. Paste Special Selecting the Edit > Paste Special function will allow the user to paste items copied or cut from a non–RSWire application. The user is given a number of options as to what format the pasted items will assume (text, AutoCAD entities, etc.). If the source application supports an OLE link, this can be set.
5-93
Schematic Elements
Warning: Do not use the Edit > Cut, Copy Clipboard or Paste functions to copy items within an RSWire drawing. Any items so copied (symbols, wires, etc.) will lose their logical properties. Use the Modify > Copy function to copy RSWire drawing elements within RSWire.
Browse Copy The Browse Copy function allows you to simultaneously display up to four drawing pages and copy portions of these drawings into the current drawing page. For more information, see page 4-35.
Modify Menu Modify Power–Editor Symbol Line Text Field Wire Number Delete Copy Move Stretch Properties Power–Editor The Power–Editor allows you to edit a variety parameters for drawing elements. You can access the Power–Editor through the Modify > Power–Editor function (you will be prompted to “Select Entity”) or by pointing at the desired element and clicking the right mouse button. The following menu of functions will appear.
5-94
Schematic Elements
Device ID Part Number Connection Point Symbol Text Move Rotate Text Position Text Angle Attribute Settings Block Settings
Device ID – Displays the Device ID Assignment dialog box, allowing you to change the current device ID of the selected symbol. Part Number – Displays the Part Number Assignment dialog box, allowing you to change the current part number of the selected symbol. Connection Point – Displays the Modify Connection Point dialog box, allowing you to change the connection point designations of the selected symbol. Symbol Text – Displays a dialog box containing any symbol text associated with the selected symbol. You can edit the text as desired. Move – Activates the Modify > Move function, allowing you to reposition the selected drawing element. Rotate – Displays a dialog box with angle values that allow you to rotate the selected symbol. Highlight the desired angle value and select the OK button. Text Position – Allows you to reposition text associated with the selected symbol. You will be prompted to “Select Attribute.” Select the desired text and then define a new position for it. Text Angle – Allows you to change the angle of text associated with the selected symbol. You will be prompted to “Select Attribute.” Select the desired text. A dialog box with angle values will appear. Highlight the desired angle value and select the OK button. Attribute Settings – Allows you to modify the color, height and label origin of text associated with the selected symbol. You will be prompted to “Select Attribute.” Select the desired text. A dialog box with values will appear. Select the desired value and select the OK button.
5-95
Schematic Elements
Block Settings – Allows you to modify the appearance of the graphic portion of the selected symbol. There are two submenu selections: Color and Symbol Settings. Color allows you to change the color of the symbol. Symbol Settings allow you to change Scale, Rotation and Mirror settings. Modify Symbol The Modify > Symbol function allows you to alter a variety of parameters for existing symbols on a drawing. Note
To edit the default appearance of a symbol and permanently store it in a symbol catalog, use Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function. Select:
Modify Symbol The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Select individual object by pointing and clicking or define a box (window) on the screen around the desired object(s) by selecting one corner and then the opposite corner with the left mouse button. The selected objects(s) will be indicated by dashed lines. Press the <Enter> key to complete the selection. The following Modify Symbol dialog box will appear.
5-96
Schematic Elements
Modify Symbol Device ID Device Type Connection Point Symbol Text
Terminal Dest.
Cable Text
Text Position
Prog. Controller
Cross Reference Toggle
Color Text
Symbol
Color...
Text Angle
Select...
Height
Select...
Label Origin
Select...
Settings Settings...
Symbol Settings OK
Cancel
Help...
A group of checkboxes and buttons are provided in the dialog box for various symbol parameters. In general, by selecting the desired checkbox you will be given the opportunity to select or enter a new value. The following checkboxes and buttons are provided. Device ID – Assign a new device ID to the symbol. A dialog box will appear showing the current device ID. Modify it as desired and select the OK button. Device Type – Assign a new device type to the symbol. A dialog box will appear showing the current device type. Use the Search button to search for existing device types. Enter the desired new device type. You will be prompted for “Automatic copy? Y/N” Answer yes if you wish existing child symbols to be copied into the new device relationship automatically. If you answer no, the following dialog box will appear which allows you to manually select where the information will be copied.
5-97
Schematic Elements
In the above example, a relay (CR) is being modified from a device type 20 (2 normally open, 0 normally closed contacts) to a device type 22 (2 normally open, 2 normally closed contacts). To copy the information manually, one must first select the relay name on the “old” side and then select the relay line (“CR”) on the ’new” side followed by the Exchange button. One can then pick contacts on the old side and then select the order you wish them to occupy on the new side. When all existing contacts have been reassigned, the dialog box will close and device modification will be complete. Note
If a device type was automatically assigned because it is associated with a part number, you will be prompted if the new device type does not match the part number’s device type. Connection Point – Assign new connection point labels. A connection dialog box will appear, listing the current connection point labels. (When a cable symbol has been selected, this function lists cable conductor designations.) Modify Connection Points
Current No. 1 2
Description X1 X2
OK Cancel Help
5-98
Schematic Elements
Enter the desired new label in the appropriate field. (For parent/child symbols, you must edit the text in the field at the bottom of the dialog box.) These entries cannot differ from the labels that were defined when the symbol was created, except in order (for example, you can enter 14 13 instead of 13 14). When finished, select OK. Symbol Text – Assign new symbol text (this is text that is part of the symbol, either fixed or prompted when the symbol is placed). A dialog box will appear showing the current symbol text. Modify it as desired and select the OK button. Text Position – Assign a new position for device IDs, symbol text, connection point text, and cross references. After the OK button is selected you will be prompted to “Select attribute” on the drawing. Pick the text item that you wish to move and select a new position. Terminal Dest. – Change the connection point designations of terminal symbols. Terminal symbol connection points can be designated as Internal, External, or Jumper (see page 11-3). This function lets you make or change this assignment. After selecting this checkbox and OK, the following Terminal Target Settings dialog box will appear (the number of connection points will reflect the type of terminal symbol selected). Make the desired selection for each connection point. Terminal Target Settings
Connection Point 1 Connection Point 2 Connection Point 3 Connection Point 4 Connection Point 5
Internal X X X
External X X
Jumper
OK Cancel Help Accept All Reset
Prog. Controller – Assign new function text for programmable controller symbols. A dialog box will appear listing existing text including rack and module number and function text. The Insert Text button will access and insert function text from an external file (see page 7-38.) Edit the information as desired and select OK.
5-99
Schematic Elements
Programmable Controller Text Definition Device ID:
PLC377
Module:
02
Rack:
01 Address
Function Text
0
I0102/00
Limit switch 1
1
I0102/01
Pushbutton 1 – Start
2
I0102/02
3
I0102/03
4
I0102/04
5
I0102/05
6
I0102/06
7
I0102/07 Next
Previous
I/O Text
OK
Cancel
Cable Text – Allows you to change the descriptive texts associated with a cable symbol. After selecting this checkbox and OK, the Cable Text dialog box will appear, listing any texts associated with the selected cable. Enter or change the texts as desired and select OK to continue. Cross Reference Toggle – Use this checkbox to turn off (hide) the cross references at individual parent and child symbols. Color – Use these checkboxes to change the color of the text. First select either the Text checkbox (to color various symbol labels) or the Symbol checkbox (to color the symbol itself). Use the Color button to display a color selection dialog box. Select the desired color. Select OK for the color, and OK for the Modify Symbol dialog box. You will then be prompted to “Select attribute.” Point and click on the part of the symbol that you wish to modify. This will then appear in the new color. When the Text checkbox is selected you can selectively color device IDs, function text, and connection point labels. The functions in the Text area of the dialog box allow parameters for the various symbol–related texts (device ID, symbol text, programmable controller function text, etc.) to be modified.
5-100
Schematic Elements
Angle – Use this checkbox and button to change the angle of the text. First select the Angle checkbox. Use the Select button to display an angle selection dialog box. Select the desired angle. Select OK for the angle, and OK for the Modify Symbol dialog box. You will then be prompted to “Select attribute.” Point and click on the text that you wish to modify. The text will then appear at the new angle. Height – use this checkbox and button to change the height of the text. First select the Height checkbox. Use the Select button to display a height selection dialog box. Select the desired height. Select OK for the height, and OK for the Modify Symbol dialog box. You will then be prompted to “Select attribute.” Point and click on the text that you wish to modify. The text will then appear with the new height. Label Origin – use this checkbox and button to change the label origin of the text. First select the Label Origin checkbox. Use the Select button to display a label origin selection dialog box. Select the desired label origin. Select OK for the label origin, and OK for the Modify Symbol dialog box. You will then be prompted to “Select attribute.” Point and click on the text that you wish to modify. The text will then appear with the new label origin. Settings – If you wish to change the symbol’s Scale, Rotation, or Mirror settings, select the Settings button. The Symbol Settings dialog box will appear. Select the desired settings followed by OK. Once you have set the parameter for one symbol, you need only select the Settings checkbox to make the same modification to other symbols. Modify Wire/Line Type The Modify > Line function allows you to change three characteristics of a wire or line in an RSWire drawing:
Line Type (Wire vs. Drawing Line) Line Color Line Style (solid, dashed, etc.)
Select:
Modify Line The following Line Modify dialog box will appear. Note
The Format > Linetype and Format > Color functions apply only to lines created in AutoCAD.
5-101
Schematic Elements
Line Modify Line Type
Color
Wire
1
Line Style OK
Drawing
Select
CONTINUOUS Cancel
Select Help...
On the left side of the dialog box are three checkboxes: Line Type, Color and Line Style. You must select these to determine which line characteristics you are going to modify. Line Type – Select this checkbox to change a wire to a drawing line or vice versa. Select the Wire radio button if you want to change drawing lines to wires. Select the Drawing radio button if you wish to change wires to drawing lines. See page 5-3 for a description of the differences between wires and drawing lines. Color – Select this checkbox to change the color of a wire or line. You can enter a number for the color or select the Select button to choose from a color display. Line Style – Select this checkbox to change the line style. Select the Select button to display a list of available choices from which you can make selections.
Continuous (Solid) Border (Dot 2 Dash) Center (Long Dash, Short Dash) Dashed (Short Dashes)
After you have selected the line characteristics that you wish to change, select the OK button. The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Select the lines you wish to modify. When you press <Enter> the selected lines will be modified.
5-102
Schematic Elements
Modify Text The Modify > Text function allows you to edit existing text on the drawing. This function affects only text that was entered with the Draw > Text function. Other text such as device IDs must be modified with the appropriate modify function, (such as Modify > Symbol in the case of device IDs, Modify > Wire Number functions for wire numbers, etc.). Select:
Modify Text The software will prompt you to “Select object.” Select the desired text and press <Enter>. A dialog box will appear displaying the existing text which can be edited as desired. This is the same dialog box used for entering text (see page 5-31). Other text parameters such as height, angle, etc., can also be changed at this time. Select the OK button to load the changes. Modify Field The Modify > Field function allows you to alter parameters of existing fields. Select:
Modify Field The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Click on the field you wish to modify and press <Enter>. A dialog box will appear listing current parameter values for the field. Any of these values can be altered as described for creating fields on page 5-53.
5-103
Schematic Elements
Modify Wire Number The Modify > Wire Number function allows you to alter the parameters of existing wire numbers. You can also reposition wire numbers with this function. This function is identical to the Tools > Wire Number > Manual function. Select:
Modify Wire Number The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Select the wire that you wish to modify and press <Enter>. The Wire Number Manual dialog box will appear. See page 5-73. Note
This function should not be used to modify the number of a wire with a signal cross reference (an error may result). For these wires you should use the Tools > Replace > Wire Number function.
Delete, Undo Delete To delete selected objects from a drawing page, use the Modify > Delete function. Select:
Modify Delete The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” To Delete an Object or Objects – Select individual object by pointing and clicking or define a box (window) on the screen around the desired object(s) by selecting one corner and then the opposite corner with the left mouse button. The selected objects(s) will be indicated by dashed lines. Press the <Enter> key to complete the deletion. In the AutoCAD add–on version of RSWire, when selecting items you can use the AutoCAD “R” and “A” command line options to remove and add items to the set of entities to be deleted. Also, holding <Shift> and selecting an item will remove it from the selection set. The Edit > Undo function will restore the most recently deleted objects. Note
5-104
If you are unable to delete a selected object, the object may be an imported item which would require the use of the Edit > Cut to Clipboard function.
Schematic Elements
Copy To copy objects on the drawing page, use the Modify > Copy function. When items with device IDs are copied, the device IDs will be updated to reflect the position of the copy. Select:
Modify Copy The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Select individual object by pointing and clicking or define a box (window) on the screen around the desired object(s) by selecting one corner and then the opposite corner with the left mouse button. The selected objects(s) will be indicated by dashed lines. Press the <Enter> key to complete the selection. The software will then prompt you to “Select base point.” Select a point on the drawing with the left mouse button that is to be the reference point of the copied object(s). The software will then prompt you to “Select second point of displacement.” Select the destination reference point for the copied objects with the left mouse button. The copied objects will appear at the new location. You can place multiple copies of the selected objects, one after the other. Note
If you are unable to copy a selected object, the object may be an imported item which would require the use of the Edit > Copy Clipboard function.
5-105
Schematic Elements
Move To relocate objects on the drawing page, use the Modify > Move function. Select:
Modify Move The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” To Move an Object or Objects – Select individual object by pointing and clicking or define a box (window) on the screen around the desired object(s) by selecting one corner and then the opposite corner with the left mouse button. The selected objects(s) will be indicated by dashed lines. Press the <Enter> key to complete the selection. The software will then prompt you to select “Base point or displacement.” Select a point on the drawing with the left mouse button that is to be the reference point of the moved object(s). This point determines where the cursor will be positioned on the items being moved. The software will then prompt you to select “Second point of displacement.” Select the destination reference point for the objects with the left mouse button. The moved objects will appear at the new location. Device IDs of Moved Symbols – When a project is created or modified there is a checkbox in the Project Parameters dialog box labeled Adjust Device ID When Symbols Are Moved (see page 3-10). This checkbox determines if the device ID of an existing symbol will be adjusted automatically when the symbol is moved to a new position. This affects only projects that use one of the device ID formats based on page and line number. Select the checkbox to enable automatic device ID adjustment. To change this setting on an existing project, use the Manage > Project > Modify function and select the Project Parameters button.
5-106
Schematic Elements
Stretch Use the Modify > Stretch function to make wires and drawing lines longer or shorter. Select:
Modify Stretch The software will prompt “Define first corner of the field.” You must define a field (box) on the screen that contains the endpoint of the line that you wish to extend. After the first corner is selected, the software prompts you to “Define the opposite corner of the field.” The software prompts “Select base point.” Select a point on the line (usually the endpoint you wish to reposition). The software prompts “Specify second point of displacement.” Select a new point to extend or shorten the line by the desired amount. If you select the endpoints of multiple lines, all will be stretched. Warning: Do not stretch wires in a direction perpendicular to the original direction of the wire. This can cause unexpected results in the drawing. Wires should only be stretched in a direction that is parallel to the wire.
Properties The Modify > Properties function allows you to change the color, line weight and other properties of imported AutoCAD drawing objects. This function will not affect objects created with RSWire drawing functions. Select:
Modify Properties The Properties dialog box will appear listing a variety of object properties. You can select new values by clicking in the desired field. Refer to the AutoCAD manual for further information.
5-107
Schematic Elements
Replace Symbol The Tools > Replace > Symbol function allows you to replace one type of symbol with another. You can select individual symbols for replacement or globally replace one symbol type throughout a page or an entire project. Note
The existing symbol and the symbol used to replace it must belong to the same symbol group (GS1, PS1, etc.). If the existing symbol uses a device type, the replacement symbol must be able to use the same device type. Select:
Tools Replace Symbol The Replace Symbol dialog box will appear. Replace Symbol Replace All Pages
Current Page
Existing Symbol Select Individually Search...
Name: New Symbol
Search...
Name: Maintain On New Symbol Device ID
Part Number
Connection Point Text
Symbol Text With Attributes
All Symbol Text
Terminal Target Settings
Settings Take New Symbol Settings OK
Cancel
The following selections are provided:
5-108
Settings... Help...
Schematic Elements
Replace – Select whether you wish a global replacement to occur on All Pages of the project or only the Current Page. Existing Symbol – Enter the name of the symbol that you wish to replace. This should be a symbol name (PBNO, LSNC, etc.) and not a device ID (PB102, LS5, etc.). Pick the Select Individually checkbox if you wish to select specific occurrences of the symbol for replacement. Otherwise, all occurrences of the symbol on the current page or in the current project will be replaced. Use the Search button to display a symbol list from which selections can be made. New Symbol – Enter the name of the symbol that is to replace the current symbol. This can be any symbol from the libraries on the software’s symbol (catalog) path. This path is listed in the RS\WORK\ECSCAD.CFG file. Example: CATALOG_PATH=C:\RS\CATALOG\JIC C:\RS\CATALOG\IEC (See Section 15 for more on search paths.) Use the Search button to display a symbol list from which selections can be made. Maintain on New Symbol – This series of checkboxes allows you to select items from the current symbol that you wish to keep: Device ID – Select this checkbox to keep the current device ID. Otherwise you must enter a new device ID after the replace function by using the Modify > Symbol function. Connection Point Text – Select this checkbox to keep the current connection point text. Otherwise, the connection point text defined for the new symbol will be used. All Symbol Text – Select this checkbox to keep all symbol text including attribute text from the current symbol. Part Number – Select this checkbox to keep any part numbers assigned to the current symbol. Symbol Text With Attributes – Select this checkbox to keep symbol text with attributes from the current symbol (attribute text only). Terminal Target Settings – Select this checkbox to keep the terminal target destination settings (internal, external, jumper). Settings – Select the Take New Symbol Settings checkbox if you wish the new symbol to have different settings (Scale, Rotation, etc.) from the current symbol. Select the Settings button to display a dialog box where new settings can be made. Select the OK button to begin the symbol replacement. If you selected the Select Individually checkbox, you will be prompted to select symbols on the drawing. 5-109
Schematic Elements
Clear Page The Manage > Page > Clear function erases everything on the current drawing page. Use this function with extreme caution. See page 4-17.
Replace Device IDs The Tools > Replace > Device ID function allows you to renumber device IDs and terminals across an entire project. This is useful if there has been editing within the project and the symbol IDs no longer represent their positions in the schematic, or if there are gaps in the ID sequences. Select:
Tools Replace Device ID The Select Project dialog box will appear. Select the desired project name and select OK to continue. The Replace Device ID dialog box will appear. Replace Device ID Device ID Terminals First Number
1
Sort Direction X
Y
OK
5-110
Cancel
Help...
Schematic Elements
Renumber Device IDs Select the Device ID checkbox followed by the OK button. All the devices IDs in the project will be renumbered according to the format that was selected in the Default Device ID Selection field of the Project Parameters dialog box when the project was created (or when the Manage > Project > Modify function was used). See page 3-9 for more on device ID formats. Renumber Terminals The Tools > Replace > Device ID function allows you to automatically renumber terminals throughout a whole project, starting with a specified number. Procedure: 1.
Select the Tools > Replace > Device ID function. Select the desired project.
2.
In the Replace Device ID dialog box select the Terminals checkbox.
3.
In the First Number field enter the number that the first terminal in each strip is to have. If you want continuous numbering of the terminals through the whole project, you must use identical terminal strip designations (installation, location, device ID). Terminals are then numbered in the order of the existing pages.
4.
Select either the X or Y sort direction radio button to determine the direction in which terminal numbering will proceed (x=horizontal, y=vertical). Terminals are numbered in ascending order of x coordinate and descending order of y coordinate. If direction x is specified, terminals on the same x coordinate as one another are numbered first, followed by terminals on the next higher x coordinate, and so on across the page. The same applies by analogy for direction y. Terminal numbers which are part of a macro are treated as a single unit and numbered in such a way as to indicate their association with one another. See the next page for X and Y terminal numbering examples.
5.
Select the OK button to execute the renumbering.
The terminal number can also be an alphanumeric expression. In this case, it is only included in the numbering operation if it meets the following conditions:
it consists of a single number (number is replaced by new number) it has a number at the beginning, the remaining sequence is alphanumeric (number is replaced, rest remains unchanged) it consists of a question mark only (question mark is replaced by number)
5-111
Schematic Elements
Terminal Numbering – JIC Examples Note
Terminals within a macro are always numbered consecutively. TB1 TB1 11 TB1
10
TB1 1
4
7
2
5
8
TB1
TB1
15
13
TB1
16
14
Macro
Symbols X Direction Terminal Numbering
12
Symbols
Macro Rotated 90 Degrees Symbols
TB1 3
6
9
Macro Rotated 90 Degrees
TB1 TB1 3 TB1
6
Symbols Y Direction Terminal Numbering
9
10
Macro Rotated 90Degrees
12
13
Symbols
TB1 14 15
16
TB1 8
TB1
5-112
11
1
TB1
2
4
TB1
5
7
Macro
Macro Rotated 90 Degrees
Symbols
Schematic Elements
Terminal Numbering – IEC Examples Note
Terminals within a macro are always numbered consecutively. –X1 –X1 11 –X1
10
Symbols Terminal Numbering X Direction
–X1 1
4
7
2
5
8
–X1
15
13
–X1
16
14
Macro
Symbols
Macro
6
9
Macro
–X1 –X1 3 –X1
6
Symbols 9
10
Macro
12
13
Symbols
–X1 14 15
16
Macro
–X1 8
–X1
–X1
Symbols
–X1 3
Terminal Numbering Y Direction
12
11
1
–X1
2
4
–X1
5
7
Macro
Symbols
5-113
Schematic Elements
Replace Text The Tools > Replace > Text function allows you to globally replace device IDs, symbol text or standard text on the currently active drawing page. With the desired drawing page displayed, select the Tools > Replace > Text function. Select:
Tools Replace Text The Replace Text dialog box will appear. Replace Text Select Text Type Device ID Symbol Text Text Case Sensitive Old: New: OK
Cancel
Help...
In the Select Text Type area, select which kind of text you wish to replace: Device ID – Device IDs; the numbered symbol identifiers. Symbol Text – Text that is defined when the symbol is created or automatically prompted when the symbol is placed. Text – Standard text that was entered with the Draw > Text function.
5-114
Schematic Elements
In the Old field enter the text that you wish to replace. You must match the upper/lower case of the existing text. Any text entered will be treated as a wildcard entry. In other words, it will find the specified characters even if they exist in a longer string of text (of the selected type). In the New field enter the new text that is to replace the old text. Select the Case Sensitive checkbox to make the replace function apply only to text that exactly matches the upper/lower case letters entered in the Old field. Select the OK button to execute the replace. The software will search for the first occurrence of the old text on the current page. It will then display the new text in the dialog box. Replace Text =L1+E1–MDS1 Exchange
Exchange All
Next
Cancel
To Replace One Occurrence of the Text – Select the Exchange button. To Replace All Occurrences of the Text on the Current Page – Select the Exchange All button. To Skip the Replace for the Current Occurrence – Select the Next button. The current occurrence will remain unchanged and the software will seek the next occurrence. To Exit the Exchange Function – Select the Cancel button.
Replace Symbol Text The Tools > Replace > Symbol Text function allows you to replace any symbol text of any existing symbols based on device ID and attribute number from a text file. (Symbol text is text defined when the symbol is created or automatically prompted when the symbol is placed.)
5-115
Schematic Elements
Select:
Tools Replace Symbol Text When you activate the Tools > Replace > Symbol Text function, the Select File dialog box will appear. Select the file that contains the replacement text. (See next page for information on creating and formatting this file.)
Scrolling lists of filenames and directories are provided from which you can search for and select the desired file. The Find File button allows you to search for files matching given criteria. When you select Find File the Browse/Search dialog box is displayed. Here you can enter a Search Pattern for the file name (such as symbol* to find files that begin with “symbol”). You can also select which File Type (extension) will be searched for, minimum Time and Date values, and which drives and paths will be searched. The Locate button allows you to search for a specific filename. When you have selected the desired file in the Select File dialog box, select the OK button to execute the symbol text replace operation. When a page is active the function will only change devices found on the open page. If the function is run when no page file is open, the program will query the user to select a project. All devices on all pages of the selected project selected will then be available for symbol text replacement. 5-116
Schematic Elements
Symbol Text Replace File Format: The file containing the replacement symbol text should be an ASCII file with lines containing the following information, each item in quotes and separated by commas: “device ID”,“attribute number”, “new text string” Here is an example file: ”=LINE1+EN1–RES1”,”31”,”560 OHMS^3.25 WATTS” ”=LINE1+EN1–CAP1”,”31”,”1400 MFD, 100VDC” ”=LINE1+EN1–OVPR”,”1”,”OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION^RELAY” ”=LINE1+EN1–L1”,”1”,”FUSE F1^AVAILABLE” ”=LINE1+EN1–L1”,”31”,”G” ”=LINE1+EN1–D1”,”31”,”IR206D” ”=LINE1+EN1–PS”,”14”,”24VDC^INPUT” ”=LINE1+EN1–PS”,”14”,”24VDC^OUTPUT” ”=LINE1+EN1–PS”,”31”,”75 WATTS” ”=LINE1+EN1–PC”,”31”,”PWR322^POWER SUPPLY” ”=LINE1+EN1–R1S1”,”4”,”1” ”=LINE1+EN1–R1S2”,”4”,”2” ”=LINE1+EN1–L6”,”1”,”FUSE F6 AVAILABLE” ”=LINE1+EN1–L6”,”31”,”G” ”=LINE1+EN1–L7”,”1”,”FUSE F7 AVAILABLE”
For a list of symbol text attributes, see page 6-15. Note
Text attributes are defined in the file RS\MENU\DIALOG\ATT_ENG.TXT. Users can edit this file to define unused attributes, however this file may be overwritten when a new version (update) of RSWire is installed. The user can also define his own attributes in a file called ATT_CUST.TXT (which the user must create). The software will first read ATT_ENG.TXT and then ATT_CUST.TXT. Any values in ATT_CUST.TXT will then overwrite the attributes in the first file. The file ATT_CUST.TXT must begin with attribute 42 which is the first user–definable attribute. Example format of ATT_CUST.TXT: 42 43 44 45
Note
customer customer customer customer
defined defined defined defined
attribute attribute attribute attribute
The part number attribute (number 10) cannot be replaced using this method. The part number is converted to text at the time of symbol placement and is no longer an attribute.
5-117
Schematic Elements
Edit Part Number To change the part number assigned to existing symbols in a drawing, use the following procedure: 1.
If assigned part numbers are not currently displayed in the drawing, select the Tools > System Settings function and select the Display Settings tab. Select the Display Part Numbers checkbox. Assigned part numbers will now be displayed in the drawing.
2.
Point the cursor at the part number you wish to change and click the right mouse button. Select Part Number from the pop–up menu. The Assign Part Number dialog box will appear. This dialog box will list any currently assigned part numbers. See page 5-79 for more information.
3.
To remove a part number when multiple part numbers have been assigned, double click on the part number you wish to remove in the list of assigned part numbers. New part numbers can then be searched for and selected. _
Assign Part Number Device ID Filter SYMB_REF =
SYMB_REF PREGROUP PARTNUMBER DESCR MANUFACT
CR Refresh
SYMB_REF PREFGROUP
PARTNUMBER
CR CR CR CR CR
500FL-COA93 500FL-COB93 500FL-COC93 500FL-COD93 500FL-COF93
SYMB_REF PREFGROUP
PARTNUMBER
CR
500FL-COA93
DESCR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR DESCR
=”CR” = = = =
MANUFACT
TECHDATE_1
A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B
AC CONTACTOR (NE AC CONTACTOR (NE AC CONTACTOR (NE AC CONTACTOR (NE AC CONTACTOR (NE
MANUFACT
TECHDATE_1
CONTACTOR A-B
AC CONTACTOR (NE
Assigned Part Numbers Are Listed Here OK
5-118
Cancel
Help...
Schematic Elements
Replace Part Number Globally The Tools > Replace > Part Number function allows you to replace assigned part numbers throughout a project. Select:
Tools Replace Part Number The Replace Part Number dialog box will appear. Replace Part Number
Old
New
OK Cancel Help Search Save
In the Replace Part Number dialog box there are two columns of fields labeled Old and New. In one of the Old fields enter the existing part number that you wish to change. (You can see a list of existing part numbers in the current project by double clicking in any of the Old fields. You can select from this list.) In the corresponding New field to the right, enter the new part number that will replace the old part number. Select the Save button to save the replacement list to a text file. This file can be used in future work sessions (for other projects) by selecting the Search button. Select the OK button to execute the change. The old part number will be changed to the new part number wherever it has been assigned in the current project.
5-119
Schematic Elements
Deleting Wire Number To Delete a Single Wire Number: You can delete the wire itself, or use the Modify > Wire Number function, select the wire, and delete the existing wire number from the Wire Number field of the dialog box. Then select OK. To Globally Delete Existing Wire Numbers: Select:
Tools Wire Number Delete The following Delete Wire Numbers dialog box will appear. Delete Wire Numbers All (including manually assigned) Only Automatically Assigned Select Pages OK
Cancel
Help...
The All radio button will cause all wire numbers to be deleted including those that were manually assigned. The Only Automatically Assigned radio button will cause only those wire numbers that were automatically assigned to be deleted. Activating the Select Pages checkbox allows you to select the pages on which the wire numbering will be deleted. After you select the OK button in the Delete Wire Numbers dialog box, a page select dialog box will appear, allowing you to pick the project, installation, and pages on which the wire numbering will be deleted. If you do not select the Select Pages checkbox, wire numbering (of the selected type) will be deleted throughout the entire project. Select the OK button to proceed with wire number deletion. The software will ask “Are you sure?” Select OK to delete the wire numbers. 5-120
Schematic Elements
I/O Device ID The Tools > I/O Device ID function goes through the current drawing page and changes the device IDs of symbols connected to a programmable controller symbol to match the I/O address to which it is attached.
Tools I/O Device ID Only the symbol that is closest to the programmable controller symbol will be renamed. If a terminal symbol is closest to the programmable controller symbol, then the terminal will be skipped over and the next closest symbol will be renamed.
5-121
Schematic Elements
Linetype Properties To modify linetypes, use the Format > Linetype function. Select:
Format Linetype The Linetype Manager dialog box will appear.
5-122
Schematic Elements
Layers In RSWire each category of drawing object (symbols, texts, wires, etc.) is automatically placed on a separate “layer” in the drawing. This separation allows a single setting to be made that will affect everything on that layer (and not affect items on other layers). Each layer has a name that distinguishes it from other layers. The user can create new layers and place things on these layers, however the RSWire drawing and editing functions will only recognize items placed on the standard RSWire layers. See page 5-128 for a list of RSWire layers. The Format > Layer function allows you to select drawing layers and make various settings for these layers. This function is useful for selectively hiding portions of a drawing when plotting or for locking layers to prevent editing. You can also set colors and line types for an entire layer. Select:
Format Layer The Layer Properties dialog box will appear.
5-123
Schematic Elements
The Layer Properties dialog box lists each layer in the current drawing and shows each layer’s on/off status, color and line type.
Selecting Layers You can select one or more individual layers by clicking on the desired layer name to highlight it. To Select All Layers – Select the first layer, hold down the <Shift> key, slide the scroll bar down to the bottom, and select the last layer. To Deselect All Layers – Select any single layer.
5-124
Schematic Elements
To Select Specific Layers – Select the first layer, hold down the key, and select additional layers. To Deselect Specific Layers – Select any single layer.
Layer Settings The following settings are possible in the Layer& Linetype Properties dialog box: Show – Select one of the following layer types to be listed: All All in use All unused All Xref dependent All not Xref dependent All that pass filter Set Filter dialog Current – When a layer is current, you can create new objects on that layer. To make a layer current, select the layer name and select the Current button A layer is current when the layer name is shown next to the Current button. (O...) On/Off – Select the icon to turn the currently selected layer on and off. When a layer is off it is invisible on the drawing screen and on plots. An On layer is identified by a highlighted icon in the column. (F...) Freeze/Thaw in All Viewpoints, Current Viewpoints, New Viewpoints – Freezing a layer is similar to turning a layer off in that it is invisible on the screen and in plots. Additionally, a frozen layer is not included in drawing regenerations. By freezing layers, the regenerating speed of complex drawings can be improved. To freeze the currently selected layer, select the Freeze icon. To un–freeze a layer, select the Freeze icon. A frozen layer is identified by a highlighted icon in the column. Note
The Freeze in Current Viewpoints and Freeze in New Viewpoints properties are valid only when tilemode is off. (L...) Lock/Unlock – When a layer is locked you cannot edit the objects on that layer (although you can add objects to the layer). The locked layer is visible provided it has not also been turned off or frozen. To lock the currently selected layer, select the Lock icon. To unlock a locked layer select the Lock icon. A locked layer is identified by a highlighted icon in the column.
5-125
Schematic Elements
(C...) Color – To change the color of a layer, first select the layer, then select the Set Color button. A Select Color dialog box will appear allowing you to choose a color. Select OK. The current color of the layer is indicated in the Color column of the Layer Control dialog box. Linetype – To change the line type of objects on a layer, first select the layer, then select the Linetype text. A Select Linetype dialog box will appear allowing you to choose a line style. Select OK. The current line type of the layer is indicated in the Linetype column.
New – The New button is used to create new layers. To create a new drawing layer, select the New button and enter the layer name in the text field. The layer name can be up to 31 characters long. The new layer name will appear in the layer list. Note
To rename a layer first select a layer name from the list. Its name will appear in the text field. Enter the new name in this field. The layer name will be changed to the new name. Do not rename the standard RSWire drawing layers (layer names starting with “ECS”). Renaming these layers will make them inaccessible to the RSWire software. Delete – The Delete button is used to delete layers. To delete a layer first select a layer name from the list. Select the Delete button and the layer will be deleted.
Note
5-126
You cannot delete the current layer (name listed next to the Current button), layer 0, an Xref layer, or a layer that contains objects.
Schematic Elements
RSWire Layer Names RSWire drawing layers follow a naming standard that indicates the type of object found on that layer. All RSWire layer names begin with the characters ECS_L. The next letter indicates whether the objects on this layer are evaluated (E) or not evaluated (X). An evaluated object is part of the online control or can be changed by the program automatically, e.g. the ladder text, frame size, etc. The next letter indicates whether the objects on this layer are visible (V) or invisible (X). Visible objects are normally always shown except when switched off by the LAYER command. Example: Standard symbols in the schematic. Invisible objects are normally invisible independent of the other (visible) objects. Example: The shape of a drill hole in a panel layout. The remainder of the layer name is a description of the type of object or portion of object on that layer. Example: ECS_LEV_SYM_DEVID for symbol device ID.
5-127
Schematic Elements
Symbol: Evaluated – Visible (standard symbol) Layer Name
Description
ECS_LEV_SYM
Initial insert layer
ECS_LEV_SYM_GEO
Geometry (app. variable)
ECS_LEV_SYM_GEO3D
Geometry 3D panel layout
ECS_LEV_SYM_GEO_SCM
Geometry (schematic)
ECS_LEV_SYM_DEVID
Device ID
ECS_LEV_SYM_CPOINT
Connection point text
ECS_LEV_SYM_TPOINT
Terminal text
ECS_LEV_SYM_TEXT
Symbol text
ECS_LEV_SYM_PARTNO
Part number
ECS_LEV_SYM_PCR
Potential cross reference text
ECS_LEV_SYM_EED_PNT
Extended Entity Data at Point
ECS_LEV_SYM_M_RP
Reference point mark
ECS_LEV_SYM_M_CP
Connection point mark
ECS_LEV_SYM_M_PN
Part number mark
ECS_LEV_SYM_DEVICE
Device Type
ECS_LEV_SYM_NAME
Symbol name
ECS_LEV_SYM_MARK
Selected symbol mark
Symbol: Evaluated – Invisible
5-128
ECS_LEX_SYM
Initial insert layer
ECS_LEX_SYM_CPOINT
Connection point text
ECS_LEX_SYM_DEVICE
Device type
ECS_LEX_SYM_DEVID
Device ID
ECS_LEX_SYM_GEO
Geometry (app. variable)
ECS_LEX_SYM_GEO_SCM
Geometry (app. variable)
ECS_LEX_SYM_NAME
Symbol name
ECS_LEX_SYM_TPOINT
Terminal text
ECS_LEX_SYM_TEXT
Symbol text
ECS_LEX_SYM_PARTNO
Part number
ECS_LEX_SYM_PCR
Potential cross reference text
ECS_LEX_SYM_EED_PNT
Extended Entity Data at Point
ECS_LEX_SYM_M_RP
Reference point mark
ECS_LEX_SYM_M_CP
Connection point mark
ECS_LEX_SYM_M_PN
Part number mark
Schematic Elements
Symbol: Not Evaluated – Visible ECS_LXV_SYM
Initial insert layer
ECS_LXV_SYM_CPOINT
Connection point text
ECS_LXV_SYM_DEVICE
Device type
ECS_LXV_SYM_DEVID
Device ID
ECS_LXV_SYM_GEO
Geometry (app. variable)
ECS_LXV_SYM_GEO_HEX
Geometry (app. variable)
ECS_LXV_SYM_GEO_SCM
Geometry (app. variable)
ECS_LXV_SYM_NAME
Symbol name
ECS_LXV_SYM_TPOINT
Terminal text
ECS_LXV_SYM_TEXT
Symbol text
ECS_LXV_SYM_PARTNO
Part number
ECS_LXV_SYM_PCR
Potential cross reference text
ECS_LXV_SYM_EED_PNT
Extended Entity Data at POINT
ECS_LXV_SYM_M_RP
Reference point mark
ECS_LXV_SYM_M_CP
Connection point mark
ECS_LXV_SYM_M_PN
Part number mark
ECS_LXV_NAV_MARK
Navigator mark
ECS_LXV_CR_POS
Connection point position during symbol create
Symbol: Dummy Symbol – Evaluated – Visible (rotated symbol placement) ECS_LED_SYM
Initial insert layer
Macro: Evaluated – Visible ECS_LEX_MC_M_RP
Reference point mark
Cross Reference Symbol: Evaluated – Visible ECS_LEV_SYMCR
Geometry + all texts
ECS_LEV_SYMCR_M_RP
Reference point mark
5-129
Schematic Elements
Field: Evaluated Visible ECS_LEV_FIELD
Geometry + device ID
ECS_LEV_LINE
Wire (evaluated)
Line: Evaluated
Line: Not Evaluated Visible ECS_LXV_LINE
Drawing line (not evaluated)
Wire Number: Evaluated Visible ECS_LEV_LINE_WNO
Wire number
Free Texts: Not Evaluated Visible ECS_LXV_TEXT
Free text
Page Header: Evaluated Visible
5-130
ECS_LEV_PH_DATA
Drawing data
ECS_LEV_PH_EED
EED data at POINT
ECS_LEV_PH_TMP
EED data temporarily
ECS_LEV_PH_LOGO
Logo
Schematic Elements
Page: Evaluated Visible ECS_LEV_PG_FRAME
Page frame
ECS_LEV_PG_LADDER
Ladder Marks
Temporarily Used Layers ECS_LXV_CURSOR
Symbol as cursor
ECS_LXX_JUST_MOD
Modify justification
5-131
Schematic Elements
List Object Function (for drawing elements) The View > List function allows you to view data relating to specific entities in a drawing. Select:
View List With a drawing page displayed, select the View > List function. The software will prompt you to “select objects.” Select one or more drawing entities (wires, symbols, circles, etc.) by pointing the cursor and clicking the left mouse button. Then press the <Enter> key. The software will then display a text window containing data for the selected drawing entities. If there is more information than will fit in the window, the listing will stop and you can press the <Enter> key to display the next screen of data. The information listed depends on the type of entity, but its type, its x,y,z position, and the layer on which it is drawn are always listed. Color and line type are displayed if either are not done by layer. The data displayed for symbols includes the symbol name and catalog (example: “JIC–PBNO”) as well as descriptions of the graphic elements in the symbols. Data for the various symbol attributes (device ID, connection point text, etc.) are also displayed. For lines and wires, information includes the x,y,z coordinates of the endpoints, the length, and the angle in the x–y plane from start point to end point. For circles, information includes center point, radius, area, and circumference. You can toggle between the list window and the drawing window by pressing the key. If you select many entities, the list output may be very long. You can cancel the list display by pressing the and keys. To cancel the “select objects” prompt, press the and keys.
5-132
Create Schematic Elements
6 Create Schematic Elements This section describes how users can create custom symbols, macros, and other elements for use in RSWireTM Designer drawings. The following sections are included:
Create Symbols Symbol Elements Symbol Creation Procedure Creating a Symbol from an AutoCAD DWG File Symbol Creation Examples Creating an Example Parent Symbol Creating an Example Child Symbol Creating an Example Cross Reference Symbol Creating an Example Device Type Definition Creating an Example PLC (Parent) Symbol Creating an Example PLC (Child) Symbol Creating an Example Terminal Symbol Creating Pin Charts Creating Form C Contacts Creating Signal Cross Reference Symbols Create Macro Create Title Block Macro Create Device Type Delete, Copy, Rename, for Symbols, Macros, Devices Modify Symbol, Macro, Device
6-1
Create Schematic Elements
Create Symbols Symbol Elements Creating a symbol involves drawing the symbol itself and also defining the related information shown in the following illustration. ELEMENTS OF A JIC SYMBOL Device ID Part Number
CR 103 8501XD1000V02 Reference Point
Connection Points A
Connection Point Text
B
CONTROL RELAY
Symbol Text
ELEMENTS OF AN IEC SYMBOL Reference Point A1
Device ID
Connection Points
–K2 8501XD1000V02 A2
Connection Point Text
Part Number
LOW TEMP RELAY
Symbol Text
Device ID – A device ID tag must be defined for intelligent symbol types. The rest of the device ID is added to this tag at the time the symbol is placed on the drawing. In the illustration above, “CR” is used as the tag for control relay device IDs. The rest of the ID is filled in automatically when the symbol is placed in a drawing and might consist of consecutive numbers, page number, line number, or a combination of these (this is determined in the Project Parameters dialog box when a new project is created). Reference Point – A reference point must be defined. This point will be positioned on the cursor when the symbol is placed in the drawing.
6-2
Create Schematic Elements
Connection Points – These points determine where lines will break when the symbol is placed on a line or when a line is drawn through the symbol. If desired, Connection Point Text can be defined that will automatically label the connection points when the symbol is placed (such as A and B terminations on a relay coil). Symbol Text – This is optional, additional text which will appear with the symbol. Symbol text can be fixed text, or it can be configured to prompt the user for information (Amp values, for example) when the symbol is placed. Part Number (Optional) – You can enter a part number during symbol creation so that this part number will be automatically prompted whenever the symbol is placed.
6-3
Create Schematic Elements
Symbol Libraries and Directories Symbols for a given type of application or drawing format are organized into symbol libraries, also known as symbol catalogs. There are available RSWire catalogs for JIC (electrical), IEC (electrical), ISA (process control), hydraulic, and pneumatic symbols. A sub–directory (folder) exists for each symbol catalog inside the RS\CATALOG directory. Inside each symbol catalog directory there are the following subdirectories: BLOCK – Contains graphics files (.DWG) and definition data files (.EC1) for each symbol in the catalog. DEVICE – Contains device type definition files (.EC1) for device types associated with this symbol catalog. MACRO – Contains graphics files (.DWG) and definition data files (.EC1) for each macro associated with this catalog. In each of the above directories there is a file called NAMES.EC2 that lists which symbol, device type or macro is associated with each file. WMF – This directory contains the graphics files (.WMF) for the symbol selection groups used with the Insert > Select Icon function.
6-4
Create Schematic Elements
Symbol Catalog Path The file RS\WORK\ECSCAD.CFG contains a path statement that determines where symbols are stored and which catalogs are available when creating projects. For example: CATALOG_PATH=C:\RS\CATALOG\CUSTOM\ C:\RS\CATALOG\JIC\ C:\RS\CATALOG\AB_CAT\
The first directory named in this path (CUSTOM in this example) is the directory where all newly created symbols will be stored. Edit the path statement if you wish symbols to be stored in a different directory. Moving Symbols From Catalog to Catalog Symbols can be moved from one catalog to another using the File > Backup/Restore function. Selected symbols can be saved to a file using the backup function and then loaded into the desired catalog using the restore function. See page 3-21. If you decide to move symbols by manually copying the files from one catalog directory to another, the copied symbols will not be listed in the new catalog until the NAMES.EC2 file is updated. To do this, delete the existing NAMES.EC2 file in the destination directory. The software will then generate a new, updated file when that catalog is accessed.
6-5
Create Schematic Elements
Symbol Creation Procedure Symbols created with this procedure become part of an RSWire symbol library and can be accessed at any time during schematic creation. The symbol will be stored in the first catalog search path (listed in the RS\WORK\ECSCAD.CFG file). The default library for new user–created symbols is CUSTOM. Note
During symbol creation, if you wish to cancel the symbol creation, select the Cancel function from the Manage > Symbol menu. This will erase any symbol information that has been entered but not yet stored. 1.
Use a blank page. Display a blank drawing page. There can be drawing elements such as lines, circles and boxes on the page, but no symbols can exist on the page. If a blank page is not available, create one using the File > New > Page function (see page 4-11). Turn off the Online function. When you create the page, turn off the Online checkbox in the New Page dialog box. Symbols cannot be created when the Online function is active. For an existing online page, use the Manage > Page > Modify function to turn off the Online checkbox.
2.
Select Manage > Symbol > New/Modify.
Manage Symbol New/Modify If the page has symbols on it, the message “Caution: Symbols are already placed on this page” will be displayed and the symbol creation function will be canceled. You must use a page that contains no symbols. 3.
6-6
Enter symbol name, type, description. The software will next display the New/Modify Symbol dialog box. Enter a symbol name of up to 14 characters in the Symbol Name field. Do not use an existing symbol name unless you wish to replace or edit the existing symbol. Use the List button to see a list of existing symbol names.
Create Schematic Elements
New/Modify Symbol List...
Symbol Name: Preferred Direction Vertical
Horizontal
Snapmode: Nearest Endpoint Description:
Search Language Text... Symbol Group: GS1 General Symbol (no cross ref.) OK
Cancel
Help...
The Preferred Direction checkboxes determine how the software will look at the symbol when generating a connection list. It also determines how wires will be broken or closed when the symbol is placed or moved. Select the Horizontal checkbox if the symbol is to be scanned from left to right (in other words, if the wire will be horizontal in relation to the symbol). Select the Vertical checkbox if the symbol is to be scanned from top to bottom (i.e., if the wire will be vertical in relation to the symbol, as in IEC format drawings).
Preferred direction horizontal
Preferred direction vertical
Use the Snapmode: Nearest Endpoint checkbox to create a symbol that will automatically snap to the end of a wire. The reference point of the symbol will be positioned at the nearest endpoint of the wire on which it is placed. This function is mainly used to create signal cross reference symbols and PLC child symbols.
6-7
Create Schematic Elements
Enter a description of the symbol up to 100 characters long in the Description field. This description will appear in symbol lists. If you wish to include foreign language text strings in the description, select the Search Language Text button to select from the available strings. In the Symbol Group field, select the type of symbol that you are creating. Select the down arrow button to display a list of symbol types. The following types are available: GS1
General Symbol, no cross ref. (e.g., lights, pushbuttons)
GS2
General Symbol, no cross ref. treated as wire (trailing cables)
PS1
Parent symbol with cross ref. (e.g., coils of relays, etc.)
PS3
Child symbol with cross ref. (e.g., normally open contact, normally closed contact, form C contact, etc.) Cross reference symbol
TS1
Terminal block
TS2
Plug - multi-pole
TS3
Plug - single pole
TS4
Parent plug with cross reference
TS5
Child pin with cross reference
TS6
Connector Cross reference symbol (pin chart)
SG1
Incoming signal (1 line text)
SG2
Incoming signal (2 line text)
SG3
Outgoing signal (1 line text)
SG4
Outgoing signal (2 line text)
SG5
Incoming signal (star configuration, 1 line text)
SG6
Incoming signal (star configuration, 2 line text)
SG7
Outgoing signal (star, same as SG8)
SG8
Outgoing signal (star, same as SG7)
CP1
Connection point
DW1
Diagonal wiring connection symbol
BOX
Rectangular symbol
RES
Reserved for future use - Do not use
CS2
Cable Child Symbol
CS3
Cable Cross Reference Symbol
SG9
Outgoing Signal, Device ID Reference (1 line text)
SGA
Outgoing Signal, Device ID Reference (2 line text)
PS2
6-8
Create Schematic Elements
Select the OK button when the New/Modify Symbol dialog box is complete. If the symbol name is already assigned, the following message will appear: “Symbol already exists. Modify ?” Select the Yes button to redefine the symbol. Select the No button to cancel symbol creation.
Important
4.
Select reference point. After you select OK in the New/Modify Symbol dialog box, the software will prompt you on the command line to define a reference point. This is the insertion point of the symbol in relation to the rest of the symbol. Point to the desired reference point on the drawing page and click the left mouse button. The reference point will be marked on the screen with a small inverted triangle.
5.
Draw the symbol. Now use RSWire drawing functions such as lines, circles, boxes, text, etc., to create the symbol shape. You may call up existing symbols and use them as part of a new symbol. You may wish to change grid spacing (use the Tools > System Settings > Grid Settings tab) while creating symbols.
When drawing the symbol, be aware of the grid spacing that will be used in your schematic drawings so that connection points are properly spaced. Connection points must always be on this grid. 6.
Enter Device ID. Once the symbol is drawn, return to the Manage > Symbol menu and select the Device ID function. The software will prompt you to “Define Device ID position.” Select a point near (usually above for JIC and to the left for IEC) the symbol where you wish the device ID to appear on drawings. The following Device ID Parameter dialog box will appear. Device ID Parameter
Device–ID:
?
Label Origin:
5
Select...
Height:
0.150
Select...
Angle:
0
Select...
Color:
0
Select...
x–offset:
0.500
y–offset:
0.500
OK
Note
Cancel
Help...
Values shown in inches.
6-9
Create Schematic Elements
The following fields are provided: Device ID – Enter a device ID tag. The tag is just a prefix or mnemonic for the type of device for which you are creating a symbol. For example, you might use “PB” for pushbutton, or “K” for IEC relays. Complete device IDs are generated by the system when a symbol is placed. Label Origin – Enter a value to select whether the ID will appear to the left, right, above, below, or centered on the device ID origin point (i.e., select “5” to center the label on the origin point). The numbers correspond to the following positioning: 7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 10 11 12 If you cannot remember these numbers, use the Select button to select from verbal descriptions (Top Left, Middle Center, etc.). Height – Enter a character height value for the device ID. The default entry is 0. If no other entry is made the default text sizes set during project creation will apply when the symbol is placed. If a different entry is made it will override the project default text sizes. Angle – Enter a value to determine the angle at which the device ID will appear. Use the Select button to display a list of values. Color – Enter a color number to determine the color of the device ID. You can also use the Select button to display and select the available colors. X–offset, Y–offset – These values represent the x and y distance from the symbol reference point to the device ID reference point. If a device ID reference point has already been selected with the mouse, this point’s position will be reflected in the values shown, which can be changed. When you select the OK button, the device ID tag will appear on the symbol at the selected position. Note
6-10
The currently selected text font is used for the symbol’s device ID, connection point text, and symbol text. You can select a different font for each, if desired. The fonts used when the symbol is created will be used whenever the symbol is placed. Select the Format > Text Style function to select fonts.
Create Schematic Elements
7.
Note
Define connection points. Next, select the Connection Point function from the Manage > Symbol menu. The software will prompt you to “Define the connection point.” Select a point on the symbol where a wire is to connect (be aware of the grid spacing that will be used in your drawings). The selected point is marked with an “X”.
The first connection point should be placed at the reference point. (You can relocate the reference point to this location before you save.) You will then be prompted to “Define label origin of text.” This is the point where connection point text will appear. You must select a point, even if you do not plan to have any connection point text. When you select a point, the following Connection Point Parameter dialog box appears. Connection Point Parameters
Connection Point:
?
Label Origin:
5
Select...
Height:
0.150
Select...
Angle:
0
Select...
Color:
0
Select...
Conn.Pt. X Offset:
0.000
Conn.Pt. Y Offset:
0.000
Text X Offset:
0.000
Text Y Offset:
0.000
Sequence Number:
1
Terminal Undefined
Internal
External
Jumper
Display Connection Point in the Graph. Terminal Plan OK
Note
Cancel
Help...
Values shown in inches.
6-11
Create Schematic Elements
The following fields are provided: Connection Point – Enter a label for the connection point such as “CP1”. Label Origin – Enter a value to select whether the label will appear to the left, right, above, below, or centered on the selected point (i.e., select “5” to center the label on the origin point). The numbers correspond to the following positioning: 7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 10 11 12 If you cannot remember these numbers, use the Select button to select from verbal descriptions (Top Left, Middle Center, etc.). Height – Enter a character height value for the label. Use the Select button to display a list of values. Angle – Enter a value to determine the angle at which the label will appear. Use the Select button to display a list of values. Color – Enter a color number to determine the color of the label. You can also use the Select button to display and select the available colors. Conn.Pt.–X–offset, Conn.Pt.–Y–offset – These values represent the x and y distance from the symbol reference point to the selected connection point. If desired, these values can be changed. Text–X–offset, Text–Y–offset – These values represent the distance from the connection point to the selected reference point of the connection point label (text). If desired, these values can be changed. Sequence Number – The value in this field indicates the order of connection points in the symbol. It can be altered if desired. Terminal – There are also four radio buttons to determine the type of connection point: Undefined, Internal, External, or Jumper. These are only used with terminal symbols (symbol group TS1). For more information see page 11-3. Display Connection Point in the Graph. Terminal Plan – Select this checkbox to determine whether the terminal connection point will always appear in the graphical terminal plan or only when it is used. Selecting the checkbox will cause the connection point to always appear in the terminal plan. Select the OK button when the Connection Point Parameter dialog box is complete. You can define additional connection points as required. 6-12
Create Schematic Elements
If you need to remove a connection point you have placed, select the Manage > Symbol > Delete Conn. Point function and click on the “x” of the connection point you wish to remove. (If the connection point is not located on a grid line, you must use the Tools > Osnap function.) Note
The software has an automatic rotation feature that will automatically rotate a symbol to match the horizontal or vertical orientation of the wire on which it is placed. The software does this by checking the orientation of the first two connection points that were defined when the symbol was created. If you are creating a symbol with more than two connection points you may wish to define the first two connection points so that they lie in a direction parallel to the wire. 8.
(Optional) Modify Device ID and Connection Points – If necessary, during symbol creation you can modify the text and position of the device ID and connection points. Use the following procedures: Modify Device ID a.
Point the cursor at the device ID and click the right mouse button. The following popup menu will appear Device ID Modify Text Position
b.
Select Device ID Modify if you wish to change the text or text parameters of the device ID. Select Text Position if you wish to change the position of the device ID.
Modify Connection Points a.
Point the cursor at the connection point text (not at the connection point itself) and click the right mouse button. The following popup menu will appear Connection Point > Modify Text Position Move Delete
b.
9.
Select Connection Point if you wish to change the connection point. Select Text Position if you wish to change the position of the connection point text.
Add symbol Text – Text entered during symbol creation is part of the symbol definition and appears with the symbol each time it is placed in the schematic. Symbol text can be set up to contain input entered at the time of symbol placement. Additionally, it can be set up to prompt for a certain type of input. Use the following procedure to enter symbol text. 6-13
Create Schematic Elements
a.
Select the Draw > Text function.
b.
In the Text dialog box enter the text itself and set other text parameters as desired. See page 5-31. If you wish to have prompted input at the time of symbol placement, enter a “?” where the text is to appear. Enter, for example: ? Hours (leave enough spaces after “?” for any valid input). When the symbol is placed on a drawing, text input will be requested that will take the place of the question mark. Select OK when ready.
c.
Select a reference point for the text in the drawing.
d.
Next, the Text Attribute Definition dialog box will appear. If you turn on the Attribute – Activate checkbox, you can select an attribute for the text from the attribute list (see list on next page), or you can enter the number of the text in the No: field instead. An attribute will provide a prompt when the symbol is placed that indicates what units or other information is to be entered.
These attributes are defined in the file RS\MENU\DIALOG\ATT_ENG.TXT (for English). You can edit this file to add additional prompts in the 52 through 120 positions in the list. Alternatively, you can create a file called RS\MENU\DIALOG\ATT_CUST.TXT to hold your additional attribute texts. This ATT_CUST.TXT file will not be replaced during software updates. Text Attribute Definition Symbol Text: I/O Attribute
Attribute Activate
Activate No:
Address I/O Text
No:
Hidden
Visible OK
6-14
Cancel
Hidden Fixed Help...
Create Schematic Elements
If the text is related to a PLC symbol, select the I/O Attribute – Activate checkbox. The following additional items will be enabled: Select the Address checkbox if the text will be a PLC module address. Select the I/O Text checkbox if the text will be PLC function text. In the No: field you must enter a sequence number starting with 0 to determine which place this text attribute has in the sequence of addressing. This number can be modified during symbol creation in the Attribute Number field in the Edit – Text dialog box. The group of radio buttons at the bottom of the dialog box are selected to determine if the text will be Visible, Hidden, or Hidden Fixed (cannot be modified). List of Symbol Text Attributes (numbers are for internal reference only) 1
Function Text:
2
PLC Function Text:
3
Rack:
4
Module:
5
Reserved
6
Reserved
7
DID, SDW:
8
Wire Diagram, CP:
9
DID,Panel/Wire Dia:
10
Part Number:
11
Reference Symbol Name:
12
Horsepower [P]:
13
Revolutions per minute [n]:
14
Voltage [V]:
15
VA:
16
Current (A) [I]:
17
Frequency [f]:
18
Temperature [T]:
19
Pressure [p]:
20
Resistance (ohm) [R]:
21
Velocity [v]:
22
Density [D]:
23
Quantity [Q]:
24
Capacitance [Cap]:
25
Inductance [L]:
6-15
Create Schematic Elements
List of Symbol Text Attributes 26
Seconds [s]:
27
Minutes [min}:
28
Hours [h]:
29
Channel:
30
Manufacturer:
31
Type
32
Length [l]:
33
Weight, mass [m]:
34
Amount of Material [mol]:
35
Luminous Intensity [lv]:
36
Area [A]:
37
Volume [V]:
38
Power [Pow]:
39
Quantity of Heat [Qj]:
40
Conductance [G]:
41
Field Strength [E]:
42
Magnetic Flux [Phi]:
43
time [t]:
44
sound level [dB(A) ]:
45
acceleration [a]:
46
current density [J]:
47
permittivity [F/m]:
48
permeability [My]:
49
permeance [H]:
50
thermal conductivity [W/(m*K)]:
51
temperature conductivity [m2/s]:
52 - 120
Free for user entries
10. Select cross reference position (child symbols only) – A cross reference can appear at a child symbol to indicate the location of the parent symbol. Ordinarily, the position of this cross reference can be adjusted by entering a value in the Dist. Device ID Cross Ref. field in the Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults tab (see page 7-21). However, if you wish to set a fixed position for the cross reference (which will not be affected by the above value), select the Manage > Symbol > Cross Ref. Position function and select the desired position on the drawing. The position will be marked by a blue “X”.
6-16
Create Schematic Elements
If you wish to reposition the cross reference position, simply use the same function to place it again. If you wish to remove the blue X (i.e., not use this feature), place the cross reference position at the symbol reference point (red triangle). When the symbol is saved, the blue X will be removed. 11. Store the symbol. Select the Save function from the Manage > Symbol menu to store the symbol. The software will prompt you to “Define first corner” and “Define opposite corner” which means that you should define a window around all the elements that you wish to store as the symbol. The software will display the message “The symbol was added to the catalog.” All symbols created by the user are stored automatically in the first symbol catalog defined by the catalog path statement in file ECSCAD.CFG. Note
You can cancel the symbol creation process at any time by selecting the Manage > Symbol > Cancel function. This will abort the symbol creation.
6-17
Create Schematic Elements
Entering Part Number During Symbol Creation (for automatic assignment) You can enter a part number during symbol creation so that this part number will be automatically prompted whenever the symbol is placed. Use the following procedure:
Note
1.
During the symbol creation process (after the New/Modify Symbol dialog box has been completed) select the Draw > Text function.
2.
In the Text field of the Text dialog box, enter the desired part number.
This number must exactly match the number used in the parts database (case sensitive). None of the text parameters (Height, Angle, etc.) need be set; the part number will be displayed with the same parameters as the device ID (except for color). Text Text
Enter Part Number Here
Function Text Language Text Number:
Note
6-18
Text:
Search...
Height:
0.150
Select...
Position X:
23.500
Angle:
0
Select...
Position Y:
15.000
Values shown in inches. 3.
Select the OK button. The software will prompt you to select a position for the text. Select any position (the part number will be automatically positioned below the device ID when the symbol is placed).
4.
The Text Attribute Definition dialog box will appear. Select the Attribute– Activate checkbox and select “Part Number” from the attribute list.
Create Schematic Elements
Text Attribute Definition
Select Activate checkbox
Symbol Text: 800T–A1D1 I/O Attribute
Attribute
Select “Part Number” From List
Activate
Activate No:
10
Address Part Number I/O Text
5.
Select the OK button. The part number will appear on the drawing.
6.
Complete the symbol creation and save the symbol.
When you place a symbol that has had a part number assigned during symbol creation, the part number will automatically appear in the Assigned Part Numbers area of the Device ID Assignment dialog box. If desired, you can delete the part number by clicking on it. You can then search the database for a different part number by selecting the Search button. Device ID Assignment Installation:
Search...
Location:
Search...
Device ID:
Search Device ID
Suppress Device ID
Duplicate Device ID
Multiple Placement
Part Number Assigned Part No./Select to Delete
Search...
800T–A1D1 Addit.Part Number
Part Number Appears Here. Delete By Clicking On Part Number.
OK
Cancel
Help...
6-19
Create Schematic Elements
The part number will appear below the symbol’s device ID (assuming the part number display has been activated with the Tools > System Settings > Display Settings function).
6-20
Create Schematic Elements
Creating a Symbol from an AutoCAD DWG File Graphics from existing AutoCAD DWG files can be converted into RSWire symbols. Note
DWG files must be in a format compatible with AutoCAD Release 14 or AutoCAD 2000, depending on the Version of AutoCAD under which you are running the software. Use the following steps:
Note
1.
In RSWire, display a blank drawing page with the Online checkbox turned off. (Use the Manage > Page > Modify function to access this checkbox.)
2.
Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function. Enter a symbol name and description in the New/Modify Symbol dialog box. Choose an appropriate symbol group. (For more information on this part of the symbol creation process, see page 6-8.) Select OK to continue.
3.
Define a reference point for the symbol. You can redefine this point later, if desired.
4.
Bring in the AutoCAD drawing using the Insert > Block > Insert function. Select an insertion point on the drawing page.
RSWire AutoCAD add–on users can also use the command line command DDINSERT. 5.
It is not necessary to explode the inserted drawing elements unless there are items within blocks that you wish to change or remove. Explode the DWG elements with the Insert > Block > Explode function.
6.
As with normal symbol creation, add connection points, device ID, text, etc. Redefine the reference point if desired. Remember that connection points must be placed on a grid line.
7.
Store the symbol: select Manage > Symbol > Save and define a window around the symbol elements.
6-21
Create Schematic Elements
DXF Import The File > DXF Import function allows the importing of drawings in the DXF format.
File DXF Import Save Current Page New DXF Page DXF Import Save as DWG Save as Block Selecting the File > DXF Import > Save Current Page function will save and close current page. (You must close the current RSWire page and create a blank AutoCAD page on which to place the DXF drawing.) Selecting the File > DXF Import > New DXF Page function will bring up a blank AutoCAD page. Selecting the File > DXF Import > DXF Import function allows the user to pick a DXF file and open it in the current page. Selecting the File > DXF Import > Save as DWG function will save the current page as a .DWG file. Selecting the File > DXF Import > Save as Block function will group all items within the current page and save them as a block. Note
To ungroup items grouped with the File > DXF Import > Save as Block function, use the Insert > Block > Explode function. Rules for DXF Import: 1.
Save and close any current RSWire page with the File > DXF Import > Save Current Page function.
2.
Create a blank AutoCAD page with the File > DXF Import > New DXF Page function.
Use the following procedure:
6-22
1.
Select the File > DXF Import > DXF Import function.
2.
Select the DXF file that you want to import.
Create Schematic Elements
3.
Save the imported DXF drawing as a DWG file (File > DXF Import > Save as DWG) or as an AutoCAD block (File > DXF Import > Save as Block).
You can insert the saved DWG file by using the Insert > Block > Insert function.
6-23
Create Schematic Elements
Symbol Creation Examples Creating an Example Parent Symbol Certain symbols can have a “parent/child” relationship with other symbols in a schematic. Examples include relays and motor starters (parent) which have related contacts (child) appearing throughout a drawing. The child symbols are given the same device ID as the parent, and the system can automatically provide cross referencing. The system requires a “Device” definition that establishes which type and number of child symbols are associated with the parent. This section and the following sections describe how to create your own parent symbols, child symbols, cross reference symbols, and device definitions. Use the following procedure to create a parent relay symbol called XRELAY. 1.
Display a blank drawing page.
2.
Turn off the Online function (use Manage > Page > Modify function).
3.
Set the drawing grid to 0.5 inch for JIC or 5 mm for IEC (use the Tools > System Settings > Grid Settings tab).
4.
Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function.
5.
In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XRELAY. Press the <Enter> key. New/Modify Symbol Symbol Name:
List...
XRELAY
Preferred Direction Vertical
Horizontal
Select Preferred Direction
Snapmode: Nearest Endpoint Description: Example parent symbol Symbol Group: PS1 Parent Symbol with cross ref. OK
6-24
Cancel
Help...
Create Schematic Elements
6.
Symbols are drawn based on the wire passing through the symbol. Usually the orientation of a symbol is drawn, but not limited too, Horizontal for JIC or Vertical for IEC. Select a preferred direction.
7.
Enter the description “Example parent symbol.”
8.
Select symbol group PS1 Parent Symbol with cross ref.
9.
Select the OK button to continue.
10. The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a JIC symbol reference point on a 0.5 inch grid line (symbol should be 0.5 inches wide, overall). Select a IEC symbol reference point on a 5 mm grid line (symbol should be 10 mm wide, overall). Zoom in for a better view of the work area. 11. Draw reference lines to mark the width of the symbol (this will help when we change the size of the grid). ref. lines .5 in. apart
ref. lines 5 mm apart
JIC Symbol
IEC Symbol
12. Set grid to 0.05 inch (JIC only). 13. As shown above, draw a circle 0.3 inch in diameter for JIC. (Draw a 5 mm by 10 mm rectangle for IEC.) Draw 0.1 inch lines on each side of the circle. (Draw a 5 mm line from the bottom center of the rectangle for IEC.) 14. Delete the reference lines. 15. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. The software will prompt you to “Define Device ID position.” Select an appropriate device ID reference point above the symbol for JIC (left of the symbol for IEC). Enter the device ID XRE for JIC (–XK for IEC).
6-25
Create Schematic Elements
Device ID Position XRE –XK
IEC Symbol
JIC Symbol 16. Select the OK button to continue.
17. Select the Manage > Symbol > Connection Point function. 18. Locate the left connection point for JIC (top connection point for IEC) at the symbol reference point. You will be prompted to “Define reference point of text.” Select a point below the connection point for JIC (upper right of the connection point for IEC). When the Connection Point Parameters dialog box appears, delete the “?” in the Connection Point field and select the OK button to continue (no text will be entered at this time). 19. Locate the right connection point on the right side of the symbol (bottom connection point on the bottom for IEC). Select a point below the connection point for JIC (lower right of the connection point for IEC). Again, enter no connection point text.
Connection Point Position
JIC Parent Symbol
6-26
Connection Point Text Position
IEC Parent Symbol
Create Schematic Elements
20. (Optional.) If you wish the position of the cross reference information to be fixed, select the Manage > Symbol > Cross Ref. Position function and select a point near the symbol. If you do not use this function, the position of the cross reference will be offset from the device ID position and can be adjusted using the Device ID to Cross Ref. Offset field of the Manage > Project Settings > General Defaults function. 21. Select the Manage > Symbol > Save function to complete the creation of the symbol. Define a window around the symbol elements. The message “The symbol was added to the catalog” will be displayed.
6-27
Create Schematic Elements
Creating an Example Child Symbol Use the following procedure to create a child contact symbol called XNO for the XRELAY parent symbol created in the previous section. 1.
Display a blank drawing page.
2.
Turn off the Online function (use Manage > Page > Modify function).
3.
Set the drawing grid to 0.5 inch for JIC or 5 mm for IEC (use the Tools > System Settings > Grid Setting function).
4.
Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function.
5.
In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XNO. Press the <Enter> key. New/Modify Symbol List...
XNO
Symbol Name: Preferred Direction Vertical
Horizontal
Select Preferred Direction
Snapmode: Nearest Endpoint Description: Example child symbol Symbol Group: PS2 Child Symbol with cross ref. OK
6-28
Cancel
Help...
6.
Symbols are drawn based on how the wire passes through the symbol. Usually the orientation of a symbol is drawn, but not limited too, Horizontal for JIC or Vertical for IEC. Select a preferred direction.
7.
Enter the description “Example child symbol”.
8.
Select symbol group PS2 Child Symbol with cross ref.
9.
Select the OK button to continue.
Create Schematic Elements
10. The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a JIC symbol reference point on a 0.5 inch grid line (symbol should be 0.5 inches wide, overall). Select a IEC symbol reference point on a 5 mm grid line (symbol should be 10 mm height). Zoom in for a better view of the work area. 11. Draw reference lines to mark the width of the symbol (this will help when we change the size of the grid). Ref. Lines
Ref. Lines
JIC Child Symbol
IEC Child Symbol
12. Set grid to 0.05 inch for JIC or 5 mm for IEC. 13. As shown above, draw a pair of vertical lines about 0.3 inches apart. Draw horizontal 0.1 inch lines on each side of the vertical lines. 14. Delete the reference lines. 15. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. The software will prompt you to “Define Device ID position.” Select an appropriate device ID reference point above the symbol for JIC (left of the symbol for IEC). Enter the device ID XRE for JIC (–XK for IEC). Note
A child symbol must have same device ID as the parent symbol. 16. Select the OK button to continue. 17. Select the Manage > Symbol > Connection Point function.
6-29
Create Schematic Elements
XRE
Connection Point Location –XK
Connection Point Text Location JIC Child Symbol
IEC Child Symbol
18. Locate the left connection point for JIC (top connection point for IEC) at the symbol reference point. You will be prompted to “Define reference point of text.” Select a point below the connection point for JIC (upper right of the connection point for IEC). When the Connection Point Parameters dialog box appears, delete the “?” in the Connection Point field and select the OK button to continue (no text will be entered at this time). 19. Locate the right connection point on the right side of the symbol (bottom connection point on the bottom for IEC). Select a point below the connection point for JIC (lower right of the connection point for IEC). Again, enter no connection point text. 20. (Optional.) Users can select whether or not a cross reference appears at the child symbol. If you wish the position of this information to be fixed, select the Manage > Symbol > Cross Ref. Position function and select a point near the symbol. If you do not use this function, the position of the cross reference at the child symbol will be offset from the device ID position and can be adjusted using the Device ID to Cross Ref. Offset field of the Manage > Project Settings > General Defaults function. 21. Select the Manage > Symbol > Save function to complete the creation of the symbol. Define a window around the symbol elements. Note
Make sure complete text elements are included within the window around the symbol elements. The message “The symbol was added to the catalog” will be displayed.
6-30
Create Schematic Elements
Creating an Example Cross Reference Symbol In this section we will create a cross reference symbol that will appear beside the XRELAY coil symbol and indicate where its contacts (child symbols) are located. A number of cross reference symbols are included with the software (with names such as Q22, Q42, etc.), but you may need to make your own for special requirements. Use the following procedure: 1.
Display a blank drawing page.
2.
Turn off the Online function (use Manage > Page > Modify function).
3.
Set the drawing grid to 0.5 inch for JIC or 5 mm for IEC (use the Tools > System Settings > Grid Settings function).
4.
Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function.
5.
In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XCROSS (the name of our example symbol). Press the <Enter> key. New/Modify Symbol Symbol Name:
XCROSS
List...
Preferred Direction Vertical
Horizontal
Snapmode: Endpoint
Select Preferred Direction
Description: Example cross reference symbol Symbol Group: PS3 Cross Reference Symbol OK
6.
Cancel
Help...
Symbols are drawn based on how the wire passes through the symbol. Usually the orientation of a symbol is drawn, but not limited too, Horizontal for JIC or Vertical for IEC. Select a preferred direction.
6-31
Create Schematic Elements
7.
Enter the description “Example cross reference symbol”.
8.
Select symbol group PS3 Cross Reference Symbol.
9.
Select the OK button to continue.
10. The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a symbol reference point on a grid line. Zoom in for a better view of the work area.
Reference Point
JIC Cross Reference Symbol
IEC Cross Reference Symbol
11. Use the Draw > Graphic > Line function to draw boxes as shown. 12. Set grid to 0.05 inch (JIC only). 13. Use drawing lines to create the relay contact symbol as shown.
Relay Contact Symbol
JIC Cross Reference Symbol
6-32
Relay Contact Symbol
IEC Cross Reference Symbol
Create Schematic Elements
14. Using the Draw > Text function, place the texts “?1” and “?2” (separately) as shown. This text will later hold cross reference information.
Symbol Text
?1
Symbol Text
?2
?1 ?2
JIC Cross Reference Symbol
IEC Cross Reference Symbol
Note
If you wish to make a cross reference symbol that includes normally closed symbols as well as normally open, you could simply add another row (or rows) of boxes, draw a normally closed symbol, and place additional text (?3, ?4, etc.). The information that appears in the ? text locations is determined in the Device Type New/Modify dialog box (see following section).
Note
Some applications require that the cross reference text be underlined for normally closed contacts. Add “%%U” before text “?1”, “?2”, etc., for cross references that are normally closed only. Do not add “%%U” before the text of normally open contacts. This is usually done when no open or closed symbol graphics are used in the cross reference. When prompted for an attribute for these texts, select the OK button (no attribute). 15. Select the Manage > Symbol > Save function to complete the creation of the symbol. Define a window around the symbol elements. The message “Symbol added to the catalog” will be displayed.
6-33
Create Schematic Elements
Creating an Example Device Type Definition In the previous sections, we have created a parent symbol, a child symbol, and a cross reference symbol. We now need to tie these three together somehow so that RSWire knows which child symbol(s) are associated with a parent symbol and which cross reference symbol to place next to the parent symbol. This is accomplished by defining a device type. A device type is a combination of parent symbol, child symbol(s) and cross reference symbol. The same symbols can be assigned to different devices. For example, you can have various devices to represent relays with different combinations of normally open and normally closed contacts. Or, you can create devices for a relay and a motor starter that both use the same cross reference symbol. When you place a parent symbol on a drawing, the software will ask for its device type. Once the software knows the device type, it can also perform error–checking functions by keeping track of how many of the available child symbols have been used. For more information on creating devices, see page 6-89.
6-34
Create Schematic Elements
We will use the following procedure to define a device called X20. 1.
Select the Manage > Device Type > New/Modify function. The Device Type New/Modify dialog box will appear.
Device Type New/Modify Device Type Group
X20
Search
Relay, I/O, Plug
Symbol Name Parent Child 1 Child 2 Child 3 Child 4 Child 5 Child 6 Child 7 Child 8 Child 9 Cross Ref.
XRELAY XNO XNO
Connection Points AB 12 34
Delta X 0.0000
XCROSS
Delta Y 0.0000
Absolute Position OK
Note
Cancel
Help
Description...
Example shown is in the JIC format. Same principles apply to IEC. 2.
In the Device Type field, enter the name X20. Press the <Enter> key.
3.
Select the Description button and enter “Example device” in the first description field. Select OK. This description will appear on device listings.
4.
In the Group field leave the default selection Relay, I/O, Plug.
5.
Enter XRELAY for Parent symbol name. This is the symbol name of the parent symbol of the device.
6-35
Create Schematic Elements
6.
Enter XNO for Child 1 and Child 2. Enter the names of child symbols in the order in which they will be used in the cross reference symbol (i.e., the first child corresponds to the “?1” text in the cross reference symbol, the second child corresponds to “?2”, etc.).
7.
Enter the connection point text shown in the previous dialog box (A B, 1 2, 3 4). Optional connection point text can be entered in these fields which will overwrite any connection point text that was specified when the parent or child symbol was created. Separate each connection point text with a space. If more than two texts are entered, they will all be displayed when the symbol is placed, and the unwanted texts can be deleted at that time. In the example, the connection points for the relay coil will be labeled A and B. The connection points for the first contact will be labeled 1 and 2. Connection points for the second contact will be labeled 3 and 4.
8.
Note
6-36
Enter XCROSS for the Cross Ref. field. This is the name of the cross reference symbol that will hold the cross reference information for the parent/child symbols (we created this symbol in the previous section).
If you are creating a device type for which there will be no cross reference symbol, enter the name DUMMY in the Cross Ref. field.
Create Schematic Elements
9.
Note
Enter 1.50 for dx (delta x) and –0.5 for dy (delta y) for JIC values. The values entered in these fields determine where the cross reference symbol will appear on the drawing in relation to the parent symbol. Refer to the following illustration. The distances entered are between the reference point of the parent symbol and the reference point of the cross reference symbol. (If the Absolute Position checkbox is selected, these values are measured from the drawing origin point (0, 0) rather than from the parent symbol.)
For IEC, enter 0 for dx, 75 for dy, and select Absolute Position checkbox. The IEC cross reference symbol will start at 75 mm from the bottom of the page. dx=0 mm
dx=1.50”
dy=–0.5” dy=75 mm
Bottom of Page JIC Distance Values
IEC Distance Values
10. Select OK to complete the creation of the device type.
6-37
Create Schematic Elements
Testing the Device Type – To test the operation of the example device type, cross reference, and parent/child symbols created thus far, use the following procedure: Note
Example shown is in the JIC format. Same principles apply to IEC. 1.
Use a drawing page with the Online function turned on.
2.
On one line place the parent symbol, XRELAY.
3.
Accept the prompted device ID by selecting OK in the Device ID Assignment dialog box (the format of the device ID will vary according to how your project was set up.
4.
When prompted for a device type, enter X20. The connection points dialog box will appear on the screen, prompting the connection point text. Select OK to continue. The parent symbol should appear on the screen with the cross reference symbol beside it.
5.
On another line of the drawing, place the child symbol, XNO.
6.
Give the child symbol the same device ID as the parent symbol. The connection points dialog box will appear on the screen, prompting the connection point text. Select OK to continue.
The cross reference symbol should indicate the location (line number) of the child symbol.
XRE1 A1
(line 112)
A
114
1
–XK
–XK
4
14
XRE1
(line 114)
3
13
B
A2
2 13
14
Bottom of Page JIC Device IDs
6-38
IEC Device IDs
Create Schematic Elements
Creating an Example Programmable Controller (Parent) Symbol Programmable logic controllers (PLCs) are a part of many control systems. With RSWire, symbols can be created that represent PLC input and output modules. The symbol can be designed to prompt the user for information such as rack and module number, and automatically place address numbers and descriptive text. In this section we will create an example PLC symbol like the one shown below called XPLC8. L2
L1
101 102 103
PLC102
Device ID
RACK: 1 MODULE: 0
104
106
00
107 108
1001
Limit sw. 3
1004
Limit sw. 4
1005
Limit sw. 5
1006
Limit sw. 6
1007
Limit sw. 7
Descriptive Text
05
117 118
1003
I/O Addresses
04
115 116
Limit sw. 2
03
113 114
1002 02
111 112
Terminal Numbers
01
109 110
Rack And Module Group
1000
105
06
119
07
6-39
Create Schematic Elements
P22
16 11.05
12
10
=M –S8
11.04 14
=M –S7
=M –S6
11.02
6
8 11.01
1N
=M –S5
11.03
=M –S4
11.00
F– F–
F+
=M –S3
1N
=M –S2
F+
=M –S1
PLC1 6ES5 436–4UA11
DIGITAL INPUT MODULE 220 VAC
Terminal Numbers Rack And Module/Slot Group
I/O Addresses
Device ID
Descriptive Text
This symbol is considered a parent symbol. Child symbols for the individual I/O points can be located throughout the schematics in the same project. The following procedure describes how to create a symbol for an eight point PLC input module.
6-40
1.
Display a blank drawing page.
2.
Turn off the Online function (use the Manage > Page > Modify function).
3.
Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function.
4.
In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XPLC8 (this is the symbol name we will use for this particular example). Press the <Enter> key.
Create Schematic Elements
New/Modify Symbol Symbol Name:
List...
XPLC8
Preferred Direction Vertical
Horizontal
Snapmode: Endpoint
Select Preferred Direction
Description: Example 8 point PLC input module Symbol Group: PS1 Parent Symbol with cross ref. OK
Cancel
Help...
5.
Symbols are drawn based on the wire passing through the symbol. Usually the orientation of a symbol is drawn, but not limited too, Horizontal for JIC or Vertical for IEC. Select a preferred direction.
6.
Enter the description “Example 8 point PLC input module”.
7.
Select symbol group PS1 Parent Symbol with cross ref.
8.
Select the OK button to continue.
9.
The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a symbol reference point on a 0.5 inch (5 mm for IEC) grid line. Zoom in for a better view.
10. Use the Draw > Graphic > Line function to draw the sides of a rectangle about 2 x 9 inches (it must be long enough for the input lines and wide enough for the address text). If necessary the rectangle can be redrawn before saving the symbol. If desired, use the circle and drawing line functions to draw terminal screw heads. You will have to select a smaller grid size to do this, but place the screws on your standard schematic line spacing. Leave about 1 inch (25 mm) free at the top of the box for rack and module information.
6-41
Create Schematic Elements
101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115
Note
Text Label Origin – When placing text in this or any symbol, it is important to decide how you want the text to appear on the drawing in relation to the reference point selected for the text. By selecting an appropriate label origin before entering the text, you can determine whether the text will appear above, below, to the left, to the right, or centered on the origin point. By selecting an appropriate label origin, you can prevent one text from overwriting another or extending outside its intended location. 11. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. The software will prompt you to “Define Device ID position.” Select a device ID reference point above the symbol. Enter the device ID “PLC”. 12. Use the Draw > Text function to enter the words “RACK:” and “MODULE:” at the top of the symbol. After selecting the reference point for each word you will be prompted for text attributes. Simply select the OK button.
6-42
Create Schematic Elements
Device ID Standard Text
PLC RACK:
Attribute Text ?
MODULE:
?
13. To the right of the words “RACK:” and “MODULE:” use the Draw > Text function to enter a “?”. After selecting the reference point for each “?” you will be prompted for text attributes. In the attribute dialog box, select the Attribute – Activate checkbox and from the attribute list select “Rack:” for the “?” that you place next to the word RACK, and “Module” for the one next to MODULE. Text Attribute Definition Symbol Text: ? I/O Attribute
Attribute
Select “Activate” checkbox
Activate
Activate No: Address I/O Text
No: 000 +
PLC Function Text Rack: Module: Combination of attributes Reserved
Select “Module” or “Rack”
14. Use the Draw > Text function to place a series of “?” characters beside each screw location. For each “?”, select the I/O Attribute–Activate checkbox and the Address checkbox in the text attribute dialog box. These texts will display the individual I/O addresses when the symbol is placed in a drawing.
6-43
Create Schematic Elements
Important
You must place these texts in the order they will be addressed and you must number each of these attributes the Number field of the text attribute dialog box starting with 0 as shown below. If you lose track of which number you have assigned to these texts use the Edit > Text > Modify function and select the text in question. The assigned number will be displayed in the Attribute Number field of the Modify Text dialog box. Internally, RSWire assigns address numbers to the “300” range, so the text codes displayed here will start at 300, rather than 00. PLC RACK: ? MODULE: ?
Number the first “?” 0, the next one 1, etc.
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
Text Attribute Definition
Select “Activate” and “Address”
Symbol Text: ? I/O Attribute
Attribute Activate
Activate No: Address I/O Text
No: 300 +
6-44
0
Create Schematic Elements
15. Enter another series of ”?” attribute texts to the right of the module. These attribute will contain PLC function text. Therefore for each “?”, select the I/O Attribute–Activate checkbox and the I/O Text checkbox in the text attribute dialog box. Like the address texts, each of these must be numbered sequentially starting with 0. If you lose track of which number you have assigned to these texts use the Modify > Text function and select the text in question. The assigned number will be displayed in the Attribute Number field of the Text dialog box. Internally, RSWire assigns function text numbers to the “600” range, so the text codes displayed here will start at 600, rather than 00.
6-45
Create Schematic Elements
PLC RACK: ? MODULE: ? ?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
Number The First “?” 0, The Next One 1, etc.
Text Attribute Definition Symbol Text: ? I/O Attribute
Select “Activate” and “I/O Text”
Attribute Activate
Activate No: Address I/O Text
Visible No: 600 +
0
Hidden
16. Select the Manage > Symbol > Connection Point function. Place a connection point beside each screw symbol. Be sure the connection points match your standard line spacing. Place the connection point text below each screw.
6-46
Create Schematic Elements
Important
You must place connection points in the same order as the I/O addresses. If your symbol includes additional non–addressable terminals such as hots or commons (our example does not) the connection points for these terminals must be assigned last regardless of where they are located on the module. PLC
Place This Connection Point First
RACK: ? MODULE: ? ?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
00 01 02
Connection Point Text Locations 03 04 05 06 07
17. Store the symbol: select the Manage > Symbol > Save function and define a window around the symbol elements. Create PLC Device Type – Before the symbol will function correctly, we must create a device type that specifies the cross reference and child symbols to be associated with the parent symbol. 1.
Select the Manage > Device Type > New/Modify function. In the Device Type field, enter the name XPLC8 (we will give the device type the same name as the parent to make it easier to remember). Press the <Enter> key.
6-47
Create Schematic Elements
Device Type New/Modify Device Type Group
XPLC8
Search
Relay, I/O, Plug
Symbol Name Parent Child 1 Child 2 Child 3 Child 4 Child 5 Child 6 Child 7 Child 8 Child 9
XPLC8 INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT
Cross Ref.
Connection Points 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Delta X 0.0000
XPLC
Delta Y 0.0000
Absolute Position OK
2.
3.
6-48
Cancel
Help
Description...
Enter the information shown in the example above. a.
For Cross Ref. enter XPLC. This is a standard PLC cross reference provided with RSWire.
b.
In the Connection Points field enter the same series of connection point designations we placed as connection point text in the symbol.
c.
In the Child symbol fields, enter the symbol name INPUT. This is a PLC child symbol provided with RSWire (you can also create custom child symbols). These child symbols can be placed throughout the schematics. They can be given the same address as the parent and assigned one of the terminal numbers.
Select OK to save the device.
Create Schematic Elements
Testing the PLC Symbol – To test the functioning of the PLC symbol use the following steps: 1.
Make settings: The Tools > Project Settings > Programmable Controller Settings function allows various PLC related parameters to be set such as octal vs. decimal addressing, the word/bit separator character for addresses, etc. See page 7-37 for more information.
2.
Select the symbol using the Insert > Symbol by Name function. Enter the symbol name XPLC8 (or whatever other name you gave the symbol).
3.
Place the symbol (page must be Online). The Device ID Assignment dialog box will appear. Accept the prompted device ID or enter a different one.
4.
The Device Type dialog box will appear. Enter the device type XPLC8.
5.
The Connection Points dialog box will appear, showing the device ID, the parent and child symbol names, and the connection point designations. Select OK to continue.
Connection Points Select Connection Points Device ID: =LINE1+NO_LOC–PLC377 Device Item:
Installation
XPLC8
Pg.Line
Symbol XPLC8 INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT
Connection Points 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 8
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 OK
Cancel
Help
6-49
Create Schematic Elements
6.
The Programmable Controller Text Definition dialog box will appear. This dialog box allows you to set rack and module numbers, the addressing numbers, and function text for each point on the module. (See next page.) I/O Text Definition Device ID:
PLC377
Module:
02
Rack:
01 Address I0102/00
Limit switch 1
1
I0102/01
Pushbutton 1 – Start
2
I0102/02
3
I0102/03
4
I0102/04
5
I0102/05
6
I0102/06
7
I0102/07 Next
6-50
Function Text
0
Previous
I/O Text
OK
Cancel
a.
Enter the Module and Rack numbers in the appropriate fields.
b.
In the Address fields, it is only necessary to enter an address in the first field: once you move the cursor to another field, the remaining addresses will be filled in automatically, continuing from the first. If you wish to use a word/bit address, use the separator character that was specified in the Address Separator field of the Programmable Controller Settings dialog box (Tools > Project Settings > Programmable Controller Settings function). In the example above, “/” is the separator character.
c.
In each Function Text field you can enter descriptive text. Two examples are entered above.
d.
If you select the I/O Text button, entries for the Function Text fields will be taken from an external file. This filename is specified in the Active Input File field of the Tools > Project Settings > Programmable Controller Settings tab. See page 7-38.
Create Schematic Elements
7.
Select the OK button. The module symbol should appear on the drawing with the appropriate Rack and Module numbers, addresses, and function texts.
6-51
Create Schematic Elements
Creating an Example PLC (Child) Symbol (JIC Format) RSWire includes several PLC child symbols (symbol names: INPUT, OUTPUT). These can be used to represent individual PLC I/O points throughout the schematic, as opposed to showing all wiring connected directly to a single parent symbol. L2
L1
Device ID
101 102
LS103
TB2:2
IAD343
104 105
I/O Address
01 I:000/01
103
343 Limit switch 2
Connection Point Text
106
Cross Reference to Parent
107
Function Text
JIC Format
Use the following procedure to create a PLC (input) child symbol:
6-52
1.
Display a blank drawing page.
2.
Turn off the Online function (use the Manage > Page > Modify function).
3.
Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function.
4.
In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XINPUT (this is the symbol name we will use for this particular example. Press the <Enter> key.
Create Schematic Elements
New/Modify Symbol Symbol Name:
List...
XINPUT
Preferred Direction Vertical
Select Preferred Direction
Horizontal
Snapmode: Nearest Endpoint Description: Example PLC child input Search Language Text... Symbol Group: PS2 Child Symbol with cross ref. OK
Cancel
Help...
5.
Select the Snapmode:Nearest Endpoint checkbox. (The symbol will be automatically positioned at the end of the wire.)
6.
Symbols are drawn based on the wire passing through the symbol. Usually the orientation of a symbol is drawn, but not limited too, Horizontal for JIC or Vertical for IEC. Select a preferred direction.
7.
Enter the description “Example PLC child input”.
8.
Select symbol group PS2 Child Symbol with cross ref.
9.
Select the OK button to continue.
10. The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a symbol reference point on a 0.5 inch grid line. Zoom in for a better view. 11. Use the Draw > Graphic > Line function to draw lines to form a box about 1.5 x 0.5 inches. Draw a line to divide the box into two parts: one part to hold the connection point designation and a larger part to hold the full I/O address. If necessary the box can be redrawn before saving the symbol. You will have to select a smaller grid size to place some elements, but be aware of your schematic line spacing when placing connection points.
6-53
Create Schematic Elements
12. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. The software will prompt you to “Define Device ID position.” Select a device ID reference point above the symbol. Enter the device ID “PLC”. Note
This default device ID tag can be overwritten when the symbol is placed. 13. Select the Manage > Symbol > Connection Point function. 14. Locate the connection point at the symbol reference point. You will be prompted to “Define reference point of text.” Select a point inside the smaller part of the box. When the Connection Point Parameters dialog box appears, select the OK button to continue. There are no other connection points on the symbol.
Reference Point
PLC ?
Connection Point Connection Point Text
15. (Optional.) Users can select whether or not a cross reference (to the parent symbol) appears at the child symbol. If you wish the position of this information to be fixed, select the Manage > Symbol > Cross Ref. Position function and select a point near the symbol. If you do not use this function, the position of the cross reference at the child symbol can be adjusted using the Device ID to Cross Ref. Offset field of the Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function.
6-54
Create Schematic Elements
16. Use the Draw > Text function to place a “?” character in the larger part of the box (see following figure). (Be aware of how the label origin value you select for the text will affect the placement of information later.) Select the I/O Attribute–Activate checkbox and the Address checkbox in the text attribute dialog box. This text will display the individual I/O address when the symbol is placed in a drawing.
PLC ?
Place Text
?
Text Attribute Definition
Select “Activate” and “Address”
Symbol Text: ? I/O Attribute
Attribute Activate
Activate No: Address I/O Text
No: 300 +
0
17. Use the Draw > Text function to place a “?” character below the box. Select the Attribute–Activate checkbox and the PLC Function Text selection in the text attribute pull down list. This text will display the I/O function text from the parent symbol when the symbol is placed in a drawing.
6-55
Create Schematic Elements
PLC ?
? Place Text
? Text Attribute Definition
Select “Activate” checkbox
Symbol Text: ? I/O Attribute
Attribute Activate
Activate No:
2
Address
Select “PLC Function Text”
I/O Text
No: 000 +
PLC Function Text Rack: Module: Combination of attributes
18. Select the Manage > Symbol > Save function to complete the creation of the symbol. Define a window around the symbol elements. The message “Symbol added to the catalog” will be displayed.
6-56
Create Schematic Elements
Creating an Example PLC (Child) Symbol (IEC Format) RSWire includes several PLC child symbols (symbol names: INPUT, OUTPUT). These can be used to represent individual PLC I/O points throughout the schematic, as opposed to showing all wiring connected directly to a single parent symbol.
13 –S7 14
1
Function Text –X1
Device ID
I/O Address
Cross Reference to Parent
I0.00 INPUT CP:00 Start Motor
–A1 .1
Text Label
Connection Point Text
PLC Function Text
IEC Format
6-57
Create Schematic Elements
Use the following procedure to create a PLC (input) child symbol: 1.
Display a blank drawing page.
2.
Turn off the Online function (use the Manage > Page > Modify function).
3.
Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function.
4.
In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XINPUT (this is the symbol name we will use for this particular example. Press the <Enter> key. New/Modify Symbol Symbol Name:
List...
XINPUT
Preferred Direction Vertical
Select Preferred Direction
Horizontal
Snapmode: Nearest Endpoint Description: Example PLC child input Search Language Text... Symbol Group: PS2 Child Symbol with cross ref. OK
6-58
Cancel
Help...
5.
Select the Snapmode:Endpoint checkbox. (The symbol will be automatically positioned at the end of the wire.)
6.
Symbols are drawn based on the wire passing through the symbol. Usually the orientation of a symbol is drawn, but not limited too, Horizontal for JIC or Vertical for IEC. Select a preferred direction.
7.
Enter the description “Example PLC child input”.
8.
Select symbol group PS2 Child Symbol with cross ref.
9.
Select the OK button to continue.
Create Schematic Elements
10. The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a symbol reference point on a 5 mm grid line. Zoom in for a better view. 11. Use the Draw > Graphic > Line function to draw lines to form a box about 20 x 15 mm. Draw a line to divide the box into two parts: one part to hold the I/O address and a larger part to hold the full connection point text . If necessary the box can be redrawn before saving the symbol. You will have to select a smaller grid size to place some elements, but be aware of your schematic line spacing when placing connection points.
Reference Point
12. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. The software will prompt you to “Define Device ID position.” 13. Select a device ID reference point below the symbol. 14. Enter the device ID “PLC”. Note
This default device ID tag can be overwritten when the symbol is placed. 15. Select the Manage > Symbol > Connection Point function. 16. Locate the connection point at the symbol reference point. You will be prompted to “Define reference point of text.” Select a point inside the smaller part of the box.
6-59
Create Schematic Elements
Reference Point
Connection Point
?
PLC
Connection Point Text
17. When the Connection Point Parameters dialog box appears, select the OK button to continue. There are no other connection points on the symbol. 18. (Optional.) Users can select whether or not a cross reference (to the parent symbol) appears at the child symbol. If you wish the position of this information to be fixed, select the Manage > Symbol > Cross Ref. Position function and select a point near the symbol. If you do not use this function, the position of the cross reference at the child symbol can be adjusted using the Device ID to Cross Ref. Offset field of the Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function. 19. Use the Draw > Text function to place a “?” character in the larger part of the box (see following figure). (Be aware of how the label origin value you select for the text will affect the placement of information later.) 20. Select the I/O Attribute–Activate checkbox and the Address checkbox in the text attribute dialog box. This text will display the individual I/O address when the symbol is placed in a drawing.
6-60
Create Schematic Elements
I/O Address
?
PLC
?
Text Attribute Definition
Select “Activate” and “Address”
Symbol Text: ? I/O Attribute
Attribute Activate
Activate No: Address I/O Text
No: 300 +
0
21. Use the Draw > Text function to place a “?” character below the box. Select the Attribute–Activate checkbox and the PLC Function Text selection in the text attribute pull down list. This text will display the I/O function text from the parent symbol when the symbol is placed in a drawing.
6-61
Create Schematic Elements
I/O Address
?
PLC
?
Text Attribute Definition
Select “Activate” checkbox
Symbol Text: ? I/O Attribute
Attribute Activate
Activate No:
2
Address
Select “PLC Function Text”
I/O Text
No: 000 +
PLC Function Text Rack: Module: Combination of attributes
22. Select the Manage > Symbol > Save function to complete the creation of the symbol. Define a window around the symbol elements. The message “Symbol added to the catalog” will be displayed.
6-62
Create Schematic Elements
Creating an Example Terminal Symbol A number of terminal symbols are provided with RSWire. The user may wish to create custom terminal symbols. This section describes how to create an example terminal symbol called XTERM. Use the following procedure: 1.
Display a blank drawing page.
2.
Turn off the Online function (use Manage > Page > Modify function).
3.
Set the drawing grid to 0.5 inch (use the Tools > System Settings > Grid Settings tab).
4.
Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function.
5.
In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XTERM. Press the <Enter> key. New/Modify Symbol Symbol Name:
List...
XTERM
Preferred Direction Vertical
Horizontal
Snapmode: Nearest Endpoint Description: Example terminal symbol Search Language Text... Symbol Group: TS1 Terminal Block OK
Cancel
Help...
6.
Select Horizontal for preferred direction. Enter the description “Example terminal symbol.” Select symbol group TS1 Terminal Block.
7.
Select the OK button to continue.
6-63
Create Schematic Elements
8.
The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a symbol reference point where two 0.5 inch grid lines intersect. Zoom in for a better view of the work area.
9.
Set the grid to 0.05 inch.
10. Draw a small circle, about 0.2 inches in diameter. 11. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. When prompted to “Define Device ID position,” select a point above the symbol. 12. In the Device ID Parameter dialog box, enter TB in the Device ID field. Enter a label origin of 6 (Middle Right). Select OK to continue. 13. Select the Manage > Symbol > Connection Point function. 14. When prompted to “Locate connection point,” select the point at the center of the circle.
Device ID
TB
Connection Point 1 Text Origin Point
?
15. When prompted to “Define reference point of text”, select a point to the right of the device ID (the text for connection point 1 will be part of the device ID). 6-64
Create Schematic Elements
16. In the Connection Point Parameters dialog box leave the “?” in the Connection Point field and enter a label origin of 4 (Middle Left). In the Connection Point Parameters dialog there are also four radio buttons to determine the type of connection point for terminal symbols: Undefined, Internal, External, or Jumper. These determine how the connection information is displayed in the terminal plan editor. The default is Undefined. For more information see page 11-3. 17. Select OK to continue. Note
If you activate the Terminal=Wire Number checkbox in the Tools > Wire Number > Automatic function dialog box, the wire number will replace the terminal number at the text reference point of the first connection point (indicated by the “?” in the above figure). 18. Locate four more connection points at the top, bottom, left and right side of the circle (i.e. at the 0, 90, 180, and 270 degree positions of the circle). For these four connection points, delete the “?” in the Connection Point field of the Connection Point Parameters dialog box. You can select a reference point for text anywhere for each of these points (there will be no text).
TB
Note
?
Because of the defaults that the system will use to interpret terminal symbol connection points, it is best to place these five points in the following order (see page 11-4 for more information).
5 2
1
Connection Point Order 4
3 JIC
2 3
1 4
5
IEC
19. Store the symbol: select the Manage > Symbol > Save function and define a window around the symbol elements. 6-65
Create Schematic Elements
By placing the five connection points as shown, it is possible to connect wires to the terminal symbol from left, right, above, and below. When a wire is drawn over the symbol (or when the symbol is placed on a wire) the wire will break at the two outer connection points. When the terminal symbol is placed, you can specify in the Device ID field a terminal strip number and an individual terminal number separated by a colon. For example TB1:1. The next terminal symbol placed will be automatically prompted for TB1:2, then TB1:3, etc., until you enter a new terminal strip number. You can also use letters for the individual terminal designations.
Creating Pin Charts A pin chart is a combination of a plug symbol, pin symbols, and a device (parent/child) relationship between them that provides cross referencing. The plug symbol is placed somewhere on a drawing page and displays cross reference information (such as page/line number) that indicates where each pin is located in the project drawings. The pin and plug symbols are part of the “TS” symbol groups (when a symbol is created it is assigned to a symbol group such as general symbols, parent symbols, etc.). With pin charts, this means you can have cross referencing like a parent symbol and terminal plan connection information like a terminal symbol. The characteristics of “TS” symbol groups are: 1.
They allow the circuit’s potential (wire number) to flow through the symbol.
2.
They are connection devices and the user may assign a cable to the pin (child) symbol.
3.
If they are to be treated the same as a terminal symbol, the user may work in the Terminal Plan area of the program. The discipline (prompts, menu picks, listing formats, etc.) of the program may need to be changed to reflect the Pin Plan instead of the Terminal Plan. The end result is a connection symbol with the ability to graphically show all target destinations off the symbol’s device identification.
In addition, symbols from groups TS4, TS5, and TS6 have these characteristics of parent and child symbols:
6-66
Create Schematic Elements
1.
They allow a cross referencing relationship between graphical entities on the schematic pages. The plug symbol may be located on a page, while all its associated pin symbols are placed throughout the entire schematic. Much like the coil–to–contact cross referencing relationship, the pin chart will display the page / line number of all associated pin symbols.
2.
They allow the parent component of the relationship to receive a part number from the parts database. The user may use all variables associated to the parts database.
3.
The symbols then will be included in a device relationship which the user defines. Through error checking, this device relationship will prevent the user from using the same pin number twice and assigning too many pin numbers to the selected plug.
Creating a pin chart involves creating the three components: pin symbol, plug symbol, cross reference symbol, and creating the device relationship between them. If you are unfamiliar with the basic process of creating symbols and devices in RSWire, refer to the previous subsections. Plug Symbol Creation – Using the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function, create a parent symbol (Plug ) used for cross referencing. The symbol can be created graphically as a 8 pin “D” type plug end. Label the pin numbers A1 through A8. Use the following symbol creation criteria.
Symbol Name: PLUGA Layout Direction: Horizontal Description: Parent symbol for pin charts Symbol Group: TS4
The symbol will require a device ID such as “PLUG”. Connection points with associated text are not necessary. This symbol is primarily used to display the page and line number of its associated pins across the schematic. Make the circles in the plug large enough to hold cross reference data (circles 0.6 inch in diameter will hold 0.1 inch text).
6-67
Create Schematic Elements
A5 A1 A6 A2 A7
Plug
A3 A8 A4
Cross Ref Symbol Creation – Using the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function, create a cross reference symbol which will display Page / Line Number of child components. The symbol can be created using only 8 text variables, and no graphic entities. The variables are arranged so that the appropriate cross reference information will appear directly inside of the pin holes of the plug symbol. Be aware of the label origins and text size to ensure proper fit. Use the following symbol creation criteria:
Symbol Name: XPLUG Layout direction: Horizontal Description: Cross reference symbol for pin charts Symbol Group: TS6
The symbol will require no device ID, and no connection points with associated text. The symbol will only be used for cross referencing the pin symbol to the plug symbol. The reference point of this symbol should match the reference point of the plug symbol so the cross references will be positioned correctly. Use the Draw > Text function to enter “?1” through “?8”.
Cross Reference Symbol For Plug Symbol
?5 ?1 ?6 ?2 ?7 ?3 ?8 ?4
6-68
Create Schematic Elements
Pin Symbol Creation – Using the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function, create a child symbol (Pin) used for cross referencing. Use the following symbol creation criteria.
Symbol Name: PIN Layout Direction: Horizontal Description: Child symbol for pin charts Symbol Main Group: TS5
Give the pin symbol the same device ID tag used by the parent symbol (“PLUG”). For the first (right) connection point, place the connection point text next to the device ID and enter a “?” for the text. For the second connection point, place the text reference point anywhere and enter no text. The pin device ID is handled much like a terminal symbol; the device ID tag serves as the plug identifier, and the first connection point text serves as the pin number inside of the plug. Be aware of the label origin of the connection point text so that it does not run into the symbol.
Device ID
Connection Point Text For Connection Point 1
= Symbol Reference Point
PLUG
?
= Connection Points
Device Type Creation – Finally, create a device type relationship between the previously created plug symbol, pin symbol, and cross reference symbol using the Manage > Device Type > New/Modify function. Allow the relationship to contain 8 pin symbols, with associated connection point text calling out the pin number being used. Use the following criteria.
6-69
Create Schematic Elements
Device Type New/Modify Device Type Group
PLUGA
Relay, I/O, Plug
Symbol Name Parent Child 1 Child 2 Child 3 Child 4 Child 5 Child 6 Child 7 Child 8 Child 9 Cross Ref.
Search
PLUGA PIN PIN PIN PIN PIN PIN PIN PIN
Connection Points A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 Delta X 0.0000
XPLUG
Delta Y 0.0000
Absolute Position OK
Cancel
Help
Description...
Pin Chart Usage – You can test the pin chart on a drawing page (it must be online). Place the PLUGA plug symbol anywhere on a page. When prompted for the device name, enter PLUGA. Then place pin symbols elsewhere in the drawing, assigning the same device ID as the plug symbol and with connection point text of A1, A2, etc. The location of the pins will appear in the plug symbol as shown below.
6-70
Create Schematic Elements
Plug 418
6-71
Create Schematic Elements
Creating Form C Contacts There are two methods of creating and displaying Form C contacts in RSWire: 1.
Create a child symbol with three connection points
2.
Use two child symbols that share a common connection point designation
The first method reduces the likelihood of connection errors (e.g. different wires connected to the same connection point). The second method allows more flexibility in where the two contacts are placed in the schematic. However the system cannot determine that both common connections share the same wire number. The two methods are described in the following sections.
6-72
Create Schematic Elements
Method 1: Create a child symbol with three connection points This method allows creation of Form C contact symbols which are graphically shown as a single symbol with three connection points (see examples below). The three connection points are indicated by the 1, 2 and 3 designations. CR1
CR1 2
2 1
1
3
3
The steps to implement this method are:
Important
1.
Create the child symbol. See page 6-6 for the symbol creation procedure. When you define the symbol, select the PS2 symbol group (Child symbol with cross reference). Assign three connection points as indicated by the “x’s” in the above figure (remember the order in which you assign them). Assign a device ID tag that corresponds to the desired parent symbol (such as “CR” for a relay). Use the Manage > Symbol > Cross Ref. Position function to select a position for cross reference information.
2.
Create a device type that associates the Form C child symbol with the desired parent symbol. See page 6-89 for device type creation procedure. Enter three connection point designations for each Form C child symbol in the device (see example figure on next page). In the example, the device type has been named 2C, and the Form C child symbol name (the symbol created in step 1) is FORMC.
The order of the connection point designations entered in the Device Type New/Modify dialog box must match the order in which the connection points were defined when the child symbol was created.
6-73
Create Schematic Elements
Device Type New/Modify Device Type Group
2C
Search
Relay, I/O, Plug
Symbol Name Parent Child 1 Child 2 Child 3 Child 4 Child 5 Child 6 Child 7 Child 8 Child 9 Cross Ref.
CR FORMC FORMC
Q20
Connection Points 10 11 123 456
Delta X 0.0000
Delta Y 0.0000
Help
Description...
Absolute Position OK
Note
Cancel
In the example shown above, the cross reference symbol Q20 is specified. This symbol will serve to show the location of the Form C child symbols, but graphically it suggests that these are normally open contacts. You may wish to create a cross reference symbol that shows the Form C contact symbol. 3.
When you place the parent symbol in the schematic the software will ask for its device type. Use the device type created in step 2.
4.
When you place the Form C child symbols, assign the same device ID as the parent symbol.
Method 2: Use two child symbols that share a common connection point designation In this method you use two separate child symbols that share a common connection point designation. These two symbols are tied to the parent symbol through a device type definition and by assigning the same device ID as the parent symbol. This method allows you to place the two child symbols on separate lines or even separate pages of the project.
6-74
Create Schematic Elements
Parent Symbol CR112 CR 1 2 10
Child Symbol Common Connection Point Designation
11
114 CR 1 3
CR112 1
2
LT114
116
G
112
Child Symbol CR112
LT116
R 1
Important
3
When using this method, RSWire has no way of checking the potential of the common connection point. It might be possible in the schematic to have a different wire connected to the child symbol’s common connection point. The user must be aware of this possibility. The steps to implement this method are:
Important
1.
You can use existing child symbols or create custom Form C child symbols. If you create custom symbols, select the PS2 symbol group (Child symbol with cross reference). Assign a common connection point designation for the two symbols (in the previous figure “1” is the common designation.) See page 6-6 for the symbol creation procedure.
2.
Create a device type that associates the Form C child symbols with the desired parent symbol. See page 6-89 for device type creation procedure. In the example below the device type has been named FC2. The existing child symbols CRNO and CRNC are used in this example.
The order of the connection point designations entered in the Device Definition dialog box must match the order in which the connection points were defined when the child symbol was created. On most existing RSWire symbols the left connection point was defined first.
6-75
Create Schematic Elements
Device Type New/Modify Device Type Group
FC2
Search
Relay, I/O, Plug
Symbol Name Parent Child 1 Child 2 Child 3 Child 4 Child 5 Child 6 Child 7 Child 8 Child 9 Cross Ref.
CR FORMC FORMC
Connection Points 10 11 12 13
Delta X
Q11
0.0000
Delta Y 0.0000
Absolute Position OK
Cancel
Help
Description...
3.
When you place the parent symbol in the schematic the software will ask for its device type. Use the device type created in step 2.
4.
When you place the Form C child symbols, assign the same device ID as the parent symbol.
Recall that by using this second method with separate child symbols you have more flexibility in where the two contacts are placed in the schematic. But because you can place the symbols on separate lines the system cannot determine that both common connections share the same wire number.
6-76
Create Schematic Elements
Creating Signal Cross Reference Symbols The various kinds of signal cross reference symbols are described beginning on page 5-59. If desired, you can create custom signal cross reference symbols. There are outgoing signal cross references and incoming signal cross references. The symbol group that you choose when creating the symbol determines whether the reference is written on one line or multiple lines. The symbol group also determines whether or not the symbol is a star type signal cross reference. Symbol Group
Description
SG1
Incoming signal (1 line text)
SG2
Incoming signal (2 line text)
SG3
Outgoing signal (1 line text)
SG4
Outgoing signal (2 line text)
SG5
Incoming signal (star configuration, 1 line text)
SG6
Incoming signal (star configuration, 2 line text)
SG7
Outgoing signal (star configuration, same as SG8)
SG8
Outgoing signal (star configuration, same as SG7)
Symbol Creation Procedure – The following is the general procedure for creating a signal cross reference symbol. The selections and entries you make will vary depending on the specific type of symbol being created. 1.
Display a blank drawing page.
2.
Turn off the Online function (use Manage > Page > Modify function).
3.
Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function.
4.
In the Symbol Name field, enter the desired symbol name. Press the <Enter> key.
6-77
Create Schematic Elements
New/Modify Symbol Symbol Name:
List...
name
Preferred Direction Vertical
Horizontal
Snapmode: Nearest Endpoint Description: Signal Cross Reference Symbol Search Language Text... Symbol Group: SG_ _________ OK
Cancel
Help...
5.
Select Horizontal or Vertical for Preferred Direction (varies with symbol type).
6.
Select the Snapmode:Nearest Endpoint checkbox so that the symbol will automatically position itself on the end of a wire when placed.
7.
Enter the desired description in the Description field.
8.
In the Symbol Group field, select one of the SG symbol groups (described above), depending on whether the symbol is incoming or outgoing, star type or non–star type, one line notation or multi–line notation.
9.
Select the OK button to continue.
10. The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a symbol reference point at the intersection of two 0.5 inch grid lines. Zoom in for a better view of the work area.
6-78
Create Schematic Elements
11. Set the grid to 0.05 inch (1 mm). 12. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. When prompted to “Define Device ID position,” select the appropriate position. 13. In the Device ID Parameter dialog box, enter the desired device ID tag (such as “L”) in the Device ID field. Select an appropriate label origin. Select OK to continue. 14. Select the Manage > Symbol > Connection Point function. When prompted to “Locate connection point,” select the same point selected for the reference point. When prompted to “Define reference point of text,” select a point. In some cases you will need to delete the “?” in the Connection Point field of the Connection Point Parameters dialog box so that no connection point text is used. Connection point text is used only if a single reference is to appear at some point other than the device ID. Select OK to continue. 15. Draw the remainder of the symbol, (which in many cases may consist only of a single drawing line perpendicular to the wire). 16. For a star type outgoing signal with multiple references, enter an appropriate number of attribute texts. Use the Draw > Text function to place “?” characters. When prompted for attributes, select Attribute–Activate and enter a number in the 2000 series (2000 for the first reference, 2001 for the next one, etc.).
6-79
Create Schematic Elements
Text Attribute Definition
Select “Activate” checkbox
Symbol Text: ? I/O Attribute
Attribute Activate
Activate No:
Enter Attribute Number
2000
Address I/O Text
17. Save the symbol: select the Manage > Symbol > Save function and define a window around the symbol elements.
6-80
Create Schematic Elements
Create Macro A macro is a group of schematic elements that are stored as a group and can be placed in a drawing in one step. The macro can contain multiple symbols. If, for example, there is a particular circuit which is needed repeatedly, you can store it as a macro and place it quickly and easily. Symbols within the macro are recognized and automatically addressed by the software (and can be modified by the user) just as when individual symbols are placed in a drawing. Custom title blocks and drawing borders can be stored as macros and can be placed automatically on any new drawing. See page 4-14 for how to assign page macros. Macros can be created on a blank page, or a portion of an existing drawing can be stored as a macro. In this section, an overview of the macro creation procedure will be given first, followed by an example. Macro Creation Procedure – The drawing elements that will comprise the macro should be put down before selecting the Manage > Macro > New/Modify function. 1.
Select the Manage > Macro > New/Modify function.
Manage Macro New/Modify The New/Modify Macro dialog box will appear. New/Modify Macro Macro Name:
List...
Macro Description:
Search Language Text... Maintain Sequence of Terminal Numbers During Renumbering OK
Cancel
Help...
6-81
Create Schematic Elements
Note
2.
Enter macro name, description. Fields are provided for the macro name (up to 14 characters) and description. Use the List button to see a list of existing macro names. If you wish to include foreign language text strings in the description, select the Search Language Text button to select from the available strings.
3.
Does macro contain sequential terminals? There is a checkbox labeled Maintain Sequence of Terminal Numbers During Renumbering. This should be selected if the macro contains any terminals that must be treated as a group in the terminal plan (must not be split up in the terminal sorting process). If the checkbox is selected, the terminals in the macro will also be renumbered as a group if terminals are renumbered.
4.
Select the OK button to continue.
5.
Select base point. The software will then prompt you to Define Base Point. This is the reference point that determines where the macro will appear in relation to the point selected when it is placed in a drawing. (For macros such as title blocks that are automatically placed by RSWire in the same location, select a base point of x:0.000, y:0.000.)
Before the macro is saved you can change the base point with the Manage > Macro > Reference Point function. 6.
Note
Select objects. The software will prompt you to Select objects. Select objects by windowing them (or selecting individually) on the drawing page. Press the <Enter> key when all items have been selected. The Manage > Macro > Select Items function allows you to select additional items at any time before the macro is stored. Line numbers and other automatically placed elements will not be included in the macro.
If you wish to bring in an AutoCAD drawing use the Insert > Block > Insert function. Select an insertion point on the drawing page. It is not necessary to explode the inserted drawing elements unless there are items within blocks that you wish to change or remove. Explode the DWG elements with the Insert > Block > Explode function. 7.
Store the macro. Select the Manage > Macro > Save function to store the macro. The software will display the message “Macro stored.”
6-82
Create Schematic Elements
Note
Attribute text: if the macro is to contain symbols with attribute text (text that prompts you for a value when the symbol is placed), note the following. When the macro is created, this text must consist of an unanswered prompt, indicated by a “?” on the screen. If the attribute has already been assigned a value and a macro is then created, a new value will not be prompted when the macro is placed. Use the Modify > Symbol function to change this text back to a “?” before creating the macro. (You can also place the symbol again and press <Enter> when prompted for the attribute value.) You can cancel the macro creation procedure with the Manage > Macro > Cancel function. Macro Wire Numbers – Wire numbers can be stored as part of the macro. These will appear when the macro is placed. They will be altered by the system according to the following rules: 1.
If a numbered wire in the macro is connected to an existing wire that already has a wire number, the existing wire number will be used.
2.
If the macro contains a signal cross reference that already exists in the project, any existing wire number connected with that signal will be used.
3.
If any wire numbers in the macro duplicate wire numbers that already exist in the project, a “?” will be added to the duplicate wire numbers in the macro.
Create Title Block Macro RSWire users can create page title blocks which automatically appear on schematic drawing pages. A title block is created and stored as a macro. Variable text can be placed in the title block when it is created, and these texts are automatically replaced with project data (date, project name, page number, etc.) when the page is displayed. A default title block can be named in the New Project dialog box when a project is created (see page 3-6). This will be placed automatically on every page in the project. An appropriate title block can also be specified in the New Page dialog box when a drawing page is created (see page 4-14) which will override the default title block. Existing title blocks in a drawing can be changed using the Manage > Page > Modify function.
Manage Page Modify Title Block Creation Procedure – Use the following steps to create a title block macro:
6-83
Create Schematic Elements
1.
Open a blank drawing page (see page 4-11).
2.
Select Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function.
Tools Project Settings General Defaults 3.
The General Defaults dialog box will appear. De–select the Display Title Block checkbox and select the OK button.
4.
Now you can draw the elements of the title block. These will usually consist of drawing lines and text. If you wish to include an existing graphic element, such as a company logo, in the title block, it is best to do this before creating the rest of the title block. You may bring ACAD .dwg files using Insert > Block > Insert (AutoCAD text attributes will not be reorganized).
Insert Block Insert Typically, the title block consists of an area at the bottom of the page divided into boxes for different pieces of information. Use the Draw > Graphic > Line or Draw > Graphic > Box function to draw these areas. Do not use Wires or Logical Boxes when drawing these lines or boxes. Note
RSWire has a Frame function which automatically draws a single line border around the extents of the page format when the page is plotted. Therefore it is not necessary to make this frame part of the title block. The Format > Layer function can be used to turn off the frame layer, if desired. Use the Draw > Text function to label the various areas of the title block. Variable text which will be replaced with project data is entered as a question mark followed by the appropriate variable name (for example, ?page for page number). A list of available variables is given on page 6-87. The following figure shows the macro TITLED, one of the title blocks included with RSWire. Note the variable (?) text.
6-84
Create Schematic Elements
Title block macro TITLED PROJECT:
DATE DRAWN BY
CKD BY
NAME
?pgdescr02?pgdescr04
?pgdescr03 ?pgdescr05
?addr01 ?addr02 ?addr03 ?addr04 ?addr05
?project ?title01
DRAWING–NO.:
?title03 JOB–NO.:
?title02 SHEET
PAGE DESCRIPTION:
?pgdescr01
?page of ?prpgno
?pgdescr18
5.
Select the Manage > Macro > New/Modify function (see page 6-81).
6.
Enter an appropriate name and description for the macro in the New/Modify Macro dialog box. Select OK.
7.
The software will prompt you to Define Base Point. The base point of the title block macro must be at the origin (0.0000, 0.0000) of the page XY coordinate system, i.e. at the bottom left corner. Therefore, when prompted for a base point, you can either enter these coordinates on the command line or you can position the cursor at the 0.0000, 0.0000 point (coordinates are displayed above the drawing area) and press the left mouse button.
8.
When the block is drawn as desired, you must select all the items to be included in the macro. Use the Manage > Macro > Select Items function. The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Select objects by windowing them (or selecting individually) on the drawing page. (Or enter ALL in the Command Line.)
9.
The software will highlight all of the selected objects. Click the right mouse button, or press the <Enter> key, to confirm the selected objects are grouped.
10. Use the Save function on the Manage > Macro submenu to store the macro. The software will display the message “Macro was stored.” 11. After the macro is stored, delete the title block from your page by selecting the Manage > Page > Clear function. 12. To add the title block to your current project: Select Manage > Project > Modify. Add the title block macro name to the Title Block Macro field. To add the title block to a single page: Display the page and select Manage > Page > Modify. Add the macro name to the Title Block field.
6-85
Create Schematic Elements
Note
6-86
The above example shows the variables ?addr01, ?addr02, etc., each of which represents one line of the address file. See page 7-17 for more information on the address file. Using these variables instead of a fixed address allows you to change the address without editing the title block macro.
Create Schematic Elements
Available Title Block Variables: Project–Related Variables (File > New > Project function) Variable: ?project ?install ?location ?page ?prpgno ?inpgno ?nextpgfl ?nextpgno ?plotdate ?plottime ?prdescr01 ?prdescr02 ?prdescr03 etc. ?prdescr09 ?title01 ?title02 ?title03 etc. ?title20
Description: Current Project Current Installation Current Location Current Page Total drawing pages in project Total drawing pages in installation Next Page Flag: + following pages - no more pages Next page number in current installation Displays current date when page is created or plotted Displays current time when page is created or plotted Project description 1 (Comment") Project description 2 Project description 3 Project description09 Project title data 01 (Description") Project title data 02 (Job Number") Project title data 03 (Drawing Number") Project title data 20
6-87
Create Schematic Elements
Address File Variables (enter using Tools > System Settings > Address File) Variable:
Description:
?addr01
Address file: line 01
?addr02
Address file: line 02
?addr03 etc. ?addr20
Address file: line 03 Address file: line 20
Page–Related Variables (File > New > Page function) Variable:
?pgdescr02
Page description 1 (File > New > Page, Parameter" button) Page description 2 - date
?pgdescr03
Page description 3
?pgdescr01
?pgdescr04 etc. ?pgdescr100
6-88
Description:
Page description 4 - user name Page description 100
Create Schematic Elements
Create Device Type The Manage > Device Type function is used to create a device type. When you place a parent symbol on a drawing, the software will ask for its device type. A device type specifies a combination of parent symbol, child symbol(s) and cross reference symbol. This allows RSWire to know which child symbols are associated with a parent symbol and which cross reference symbol to place next to the parent symbol. Once RSWire knows the device type, it can also perform error–checking functions by keeping track of how many of the available child symbols have been used. For more information on parent and child symbols, see page 5-25. A number of device types are provided with the software. These can be listed with the Reports > Libraries > Device Type Full (or Device Brief) function. You may also wish to create your own, custom device types. For this, use the Manage > Device Type > New/Modify function. (An example device is created on page 6-34.) Select:
Manage Device Type New/Modify The following Device Type New/Modify dialog box will appear.
6-89
Create Schematic Elements
Device Type New/Modify Device Type Group
Search
Relay, I/O, Plug
Symbol Name
Connection Points
Parent Child 1 Child 2 Child 3 Child 4 Child 5 Child 6 Child 7 Child 8 Child 9 Delta X
Cross Ref.
0.0000
Delta Y 0.0000
Absolute Position OK
Cancel
Help
Description...
The following fields are provided: Device Type – Enter a name for the device type up to 14 characters long. Press the <Enter> key. Select the Search button to see a list of existing device types. Group – Two choices are available: Relay,I/O,Plug and Cable. Choose Cable when defining a cable device type and Relay,I/O,Plug for all other device types. Note
You must select a group for the device type before entering a description (see next paragraph). Failure to follow this order of entry may result in the device type not appearing on the device type list. Description – This button allows a description of the device to be entered which will appear on device listings. Three description fields are available. If you wish to use foreign language text strings in the descriptions, select the Search Language Text button to select from the available strings. If a Cable device group was selected, three additional fields will be accessible which allow the user to enter a cable type description, gauge and a part number.
6-90
Create Schematic Elements
Device Type Description Description Descr. 1 Descr. 2 Descr. 3
Search Language Text... Cable Cable Type Gauge Part No.
OK
Cancel
Help...
Parent Symbol Name – Enter the symbol name of the parent symbol of the device. Child 1, 2, etc. – Enter the names of child symbols in the order in which they will be used in the cross reference symbol (i.e., the first child corresponds to the “?1” text in the cross reference symbol, the second child corresponds to “?2”, etc.). 256 Child fields are available. Connection Points – Optional connection point text can be entered in these fields which will overwrite any connection point text that was specified when the parent or child symbol was created. Separate each connection point text with a space. If more than two texts are entered, they will all be displayed when the symbol is placed, and the unwanted texts can be deleted at that time. Cross Ref. – Enter the name of the cross reference symbol that will hold the cross reference information for the parent/child symbols. Delta X, Delta Y – The values entered in these fields determine where the cross reference symbol will appear on the drawing in relation to the parent symbol. Refer to the following illustration. (If the Absolute Position checkbox is selected, the Y measurement will be from the drawing origin point: 0.0, 0.0.) The distances entered are between the reference point of the parent symbol and the reference point of the cross reference symbol.
6-91
Create Schematic Elements
dx=0 mm
dx=1.50”
dy=–0.5” dy=75 mm
Bottom of Page JIC Distance Values
IEC Distance Values
Absolute Position – Determines whether the Delta Y field is measured from the drawing origin (0.0, 0.0) or from the reference point of the parent symbol. Select the checkbox to measure from the drawing origin. This setting is typically used for IEC format drawings where the cross references appear in a row below the parent symbols. Once the Device Type New/Modify dialog box has been filled out, select the OK button to complete the creation of the device type.
6-92
Create Schematic Elements
Delete, Copy, Rename for Symbols, Macros, and Devices Existing symbols, macros, and devices can be deleted, copied and renamed in the RSWire database by using the appropriate Manage submenu function.
Manage Symbol Delete Copy Rename The above figure shows a portion of the Manage > Symbol submenu. Similar submenus are provided for the Manage > Macro and Manage > Device Type functions.
Delete Symbol, Macro, or Device You can delete a symbol, macro or device to remove it from the RSWire database, making it unavailable for use. Symbols – If you delete a symbol from the database, it will not be available for placing in new drawings and the system will not be able to display the symbol when existing drawings containing the system are loaded. When you read such a page the system will display the message “Warning: Symbol not in the catalog” and will include the name of the missing symbol. When the page is displayed, the symbol will not appear, although the device ID will remain. Macros – If you delete a macro from the database, it will not be available for placing in new drawings. In most cases, a page containing a deleted macro will still display the macro when the page is loaded. However title block macros and ladder line number macros will not appear if they have been deleted from the database. Device Types – If you delete a device type from the database, it will not be available for new drawings. If you read a page containing a device type that has been deleted or is otherwise not in the database, the system will display a message “Error while reading project data. Device not defined.” It will then list the parent and child symbols that are part of the device in question.
6-93
Create Schematic Elements
To delete a symbol, macro, or device from the RSWire database: 1.
Select the appropriate Delete function.
Manage Symbol Delete or
Manage Macro Delete
or Manage Device Type Delete
2.
The Delete dialog box will appear. In the Name field, enter the name of the symbol, macro, or device you wish to delete from the database. Select the Search button to display a list of symbols, macros, or devices. Select the OK button to delete the selected item. Delete Symbol
Symbol Delete or Macro Delete or Device Delete
Symbol Name: Search OK
Note
6-94
Cancel
Help...
If you get the message “No catalog loaded” when attempting to delete a symbol, it indicates that no symbol catalogs are currently open. To open the catalog, load (read) a drawing page that contains at least one symbol from the desired symbol catalog.
Create Schematic Elements
Copy Symbol, Macro, or Device You can copy existing symbols, macros, and devices, assigning a different name to the copy. This is useful if you wish to create a new symbol, macro, or device type that is similar to an existing one. You can modify the copy as desired instead of creating the new symbol, macro, or device from scratch. See page 6-97. To copy a symbol, macro, or device in the RSWire database: 1.
Select the appropriate Copy function.
Manage Symbol Copy or
Manage Macro Copy
or
Manage Device Type Copy
2.
The Copy dialog box will appear (Macro Copy dialog box shown). Copy Macro Macro Name:
To Macro Name: Search OK
Note
Cancel
Help...
3.
Enter the existing symbol, macro, or device type name in the left Name field. (If you wish to see a list of existing items, use the Search button to display a list which can be selected from.)
4.
Enter the name the copy is to have in the To Name field on the right.
5.
Select the OK button to create copy.
If you get the message “No catalog loaded” when attempting to copy a symbol, it indicates that no symbol catalogs are currently open. To open the catalog, load (read) a drawing page that contains at least one symbol from the desired symbol catalog.
6-95
Create Schematic Elements
Rename Symbol, Macro, or Device You can rename existing symbols, macros, and devices, assigning a different name to the original item. To rename a symbol, macro, or device in the RSWire database: 1.
Select the appropriate Rename function.
Manage Symbol Rename or
Manage Macro Rename
or
Manage Device Type Rename
2.
The Rename dialog box will appear (Device Rename dialog box shown). Device Type Rename
Device Name:
To Device Name: Search OK
Note
6-96
Cancel
Help...
3.
Enter the existing symbol, macro, or device type name in the left Name field. (If you wish to see a list of existing items, use the Search button to display a list which can be selected from.)
4.
Enter the new name the item is to have in the To Name field on the right.
5.
Select the OK button to rename the item.
If you get the message “No catalog loaded” when attempting to rename a symbol, it indicates that no symbol catalogs are currently open. To open the catalog, load (read) a drawing page that contains at least one symbol from the desired symbol catalog.
Create Schematic Elements
Modify Symbol, Macro, or Device This section describes how to change a symbol, macro or device type as it is stored in the catalog, in other words, changing its basic definition in the software. (To change a single use of a symbol in a drawing use the Modify > Symbol function.) To Modify an Existing Symbol: 1.
Display a blank, offline page.
2.
Use the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function and enter the name of the existing symbol. Press the <Enter> key.
3.
The software will prompt you that it already exists and ask if you wish to modify it. Select Yes to modify.
4.
Make changes (if any) in the New/Modify Symbol dialog box and select OK.
5.
The software will prompt you to select a reference point in the drawing for the symbol. Select a point. If the symbol you have chosen to modify exists in the first symbol catalog in the symbol catalog search path, it will appear automatically at the selected reference point. If no symbol appears, it probably exists in a different catalog. If so you must place the symbol in the drawing using the Insert > Symbol by Name or Insert > Select Icon function. (The symbol catalog path can be found in the RS\WORK\ECSCAD.CFG file.
6.
Perform the desired modifications. To change the symbol’s reference point, device ID, connection points, or cross reference position, use the appropriate function in the Manage > Symbol submenu.
7.
Store the symbol to save the changes. (Use the Manage > Symbol > Save function and define the area to be included in the symbol.)
6-97
Create Schematic Elements
To Modify an Existing Macro:
6-98
1.
Use the Manage > Macro > New/Modify function and enter the name of the existing macro. Select OK.
2.
The software will prompt you that it already exists and ask if you wish to overwrite it. Select Yes followed by OK to modify.
3.
The software will prompt you to select a base point (reference point). Select any point. You can change it later.
4.
The software will prompt you to select objects. At this point press the <Esc> key to escape from the macro creation process. The software will prompt “Selected item not valid.” Select OK to continue.
5.
Place the existing macro on the page. a.
Select the Insert > Macro By Name function. Enter the macro name in the Name field and select OK.
b.
The macro will appear at the cursor. Click the left mouse button to place the macro in the drawing.
c.
Select the Accept All button to insert device IDs in the macro.
6.
Perform the desired modifications on the macro.
7.
Select the items to be included in the macro. (Use the Manage > Macro > Select Items function and select the objects. Press <Enter> when all objects have been selected.)
8.
Select a reference point for the macro. (Use the Manage > Macro > Reference Point function and select the desired reference point.)
9.
Store the macro. (Use the Manage > Macro > Save function.)
Create Schematic Elements
To Modify an Existing Device Type: 1.
Use the Manage > Device Type > New/Modify function and enter the name of the existing device type in the Device Type field. Press the <Enter> key.
2.
The software will prompt you that the device type already exists and ask if you wish to modify it. Select OK to modify.
3.
Perform the desired modifications in the Device Type New/Modify dialog box and select the OK button to save the changes.
6-99
Create Schematic Elements
Multiline Styles Multilines are wires consisting of multiple parallel elements. Multiline wires are drawn with the Draw > Wire > Multiline function (or using the Multiline button on the toolbar). Multilines can have various combinations of solid, dashed and dotted lines in various colors. These combinations are called multiline styles. You can select from the available multiline styles using the Format > Multiline Style function.
Format Multiline Style The Multiline Styles dialog box will appear. Multiline Styles Multiline Style Current:
3_PHASE
Name:
3_PHASE
Description:
L1,L2,L3
Load...
Save...
Add
Rename
Element Properties... Multiline Properties...
OK
Cancel
Help...
The following fields and functions are available: Current – This field displays and sets the current multiline style. Select a name from the list to make it current. If there are multiple styles, the name of the current style is selected.
6-100
Create Schematic Elements
Name – This field names a new multiline style or renames one. The element and multiline properties are unavailable until you enter a new name and make it current by choosing Add. Enter a name and choose Add, and then save the multiline style to a multiline library (MLN) file. The software saves the definition in the MLN file you specify. If you specify an MLN file that already exists, the new style definition is added to the file and existing definitions are not erased. The default file name is pr/menu/mnu/acad.mln. To rename a style, enter a name and choose Rename. You cannot rename, modify, or delete the default STANDARD multiline style. To make a copy of the current style, enter a name and then choose Save. Multiline style names adhere to the naming conventions for named objects. Description – This field allows you to enter a description for a multiline style. Enter up to 255 characters, including spaces. Load – This button displays the Load Multiline Styles dialog box, in which you can load multiline styles from a specified MLN file. Save – This button saves or copies a multiline style. Enter a name and then choose Save. Add – This button adds the multiline style in the Name field to the Current list. Rename – This button renames a multiline style. Enter a name and then select Rename. Element Properties – This button displays the Element Properties dialog box. You cannot edit the element properties of an existing multiline style. Here you can set the properties, such as the number, offset, color, and linetype, of new and existing multiline elements. Multiline Properties – Displays the Multiline Properties dialog box. Here you can set multiline properties, such as the display of segment joints, the start and end caps and their angle, and the background color.
6-101
Create Schematic Elements
Element Properties Select the Element Properties button in the Multiline Styles dialog box. Element Properties Elements:
Add
Offset
Color
Ltype
2.0 1.5 1.0
BYLAYER BYLAYER BYLAYER
CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS
Delete
Offset
Color...
BYLAYER
Linetype...
CONTINUOUS OK
Cancel
2.000
Help...
Elements – displays the elements in the current multiline style. Each line element in the style is defined by its offset from the multiline origin (0.0), color and linetype. The line elements are always displayed in descending order of their offsets. Add – Select this button to add a new line element to the multiline style. Delete – Select this button to delete a line element from the multiline style. Offset – This field specifies the offset of the line element in the multiline style. Color – Select this button display and set the color of line elements in the multiline style. The software will display the Select Color dialog box. Linetype – Select this button to display and set the linetype for line elements in the multiline style.
6-102
Create Schematic Elements
Multiline Properties Select the Multiline Properties button in the Multiline Styles dialog box. Multiline Properties Display joints Caps Start
End
Line Outer arc Inner arcs Angle
90.000
90.000
Fill On
BYBLOCK
Color...
OK
Cancel
Help...
Display joints – Controls the display of the joints at the vertices of each multiline segment. A joint is also known as a miter. Joints typically would not be used for wires. Caps – These functions control the start and end caps of the multiline. Line – Creates a straight line across each end of the multiline. Outer arc – Creates an arc between the outermost elements of the multiline. Inner arcs – Creates an arc between pairs of inner elements. If there’s an odd number of elements, the center line is unconnected. For example, if there are 6 elements, inner arcs connect elements 2 and 5 and elements 3 and 4. If there are 7 elements, inner arcs connect elements 2 and 6 and elements 3 and 5. Element 4 is left unconnected. Angle – Specifies the angle of the end caps.
6-103
Create Schematic Elements
Fill – These functions control the background fill of the multiline. On – Turns background fill on. Color – Displays and sets the color of the background fill. The software will display the Select Color dialog box. You can also enter a color name or number in the box.
6-104
Settings
7 Settings There are a variety of parameters that can be set that determine how RSWireTM Designer will operate. The functions that allow these settings to be made are found mainly in the Tools and Format pulldown menus. The following sections are included:
System Settings Report Settings Reports: Description Files Printer Configuration Command Protection Navigator Display Settings Grid Settings Address Files Project Settings General Defaults Page Control Functions Page Formats Programmable Controller Settings Configuration: Terminal and Plug IDs Device ID Style Object Defaults Terminal/Plug Plan Configuration Terminal Plan Configuration Pin–Plug Plan Configuration Object Styles Text Styles Dimension Styles Preferences
7-1
Settings
System Settings Grid Settings The Tools > System Settings > Grid Settings function defines the grid size of the drawing. The size of the drawing grid determines how drawing elements are positioned and where connections can be made. When placed on the drawing, the reference points of symbols, text, lines, etc., snap to the nearest grid line. To set the grid size, select:
Tools System Settings Grid Settings The Grid Settings dialog box will appear. System Settings Grid Settings
Default Settings
Report Settings
Format Files
Printer Configura
Command Protection
Current Value:
X
Y
0.0500
0.0500
0.0100
0.0100
0.1250
0.1250
0.2500
0.2500
0.5000
0.5000
1.0000
1.0000
2.0000
2.0000
0.0500
0.0500
OK
7-2
Cancel
Save
Help...
Settings
Note
Values shown in inches. This dialog box lists a group of fields for X and Y values from which the user may choose (these values represent the current drawing units – inches or millimeters). The user can select these values by placing the cursor and pressing the <Enter> key. Alternately, the user can select a radio button beside the desired value to select both x and y values. The selected value will then appear in the Current Value field. Select the OK button to put the newly selected values into effect. The user can also enter new grid values in any of the X and Y fields. These values can then be selected as described above. Select the Save button to save these newly entered values for future work sessions.
Important
(AutoCAD R14 Add–on version only) Do not use a grid value having units smaller than thousandths of an inch (.001 inch). Use of such a grid value can result in unrecognized connections in the schematic drawings.
7-3
Settings
Default Settings The Tools > System Settings > Default Settings function allows several settings to be made. System Settings Grid Settings
Default Settings
Printer Configuration
Command Protectio
General System Settings Default to Uppercase
Dialog Language
OK
Cancel
Save
Help...
Symbol and macro names in RSWire are case sensitive – they must be entered exactly as they exist in the symbol catalog. When you select the Default to Uppercase checkbox, any symbol or macro names you enter will be converted to uppercase letters, which is how the symbols provided with the software are named. The Dialog Language section, allows you to select the language used for dialog boxes, menus, text attributes, and help screens. The choices are German, English, French, Italian and Spanish. Select the Save button to save your settings for future work sessions. Select the OK button to load the new settings. Note
7-4
To change back to English from another language, the System Settings function is located under the Format menu.
Settings
Report Settings The Tools > System Settings > Report Settings function displays a dialog box that allows a number of list related parameters to be set. These settings determine how the lists will be formatted and handled by the system.
Tools System Settings Report Settings
System Settings Report Settings
Filter
OFF
Format Files
Printer Configuration
Sort
Command Protection
Output
Screen
OFF
Printer File ON
Project
ON
Interactive
Graphic Output
OK
Cancel
Save
Help...
7-5
Settings
The following parameters can be set: Filter – When On is selected, lists can be filtered according to wildcard strings entered by the user when the list is generated. For example, when Filter is On and the symbol list function is selected, a dialog box with the following fields will appear: Symbol:
=
*
Description:
=
*
By entering “P*” in the Symbol field, the list will contain only those symbols whose names begin with P. By entering “*NC*” only those symbols containing NC will be listed. An entry of “*” will include all information. Similarly, the Description field can also be used to filter the list. When the Filter radio button is Off, no filtering is performed. Sort – When On is selected, lists will be sorted by selected fields according to sort variables in the list generator file (the format of each list is determined by a list generator file located in the RS\SYSCON\LIST directory). When Off is selected, no sorting is performed. See page 14-11. Output – These five radio buttons allow you to select the list output medium. Selecting Screen will cause the list to be displayed on the screen. Printer will send the list to the currently active LPT port (which may be different than the default AutoCAD printer). Selecting File will cause the list to be stored as a text file in the RS\TMP subdirectory. Selecting Project will activate the Text On Drawing function which allows the list to be placed on a drawing page (see page 5-88). Selecting the Interactive option will cause the software to prompt you for the output type (screen, printer, file, project) whenever you generate a report. This removes the need to make the output setting before you generate the report. Graphic Output – This checkbox allows extended IBM graphic characters in the lists for borders and other purposes. When the Graphic Output checkbox is turned off these characters are translated to pipes and dashes for use where the extended graphic characters are not supported. Select the Save button to save the current settings for future work sessions.
7-6
Settings
Report Format Files The Tools > System Settings > Reports: Description Files function assigns a file to either a report or list function. If you create a custom list generator file you must assign this file to the appropriate report or list function within RSWire. Select:
Tools System Settings Reports: Description Files The following dialog box appears: System Settings Report Settings
Reports: Description Files
Printer Configuration
Command Protec
List Name
File Name
Printer
Conn. List I/O List Conn. List Wire Diagram List Conn. List Wire Label List Conn. List Wiring List Fld. Wire Cable + Wire List Fld. Wire Cable List Fld. Wire Terminal List Fld. Wire Terminal Strip List Gen. Info Device Types [Brief] Gen. Info Device Types [Detailed] Gen. Info Macro Directory Gen. Info Page Formats
PLC.LST WIREDG.LST WIRELAB.LST WIRE.LST FLDWIRE.LST CABLE.LST TERM.LST TSTRIP.LST DEVICE2.LST DEVICE1.LST MACRO.LST FORMAT.LST
Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default
Conn. List I/O List
PLC.LST
Printer
Default
1
2
3
OK
4
Cancel
5
Save
File
Help...
7-7
Settings
The following parameters can be set: List Name, File Name, and Printer – This is a description of available reports listed in alphabetical order by name of report. A corresponding file name for each report as well as the defined printer for the report is also listed. (List Name/File) – When you select a report name from the upper list, this field displays the name of the operator file that will be used to print the selected (highlighted) list. If you wish to use a different file to generate the selected list, you can enter the filename in this field. Note
The name of this field will change, depending on which list is selected. Printer – These radio buttons select to which printer a file will print. Choose from a default printer or one of five printers listed in the Printer Configuration dialog box. Each report can be defined to go to a print file for printing at a later time.
7-8
Settings
Printer Configuration Use the Tools > System Settings > Printer Configuration tab to select the printer to be used for lists and other printed information. Select:
Tools System Settings Printer Configuration The following dialog box appears: System Settings Report Settings
Reports: Description Files
Printer
Printer Configuration
Symbol Set
Lines
Options
1.
Printer
60
850
ISO
2.
Printer
60
850
ISO
3.
Printer
60
850
ISO
4.
Printer
60
850
ISO
Printer
60
850
ISO
60
850
ISO
5. File
Command Protec
Default Printer
1
2
3
4
OK
Cancel
5
Save
File
Help...
7-9
Settings
The following parameters can be set: The Printer column lists the available printer drivers. These are batch files located in the RS\WORK directory. See page 9-3 for more information. The Lines column allows the number of lines per page to be specified for each printer. This applies to list outputs. The Symbol Set area allows you to select standard ASCII character set (850) or ISO (International Standards Organization) foreign language symbol sets. If you select ISO certain inappropriate characters may appear in lists generated using the default format files supplied with RSWire. Use the Options column to enter appropriate options for each printer. The Default Printer area allows one of the printer drivers to be selected as the default printer. Selecting File will send print outputs to file in the RS\TMP directory. Select the Save button to save the printer settings for future work sessions. Select the Cancel button to quit, discard all changes and exit the dialog box. Select OK to exit the printer configuration dialog box.
7-10
Settings
Command Protection The Tools > System Settings > Command Protection tab allows password protection for access to functions. Functions can be assigned to one of three security categories: Unprotected (level 0), Constructor (level 1) or Administrator (level 2). This allows functions to be available or unavailable to different categories of users. Select:
Tools System Settings Command Protection The following dialog box appears. System Settings Command Protection
Navigator
Display Settings
Grid Settings
Address Files
Passwords
Level 2 [Administrator]:
Change
Level 1 [User]:
Change
Level
Command
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1
ACAD_INI AD_DWG BACKUP BROWSE CHECK_PARENT CHECK_SIGNAL CIR_2POINT CIR_3POINT CIR_DIA CIR_RAD CIR_TTR CMD_DISPATCH CONF_LANGUAGE CONF_LAYER
OK
Cancel
Save
Help...
7-11
Settings
When the user begins a work session, all unprotected commands are available. With the first attempt to access a level 1 command, the software will prompt for a password. Entering the level 1 password gives access to all level 0 and level 1 commands for the remainder of the session. With the first attempt to use a level 2 command the software will prompt for a level 2 password which will give access to all level 0, 1 and 2 commands for the remainder of the session. Access to the command level and the password function can also be password protected. Enter the password in the appropriate field making certain that it is spelled correctly. Note
One password is used for all same level access. To password protect a command, click on that command in the dialog box. With each click, the software will toggle through the 0–2 levels of password protection. Select level 0 for no password protection. Select level 1 for Constructor password access. Select level 2 for Administrator level password access. Select the Change button to revise an existing password. Select Cancel to discard any changes and exit the dialog box. If you wish to use the same settings for future work sessions, select the Save button to store the settings. Select the OK button if you only wish to load the settings for the current sessions. The settings are save in the cp.cfg file located in the RS\SYSCON\SYSTEM directory. It is recommended that the cp.cfg file be made read–only to ensure that users cannot change the settings.
7-12
Settings
Navigator The Tools > System Settings > Navigator tab allows you to set the zoom parameters that are used in conjunction with the Navigator function. Type the percentage of zoom (0–100) in the text box or click and drag the slide bar. The percentage of zoom will appear in the text box as you move the slide bar. Smaller percentage values will result in a closer zoom view. Zoom Off – This checkbox activates the default settings for the Navigator Zoom function. When checkbox is not selected, the zoom function is on. When the checkbox is selected, the zoom function is off. Select:
Tools System Settings Navigator The following dialog box appears. System Settings Command Protection
Navigator
Display Settings
Grid Settings
Address Files
Parameter
Zoom Off
Zoom
0
Percent
OK
Cancel
Save
Help...
7-13
Settings
When the desired settings have been made, select the OK button to load them for the current sessions only and exit the dialog box. If you wish to use the same settings for future work sessions, select the Save button to store the settings. Select Cancel to discard any changes and exit the dialog box.
7-14
Settings
Display Settings The Tools > System Settings > Display Settings function allows you to select whether or not the screen display will indicate symbol connection points, reference points, and part numbers. To set the display settings, select:
Tools System Settings Display Settings The following dialog box will appear: System Settings Command Protection
Navigator
Display Settings
Grid Settings
Address Files
All On Display Connection Points Display Reference Points Display Part Numbers Display Wire Numbers Display Hidden Symbols [Cable...] All Off
OK
Cancel
Save
Help...
7-15
Settings
The following check boxes are available: All On – Display connection points, reference points, part numbers, and wire numbers for symbols on the drawing screen. Display Connection Points – Display symbol connection points on the drawing screen (marked by a green “X”). Display Reference Points – Display symbol reference points on the drawing screen (marked by an inverted red triangle). Display Part Numbers – Display symbol part numbers on drawing screen. Display Wire Numbers – Display wire numbers on drawing screen. Display Hidden Symbols (Cable...) – Display invisible symbols on the drawing screen. For example, when you create a cable in the terminal plan editor, a graphic representing the cable is added to the schematic page. This graphic is suppressed unless this checkbox is selected. All Off – Do not display connection points, reference points, part numbers, wire numbers, and invisible symbols on the drawing screen. When the desired settings have been made, select the OK button to load them for the current sessions only and exit the dialog box. If you wish to use the same settings for future work sessions, select the Save button to store the settings. Select Cancel to discard any changes and exit the dialog box.
7-16
Settings
Address File The Tools > System Settings > Address File tab allows you to create or edit a text file containing information such as the user’s street address which the system can automatically place on drawings, list headings, and title blocks. (In the New Project dialog box there is a Address field for specifying an address file name to be used in the project.) Select:
Tools System Settings Address File The following dialog box appears. System Settings Command Protection
Navigator
Display Settings
Grid Settings
Address File
File Name
Delete Title Block-Logo
Search...
File Name: X-Coord:
Y-Coord:
Edit Area
Next
OK
Previous
Cancel
Save
Help...
7-17
Settings
The following parameters can be set: The right File name field allows you to select from an existing list of address files. The left File name field allows you to enter the name of a new address file. These files must exist in the RS\DB\CUSTOM directory. When a file name is entered or selected, the contents of that file will appear in the Edit Area fields. There are 20 fields, each of which holds 60 characters. Five fields are displayed at a time. Use the Next and Previous buttons to move through the groups of fields. The Title Block–Logo fields allow you to specify a DWG file (such as a logo) to be placed automatically in the title block. X and Y positions can be set for the logo. The logo .DWG file must exist in the RS\WORK directory. Use the Save button to save any newly entered or edited information for future work sessions. Use the Delete button to delete the currently selected address file. Use the Cancel button to exit the Address File dialog box. Select OK to exit the address files dialog box. Note
7-18
On title blocks, if you wish the currently selected address file to be inserted in the title block automatically, you must create the title block with the variables ?addr01, ?addr02, etc., in the position where the address is to appear. Each variable represents one line of the address file. See page 6-83, create title block macro.
Settings
Project Settings General Defaults Note
If you use the Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function to change units from inches to millimeters (or vice versa) during a work session, the on–screen markings for symbol reference points, connection points, etc., may appear either too large or too small. To avoid this, after selecting the units select the Save button, exit from RSWire and then restart RSWire. Select:
Tools Project Settings General Defaults The following dialog box appears.
7-19
Settings
Project Settings Page Control Functions
General Defaults
Page Formats Programmable Controller Settings Configuration: Terminal a
User Name
USER
Digits in Line Numbers
2
Default Page Format
D-2COL
Date Format
MM/DD/YY
Display Title Block Display Grid Units=Inch Prompt For Device ID Prompt For Conn. Point Text Part Number Check
Cross Ref. Display Format IEC
JIC
Device ID to Cross Ref. Offset
3.0000
Use Text Height from Project Parameters Use Text Style from Project Parameters Prompt For Page Store Ladder Without Page Numbers
Zone Cross Ref. Display Format Line Number Signal Cross Ref. Display Format DevID/<=Inst/>Page.Linenumber
Diagonal Wire Display Cross Ref. at Child Create Connection List When Saving Page Wire Number Display
OK
7-20
Cancel
Normal
Save
Help...
Settings
The following parameters can be set: User Name – This field allows you to change the default name that appears in the page title block. Changing this entry does not affect existing pages, only pages created after the change. Any entry made here is automatically placed in the fourth page parameter field when a new page is created. Digits in Line Numbering – Determines number of digits used in ladder diagram line numbers. Note
This value does not include page number if page number is part of the line number. Default Page Format – Determines the default page format name that will be prompted in the New Page dialog box when a new drawing page is created. Date Format – Determines the default format for the dates that appear in the title block of drawing pages. Specify the order of day, month and year by using “DD” for day, “MM” for month and “YY” or “YYYY” for year. Example: MM/DD/YYYY Cross Ref. Display Format – Selects IEC or JIC style cross reference. Device ID to Cross Ref. Offset – Sets the distance between the device ID and the cross reference text. When device IDs with sequential numbers are used (rather than page and line numbers), or when the Display Cross Ref. at Child checkbox described below is set, RSWire adds cross reference information at child symbols to indicate where the parent symbol is located. This field is used to adjust the vertical position of the cross reference text. The value entered does not represent drawing units; it is a factor that is multiplied with the cross reference character size. It affects all relevant symbols in the project.
CR1
Device ID Cross Reference Text
104
You can adjust the position of cross references at individual child symbols using the Modify > Symbol function (Text Position checkbox). The cross reference box at individual parent symbols can be positioned with the Modify > Move function.
7-21
Settings
Zone Cross Ref. Display Format – This pull–down list allows you to select from the following cross reference types:
Line Number (no zones) Line/Zone Number (example 105A) Zone/Line Number (example: A105)
Cross referencing in RSWire can be configured to indicate page/line number, zones, or a combination of the two. Zones are areas you define to divide a page into columns. Each zone has a letter name (A, B, C, etc.). A zone cross reference will indicate the zone where the reference point of a given item is located. The cross referencing in the figure below indicates that the relay coil is located in zone B (line 102) while the contact is in zone A (line 105). For zone cross referencing to work you must have page formats in which the zones have been defined (see page 7-36). A
B
101
C
Zones
CR1
102 105A
103 104
CR1
105 106
102B
Signal Cross Ref. Display Format – Here the user can select from a list signal cross reference formats by selecting the down arrow button. The following formats are available (see page 5-60 for more information): DevID/<=Inst/>Page.Linenumber DevID=Inst/Page.Linenumber DevID/Page.Linenumber DevID/<=Inst/>Page Linenumber <=Inst/>Page Linenumber Page^Linenumber (Do not use with star type references) <=Inst/>Page.Linenumber Note
Where you see the character string <=Inst/> in the above format names it means the installation name will be included in the cross reference only if it differs from the installation where the cross reference symbol is located. Display Title Block – Determines whether or not the page title block is visible on the screen. If the checkbox is selected, the title block will be displayed.
7-22
Settings
Display Grid – Determines whether or not the grid appears on the drawing screen. Units=Inch – Determines the default units of measurement (length) used in drawings. If the checkbox is selected, the units are inches. If the checkbox is not selected, millimeters are the units. Changing this entry does not affect existing pages, only pages created after the change. Note
If you change units during a work session, the on–screen markings for symbol reference points, connection points, etc., may appear either too large or too small. To avoid this, after selecting the units select the Save button in the General Defaults dialog box, exit from RSWire then restart RSWire. Prompt For Device ID – This checkbox determines whether or not the system will prompt the user for a device ID when a symbol is placed. When the checkbox is selected, the Device ID Assignment dialog box will appear as described on page 5-14. If the checkbox is not selected, the Device ID Assignment dialog box will not appear; the default device ID (based on project parameters) will be assigned automatically. This latter option speeds up the drawing process. Prompt For Conn. Point Text – This checkbox determines whether or not the system will prompt the user for connection point text when a parent or child symbol is placed. When the checkbox is selected, the Connection Points dialog box will appear as described on page 5-17. If the checkbox is not selected, the default (next available) connection point text will be assigned automatically. Part Number Check – Determines whether or not the system will flag the entry of part numbers that do not exist in the database. When the checkbox is selected, the system will display a warning message when the user attempts to enter a non–existent part number. If the checkbox is not selected the system will allow any part number to be entered without checking. Use Text Height from Project Parameters – This checkbox determines whether or not you will use the project default text height values for device IDs, connection point text, terminal IDs and cross reference text. These default values are set in the Project Parameters dialog box (see page 3-8). When this checkbox is selected, the default text heights will be used on any symbols placed after you make the setting. When the checkbox is not selected, the software will use the text heights that were defined when the symbol was created. Use Text Style from Project Parameters – This checkbox determines whether the various texts associated with a symbol (device ID, connection point text, terminal ID, cross reference text) will use the currently selected font (Format > Text Style) or the font that was defined when the symbol was created. This setting only affects symbols placed after the setting is made.
7-23
Settings
Prompt For Page Store – When this checkbox is selected, you will be prompted if you wish to store (save) the page when you perform a Page Next, Page Previous, or other operations that clear the drawing screen (except the File > Break operation). This prompt will appear only if changes have been made to the current page. If the checkbox is not selected the page is stored automatically when performing these operations (except the File > Break operation). Ladder Without Page Numbers – Determines whether or not page numbers will be included as part of the line numbers. (Example: 201 for page 2, line 01.) When the checkbox is selected, the page numbers will not be included in the line number. When the checkbox is not selected, page numbers will be included. Changing this entry does not affect existing pages, only pages created after the change. Diagonal Wire – Determines whether a diagonal or perpendicular connection symbol will be used at nodes. If the checkbox is selected, the diagonal symbol (symbol name DW) is used. If the checkbox is not selected, a perpendicular connection (symbol name CP) is used. Changing this entry does not affect existing pages, only drawings created after the change.
Diagonal Connection
7-24
Perpendicular Connection
Settings
Display Cross Ref. at Child – Selects whether or not a cross reference to the parent symbol will appear at a child symbol. The project must be using one of the following device ID formats:
Device ID/Page/Line number Page/Device ID/Line number Device ID/Continuous line number
When the checkbox is selected, the reference will appear at the child symbol. If the checkbox is not selected, the reference will not appear at the child symbol. Note
You must re–open the page to see the result of this setting. CR124
124 125
126
CR124
AH126
126 124
Cross Reference To Parent
You can also turn off cross references individually at parent and child symbols using the Modify > Symbol function. See page 5-96. Create Connection List When Saving Page – This checkbox, when selected, causes the software to update the connection list every time a page is saved. This ensures that any wire list or other report based on the connection list will always use the latest information. When you first turn on the checkbox and select OK in the Project Settings dialog box, a dialog will appear that asks if you wish to create a connection list. Select the Yes button. This dialog will not appear subsequently. If the checkbox is not selected, the software will only update the connection list when the user generates a report that requires connection information. Note
When the Create Connection List When Saving Page checkbox is selected, performance of the software may be slowed somewhat because the connection information must be updated each time is page is saved.
7-25
Settings
Wire Number Display – This pull–down menu with three selections determines whether or not wire color and gauge are included with the wire number on the drawing screen. Normal – The wire number only is displayed. (Example: 126) Complete – The wire number, color, and gauge are displayed. (Example: 126/14/RED Branch Numbering – The wire number and decimal point are displayed (Example: AL126.1) Note
For the branch numbering display option to work, wire numbers must be created using the branch numbering option. Select the Save button to save your general settings for future work sessions. Select the OK button to activate the entries made in the General Defaults dialog box. Select the Cancel button to discard any changes made to the entries in the General Defaults dialog box.
7-26
Settings
Page Control Functions The Tools > Project Settings >Page Control Functions function allows a variety of error checking settings to be made. These are conditions that RSWire will check for and flag with an error message when a drawing page is saved. For each condition the user can select from three options: take no action, prompt the user with a screen message, or send the error message to a file. Select:
Tools Project Settings Page Control Functions The following dialog box appears. Project Settings General Defaults
Page Control Functions
Page Formats Programmable Controller Settings Configuration: Terminal a
Page Without Control
No Ctrl
Prompt
File
Question Mark Alert
No Ctrl
Prompt
File
Short Circuit
No Ctrl
Prompt
File
Symbol Without Connection
No Ctrl
Prompt
File
Tie Point Between Terminals
No Ctrl
Prompt
File
Wire Without Connection
No Ctrl
Prompt
File
Cable
No Ctrl
Prompt
File
Symbol Without Part Number
No Ctrl
Prompt
File
Do Not Exit Page With Error
OK
Cancel
Save
Help...
7-27
Settings
By clicking on the appropriate checkbox for each condition the user can select :
No Ctrl (No Control) Take no action; disregard condition. Prompt Notify user with an on–screen error message dialog box. File Send the error message to the file RS\TMP\DWGCTL.
The following conditions are detected: Page Without Control – Checks for drawing pages that do not have the Online function activated. Question Mark Alert – Checks for question marks (?) in device IDs, connection points, wire numbers and texts. Question marks indicate that prompts have been unanswered. Short Circuit – Checks for direct connections between potentials. Wire numbers must be assigned for this function to work. Symbol Without Connection – Checks for symbols without logical line (wire) connections. Tie Point Between Terminals – Checks for a branch on a wire between two terminals. Wire Without Connection – Checks for an open end on a wire. Cable – Checks for wires that are assigned to more than one cable. Symbol Without Part Number – Checks for symbols that do not have a part number assigned. Do Not Exit Page With Error – When selected, this checkbox will not allow you to leave a page on which any error conditions are detected. The message “Page not stored” is displayed. You must either correct the error condition or turn off the prompting checkbox for that error condition. When the desired options have been set, select the OK button to load the selections, or select the Save button to save the selected settings for future work sessions.
7-28
Settings
Page Formats The Tools > Project Settings > Page Formats function allows you to view and modify the parameters of the 50 drawing page formats available in RSWire. Select:
Tools Project Settings Page Formats The following dialog box appears. Project Settings General Defaults
Page Control Functions
Page Formats Programmable Controller Settings Configuration: Terminal a
Select Format:
A-1VCOL (A Size Vertical 1 Line Number Column, 9x11.0)
Format Name:
A-1VCOL
Description:
A Size Vertical 1 Line Number Column
Page Format Size:
X Min.
0
X Max.
8.5
Y Min.
0
Y Max.
11
Max.
10.75
Increment
0.5
First Number
1
Line Number Range:
Min.
1 X Direction
Position of Line Numbers:
Y Direction
Two Line Ladders
Ladder Macro
1
0.25
2
0
3
0
4
0
LADDERA-V
Hexagon Zone Number Range:
Max.
0
Min.
0
Increment
1
Start Number
1
Save
Help...
Zone Macro Format Available For All Projects
OK
Cancel
7-29
Settings
The following parameters can be set: Select Format – Use this pull–down list to select the page format that you wish to edit. If you wish to create a new page format, select one of the “UNDEFINED” formats from the list. Format Name – This field indicates the name of the selected page format. A format must be assigned a name before it can be used to create a page. If you are creating a new format, enter a name for it here. Description – This field shows the description of the page format. If you are creating a new format, enter a description for it here. Page Format Size – The fields on this line define the size limits of the page. The X Min. and Y Min. values determine the origin (lower left corner) of the page. The X Max. and Y Max. determine the upper right corner of the page. X Max., Y Max.
Drawing Page
X Min., Y Min.
7-30
Settings
Line Number Range – This group of fields allows the user to define the position of the ladder diagram line numbers. In RSWire page formats, the allowable drawing area is defined by the Min. and Max. line number range values.
Line No. Increments
Y Direction Example
Max.
Drawing Page
Allowable Drawing Area
Min.
X Direction Example
Line Number Increments Drawing Page
Min.
Allowable Drawing Area Max.
7-31
Settings
The Min. field value determines the lower limit of the line numbering area. It is the distance from the bottom of the page to the bottom of the allowable drawing area (assuming a Y–direction format where line numbers run from top to bottom). For X–direction example, see previous page.
Maximum
101
107
102
108
Distance Increment 103
Allowable Drawing Area
109
104
110
105
111
106
112
Minimum Distance
The Max. field value is the distance from the drawing origin to the top of the allowable drawing area. For example, on a page that is 22 inches high, with a drawing area that starts 1 inch from the top, this value would be 21 (assuming a Y–direction format where line numbers run from top to bottom). For X–direction example, see previous page. The Increment field value is the increment (distance) allowed for each line number row. This works in conjunction with the ladder macro. Any “?” characters from the macro that fall within a given line number row will receive a line number value that is one greater than the previous row. See the ladder macro note on next page. The First Number field value determines the number at which the line numbering will begin. Note
7-32
This value should not include the page number.
Settings
X Direction, Y Direction – Select one of these radio buttons to determine the X or Y axis orientation of the ladder line numbering. When Y is selected, the Line Number Range field is measured from the bottom of the page and the Position of Line Number values are measured from the left side of the page. When X is selected, the Line Number Range is measured from the left side of the page and the Position of Line Number values are measured from the bottom of the page. Two Line Ladders – This checkbox allows the page number to appear over each line number. When selected, the page number appears over each line number. When not selected, the page number appears next to the line number. 1 01
101
Page Number
102
Page Number
Line Number
1 02
Line Number
Ladder Macro – Enter the name of the ladder line number macro to be used on this drawing page format. The following ladder macros are provided with RSWire. (The user can also create custom ladder macros – see note on next page.) For pages that are to have no ladders, see note on page 7-35. Macro
Note
Description
LADDERAH
ASize Horizontal (11 x 8.5 inches)
LADDERAV
ASize Vertical (8.5 x 11 inches)
LADDERB
BSize
LADDERC
CSize
LADDERD
DSize
A ladder macro consists of a series of question mark characters (?) placed using the Draw > Text function and stored as a macro. If this macro is named as the ladder macro in a page format definition, RSWire will place this macro on every page using that format and will replace each question mark with a line number. This line numbering is controlled by the line number rows established by the value in the Increment field described previously. If two question marks from the ladder macro fall within the same line number row, they will receive the same line number.
7-33
Settings
Increment
?
Increment
?
Line Number Rows Increment Established By The Increment Value Increment
? ?
Increment
?
Increment
?
Ladder Macro Locate Ladder Macro Base Point One Grid Unit Left Of “?”
If you wish to have the line numbers on the drawing increment by some value other than one, you must define the increments and ladder macro so that there are empty line number rows between each question mark. Multiple line number columns are established by the Position of Line Number fields described previously. If coordinates for more than one column are entered, the ladder macro will be repeated at each position. When defining a ladder macro that will be used on multiple column pages, locate the macro base (reference) point at least one grid unit to the left of the ? characters. This will ensure that the ? characters are placed within the intended column.
7-34
Settings
The Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function includes several functions that affect line numbering. The Digits in Line Numbers field determines how many digits the line number will contain (not including page number). The Ladder without Page Numbers checkbox determines whether or not the page number is included in the line number. See page 7-24. Note
Blank (ladder–less) Pages – If you wish to create a page format with no line numbering, you must still make the following entries: Max. – The value in the Max. field must be greater than the value in the Min. field. Increment – This field must contain a value (any value). Ladder Macro – This field must contain the macro name DUMMY (this is an empty macro provided with RSWire). Hexagon – This field allows a hexagon (or other defined symbol) to be placed around a star cross reference (as shown below). If no symbol name is entered, RSWire will not suppress the symbol around the star cross reference.
Note
You will need to create a hexagon symbol of the appropriate size. See page 6-6 on how to create a symbol.
Note
For RSWire to suppress the hexagon symbol when a signal is not linked, the hexagon symbol must be placed on top of the reference point of the cross reference text of the star cross reference. This can be simplified by creating a macro of the hexagon symbol and the signal symbol. See page 6-81 on how to create a macro. 1 01 1 02
1.02
Page Number
1 02
Line Number
Position of Line Number – These four fields allow you to specify the distance of each column of line numbers (from column 1 up to column 4) from the page origin. For unused columns, enter a value of 0.00. When all values for a page format have been entered, select the Save button to load the values.
7-35
Settings
Zone Number Range – Cross referencing in RSWire can be configured to indicate page/line number, zones, or a combination of the two. Zones are areas you define to divide a page into columns. Each zone has a letter name (A, B, C, etc.). A zone cross reference will indicate the zone where the reference point of a given item is located. Zone cross reference display format is selected with the Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function (see page 7-22). The Zone Number Range fields allow you to set the following values:
Min. – Where the first zone will begin (in default units) measured from the left side of the page. Max. – Where the last zone will end measured from the left side of the page. Increment – The width of each zone. First Number – A code number that sets the letter name of the first zone. A=65, B=66, etc. Zone Macro – The name of a macro that provides zone labels across the top of the page.
When you have made the desired page format settings, select the Save button to save the values for future work sessions. Format Available For All Projects – Selecting this checkbox will cause the page format to be stored in the RS\Syscon\System\dwg.cfg file when the Save button is selected. This matches the format available to all projects. When this checkbox is not selected, new or edited page formats will only be available in the project that is open when the format is saved. (New or edited page formats are always saved in the cfg directory of the current project, regardless of the settings of this checkbox.)
7-36
Settings
Programmable Controller Settings Use the Tools > Project Settings > Programmable Controller Settings function to set parameters related to PLC (programmable logic controller) module symbol addressing and labeling. Select:
Tools Project Settings Programmable Controller Settings The following dialog box appears. Project Settings General Defaults
Page Formats Programmable Controller Settings Configuration: Terminal a
Page Control Functions Active Input File
Search... File Format
Replace Text in Current Project Delete Unused Text Remove Linefeed Character (^) Error Control Switches
Module/Slot
Proj.
Inst.
Loc.
No Ctrl
Address
Proj.
Inst.
Loc.
No Ctrl
Addressing
8-Bit octal
Address Separator
/
Automatic Addressing
OK
Cancel
Save
Help...
7-37
Settings
The following parameters can be set: Active Input File – Specifies a text file containing programmable controller addresses and descriptive text. Once the file is activated (by selecting the Replace Text in Current Project button), the relevant text is automatically taken from the text file and placed in the drawing when placing programmable controller symbols. The format of the text file is as follows: 1 6 (first and last column holding the PLC address) 8 60 (first and last column holding descriptive text) I00100 CONVEYOR START PUSHBUTTON (first address and text) I00101 CONVEYOR STOP PUSHBUTTON (second address and text) etc. Use the Search button to view and select available files. The File Format field allows you to select the format of the programmable controller file. The current selections include: Standard Siemens S5 RSI RSLogix/AI for Allen–Bradley controllers Festo FPC405 Siemens S7
(see above) (tab delimited) (comma delimited)
Replace Text in Current Project – Selecting this button will cause programmable controller descriptive text throughout the project to be replaced by text in the file that is specified in the Active Input File field. Delete Unused Text – If this function is activated and a PLC child symbol is deleted, the corresponding function text will be deleted from the parent symbol and from the output (report) file. (The page must be refreshed before the text will be removed from the parent symbol.) If the checkbox is not selected, the text will be kept and reused with the same address when a new symbol is placed. Remove Line Feed Character (^) – Selecting this character will cause line feeds to be removed from function text strings in reports. The line feeds are set by “^” characters entered in the function text.
7-38
Settings
Error Control Switches – These radio buttons determine whether or not the system will check for duplicate PLC symbol addressing. The Module row of buttons determines error checking for duplicate module numbers. The Address row of buttons determines error checking for duplicate I/O address numbers. Within each row there is a Proj., Inst., Loc., and No Ctrl button to determine whether checking is performed over the entire project (select Proj.), over the installation containing the PLC symbol (select Inst.), over the location containing the PLC symbol (select Loc.), or whether no duplicate checking will be performed (select No Ctrl). Addressing – This field selects decimal or octal I/O address numbering for programmable controller symbols. The addressing will proceed in the selected numbering system from the starting address entered by the user when the symbol is placed. The following selections are available: decimal 8–bit octal 8–bit decimal 16–bit octal 16–bit decimal 32–bit octal 32–bit decimal 16–bit hexadecimal 32–bit hexadecimal Address Separator – This field allows a word/bit separator character to be specified for programmable controller I/O addresses. Automatic Addressing – This checkbox selects automatic or manual I/O addressing of programmable controller module symbols. When the checkbox is selected, automatic addressing is in effect; the system will take the rack and module number and the beginning address number entered by the user, and assign consecutive addresses to the remaining I/O points on the module. This addressing will be octal or decimal depending on the setting of the Addressing field (see above). If the Automatic Addressing checkbox is de–selected, manual addressing is in effect; the system will prompt consecutive addresses one at a time for each I/O point, which the user can either accept or type over. When the desired settings have been made, select the Save button to save the settings for future work sessions. Select the OK button to load the settings and exit the dialog box.
7-39
Settings
Terminal and Plug ID Settings The Tools > Project Settings > Configuration: Terminal and Plug IDs function allows a number of parameters to be set that relate to terminal symbols. Select:
Tools Project Settings Configuration: Terminal and Plug IDs The following dialog box will appear: Project Settings Configuration: Terminal and Plug IDs
Device ID Style
Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration
Object Defaults
Default IDs Terminal Strips
TB
Plug
PL
Include With Terminals Part Number Target Configuration Control
Internal/External/Jumper
Terminal IDs Without Duplicate Checking PE
L1
L2
L3
GND
U1
U2
U3
1000
Number of Terminals per Clip Jumper
OK
7-40
N
Cancel
Save
Help...
Settings
The following fields are provided: Default IDs: Terminal Strips and Plug – Use these two fields to set the default prefix for terminal strip and plug device IDs. If desired, the user can write over these default prefixes during symbol placement. Note
You must leave and restart RSWire before changes in the above two fields will take effect. Include With Terminals: Part Number – Use this checkbox to determine whether the system will allow you to enter a part number when a terminal symbol is placed in the drawing. Select the checkbox to allow part number entry, de–select the checkbox to prevent part number entry.
Note
These checkboxes work only on newly defined projects (projects that are created after you make the setting); they will not change existing projects. Target Configuration Control – Terminal symbol connection points can be designated as Internal, External, or Jumper (see page 11-3). When the Internal/External/Jumper checkbox is selected, the software will prompt the user with the following Terminal Target Settings dialog box when a terminal symbol is placed on a wire. The user selects whether the target of each connection point is to be Internal, External, a Jumper, or Undefined. The dialog box will appear for each connection point on the terminal that is being connected to a wire (the current connection point will be highlighted). Terminal Target Settings
Connection Point 1 Connection Point 2 Connection Point 3 Connection Point 4 Connection Point 5
Internal X X X
External X X
Jumper
OK Cancel Help Accept All Reset
Terminal IDs without Duplicate Checking – Terminal symbol IDs entered in these fields will not be subject to RSWire error checking that prevents duplicate device IDs.
7-41
Settings
Number of Terminals per Clip Jumper – The value in this field is the maximum number of terminals that can exist in a clip jumper. If you edit a terminal strip in the terminal editor and attempt to define a clip jumper that matches or exceeds this number of terminals, a message will appear stating that a “Clip jumper is not possible.” When the desired terminal and plug parameters have been set, select the OK button to load the settings. Select the Save button to save the settings for future work sessions.
7-42
Settings
Device ID Styles The Tools > Project Settings > Device ID Style function allows you to select in what format a complete device ID (including installation and location) will be displayed: one line, two lines, or three lines. It also allows you to select which part of the device ID is placed on each line. Select:
Tools Project Settings Device ID Style The Device ID Style dialog box will appear. Project Settings Configuration: Terminal and Plug IDs
Device ID Style
Object Defaults
Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration
First Line Installation
Device ID
Location
Second Line
Third Line
Suppress Device ID Sign (-) Show Installation
Default
Never
Always
Never
Always
Show Location
Default Nested Device ID
Partial
Complete
OK
Cancel
Save
Help...
7-43
Settings
The following parameters can be set: The First Line, Second Line, Third Line fields in this dialog box allow you to select the three components of the complete Device ID: Installation, Location, and Device ID. If you wish the complete device ID to appear on one line, then all components of the ID should appear in the First Line area (as shown above). If you wish the ID to appear on two lines, then one or two components can be placed in the First Line, and the remainder can be selected in the Second Line area. Similarly, for a three line display, place one component on First Line, one on Second Line, and one on Third Line. You cannot select a given component in more than one field at a time. Select the Suppress Device Sign (–) checkbox to hide the “–” character that will otherwise appear before each device ID. The Show Installation and Show Location radio buttons control whether or not Installation and Location names will be included with each device ID in the drawing. The following options are provided: Default – The default RSWire setting is to not include installation/location names with device IDs unless the symbol represents a device from a different installation/location than the current drawing page. Never – This setting will not include installation/location with device IDs under any circumstances. Always – This setting will include installation/location with every device ID in the drawing. The Nested Device ID radio buttons apply to logical boxes only. This allows symbols inside the logical box to have a device ID that combines the ID of the logical box with the ID of the nested symbol. One application of this feature would be to use the box to represent a circuit board and then insert pin/plug symbols to represent the connectors on the board. The box could also represent a special controller module with terminal symbols inside that are related to that module. Selecting the Partial button will display only the device ID of the nested symbol. Selecting the Complete button will display the entire, combined device ID. Select the Save button to save the device ID settings for future work sessions. Select the OK button to enter the selected device ID style. You will need to re–read the current drawing page to see the effects of any changes in the device ID setting.
7-44
Settings
Object Defaults The Tools > Project Settings > Object Defaults function lets you set default drawing element parameters that will apply to any projects and drawings that are created after the settings are made. Select:
Tools Project Settings Object Defaults The following dialog box will appear. (You must select an object from the pull–down list before any of the fields will become active. Only those fields relevant to the selected object will be active.) Project Settings Configuration: Terminal and Plug IDs
Device ID Style
Activate Object
Object Defaults
Activate All
Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration
Deactivate All
Text Color
Select...
Line Type
Select...
Line Color
Select...
Height
Select...
Label Origin
Select...
Angle
Select...
Slant
Select...
Ratio
Select...
Font
OK
Cancel
Save
Help...
7-45
Settings
The following parameters can be set: Objects – To set drawing defaults, first select which kind of drawing object you wish to set in the pull–down list at the top of the dialog box. The following objects can be selected:
Drawing Line Logical Line (wire) Logical Line N (neutral) Logical Line PE (potential earth) Drawing Box Logical Box Field Text Function Text Circle
Activate Object – This checkbox determines whether or not the default settings will override the settings made to an element elsewhere (for example with the Tools > Project Settings > Object Defaults > Color function). When the Activate Object checkbox is selected, the settings made with the Defaults function will always be in effect for the selected drawing element. When the Activate Object checkbox is not selected for the selected element, the parameters for that element can change depending on the most recently made settings. To activate a specific element, select element, change settings, and select the Save button. Activate All – This checkbox determines whether or not the default settings will override settings made to all elements elsewhere (for example with the Tools > Project Settings > Object Defaults > Color function). When the Activate All checkbox is selected, the settings made with the Defaults function will always be in effect for all drawing elements. When the Activate All checkbox is not selected for a given element, the parameters for each element can change depending on the most recently made settings. Deactivate All – This checkbox turns off the Activate checkbox for all drawing elements. Text Color, Line Type, Line Color, Height, Label Origin, Angle, Slant, Ratio, and Font – These text parameters are the same listed in the Text dialog box with the Draw > Text function. (See page 5-31 on how to set the appropriate fields.) Use the Select button beside each field to see a list of available values.
7-46
Settings
Deactivate All – This checkbox turns off the Activate checkbox for all drawing elements. When the desired settings have been made you must select the Save button to save the settings for future work sessions. Selecting the OK button (without Save) will only enter the settings for the current work session. Default values are saved in the file RS\SYSCON\SYSTEM\SODSETT.CFG. Note
Settings made for the three logical line types, when activated, will be in effect when the toolbar buttons for those functions are used.
Terminal Plan Configuration The Tools > Project Settings > Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration function allows a number of graphical terminal plan configuration settings to be made. See page 11-24.
Pin–Plug Plan Configuration The Tools > Project Settings > Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration function allows a number of graphical Pin–Plug plan configuration settings to be made. See page 11-24.
7-47
Settings
Object Settings There are a number of functions for setting drawing object parameters.
Symbol Settings To make scaling, rotation and mirroring settings for symbols, first right click on the symbol and select Block Settings > Symbol Settings from the pop–up menu. See page 5-23.
Macro Settings When you place a macro using the Insert > Macro by Name function, the Select Icon dialog box contains Macro Settings fields that allow macro scale and angle (rotation) to be set. See page 5-28. These settings do not affect macros that already exist on a drawing, only those macros placed after the setting is made.
Wire/Line Type The Modify > Linetype function allows wire and line color to be selected as well as line type (dashed, solid, etc.). See page 5-101.
7-48
Settings
Text Styles The Format > Text Style function displays a list of available drawing text styles with graphic samples. This function also allows new text styles to be defined. A text style is a combination of a font, a height value and possibly other effects such as boldness, vertical orientation, etc. Various RSWire functions such as Draw > Text and Project Parameters allow you to select a text style that will apply to texts. Select:
Format Text Style The Text Style dialog box is displayed. Text Style Style Name
Apply
STANDARD
New...
Rename...
Delete
Cancel Help...
Font Font Name:
Font Style:
Height:
romans.shx
1.0000
Use Big Font Effects
Preview
Upside Down
Width Factor:
1.0000
Backwards
Oblique Angle:
0
Vertical
AaBbCcD AaBbCcD
Preview
In the Style Name area, there are the following items: Style Name – A drop down list of currently available styles. New – Select this button to create a new style. Displays the New Text Style dialog box. You can accept the default name or enter a name in the box and choose OK to apply the current style settings to the new style name.
7-49
Settings
To Create a New Text Style:
Note
1.
Select the desired font and make any other settings for the font.
2.
Select the New button.
3.
Enter a name for the new text style.
4.
Select OK.
5.
Save the current drawing page.
When you create a new text style, it will only be available on the drawing page that is currently open when you define it. To make the style available on all drawing pages, you must have the default RSWire drawing page RSWire.dwg open when you define the style. RSWire.dwg is active when you first enter RSWire but have not yet selected a project or page. You can also open RSWire.dwg using the command line command, OPEN (the RSWire.dwg file is located in the RS\WORK directory). Because RSWire.dwg is does not belong to a project you cannot use the File > Save command to save it; you must use the File > Save As command. Rename – Select this button to rename an existing style. The text style listed in the box is renamed when you enter a new name and choose OK. Delete – Select this button to delete an existing style. Select a name from the list to make it current, and then choose Delete. In the Font area, there are the following items: Font Name – Lists the font family name for all registered TrueType fonts and all AutoCAD compiled shape (SHX) fonts in the AutoCAD Fonts directory. When you select a name from the list, AutoCAD reads the file for the specified font. The file’s character definitions are loaded automatically unless the file is already in use by another text style. You can define several styles that use the same font. Font Style – Specifies font character formatting, such as italic, bold, or regular. When Use Big Font is selected, this option changes to Big Font Name and is used to select a Big Font file name. Height – Sets the text height based on the value you enter. If you enter 0.0, AutoCAD prompts for the text height each time you enter text using this style. Entering a height greater than 0.0 sets the text height for this style. TrueType fonts may be displayed at a smaller height than SHX fonts with the same height setting.
7-50
Settings
Use Big Font – Use the Big Font option to specify an Asian–language Big Font file; Use Big Font is available only if an SHX file is specified under Font Name; only SHX files are valid file types for creating Big Fonts. Note
The text height you specify may not be accurately represented by uppercase letters in TrueType fonts supplied with AutoCAD. In the Effects area, there are the following items: Upside Down – Displays the characters upside down. Backwards – Displays the characters backwards. Vertical – Displays the characters aligned vertically. Vertical is available only if the selected font supports dual orientation. Vertical orientation is not available for TrueType fonts. Width Factor – Sets the character spacing. Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses the text. Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it. Oblique Angle – Sets the oblique angle (italicizing) of the text. Entering a value between –85 and 85 makes the text oblique.
7-51
Settings
Dimension Styles (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) The Format > Dimension Style function allows you to make settings for the dimensioning function. Refer to the AutoCAD User’s Guide for more information. The dimensioning function allows you to pick two points on a drawing and automatically display the distance between the two. Angular dimensions display the angle between two lines. Select:
Format Dimension Style The following dialog box will appear: Dimension Style Manager Current Dimstyle: STANDARD Styles
Styles
Set Current
STANDARD
New... Modify... Override... Compare...
List: All styles
Description STANDARD
Don’t list styles in xrefs Close
7-52
Help
Settings
Dimension Styles (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) The Format > Dimension Style function allows you to make settings for the dimensioning function. The dimensioning function allows you to pick two points on a drawing and automatically display the distance between the two. Angular dimensions display the angle between two lines. Select:
Format Dimension Style The following dialog box will appear: Dimension Styles Dimension Style Current:
STANDARD
Name: Save
Rename
Family Parent
Geometry...
Linear
Diameter
Radial
Ordinate
Angular
Leader
OK
Cancel
Format... Annotation... Help...
7-53
Settings
The following parameters can be set: Dimension Style – A dimension style is a stored group of dimension settings which determines the appearance of the dimensions. The style can be conveniently selected in one step. In the Current field you can select an existing dimension style. STANDARD is the default dimension style. You can define a new dimensioning style by entering the name in the Name field, making the desired settings using the Geometry, Format, and Annotation buttons, selecting the Save button, and then selecting the OK button. Dimension Family –An overall dimension style consists of a family of styles within which there are variations or family members. When you create a new style it becomes the “parent” style. Variations of this parent can be defined for specific types of dimensioning such as linear, radial, angular, etc. This is done by selecting the appropriate button in the Family area of the dialog box, making the desired settings using the Geometry, Format, and Annotation buttons, and then selecting the Save button. If no family members have been defined for a dimension style, the parent style is automatically used. The following style family members can be defined: Linear – Measures the distance between two points. Radial – Measures the radii of arcs and circles. Angular – Measures the angle between two lines or three points. Diameter – Measures the diameters of arcs and circles. Ordinate – Measures the perpendicular distance from an origin point to another point. Leader – A leader is a line that connects annotation text to some item in a drawing. This leader is not the same as the leader that is generated automatically as part of a dimension line. Dimension Geometry – Selecting the Geometry button in the Dimension Styles dialog box displays the Geometry dialog box. Here settings can be made that affect the extension lines, dimension line, arrowheads, and center marks of a dimension. There is also a scale setting so that dimension scale can be set to match that of the page.
7-54
Settings
Geometry Dimension Line Suppress:
Arrowheads 1st
2nd
Extension:
0.000
Spacing:
0.3000
Color...
BYBLOCK
1st:
Extension Line Suppress:
Closed Filled
2nd: Closed Filled Size:
0.1800
Center 1st
Mark
2nd
Extension:
0.2000
Origin Offset:
0.0625
Color...
BYBLOCK
Line None Size:
0.0900
Scale Overall Scale:
1.00000
Scale to Paper Space OK
Note
Cancel
Help...
Values shown in inches. The following settings are available: Dimension Line Suppress – You can select checkboxes to turn off the 1st and/or the 2nd dimension lines (when text divides a dimension line in two). Extension – When using oblique stroke arrowheads, you can set the distance that the dimension line extends beyond the extension lines by entering a value in this field. Spacing – Enter a value to set the distance between dimension lines of neighboring baseline and continue dimensions. Color – Select this button to set a color for the dimension lines. A Select Color dialog box will appear, displaying the available colors.
7-55
Settings
Arrowheads The 1st and 2nd fields allow you to select an arrowhead style for each end of the dimension line. The currently selected style is displayed. In the Size field you can enter a size for the arrowhead. Extension Line Suppress – Select these checkboxes to turn off the 1st and/or the 2nd extension lines. Extension – Enter a value to set how far beyond the dimension line the extension line will extend. Origin Offset – Enter a value to set the distance between the extension line origin and the beginning of the extension line. Color – Select this button to set a color for the extension lines. A Select Color dialog box will appear, displaying the available colors. Center Center marks and lines apply only to center, diameter, and radius dimensions. They are drawn only if the dimension line is placed outside the circle or arc. Select Mark, Line, or None as a center mark. The current selection is displayed. In the Size field you can enter a size for the center mark. Scale In the Overall Scale field enter a value to determine the size of the dimension geometry relative to the drawing. It should be set according to the intended plot scaling. Dimension scale affects sizes such as text height and arrowhead size, and offsets, such as extension line origin offset. You should set these sizes and offsets to values that represent their actual plotted size. You can also set a scale relative to paper space. This scale adjusts dimensions in model space to the scale of the paper space view.
7-56
Settings
Dimension Format – Selecting the Format button in the Dimension Styles dialog box displays the following dimension Format dialog box. This dialog box allows the user to make settings that affect placement of dimension text, arrowheads and leader lines relative to the dimension and extension lines. Format Text User Defined Force Line Inside Fit: Inside Horizontal
Best Fit
Outside Horizontal Horizontal Justification
Vertical Justification
Centered
Centered OK
Cancel
Help...
Select the User Defined checkbox if you wish to position dimension text by entering coordinates or by pointing the cursor. If you de–select this checkbox the software will determine the text position automatically. Select the Force Line Inside checkbox if you wish the software to draw a leader line between extension lines when there is no room between the lines for arrowheads or text (i.e., when the arrowheads are placed outside the extension lines). The Fit field allows you to select how the software will place arrowheads, dimension text and leader lines between the extension lines. The Inside Horizontal and Outside Horizontal checkboxes allow you to set dimension text either to remain horizontal or to align with the dimension line.
7-57
Settings
The Horizontal Justification field allows you to select the horizontal position of the dimension text in relation to the dimension line. The current selection is indicated. The Vertical Justification field allows you to select the vertical position of the dimension text in relation to the dimension line. The current selection is indicated. Dimension Annotation – Selecting the Annotation button in the Dimension Styles dialog box displays the Annotation dialog box where settings can be made that affect the formatting of the dimension text. Annotation Primary Units
Alternate Units Enable Units
Units... Prefix:
Prefix:
Suffix:
Suffix:
Units...
1.00 Text
Tolerance Method:
Style:
None 0.0000
Extension:
0.1800
Lower Value:
0.0625
Origin Offset:
0.0900
Height:
Color...
Middle 1.0000 OK
7-58
STANDARD
Upper Value:
Justification:
Note
[25.4]
Values shown in inches.
Round Off: Cancel
Help...
BYBLOCK 0.0000
Settings
Primary Units – Primary Units control the main dimension values. You can specify special prefixes and suffixes for dimension values. The Units button displays the Primary Units dialog box. Primary Units Units
Angles
Decimal
Decimal Degrees
Dimension
Tolerance
Precision:
Precision:
0.0000
0.0000
Zero Suppression Leading
0 Feet
Zero Suppression Leading
0 Inches
Trailing
Trailing
0 Feet 0 Inches
Scale Linear:
Paper Space Only
1.00000 OK
Cancel
Help...
Under Units, select a unit type from the list for all dimension types except angular. For angular dimensions, select a type from the Angles list. Under Dimension, select a precision value for the primary units. Under Tolerance, select a precision value for any tolerance values. There are also Zero Suppression checkboxes for suppressing leading and trailing zeros in decimal dimensions and tolerances (select the Leading and Trailing checkboxes). You can also choose to suppress zero values for dimensions given in feet and inches (select the 0 Feet and 0 Inches checkboxes). Under Scale, set the units scale for primary units.
7-59
Settings
Alternate Units – The Alternate Units area of the Annotation dialog box, select the Enable Units checkbox to activate a second set of units (for example, if you wish to show feet and inches in a metric drawing). The alternate unit values will appear in square brackets [] in the dimension text. Once you select the Enable Units checkbox, you can select the Units button in the Alternate Units area. This displays the Alternate Units dialog box which contains the same fields and settings as the Primary Units dialog box (see above). Tolerance – In the Tolerance area of the Annotation dialog box you can choose to have lateral tolerance values added to the dimensions to indicate the degree of accuracy required. The Method field allows you to select: None (no tolerance values), Symmetrical (same + and – value), Deviation (different + and – values), and Limits (the software calculates a maximum and minimum dimension value). The Upper Value and Lower Value fields allow you to enter tolerance values. The Justification and Height fields allow you to set the alignment and size of tolerance values. Text – In the Text area of the Annotation dialog box you can set the dimension text format. Fields are provided for text Style, Height, and Gap (around base dimension text). A button is also provided for setting text Color. Round Off – The Round Off field in the Annotation dialog box allows you to set a value to which dimension values will be rounded (except angular dimensions). For example, if you specify a round–off value of 0.25 all dimensions are rounded to the nearest 0.25 unit.
7-60
Settings
Preferences (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) Use the Tools > Preferences function to make a number of general settings through the AutoCAD PREFERENCES function. Not all the available settings are relevant to RSWire. Refer to the online help and the AutoCAD User’s Guide for more information. Select:
Tools Preferences The following dialog box appears: Options
?
Current profile: Display
Files
Current drawing:
RSWire Open and Save Plotting System
Window Elements
3
User Preferences
Drafting Selection
Profiles
Display resolution
Display scroll bars in drawing window
100
Arc and circle smoothness
Display screen menu
8
Segments in a polyline curve
0.5
Rendered object smoothness
4
Contour lines per surface
Text lines in command line window
Colors...
Fonts...
Layout Elements
Display performance
Display Layout and Model tabs
Pan and zoom with raster image
Display margins
Highlight raster image frame only
Display paper background
True color raster images and rendering
Display paper shadow
Apply solid fill
Show Page Setup dialog for new layouts
Show text boundary frame only
Create viewport in new layouts
Show silhouettes in wireframe
Crosshair size 5
RSWire.dwg
Reference Edit fading intensity 50
OK
Cancel
Save
Help...
7-61
Settings
Files Tab The Files options let you enter the support directories path which is used by the software to locate help files, fonts, and other support files. Use the Browse button to search for files and subdirectories you wish to add to the support field.
Display Tab The Colors button allows you to set colors of various areas of the software window. Select the element to color in the Window Element field. Then, select a color. The sample Graphic and Text windows will show your color selections. Use the slider controls (or enter a number from 0 to 255) to change the Red , Green, or Blue components of a color. Select the Monochrome Vectors checkbox if you are using a monochrome display. This setting may also be best for gray scale displays. The Fonts button allows you to select the font used in the toolbar and on the command line. This setting has no effect on the text in your drawing. A Font dialog box will appear, allowing you to select fonts from a list. You can also select whether the setting will affect the Graphics window or the (Command) text window.
Open and Save Tab Options for loading and saving AutoCAD drawings.
Plotting Tab Select and configure output devices (printers and plotters).
System Tab Select 3D graphics displays and pointing devices.
User Preferences Tab Settings for accelerator keys, shortcut menus and right mouse button actions.
Drafting Tab Make AutoSnap, AutoTrack, and Alignment Point Acquisition settings. 7-62
Settings
Selection Tab Make settings for selecting objects and configuring grips.
Profiles Tab Available Profiles – Displays a list of the available profiles. Set Current – Makes the selected profile the current profile. Add to List – Add a new profile to the list. Rename – Displays the Change Profile dialog box for changing the name and description of the selected profile. Use Rename when you want to rename a profile but keep its current settings. Delete – Deletes the selected profile. Export – Exports a profile as a REG file. You can import the profile on the same computer or a different computer. Import – Imports a profile created using export. Reset – Resets the values in the selected profile to the default settings.
7-63
Settings
Preferences (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) Use the Tools > Preferences function to make a number of general settings through the AutoCAD PREFERENCES function. Not all the available settings are relevant to RSWire. Refer to the online help and the AutoCAD User’s Guide for more information. Select:
Tools Preferences The following dialog box appears: Preferences Files
Performance
? General
Compatibility
Display Pointer
Printer
Profiles
Drawing session safety precautions Save thumbnail preview image
Automatic save Minutes between saves
Beep on error in user input
120
Create backup copy with each save
File extension for temporary files:
ac$
Full–time CRC validation
Maximum number sorted symbols:
200
Audit after each DXFIN or DXBIN Maintain a log file
Reset
OK
Cancel
Apply
Help...
This dialog box has eight tabs which can be selected to display different sets of parameters. The user can make a variety of AutoCAD–related hardware and software settings. Refer to the AutoCAD manual for additional information. This function is not available in the Standalone version of RSWire.
7-64
Settings
Files Tab The Files options let you enter the support directories path which is used by the software to locate help files, fonts, and other support files. Use the Browse button to search for files and subdirectories you wish to add to the support field.
Performance Tab The Performance options control preferences that relate to performance. Consult your AutoCAD manual for further information.
Compatibility Tab The Compatibility options maintain compatibility with earlier versions of AutoCAD. Consult your AutoCAD manual for further information.
General Tab The General options let you specify a number of general operating preferences. Automatic Save – By selecting the Automatic save checkbox, a DWG format file of the current drawing page will be saved automatically on a selectable time period. The file will be saved in the temporary files directory (default is RS\TMP). Create backup copy with each save – Select this checkbox to create a backup of the drawing each time the drawing is saved. Use the File tab to specify where the backup is saved. Full–time CRC validation – Not applicable. Audit after each DXFIN or DXBIN – Not applicable. Save Thumbnail Preview Image – Specifies whether an image of the drawing should be displayed in the Preview area of the Select File dialog box. Beep on Error in User Input – Select to hear an audible beep when an error occurs. File Extension for Temporary Files – Specifies a unique extension for the current user to identify plot files in a network environment.
7-65
Settings
Maximum Number Sorted Symbols – Specifies the maximum number of items to sort. If you set this preference to 0, the items are listed in the order they were created. Items are sorted in alphabetical order. Reset – resets the General Preferences to the system defaults. Maintain a Log File – Saves a command history file of the current work session. This file is saved under the name ect.log in the RS\PROGRAM directory.
Display Tab The Colors button allows you to set colors of various areas of the software window. Select the element to color in the Window Element field. Then, select a color. The sample Graphic and Text windows will show your color selections. Use the slider controls (or enter a number from 0 to 255) to change the Red , Green, or Blue components of a color. Select the Monochrome Vectors checkbox if you are using a monochrome display. This setting may also be best for gray scale displays. The Fonts button allows you to select the font used in the toolbar and on the command line. This setting has no effect on the text in your drawing. A Font dialog box will appear, allowing you to select fonts from a list. You can also select whether the setting will affect the Graphics window or the (Command) text window.
Pointer Tab The Pointer options set the current pointing device. Current Pointing Device Driver – Displays the name of the current pointing device driver. Current System Pointing Device – Displays a list of the available pointing device drivers. Set Current – Makes the selected pointing device the current pointing device. Accept Input From – Specifies whether input is accepted from both a mouse and a digitizer or ignores mouse input when a digitizer is set.
7-66
Settings
Cursor Size – Controls the size of the crosshairs. The allowable range is from 1 to 100 percent of the total screen. At 100% the ends of the crosshairs are never visible. When the size is decreased to 99% or below, the crosshairs have a finite size, and the crosshairs’ ends are visible when moved to the edge of the graphics area. The default size is 5%.
Printer Tab Customizes printer or plotter settings and sets the current printer. Current Printer – Displays the name of the current printer. List of Printers – Displays a list of the available printers. Printer Description – Displays information about the currently selected printer. Set Current – Makes the selected printer the current printer. Modify – Reconfigures the selected printer. Select a printer from the list of available printers and choose Modify. In the Reconfigure a Printer dialog box, provide a description for the printer. Then choose Reconfigure. New – Displays the Add a Printer dialog box. To add a printer, select a printer from the list of available printers, provide a description, and then choose OK. The text window with prompts for printer settings is displayed. Open – Opens a printer configuration file. In the Select PC2 File dialog box, select the configuration file for the device you want to use. Then choose OK. Save As – Saves the complete configuration information for a printer to a file. Remove – Removes the selected printer from the list of available printers.
7-67
Settings
Profiles Tab The options contained under this tab control use of profiles; a profile is a user–defined configuration. Current profile – Lists the currently selected profile. List of Profiles – Displays a list of the available profiles. Set Current – Makes the selected profile the current profile. Copy – Displays the Copy Profile dialog box to copy an existing profile. Enter a name and description for the new profile. When you choose OK, a copy of the selected profile is created, and the new profile name is added to the list box. Rename – Displays the Change Profile dialog box for changing the name and description of the selected profile. Use Rename when you want to rename a profile but keep its current settings. Delete – Deletes the selected profile. Export – Exports a profile as a REG file. You can import the profile on the same computer or a different computer. Import – Imports a profile created using export. Reset – Resets the values in the selected profile to the default settings.
7-68
Settings
Preferences (Standalone Version) Use the Tools > Preferences function to make a number of general settings. Not all the available settings are relevant to RSWire. The tabs in the Preferences dialog will be similar to those in the add–on version. If you installed the Standalone version that uses AutoCAD R14 format drawings, see page 7-64. If you installed the Standalone version that uses AutoCAD 2000 format drawings, see page 7-61.
7-69
Settings
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
7-70
Plotting
8 Plotting This section explains how to plot drawing pages from RSWireTM Designer. The following sections are included:
Plot Functions Plot Current Page (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) Plot Current Page (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) Plot Multiple Pages (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) Plot Multiple Pages (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) Plotting to Files Plotting Selected Layers
8-1
Plotting
Plot Functions To plot drawing pages from RSWire, select the File > Print/Plot pull–down menu.
File Print/Plot Preview... Plot Config... Current Page... Multiple Pages... There are two plotting functions: Preview – The Plot Preview function displays the drawing on the screen as it will appear when plotted on paper. While using the Plot Preview function, the real–time interactive zooming capability is available. As you move the pointing device, the drawing image zooms in or out. During Plot Preview, zoom–in is limited by the resolution of your plotter. Plot Preview stops your zoom–in at the point where one pixel on your display is equal to one pixel (or plotter step) on your plotter. You can only zoom in to the level of detail that your plotter or printer is capable of plotting. When you have reached the zoom–in limit (the current view), the plus sign (+) is no longer displayed, indicating that you cannot zoom in any further. When you have zoomed out to the limit (the extents of the current view), the minus sign (–) is no longer displayed, indicating that you cannot zoom out any further. You cannot zoom out beyond the extents of the current view. Plot Config. – This function displays the Plotting tab of the the Options (Tools > Preferences) dialog box. Here you can select or add printers and plotters. Configure the drivers and make other printer/plotter settings. Current Page – Select this function for plotting to a plotter or to the Windows system printer. This function displays the Plot Configuration dialog box. See page 8-5. Multiple Pages – Use this function to plot a group of drawing pages in one operation. You can select an entire project, an installation within a project, or individual pages within an installation. You can send the pages to a plotter or to disk files (PLT, DWG, or DXF format).
8-2
Plotting
Plot Preview The File > Print/Plot > Preview function allows you to preview a plot before you send it to the plotter. Select:
File Print/Plot Preview A Plot Preview will appear (example shown below).
While using the Plot Preview function, the real–time interactive zooming capability is available. As you hold down the button and move the pointing device, the drawing image zooms in or out.
8-3
Plotting
During Plot Preview, zoom–in is limited by the resolution of your plotter. Plot Preview stops your zoom–in at the point where one pixel on your display is equal to one pixel (or plotter step) on your plotter. You can only zoom in to the level of detail that your plotter or printer is capable of plotting. When you have reached the zoom–in limit (the current view), the plus sign (+) is no longer displayed, indicating that you cannot zoom in any further. When you have zoomed out to the limit (the extents of the current view), the minus sign (–) is no longer displayed, indicating that you cannot zoom out any further. You cannot zoom out beyond the extents of the current view.
To Exit Plot Preview Press the <Esc> key, or: 1.
Press right mouse button. A sub–menu will appear.
2.
Select the Exit function. The drawing will appear. Exit Plot
Select “Exit”
Pan Zoom Zoom Window Zoom Previous
8-4
Plotting
Plot Current Page (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) Use the File > Print/Plot > Current Page function to plot the currently displayed drawing page. This function (which is equivalent to the AutoCAD PLOT command) also displays a dialog box that allows various plot configuration settings to be made.
File Print/Plot Current Page The following Print/Plot Configuration dialog box will appear. Print / Plot Configuration Device and Default Information
Paper Size and Orientation
Default System Printer
Inches
Device and Default Selection...
Pen Assignments...
Optimization...
Limits
Text Resolution 50
This Checkbox Must Be Selected To Enable The Plot PLT Function.
Window View...
Plot to File
=
14.874
Scaled to Fit Plot Preview
Autospool
OK
Rotation and Origin...
7.93
Hide Lines
Window...
Orientation Icon
Plotted Inches = Drawing Units
Text Fill Adjust Area Fill
View
Plot Area 7.93 by 10.49 Scale, Rotation, and Origin
Additional Parameters
Extents
MAX
MM
Pen Parameters
Display
Size...
File Name... Cancel
Preview...
Partial
Full
Help...
8-5
Plotting
The following settings are available: Device and Default Information Select the Device and Default Selection button to view or change information about the device, to save or get defaults from a Plotting Program Parameters (PCP) file, or to view or change a device–specific configuration. The name of the currently selected printer/plotter is displayed above this button. When you select the Device and Default Selection button, the following Device and Default Selection dialog box will appear. Device and Default Selection Select a Device Configuration Default System Printer Manufacturer:
System Printer ADI 4.3 – By Autodesk, Inc
Port: \\Boggy\B–Size Configuration File Complete (PC2) Save..
Partial (PCP–R12/R13)
Replace..
Save..
Merge..
Show..
Change
Device Specific Configuration Device Requirements: OK
Cancel
Help...
Partial Save – Saves the current default settings to a PCP file. Plot Configuration Parameter (PCP) files store the device independent plot settings you specify. This means you can store settings like paper sizes, pen assignments, orientations, and scaling factors. You can choose to save to a new or existing file. Partial Merge – Retrieves the default settings from a PCP file. The Merge From PCP File dialog box is displayed, in which you can select a PCP file. If the PCP file contains errors, a dialog box is displayed listing the errors. Choose Create Error File to create a file containing any listed errors. A file is created using the PCP filename with an .err file extension. The file is placed in the same directory that contains the PCP file. 8-6
Plotting
Complete Replace – Replaces the default settings from a PC2 file. Current information is lost unless it has been saved to a PC2 file. Complete Save – Saves the current default settings to a PC2 file. Complete Plot Configuration (PC2) files store all the information found in a PCP file, plus device–specific information that would otherwise be defined in the ACAD.CFG file. You can choose to save to a new or existing file. Device Specific Configuration – Displays and changes device–specific configuration requirements. The Show button displays configuration information for the current plotter. The Change button allows you to enter new settings for the current plotter. The dialog boxes are different for different plotters. Pen Parameters Use the Pen Assignments button to assign colors, line types and pen widths for the various pens of the current plotter. The ability to control these parameters depends on the type of plotter you have selected. Use the Optimization button to select various optimizations that can be performed when plotting, minimizing wasted pen motion and reducing plot time. The default setting is dependent on the device you have configured. Additional Parameters In this area you can set additional plotting parameters as follows: Display – Select to plot what is currently displayed on the screen. Extents – Select to plot everything in the drawing (that part of the drawing that currently contains entities). Limits – Select to plot entire drawing area as defined by the drawing limits. View – Not accessible. Window – When selected, allows you to plot any portion of the drawing. You specify a lower left corner and an upper right corner of the area to be plotted. This radio button is grayed out until a window has been specified.
8-7
Plotting
To specify the window, select the Window button. The Window Selection dialog box will appear. If the area you wish to plot is totally visible on the screen you can select the Pick button and use your pointing device to designate the window. The default window is the current display. You can also specify the window by entering drawing unit coordinates in the First Corner and Other Corner fields. When you accept the specified window, you will return to the Plot Configuration dialog box and the Window radio button will be enabled and selected. Text Resolution – Sets the resolution, in dots–per–inch, of True Type fonts while plotting, exporting, and rendering. Lower values decrease resolution and increase plotting speed. Higher values increase resolution and decrease plotting speed. Text Fill – Controls the filling of True Type fonts while plotting, exporting and rendering. If Text Fill is not selected, text is output as outlines. Hide Lines – Not applicable. Adjust Area Fill – Not applicable. Plot To File – Select to send plot output to a file rather than directly to a plotter. Important
The Plot to File checkbox must be selected (on) to allow the RSWire PLT Plot function (File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages > Create PLT Files) to work properly. A plot file will be created with the extension .plt. To specify a file name other than the default name, select the File Name button. If the current drawing is unnamed, a plot file will be created with the name unnamed.plt. Autospool – Select to send plot output directly to a plotter. Paper Size and Orientation Use this area to specify plot size, paper size, and orientation. Use the Inches and MM (millimeters) radio buttons to select the appropriate plotting units. The Orientation icon is a rectangle that indicates the natural orientation (portrait or landscape) of the current plotting device. If your current plotter’s natural orientation is portrait, it may be necessary to rotate the plot 270 degrees to achieve the result you want. Use the Size button to display the paper size dialog box. This dialog box displays the plot sizes that the current plotter supports. “MAX” is the maximum size that the plotter can handle. Select a predefined size or enter the width and height in a USER text box.
8-8
Plotting
Scale, Rotation, and Origin Use this area to set the plot scale, rotation, and origin. The label Plotted Inches = Drawing Units will read Plotted MM = Drawing Units if millimeter was selected as units. The values in these fields indicate the scale of the plot; plot units in relation to drawing units. Use the Rotation and Origin button to display the Plot Rotation and Origin dialog box. Select a rotation value to rotate the plot clockwise. The plot normally begins in the lower left corner of the paper (home position). If you wish to place the plot origin at another location, enter the desired coordinates in the X Origin and Y Origin fields. Select the Scaled to Fit checkbox to scale the plot so the view chosen, the portion of the drawing to be plotted, is made as large as possible for the specified paper size. When this checkbox is selected, the text boxes display the actual scale used to fit. When Scaled to Fit is turned off, the text boxes default to 1=1 except when the scale has been previously set to other values. In this case, the software will use that scale. Plot Preview Select the Preview button to display the plot on screen so you can see that it is correctly placed on the paper. If you select the Partial radio button, the preview will indicate the plot area as a simple rectangle positioned on the paper. If the plot origin has been offset so that the effective area extends outside the graphic area of the preview area, a green line will be displayed along any clipped side. If you select the Full radio button, the preview will show the drawing on the screen as it will appear on paper. Because this requires a regeneration of the drawing it is slower than a partial preview. During a full preview a dialog box is displayed with buttons for Pan and Zoom and End Preview. The Pan and Zoom function is similar to the Dynamic zoom function (see page 4-32). The End Preview function returns you to the Print/Plot Configuration dialog box.
8-9
Plotting
Plot Current Page (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) Use the File > Print/Plot > Current Page function to plot the currently displayed drawing page. This function (which is equivalent to the AutoCAD PLOT command) also displays a dialog box that allows various plot configuration settings to be made.
File Print/Plot Current Page The following Plot dialog box will appear. ?
Plot Layout name
Page setup name <Select page setup to apply>
Save changes to layout
Model Plot Device
Add...
Plot Settings
Plotter configuration Name:
HP LaserJet 6P/6MP-Enhanced
Plotter:
HP LaserJet 6P/6MP-Enhanced-Windows System Driver
Where:
LPT1:
Properties Hints
Description: Plot style table (pen assignments) Name:
None
Edit...
What to plot
Plot to file
Current tab
Plot to file
Selected tabs
File name:
All layout tabs Number of copies Full Preview...
8-10
New...
1
Location:
Partial Preview...
D:\RS\PROJECT\WORK\____6
OK
Cancel
Help
Plotting
Layout name – (Layouts are not used in RSWire – they are the same as Paper Space.) Displays the current layout name or displays ”Selected layouts” if multiple tabs are selected. If the Model tab is current when you choose Plot, the Layout Name shows ”Model.” Select the Save changes to layout checkbox to save changes you make in the Plot dialog box in the layout. This option is unavailable if multiple layouts are selected. Page setup name – Displays a list of any named and saved page setups. You can choose to base the current page setup on a named page setup, or you can add a new named page setup by choosing Add. Selecting Add displays the User Defined Page Setups dialog box. You can create, delete, or rename named page setups.
Plot Device tab Use the Plotter Configuration function to select a printer/plotter driver. Use the Plot style table function to edit pen colors and line weights. Use the What to plot functions to select which tabs to plot and the number of copies to plot. Current tab plots the current Model or Layout tab. (Layouts are not used in RSWire.) If multiple tabs are selected, the tab that shows its viewing area is plotted. Selected tabs plots multiple preselected Model or layout tabs. To select multiple tabs, hold down CTRL while selecting the tabs. If only one tab is selected, this option is unavailable. All layout tabs plots all layout tabs, regardless of which tab is selected. Select the Plot to file checkbox if you wish to create a plot file of the current drawing. You can enter the desired filename and directory.
8-11
Plotting
Plot Settings tab ?
Plot Layout name
Page setup name <Select page setup to apply>
Save changes to layout
Model Plot Device
Add...
Plot Settings
Paper size and paper units Plot device:
HP LaserJet 6P/6MP-Enhanced
Paper size:
Letter
Printable area:
10.60 x 8.10 inches
Drawing orientation Portrait Landscape
Plot area
inches
mm
Plot upside-down
Plot scale
Limits
Scale:
Extents
Custom:
Scaled to Fit
Scale Lineweight
Display
Plot options
Plot offset
View
Center the plot
Window
Window <
Full Preview...
X: 0.00
inches
Y: 0.00
inches
Partial Preview...
OK
Plot object lineweights Plot with plot styles Plot paperspace last Hide objects
Cancel
Help
Paper size and paper units Select the output Paper size. Also select inches or mm as the units for the plot settings. Drawing orientation Select Portrait or Landscape orientation of the drawing on the paper. Selected orientation is indicated by the page icon. Also, select Plot upside down if desired. Plot area
8-12
Plotting
In this area you can set additional plotting parameters as follows: Limits – Select to plot entire drawing area as defined by the drawing limits. Extents – Select to plot everything in the drawing (that part of the drawing that currently contains entities). Display – Select to plot what is currently displayed on the screen. View – Not accessible. Window – When selected, allows you to plot any portion of the drawing. Select the Window button. Then define two opposite corners of the area to be plotted. This radio button is grayed out until a window has been specified.
Plot scale Scale – From the pulldown list, you can select Scaled to Fit to scale the plot as large as possible for the selected paper. You can also select from a number of scale ratios (1:1, 1:2, etc.). Custom – Indicates the relation between plot units of length and drawing units of length. This will change according to the selected scale. Scale lineweights – Scales lineweights in proportion to the plot scale. Lineweights normally specify the linewidth of printed objects and are plotted with the linewidth size regardless of the plot scale. Plot offset Select the Center the plot checkbox to center the plot on the paper. Or, you can set the origin of the plot by entering values in the X and Y fields. Plot options Plot object lineweights – If you have turned off the Plot with plot styles checkbox, you can select this checkbox to use object lineweights in the plot. Plot with plot styles – Select this checkbox to plot using the plot styles applied to objects and defined in the plot style table. All style definitions with different property characteristics are stored in the plot style tables and can be attached to the geometry. This setting can replace pen mapping in earlier versions of AutoCAD.
8-13
Plotting
Plot paperspace last – Plots model space geometry first. Paper space geometry is usually plotted before model space geometry. Hide objects – Plots layouts with hidden lines removed for objects in the layout environment (paper space). Hidden line removal for model space objects in viewports is controlled by the Viewports Hide property in the Object Property Manager. This is displayed in the plot preview, but not in the layout.
8-14
Plotting
Plot Multiple Pages (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) The File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function allows you to plot an entire project or a group of selected pages within the project. Select:
File Print/Plot Multiple Pages The following Print/Plot Pages dialog box will appear. Print/Plot Pages Export Type
File Name Format
Plot Direct
Export Format
Project/Inst./Page
Create PLT Files
AutoCAD R12
Plot Sequence Forward
AutoCAD R13
Create DWG Files Create DXF Files
AutoCAD R14
Consecutive
Layer Groups...
Page Selection... OK
Cancel
Backward
Define Layer... Help...
This dialog box allows the user to select whether pages will be sent to a plotter or to a disk file. There are also radio buttons to select the file naming format and the AutoCAD version format of the files. Plot to a Plotter Select the Plot Direct radio button in the Print/Plot Pages dialog box.
8-15
Plotting
Plot to a File In the Print/Plot Pages dialog box, select the radio button for the file type that you wish to create: PLT, DWG, or DXF. The section on Plotting to Files contains more information (see page 8-21). Select Pages to be Plotted Select the Page Selection button. The following Plotting dialog box will appear. Plotting Project:
Installation:
Page:
ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE
Search...
Search...
OK
Cancel
Search...
Help...
The Project field contains a list of projects currently on your system. Select a project name and a list of installations will appear. Select an installation name and a list of pages in that installation will appear. In each column you can use the Search button to display a list of projects, installations or pages with descriptions. You can also make selections from these lists. To Plot an Entire Project – Select the project name followed by the OK button. (Do not select any installation or page names.) All drawing pages in the project will be plotted. To Plot an Entire Installation – Select the project name and then the desired installation name followed by the OK button. (Do not select any page names.) All drawing pages in the installation will be plotted.
8-16
Plotting
To Plot Individual Pages – Select the project name and then the desired installation name. You can then select one or more individual pages from the Page column followed by the OK button. The selected pages will be plotted. Select the OK button in the Print/Plot Pages dialog box to proceed with the plotting. Plot Sequence You can select the order in which pages plot with the Plot Sequence radio buttons in the Print/Plot Pages dialog box. Select the Forward radio button to print pages in numerical order from lowest to highest. Select the Backward radio button to print pages in reverse numerical order from highest to lowest.
8-17
Plotting
Plot Multiple Pages (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) The File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function allows you to plot an entire project or a group of selected pages within the project. Select:
File Print/Plot Multiple Pages The following Print/Plot Pages dialog box will appear. Print/Plot Pages Export Type
Page Selection...
Plotter Configuration
Plot Direct
Layer Selection...
Create PLT Files Create DWF Files
Define Layer...
Create DWG Files Create DXF Files
File Name Format
Export Format
Plot Sequence
Project/Inst./Page
AutoCAD R12
Forward
Consecutive
AutoCAD R13
Backward
AutoCAD R14 AutoCAD 2000
OK
Cancel
Help...
This dialog box allows the user to select whether pages will be sent to a plotter or to a disk file. There are also radio buttons to select the file naming format and the AutoCAD version format of the files.
8-18
Plotting
Plot to a Plotter Select the Plot Direct radio button in the Print/Plot Pages dialog box. Plot to a File In the Print/Plot Pages dialog box, select the radio button for the file type that you wish to create: PLT, DWF, DWG or DXF. The section on Plotting to Files contains more information (see page 8-21). Select Pages to be Plotted Select the Page Selection button. The following Plotting dialog box will appear. Plotting Project:
Installation:
Page:
ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE
Search...
Search...
OK
Cancel
Search...
Help...
The Project field contains a list of projects currently on your system. Select a project name and a list of installations will appear. Select an installation name and a list of pages in that installation will appear. In each column you can use the Search button to display a list of projects, installations or pages with descriptions. You can also make selections from these lists. To Plot an Entire Project – Select the project name followed by the OK button. (Do not select any installation or page names.) All drawing pages in the project will be plotted.
8-19
Plotting
To Plot an Entire Installation – Select the project name and then the desired installation name followed by the OK button. (Do not select any page names.) All drawing pages in the installation will be plotted. To Plot Individual Pages – Select the project name and then the desired installation name. You can then select one or more individual pages from the Page column followed by the OK button. The selected pages will be plotted. Select the OK button in the Print/Plot Pages dialog box to proceed with the plotting. Plot Sequence You can select the order in which pages plot with the Plot Sequence radio buttons in the Print/Plot Pages dialog box. Select the Forward radio button to print pages in numerical order from lowest to highest. Select the Backward radio button to print pages in reverse numerical order from highest to lowest.
8-20
Plotting
Plotting to Files PLT Files To plot drawing pages as PLT files, use the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function and select the Create PLT Files radio button. Files will be saved in the RS\PLOT directory. Note
The Create PLT Files function will not work under AutoCAD R14 unless the Plot to File checkbox in the File > Print/Plot > Current Page function is turned on.
Note
When you use the AutoCAD PLOT command to plot to a file, the system will create a plt extension file in the same directory as the original page file (under RS\PROJECT\WORK). Procedure: 1.
Select the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function.
2.
Select the Create PLT Files radio button in the dialog box.
3.
Select the File Name Format option. Two choices are available: Project/Inst./Page – This option will create subdirectories under the RS\PLOT directory for the project and installation and store the PLT files in these subdirectories. For example, if pages from the project EX2, installation A are plotted, the files will be stored in the directory RS\PLOT\EX2\A. (If there is no installation in the project, the plot file installation subdirectory will be named NO_INST.) The files will have the format pagename.plt where “pagename” is the name of the page created in RSWire. The software creates the file Plot_plt.txt in the project’s plot file directory that indicates which project/installation/location/page are in each plot file. Consecutive – This option will create a subdirectory under the RS\PLOT directory having the project name. Within this directory all selected files will be saved (without being divided by installation). The files will be named in the format ecs0.plt, ecs1.plt, etc. The software creates the file Plot_plt.txt in the project’s plot file directory that indicates which project/installation/location/page are in each PLT file.
4.
Select the Page Selection button to select the project, installation and pages that you wish to plot to file. Select OK once the pages are selected. You will return to the Print/Plot Pages dialog box.
8-21
Plotting
5.
Select OK in the Plot dialog box to create the files.
The software will remind you to select the Plot to File radio button in the Print/Plot > Current Page function. If there are already PLT files in the same subdirectory of the PLOT directory (from a previous use of this function) the software will prompt “There are PLT files in the plot directory. Delete?” Select Yes if you wish to delete the existing files and continue. Select Cancel if you wish to abort the PLT plot function.
DWF Files (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version only) DWF files can be viewed in Internet browsers with the Autodesk WHIP! 4.0 plug–in. To plot drawing pages as DWF files, use the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function and select the Create DWF Files radio button. Files will be saved in the RS\PLOT directory. Procedure: 1.
Select the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function.
2.
Select the Create DWF Files radio button in the dialog box.
3.
Select a configuration file from the drop–down list immediately to the right of the Create DWF Files radio button. There are two choices for DWF files: The DWF Classic.pc3 configuration file creates DWFs that resemble AutoCAD Release 14 DWFs. The output file is created with a black drawing background. The DWF ePlot.pc3 file creates DWFs with a white drawing background and a paper boundary.
4.
Select the File Name Format option. Two choices are available: Project/Inst./Page – This option will create subdirectories under the RS\PLOT directory for the project and installation and store the DWF files in these subdirectories. For example, if pages from the project EX2, installation A are plotted, the files will be stored in the directory RS\PLOT\EX2\A. (If there is no installation in the project, the plot file installation subdirectory will be named NO_INST.) The files will have the format pagename.dwf where “pagename” is the name of the page created in RSWire. The software creates the file Plot_dwf.txt in the project’s plot file directory that indicates which project/installation/location/page are in each plot file.
8-22
Plotting
Consecutive – This option will create a subdirectory under the RS\PLOT directory having the project name. Within this directory all selected files will be saved (without being divided by installation). The files will be named in the format ecs0.dwf, ecs1.dwf, etc. The software creates the file Plot_dwf.txt in the project’s plot file directory that indicates which project/installation/location/page are in each plot file. 5.
Select the Select Pages button to select the project, installation and pages that you wish to plot to file. Select OK once the pages are selected. You will return to the Plot dialog box.
6.
Select OK in the Plot dialog box to create the files.
DWG Files To plot drawing pages as DWG files, use the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function and select the Create DWG Files radio button. Files will be saved in the RS\PLOT directory. Note
You can also use the File > Save As function to save drawings as DWG files (see page 4-9), but these functions only save one page at a time. The plot function allows you to save a range of pages in one operation. Procedure: 1.
Select the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function.
2.
Select the Create DWG Files radio button in the dialog box.
3.
Select the File Name Format option. Two choices are available: Project/Inst./Page – This option will create subdirectories under the RS\PLOT directory for the project and installation and store the DWG files in these subdirectories. For example, if pages from the project EX2, installation A are plotted, the files will be stored in the directory RS\PLOT\EX2\A. (If there is no installation in the project, the plot file installation subdirectory will be named NO_INST.) The files will have the format pagename.dwg where “pagename” is the name of the page created in RSWire. The software creates the file Plot_dwg.txt in the project’s plot file directory that indicates which project/installation/location/page are in each plot file.
8-23
Plotting
Consecutive – This option will create a subdirectory under the RS\PLOT directory having the project name. Within this directory all selected files will be saved (without being divided by installation). The files will be named in the format ecs0.dwg, ecs1.dwg, etc. The software creates the file Plot_dwg.txt in the project’s plot file directory that indicates which project/installation/location/page are in each plot file. 4.
Select the Export Format AutoCAD R12, AutoCAD R13, AutoCAD R14 or AutoCAD 2000 to match the DWG type that you wish to create.
5.
Select the Select Pages button to select the project, installation and pages that you wish to plot to file. Select OK once the pages are selected. You will return to the Plot dialog box.
6.
Select OK in the Plot dialog box to create the files.
If there are already DWG files in the same subdirectory of the PLOT directory (from a previous use of this function) the software will prompt “There are DWG/PLT files in the plot directory. Delete?” Select Yes if you wish to delete the existing files and continue. Select Cancel if you wish to abort the DWG plot function.
DXF Files To plot drawing pages as DXF files, use the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function and select the Create DXF Files radio button. Files will be saved in the RS\PLOT directory. Procedure:
8-24
1.
Select the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function.
2.
Select the Create DXF Files radio button in the Plot dialog box.
3.
Select the File Name Format option. Two choices are available:
Plotting
Project/Inst./Page – This option will create subdirectories under the RS\PLOT directory for the project and installation and store the DXF files in these subdirectories. For example, if pages from the project EX2, installation A are plotted, the files will be stored in the directory RS\PLOT\EX2\A. (If there is no installation in the project, the plot file installation subdirectory will be named NO_INST.) The files will have the format pagename.dxf where “pagename” is the name of the page created in RSWire. The software creates the file Plot_dxf.txt in the project’s plot file directory that indicates which project/installation/location/page are in each plot file. Consecutive – This option will create a subdirectory under the RS\PLOT directory having the project name. Within this directory all selected files will be saved (without being divided by installation). The files will be named in the format ecs0.dxf, ecs1.dxf, etc. The software creates the file Plot_dxf.txt in the project’s plot file directory that indicates which project/installation/location/page are in each DXF file. 4.
Select the Page Selection button to select the project, installation and pages that you wish to plot to file. Select OK once the pages are selected. You will return to the Plot dialog box.
5.
Select OK in the Plot dialog box to create the files.
If there are already DXF files in the same subdirectory of the PLOT directory (from a previous use of this function) the software will prompt “There are DXF files in the plot directory. Delete?” Select Yes if you wish to delete the existing files and continue. Select Cancel if you wish to abort the DXF plot function.
8-25
Plotting
Plotting Selected Layers RSWire has the capability to plot selected drawing layers. This is useful if, for example, you wish to show or hide mounting information on a panel layout drawing, or show or hide certain texts on a schematic drawing. To plot by layer, the user creates a layer group consisting of one or more selected layers. A layer group can then be selected for plotting. All the standard RSWire drawing layers are available for inclusion in a layer group. (See page 5-127 for a list of layers.) If you have created custom drawing layers, these must first be defined in RSWire using the Define Layers function before they can be included in a layer group. See page 8-31.
Creating and Selecting Layer Groups To plot by layer, the layer first must be assigned to a layer group. A group can consist of one or more layers. To create a layer group 1.
Select File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages.
File Print/Plot Multiple Pages The Print/Plot Pages dialog box will appear. 2.
Select the Layer Groups button. The Layer Printing Control dialog box will appear.
8-26
Plotting
Layer Printing Control Active
Layer Control On Off Layer Group
Select Modify... Delete
Add... OK
Cancel
Help...
Enter New Group Name
Enter a name for the new layer group in the field above the Add button. Then select the Add button. 3.
The Modify Groups dialog box will appear.
Modify Groups Layer Names
Layer Group
ECS_LEV_FIELD ECS_LEV_LINE ECS_LEV_LINE_WNO ECS_LEV_PG_FRAME ECS_LEV_PG_LADDER ECS_LEV_PH_DATA ECS_LEV_PH_EED ECS_LEV_PH_TMP
Delete OK
Add Cancel
Help...
8-27
Plotting
Existing layer names are listed in the Layer Names field. Select (highlight) the names of the layers that you wish to include in the layer group. Then select the Add button. The selected layers will be listed in the Layer Group field. When you have added all the desired layers for the group select the OK button. 4.
The Layer Groups dialog box will return. The newly created layer group will be listed in the Layer Group field.
Selecting a Layer Group for Plotting To select a layer group for plotting: 1.
Select File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages.
File Print/Plot Multiple Pages The Print/Plot Pages dialog box will appear. 2.
Select the Layer Groups button.
3.
The Layer Printing Control dialog box will appear. Select the On radio button in the Layer Control section.
Layer Printing Control Active
Layer Control On Off Layer Group
Select
template
Modify... Delete
Add... OK
8-28
Cancel
Help...
Plotting
4.
Existing layer groups are listed in the Layer Group field. Select (highlight) the name of the layer group that you wish to plot.
5.
Then select the Select button. The selected layer group name will appear in the Active field.
6.
Select the OK button. The Print/Plot Pages dialog box will return. You can then select pages for plotting with the Page Selection button.
7.
The plot by layer mode will remain in effect during the work session until you return to the Layer Groups dialog box and select the Off radio button in the Layer Control area.
Modifying a Layer Group To add or remove layers in an existing layer group: 1.
Select the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function.
2.
Select the Layer Groups button. The Layer Printing Control dialog box will appear.
3.
Select (highlight) the name of the layer group to be modified.
4.
Select the Modify button. The Modify Groups dialog box will appear. Layers that are currently in the group are listed in the Layer Group field. All available layer names are listed in the Layer Names field.
5.
Use the Delete button to remove selected layer names from the Layer Group field. To add a layer name to the group, select the layer name in the Layer Names field followed by the Add.
Deleting a Layer Group To delete an existing symbol group: 1.
Select the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function.
2.
Select the Layer Groups button. The Layer Printing Control dialog box will appear.
3.
Select (highlight) the name of the layer group to be deleted.
8-29
Plotting
4.
8-30
Select the Delete button.
Plotting
Defining Custom Drawing Layers If you have created custom drawing layers, these must first be defined in RSWire using the Define Layers function before these layers can be included in a layer group for plotting by layer. Define a Layer 1.
Select File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages.
File Print/Plot Multiple Pages The Print/Plot Pages dialog box will appear. 2.
Select the Define Layer button.
3.
The Define Layers dialog box will appear. A list of existing, defined layer names appears on the left side of the dialog box. Define Layers Existing Layer Names ECS_LEV_FIELD ECS_LEV_LINE ECS_LEV_LINE_WNO ECS_LEV_PG_FRAME ECS_LEV_PG_LADDER ECS_LEV_PH_DATA ECS_LEV_PH_EED ECS_LEV_PH_TMP
Remove
OK
Help
Cancel
Add
Save
Enter Layer Name
4.
Enter the name of the layer that you wish to define in the field above the Add button. Then select the Add button. The name of the newly defined layer will then appear in the list in alphabetical order.
5.
If you wish the layer to remain defined in future work sessions select the Save button. If you only wish to define it for the current work session select OK.
8-31
Plotting
Remove (un–define) a Layer When a layer is removed from the Existing Layer Names list, this layer name can no longer be included in a layer group. The removed layer still exists, it is simply not listed in the Define Layers dialog box. A removed layer can be added to the layer list again at a later time.
8-32
1.
Select the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function and then the Define Layer button.
2.
Select (highlight) the layer name that you wish to remove.
3.
Select the Remove button.
4.
If you wish the layer name to remain un–defined in future work sessions select the Save button. If you only wish to un–define it for the current work session select the OK button.
Reports
9 Reports This section describes the various information reports and lists that can be generated in RSWireTM Designer. The report functions are found under the Reports pull–down menu. They are divided into a number of submenus, each of which contain several specific list functions. These submenus are described in the following sections.
Reports Project Libraries Connections Terminals Wire PLC–List Parts MS Access Reports Comma Separated Error Checking
The Tools > System Settings > Report Settings function displays a dialog box that allows a number of list output settings to be made. See page 7-5. See Section 14, List Generator Configuration, for information on customizing the formats of the various reports and lists. The following sections are included:
Printing Lists from RSWire Project Reports Project Full Project Brief Installations Page Full Page Brief
9-1
Reports
9-2
Table of Contents Library Reports Macro Symbols Device Type Full Device Type Brief Parts Foreign Languages Page Formats Connections Reports Wire List Wire Labels Cable List Field Wire Signals Terminals Reports Terminals Terminal Strips PLC–List Report Parts Reports Compile Parts File Master List Bill of Materials Purchase Order Job Costing Dimension List MS Access Reports Comma Separated Reports Error Checking Reports Unreferenced Signals Report Device Without Parent Report
Reports
Printing Lists from RSWire When a list is sent from RSWire to a printer, the default method for printing is to use the DOS PRINT command. RSWire creates a file and then “shells” out to DOS and calls a batch file in the RS\WORK directory. The name of the file to be printed is sent as a parameter to the batch call (%2). The name of the batch file to be called is named in the Tools > System Settings > Printer Configuration dialog box in one of the numbered Printer fields. See page 7-9. Up to five different batch files can be used at any given time. The batch files can be written to send the print files to different printers or to imbed escape sequences for the printer so that different printer setups for fonts, paper orientations, etc., can be assigned to the five printers. This can be done by the use of an ECHO command with a redirection to the appropriate printer. For example, this line would send “ [ESC] FF” to LPT1 at the start of every print job: ECHO [ESC] FF > LPT1 ] PRINT %2 Or This line would send a whole file of text or escape sequences: TYPE PRINTER1.ESC > LPT1 The standard default batch is PRINTER.BAT. This file uses the DOS PRINT COMMAND. Other methods can also be used in the batch file: “TYPE “TYPE “COPY “COPY
%2 %2 %2 %2
> LPT1” > LPT1.DOS” LPT1” LPT1.DOS”
You can verify that these lines will work on your system by typing them on the DOS command line while shelled out of DOS and substituting an actual text file name for the “%2”. Other methods may also be available with your network or spooling software. NPRINT for example.
9-3
Reports
Project Reports The Reports > Project submenu allows you to generate lists of projects and the installations and pages contained in those projects.
Reports Project Project Full Project Brief Installations Page Full Page Brief Table of Contents Project Full This function generates a list of RSWire projects that currently exist on the system in the designated project directory (RS\PROJECT\WORK). The list includes project name, number of pages, description, job number, drawing number and additional description.
Project Brief This function also lists all RSWire projects, but in a more concise format that does not include the additional description.
Installations This function generates a list of all installations in a selected project.
Page Full This function generates a detailed list of all drawing pages in a project including page descriptions, format number, location, date, etc. When you select this function a Select Project – Installation dialog box appears allowing you to select a project and (if desired) limit the list to a single installation.
9-4
Reports
Page Brief This function generates a more concise list of drawing pages in a project, including only page, description, location, date and name. When you select this function a Select Project – Installation dialog box appears allowing you to select a project and (if desired) limit the list to a single installation.
Table of Contents This function generates a graphical page list. The pages are listed in table format, with columns for installation, page number, description, location, date and macro.
9-5
Reports
Library Reports The Reports > Libraries submenu provides a selection of lists of information that is relevant to all projects. This includes lists of macros, symbols, device types, and language texts.
Reports Libraries Macro Symbols Device Type Full Device Type Brief Parts Full Data Preview Brief Data Preview Full Data Printout Brief Data Printout Foreign Languages Page Formats
Macro This function generates a list of available macros in the currently loaded symbol library. Sorting can be performed by macro name and macro description.
Symbols This function generates a list of all the symbols in the currently loaded symbol library. Note
If you have not looked at any drawing page since entering RSWire, the system may prompt “No catalog loaded” when you select the macro or symbol list. In this case, you can open a drawing page that utilizes the desired symbol catalog.
Device Type Full This function provides a list of device types. (In RSWire, a device type is a definition that ties together a parent symbol, a child symbol, and a cross reference symbol.) The list contains detailed information about the device types including the names of the parent, child and cross reference symbols and the distance of the cross reference symbol from the parent symbol reference point. 9-6
Reports
Device Type Brief This function generates a concise list of available device types consisting of device name and description.
Parts The Library > Parts report functions allow you to create reports on information in the parts database. Full Data Preview – This function displays a detailed listing of parts data on the screen. Brief Data Preview – This function displays a more concise listing of parts data on the screen including part number, description, manufacturer and catalog number.. Full Data Printout – This function generates a detailed printout of parts data. Brief Data Printout – This function generates a more concise printout of parts data on the screen including part number, description, manufacturer and catalog number..
Foreign Languages This function allows foreign language lists to be searched and listed. RSWire includes a file containing lists of commonly used technical words and phrases in multiple languages (English, German, French, etc.). By entering the number for the word or phrase in the drawing (instead of the word itself), RSWire can automatically display the word or phrase in up to three of the available languages. The Foreign Languages function displays the following Language Text Database dialog box.
9-7
Reports
Language Text Database List
Selected Languages English German French Spanish Netherlands Italian
All Selected Languages Translated Texts Not Translated Filter Text Number
Cancel
Help...
The Selected Languages field allows you to select one or more languages for searching and/or listing. Use standard Windows selection keys (hold down to select more than one language, hold down <Shift> to select a block of languages.) The Filter fields allow you to enter a text phrase or number and search for that entry. Wildcard entries containing an asterisk (*) character are possible (e.g., enter text *ON* to search for all text containing the letters “ON”). The List buttons allow you to list all the selected languages, all entries that exist in all languages (Translated Texts button), and all entries that do not exist in all languages (Not Translated button). The selected texts are listed in a dialog box. You can print these texts by selecting the Print button. To sort the texts by text number, click in the column header for text numbers. To sort the texts alphanumerically by text, click in the column header for the texts. See following figure.
9-8
Reports
Language Text Database
TEXTNO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OK
DRIVE MOTOR DRIVE E-VALVE MOUNTINGS PUMP AMPLIFIER THROTTLE ORIFICE TRANSFORMER
Print
Click in column headers to sort texts
Page Formats This Reports > Libraries > Page Formats function generates a list of RSWire drawing page formats including dimensions and descriptions.
9-9
Reports
Connections Reports The Reports > Connections submenu provides wire related list information.
Reports Connections Wire List Wire Labels Cable List Field Wire Signals
Wire List The Reports > Connections > Wire List function generates a list of wires which includes the following information: wire number, gauge, color, source (from), destination (to). When you select the Wire List function, a dialog box will appear asking if you wish to create a project connection list. This connection list is a source file that is used to generate the wire list. Warning
Create project connection list?
Yes
No
Cancel
If you have not yet created a connection list file for the project, or have made changes since the last connection list was generated, select the Yes button. If you wish to base the wire list on an existing connection list file, select the No button. The Connection List dialog box will appear.
9-10
Reports
Connection List File Name
L1.LST
Installation
LINE1
Search...
Location Comment File Name(s) L1.LST L2.LST WIRELIST
Parameter
Search... LINE1 WIRE LIST
LINE1 WIRE LIST LINE2 WIRE LIST TOTAL WIRE LIST
Open Connections
Delete OK
Cancel
Help...
To create a new connection list: In the File Name field enter the name you wish the connection list to have. In the Installation field enter nothing if you wish to include all installations. Enter an installation name if you wish to restrict the contents of the list to the specified installation. In the Location field enter nothing if you wish to include all locations. Enter a location name if you wish to restrict the contents of the list to the specified location. In the Comment field enter a description of the connection list. This will help you distinguish the various connection lists later. The Parameter button provides additional toggles to include or restrict certain types of terminal information. See page 9-13. Selecting the Open Connections toggle will generate a list consisting only of open connections. 9-11
Reports
Select OK to generate the wire list. To use an existing connection list: The File Name(s) area of the Connection List dialog box lists the available connection lists. Select an existing list by pointing and clicking; the file name and description is listed in the upper part of the dialog box. The Parameter button provides additional toggles to include or restrict certain types of terminal information. See page 9-13. Selecting the Open Connections toggle will generate a list consisting only of open connections. Select OK to generate the wire list. Note
When there are more than two devices connected to a potential, the connections shown in the wire list are determined by the connection search priorities that the software uses when analyzing the schematic drawings. See page 9-15.
Note
To delete an existing connection list, select the list name in the Connection List dialog box and then select the Delete button.
9-12
Reports
Connection List Parameters The Parameter button in the Connection List dialog provides settings to include or restrict certain types of terminal information. The following dialog box is displayed. Connection List Parameters Suppress Terminal Blocks Clip Jumpers Terminal Blocks Wire Jumpers Terminal Block Connections Cable Connections Target Definition Both Targets Match Selection Selection Filters To Target 1 Print Target Complete
OK
Partial
Cancel
Help...
Suppress: Terminal Blocks Clip Jumpers – When this checkbox is Off all connections are shown in the connection list. When On, connections between two consecutively numbered terminals possessing the same device ID (terminal strip) will not appear in the connection list. The jumper connection will then be displayed in the terminal plan interconnection drawings and subsequent lists. Terminal Blocks Wire Jumpers – When Off all connections are shown in the connection list. When On, connections between two non–consecutively numbered terminals possessing the same device ID (terminal strip) will not appear in the connection list. The jumper connection will then be displayed in the terminal plan interconnection drawings and subsequent lists.
9-13
Reports
Terminal Block Connections – When Off all connections are shown in the connection list. When On, connections between two terminals possessing different device IDs (terminal strip) will not appear in the connection list. The cabling information will then be displayed in the terminal plan interconnection drawings and subsequent lists. Cable Connections – When checked, will omit cable connections from the connection list. Target Definition: Both Targets Match Selection – When this checkbox is On, both targets (destinations) in the connection list must match the installation and location defined by the user in the Installation and Location fields of the Create Connection List dialog box. When Off only one of the destinations must match the installation and location defined by the user. The system will display the connection between the devices in their respective installations and locations when connected by wires. For example: suppose a wire list is generated based on the installation L1 and the location E1. Suppose the following wire list is generated with the Both Targets Match Selection checkbox turned OFF. FROM Inst.
Loc.
TO Device ID
Inst.
Loc.
Device ID
= L1
+ E1
PB1
= L1
+ E1
TB1:10
= L2
+ ST1
LS2
= L1
+ E1
SS2
The first connection in the list matches the specified installation and location (L1 and E1) on both the From and the To sides. The second connection matches the specified installation and location only on the To side. If the connection list were created again with the Both Targets Match Selection checkbox turned ON, only the first connection shown above would be listed because both sides would have to match the specified installation and location. Selection Filters To Target 1 – This checkbox works in conjunction with the Both Targets Match Selection checkbox (which must be OFF for this checkbox to serve any purpose). Turning ON the Selection Filters to Target 1 checkbox will place all destinations that match the installation and location specified by the user ( in the Installation and Location fields of the Create Connection List dialog box) on the From side of the list. For the example listing shown above, turning this checkbox ON would have the effect of reversing the second connection the next time a listing was made, as follows:
9-14
Reports
FROM Inst.
Loc.
TO Device ID
Inst.
Loc.
Device ID
= L1
+ E1
PB1
= L1
+ E1
TB1:10
= L2
+ E1
SS2
= L2
+ ST1
LS2
Print Target These radio buttons determine whether the complete target name is listed including installation and location. Selecting Complete will include installation and location. Selecting Partial will exclude the installation and location. Select OK to return to the Connection List dialog box. Then select OK to create the connection list. The Wire List output is done with the Reports > Connections > Wire List function. Connection Search Priorities The software uses a search routine to determine connections on potentials where more than two devices are connected. For most wires, only a “from” and “to” need to be determined; but in some cases there may be many devices all connected to the same potential. The software searches these wires in the following manner: The search of a potential begins on the left–hand side of the lowest line number on the connected symbols. If the page format in use does not have line numbers, the leftmost connection will be used as the starting point. If two connections on a page without line numbers are lined up, the topmost one will take precedence. If a diagonal connection symbol exists on the wire, the connection search will begin at the connection point left of position 1 on the diagonal connection symbol (see diagram on next page). If multiple diagonal connection symbols exist, the search will begin with the upper–leftmost connection. The system will follow the wire from this first connection until it encounters another connection point. Here it analyzes all wires incoming to the connection point and looks for unanalyzed wires. In a vertical (U.S. type) ladder diagram, the system uses the following priorities at each connection point: 1st priority: horizontal line to the left 2nd priority: horizontal line to the right or slanting 3rd priority: vertical line upwards 4th priority: vertical line downwards 5th priority: diagonal line 9-15
Reports
3rd
T1
Connection Search From Left Side of T2
1st
2nd
T2
4th 5th Search Priorities
JIC Style Diagram
For horizontal (IEC, DIN) style diagrams, the system searches for connections using the following priorities: 1st priority: vertical line upwards 2nd priority: vertical line downwards 3rd priority: horizontal line to the left 4th priority: horizontal line to the right 5th priority: diagonal line 1st
3rd
4th 5th
T1
2nd
T2
Connection Search From Left Side Of T2
Search Priorities
IEC Style Diagram
For both diagram types (ladder and IEC), these priorities only apply if a perpendicular connection is used as the connection point. If the diagonal wiring symbol DW is used (selected with Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function), the subsequent course of the search depends on the orientation of the diagonal wiring symbol: incoming at connection point 1 continue at 2 incoming at connection point 3 continue at 2 incoming at connection point 2 continue at 3 incoming at connection point 2 continue at 1 if 3 already processed
9-16
Reports
3 1
2
DW Symbol Connection Points
After the search is completed, each connection along the search path is put on the connection (wire) list. If the list did not contain any diagonal wires, the list will be sorted alphanumerically according to the “From” part of each connection. If ANY diagonal wires exist, connections will be shown on the wire list in the order they were analyzed. The above process is completed for each potential and the information is added to the connection (wire) list.
9-17
Reports
Wire Labels Use the Reports > Connections > Wire Labels to generate a list of wire numbers which can be printed in the form of wire labels. Select:
Reports Connections Wire Labels The wire labels will be printed, displayed on the screen or saved to a file depending on the output mode selected with the Report Settings tab in Tools > System Settings function. Note
Wire labels cannot be filtered using the list generator filter function.
Cable List The Cable List is a list of cables in the project including installation, location, device ID and number of conductors.
Reports Connections Cable List
Field Wire The Field Wire report is a list of cables in the project including the internal and external connections of each conductor. The list indicates which conductors have been used (assigned).
Reports Connections Field Wire
Signals The Signals report function displays a list of signal symbols in the project showing each symbol’s device ID and Installation – page – line number position. It also indicates whether the signal is an incoming or outgoing symbol type.
Reports Connections Signals
9-18
Reports
Terminals Reports The Terminals report functions generate information on terminals strips.
Reports Terminals Terminals Terminal Strips Terminals The Terminals function generates a list of terminal strips. For each strip, the internal and external connections of each terminal are indicated. Select:
Reports Terminals Terminals
Terminal Strips The Terminal Strips function generates a list of terminal strips in the project including installation, location, device ID, and number of terminals. Select:
Reports Terminals Terminal Strips The list shows the terminal strip ID and the number of terminals used in the project.
9-19
Reports
PLC–List Report The PLC–List report function generates a list of programmable controller I/O modules in the project. This list indicates the address and descriptive text of each I/O point of each PLC module parent symbol. Installation and line number are given for PLC child symbols. Select:
Reports PLC–List
9-20
Reports
Parts Reports The Reports > Parts submenu provides a selection of lists jointly compiled from the items included in a project and the data in the parts database.
Reports Parts Compile Parts File Master List Bill of Materials Purchase Order Job Costing Dimension List Compile Parts File The Compile Parts File function creates a source file of parts information from the current project that is used to generate other job lists including the Master Parts List, Bill of Material, Purchase Order List, Job Costing List and Dimension List.
Reports Parts Compile Parts File The Master Parts List dialog box will appear. Master Parts List Project:
Output File Name:
project name
MAST.LST
Replace Language Text
Language
Replace Multi–Line Text (^)
1:
Only On–Line Selected Pages
English
2:
Only Device IDs With Part Number 3:
Include Terminals OK
Cancel
Help...
The Output File field allows the name of the parts file to be entered. The default filename is MAST.LST.
9-21
Reports
The following checkboxes determine what is included in the parts file: Replace Language Text – Select this checkbox to overwrite the user–defined function text language selected in the Project Parameters dialog box (you must then specify new languages in the Language fields of the Compile Parts File dialog box). Replace Multi–Line Text – Select this checkbox to eliminate the control symbol (^) in the lists to be created. When text is entered on a drawing this symbol indicates a line break. For function text printouts, leave this checkbox unselected to maintain text locations for applications such as nameplate generation. Only On–Line Selected Pages – Select this checkbox to create a file only from those pages with online control turned on. Only Device IDs With Part Number – Select this checkbox to restrict the list to only those device IDs that have a part number assigned. Include Terminals – Select this checkbox to include terminals in the list. Select OK to generate the parts file. The parts file will be stored in the RS\PROJECT\WORK directory in the subdirectory for the currently active project.
Master List The master parts list includes the device ID, page/line number, part numbers, and function text for items in the schematics. In order to generate this list, a parts file must first have been created with the Reports > Parts > Compile Parts File function. Select:
Reports Parts Master List A Master List dialog box will appear listing the available parts files. Select a file name and select the OK button to generate the master list.
9-22
Reports
Bill of Materials The bill of materials is a list of parts used in a given project. The list shows every device ID to which a part number has been assigned, the part number, the part description and manufacturer. In order to generate this list, a parts file must first be created with the Reports > Parts > Compile Parts File function. Select:
Reports Parts Bill of Materials The following dialog box will appear: Bill Of Materials Master List:
Select: Installation: Location:
MAST.LST MASTB.LST
OK
Cancel
Help...
You can select from different parts files which are listed on the left side of the dialog box. The output can be limited to information from specific installations or locations by entering the desired installation and location names in the Installation and Location fields. Wildcard (*) entries are allowed. Select OK to generate the list.
9-23
Reports
Purchase Order List The purchase order list is a quantified list of part numbers (with descriptions) used in a project. All items with matching part numbers are combined and shown as a quantity. In order to generate this list, a parts file must first be created with the Reports > Parts > Compile Parts File function. Select:
Reports Parts Purchase Order The following dialog box appears. Purchase Order List Master List:
Select: Installation: Location:
MAST.LST MASTB.LST
Print Device ID’s OK
Cancel
Help...
You can select from different parts files listed on the left side of the dialog box. The output can be limited to information from specific installations or locations by entering the desired installation and location names in the Installation and Location fields. Wildcard (*) entries are allowed. If you select the Print Device ID’s checkbox, each item on the list will include the device IDs to which that part number was assigned. Select OK to generate the list.
9-24
Reports
Job Costing List The job costing list calculates the total cost of the project including material, assembly and wiring time, and mark–up. In order to generate this list, a parts file must first be created with the Reports > Parts > Compile Parts File function. Select:
Reports Parts Job Costing The following dialog box appears. Job Costing List Master List:
Select: Installation: Location:
MAST.LST MASTB.LST Hourly Cost
0.00
Mark–Up
0.00
Print Device ID OK
Cancel
Help...
You can select from different parts files listed on the left side of the dialog box. The output can be limited to information from specific installations or locations by entering the desired installation and location names in the Installation and Location fields. Wildcard (*) entries are allowed. The Hourly Cost field allows you to enter a labor cost value which, in conjunction with the assembly and wiring times from the parts database, will be used to calculate the total assembly and wiring costs. The Mark–Up field allows you to set a mark–up percentage beyond the prices in the parts database.
9-25
Reports
If you select the Print Device ID toggle, each item on the list will include the device IDs to which that part number was assigned. Select OK to generate the list.
9-26
Reports
Dimension List The dimension list calculates the total area, maximum depth and total weight of the components in the project. Subtotals are calculated for each location. In order to generate this list, a parts file must first be created with the Reports > Parts > Compile Parts File function. Select:
Reports Parts Dimension List The software will prompt you to create a master parts file. The following will then appear dialog box appears: Dimension List Master List:
Select: Installation: Location:
MAST.LST MASTB.LST
OK
Cancel
Help...
You can select from different master lists listed on the left side of the dialog box. The output can be limited to information from specific installations or locations by entering the desired installation and location names in the Installation and Location fields. Wildcard (*) entries are allowed. Select OK to create the dimension list.
9-27
Reports
MS Access Reports Parts reports can be generated in Microsoft Access format. See the previous section, Parts Reports, for descriptions of these reports.
Reports MS Access Reports Print Preview
Note
Master List Bill of Materials Purchase Order Job Costing Dimension List
It is not necessary to compile a parts file for these reports. Access obtains the information directly from the project database. To print a MS–Access report – select the Reports > MS Access Reports > Print menu and then the desired list. To view a MS–Access report on screen – select the Reports > MS Access Reports > Preview menu and then the desired list.
9-28
Reports
Comma Separated Reports The Reports > Comma Separated submenu provides list generator functions that produce various lists in a comma separated format. List output files in this format can be imported easily into spreadsheet and database programs for further manipulation and formatting. See previous sections for descriptions of these lists.
Reports Comma Separated
Project Libraries Connections Terminals PLC–List Parts Error Checking
9-29
Reports
Error Checking Reports The Reports > Error Checking submenu allows you to generate lists related to signals and parent/child referencing. These functions are performed for the currently active project. Use the Manage > Project > Project Preselect function to select a different project.
Reports Error Checking Unreferenced Signals Device Without Parent Unreferenced Signals Report This function displays a list of unmatched signal IDs (an outgoing signal without a corresponding incoming signal, or vice versa). The list shows each symbol’s device ID and Installation – page – line number position. It also indicates whether the signal is an incoming or outgoing symbol type. If there are no unreferenced signals, the software will display the message “All signal cross references are matched up.”
Device Without Parent Report This function displays a list of child symbols that exist in the schematics without a corresponding parent symbol. For example, a relay contact for which there is no coil with the same device ID.
9-30
Panel Layout
10
Panel Layout
This section contains instructions for producing a layout of devices in a cabinet or other type of assembly. Overview Although the user can use ordinary drawing functions to produce a panel layout diagram, this would not take advantage of the time–saving features of the RSWireTM Designer panel layout mode. When you create schematic diagrams with RSWire, the system allows you to enter a part number for each device in the drawing. This part number ties the device in the drawing to the parts database (see figure below). The database, in turn, contains information about a specific part, including dimensions and the name of a layout symbol which can graphically represent the part on a layout drawing. The Panel Layout mode can access this information. When the user wishes to create a panel layout, the Panel Layout function will automatically present the user with a list of every item in the drawing for which a part number has been assigned. The user simply selects one or more items from the list and then selects a position on the layout page. The system places the symbol and labels it with the device ID. This greatly speeds the production of the layout drawing. Schematic Diagram
PB206
10250T101–23X
Parts Database
Part Number
10250T101–23X
Description
PUSHBUTTON N.O.
Manuf. ACME Symbols Ref. PBNO Wire
Part number: 10250T101–23X
Lay.
Panel Layout Drawing
PB206
PB223
L–PB
10-1
Panel Layout
Preliminary Panel Layout Steps The following preconditions are necessary to produce panel layouts using the Panel Layout function.
10-2
1.
Ensure that the parts database contains information on the components to be used in the schematic diagrams. If you are using layout symbols (see next step), the layout symbol name should be assigned to each part in the database that the layout symbol will represent. There is a layout symbol name field for this purpose. See Section 13 for information on using the database.
2.
If you want the software to prompt you with a layout symbol (as opposed to a dimensioned box), create the necessary symbols. See page 10-9 for layout symbol creation procedures. A number of layout symbols are provided with RSWire; these symbols all have names that begin with the characters “L–”.
3.
When you create the schematic diagrams, assign part numbers to the symbols, either as you place the symbol or afterwards (right click on symbol and select Part Number from the pop–up menu).
Panel Layout
Panel Layout Procedure Use the following steps (after the preliminary steps on the previous page): 1.
Using the File > New > Page function, create a drawing page for the panel layout in an appropriate scale (e.g. 1:4). You must select “Panel Layout” in the Page Type field. Commonly used portions of layouts can be set up as macros and specified in the Page Macro field.
New Page Project
Select...
Installation
Select...
Location
Select...
Format Name
D–2COL
Select Page Format...
Set Scale
1
Scale 1: Online Page Type
Page
Panel Layout Title Block
Page Macro
Select ...
Select ... OK
Parameters 1...
2...
3...
4...
5...
6...
7...
8...
9...
10...
Cancel
Select “Panel Layout”
Help...
2.
Set an appropriate grid size to allow proper positioning of components (Tools > System Settings > Grid Settings).
3.
Select the Tools > Panel Layout function. The Panel Layout dialog box will appear.
10-3
Panel Layout
Panel Layout Select Devices...
Use Text Parameter
Text Parameter...
Display Placed Components Selected:
0
Place as a Group
OK
4.
Exit
Help...
Select the Select Devices button. The Select Devices dialog box will appear. Select Devices Devices Terminals Installation:
Select...
Location:
Select...
Device ID:
Display All Part Numbers
OK
10-4
Cancel
Help...
Panel Layout
This dialog box allows you to select which items from the schematics will be prompted for placement in the panel layout drawing. Select OK to continue.
5.
a.
Select the Terminals checkbox to display only terminals, or select the Devices checkbox to display all other items.
b.
If desired, you can use the Installation, Location and Device ID fields to restrict the listing to items that match these entries. Wildcard (*) entries are permitted in these fields. Use the Select buttons to view and select from lists of existing installations and locations.
c.
Select the Display All Part Numbers checkbox to display all part numbers in cases where more than one part number is assigned to a single device ID. If this checkbox is not selected, only the first part number assigned to each device ID will be displayed.
The Panel Layout dialog box will then reappear with the selected items displayed.
Panel Layout Select Devices...
Use Text Parameter
Text Parameter...
Display Placed Components Selected:
Place as a Group
0
Pos.
Installation
0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 0011
LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1
Location EN1 EN1 EN1 EN1 EN1 EN1 EN3 EN3 EN3 PBS1 PBS1 OK
Device ID CR303 CR307 CR310 CR314 CR337 PB310 GW320 SS325 SS330 PB348 PB350 Exit
Dim X 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
Dim Y 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 2.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
Symbol L–ABNCR L–ABNCR L–ABNCR L–ABNCR L–ABNCR L–PB L–SS L–SS L–PB L–PB
Help...
10-5
Panel Layout
The dialog box lists all the device IDs (including installation and location) for which a part number was assigned. This is the list that you will select from to place items in the panel layout. If any X and Y dimensions have been assigned to the part in the parts database, these are listed in the Dim X and Dim Y columns. If a panel layout symbol has been assigned to the part number in the parts database, this is indicated in the Symbol column.
6. Note
a.
Use the Text Parameter button to make the desired settings (size, label origin, etc.) for the device IDs and other text that will appear on the drawing. See page 5-34 for more information on the text parameter functions.
b.
Selecting the Display Placed Components checkbox will cause items that have been placed in the panel layout to be marked with an “X” in the leftmost column. If Display Placed Components is not selected, items that have been placed are removed from the list as they are placed.
c.
Select the Use Text Parameter checkbox to use the text parameters that you set with the Text Parameter button (see above). If you do not select this checkbox, the software will use the default text settings for device IDs.
d.
Select the Place as a Group checkbox if you wish to simultaneously place multiple items in the panel layout with one click of the button. You can select multiple items in the list (hold down the <Shift> or keys). The items will appear in the drawing together, spaced from each other according to the X value entered in the parts database for each part.
To place items in the panel layout select one or more items from the list in the Panel Layout dialog box and select the OK button.
If the item was assigned a layout symbol in the parts database it will be represented on the panel layout by that layout symbol. If the item was assigned no layout symbol but was assigned X and Y dimensions it will be represented by a box having those dimensions. If only the x–coordinate is entered, the part will be represented on a panel layout as a circle having this value as its diameter (if no other symbol is named in the Layout Symbol field). To place a single item, select the item followed by the OK button. The panel layout page will appear. Point at the desired position for the layout symbol and click the left mouse button.
10-6
Panel Layout
To place multiple items, you can select multiple individual items from the list by pointing and clicking on each item while holding the key down. Or, to select a continuous block of items, you can hold down the <Shift> and select the first and last item. Then select the OK button. The panel layout page will appear. Point at the desired position for the layout symbol and click the left mouse button. The items will be prompted in the order in which they appear on the list. After placing items you can select the Tools > Panel Layout function again to select more items (or you can click the right mouse button). As items are placed, they are removed from the list in the Panel Layout dialog box unless you select the Display Placed Components checkbox in which case items that have been placed are marked with an “X” in the leftmost column. If an item is deleted from a panel layout drawing, that item will reappear in the list of items in the Panel Layout dialog box where it will be available for selection. To exit the panel layout mode, select the Exit button in the Panel Layout dialog box. You can leave the panel layout mode and continue at a later time; the system will keep track of the items you have placed.
10-7
Panel Layout
Panel Layout/Schematic Comparison Check The software will automatically check for items in the panel layout that have been deleted from the schematic drawing after the panel layout was created. This check is performed the next time you start the panel layout function. After deleting one or more items from the schematic, when you start the panel layout function again, the following dialog box will appear that lists the items in the panel layout that no longer exist in the schematic. Panel Layout Non placed devices in drawing LINE1 NO_LOC PB106
Mark devices to be deleted
OK
Cancel
Help...
To delete the listed item(s) from the panel layout, select the item(s) and select the OK button. To leave the listed item(s) in the panel layout, select the Cancel button.
10-8
Panel Layout
Creating a Panel Layout Symbol If you want RSWire to prompt you with a layout symbol (as opposed to a dimensioned box), you must assign a layout symbol to the parts data that you use in your project. A selection of layout symbols are provided with RSWire (they have names that begin with the characters “L–”), or you can create your own symbols using the following procedure. 1.
Create a blank drawing page. Select “Schematic Diagram” as the page type. Generally, layout symbols are created in a 1:1 scale, so select this scale for the drawing page. The Online toggle for this page should be turned off.
2.
With the blank page active, select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function.
3.
In the New/Modify Symbol dialog box, enter the symbol name and description. (The layout symbols provided with RSWire all have names that begin with the characters “L–”. This is not required, but makes it easier to find and list the layout symbols.)
4.
Also in the New/Modify Symbol dialog box, select the symbol group GS1–General Symbol (no cross ref.).
5.
Select OK to continue.
6.
Define a reference point for the symbol with the Manage > Symbol > Reference Point function. You can redefine this point later.
7.
Draw the symbol using RSWire drawing functions or import an existing DWG file. If you are importing a file, follow the steps given on page 6-21.
8.
Enter the attribute text that will receive the device ID when the symbol is placed in a panel layout. To do this, first select the Draw > Text function. In the Text dialog box’s Text Input field, enter a “?”. Also select an appropriate text size, label origin, etc. Select OK to continue. Select a position for the text. The Definition of Text Attributes dialog box will appear.
10-9
Panel Layout
Text Attribute Definition
Select Activate Toggle
Symbol Text: ? I/O Attribute
Attribute Activate
Activate Address
Select DID,Panel/Wire Dia
I/O Text
No:
9
Function Text
DID,Panel/Wire Dia
Select the Attribute Activate toggle and select “DID,Panel/Wire Dia” from the list of attribute types. Select OK to continue. 9.
If you wish function text associated with the schematic symbol to appear at the layout symbol, enter another “?” attribute text as in the previous step, but for this text select “Function Text” from the list of attribute types.
10. Add any other drawing elements, texts, etc., that you wish the symbol to have. Redefine the reference point if desired with the Manage > Symbol > Reference Point function. 11. Store the symbol: Select the Manage > Symbol > Save function and define a window around the symbol elements. Remember that if you wish RSWire to automatically prompt the layout symbol in the panel layout mode, the layout symbol must be assigned to the appropriate part numbers in the parts database, and those part numbers must be assigned to device IDs in your project. The layout symbol name is entered in the Parts Database dialog box (Manage > Parts Database > Edit Form function) in the Symbols – Lay. field.
10-10
Panel Layout
Article Parts Database Part Number Description Manuf.
Date Created
Dimensions X 1.81
Changed
Y
2.82
Z
3.31
PMG Symbols Ref.
Catalog Price Price_S
0
Price_B
0
Wire
Units
Weight[lb]
0.00
Power[VA] 0.00
Lay. Discount
0 (C)over or (P)anel
Device Type Technical Description
Time[min] Assembly Wiring
Additional Part Numbers
Enter Layout Symbol Name
10-11
Panel Layout
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
10-12
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
11
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan RSWireTM Designer has functions that automatically compile information on all the terminals that exist in the project drawing pages. The user can view and edit this information in a table format. Graphic drawings of terminal strips can also be generated automatically. There are also Pin–Plug Plan functions that operate in the same manner as the terminal plan functions except that they gather and display pin and plug information rather than terminal and terminal strip information. The following sections are included:
Terminal Plan Overview Steps of Terminal Plan Creation Internal/External Connections and Jumpers Connection Search Priorities Terminal Plan Functions Terminal Plan Editor Graphical Terminal Plan Graphical Terminal Plan Macro Graphical Terminal Plan Configuration Graphical Terminal Plan Generation Pin–Plug Plan Pin–Plug Editing Graphical Pin–Plug Plan
11-1
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Terminal Plan Overview Steps of Terminal Plan Creation Once the schematics in the project are complete, use the following steps to create a terminal/cable plan. (More detailed information is given in the following sections.) 1.
Activate the Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Edit Terminals/Pin Plugs function. This function automatically generates a list of terminals and terminal connections according to the information in the project schematics.
2.
The Terminal Strip Selection dialog box will appear. Select the strip(s) that you wish to edit.
3.
Select the Edit button in the selection dialog box. The connections for the selected terminal strip(s) will be displayed in the Terminal Editor dialog box. Changes can now be made, such as cable assignment, reversing internal and external connections, sorting terminals, inserting spare terminals, and other operations.
4.
Use the Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Generate Graphical Plan function to automatically create a drawing page showing a representation of selected terminal strips.
Terminal Plan Creation Steps
CREATE SCHEMATICS
EDIT TERMINALS New destinations Change terminal numbers Assign part numbers Assign cables
GRAPH TERMINAL PLAN & TERMINAL LISTS
11-2
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Customization – Default formats for terminal lists and graphical terminal plans are included with the software. These formats can be customized to suit the user’s requirements.
Internal/External Connections and Jumpers “Internal” vs. “External” Connections – The terms “internal” and “external” are used to describe the two “sides” of connections to terminals. Other terms such as “from and to” or “source and destination” may be more familiar to you. The assignment of internal and external connections may be based on positioning in the schematic (left or right of the terminal) or by manual assignments made by the user. Terminals can also be designated as jumpers. Internal, External, and Jumper priorities are defined at the connection points of terminal symbols. In other words, a connection point can be “set” so that anything connected to it is considered an internal connection, external connection, or a jumper. This setting can be made in three different ways: 1.
Connection points can be defined as internal, external, or jumper when the terminal symbol is created (see page 6-63).
2.
Connection points can be designated as internal, external or jumper after the symbol is placed in a schematic by activating the Modify > Symbol function, selecting the desired terminal symbol and then selecting the Terminal Destinations toggle in the Modify Symbol dialog box. You can also use the Modify > Power–Editor function (or right click on a terminal symbol) and select “Jumper” from the pop–up menu.
3.
If the connection points of a terminal symbol in a schematic are undefined (have not been designated as internal, external, or jumper) the system has default priorities upon which it will make assumptions. For a terminal symbol with two connection points: 1st Connection Point – Internal 2nd Connection Point – External
1st CP
2nd CP
11-3
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
For a terminal symbol with five connection points: 1st Connection Point – Undefined 2nd Connection Point – Internal 3rd Connection Point – Jumper 4th Connection Point – External 5th Connection Point – Jumper
X1 Symbol – Connection Point Order 5 2
1
2
4
3
3
1 4
JIC
5
IEC
Why does it matter whether connection points are internal or external? Documentation listings, terminal plan macros, and editor screens for terminals show internal destinations on one side of the terminal and external destinations on the other side of the terminal. By changing the connection point designations, we have control over how the information is listed and displayed. Target Internal
Static Header Text Variable Data
–PB201 –PB203 –LS205
TB:No.
Target External
–TB1:1 –TB1:2 –TB1:3
+L1–STRIP2:1 +L1–STRIP2:2 +L1–STRIP2:3
Connection Search Priorities The Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Edit Terminals/Pin Plugs function causes the system to look along the wires in both directions from each terminal in the schematics. Signal cross references are also analyzed. The software uses search priorities in cases where a potential has more than two devices connected. These priorities are the same as those used in generating the connection list. See page 9-15.
11-4
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Terminal Plan Functions Functions related to the terminal plan are found in the Tools >Project Settings > Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration and Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan submenus.
Tools Project Settings Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration
Tools Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan Edit Terminals/Pin–Plugs Generate Graphical Plan
Tools > Project Settings >Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration – Configuration of the graphical terminal plan. See page 11-24. Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Edit Terminals/Pin Plugs – Terminal plan editor (table format). See page 11-6. Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Generate Graphical Plan – Generates a graphical terminal plan. See page 11-30. In addition, terminal lists can be generated under the Reports > Terminals submenu with the Terminals and Terminal Strips functions.
11-5
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Terminal Plan Editor The terminal plan editor mode compiles a list of terminals in the current project and allows the user to select and edit the terminal information. To enter the terminal plan editor select:
Tools Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan Edit Terminals/Pin–Plugs If no page is currently open, you will be asked to select a project. The Terminal Strip Selection dialog box will appear. This dialog box allows you to select which terminal strips will be included in the current editing session. Terminal Strip Selection
Search Installation
*
Location
*
Strip
*
Search...
View All...
Number of Selected Terminal Strips: 8 Terminal Strip Installation =LINE1 =LINE1 =LINE1 =LINE1 =LINE1 =LINE1 =LINE1 =LINE1
Location +BAY1 +BAY1 +BAY1 +CAB1 +EN1 +EN1 +EN1 +EN1
Terminal Strip -TB1 -TB2 -TB3 -TB -STRIP1 -STRIP2 -TB1 -TB2
Total 3 3 3 8 17 30 8 8
Edit... OK
11-6
Help
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
If you wish to limit the editing to a portion of the project, you can make entries in the Installation, Location and Strip fields to filter the list of terminal strips. Use asterisks (*) to make wild card entries. For example enter *BLDG1* in the Installation field to include any installation names containing the characters “BLDG1”. Select the Search button to display the filtered list of terminal strips. By limiting the editing session to part of the project you can improve editor response time for large projects and also make it easier to find a specific strip. The value shown on the Number of selected Terminal Strips line indicates the total number of strips that were found. The Terminal Strip section of the dialog box lists all the terminal strips that the system found in the current project (or selected portion). The strips are listed in alpha–numeric order by installation–location–terminal strip name. To select an individual strip for editing, select (highlight) the strip and select the Edit button. To select all listed strips for editing, select the View All button. The Terminal Editor dialog box will then appear.
11-7
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Editor Display You can resize the Terminal Editor dialog by dragging the lower right–hand corner. You can resize the width of the columns by pointing at the dividing line between the column headings and dragging. The information in the unshaded columns can be edited by double clicking inside a cell. Use the Settings > Wire Number function to select how many columns of wire number information (wire number, color, guage, etc.) are displayed. Use the Settings > Expand Columns to Fit function to expand the columns to display all the information they contain. Note
Installation/Location display – In RSWire a complete identification consists of an installation name (indicated by an “=”) followed by a location name (indicated by a “+”) followed by a device ID (indicated by a “–”). In the terminal editor list, the full name of the current terminal strip is given, but in the listing of internal and external targets, installations and locations are not shown unless they differ from that of the current terminal strip. In the following example, we can assume the Internal Targets belong to Installation “L1” because no other installation name is given. However, they do have a different location name (“E1”). The External Targets consist only of a device ID so we can assume they belong to the same installation and location as the terminal strip. If you are viewing a single terminal strip, its installation and location will be shown at the top of the editing screen but not in the Strip:TB column.
Installation Location Device ID =L1+B1–TB5 Color
Internal Target
Strip: TB
+E1–STRIP1:1 +E1–STRIP1:2 +E1–STRIP1:3
–TB5:1 –TB5:2 –TB5:3
Internal Targets
Type
Page 1.10 1.11 1.12
Jumper
External Target –M110 –M111 –M112
External Targets
The following editing functions are available in the Terminal Editor dialog box.
11-8
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Terminal Editing Functions Note
You can access most of the terminal editing functions using the Edit pulldown menu in the Terminal Editor dialog box. There are also toolbar buttons for most of these functions at the top of this dialog.
Change Terminal Number To change a terminal block number in the terminal editor: 1.
Double click on the desired terminal block ID. The Device ID Assignment dialog box will appear.
2.
Change the terminal block ID as desired
3.
Select OK in the Device ID Assignment dialog box.
Double click to edit terminal ID
Any changes to terminal numbers are reflected in the schematic drawings.
11-9
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Rename Terminal Rename – This function allows you to change the terminal strip to which a terminal belongs. 1.
Display a terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog and select one or more terminals to be reassigned by highlighting the terminal names in the Strip TB column.
2.
Select the Edit > Rename function (use the pulldown menu inside the Terminal Editor dialog box).
3.
The Define Target dialog box will appear. Define Target Installation:
=LINE1
Select...
Location:
+EN1
Select...
Strip ID:
–TB4
Select...
OK
Note
11-10
Cancel
Help...
4.
Enter the Installation, Location and Strip ID of the terminal strip to which you wish the selected terminal block(s) to be assigned.
5.
Select OK. The reassigned terminal blocks will be removed from the terminal editor display (because they no longer belong to the current terminal strip).
If you reassign a terminal block to a strip that already contains a terminal block with the same number, the result will be two terminal blocks with the same number in that strip (unless you edit the terminal number).
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Renumber Terminals This function allows you to renumber all the terminals in the selected strip. Changes made with this function are reflected in the schematic drawings. 1.
Display a terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog.
2.
Select the Edit > Renumber function (use the pulldown menu inside the Terminal Editor dialog box) or use the Renumber toolbar button. The Renumber Terminal Strip dialog box will appear. Renumber Terminal Strip First Number:
1
Renumber Terminals with the Same Number OK
Cancel
Help...
3.
In the First Number field enter the number that you want to assign to the first terminal in the strip. Select the Renumber Terminals with the Same Number checkbox if you wish to renumber duplicate terminals as well.
4.
Select the OK button. All the terminals in the strip will be numbered sequentially from the first number. Changes made with this function will also be reflected in the schematic.
11-11
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Sort Terminals This function lets you change the order in which terminals are listed in the terminal editor. 1.
Display a terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog.
2.
Select the Edit > Sort function (use the pulldown menu inside the Terminal Editor dialog box) or select the Sort toolbar button. The Sort Terminals dialog box will appear. Sort Terminals Sort Terminal Blocks Sort by Terminal Number Sort by Internal Target Sort by External Target OK
3.
Note
Cancel
Help...
This dialog box lets you select whether terminals will be listed in order of Terminal Number, Internal Target, or External Target. Select the desired option followed by the OK button. The terminals will be listed in the selected order.
The Sort by Internal and External Target functions will take into account Installation and Location names even if these names are not displayed (installation and location names of targets are not displayed if they are the same as the current terminal strip). Generally, terminal sorting is done before renumbering.
11-12
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Move Terminals Move – This function allows you to move a terminal or a group of terminals from one position in the strip to another. This function will only affect the listing of terminals in the graphical terminal plan. 1.
Display a terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog.
2.
Select the group of terminals that you wish to move. Do this by selecting the first terminal in the group, holding down the <Shift> key and then selecting the last terminal in the group.
3.
Select the Edit > Move function (use the pulldown menu inside the Terminal Editor dialog box) or select the Move toolbar button.
4.
The system will prompt “Mark Destination Position.” By double clicking, select the terminal just ahead of where you want the moved terminals to be inserted. The terminals will be moved to that position.
5.
The software will ask you “Maintain Terminal Sequence?” Select OK if you wish the moved terminals to remain in the new position when you exit the terminal editor. Select No if you wish the move to last only for the current work session.
Create Spare This function allows you to insert additional terminals into a terminal strip. 1.
Display a terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog.
2.
Select the terminal just ahead of where you want the spare terminal inserted.
3.
Select the Edit > Create Spare function (use the pulldown menu inside the Terminal Editor dialog box) or select the Create Spare toolbar button.
4.
The Insert Spare Terminal dialog box will then appear, prompting you with the next available terminal number in the Terminal Number field. You can type over this number if desired. If you enter the number of an existing terminal, the software will ask if you wish to duplicate the terminal. If you answer Yes it will create a spare terminal with the same number.
5.
In the Quantity field you can specify how many spare terminals are to be inserted.
11-13
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Insert Spare Terminals Terminal Number
4
Quantity
1
OK
6.
Cancel
Help...
Select the OK button. The new terminals will appear in the list. The spare terminal number is followed by an “R” in the Type column to indicate it is a “Reserve” terminal.
Delete Spare Terminal To delete spare terminals from a terminal strip: 1.
In the terminal editor, select (highlight) the spare terminal(s) that you wish to delete
2.
Select the Edit > Delete function (use the pulldown menu inside the Terminal Editor dialog box) or select the Delete toolbar button.
3.
The selected spare terminal(s) will be removed from the list.
Edit Spare Terminal Targets The Internal Target and External Target for spare terminals can be edited in the terminal editor. Only spare terminals can be edited in this manner. Use the following procedure: 1.
11-14
In the terminal editor, double click inside the Internal Target cell or the External Target cell for the desired spare terminal. The Define Target dialog box will appear.
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Define Target Installation:
Select...
Location:
Select...
Strip TB:
TB4 OK
Cancel
Help...
2.
In the appropriate fields, enter the Installation, Location and terminal number of another terminal to which you wish to jumper. Use the Select buttons to view and select from lists of existing Installations and Locations.
3.
Select OK to enter the target information.
Switch Targets This function will switch the targets for a terminal from an internal target to an external target and vice versa.
Note
1.
Display a terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog.
2.
For the desired terminal, highlight the cell in either the Internal Target column or the External Target column.
3.
Select the Edit > Switch Targets function (use the pulldown menu inside the Terminal Editor dialog box) or select the Switch Targets toolbar button. The targets will be switched between the Internal and External columns.
Changes made with this function will be reflected in the schematic (but can only be seen by using the Terminal Dest. function in the Modify > Symbol mode).
11-15
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Clip Jumper This function specifies a short jumper symbol to be used in the graphic terminal plan. If the target for a terminal is another terminal, you can specify a jumper symbol rather than listing the terminal as a target. The jumper symbol will connect the two terminals in the graphical terminal plan.
WIRE NO.
TERMINAL STRIP =L1+CAB1–TB2
WIRE NO.
1 2 3
Clip jumper in graphical terminal plan Note
4
To use the clip jumper symbol, the two terminals must be connected by a wire in the schematic drawing. When terminals are jumpered, they are marked as such in the Jumper column of the terminal editor. Numbers in this column indicate to which other terminal a terminal is jumpered. In the following figure terminals 1 and 2 are jumpered. Internal Target
–TB5:2
Strip: TB –TB5:1 –TB5:2 –TB5:3
Type
Page
Jumper
1.10 1.11 1.12
2 1
External Target
–TB5:3 –LT110
Clip jumper information
The connection points on terminals can be set Internal, External, Undefined, or Jumper. If you have used a wire in the schematic drawing to connect two terminal connection points that are defined as Jumper, these will automatically appear in the terminal editor as jumpered. If you wish to assign a jumper in the terminal editor, use the following procedure. 1.
11-16
Display a terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog.
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
2.
For the desired terminals, highlight the cells in either the Internal Target column or the External Target column (depending on which side of the terminals should be jumpered). Hold down the key while selecting the two cells.
3.
Select the Edit > Clip Jumper function (use the pulldown menu inside the Terminal Editor dialog box). Numbers will appear in the Jumper column indicating to which terminal the terminals are jumpered.
When a graphical terminal plan is generated, the clip jumper symbol will represent the terminal–to–terminal connection. Removing a Clip Jumper To remove a clip jumper, use the following procedure. 1.
After assigning a clip jumper, you must first exit from the terminal editor and then re–enter the terminal editor before you can delete the clip jumper.
2.
Assign a wire jumper to the two terminals that have the clip jumper assigned. (See the following section). This will have the effect of removing the clip jumper.
Wire Jumper When a wire jumper is assigned between two terminals, they are listed as targets for each other. Note
To assign a wire jumper, the two terminals must be connected by a wire in the schematic drawing. The connection points on terminals can be set Internal, External, Undefined, or Jumper. If you have used a wire in the schematic drawing to connect two terminal connection points that are defined as Internal or External, these will automatically appear in the terminal editor as a wire jumper. If the two connection points are defined as Jumper, this will default to a clip jumper in the terminal editor and you will not be able to assign a wire jumper. The user must redefine these connection points as Internal and External using the Terminal Dest. function in the Modify > Symbol mode. To assign a wire jumper, use the following procedure: 1.
Display a terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog.
11-17
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
2.
For the desired terminals, highlight the cells in either the Internal Target column or the External Target column (depending on which side of the terminals should be jumpered). Hold down the key while selecting the two cells.
3.
Select the Edit > Wire Jumper function (use the pulldown menu inside the Terminal Editor dialog box) or use the Wire Jumper toolbar button. The internal or external targets will become the terminal that is at the other end of the jumper.
To change a wire jumper to a clip jumper, highlight the two Internal Target or External Target cells that are jumpered, and select the Edit > Clip Jumper function. Assign Terminal Part Number You can assign a part number to a terminal or a group of terminals in the terminal editor. 1.
Select (highlight) the Part Number cells for the desired terminals.
2.
Click a second time in the last selected cell.
3.
The Assign Part Number screen will appear. This screen allows you to search the parts database for appropriate part numbers and assign them. See page 5-81.
Assign Cable In the terminal editor, you can assign the conductors of a cable to a group of terminal targets. Use the following procedure.
11-18
1.
Display the terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog.
2.
For the desired terminals, highlight the cells in either the Internal Cable column or the External Cable column (depending on which side of the terminals should be cabled).
3.
Click on the highlighted cells. The Device ID Assignment dialog box will appear.
4.
Assign a device ID to the cable. Select the OK button to continue.
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
5.
The Device Type dialog box will appear. Enter an appropriate device type for the cable. (Use the Search button to display a list of existing cable device types.) Select the OK button to continue.
6.
The Connection Points dialog box will appear, listing the conductor designations for the cable. Select the OK button to continue.
7.
The Cable Text dialog box will appear. This allows you to enter a length value and other descriptive texts to be associated with the cable. Enter the desired texts and select OK to continue.
The cable device ID and conductor designations will appear in the terminal list. Note
When you create a cable in the terminal plan editor, a graphic representing the cable is added to the schematic page. This graphic is suppressed unless you select the Tools > System Settings > Display Settings function and select the Display Hidden Symbols checkbox.
Delete Cable To delete an existing cable in the terminal plan editor: 1.
Display the terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog.
2.
Highlight the cells in either the Internal Cable column or the External Cable column to which the cable has been assigned.
3.
Select the Edit > Delete function (use the pulldown menu inside the Terminal Editor dialog box).
The cable will be removed from the terminal list.
11-19
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Graphical Terminal Plan The software can create a graphical terminal plan, automatically generating drawing pages that show terminal strips with connection information for each terminal. To do this, the software uses a designated terminal plan macro, which graphically represents each terminal strip. Appropriate terminal information is then automatically placed at each terminal position. The user can select from a number of terminal plan macros provided with the software, or the user can create a custom macro. The terminal plan configuration mode allows the user to set up the format, content and positioning of items in the graphical terminal plan pages. The Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Generate Graphical Plan function causes the graphical terminal plan pages to be generated according to the preselected formats. The following subsections describe the elements of the graphical terminal plan.
Graphical Terminal Plan Macro The graphical terminal plan layout is created and stored as a macro. This macro can consist of a realistic drawing of a terminal strip (see below). It can also consist of columns of boxes containing various texts, or any other format the user requires. When the macro is first defined, variables (?values) are entered at appropriate places in the drawing. Note the variables in the terminal plan macro shown below.
FROM SOURCE ?t1devid
Terminal Plan Macro (similar to FTW20 Provided With The Software)
11-20
WIRE NO. ?t1wn
TERMINAL STRIP ?strip ?term
WIRE NO. ?t2wn
TO DESTINATION ?t2devid
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
When a graphical terminal plan is generated for a given project, the correct value is automatically substituted for each variable in the terminal plan macro. Information for each individual terminal proceeds from the variable positions with spacing determined by offset values entered in the graphical terminal plan configuration mode. In the following figure, after the Generate Graphical Plan function has been run, the software has filled out the macro with information for the terminal strip TB2 in the installation L1, location CAB1. The left side indicates the device IDs and wire numbers connected to the internal side of the terminal. (The “:4” at the end of the device IDs is connection point text for those limit switches.) The right side of the diagram shows connection information for the external side of the terminals. In this example, the external connection is to items in a different location, CAB2.
FROM SOURCE
WIRE NO.
TERMINAL STRIP =L1+CAB1–TB2
WIRE NO.
TO DESTINATION
LS101:4
W10
1
W62
+CAB2–LT301:X1
LS103:4
W14
2
W66
+CAB2–LT303:X1
LS105:4
W18
3
W69
+CAB2–AH307:X1
LS107:4
W21
4
W73
+CAB2–LT311:X1
LS109:4
W26
5
W75
+CAB2–LT313:X1
LS111:4
W29
6
W79
+CAB2–LT315:X1
Creating a Terminal Plan Macro – Use the following steps (see page 6-81 for more information on creating macros.) Note
You can use existing terminal macros provided with the software to build up your own macro. For example the FTW5– macro provides a group of five terminals which you can use to build longer strips. Other macros provide columns of cable information, etc., complete with variable texts. Look in the macro list for descriptions of “Construction Macro” and “Term Plan Macro”. 1.
Use a blank drawing page of the appropriate format size.
2.
Create the drawing elements of the terminal plan. Position them where they should appear on the finished terminal plan pages.
3.
Place the desired terminal plan variables using the Draw > Text function. Each variable must begin with a “?”. A list of available variables is given on the next page. For individual terminals it is necessary to place the variable only at the first terminal position. Information for the remaining terminals is positioned according to offset values entered in the configuration mode (see page 11-24).
11-21
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
4.
Select the Manage > Macro > New/Modify function.
5.
Enter an appropriate name and description for the macro in the New/Modify Macro dialog box.
6.
The software will prompt you to “Define Base Point.” Select any point on the drawing for now.
7.
The software will prompt you to Select objects. Select all the objects to be included in the macro. (You can also select items later with the Manage > Macro > Select Items function.)
8.
Select the Manage > Macro > Reference Point function. The reference point of a terminal plan macro must be at the origin (0.0000, 0.0000) of the page XY coordinate system, i.e. at the bottom left corner. Therefore, after selecting the Reference Point function, position the cursor at the 0.0000, 0.0000 point (coordinates are displayed above the drawing area) and press the left mouse button.
9.
Use the Manage > Macro > Save function to store the macro.
To select your new macro for use in generating terminal plans, select Tools > Project Settings, select the Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab and then enter the macro’s name in the Plan Macro field (see page 11-25). Terminal Plan Variables Variable
Location designation
?locstrip
Location designation and terminal strip
?strip
Terminal strip
?strip_inst
Display installation
?strip_loc
Display location
?strip_name
Display strip name
?term
Terminal number
?t1devid
Internal cable designation complete: includes installation + location + device ID External cable designation complete: includes installation + location + device ID Internal: device ID
?t2devid
External: device ID
?xref
Cross-reference
?t1cablec ?t2cablec
11-22
Description
?location
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Variable
Description
?xrefinst
Cross-reference with installation
?t1cable
Internal: cable designation
?t1wire
Internal: wire designation of cable conductor
?t2cable
External: cable designation
?t2wire
External: wire designation of cable conductor
?partno
Part number(Ident.number)
?consno
Consecutive number
?t1cabtype
Internal: cable type
?t2cabtype
External: cable type
?t1cabpartno
Internal: cable part number
?t2cabpartno
External: cable part number
?t1cablen
Internal: cable length
?t2cablen
External: cable length
?t1cabgauge
Internal: cable gauge
?t2cabgauge
External: cable gauge
?t1cabwire
Internal: Number of wires
?t2cabwire
External: Number of wires
?jumper
Evaluated jumpers are displayed
?ftext
Terminal: function text
?t1ftext
Internal: function text
?t2ftext
External: function text
?t1wn
Internal: wire number
?t1wnc
Internal: wire number and color
?t1wng
Internal: wire number and gauge
?t1wncg
Internal: wire number, color and gauge
?t2wn
External: wire number
?t2wnc
External: wire number and color
?t2wng
External: wire number and gauge
?t2wncg
External: wire number, color and gauge
?t1conduit
Internal: conduit
?t2conduit
External: conduit
?t1cabtxt01 etc. ?t1cabtxt50 ?t2cabtxt01 etc. ?t2cabtxt50
Internal cable text 1 Internal cable text 50 External cable text 1 External cable text 50
11-23
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Graphical Terminal Plan Configuration Use the Tools > Project Settings > Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration function to set the defaults for graphical terminal plan generation. Select:
Tools Project Settings Terminal/Plug Plan Configuration (First select the Tools > Project Settings function and then select the Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab.) The following dialog box will appear. X
Project Settings Configuration Terminal and Plug IDs
File:
Device ID Style
Object Defaults
Plug Plan
Title Block Plan Macro Jumper Symbol Name Cable/Wire Used Symbol Installation Starting Page Number Page Format
TITLED FTW20 JUMPER CROSS TCPLAN 1 D-0COL
Title Block Variables pgdescr01 pgdescr06 strip Total Lines Columns 20
Terminal
Cable Internal
Cable External
TPLAN.CFG Terminal Plan
Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration
Columns
10
Columns
10
Offset X:
0.2500
Offset X:
-0.2500
Offset Y:
0.0000
Offset Y:
0.0000
Jumper Offset X
-0.7500
Offset Y
0.0000
Format Of Target Destinations intern Installation extern Location
1 0 0 0
Device ID Connection Point Maximum Characters 25
pgdescr07 Write text as single line
Drawings
Update Existing Pages Offset X:
Offset Y:
0.000 OK
Cancel
Save
-0.500 Help...
In the File field, select a configuration file (such as TPLAN.CFG). The remaining fields will then become active.
11-24
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Select the Terminal Plan toggle to ensure that the settings you make will apply to the terminal plan and not the pin/plug plan. Note
The default configuration file is TPLAN.CFG located in the RS\SYSCON\SYSTEM directory. You can create alternate terminal plan configuration files by copying TPLAN.CFG under another name and then editing it with the Tools > Project Settings function (Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab). This dialog box allows you to set title blocks, page formats, page numbers, installation name, and other variables for the graphical terminal plan.
Note
Values shown in inches. The following fields are provided: File – Indicates the name of the selected terminal plan configuration file. Title Block – You can specify a title block macro name in this field that will override the default title block macro (selected when the project was created) on terminal plan pages. Plan Macro – Determines the macro that graphically represents terminal strips in the terminal plan pages. Jumper Symbol Name – Determines the symbol that represents jumpers in the graphical terminal plan pages. (“JUMPER” is a variable length symbol that is automatically sized to stretch from terminal to terminal.) Cable/Wire Used Symbol – Determines what symbol is used in the graphical terminal plan to mark a cable conductor that has been used (assigned). (The “CROSS” symbol is an “X”.) If the user enters a minus sign (“–”) in this field, the software will fill in the cable conductor colors in the graphical plan, rather than just placing a cross symbol. Installation – Determines what installation the system will create to hold the graphical terminal plan pages. Starting Page Number – Determines the first page number the system will assign to the terminal plan pages. Page Format – Determines the drawing page format to be used for the graphical terminal plan pages.
11-25
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Title Block Variables – The six fields in this area allow you to specify three title block variables and the values that will appear at those variable locations in the title block. This applies to the title block entered in the Title Block field and only to the graphical terminal plan drawing pages. There are three pairs of fields; the upper field contains a variable name, the lower field contains the information to be displayed where that variable exists in the title block (see page 6-83 for more about title blocks). You can also use another variable name in the lower field (for example, ?strip to show the terminal strip name in the title block).
This Variable In The Title Block
Title Block Variables
Will Contain This Information
pgdescr05
pgdescr06
pgdescr07
Terminal
Plan
Drawings
OK
Cancel
Help...
Total Lines The Quantity field sets the maximum number of lines of terminal information on each graphical terminal plan page. Offset X, Offset Y – Determines the spacing between lines in the graphical terminal plan. When lines are listed vertically, enter an Offset Y value and enter 0 for Offset X. When lines are listed horizontally, enter an Offset X value and enter 0 for Offset Y. See the following figure. Offset X Offset Y
=1+LS–PB3
=1+LS–PB1 =1+LS–PB2 =1+LS–PB3
=1+LS–PB2
10 11 12
10 11 12
=1+LS–PB1
11-26
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
The upper right portion of the dialog box allows the user to specify the number of columns available for cable information: Cable External and Cable Internal The Quantity fields establish the number of columns of cable information that will be provided in the terminal plan. The Offset X and Offset Y fields allow you to set the spacing of the columns. Jumper Offset X and Y – These fields determine the position of the jumper symbol in relation to the terminal number. Depending on whether the terminal plan is horizontal or vertical, one of the values will be zero.
10 11 12
Jumper Offset X
10 11 12
Jumper Offset Y
(JIC Example: dx=–0.50, dy=0 in.) (IEC Example: dx=0, dy=–5 mm)
(JIC Example: dx=0, dy=–0.50 in.) (IEC Example: dx=0, dy=–5 mm)
Format of Target Destinations – This area allows the setting of the layout and content of the target information for each terminal. For example, in the figure below, each terminal is labeled with the installation, location, and device ID of the items connected to the terminal (the “=”, “+”, and “–” characters are RSWire conventions used to distinguish installation names, location names, and device IDs, respectively. 10 11 12
=1+LS–PB1 =1+LS–PB2 =1+LS–PB3
The Installation, Location, Device ID, and Connection Point fields let the user set the spacing of this information by assigning a beginning column number to each piece of information.
11-27
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Note
The above example does not include connection point text. If you imagine each character of the above information assigned to a column number, it might look like the following figure. =
1
+
L
S
–
P
B
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
The default entries for these fields are 1 for Installation and 0 for Location and Device ID. The “0” column value means that the location and device ID will immediately follow the installation name with no spaces in between. However, if you wished to space out the information more you could enter, for example, values of 1 for Installation, 10 for Location, and 20 for Device ID. Then the information would have the following column assignments. These values will space the information out more, but note that with these values any installation or location names longer than 9 characters will be truncated in the graphical terminal plan target listings.
=
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
+
L
S
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17 18
19
–
P
B
1
20
21
22
23
24
The Maximum Characters field lets you set how many columns will be allowed for displaying this information. The intern and extern selections allow you to choose whether the column assignments you make in the Installation, Location, and Device ID fields apply to the internal side of the terminal plan or the external side. Select one or the other before entering column values. Write Text as Single Line – When this checkbox is selected, this feature allows you to write function text on a single line. The “return” is over–ridden and the “^” will be replaced with a space on the plan.
11-28
25
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Update Existing Pages – This checkbox determines whether the software will always generate new graphical terminal plan pages or if it will update information on existing pages. If the checkbox is not checked, the software will always generate new pages starting with the page number in the Starting Page Number field. This means that existing pages in the same page number range will be overwritten. If the Update Existing Pages checkbox is checked, the software will update information on existing pages for the selected terminal strips, but will not overwrite existing pages for non–selected terminal strips. When you have finished entering values in the Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab, select the Save button to copy the new information over the existing terminal plan configuration file. Select Cancel to keep the old configuration information. If you select the OK button without first saving any new values, these new values will only be used during the current work session.
11-29
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Graphical Terminal Plan Generation Use the Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Generate Graphical Plan function to generate a graphical terminal plan. This consists of automatically generated drawing pages for each terminal strip in the project. Select:
Tools Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan Generate Graphical Plan The software will prompt you to select the Project, Installation and Pages to be included in the terminal plans. Select OK to continue. The Select Terminal Strip dialog box will then appear, listing all the terminal strips in the selected project or portion thereof. Select (highlight) those strips for which you wish to produce a graphical terminal plan page. Select the OK button. Graphical terminal plan pages will be generated according to the variables set in the terminal plan configuration mode. See page 11-24. The system will create a separate installation for the graphical terminal plan pages (provided the installation name specified in the configuration mode does not already exist). The default installation name is TCPLAN. A different installation name can be specified in the configuration mode. If there are more terminals in a strip than will fit on the terminal plan macro (designated in the configuration mode) the software will create additional pages in the same number sequence, for example, page 5, page 5.1, page 5.2, etc. To view the graphical terminal plan pages use the File > Open function. Note
11-30
The software will generate the graphical terminal plan based on the configuration file that was most recently selected in the Tools > Project Settings function under the Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab. Configuration files are selected from the File pulldown list.
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Pin–Plug Plan The software is capable of accessing pin and plug information in the same way it can access information about terminals and terminal strips. Information can be gathered, edited and presented in a graphical plan. The same functions that are used for editing and generating a terminal plan are used for pin–plug plans. There is a separate function for configuring the pin–plug plan.
Pin–Plug Editing Use the Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Edit Terminals/Pin Plugs function. Any plugs in the selected project/installation will be available for editing along with the terminal strips. See page 11-6.
Graphical Pin–Plug Plan Graphical Pin–Plug Plan Macro A pin–plug plan macro named PPLAN is provided with the software. This macro can be specified in the pin–plug plan configuration mode so that it will be used when generating graphical pin–plug plans. You can also create custom pin–plug plan macros. Following the procedures for creating a terminal plan macro. See page 11-20.
11-31
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Graphical Pin–Plug Plan Configuration Use the Tools > Project Settings > Terminal/Plug Plan Configuration function to set the defaults for graphical pin–plug plan generation. Select:
Tools Project Settings Terminal/Plug Plan Configuration (Select the Tools > Project Settings function, then select the Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab.) The following dialog box will appear. X
Project Settings Configuration Terminal and Plug IDs
File:
Device ID Style
Object Defaults
Plug Plan
Title Block Plan Macro Jumper Symbol Name Cable/Wire Used Symbol Installation Starting Page Number Page Format
TITLED PPLAN JUMPER CROSS PPLAN 1 D-0COL
Title Block Variables pgdescr01 pgdescr03 strip Total Lines Columns 20
Pin Plan
Cable Internal
Cable External
PPLAN.CFG Terminal Plan
Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration
Columns
10
Columns
10
Offset X:
0.2500
Offset X:
-0.2500
Offset Y:
0.0000
Offset Y:
0.0000
Jumper Offset X
-0.7500
Offset Y
0.0000
Format Of Target Destinations intern Installation extern Location
1 0 0 0
Device ID Connection Point Maximum Characters 25 pgdescr05 Write text as single line
Drawings
Update Existing Pages Offset X:
Offset Y:
0.000 OK
Cancel
Save
-0.500 Help...
In the File field, select a configuration file (such as PPLAN.CFG). The remaining fields will then become active.
11-32
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Select the Plug Plan toggle to ensure that the settings you make will apply to the Plug Plan rather than the Terminal Plan. Note
The default configuration file is PPLAN.CFG located in the RS\SYSCON\SYSTEM directory. You can create alternate pin–plug plan configuration files by copying PPLAN.CFG under another name and then editing it with the Tools > Project Settings function (Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab). The Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration dialog box will appear.
Note
Values shown in inches. This dialog box allows you to set title blocks, page formats, page numbers, installation name, and other variables for the graphical pin–plug plan. It is the same dialog box used for terminal plan configuration. See page 11-25. Use the Macro File field in this dialog box to specify the macro to be used for generating the graphical plan. Use the Installation field to set the name of the installation that will be created for the pin–plug plan drawings.
Graphical Pin–Plug Plan Generation Use the Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Generate Graphical Plan function to generate a graphical pin–plug plan. This consists of automatically generated drawing pages for each plug in the project. Pin–plug plan pages are generated along with terminal plan pages. These can be placed in different installations according to the settings made in the terminal plan and pin–plug plan configuration modes. Select:
Tools Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan Generate Graphical Plan The Select Terminal Strip dialog box will appear, listing existing plugs and terminal strips. Select (highlight) the plugs for which you wish to generate a graphical plan. Graphical pin–plug plan pages will be generated according to the variables set in the pin–plug plan configuration mode. The system will create a separate installation for the graphical pin–plug plan pages (provided the installation name specified in the configuration mode does not already exist). The default installation name is PPLAN. A different installation name can be specified in the configuration mode.
11-33
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
If there are more pins in a plug than will fit on the pin–plug plan macro (designated in the configuration mode) the software will create additional pages in the same number sequence, for example, page 5, page 5.1, page 5.2, etc. To view the graphical pin–plug plan pages use the File > Open function. Note
11-34
The software will generate the graphical pin–plug plan based on the configuration file that was most recently selected in the Tools > Project Settings function under the Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab. Configuration files are selected from the File pulldown list.
Cables
12
Cables
This section explains various aspects of creating and assigning cables in RSWireTM Designer. The user can create device types and enter part numbers that represent various types of cables. Wires can be assigned to cables either in the schematic or in the terminal plan editor. The following sections are included:
Assigning a Cable in the Schematic Assigning a Cable in the Terminal Plan Editor Creating a Cable Symbol Creating a Cable Device Type Creating a Cable Cross Reference Symbol Cable Lists
12-1
Cables
Assigning a Cable in the Schematic You can assign a group of wires to a cable by placing a cable symbol in the schematic drawing. Cables assigned in the schematic will be listed in the terminal plan editor mode (see page 11-18). To assign a group of wires in a schematic to a cable, use the following steps: 1.
While viewing the schematic, select the Insert > Symbol by Name function. When prompted for a symbol name enter a cable symbol name. The symbol named CABLE is provided with RSWire.
2.
Select the desired cable symbol position on the first wire that you wish to assign to the cable.
3.
The Device ID Assignment dialog box will appear. A device ID tag will be prompted in the Device ID field. Enter a device ID for the cable in this field.
4.
The Multiple Placement checkbox will default to the “On” setting when placing cable symbols. This allows you to assign multiple consecutive wires to the cable in one step. (You can also assign wires to a cable individually by placing the cable symbol on each wire and assigning the same device ID on each wire).
Device ID Assignment Installation:
Search...
Location:
Search...
Device ID:
Search Device ID
Suppress Device ID
Duplicate Device ID
Multiple Placement
Part Number Assigned Part No. / Select to Delete
Search... Addit.Part Number
OK
12-2
Cancel
Help...
Multiple Placement checkbox
Cables
Note
5.
At this time, if desired, you can also assign a part number to the cable. Select the Search button and the parts database Assign Part Number dialog box will be displayed. You can search the database for cable part numbers. Select these part numbers by pointing and clicking. Caution: assign a part number to only one of the cable’s conductors. Select OK to return to the Device ID Assignment dialog box.
6.
The Device Type dialog box will appear allowing you to select a device type for the cable. The device type determines how many conductors the cable has and what the designation (such as color) is for each conductor. Use the Search button to display and select device types that apply to cables.
If you assigned a part number to the cable, and a device type was defined in the data for that part number, the device type will be assigned automatically and the Device Type dialog box will not appear. Device Type Device Type: Description: Search...
7.
OK
Cancel
Help...
The Connection Points dialog box will appear next, listing all the conductor designations for the cable. The first available (unassigned) conductor will be assigned to the cable symbol you are currently placing unless you select a different conductor by pointing and clicking. The selected conductor’s designation will appear in the field at the bottom of the widow.
12-3
Cables
Connection Points Select Connection Points Device ID: =LINE1+LOC1–CAB50 Device:
Installation
8444
Pg.Line
Symbol CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE
Connection Points BLK WHT RED GRN
BLK OK
Cancel
Help
If any of the conductors have already been assigned in the schematic, a page and line number will be indicated in the Connection Points dialog box. These conductors cannot be assigned again unless you delete the existing cable symbol where they have been assigned. Select the OK button to continue. 8.
The Cable Text dialog box will appear. This dialog box allows you to enter up to 50 descriptive texts related to the cable. Ten text fields are displayed at a time. You can move from one group of texts to another with the Next and Previous buttons. Select the OK button when the desired texts have been entered.
12-4
Cables
Cable Text Length Text 2: Text 3: Text 4: Text 5: Text 6: Text 7: Text 8: Text 9: Text 10: Next OK
9.
Previous Cancel
Help...
The cable symbol will appear at the selected position with the device ID and the designation of the first conductor. If the Multiple Placement toggle was selected, the software will then prompt, “Mark position of last symbol.” By pointing and clicking, select the last wire (or below the last wire) to be assigned to the cable.
L1
101 102
PB103
TB1
CAB50
103 104
1 PB105
BLK
Original Symbol Position
105 106
2 LS107
Select Last Wire
107 108
3 LS109
109 110
4 LS110
111 112
5 LS113
113
6
12-5
Cables
Cable conductor designations will be automatically assigned to each wire up to the last selected wire. The cable device ID appears at the first wire; conductor designations appear at subsequent wires (see following figure). Note
To cancel out of the multiple placement mode (if you decide you wish to assign only one conductor) use the key combination or click the right mouse button. L1
101 102
PB103
TB1
CAB50
103 104
PB105
WHT
105 106
2 LS107
RED
107 108
3 LS109
GRN
109 110
4 LS110
111 112
5 LS113
113
6
12-6
BLK
1
Conductor Designations Automatically Assigned
Cables
Assigning a Cable in the Terminal Plan Editor In the terminal plan editor mode you can assign a group of terminals to the conductors of a cable. See page 11-18 for more information. Cables assigned in this manner will automatically appear in the schematic (see the following note). Cables that were assigned in the schematic will be listed in the Cable columns of the terminal plan editor. Note
When you create a cable in the terminal plan editor, a graphic representing the cable is added to the schematic page. This graphic is suppressed unless you select the Tools > System Settings > Display Settings function and select the Display Hidden Symbols toggle. The terminal plan editor is accessed through the Tools > Terminal Pin–Plug Plan > Edit Terminals/Pin–Plugs function. After selecting one or more terminal strips from a list, the Terminal Editor dialog box will appear. There are columns indicating any cables that are assigned.
Cable columns
12-7
Cables
Creating a Cable Symbol A cable symbol named CABLE is provided with RSWire. The user may wish to create other cable symbols to meet specific requirements. The following example shows how a cable symbol is created. Use the following procedure to create a symbol called XCABLE. 1.
Display a blank drawing page.
2.
Turn off the Online function (use the Manage > Page > Modify function).
3.
Set the drawing grid to the desired spacing (use the Tools > System Settings function and Grid Settings tab).
4.
Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function. The New/Modify Symbol dialog box will appear.
5.
In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XCABLE (or whatever symbol name you wish to use). Press the <Enter> key. New/Modify Symbol Symbol Name:
List...
XCABLE
Preferred Direction Vertical
Horizontal
Snapmode: Nearest Endpoint Description: Example cable symbol Search Language Text... Symbol Group: CS2 Cable Symbol OK
12-8
Cancel
Help...
Cables
6.
Select Horizontal for preferred direction. Enter the description “Example cable symbol.” Select symbol group CS2 Cable Symbol.
7.
Select the OK button to continue.
8.
The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a symbol reference point where the cable symbol will cross a wire. Zoom in for a better view of the work area.
9.
Draw the graphic elements that will represent the symbol.
10. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. The software will prompt you to “Define Device ID position.” Select a device ID reference point above the symbol. 11. The Device–ID–Parameter dialog box will be displayed. Enter the device ID tag “CB” (or whatever you want your cable ID prefix to be). 12. Select the Manage > Symbol > Connection Point function. Select a connection point position.
12-9
Cables
Important
The connection point itself is not required for this symbol (the connection point text is) but the connection point must not be located where it will contact the wire on which the cable symbol is placed. Place the connection point above or below the symbol itself.
Device ID
Connection Point Text Position
CB
Connection Point Position
13. After you place the connection point you will be prompted to “Define label origin of text.” Select a position for the connection point text where you wish the cable conductor designations (such as BLACK, RED, etc.) to appear. These designations are defined as part of a cable device type (see page 12-11). When the Connection Point Parameters dialog box appears, select the desired text parameters and select the OK button to continue. 14. Select the Manage > Symbol > Save function to complete the creation of the symbol. Define a window around the symbol elements. The message “The Symbol was added to the catalog” will be displayed. After you create an appropriate cable device type (see page 12-11), the symbol can be placed in schematics and should appear as shown below.
CB22 BLACK
12-10
Cables
Creating a Cable Device Type A cable device type is a definition that tells RSWire how many conductors a cable has and what designation (color, etc.) each conductor should have. This information allows the software to automatically assign conductor designations, and keep track of which conductors have been assigned. When you place a cable symbol in a schematic, the software will ask which device type to use with the symbol. By having different device types available you can make the cable symbol represent various types of cables. Use the following procedure to define a device called X4CON. 1.
Select the Manage > Device Type > New/Modify function. The Device Type New/Modify dialog box will be displayed.
2.
In the Device Type field, enter the name X4CON. Press the <Enter> key.
Device Type New/Modify Device Type Group
X4CON
Search
Cable
Symbol Name Parent Child 1 Child 2 Child 3 Child 4 Child 5 Child 6 Child 7 Child 8 Child 9
XCABLE XCABLE XCABLE XCABLE
Cross Ref.
Connection Points BLK WHT RED GRN
Delta X
0.0000
Delta Y 0.0000
Absolute Position OK
Cancel
Help
Description...
12-11
Cables
3.
In the Group field select the Cable device group.
4.
Select the Description button. The Device Description dialog box will be displayed.
5.
Enter “Example device” in the first description field. This description will appear on device listings. Enter “Example cable” in the Cable Type field. Select OK. Device Type Description Description Descr. 1
Example device
Descr. 2 Descr. 3 Search Language Text... Cable Cable Type
Example cable
Gauge Part Number OK
Note
12-12
Cancel
Help...
We could also enter a part number in the Part Number field if we wished a specific part number to be assigned automatically to any cable using this device type. 6.
Enter XCABLE for Parent symbol name. This is the symbol name of the parent symbol associated with this device. (XCABLE is the example cable symbol created in the previous section. If you did not create this symbol use an existing cable symbol name such as CABLE.)
7.
Enter XCABLE for the symbol name of Child 1 through Child 3. With cable device types it is not necessary to enter a different symbol name in the Child fields. The Child fields merely represent additional conductors of the cable. If more conductors are needed, you can scroll down to display additional Child fields (up to 256).
Cables
8.
Enter the connection point text shown in the Device Definition dialog box (BLK, WHT, RED, GRN). These are the conductor designations (sometimes numbered by the cable manufacturer) that will appear in the schematic beside the individual wires assigned to the cable.
9.
Select OK to complete the creation of the device type.
To test the device type, follow the instructions on page 12-2 for assigning a cable in a schematic. Use the parent symbol name and device type name that you used in the Device Type New/Modify dialog box.
12-13
Cables
Creating a Cable Cross Reference Symbol You can create a cable cross reference symbol that will show all the conductor connection information for a given cable in one place. This allows easy generation of interconnection plans. If you have assigned descriptive cable texts to the cable (for cable length, connector type, etc.) these can also be shown on the cross reference symbol. Use the following procedure to create a cross reference symbol for a four conductor cable called XCAB4REF: 1.
Display a blank drawing page.
2.
Turn off the Online function (use Manage > Page > Modify function).
3.
Set the drawing grid to the desired spacing (use the Tools > System Settings > Grid Settings function).
4.
Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function. The New/Modify Symbol dialog box will appear.
5.
In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XCAB4REF (or whatever symbol name you wish to use). Press the <Enter> key. New/Modify Symbol Symbol Name:
List...
XCAB4REF
Preferred Direction Vertical
Horizontal
Snapmode: Nearest Endpoint Description: Example cable cross reference symbol Search Language Text... Symbol Group: CS3 Cable Cross Reference Symbol OK
12-14
Cancel
Help...
Cables
6.
Select Horizontal for preferred direction. Enter the description “Example cable cross reference symbol.” Select symbol group CS3 Cable Cross Reference Symbol.
7.
Select the OK button to continue.
8.
The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a symbol reference point somewhere in the center of the drawing area. Zoom in for a better view.
9.
Use the graphical line and box functions (not wires) to draw the graphic elements that will represent the symbol. For this example we will draw a rectangle with four branches at each end.
10. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. The software will prompt you to “Define Device ID position.” Select a device ID reference point above the reference point of the symbol. Select a label origin of 5 for the device ID. Enter the text “CAB” for the device ID tag. Select the OK button. “CAB” will appear at the device ID position.
12-15
Cables
The remainder of the creation of this symbol consists of entering a series of symbol texts with attribute numbers to determine which piece of information will be displayed at each text position. The following text attribute numbers have been set aside for cable information: Cable Destination Left: Conductor Description Left: Cable Destination Right: Conductor Description Right:
Attribute numbers 3000 to 3255 Attribute numbers 3600 to 3855 Attribute numbers 3300 to 3555 Attribute numbers 3900 to 4155
11. Assign the destination symbol text for each conductor on the left side of the symbol. Use the Draw > Text function and place a “?” as the text. Use a label origin of 6. When the Text Attribute Definition dialog box appears, select the Attribute – Activate checkbox and enter the appropriate attribute number in the No. field. Then select the OK button. The first (top) conductor should be assigned attribute 3000, the second conductor 3001, and so on. Text Attribute Definition Symbol Text: ? I/O Attribute
Select Activate checkbox Attribute Activate
Activate No:
Enter Attribute Number 3000 to 3003
3000
Address I/O Text
12-16
Assign attribute 3000
?
Assign attribute 3001
?
Assign attribute 3002
?
Assign attribute 3003
?
CAB
Cables
12. Next assign the description symbol text for each conductor on the left side of the symbol. Use the Draw > Text function and place a “?” as the text just below each text placed in the previous step. Use a label origin of 6. When the Text Attribute Definition dialog box appears, select the Attribute – Activate checkbox and enter the appropriate attribute number in the No. field. Then select the OK button. The first (top) conductor should be assigned attribute 3600, the second conductor 3601, and so on. Text Attribute Definition Symbol Text: ? I/O Attribute
Select Activate checkbox Attribute Activate
Activate No:
Enter Attribute Number 3600 to 3603
3600
Address I/O Text
?
Assign attribute 3600
? ?
Assign attribute 3601
CAB
? ?
Assign attribute 3602
? ?
Assign attribute 3603
?
13. Now repeat the symbol text assignment steps for the conductors on the right side of the symbol. First, place symbol text for the destinations. Use a label origin of 4. Assign attribute numbers 3300 to 3303.
12-17
Cables
?
?
Assign attribute 3300
?
Assign attribute 3301
?
Assign attribute 3302
?
Assign attribute 3303
? ?
CAB
? ? ? ? ?
14. Assign conductor description symbol texts to the right side of the symbol. Place them just below the destination texts placed in the previous step. Use a label origin of 4. Assign attribute numbers 3900 to 3903. ?
?
?
?
?
CAB
Assign attribute 3900
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
Assign attribute 3901
Assign attribute 3902
Assign attribute 3903
15. Place a label for the text length symbol text. Use the Draw > Text function and place the word “LENGTH” below the symbol reference point. Do not assign an attribute number, simply select OK in the Text Attribute dialog box. 16. Below the “LENGTH” text, place a text consisting of the string “?cabtxt01”. Use a label origin of 5. This text will display the cable length when the symbol is placed. Note
12-18
All other cable texts can be extracted in this manner using ?cabtxt02–?cabtxt50.
Cables
?
?
?
? CAB
?
? ?
? ?
LENGTH
?
?
?cabtxt01
?
?
?
?
?
17. Save the symbol: Select the Manage > Symbol > Save function and define a window around all the symbol elements. The message “The symbol was added to the catalog” will be displayed. Testing the cable cross reference symbol To test the operation of the symbol cross reference symbol you must first assign a cable in a schematic. Note
There is no need to specify the cable cross reference symbol when assigning the cable in the schematic. Suppose you had assigned the following cable in a schematic. TB2
CAB77
BLK
1
TB9 1
WHT 2
2 RED
3
3 GRN
4
4
You can then place the cable cross reference symbol on any online drawing page in the same project and assign the same device ID as the existing cable (CAB77).
12-19
Cables
After placing the symbol you must perform a View > Refresh Page function to update the cross reference symbol with the correct information for the cable as shown in the following figure. = LINE1/108/=line1+EN1–TB9:1
= LINE1/108/=line1+EN1–TB2:1
BLK
BLK = LINE1/108/=line1+EN1–TB2:2
CAB77
= LINE1/108/=line1+EN1–TB2:3 RED = LINE1/108/=line1+EN1–TB2:4 GRN
= LINE1/108/=line1+EN1–TB9:2 WHT
WHT LENGTH 50
= LINE1/108/=line1+EN1–TB9:3 RED = LINE1/108/=line1+EN1–TB9:4 GRN
The following information is displayed for each conductor: Cable Installation/Cable Page–Line/= Symbol Installation+Location–Device ID Note
12-20
For a length value to appear, you must have assigned a length value as the first cable text when assigning the cable in the schematic. See page 12-4.
Cables
Cable Lists There are two cable–related list functions in the Reports > Connections submenu: Cable List – This is a list of all the cables in a given project. Field Wire – This is a list of all cables in a project including descriptions and destinations of each conductor within each cable. The list indicates which conductors have been used (assigned).
12-21
Cables
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
12-22
Parts Database
13
Parts Database
This section describes the RSWireTM Designer parts database. This database contains information about the physical devices that will be used to build the projects that are designed with RSWire. As the user creates schematic drawings with RSWire, the user can assign part numbers to each symbol. Then, when the schematics are completed, RSWire can use the information in the database to generate an appropriate bill of material, purchase order list, etc., based on the schematic. For information on assigning part numbers to symbols, see page 5-79. The Manage > Parts Database pull–down menu provides functions which allow a variety of parameters to be set for parts data.
Manage Parts Edit Form Edit Table Duplicates Check The following sections are included:
MS–Access Database Files Accessing the Parts Database Parts Database Edit Form Add a Parts Database Record Delete a Parts Database Record Find a Parts Database Record Edit a Parts Database Record Table View of Database Database Manipulation Previewing the Parts Database Printing the Parts Database
13-1
Parts Database
MS–Access Database Files The parts database and language text databases in RSWire are based on Microsoft Access database software. If you do not have MS–Access installed on your computer at the time that you install RSWire, the run–time version of Access will be installed. Warning: Make sure all Microsoft Access applications are closed before starting RSWire. Otherwise, data from RSWire could override your open database files. When RSWire starts for the first time, it creates a UI.mdb database file in the WORK directory. The UI.mdb file links to tables within two database files, ARTICLE.mdb (parts data) and TDB.mdb (language text). The UI.mdb file also contains a number of queries. The database files ARTICLE.mdb and TDB.mdb are located in the DB and the LG directories respectively. Once the UI.mdb database file is created, RSWire copies forms and reports from either USER.mdb or DEFAULT.mdb located within the LIST directory. The DEFAULT.mdb will contain the default reports and forms shipped with RSWire. If you would like to create your own reports or forms, store them in USER.mdb. Pr
Main RSWire Directory Bmp Catalog Db Custom Lg Logos Dbs Db Fonts Menu Plot Program Project Syscon List System Tmp User Work
13-2
Location of TDB.mdb File
Location of ARTICLE.mdb File
Location of USER.mdb File and DEFAULT.mdb File
Location of UI.mdb File
Parts Database
UI.mdb UI.mdb is a database file located in the RS\WORK directory.
Contents of 'Work' Name
Rs Bmp Catalog Db Dbs Fonts Menu Plot Program Project Syscon Tmp User Work
Select UI.mdb File
To access the UI.mdb file, go to the RS\WORK directory and select the UI.mdb icon. The following UI: Database dialog box will appear: UI: Database Tables
ARTICLE TDB
Queries
Forms
Reports
Macros
Modules
Open Design New
The UI: Database dialog box contains five functions; Tables, Queries, Forms, Reports, Macros, and Modules. To review the links to any of these functions, select the applicable tab. 13-3
Parts Database
Tables The Tables function contains links to two files with tables, ARTICLE and TDB. These are the ARTICLE.mdb and TDB.mdb files discussed further in this section. UI: Database Tables
Queries
Forms
Reports
Macros
ARTICLE TDB
Modules
Open Design New
Note
The Open, Design, and New buttons are not functional in the Run–Time version of Access. These buttons are available in the Full version of Access only. Open – Use this button to open the selected (highlighted) table. Design – Use this button to modify the table. New – Use this button to create a new table in the database.
13-4
Parts Database
Forms The Forms function contains two forms, ARTICLE and TEXT. These forms are copied into UI.mdb from USER.mdb or DEFAULT.mdb files. Note
The Open, Design, and New buttons are not functional in the Run–Time version of Access. These buttons are available in the Full version of Access only. Open – Use this button to open the selected (highlighted) form. Design – Use this button to modify a form. New – Use this button to create a new form for the database. Article Form
UI: Database Queries
Tables
Forms
Macros
Reports
Open
Article
Design
ARTICLE
Parts Database Part Number 100A09NA3 IEC CONTACTOR Description PMG Manuf. A–B Catalog 100A09NA3 Supplier M31 Price Price_S Price_B Device Type
Article Form
Modules
0 Units 0
Discount M31
Technical Description
Date Created 04/23/96 Changed 06/05/96 Symbols M Ref. Wire W–ABCOA010 L–ABCOA010 Lay. 0 (C)over or (P)anel
Dimensions 1.81 X (in) Y (in) 2.92 3.31 Z (in) Weight[lb] Power[VA] Time Assembly Wiring
0.95 0
Sort By: PARTNUMBER
Filter By: PARTNUMBER
Filter Remove Filters
Additional Part Numbers
220VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ
MS3, CRNO
Record:
QM31
*
13-5
Parts Database
Text Form
UI: Database Tables
Queries
Forms
Reports
Macros
Modules
Open
Article Text
Design
TEXT: Form
Language DatabaseNew Text Number
Text Form
13-6
1
Find Text Number
English:
German:
French:
Spain:
Italy:
Dutch:
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Parts Database
Reports The Reports function contains links to two reports, Full “ARTICLE1” and Brief “ARTICLE1”. The full report lists all parts database information about a part. The brief report lists only specified parts database information. Note
The Open, Design, and New buttons are not functional in the Run–Time version of Access. These buttons are available in the Full version of Access only. Preview – Use this button to view the selected (highlighted) report. Design – Use this button to modify a report. New – Use this button to create a new report from the database. Article Report
UI: Database Tables
Queries
ARTICLE ARTICLE_BRIEF
Forms
Macros
Reports
Modules
Preview ARTICLE1
Design New
Parts Database Part Number
Manufacturer
Description
Catalog #
PMG
List Price
Units
Sell Price
Discount
Technical Description
100-A09NA3
A-B
0
IEC CONTACTOR
100-A09NA3
0
220VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ MS3, CRNO 100-A09NB3
Full “Article1” Report
Record:
A-B
0
*
13-7
Parts Database
UI: Database Tables
Queries
ARTICLE ARTICLE_BRIEF
Forms
Macros
Reports
Modules
Preview ARTICLE1
Design New
Parts Database Part Number
Description
Manufacturer
Technical Description 100-A09NA3 IEC CONTACTOR 220VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ
A-B MS3, CRNO
100-A09NB3 IEC CONTACTOR 440VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ
A-B MS3, CRNO
100-A09NC3 550VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ
Brief “Article1” Report
13-8
Record:
*
IEC CONTACTOR
A-B
Parts Database
Macros The Macros function contains no links to files or reports at time of installation. Macros can be defined and created after initial installation. Note
The Open, Design, and New buttons are not functional in the Run–Time version of Access. These buttons are available in the Full version of Access only. Run – Use this button to run the selected (highlighted) macro. Design – Use this button to modify a macro. New – Use this button to create a new macro for the database.
Modules The Modules function contains no links to files or reports at time of installation. Modules can be defined and created after initial installation. Note
The Open, Design, and New buttons are not functional in the Run–Time version of Access. These buttons are available in the Full version of Access only. Run – Use this button to run the selected (highlighted) module. Design – Use this button to modify a module. New – Use this button to create a new module for the database.
13-9
Parts Database
ARTICLE.mdb The ARTICLE.mdb is a database file located in the RS\DBS\DB directory.
Contents of 'Db' Name
Pr Bmp Catalog Db Custom Lg Logos Dbs Db
Select ARTICLE.mdb File
To access the ARTICLE.mdb file, go to the RS\DBS\DB directory and select the ARTICLE.mdb icon. The following ARTICLE: Database dialog box will appear: ARTICLE: Database Tables
ARTICLE DICTION
Queries
Forms
Reports
Macros
Modules
Open Design New
The ARTICLE: Database dialog box contains five functions; Tables, Queries, Forms, Reports, Macros, and Modules. To access any of these functions, select the applicable tab.
13-10
Parts Database
Tables The Tables function contains two files with tables, ARTICLE and DICTION. ARTICLE: Database Tables
ARTICLE DICTION
Queries
Forms
Reports
Macros
Modules
Open Design New
13-11
Parts Database
ARTICLE Table To select the ARTICLE table, select (highlight) the ARTICLE icon and select the Open button. The following ARTICLE: Table will appear: ARTICLE:Table
PART NUMBER DESCR SYMBOL 100-A9NA3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NB3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NC3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9ND3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NE3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NF3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NG3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NH3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NI3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NJ3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NK3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NKA3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NKD3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 Record:
MANUFACT A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B
PREFGROUP
*
The ARTICLE: Table contains records on each of the parts within the parts database.
13-12
Parts Database
DICTION Table To select the DICTION table, select (highlight) the DICTION icon and select the Open button. The following DICTION: Table will appear: DICTION:Table
DIC_NAME ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE Record:
DIC_TABLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE
DIC_FIELD PARTNUMBER DESCR SYMBOL MANUFACT PREFGROUP ORDNUMBER PRICE_S PRICE_B DISCOUNT UNITS X Y Z
DIC_INTERN partno descr symb_wir manufact prefgrp ordno price_s price_b discount units dim_x dim_y dim_z
DIC_KEY 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2007 2006 2025 2008 2011 2012 2013
*
The DICTION: Table defines the structure for each field record within the ARTICLE table.
13-13
Parts Database
TDB.mdb The TDB.mdb file is located in the RS\DB\LG directory. Rs
Contents of 'Lg' Name
Bmp Catalog Db Custom Lg Logos Dbs
Select TDB.mdb File
To access the TDB.mdb file, go to the RS\DB\LG directory and select the TDB.mdb icon. The following TDB: Database dialog box will appear: TDB: Database Tables
TEXT
Queries
Forms
Reports
Macros
Modules
Open Design New
The TDB: Database dialog box contains five functions; Tables, Queries, Forms, Reports, Macros, and Modules. To access any of these functions, select the applicable tab.
13-14
Parts Database
Tables The Tables function contains one table, TEXT. TDB: Database Tables
TEXT
Queries
Forms
Reports
Macros
Modules
Open Design New
13-15
Parts Database
TEXT Table To open the TEXT table, select (highlight) the TEXT icon and select the Open button. The following table will appear: TEXT: Table
TEXT NO 1 10 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 11 Record:
English MOTOR '.' DIRECTION MAIN SPINDL MAIN SPINDL FEED ON FEED HOLD INDEX TABLE SAFETY DOO MANUAL TOO CHECK CLAM LUBRICATION RECTIFIER
German
French
MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR BEWEGUNGS DIRECTION '.' DIR. DE MOVI HAUPTSPINDL BROCHE PRIN HAUPTSPINDL BROCHE PINC VORSCHUB S DEPART AVAN VORSCHUB H AVANCE STOF UEBERWACH CONTROLE ^P UEBERWACH CONTROLE PO WERKZEUGW CHANGEM.MA UEBERWACH CONTROLE DI STOERUNG ZE DERANGEMEN RECTIFICADO GLEICHRICHTEREDRESSEUR
*
The TEXT: Table contains records on each language database.
13-16
Spanish
Parts Database
USER.mdb and DEFAULT.mdb Once the UI.mdb database is created by RSWire, it looks for two files (USER.mdb and DEFAULT.mdb) to link forms and reports. These files contain reports and forms for data to be entered. Both files are located in the RS\Syscon\List directory. UI.mdb conditionally looks for the USER.mdb and then for the DEFAULT.mdb file. If USER.mdb exists (and contains reports or forms), UI.mdb will stop and obtain data from USER.mdb for the form and report information. If USER.mdb either exists but contains no reports or forms, or does not exist, UI.mdb will look to DEFAULT.mdb for the form and report information. RSWire currently is shipped with an empty USER.mdb file. This file is created by the user to either put their own reports and forms, or copy DEFAULT.mdb, change name to USER.mdb, and modify the reports or forms. Pr Bmp Catalog Db Dbs Fonts Menu Plot Program Project Syscon List System Tmp User Work
Contents of 'List' Name
Select USER.mdb File (If Present) Or Select DEFAULT.mdb File
13-17
Parts Database
Accessing the Parts Database As delivered, the parts database contains one ARTICLE file with a collection of sample parts data. The Manage > Parts Database pull–down menu provides functions which allow access to the parts data.
Manage Parts Database Edit Form... Edit Table... Duplicates Check
13-18
Parts Database
Parts Database Edit Form You can view and enter data about a part number using the parts database edit (Article) form. Note
The ARTICLE mdb database file is located in RS\DBS\DB. If you use metric units you may wish to edit the Article Form to change the labels for the Dimensions and Weight fields from “in.” and “lb.” to “mm”, “kg”, etc.
Note
RSWire is supplied with the Run–Time version of Access which will allow you to view and edit only the data files. If you wish to edit the Article form itself, or create a custom form, you will need to have a Full Version of Access installed on your system. To access the parts database edit form, select:
Manage Parts Database Edit Form The following form will appear: ARTICLE
Parts Database
Date Created 04/23/96 Changed 06/05/96
100A09NA3 Part Number IEC CONTACTOR Description A–B PMG Manuf. Catalog 100A09NA3
Supplier
Symbols M Ref. Wire W–ABCOA010 L–ABCOA010 Lay.
M31
Price Price_S Price_B Device Type
0
Units
0
Discount
0
(C)over or (P)anel
Dimensions 1.81 X (in) Y (in) 2.92 3.31 Z (in) Weight[lb] Power[VA] Time Assembly Wiring
0.95 0
Sort By: PARTNUMBER
Filter By: PARTNUMBER
Filter Remove Filters
M31
Technical Description
Additional Part Numbers
220VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ
MS3, CRNO
Record:
QM31
*
13-19
Parts Database
This form contains the various data fields available for each part in the database. Each time a database query is requested, Microsoft Access opens the database and provides an output based on the type of query.
Database Data Fields Part Number – This field holds the part number by which the part is identified both in the database and when entering part numbers on the schematic screen. Important
Do not include spaces in the part number. Description – Use this field to enter a description of the part. Manuf.– Use this field to enter the manufacturer’s name. Up to 15 characters are allowed. Catalog – Use this 20 character field to enter the manufacturer’s catalog part number for the part. Supplier – Use this 20 character field to enter the name of the company from which you purchase the part. PMG – Use this field to assign the part a Preferred Manufacturer’s Group (PMG) number of up to 3 characters. Each part in the database can be assigned to a preferred manufacturer’s group. These groups can consist of parts from a single manufacturer, parts from a certain supply company, etc. Once the groups are created, you can filter parts data by the PMG field so that only the parts from the selected group(s) will be listed in the Assign Part Number dialog box (the dialog box that appears when you search for part numbers from the drawing screen). Price: Price_S – Use this field to enter the selling price that you charge for the part. Price_B – Use this field to enter the billing price that the manufacturer charges for the part. Units – Use this field to enter a description of the units that the part is measured in, such as inches, millimeters, gallons, etc. These units are not taken into account in the default RSWire lists.
13-20
Parts Database
Discount – Use this field to enter the percent discount. Device Type – You can assign a device type to the part. If this is done, when the part is assigned to a symbol the device type is automatically assigned to the symbol and the Device Type selection dialog box will not be displayed. In other words, it saves a step when placing parent symbols. (You have the option of changing this automatically assigned device type when the symbol is placed.) Technical Description – Use these four fields to enter an extended description of the part. Date: Created – This field holds the date that the part data was entered in the database. Changed – This field holds the date that the part data was altered (edited). Symbols: Ref. – Use this field to enter the name of the symbol that will represent the part in schematic diagram. For example, enter the symbol name PBNO for parts that are normally open pushbuttons (JIC format). This ensures that when the symbol is used in a schematic, the part will be listed on the Assign Part Number dialog box (that allows users to select a part number). You can have many different part numbers assigned to one symbol name. If a part number applies to more than one symbol, you can enter multiple symbol names in the Ref. field separated by commas up to the maximum width of the field (example: TBC1,X1). Wire – Use this field to enter the name of a wire diagram symbol that will represent the part on wiring diagrams. (This is an optional routine that automatically generates a wiring diagram showing connection information for devices in the schematics.) Lay. – Use this field to name the symbol that will represent the part on panel layout diagrams. If no symbol is named here, the part will be shown on panel layouts as a box having the size entered in the Dimensions fields. (C)over or (P)anel – Enter a “C” or “P” to indicate whether the part is usually mounted on an enclosure door (cover) or on an inside panel. Dimensions (X, Y, Z) – Use these fields to enter the size of the part. Fields are provided for width (x), height (y), and depth (z). If only the x–coordinate is entered, the part will be represented on a panel layout as a circle having this value as its diameter (if no other symbol is named in the Lay. field). If no x or y values are entered, the user can make a box of any size in the layout mode.
13-21
Parts Database
Weight – Use this field to enter the weight of the device. Power[VA] – Use this field to enter the power requirements of the part in VA. Time: Assembly – Use this field to enter an assembly time value in minutes. Wiring – Use this field to enter a wiring time value in minutes. Additional Part Numbers – Use these four fields for additional part numbers that are associated with this part. This is useful for parts that are assemblies of multiple parts. These additional part numbers should have their own data records elsewhere in the parts database. Sort By – The dropdown list allows records to be sorted by a specific database field. The selections in the list are the internal names of the parts database fields. Filter By – This pair of fields allows you to restrict the range of parts records that are displayed. In the lower of the two fields, use the dropdown list to select the database field to which you wish the criteria to apply (part number, manufacturer, etc.). In the upper field, enter the alphanumeric string that the desired parts records must match. This can include wildcard (*) strings. When the desired criteria are entered, select the Filter button to put the filter into effect. Now only those parts records that match the entered criteria will be displayed. To remove the filter, select the Remove Filter button. Record 1 of ? Count – Displays the number of records contained within a specific regular or filtered search.
13-22
Parts Database
Add a Parts Database Record 1.
Display the parts database edit form (Manage > Parts Database > Edit Form).
2.
Select the Add Record ( >* ) button at the bottom of the form for new data entry. A blank data entry form will be displayed. Enter the desired part data.
3.
You can store the newly entered data by a.) selecting the Add Record button again, b.) displaying another part record, or c.) selecting the Save Record button (the button with the disk and pencil icon).
Undo Record You can use the Undo Record button to clear the form of any parts data that has not yet been saved (if you wish to start over). This is the button with the curved arrow and pencil icon.
13-23
Parts Database
Delete a Parts Database Record
13-24
1.
Display the parts database edit form (Manage > Parts Database > Edit Form).
2.
Display the part record that you wish to delete. See page 13-25.
3.
Select the Delete Record button (the button with the “X” icon).
4.
The software will ask, “Are you sure you wish to delete this record?” Select the Yes button to delete the record from the Article.mdb file.
Parts Database
Find a Parts Database Record 1.
In the Parts Datadabase edit form, place the cursor in the field for the type of information for which you plan to search (part number, manufacturer, etc.)
2.
Select the Find button. (This is the button with binoculars icon.) The Find and Replace dialog will appear.
3.
The Look In field will show the name of the database field that you selected in step 1. The database search will be confined to entries in this field. If you wish to include all database fields in the search, select “Article” in the Look In field.
4.
In the Find What field, enter the alphanumeric string for which you wish to search. You can use wildcard (*) searches.
5.
In the Match field select whether the search string you entered should match Any Part of the part number, the Whole part number or the Start (beginning) of the part number. (This step is not necessary if you entered a wildcard string in the previous step.)
6.
Select the Find Next button to find the next part number record that matches your search criteria.
13-25
Parts Database
Filtering Parts Database Records The Parts Database edit form contains filtering functions that allow you to narrow down the range of parts records that are displayed. This makes it easier to find and view parts data that matches a given set of criteria. Filter By: PARTNUMBER
Filter
Filtering functions
Remove Filters
The two Filter By fields allow you to restrict the range of parts records that are displayed. 1.
In the lower of the two fields, use the dropdown list to select the database field to which you wish the criteria to apply (part number, manufacturer, etc.).
2.
In the upper field, enter the alphanumeric string that the desired parts records must match. This can include wildcard (*) strings.
3.
When the desired criteria are entered, select the Filter button to put the filter into effect. Now only those parts records that match the entered criteria will be displayed.
You can add additional criteria to the current filter by repeating the above steps. To remove the filter, select the Remove Filter button. More complex filters can be created by using the Edit Filter button (the button with the filter and pencil icon). This displays a table where multiple filter criteria can be entered with conditional statements. Refer to MS–Access documentation for more information.
13-26
Parts Database
Edit a Parts Database Record To edit individual parts records using the Parts Database edit form.
Note
1.
Display the desired parts database record.
2.
Enter the desired new data in the appropriate field(s).
3.
Select the Save Record button. (This is the button with the disk and pencil icon.)
The new data also will be saved if you display a different parts record.
13-27
Parts Database
Table View of Database You may choose to edit parts data using the table view of the database. New data can be entered into a table using the Edit function within Access. To add a new record to the database, select:
Manage Parts Database Edit Table The following TEXT table will appear: ARTICLE:Table
PART NUMBER DESCR SYMBOL 100-A9NA3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NB3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NC3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9ND3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NE3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NF3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NG3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NH3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NI3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NJ3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NK3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NKA3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NKD3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 Record:
MANUFACT A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B
PREFGROUP
*
The columns in the table correspond to the data fields in the parts database edit form.
13-28
Parts Database
Database Manipulation This section provides information for the advanced RSWire user who wishes to work with the structure of the RSWire parts database. It is vital that complete backup copies of database information be made before attempting to alter the structure or content of the database.
13-29
Parts Database
Database Manipulation Outside of RSWire The form for Parts Data entry and Editing work well for manipulation of data within RSWire, but some users may wish to manipulate the parts database outside of RSWire using a separate Database Management System (DBMS). The reasons for doing this vary with each company. Some possible reasons for working with the database outside of RSWire are: 1.
Data entry may be done outside of the RSWire environment by clerical personnel who have data entry experience but no CAD knowledge.
2.
The users can use the DBMS that they are the most experienced with.
3.
The data entry interface can be customized by the use of the chosen DBMS tools which may be more familiar than dialog box modification.
4.
DBMS programming tools such as macros, scripts and database application languages can be used to manipulate data and automate data entry.
5.
The RSWire parts database can be linked to a company–wide DBMS parts management / inventory system.
6.
Actions can be performed on the database which are not available through RSWire (spell checking, search and replace, etc.).
7.
External manipulation can help to minimize limitations of table locking. (AutoCAD does not support record locking.)
Editing the Database Outside of RSWire The DBMS you choose depends on the import / export functionality of the DBMS and the format that you wish to use for your parts table. (The terms import and export are used because .MDB may not be the native format of your DBMS and an import / export function may be needed. If your software does use .MDB directly you would simply use a file open or save.)
13-30
Parts Database
If you choose to stay with the default format of MS–Access you need to be sure that your software will do a true Access or .mdb export. This means the database structure MUST be kept intact and the structure exported must match what is imported. If you have any doubt, back up the DB directory. Import the tables ARTICLE and DICTION from the ARTICLE.MDB file and try every manipulation that you intend to perform (add, delete, sort, edit, etc.). Export the database back to RSWire and thoroughly check the database’s integrity. You may be able to use a spreadsheet software as well as true DBMS software, although this may limit the size of the files that you may need to work with. Be especially careful of spreadsheet programs such as Excel which will change the field width when you graphically widen a column to view its entire contents. To read the parts database simply open the ARTICLE.MDB and read it into your DBMS. The user may now make any modifications to the table as long as they do not change the structure. The ARTICLE.MDB can then be saved.
13-31
Parts Database
Changing Field Sizes The simplest restructuring of the database is to change the field width. Always backup your database file before restructuring! Losses of data can occur which become un–retrievable. The first step is to bring the tables from ARTICLE.MDB into a DBMS as discussed above. Use the tools within the DBMS to modify the field desired. Save the file. The DICTION table has the following structure: DIC_NAME – Database Name used in RSWire (Several “virtual databases” may be created from one Physical table.) DIC_TABLE – Database .MDB file (Table) name DIC_FIELD – Database structure field name DIC_INTERN – Variable name used within RSWire for dialog boxes and lists Note
All entries to DIC_INTERN must be at least 4 characters long. Otherwise, the field will not appear in the list. DIC_KEY – A field number used internally by RSWire. The range is 2000 to 2099. This number determines the order of the fields listed in the Assign Part Number dialog box.) DIC_LENGTH – The character width of the field. DIC_TYPE – The type of information stored in the Field Database Structure 0 – String (Characters) 1 – Integer (Whole Numbers) 2 – Floating Point (Decimals) DIC_PREC – Precision (Not used at this time.) DIC_ITYPE – Type of index (Not used at this time.) DIC_INDEX – The name of the .NDX file in which the field is the key for the index. (Not used at this time.) DIC_DCL – The name of the dialog box for entry in the database within RSWire. (Not used at this time.)
13-32
Parts Database
In the DIC_FIELD column, search for the field name that you wish to change the size of. In the DIC_LENGTH field for the record change the number to the new field width. Note that some fields may be listed more than once in the DICTION table with different DIC_NAME entries. This is because RSWire may internally divide one physical database file into several tables and an individual entry may act as a field in several of these virtual tables. Be sure that you change all of the entries to match the same width as that which is actually used in the MDB file. After the edits are complete, save the file. Now that RSWire will be able to use the new column widths to read the database and handle it internally it is necessary to allow the users to make use of the new width. This will require the modification of all forms and List Generator files to reflect the new field widths. Typically the files to be modified are ARTICLE form and several of the parts related List Generator files. An easy way to get a list of the files that need changing is to use a utility such as Norton File Find to find all occurrences of the DIC_INTERN entries for the records that were modified in the DICTION table.
13-33
Parts Database
Adding Fields To add or delete fields the process is the same as for modifying fields. First you read in the ARTICLE table with a DBMS and restructure the database with the new fields. Then edit the DICTION table. You will have to insert new lines for the new fields. The position in the file where you place the new records does not matter. For the sake of clarity you should use the same order as the actual database field order. Add the internal variables into the appropriate list generator and files. Example: Three new fields are needed for parts information; one floating point, one integer and one string. New fields: Name
Type
Length
MY_INT
new integer field
4
MY_FLOAT
floating point field
6
MY_STRING
new character field
5
1.
Enter the DBMS and add the three fields to the ARTICLE table. Give the new fields the appropriate width and type.
2.
Modify the DICTION table within the DBMS. Add the corresponding 3 rows to the table:
DIC_NAME
DIC_TABLE
DIC_FIELD
DIC_INTERN
DIC_KEY
DIC_LENGTH
ARTICLE
ARTICLE
MY_INT
int1
2099
4
ARTICLE
ARTICLE
MY_FLOAT
float
2098
6
ARTICLE
ARTICLE
MY_STRING
string
2097
5
DIC_INDEX
DIC_DCL
DIC_TYPE
DIC_PREC
DIC_ITYPE
1
0
0
db_rec
2
0
0
db_rec
0
0
0
db_rec
The positions of the new columns and the new rows don’t matter. Save the file and enter RSWire. 3.
13-34
Create a new form within Access.
Parts Database
4.
Edit the description file of the database list description (db2.lst): Add three lines in the part data section: |Int |Float |String
: : :
?int1 ?float ?string
| | |
When the list is used the new fields will be displayed in the list.
13-35
Parts Database
Database Complete Restructure Through the use of the methods already discussed it seems possible to completely restructure the RSWire database to match one that the customer may already have. This attractive proposition would allow the customer to have real time interaction between RSWire and his other parts inventory software. Unfortunately there are two roadblocks to this goal. The first is the already mentioned limit to record locking. In most true DBMS’s, locking is accomplished on a record level. This means that any number of people can be using the database simultaneously to do edits, lists, data entries, etc. The only limitation is that the software will not allow two people to modify the same record at the same time. In RSWire, whole tables are locked at the same time. This makes the system difficult to use in a large multi–user environment where several people may need to change part information at the same time. If you must have this type of data entry flexibility, the only solution at this time is to maintain the database using the current DBMS software and use a script or custom software to transfer the parts information in a separate parts database file to be used by RSWire on a read–only basis. The second limitation to tying directly to an existing database is that there are a few fields which must be left alone for RSWire to function correctly. These fields are:
symb_ref prefgrp partno dim_x dim_y addparton symb_lay descr
These fields must be left alone with regard to DIC_FIELD and DIC_INTERN.
13-36
Parts Database
Previewing the Parts Database To access the RSWire parts database, and view the detailed data, select:
Reports Libraries Parts Full Data Preview The following Parts Database dialog box will appear.
Parts Database Part Number
Manufacturer
Description
Catalog #
PMG
List Price Units
Device Type
Sell Price Discount
(C)over or (P)anel X
Technical Description
Ref. Symbol Wire. Symbol Lay. Symbol Weight Y
Z
Power
Assembly Time Created Wiring Time
Changed
Additional Part Numbers
100-A09NA3
A-B
0
IEC CONTACTOR
100-A09NA3
0
M31
M
0
W-ABC0A010 1.81
2.92
L-ABC0A010 3.31
0.95
04/23/96
0
06/05/96
0.95
04/23/96
220VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ MS3, CRNO
QM31
100-A09NB3
A-B
0
IEC CONTACTOR
100-A09NB3
0
M31
M
0
W-ABC0A010 1.81
2.92
L-ABC0A010 3.31
0
440VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ MS3, CRNO
QM31
100-A09NC3
A-B
0
IEC CONTACTOR
100-A09NC3
0
M31
M
0
W-ABC0A010 1.81
2.92
L-ABC0A010 3.31
0.95
04/23/96
0
550VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ MS3, CRNO
QM31
100-A09ND3
A-B
0
IEC CONTACTOR
100-A09ND3
0
M31 0
M
W-ABC0A010 1.81
2.92
L-ABC0A010 3.31
0.95
04/23/96
0
110VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ MS3, CRNO
Wednesday, December 30, 1998
QM31
Page 1 of 898
The Parts Database list in the Full Data Preview function is viewed in a landscape format.
13-37
Parts Database
To access the RSWire parts database, and view a more concise data listing, select:
Reports Libraries Parts Brief Data Preview The following Database Data dialog box will appear.
Parts Database Part Number
Description
Manufacturer
Catalog #
A-B
100-A9NA3
Technical Description 100-A09NA3 IEC CONTACTOR 220VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ
MS3, CRNO 100-A09NB3 IEC CONTACTOR 440VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ
MS3, CRNO 100-A09NC3 IEC CONTACTOR 550VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ
100-A9NG3 QM31 100-A9NH3 QM31 100-A9NI3 QM31 100-A9NJ3 QM31 100-A9NK3 QM31 100-A9NKA3 QM31
A-B MS3, CRNO
Wednesday, December 30, 1998
QM31
A-B MS3, CRNO
100-A09NKD3 IEC CONTACTOR 24VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50/60HZ
100-A9NF3
A-B MS3, CRNO
100-A09NKA3 IEC CONTACTOR 48VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50/60HZ
QM31
A-B MS3, CRNO
100-A09NK3 IEC CONTACTOR 24VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ
100-A9NE3
A-B MS3, CRNO
100-A09NJ3 IEC CONTACTOR 24VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 60HZ
QM31
A-B MS3, CRNO
100-A09NI3 IEC CONTACTOR 415VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ
100-A9ND3
A-B MS3, CRNO
100-A09NH3 IEC CONTACTOR 440VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 60HZ
QM31
A-B MS3, CRNO
100-A09NG3 IEC CONTACTOR 440VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 60HZ
100-A9NC3
A-B MS3, CRNO
100-A09NF3 IEC CONTACTOR 277VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 60HZ
QM31
A-B MS3, CRNO
100-A09NE3 IEC CONTACTOR 380VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 60HZ
100-A9NB3
A-B MS3, CRNO
100-A09ND3 IEC CONTACTOR 110VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ
QM31
A-B
100-A9NKD3 QM31 Page 1 of 321
The Parts Database list in the Brief Data Preview function is viewed in a portrait format. 13-38
Parts Database
Printing the Parts Database Printing from MS–Access Note
Printing options will vary depending on which version of Access (Run–Time or Full) is on your system. You can verify which version of Access you have by using the Help > About Microsoft Access drop–down menu. The Run–Time version will allow printing of the complete list only. The Full version will allow printing of the complete list, range of pages, or the current page. Use the following procedure to print the Full Data Preview list or the Brief Data Preview list from Access: 1.
Open the project.
2.
Select either the Reports > Libraries > Parts > Full Data Preview or the Reports > Libraries > Parts > Brief Data Preview function.
3.
Select the page you want to print.
4.
Select File > Print pull–down menu in Access. The Print dialog box will appear.
5.
Select one of the printing options: all pages, range of pages, or current page.
6.
Select the OK button.
Once printing is complete, exit Access. You will return to RSWire.
13-39
Parts Database
Printing from RSWire In order to print the complete Full Data Preview list or Brief Data Preview list from RSWire , you must perform the Reports > Libraries > Parts > Brief Data Printout or the Reports > Libraries > Parts > Full Data Printout function. Select:
Reports Libraries Parts Full Data Printout or
Reports Libraries Parts Brief Data Printout Access will open, the Printing dialog box will appear, and the complete list will print. Note
Selecting one of these functions will result in the printing of the complete parts database list. Some lists could be over 850 pages. If only a specified range of pages are required, refer to the Printing from Access section. Once printing is complete, exit Access. You will return to RSWire.
13-40
List Generator Configuration
14
List Generator Configuration
The RSWire list generator generates information reports and lists with a variable format. The format of a list is determined by a list description file. These files are stored in the directory RS\SYSCON\LIST. When one of the RSWire list functions is executed (from one of the Reports submenus), the system uses a list description file to determine which data are used in the listing and how they are positioned.
List Generator RSWire Project Information
List File (provides format)
Formatted Information Listing
A number of list description files are provided with RSWire. The user can also create custom list files. Caution: If you create your own list description files, keep a backup copy of your new files on a separate disk. Do not edit the existing list generator files as these will be overwritten when you update to a new software version. Instead, make a copy of list generator files under a different name and edit the copy. The following sections are included:
Assigning List Generator Files List File Structure Sample List File Sort Criteria Function Using Variable Data in Lists List Data Formatting Arithmetic Operations With Variables String Manipulations Static Filter for Lists Tab Formatting in Lists
14-1
List Generator Configuration
14-2
List Generator Variables Project Lists Database Lists Wire Lists Parts Lists Field Wiring Lists Error Checking Lists
List Generator Configuration
Assigning List Generator Files If you create a custom list generator file you must assign this file to the appropriate report or list function within RSWire. 1.
To assign list generator files, select:
Tools System Settings 2.
Select the Reports: Description Files tab. The following dialog box will appear. X
System Settings Report Settings
Reports: Description Files
Command Protec
Printer Configuration
List Name
File Name
Printer
Conn. Conn. List ListI/O I/OList List Conn. List Wire Diagram List Conn. List Wire Label List Conn. List Wiring List Fld. Wire Cable + Wire List Fld. Wire Cable List Fld. Wire Terminal List Fld. Wire Terminal Strip List Gen. Info Device Types [Brief] Gen. Info Device Types [Detailed] Gen. Info Macro Directory Gen. Info Page Formats
PLC.LST PLC.LST WIREDG.LST WIRELAB.LST WIRE.LST FLDWIRE.LST CABLE.LST TERM.LST TSTRIP.LST DEVICE2.LST DEVICE1.LST MACRO.LST FORMAT.LST
Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default
Conn. List I/O List
Select List Here
PLC.LST
Printer
Default
1
2
3
OK
4
Cancel
5
Save
File
Enter Filename Here
Help...
After selecting the desired list name, you can enter the new file name in the field below the list. You can also select a printer for each list. Select the Save button to save the assignment for future work sessions.
14-3
List Generator Configuration
The following list generator files are provided with the software. The default directory for these files is RS\SYSCON\LIST. (See next page for comma–separated “CS” list generator files.) List File
14-4
Description
BRADY.LST
Brady label list
CABLE.LST
Cable list
DB1.LST
Database list (brief)
DB2.LST
Database list (detailed)
DEVICE1.LST
Device type list (detailed)
DEVICE2.LST
Device type list (brief)
DEVWP.LST
Device without parent list
DIM.LST
Parts dimension list
FLDWIRE.LST
Field wiring list
FORMAT.LST
Page format list
INST.LST
Installation list
JOB.LST
Job costing list
MACRO.LST
Macro list
MASTER.LST
Master parts list
P_O.LST
Purchase order list
PAGE1.LST
Page list (brief)
PAGE2.LST
Page list (detailed)
PAGE3.LST
Project all list (project paths/directories)
PAGE4.LST
Alternative format page list
PARTS.LST
Bill of Materials
PLC.LST
PLC (programmable logic controller) list
PROJECT1.LST
Project list (brief)
PROJECT2.LST
Project list (detailed)
SIGNAL.LST
Signal list
SYMBOL.LST
Symbol list
TERM.LST
Terminal list
TEXT1.LST
Language text list (single language)
TEXT2.LST
Language text list (multi-language)
TSTRIP.LST
Terminal strip list
WIRE.LST
Wire list
WIRELAB.LST
Wire labels
List Generator Configuration
The following list generator files produce comma separated lists (qualified with ” ”) which can be imported into a spreadsheet program. List File
Description
CSCABLE.LST
Comma separated cable list
CSDB1.LST
Comma separated Database list (brief)
CSDB2.LST
Comma separated Database list (detailed)
CSDEVICE1.LST
Comma separated Device type list (detailed) Comma separated Device type list (brief)
CSDEVICE2.LST CSDEVWP.LST CSDIM.LST
Comma separated Device without parent list Comma separated Parts dimension list
CSFLDWIR.LST
Comma separated field wire list
CSFORMAT.LST
Comma separated Page format list
CSINST.LST
Comma separated Installation list
CSJOB.LST
Comma separated Job costing list
CSMACRO.LST
Comma separated Macro list
CSMASTER.LST
Comma separated master list
CSP_O.LST
Comma separated purchase order list
CSPAGE1.LST
Comma separated Page list (brief)
CSPAGE2.LST
Comma separated Page list (detailed)
CSPARTS.LST
Comma separated parts list
CSPLC.LST
Comma separated PLC list
CSPROJECT1.LST
Comma separated Project list (brief)
CSPROJECT2.LST
Comma separated Project list (detailed)
CSSIGNAL.LST
Comma separated Signal list
CSSYMBOL.LST
Comma separated Symbol list
CSTERM.LST
Comma separated Terminal list
CSTSTRIP.LST
Comma separated Terminal strip list
CSWIRE.LST
Comma separated wire list
14-5
List Generator Configuration
List File Structure The list file is organized in blocks of lines. Each block has a specific purpose as described below. These blocks are always output “en bloc”, in other words, without page breaks. The following blocks must be listed in every list description file: Control sequence:
Block Description:
!lh
List header (beginning of first page)
!ph
Page header (beginning of all subsequent pages)
!d1
Data block (output of data)
!pf
Page footer (end of all pages with the exception of the last page)
!lf
List footer (end of the last page)
The following is a sample list file, with an example of the listing that is generated from the list file.
14-6
List Generator Configuration
Sample List File (TSTRIP.LST)
List Header (first page)
Page Header (2nd page, and Following) Data Block Page Filler Page Footer List Footer (Last Page)
!lh 0 First Page Header –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Terminal strip list Date : ?date Page : ?pgno | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Project : ?project * ?addr01 | | Description: ?title01 * ?addr02 | | Drawing–No.: ?title02 * ?addr03 | | Job–Number : ?title03 * ?addr04 | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Number | Terminal strip | %3.3s ?pgno %.22s ?title01 %.22s ?title02 %.22s ?title03 %.33s ?addr01 %.33s ?addr02 %.33s ?addr03 %.33s ?addr04 !ph 0 Second Page Header (all following page headers) –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– * Terminal strip list Project: ?project Date : ?date Page : ?pgno* –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Number | Terminal strip | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– !d1 1 Database | ?count | ?install&?location&?strip | !fill 0 | | !pf 0 Page Footer –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | continued on page ?nextpgno | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– !lf 0 End of List ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
14-7
List Generator Configuration
Sample List Generated from the List File –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Terminal strip list Date : 02.20.99 Page : 1 | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Project : PROJECT * Company Name | | Description: SAMPLE PROJECT * Company’s Address | | Drawing–No.: 1000 * City, State Zip | | Job–Number : NONE * Phone Number | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Number | Terminal strip | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | 24 | =LINE1+JBOX–TB1 | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | 6 | =LINE1+PANEL–TB1 | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | 18 | =LINE1+PANEL–TB2 | ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
In each block of the list file, text that will not change is entered as it should appear in the listing. RSWire variables are entered as a ? followed by the variable name. When the list is generated, the variable is replaced with the appropriate piece of data from the project. See page 14-29 for lists of available variables. Also see page 14-14 for information on formatting the appearance of variable data in the listing. List Header Block – This block specifies the information that will appear at the top of the first page of the listing. In the example list file on the previous page, the header block begins with the positioning of the various fields and descriptions of these fields. Below this, the field size of the variables are defined. For example, “%.22s ?title01” means that variable ?title01, the project description, is a string of which a maximum of 22 characters will be displayed. See page 14-14 for more information on formatting variables. Page Header Block – Specifies the page header that will appear at the top of the second and all subsequent pages. In the example file, the page header has been configured to display the project name (?project), the date (?date), and the page number (?pgno). Data Block – This block specifies the main content of the listing. In the example file, the variable ?termno (Quantity of terminal blocks) is specified, followed by variables ?install, ?location, and ?strip (terminal block installation, location and device ID).
14-8
List Generator Configuration
Page Filler Block – (Optional) If the user requires that page and list footers are always positioned at the lower edge of the page, the output block “page filler” should be listed in the list description file. The control sequence for the page filler block is “!fill”. This block must only contain one line. It is output repeatedly so that the pages end precisely with the final line of the page or list footer. Note
When outputting a list, in some circumstances, only one page with a large number of lines will be created. In order to avoid the generation of the corresponding number of fill lines, in such a case, the list generator will ignore the page filler. Page Footer Block – Specifies what will appear at the bottom of every page except the last page of the listing. In the example file, the text “continued on page” is specified, followed by variable ?nextpgno which represents the next page number. List Footer Block – Specifies what appears at the end of the last page of the listing.
Rules for list files
The beginning of each block is signaled by a control sequence composed of an exclamation mark and a block identifier. It is essential that the control sequences begin in the first column. The end of each block is signaled either by the beginning of the following block or by the end of the file. Each line must be completed with a carriage return. If the output of a block is not required, it must nevertheless be listed (otherwise an error message will appear), but it may be specified with 0 output lines. In some lists, provision is made for additional output blocks. These must be listed in the corresponding description files.
Other List File Functions Page Break – Normally, the list generator automatically controls page breaks. Following the last block which will fit in full on the page started, the output of the page footer is activated. If the user requires a new page to begin after each group of data, this can be achieved by adding the letter “n” to the control sequence !d1. Example: Control sequence:
Description:
!d1
Data block is output with maximum page utilization.
!d1n
Page break prior to output of the data block.
!h1
Headline is output if block output before is not page header.
!h1n
Headline is output only on the first page of the list, later on only a page break is initiated.
14-9
List Generator Configuration
Caution: The unconditional page break must not be used for list headers, list footers, page headers and page footers.
Page Counter Variables – The list generator has two counters that keep track of:
The number of the current page The number of the following page
Output of page numbers is initiated by the variable ?pgno (current page of list) or ?nextpgno (next page of list). Recommended method: use ?pgno in list and page headers; use ?nextpgno in page footers (“continued on page ?nextpgno”). Consecutive Number – The list generator holds a range of indices which can be output in every list at any given point. The starting value for the indices is 1; the expression of an index automatically leads to its incrementation. These indices can be used, for example, for numbering items in the list. The following variables may be specified: Variable:
Description:
?ix1
Index 1
?ix.1
Index 1.1; is reset in the event of incrementation of index 1
?ix..1
Index 1.2; is reset in the event of incrementation of index 1 or 1.1
?ix2
Index 2
?ix3
Index 3
Suppress Individual Lines – Occasionally, when replacing variables, the list generator will access strings with a length of 0. It is possible to suppress such lines. For this purpose, the control sequence ?nopr should be entered at any point in the list description file. The line thus marked will be suppressed if only zero strings are accessed during data access. Control sequence: ?nopr
14-10
Description: Line is suppressed
List Generator Configuration
List to File – When outputting a list to a disk file, the file path is generated automatically. However, automatic generation can be prevented via the entry of the control block !outfile at the end of the list file. The control sequence !outfile or !outfile ? will cause the system to request path/filename for the file. The sequence !outfile <path/filename> will automatically save the file to <path/filename> Control sequence:
Description:
!outfile
request filename for list
!outfile? <path/filename>
save list as <path/filename>
Sort Criteria Function The user can place sort statements in the list generator files which specify variables by which the list will be sorted. This sorting will only occur when the Sort On toggle is selected in the Report Settings dialog box (Tools > System Settings > Report Settings tab). X
System Settings Report Settings
Filter
OFF
Reports: Description Files
Printer Configuration
Sort
Command Protec
Output
Screen
OFF
Printer File
Sort Toggles
ON
Project
ON
Interactive Graphic Output
OK
Cancel
Save
Help...
14-11
List Generator Configuration
When the Sort Off toggle is selected, sorting occurs in default order. In the list file on the following page (P_O.LST), the sort criterion is found at the end of the file and is identified by the key phrase “!sort”. Following the sort command is the “!h2” descriptor identifying the data block to be sorted and the variable name (?manufact) to be used in the static sort method. Also specified is a numeric constant (0) which describes the sorting method. These numeric constants are defined as follows: Sort Constants Sort Mode
Ascending
Descending
Alphabetical
[0]
[1]
Ignore Case
[2]
[3]
Numerical
[4]
[5]
Mixed: Alpha + Num.
[6]
[7]
Date
[8]
[9]
New Page
[n]
Therefore, in the following P_O.LST example the list would be sorted by the information in the !h2 block by manufacturer name in alphabetical order. The inclusion of the “n” switch indicates that a new page should be started for each manufacturer.
14-12
List Generator Configuration !lh 0 First Page Header ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Purchase Order List Date: ?date Page: ?pgno| ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Project Name: ?project | ?addr01 | | Install. Name: ?title01 | ?addr02 | | Drawing No.: ?title03 | ?addr03 | | Job Number: ?title02 | ?addr04 | ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Part No. Qty. Description Catalog No. Manufacturer | %3.3s ?pgno %.24s ?title01 %.24s ?title02 %.24s ?title03 %.32s ?addr01 %.32s ?addr02 %.32s ?addr03 !ph 0 Second Page Header (all following page headers) ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Purchase Order List Project: ?project Date: ?date Page: ?pgno| ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Part No. Qty. Description Catalog No. Manufacturer | %3.3s ?pgno !h2 1 Database ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | ?partno ?quant ?descr ?ordno ?manufact | | ?nopr ?tech01 | | ?nopr ?tech02 | | ?nopr ?tech03 | | ?nopr ?tech04 | %–14.14s ?partno %–6.6s ?quant %–21.21s ?descr %–12.12s ?ordno %–13.13s ?manufact %.48s ?tech01 %.48s ?tech02 %.48s ?tech03 %.48s ?tech04 !d1 2 | | | ?ins01 ?ins02 ?ins03 ?ins04 ?ins05 ?ins06 ?ins07 ?ins08 | | ?loc01 ?loc02 ?loc03 ?loc04 ?loc05 ?loc06 ?loc07 ?loc08 | | ?did01 ?did02 ?did03 ?did04 ?did05 ?did06 ?did07 ?did08 | !fill 0 Fill Command | | !pf 0 Page footer ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | continued on page ?nextpgno | ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– !lf 0 End of list ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– !sort !h2 ?manufact 0n !outfile ?
14-13
List Generator Configuration
Using Variable Data in Lists The list description file contains references to data assigned in the program. These references (? values) are composed of a question mark and a variable name, for example ?date. The list generator replaces the string ?date in the output list with the current date. Because the date comprises 8 characters, the 6 characters following ?date in the list description file are ignored and are overwritten in the output list. Note
The variables that can be accessed by each list are limited. If an attempt is made to access variables that are not valid for a given list then it is possible for nonsense values to appear in the output list (see page 14-29 for lists of the variables available for each type of list). The “&” Separator – For many variables, the list generator will access values of different lengths. If these data are to be written consecutively in flush format, the symbol “&” should be added to the data identifier to ensure that the first value does not write over the second. The following examples show various methods of separating the values. Where:
Note
14-14
?title01 is replaced by Installation12 ?title02 is replaced by 0815 ?title03 is replaced by 4711 Control sequence:
?title01?title02
Produces output:
Installa0815
Control sequence:
?title01&?title02
Produces output:
Installa120815
Control sequence:
?title01&?title02&?title03
Produces output:
Installation1208154711
Control sequence:
?title01&/?title02&/?title03
Produces output:
Installation12/0815/4711
Control sequence:
?title01& / ?title02& / ?title03
Produces output:
Installation12 / 0815 / 4711
– the “&” character must be directly after the data identifier – all symbols between & and ? will be inserted flush – if there is no ? after the &, all symbols until the end of the line will be inserted in flush format
List Generator Configuration
List Data Formatting As a general rule, the data in the lists are output left–aligned. It is also possible to change the output to other formats including right–aligned. Reformatting is conducted separately for each output block. Format specifications are listed below the last output line of the output block in question. Each format specification is in its own line, terminated by a carriage return. The formatting instruction is identified by its leading percentage symbol %. The formatting instruction is followed by the data identification number, separated at least by a blank. Note
The formatting instruction must begin in the first column.
Example format instruction %10.2f
%
Indicates A Format Specification
10
Field Width
.
2
Number Of Digits To The Right of Decimal Point (Floating Point) Or Number Of Characters Displayed
f
Indicates Format Of Value
If no field width value is given, as many characters will be displayed as is necessary to show the value. Note
Most listings will require a field width to establish columns. A minus sign preceding the field width value will cause the listing to be left–aligned. Examples:
Note
In the following examples, colons have been used to show the beginning and end of the string; these are not output by the list generator. a.
String output:
An “s” at the end of the format instruction represents a string.
14-15
List Generator Configuration
Format instr.:
Result:
%5s
:EXAMPLE1:
%-5s
:EXAMPLE1:
%10s
: EXAMPLE1:
%-10s
:EXAMPLE1 :
%10.5s
:
%-10.5s
:EXAMP
%.5s
:EXAMP:
b.
EXAMP: :
Output as whole number: (E.g.: 123)
A “d” at the end of the format instruction represents a whole number value. Format instr.:
Result:
%d
:123:
%10d
:
123:
%10.4d
:
0123:
%-10.2d
:123
%-10.4d
:0123
%.2d
:123:
%.4d
:0123:
c.
: :
Output as floating point number: (E.g.: 123.321)
A “f” at the end of the format instruction represents a floating point number. Format instr.:
14-16
Result:
%f
:123.321000:
%10.2f
: 123.32:
%10.4f
: 123.3210:
%-10.2f
:123.32 :
%-10.4f
:123.3210 :
%.2f
:123.32:
%.4f
:123.3210:
List Generator Configuration
Arithmetic Operations With Variables By means of arithmetic operations, it is possible to import additional information into the lists from the data defined in RSWire. For this purpose, the list generator provides two types of variables:
Type i (integer) variables for whole numbers Type f (float) variables for floating point numbers
Expression in the list description file: Variable:
Meaning:
?i1
1. Whole number variable
?i2
2. Whole number variable
?f1
1. Floating point variable
?f2
2. Floating point variable
Up to 30 of each type of variable are allowed. Formatting List Generator Variables Equations must exist in the control sequence block where the variable is defined. Formatting instructions for variables must be located at the end of the block, after all the output lines. They are likewise identified by the leading percentage symbol. Whole number variables must be formatted using the conversion symbol d, and floating point variables using the characters ?f. Examples: %d
?i1
%f
?f1
%4.2f
?f2
Value assignment to List Generator Variables Values can be assigned to the variables via expressions following the corresponding format specification. These expressions are composed of a sequence of operands and operators.
14-17
List Generator Configuration
Permissible operands: ?c
Purpose: constants
(no character)
RSWire variable
?i
whole number variable
?f
floating point variable
Permissible operators:
Function:
+
for addition
-
for subtraction
*
for multiplication
/
for division
Examples: %d ? i1 ?c4*25 %d ?i2 ?i2+?i1 %f ?f1 ? i1*?i1*?c3.14
Note
Effect: The list generator variable ?i1 is allocated the value of the constant 4 multiplied by the RSWire variable 25. The value of the list generator variable ?i1 is added to the list generator variable ?i2. ?f1 is allocated the approximate value of the circle area with a radius of ?i1.
– The starting value for all variables is zero. – All variables can be freely assigned in all List Generator lists. – The expressions are processed sequentially; there are no operator priorities (no point–before–dash rule) – All data are converted to the type of variable to which they are assigned (for floating point data, floating point variables are used in some circumstances, even though no places after the point are outputted) – Do not forget the character “c” before constants. – Expressions are processed in the order in which they are listed in the list description file (exception: brackets, see below.)
Example of a list description: The database supplies:
14-18
The part number under data variable ?partno The quantity used under data variable ?quant The list price under data variable ?price_b
List Generator Configuration
This information should be extended by the total item price and the overall costs. List description: !lh Calculation list !ph !d1 Part number : ?partno Quantity : ?quant List price : ?price_b Total price : ?f1 %5.2f ?price_b %5.2f ?f1 ?quant*?price_b %f ?f2 ?f2+?f1 !pf !lf The sum of overall costs is: ?f2 %.2f ?f2 Caution: In this example, the overall costs (?f2) are calculated in data block !d1, but not printed until the list footer !lf. Irrespective of the order of the value assignments listed under the print lines of the data block !d1, the value is not assigned to ?f2 until all variables printed in block !d1 have been allocated their values.
Parentheses Not all calculation formulae can be transformed in such a way that sequential processing displays the required result. Example: The user wishes to calculate the overall area of all devices in an installation in the dimensions list. Variable for overall installation area:
?f11
Variable for x dimension coordinate:
?dim_x
Variable for y dimension coordinate:
?dim_y
The following actions must be executed:
Initialize the variable ?f11 with 0 (in installation header !h2) Add the individual areas to ?f11 (in data set !d1) Output the variables ?f11 (in installation footer !f2)
14-19
List Generator Configuration
Problems will occur when adding up in the data block; according to the rules outlined above, the instruction in the data block must be as follows: %f ?f11 ?price_s * ?units + ?f11 However, this will not produce the desired result. The list generator will assign the first operand, ?price_s, to the variable ?f11 when processing the expression. This means that the sum of all areas formerly calculated will be overwritten, and instead of this, the double area of the most recent device will appear in ?f11. The solution to this situation is to use parentheses. In order to achieve the required result, the instruction should therefore be as follows: %f
?f11
?f11 + (?price_s * ?units)
The parentheses may also be nested, but note that no error message will appear if the bracketing is incorrect. Minimum/Maximum Determination With the aid of the comparative operators, it is possible to determine extreme values of RSWire variables and list generator variables. The greater than symbol “>” serves as maximum determination, and the less than symbol “<” as minimum determination. Caution: The list generator does not recognize the intended use of a variable for extreme value determination and initializes all list generator variables with zero. Accordingly, the variables must be set “manually” in the list header to values beyond the expected values.
14-20
List Generator Configuration
Example: !lh
%f
f2
. . . c99999 . . .
!d1 Item no.: ?partno Depth : ?ordno %f f1 f1>?ordno assignment %f f2 f2
Conditional value Conditional value
?f1 ?f2
In the first line, with the comment “conditional value assignment” the value of f1 is compared with the value of the RSWire variable ?ordno. If the latter value is greater, it is assigned to f1; otherwise, no action is initiated. This conditional assignment is repeated until the data block !d1 is output. Once all data blocks have been output, the maximum of the depths is printed in the list footer. The same applies analogously to the processing of f2. Note
In the case of aborted lists (screen output), only the extreme values of the output section of list are determined, as the arithmetic operations do not take place until a block is output.
14-21
List Generator Configuration
String Manipulations As outlined above, the strings present in RSWire may be output in a formatted form. In order to be able to cut the beginning of a string, another mechanism of the list generator connected prior to formatting must be initiated. The list generator provides memory space for 30 manipulated strings which can be re–allocated in every list. Output of strings (in this case list generator strings) is conducted as follows: Data ID:
Meaning:
?s1
1. List Generator string
?s2
2. List Generator string
?s3
3. List Generator string
:
:
The contents of all list generator strings are pre–assigned the string length 0. These contents may be modified by manipulation terms which are appended to the formatting instructions described above. Example: The RSWire variable ?ftext contains the string: “1st line^2nd line^3rd line” Format spec.
14-22
Effect of ?s1 or ?s2, ?s3 in the relevant output block
%s ?s1 ?ftext
1st line^2nd line^3rd line
%s ?s1 ?ftext t^1
1st line (positioned by separator)
%s ?s2 ?ftext f^1 t^2
2nd line (positioned by separator)
%s ?s3 ?ftext f^2
3rd line (positioned by separator)
%s ?s2 ?ftext f10 t17
2nd line (positioned absolutely)
List Generator Configuration
The leading data identification number specifies the RSWire variable from which the string is to be taken. The letter “f” in the manipulation term means “from symbol”, the letter “t” means “up to symbol”. The sequence directly following “t” or “f” may contain a non–numerical symbol and a number. If only one number (n) is contained, the string is copied into the list generator string from or up to the nth symbol inclusively. If a non–numerical symbol (c) is also included, then the string is copied into the list generator string from the nth symbol c exclusively or up to the nth symbol c exclusively. Caution: The sequences f[symbol][number] or t[symbol][number] must not contain any spaces (exception: when the symbol itself is a space).
Static Filter for Lists The filter feature for list generators enables the user to filter specific data into the lists. An example would be the purchase order list. Not all of the parts are purchased from one vender. We might need a separate P.O. list for each vender. Through filtering, we can print only the parts we need. To filter a list the user must do two things: 1.
Put a filter statement in the list generator file that specifies how the list is to be filtered.
2.
Turn on the Filter function in the Tools > System Settings > Report Settings tab before generating the list.
If the filter statement contains variables, the user will be prompted for values at the time the list is generated. The filter statement consists of the following information.
14-23
List Generator Configuration
!filt
(Filter statement identifier)
!h2
(The data block in which the variable resides.)
&
(Logical operand and for the AND junction and allows the filter description to be displayed in the Filter DCL. NOTE: If no other operands are used the & must be in place.)
&!
(Logical operand for a negated AND junction, AND NOT".)
|
(Logical operand for an OR junction.)
|!
(Logical operand for a negated OR junction, OR NOT".)
?manufact
(The name of the variable to filter. manufact" is one example.)
0-8
(The filter mode). See below.
= *
(The equation which the filter path is to take). See below. (The preset value *" *" appears in the filter data entry field of the filter DCL and can be used as a wild card, card i.e. i e S*, S* which would display all manufacturers g g with S) ) Keepp in mind case sensitive data beginning S). data. In a static filter the & | may bbe usedd tto acceptt values which l hi h are nott case sensitive, iti ii.e. *S or **s. (Text that appears in the Filter window to identify the filter variable name). name)
Manufacturer"
Statement Format – (the actual statement is separated by spaces, not commas) !filt, block identifier, logical junction, field identifier, comparison mode, comparison operator string Example statement: !filt !h2 & ?manufact 0 = * “Manufacturer” This statement will filter for manufacturers in alphabetical order. Filter Criteria: The following values in the filter statement determine the order in which the data will be listed. Filter Mode
14-24
Constants (Ascending)
Alphabetical
[0]
Ignore Case
[2]
Numerical
[4]
Mixed: Alpha-Numeric
[6]
Date
[8]
List Generator Configuration
For filtering, the block identifier !filt is used in conjunction with the following logical operators: &
= AND junction
&!
= AND NOT junction
|
= OR junction
|!
= OR NOT junction
Several entries may be made in the Filter window; only those data records which satisfy all entries are output. For the “equal to” and not equal to”, partial qualifications are evaluated, i.e. it is possible to use “*” and “?” in the entries you make in the Filter window. Example: AC* to list all parts from companies beginning with “AC” . Example: 4??? to list all wire numbers with four digits starting with 4. For the “equal to” and not equal to”, multiple entries are possible in the Filter window; they must be separated by a pipe “|” (OR). Example: ABLE | BAKER to display only Able or Baker manufacturers. Up to sixty characters may be entered on one line for multiple manufacturers names, separating each name by a “|” character. For “not equal to” (!=) suppression is implemented, i.e. the list is output with the exception of the entries listed in the Filter window. Example: I:000/??|O:000/?? to list all wire numbers except the I:000/ and O:000/ I/O addresses. List Filter Restrictions – In the filter statement the user must indicate the manner in which the list for this variable is to be restricted. The following modes may be specified. =
equal to
!=
not equal to
<
less than
>
greater than
<=
less than or equal to
>=
greater than or equal to
14-25
List Generator Configuration
Example: to filter for a specific quantity of parts (quantity of 3). !filt !d1 & ?quant 4 > 2 !filt !d1 & ?quant 4 <= 4 After the list generator has been modified with the filter statement, the filter function must be selected by picking Tools > System Settings from the pull–down menu, and Report Settings tab. Select the On toggle in the Filter field. Save this setting for future work sessions by selecting the Save button. X
System Settings Report Settings
Filter
OFF
Reports: Description Files
Printer Configuration
Sort
Command Protec
Output
Screen
OFF
Printer File
Filter Toggles
ON
Project
ON
Interactive Graphic Output
OK
Cancel
Save
Help...
When filter statements are present that require variable entries, the Filter dialog box will appear when a list is generated. The entry fields will be labeled as specified in the filter statement. For example, if the following pair of filter statements was added to the list generator file: !filt !h2 & ?manufact 0 = * “Manufacturer name” !filt !h2 & ?ordno 6 = * “Part number”
14-26
List Generator Configuration
Then the Filter dialog box would appear as follows: Filter Manufacturer name = Part number
=
OK
Note
Cancel
Help...
Due to the number of variables used to extract wire numbers, wire labels cannot be filtered using the filter function.
14-27
List Generator Configuration
Tab Formatting in Lists You can format tab stops in lists so that information appears in columns. Tabs are specified in the data block portion of the list generator file following the sort constant value (see following example). The tab values represent distance from the left edge of the page in the default units (inches or millimeters) of the system. On the next line of the list generator file, place the variable names whose values are to appear at each tab stop. After each variable name, press the key (this will not be visible in the file, but must be present. Do not enter a tab character before the first variable name. After each variable name you must also enter a sufficient number of spaces to account for the maximum length of data that will be placed in the list. If this is not done, information for one variable could overwrite the information of the previous variable.
Example tab format instruction !d1 2 1 3 5 ?install ?page
!d1 Data block
2
1 3 5 Sort constant
?install
Variable names
14-28
?pagedescr01
Tab values (represent inches or millimeters depending on default units)
?page
?pagedescr01
Include spaces and at least one tab between each variable name
List Generator Configuration
List Generator Variables This section describes the variables that are used in list files to represent various pieces of RSWire project data. Each variable has been assigned a name consisting of an alphanumeric string. This variable is entered in a list file as a question mark (?) followed by the variable name. For example: use ?project to get the name of the current project in a parts list. Note
Under MS–Windows the lists are printed on screen using the OEM_FIXED_SYS – font. This font may be smaller than the standard Windows font. Dimensions of the window are set by MS–Windows only: lines and screen output:columns. The number of lines per page is set by screen output: lines. Correct the number of output lines per page (screen output: lines) by using a list including page filler and list settings: scrolling by page. Graphic Characters (All Versions) – Some lists contain the extended IBM graphic characters for borders. These signs can be transformed to Pipes and Dashes (| and –) by switching off the Graphic Output toggle in the Tools > System Settings function, and the Report Settings tab.
14-29
List Generator Configuration
All Lists Variable:
Workstation name
?user
User name
?date
Current date
?inst
Current installation
?loc
Current location
?page
Current project page
?pgno
Current list page
?nextpgno
Next list page
?ix1
Index 1 (used for item numbers)
?ix.1
Index .1 (used for item numbers)
?ix..1
Index ..1 (used for item numbers)
?ix2
Index 2 (used for item numbers)
?ix3
Index 3 (used for item numbers)
?path
Directory path
?sins
Sign: Installation (=)
?sloc
Sign: Location (+)
?sdid
Sign: Device ID
?addr01
Address file: line 01
?addr02
Address file: line 02
?addr03 etc. ?addr20
14-30
Description:
?host
Address file: line 03 Address file: line 20
List Generator Configuration
Parts Database Data Variables Variable:
Note
Description:
?partno
Part number
?descr
Description
?manufact
Manufacturer
?prefgrp
PMG
?ordno
Catalog #
?price_b
List price
?price_s
Selling price
?units
Units
?discount
Discount
?devtype
Device type
?date_cr
Date created
?date_ch
Date changed
?symb_ref
Reference symbol
?symb_wir
Wiring diagram symbol
?symb_lay
Layout symbol
?dbloc
On (C)over or (P)anel
?dim_x
Dimension[in] X
?dim_y
Dimension[in] Y
?dim_z
Dimension[in] Z
?weight
Weight[lb]
?power
Power[VA]
?time1
Assembly Time [min]
?time2
Wiring Time [min]
?tech01
Technical Description 1
?tech02
Technical Description 2
?tech03
Technical Description 3
?tech04
Technical Description 4
?addpart01
Additional Data 1
?addpart02
Additional Data 2
?addpart03
Additional Data 3
?addpart04
Additional Data 4
If the database has been customized by the user, the above variable names (keys) may be different.
14-31
List Generator Configuration
Project Lists All Project–Related Lists Variable:
Description:
?project
Current Project
?prdescr01
Project Description 1
?prdescr02
Project Description 2
?prdescr03 etc. ?prdescr09
Project Description 3
?addrfile
Address File
?title01
Project title data 01
?title02 etc. ?title20
Project title data 02
Project Description 9
Project title data 20
Project List Variable:
14-32
Description:
?project
Project name
?title_blk
Page title block
?catalog
Symbol catalog (active)
?tablet
Tablet overlay file
?devid
Device ID (default)
?xgrid
x-grid
?ygrid
y-grid
?devidsz
Device ID text size
?connpntsz
Connection point text size
?prpgno
Total drawing pages in project
?xrefsz
Cross-reference text size
?termsz
Terminals text size
?lang1
1st language
?lang2
2nd language
?lang3
3rd language
List Generator Configuration
Installation List Variable:
Description:
?inpgno
Total drawing pages in installation
?install
Installation name
Page List Variable:
Description:
?ingpno
Total drawing pages in installation
?page
Page
?install
Installation
?location
Location
?cont
Online control checking (Y/N)
?scale
Page scale
?form
Page format number
?titblk
Title block
?termpl
Is page a terminal plan (Y/N)
?crdate
Creation date
?crname
Creation user
?pgdescr01
Page description 1
?pgdescr02
Page description 2
?pgdescr03 etc. ?pgdescr100
Page description 3
?path
File path for page
Page description 100
14-33
List Generator Configuration
Page Format List Variable:
Description:
?format
Format
?formno
Format number
?descr
Description
?xmin
Dimension: xmin
?ymin
Dimension: ymin
?xmax
Dimension: xmax
?ymax
Dimension: ymax
?lrmin
Line range: min
?lrmax
Line range: max
?lrinc
Line range: increment
?macro
Macro
?lpos1
Line position: 1
?lpos2
Line position: 2
?lpos3
Line position: 3
?lpos4
Line position: 4
Database Lists Macro List Variable:
Description:
?path
Macro path
?macro
Macro name
?descr
Macro description
?term
Terminal macro symbol
Symbol List Variable:
14-34
Description:
?path
Symbol path
?symbol
Symbol name
?descr
Symbol description
?type
Symbol type
List Generator Configuration
Device Type List Variable:
Description:
?path
Device path
?device
Device name
?xrefsym
Cross-reference symbol
?xrefdx
dx
?xrefdy
dy
?parsym
Parent symbol
?parcpnt
Connection points parent symbol
?descr
Device Description
?contact01
Contacts
?contact02
Contacts
?contact03 etc ?contact16
Contacts
?cpnt01
Connection points of contacts
?cpnt02
Connection points of contacts
?cpnt03 etc ?cpnt16
Connection points of contacts
Contacts
Connection points of contacts
Device Type List Brief Variable:
Description:
?path
Device path
?device
Device name
?descr
Device description
Language List Variable:
Description:
?textno
Text number
?crdate
Date of creation
?text
Text
?lang
Language
?pattern
Search string
14-35
List Generator Configuration
Wire Lists Wire List (Connection List) Variable:
Description:
?install
Installation
?location
Location
?t1p
Internal - page/line number
?t1i
Internal - installation
?t1l
Internal - location
?t1d
Internal - device ID
?t2p
External - page/line number
?t2i
External - installation
?t2l
External - location
?t2d
External - device ID
?diffinst
* (asterisk) for different instal.
?t1sym
Internal - symbol
?t2sym
External - symbol
?pot1
Internal - potential string 1 (Wire Number)
?pot2
Internal - potential string 2 (Gauge)
?pot3
Internal - potential string 3 (Color)
?pot4
Internal - potential string 4 (Additional)
?pot5
Internal - potential string 5 (Additional)
?pot7
Internal - potential string 7 (Additional)
?pot8
Internal - potential string 8 (Additional)
?pot9
Internal - potential string 9 (Additional)
Wire Labels Variable: ?did01 etc ?did20
14-36
Description: Device ID 1 Device ID 20
List Generator Configuration
Programmable Controller List Variable:
Description:
?descr
I/O address description
?devid
Device ID
?install
Installation where child symbol is located
?location
Location of child symbol
?pglnno
Page/line number where child symbol is located
?ftext
PLC function text
?targ1
1. target after PLC (only child)
?targ2
2. target after PLC (only child)
See also Symbol Attribute Text variables.
Parts Lists Master Parts List Variable:
Description:
?install
Installation
?location
Location
?devid
Device ID
?pglnno
Page/Line number
?partno1
Part number 1st line
?partno2
Part number 2nd line
?ftext
Function text
?instdraw
Installation where device ID is drawn
See also Parts Database Data variables. See also Symbol Attribute Text variables.
14-37
List Generator Configuration
Bill of Material Variable:
Description:
?install
Installation
?devid
Device ID
?location
Location
?pglnno
Page.Line number
?partno
Part Number
?ftext
Function Text
See also Parts Database Data variables. See also Symbol Attribute Text variables. Purchase Order List Variable: Part Number
?quant
Quantity
?ins01 etc. ?ins20
Installation 1
?loc01 etc. ?loc20
Location 1
?did01 etc. ?did20
Device ID 1
See also Parts Database Data variables.
14-38
Description:
?partno
Installation 20
Location 20
Device ID 20
List Generator Configuration
Job Costing List Variable:
Description:
?hour_cost
Hourly cost
?mark_up
Mark up
?partno
Part number
?quant
Quantity
?ins01 etc. ?ins20
Installation 1
?loc01 etc. ?loc20
Location 1
?did01 etc. ?did20
Device ID 1
Installation 20
Location 20
Device ID 20
See also Parts Database Data variables. See also Symbol Attribute Text variables. Dimension List Variable:
Description:
?install
Installation
?devid
Device ID
?location
Location
?pglnno
Page.Line number
?partno
Part Number
?ftext
Function Text
See also Parts Database Data variables. See also Symbol Attribute Text variables.
14-39
List Generator Configuration
Symbol Attribute Text Attribute text entered for symbols can be accessed in the Master Parts list and Bill of Material. These variables correspond to the numbered items in the RS\MENU\DIALOG\ATT_ENG.TXT file. Variable:
14-40
Description:
?stxt001
Function text
?stxt002
PLC function text
?stxt003
Rack
?stxt004
Module
?stxt005
Combination of attributes
?stxt006
Reserved
?stxt007
Reserved
?stxt008
Wire diagram, CP
?stxt009
Device ID, panel layout, wire diagram symbol
?stxt010
Part number
?stxt011
Reference symbol name
?stxt012
Horsepower
?stxt013
Revolutions per minute
?stxt014
Voltage
?stxt015
VA
?stxt016
Full load current
?stxt017
Frequency
?stxt018
Temperature range
?stxt019
Pressure
?stxt020
Resistance
?stxt021
Velocity
?stxt022
Density
?stxt023
Quantity
?stxt024
Capacitance
?stxt025
Inductance
?stxt026
Seconds
?stxt027
Minutes
?stxt028
Hours
?stxt029
Channel
?stxt030
Manufacturer
?stxt031
Type
?stxt032 - ?stxt041
reserved
?stxt042 - ?stxt120
free for user entries
List Generator Configuration
Field Wiring Lists Terminal Strip List Variable:
Description:
?install
Installation
?location
Location
?strip
Strip
?count
Number of terminals
Terminal Connections List Variable:
Description:
?location
Terminal Strip - location
?strip
Terminal Strip
?term
Terminal
?termtxt
Terminal CP Text
?termftxt
Terminal Function Text
?termpno
Terminal Part no.
?xpos
Terminal X Position
?ypos
Terminal Y Position
?termt1txt
Terminal side t1: CP Text
?termt1cpno
Terminal side t1: CP No.
?termt2txt
Terminal side t2: CP Text
?termt2cpno
Terminal side t2: CP No.
?instdraw
Installation of page
?pagedraw
Page
?lineno
Line no.
?t1_pot1
Wire description 1 (Wire Number)
?t1_pot2
Wire description 2 (Gauge)
?t1_pot3
Wire description 3 (Color)
?t1_pot4
Wire description 4 (Additional)
?t1_pot5
Wire description 5 (Additional)
?t1_pot6
Wire description 6 (Additional)
?t1_pot7
Wire description 7 (Additional)
?t1_pot8
Wire description 8 (Additional)
?t2_pot1
Wire description 1 (Wire Number)
14-41
List Generator Configuration
Variable:
14-42
Description:
?t2_pot2
Wire description 2 (Gauge)
?t2_pot3
Wire description 3 (Color)
?t2_pot4
Wire description 4 (Additional)
?t2_pot5
Wire description 5 (Additional)
?t2_pot6
Wire description 6 (Additional)
?t2_pot7
Wire description 7 (Additional)
?t2_pot8
Wire description 8 (Additional)
?jumper
Jumper
?t1inst
Internal: installation
?t1loc
Internal: location
?t1did
Internal: device ID
?t1cp
Internal: connection point
?t1cptxt
Internal: connection point text
?t1cpno
Internal: connection point no
?t1sym
Internal: symbol
?t1ftxt
Internal: function text
?t1cab
Internal: cable
?t1cond
Internal: conductor
?t2inst
External: installation
?t2loc
External: location
?t2did
External: device id
?t2cp
External: connection point
?t2cptxt
External: connection point text
?t2cpno
External: connection point no
?t2sym
External: symbol
?t2ftxt
External: function text
?t2cab
External: cable
?t2cond
External: conductor
List Generator Configuration
Project Cable List Variable:
Description:
?install
Installation
?location
Location
?name
Cable name
?wireno
Number of wires (database)
?used
Number of wires being used
?device
Device type
?devtxt1
Device type: description 1
?devtxt2
Device type: description 2
?devtxt3
Device type: description 3
?partno
Device: partnumber
?devtype
Device: type
?gauge
Device: gauge
?t1ins
Target1: =installation
?t1loc
Target1: +location
?t1did
Target1: -device ID
?t1no
Target1: terminal No./Conn. Point
?t1txt
Target1: terminal text
?t1ftxt
Target1: function text
?t2ins
Target2: =installation
?t2loc
Target2: +location
?t2did
Target2: -device ID
?t2no
Target2: terminal No./Conn. Point
?t2txt
Target2: terminal text
?t2ftxt
Target2: function text
?cabtxt01
Cable text 1
?cabtxt50
Cable text 50
14-43
List Generator Configuration
Field Wire List Variable:
14-44
Description:
?install
Installation
?location
Location
?name
Cable name
?wire
Number of wires (database)
?used
Number of wires being used
?device
Device type
?devtxt1
Device type: description 1
?devtxt2
Device type: description 2
?devtxt3
Device type: description 3
?partno
Device: part number
?devtype
Device: type
?gauge
Device: gauge
?t1ins
Target1: =installation
?t1loc
Target1: +location
?t1did
Target1: -device ID
?t1no
Target1: terminal No./Conn. Point
?t1txt
Target1: terminal text
?t1ftxt
Target1: function text
?t2ins
Target2: =installation
?t2loc
Target2: +location
?t2did
Target2: -device ID
?t2no
Target2: terminal No./Conn. Point
?t2txt
Target2: terminal text
?t2ftxt
Target2: function text
?pot1
Wire description 1 (Wire Number)
?pot2
Wire description 2 (Gauge)
?pot3
Wire description 3 (Color)
?pot4
Wire description 4 (Additional)
?pot5
Wire description 5 (Additional)
?pot6
Wire description 6 (Additional)
?pot7
Wire description 7 (Additional)
?pot8
Wire description 8 (Additional)
?cabtxt01 etc. ?cabtxt50
Cable text 1 Cable text 50
List Generator Configuration
Error Checking Lists Signal List, Unreferenced Signal List Variable:
Description:
?devid
Device ID
?inst
Installation
?page
Page
?lineno
Line number
?xpos
X Position
?ypos
Y Position
?type
Signal type
Device Without Parent List Variable:
Description:
?device
Device
?instdraw
Installation of page
?locdraw
Location of page
?devi
Device ID
?inst
Installation
?loca
Location
?pglnno
Page.Line number
14-45
List Generator Configuration
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
14-46
Alternate Search Paths
15
Alternate Search Paths
Ordinarily, RSWireTM Designer uses a default directory structure (established during installation) to access the files it needs. The Alternate Search Path sets a different search path that the system can use to locate RSWire files. More than one set of directories can be specified in the alternate path, and a search priority is established. This is useful, for example, when working with several symbol catalogs (electrical, pneumatic, etc.) in a single project, or if every user on a network operates with his or her own symbol or macro library or has otherwise customized RSWire. When RSWire is used on a network, an alternate search path allows standard files (symbol libraries, etc.) to be shared over the network while customized files located at each workstation can be accessed by the local user. Alternate search paths can be set for dialog boxes, list descriptions (.LST files), catalog libraries (symbols–macros–devices), and configuration files. You set alternate search paths by editing the ECSCAD.CFG file in the RS\WORK directory (default). With a default install to the C drive this file appears as follows. The statements that can accept alternative search paths are shown in bold. WORK_PATH=C:\RS\PROJECT\ PROGRAM_PATH=C:\RS\ CATALOG_PATH=C:\RS\CATALOG\?\ TMP_PATH=C:\RS\ LIST_PATH=C:\RS\SYSCON\LIST\ CONFIG_PATH=C:\RS\SYSCON\SYSTEM\ TEXT_PATH=C:\RS\DB\ PLOT_PATH=C:\RS\PLOT\ It contains a number of path statements telling RSWire where to find various system files. These paths are described below.
15-1
Alternate Search Paths
Path Descriptions WORK_PATH= This variable points to the directory where RSWire will store all projects. (Cannot use alternate search path.) PROGRAM_PATH= This variable points one directory above where the program is stored. This is the promise program path. (Cannot use alternate search path.) CATALOG_PATH= This variable points directly to the directory where RSWire stores all of the various symbol catalogs which can be loaded. The question mark at the end allows the system to load the symbol catalog defined in the project parameters dialog box. TMP_PATH= This variable points one directory above where RSWire stores the temporary files. This is a temporary file path for lists and file imports and exports. This path must be the same as the program path. Each user must have their own TMP directory. (Cannot use alternate search path.) LIST_PATH= This variable points to the directory where the list generator files are stored. These files determine the format of lists and reports. CONFIG_PATH= This variable points directly to the directory where the configuration and settings files for various RSWire functions are located.
15-2
Alternate Search Paths
TEXT_PATH= This variable points to the directory that contains subdirectories for the language database and the address files. (Cannot use alternate search path.) PLOT_PATH= This variable points to the directory where the software files generated by the plot functions. (Cannot use alternate search path.) Alternate Search Paths – You create an alternate search paths by adding additional paths to the path statements shown in bold above. This allows the software to search through more than one directory to find the files for which it is searching. The first path listed is the first directory to be searched. Added directories are searched in the order that they appear in the declaration. When files are saved they are always placed in the primary (first) directory. This occurs even if the file originated in one of the secondary directories. A question mark wild card may be used in paths. The “?” will be replaced by the catalog loaded for the project that is active. Question Mark Variable Example: CATALOG_PATH=C:\RS\CATALOG\?\
H:\RS\CATALOG\JIC\
Assume that the catalog for the project is “USER.” When a symbol is selected for placement the C:\RS\CATALOG\USER directory is searched first. If the file is not found in the USER directory, the H:\RS\CATALOG\JIC\ directory is searched. If a symbol from H:\RS\CATALOG\JIC\ is re–created, it will be read from H:\RS\CATALOG\JIC\ and stored in C:\RS\CATALOG\USER. The original version of the symbol is left in the H:\RS\CATALOG\JIC\ directory. Alternate search paths allow for a great deal of flexibility in a network environment. By making the shared network directory a secondary directory, users cannot modify the “company standard” symbols, but symbols that they create in the course of creating a new project can be stored as needed (in the user’s first directory). These symbols can then be reviewed by the “RSWire administrator” and placed into the “company standard” directory if they are of use to other users. Another application of alternate search paths is to allow a catalog of symbols specific to only one project to be kept in a separate symbol catalog that can be archived with the project. In a similar way, list formats, dialog boxes, and configurations can be customized by individual users and saved in the first path, while “standard” files remain unchanged in the secondary directories.
15-3
Alternate Search Paths
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
15-4
Appendix A – RSWire Error Messages
A
RSWire Error Messages This sections lists error messages that are displayed by RSWireTM Designer for various conditions. Error 0:
Page not stored.
Remedy:
You may not leave this page because an error condition exists which must be corrected. Correct the error condition, or turn off the page error checking function. Use the Tools > Error Checking > Page Error Check function to set or disable page error checking functions.
Error 1:
The file does not exist in the Path as is listed in the Environment Variable LIST_PATH Check file name or add the name to the Environment Variable LIST_PATH
Remedy: Error 2: Remedy:
The file list.vz" on the 1st path of the Environment Variable LIST_PATH is missing. Check the RSWire installation.
Error 3:
Project already exists.
Remedy:
Select a new project name or delete the existing project.
Error 4:
The ASCII-Project file in the 'TMP' directory cannot be opened.
Reason:
The file does not exist. No read/write permission on file for user. Incorrect file beginning (PN is expected in the first line) Error in one of the ADS-Function callups.
Error 5: Remedy: Error 6:
Verify the ADS module of AutoCAD is installed correctly. Reinstall the AutoCAD software selecting to install ALL files. No color configuration setup file existing.
Remedy:
Check the RSWire installation.
Error 7:
Search path or file name incorrect.
Remedy:
Enter the correct search path or correct file name.
Error 8:
No symbol library active.
Remedy:
Read page from a project in which the symbol library is defined.
Error 9:
No RSWire Menu found.
Remedy:
Verify the installation process and input selections.
Error 10:
The address file cannot be read or written to.
Remedy:
Verify that the path setting is correct.
Error 11:
The configuration file cannot be read or written to.
Remedy:
Verify that the path setting is correct. No read/write permission on file for user.
Error 12:
The Text function is locked.
A-1
Appendix A – RSWire Error Messages
A-2
Remedy:
Verify that the text function is not being accessed at another location.
Error 13:
Hard drive is full.
Remedy:
Back up and/or delete files.
Error 14:
Error in calling up the ADS-Function.
Remedy: Error 15:
Verify the ADS module of AutoCAD is installed correctly. Reinstall the AutoCAD software selecting to install ALL files. The desired symbol is not in the Library.
Remedy:
Verify that correct symbol name is entered.
Error 16:
The device already exists in the working Device directory path
Remedy:
Use new name.
Error 17:
The page already exists.
Remedy:
Use new page number.
Error 18:
Application presently in use.
Remedy:
Close use by other application and try again.
Error 19:
The file is write protected.
Remedy:
Remove write protection (e.g. DOS command ATTRIB)
Error 20:
The Installation name already in use.
Remedy:
Use new Installation name.
Error 21:
There is not enough RAM memory available.
Remedy:
Close any other open applications, or install additional RAM memory.
Error 22:
The requested project does not exist.
Remedy:
Enter the correct project name.
Error 23:
No page active.
Remedy:
Select a page using the File > Open Page > Select function.
Error 24:
No files exist for plotting.
Remedy:
Call up the Plot function again.
Error 25:
No Plot list exists.
Remedy:
Verify installation of RSWire.
Error 26:
Browse copying not possible.
Reason:
Incorrect screen viewports used. 1. Copied objects can only be placed in view 0 (lower left quadrant). 2. The subject and reference point not in the same viewport. 3. An attempt was made to place the subject into viewport 1, 2 , or 3.
Error 27:
The password file cannot be read.
Remedy:
Check password input for correctness, or no password existing.
Error 30:
Device ID for symbol exists
Remedy:
Use another device ID - verify checking logic.
Error 31:
Part number not available.
Remedy:
The part is not in the database
Error 32:
Wire number already exists.
Appendix A – RSWire Error Messages
Remedy:
Enter a different wire number.
Error 33:
Device cannot be on-line checked.
Remedy:
Please call Hot Line.
Error 34:
Page Without Control
Remedy:
The current page is offline; no error checking or cross referencing will be performed. If you need these functions, select the Manage > Page > Modify function and turn on the Online toggle.
Error 35:
Wrong part number entered when placing or modifying.
Remedy:
Part number already exists in database or the part number input field is empty.
Error 36:
Description phrase not found
Remedy:
Enter description or change the search criterion.
Error 40: Remedy:
Address description already exists using present PLC control switch settings See Tools> Project Settings > Programmable Controller Settings function.
Error 41:
Module description already exists using present PLC control switch settings
Remedy:
See Tools> Project Settings > Programmable Controller Settings function.
Error 42:
A temporary file cannot be created
Remedy:
Verify the path or the user rights to the file.
Error 43:
The selected list generator file is formatted incorrectly.
Reason:
It does not begin with the control sequence identifier !lh
Error 44:
The requested data block is missing in the list generator file
Remedy:
Check the list generator file and correct the situation
Error 45:
The requested file cannot be opened (read)
Remedy:
Verify the path or the user rights to the file
Error 46:
The requested file cannot be saved
Remedy:
Remove the write protection or the path is not available
Error 47:
The requested sort format is incorrect
Error 48:
Warning: Device does not exist in device list or device data.
Error 49:
Description data does not match with device.
Remedy:
The selected device does not match the part device.
Error 50:
Data format incorrect. The function is expecting a different format.
Error 51:
Selected text font is not available. The STANDARD" text font will be used.
Error 52:
The revision number of the data to be read in does not match.
Error 53:
Symbol does not exist.
Remedy:
Verify existence of desired symbol.
Error 54:
Font configuration file in config file - does not exist
Error 55:
Child symbols are missing in the device type definition in order to place the PLC function text
A-3
Appendix A – RSWire Error Messages
Error 56: Remedy: Error 57: Error 58:
An attempt was made to attach a wire number to a wire that has one existing through a signal cross reference symbol at another location SQL cannot be initialized when ASE was initialized, an error resulted.
Reason:
ASE (AutoCAD SQL extension) was not installed completely or correctly.
Error 59:
SQL driver cannot be initialized. The error message contains ? text from the ASE environment. Logging into the database is not possible. The error message contains ? text from the ASE environment. Error in accessing the database. The error message contains ? text from the ASE environment. An attempt was made to change a wire number to a wire that also exists at another location through a signal cross reference symbol. After selecting OK, other wire parameters such as text size and position can be changed. If you must change the number itself, use the Edit > Wire/Line > Change Number function.
Error 60: Error 61: Error 62: Suggestion: Error 63:
Text with question mark.
Error 64:
Device ID with question mark.
Error 65:
Connection point text with question mark.
Error 66:
Symbol text with question mark.
Error 67:
Wire number with question mark.
Error 68:
Connection between terminals.
Error 69:
The symbol is not connected.
Error 70:
Wire is not connected.
Error 71:
Page offline.
Error 72:
Logical line (wire) without a connection.
Error 73:
The entered wire description does not exist in the cable definition (device type).
Suggestion:
Allow the wire name choices to be prompted and select the next available wire.
Error 74:
Wire number already assigned.
Suggestion:
Allow the wire number choices to be prompted and select the next available wire.
Error 75:
Cable not yet placed. This is why no cable listing can be made and the next available wire cannot be found. Error in EED Structure. EED structure not set correctly in DWG file.
Error 76: Error 77: Suggestion: Error 78:
A-4
After reading in ACAD file (DXF or DWG), blocks must be exploded in for RSWire to recognize and take over the graphical elements. Execute the EXPLODE command multiple times until no additional blocks exist.
Line number positions and the line numbers actually used in a page do not match. Set the Digits in Line Numbers value correctly in the Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function. You may need to be manually correct the device IDs. Page format not found, system will refer to default page format number 0.
Appendix A – RSWire Error Messages
Error 79: Error 80: Suggestion: Error 81: Suggestion:
Wire number not found. You have entered a wire number that does not exist in the current project. Catalog cannot be imported into the first search catalog. First string in CATALOG_PATH has no question mark in the config file. Add a question mark to CATALOG_PATH in the config file. Symbol definition cannot be activated. Symbol already on page. Delete all symbols on page or activate new page".
Error 82:
Clip jumper not possible. Number of terminal blocks connected by a clip jumper exceeds the predefined maximum.
Suggestion:
Change Target Modify selection in the Terminal Plan Editor dialog box from Clip Jumper to Wire Connection. Terminal jumper is neutral. No Internal/External/Jumper defined for the terminal block center point. Check the Internal/External/Jumper toggle in the Tools> Project Settings > Con figuration Terminal and Plug IDs function. Change target in Terminal Connection Point Definition dialog box .
Error 83: Suggestion: Error 84: Suggestion: Error 85: Suggestion: Error 86:
Short circuit found. Two lines with different wire numbers are connected. Delete one of the wires to remove one of the wire numbers. Page should be reorganized. RSWire page was modified with AutoCAD. Reorganize the page by selecting OK in the Error dialog box.
Suggestion:
Wire couldn't be connected. No Internal/External target available. Delete Internal/External wire. Check the Internal/External/Jumper toggle in the Tools> Project Settings > Configuration Terminal and Plug IDs function. Change target in Terminal Connection Point Definition dialog box .
Error 87:
Open drawing limit exceeded.
Suggestion:
Restart your computer.
Error 88:
Error in ODBC: text from ODBC driver. ODBC exception caught ODBC runtime system or driver couldn't execute function. Error in ODBC: can't update/append current record. File system write protection or ODBC driver does not support changes.
Error 89:
A-5
Appendix A – RSWire Error Messages
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
A-6
Appendix B – RSWire Files
B
RSWire Files This sections lists the directories and files included when RSWireTM Designer is installed. The default setup of files and subdirectories under the RS\ directory is as follows:
RS\ BMP
Directory of bitmap files for toolbar buttons (not available in Standalone)
CATALOG
Symbol, device, and macro catalog directories
DB
Text database, custom data files (i.e. address files, and logos)
DBS
Parts database directory
FONTS
Additional fonts directory (not available in Standalone)
MENU
Directory containing menu, dialog, and help files
PLOT
Directory containing plot scripts for RSWire
PROGRAM
Directory containing EXE files
PROJECT
Project directory and DWG files
SYSCON
System configuration files, and list generator files
TMP
Temporary file directory
USER
User customized files
WORK
Default DWG file for the startup of RSWire. Also configuration files for printer and alternate search paths
The following pages list the subdirectories and major files included in each directory.
B-1
Appendix B – RSWire Files
BMP The BMP directory contains bitmap files used for toolbar function buttons. CATALOG Sub Directories: JIC (or IEC or other symbol catalog) Sub Directories: BLOCK
Symbol files
DEVICE
Device type files, Cable device type files
MACRO
Macro files
WMF
WMF format files for symbol select icon groups
DB Sub Directories: CUSTOM RSI
LG
Rockwell Software address file
Text database. TDB.MDB
LOGOS
B-2
Address files.
Text Access file (only if converted to MS Access)
Title block logo information.
Appendix B – RSWire Files
DBS Sub Directories: DB
Parts database files ARTICLE.MDB
Article parts database file
FONTS Additional font files (.SHX) MENU Sub Directories: DIALOG
Dialog prompts and help files: All files can be renamed through configuration settings.
ATT_ENG.TXT
Symbol attribute file (English)
DCL_ENG.TXT
Symbol attribute file (English)
DIA_ENG.TXT
Dialogs and prompts for dialog boxes and the Command Line (English)
ATT_FRA.TXT
Symbol attribute file (French)
DCL_FRA.TXT
Symbol attribute file (French)
DIA_FRA.TXT
Dialogs and prompts for dialog boxes and the Command Line (French)
ATT_GER.TXT
Symbol attribute file (German)
DCL_GER.TXT
Symbol attribute file (German)
DIA_GER.TXT
Dialogs and prompts for dialog boxes the Command Line (German)
ATT_ITA.TXT
Symbol attribute file (Italian)
DCL_ITA.TXT
Symbol attribute file (Italian)
DIA_ITA.TXT
Dialogs and prompts for dialog boxes and the Command Line (Italian)
ATT_SPA.TXT
Symbol attribute file (Spanish)
DCL_SPA.TXT
Symbol attribute file (Spanish)
DIA_SPA.TXT
Dialogs and prompts for dialog boxes and the Command Line (Spanish)
RSWIRE.HLP
RSWire help file
RSWIRE.CNT
RSWire help table of contents file
B-3
Appendix B – RSWire Files
MNU
PLOT
Menu files and command files. ACAD.MLN
AutoCAD multiline definition files (not available in Standalone)
ACAD.MNC
Compiled AutoCAD menu supplied with RSWire
ACAD.MNS
Source file for AutoCAD menu supplied with RSWire
ACAD.PGP ECSCAD.LIN
AutoCAD program parameters file (short cut commands) supplied with RSWire add-on AutoCAD line type definition file for RSWire
ECSCAD.MNL
RSWire command file, all program commands
ECSCAD.MNC
Compiled application menu for RSWire
ECSCAD.MNR
Resource file for application menu for RSWire
ECSCAD.MNS
Source file for application menu for RSWire
ECS_ENG.MNS
Source file for application menu (English source)
ECS_FRA.MNS
Source file for application menu (French source)
ECS_GER.MNS
Source file for application menu (German source)
RSWi.PGP
Parameters file (short cut commands) supplied with RSWire standalone
Plot spool directory. Directory where “Plotting to File” files are stored.
B-4
Appendix B – RSWire Files
PROGRAM
Directory where all linking library and executable files are located for the RSWire software. ECSCAD.ARX
RSWire executable
ECSAPI.DLL
Combined linking library (Version 4.1 and later)
ECSDRSET.DLL
Drawing set linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSDRSET.TLB
Drawing set linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSEVALUATION.DLL
Evaluation linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSFIELD.DLL
Field linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSMACRO.DLL
Macro linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSPAGE.DLL
Page linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSPROJECT.DLL
Project linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSSYMBOL.DLL
Symbol linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECS TEXT.DLL
Text linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSWIRE.DLL
Wire linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSWIRENO.DLL
Wire number linking library (Version 4.0 only)
WKSVMON.EXE
Wibu key server monitor executable
WKSVW32.EXE
Wibu key license manager executable
RSW.HLP
RSWire help file (Standalone Version 4.0 only)
RSWi.HLP
RSWire help file (Standalone Version 4.1only)
SYSTEM
Directory where system linking library and executable files are located.
DAO350.DLL
linking library (Version 4.1 and later)
DDAO35.DLL
linking library
DDAO36.DLL
linking library (Version 4.1 and later)
DUNZIP32.DLL
linking library
DZIP32.DLL
linking library
MSORCL10.CNT
linking library
MSORCL10.DLL
linking library
MSORCL10.HLP
linking library
MSRDC20.OCX
linking library
ODBCINT.DLL
linking library
RDOCURS.DLL
linking library
B-5
Appendix B – RSWire Files
PROJECT
Directory for the user’s projects. Sub Directory: WORK
SYSCON
Under WORK a subdirectory is created for each project. The NAMES.EC2 file identifies the contents of each subdirectory.
System configuration directory Sub Directories: LIST
List generator files
(The LIST.VZ file contains all the names of the list generator files being used for a given session of RSWire. These file names are assigned through the Tools > System Settings > Reports: Description Files function.)
B-6
CABLE.LST
CSPAGE2.LST
DEVICE2.LST
PAGE4.LST
CSCABLE.LST
CSPARTS.LST
DEVWP.LST
PARTS.LST
CSDEVIC1.LST
CSPLC.LST
DIM.LST
PLC.LST
CSDEVIC2.LST
CSPROJE1.LST
FLDWIRE.LST
PROJECT1.LST
CSDEVWP.LST
CSPROJE2.LST
FORMAT.LST
PROJECT2.LST
CSDIM.LST
CSSIGNAL.LST
INST.LST
SIGNAL.LST
CSFLDWIR.LST
CSSYMBOL.LST
JOB.LST
SYMBOL.LST
CSFORMAT.LST
CSTERM.LST
CSINST.LST
CSTSTRIP.LST
LIST.VZ
TERM.LST
CSJOB.LST
CSWIRE.LST
MACRO.LST
TEXT1.LST
MASTER.LST
TEXT2.LST
CSMACRO.LST
CSWIRELA.LST
CSMASTER.LST
DB1.LST
P_O.LST
TSTRIP.LST
CSMASTER1.LST
DB2.LST
PAGE1.LST
USER.MDB
CSP_O.LST
DEFAULT.MDB
PAGE2.LST
WIRE.LST
CSPAGE1.LST
DEVICE1.LST
PAGE3.LST
WIRELAB.LST
Appendix B – RSWire Files
SYSTEM
System configuration files
BACKUP.CFG
Backup/Restore function path settings
BANGLE.CFG
Symbol angle settings configuration file
BSCALE.CFG
Symbol scale settings configuration file
COLOR.CFG
Color mapping configuration file
CONNLIST.CFG
Default setting for Create Connection List When Saving Page"
CP.CFG
Command protection configuration file
DEVSTY.CFG
Device ID style configuration file
DID.CFG
Terminal settings configuration file
DLG_TABS.CFG
Project Settings and System Settings tabs
DWG.CFG
Drawing format configuration file
DWGCTL.CFG
Page control settings configuration file
GENERAL.CFG
General default settings configuration file
GRID.CFG
Grid settings configuration file
HW.CFG
Report settings configuration file
LAYER.CFG
Layer names
LNG.CFG
Language settings configuration file
MANGLE.CFG
Macro angle settings configuration file
MARK.CFG
Marking settings configuration file
MSCALE.CFG
Macro scale settings configuration file
NAVIGA.CFG
Navigation scale settings configuration file
PLC.CFG
PLC symbol settings configuration file
PPLAN.CFG
Pin-Plug plan configuration file
PRESET.CFG
Sets LT scale (dash line size)
PRT.CFG
Printer settings configuration file
PT.CFG
Terminal/Pin-Plug default configuration filenames
SAVEAS.CFG
Save settings configuration file
SODDEF.CFG
Project definition default configuration file
SODSETT.CFG
Project parameters settings configuration file
SSETUP.CFG
Device ID delimiter configuration file
STYLE.CFG
Font style configuration file
TANGLE.CFG
Text angle settings configuration file
TERM.CFG
Terminal settings configuration file
THEIGHT.CFG
Text height settings configuration file
TLORG.CFG
Text label origin settings configuration file
TPLAN.CFG
Terminal plan configuration file
TPMAC.CFG
Terminal plan macro configuration file
TRATIO.CFG
Text ratio settings configuration file
B-7
Appendix B – RSWire Files
TSLANT.CFG
Text slant settings configuration file
TSTYLE.CFG
Text font style settings configuration file
TXTOD.CFG
Text on drawing settings configuration file
UNDEF.CFG
AutoCAD undefined commands configuration file
VERSION.CFG
Indicates default to DWG or non-DWG drawing format
WIRE.CFG
Automatic wire numbering configuration
WIRE1.CFG
Manual wire numbering configuration
TMP
Temporary swap files (delivered empty)
USER
Backup of files that the user may have customized. Directory is automatically created when an update install is performed. DOCUMENT.MDB
WORK
Default DWG files used on start–up of program. ACAD14.CFG
AutoCAD R14 configuration
ACAD2000.CFG
AutoCAD 2000 configuration
ADD_CU.BAK
Backup of registry files
ADD_CU.REG
Registry files (modified at install)
ECS.DVB
Default VBA project
ECS_$$$.DWG
Temporary files
ECS_CAD.MSG
Message file
RSWIRETAB.DWG Tablet overlay drawing (JIC symbols)
B-8
PASSWD.TXT
RSWire password file
PRINTER.BAT
Printer batch file
RSWire.ARG
Registry data
RSWire.DWG
Default drawing file
RSWire.ICO
RSWire icon file
SAMPLE.DVB
Sample VBA project
TYPELIB.BAK
Backup to registry
TYPELIB.REG
Registry files (modified at install)
UI.MDB
User interface database file
Appendix C – Creating Symbol Icon Groups
C
Creating Symbol Icon Groups This sections describes how to make custom graphical symbol selection groups for use with the Insert > Select Icon function.
Selection groups are provided for the symbol catalog that is included with the software. However the user may wish to create new groups to arrange commonly used symbols in one group or to allow selection of new symbols that the user has created. Macros can also be selected from these groups.
C-1
Appendix C – Creating Symbol Icon Groups
Each new selection group is drawn in RSWireTM on a drawing page. The page is then converted to the WMF (Windows Metafile) format. This WMF file is stored in a WMF subdirectory under the symbol catalog directory selected for the current project (example: \RS\CATALOG\JIC\WMF). Icon Group Creation Procedure: Note
You must use a white drawing background when creating icon groups in order for the icons to work properly. 1.
In RSWire, create a blank drawing page. This page can be online or offline. Most of the groups provided with the software were created using the B–1COL page format although this format is not required. Use a separate page for each group you create. When creating the page, select the page parameter 1 button and enter the name that you wish the group to have as page parameter number 1. The groups provided with the software follow a group naming format where the first three letters are the symbol catalog name (example: JIC_Relay1). Although this format is not mandatory it helps organize the groups if you have multiple symbol catalogs
2.
C-2
On the new page, draw a box to define the total area for the new symbol group. This box can be any size; it will be scaled to fit in the Select Icon dialog box. (Most of the groups provided with the software were drawn in a box 3 inches high by 8 inches wide – 7.6 x 20.3 cm). Do not use the logical box drawing function.
Appendix C – Creating Symbol Icon Groups
3.
Inside the box draw smaller boxes. Each smaller box defines the pick area for one symbol. These boxes can touch (share sides) as shown in the following figure, but the reference points for two boxes must not occupy the same point. Allow a margin of at lease 1/2 inch (1.3 cm) between the smaller boxes and the edge of the larger box.
4.
Inside each small box, place the desired symbol using the Insert > Symbol by Name function. All parts of the symbol (reference point, connection points, text) must fit inside the box to ensure proper operation.
CB125 PB125
LS128
If the symbol is too large to be conveniently shown in a box you can instead place a text string in the format S=SYMBOLNAME. For example, place the string S=1771–IAD in the selection box for the symbol 1771–IAD. Note
If you wish to select a macro, place the desired macro in the box. For macros, the box must also contain a text string in the format M=MACRONAME. For example, place the string M=MOT1 in the selection box for the macro MOT1.
C-3
Appendix C – Creating Symbol Icon Groups
5.
Modify the symbol to the appearance you wish it to have in the selection box. For example, you might wish to remove the device ID or function text by using the Modify > Symbol function. You must turn off displayed symbol reference and connection points (use the Tools > System Settings > Display Settings function).
6.
Add any other elements you wish to appear in the selection window such as text or borders. The symbol groups included with the software have text giving the symbol name and symbol group (PS1, etc.) in each selection box. Place nothing outside the large box drawn in step 2.
CB3M PBNO G G
LSNO G
C-4
7.
Save the drawing page (File > Save).
8.
Select the Tools > Create Icon function (or enter the command CREATE_WMF on the command line).
9.
You will be prompted to select objects. Select the large box and everything inside it. Press <Enter>. The WMF file will be created. It will be stored in the WMF directory for the symbol catalog that you have selected for the current project.
Appendix C – Creating Symbol Icon Groups
10. To verify that the new selection group exists, select the Insert > Select Icon function. If the group name does not appear in the list, select the Edit > Refresh function from the menu inside the Select Icon dialog box. The WMF files are stored in the WMF subdirectory for the symbol library that was selected in the New Project dialog box for the project in which the symbol group drawings were created (example: \RS\CATALOG\JIC\WMF). If you wish to move or copy WMF files from one symbol library to another, you can copy the WMF files to the appropriate directory. However, you must then edit the WMFLIST.INI file to add or delete the names of the symbol groups (see following paragraph). If you wish to change the names of existing groups you can edit the WMFLIST.INI file located in the appropriate WMF directory. The group names are listed as folders (example: FOLDER=JIC_Motor). Be careful not to alter any other information in this file. It is a good idea to keep the original drawing page after the WMF is created in case you wish to modify the symbol group in the future. You can add or delete items on the original page and then run the CREATE_WMF function again. You should delete the existing WMF file before running the Tools > Create Icon function, otherwise you will have two selection groups with the same name. The name of the relevant WMF file is shown in the WMFLIST.INI file two lines above the group (folder) name.
C-5
Appendix C – Creating Symbol Icon Groups
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
C-6
Index
Index A ACAD.PGP File, 1-6 Access Database Files, 13-2 Full Version, 13-19 Run–Time Version, 13-19 Active Input File, 7-38 Address File, 3-6 Edit, Select, 7-17 Aerial View, 4-33 Aliases, 1-6 Alternate Search Path, 15-1 Angle, Dialog Box, 5-35 Angular, Function, 5-84 Arc, 5-56 Filled Arc, 5-56 Article, Form, 10-11, 13-19 Assign Part Number, Dialog Box, 5-81, 5-118 Attributes List of, 6-15 Text, 5-16, 6-14, 14-40 User Created File, 5-117 Visible/Hidden, 6-15 Automatic, Function, 5-66 Automatic Wire Numbers, Dialog Box, 5-66
B Backup Device Type, 3-21 Macro, 3-21 Projects, 3-21 Selected Symbols, Macros, Device Types, 3-23
Symbol Catalogs, 3-21 Backup/Restore, Function, 3-21, 6-5 Bill Of Materials Dialog Box, 9-23 Function, 9-23 Blank Drawing Pages, 7-35 Block, 6-21, 6-82 Box, 5-47 Drawing, 5-49 Function, 5-47 Logical, 5-47 Settings, 5-50 Box: Connection Point Parameters, Dialog Box, 5-48 Break, 4-16 Browse Copy, 4-35
C Cable, 12-1 Assign, 11-18 Assign in Schematic, 12-2 Conductor Designations, 5-98 Cross Reference Symbol, 12-14 Delete, 11-19 Device Type, 12-11 Hidden Symbol, 7-16 List, 9-18, 12-21 Multiple Assignment Check, 7-28 Part Number, 12-12 Symbol Create, 12-8 Terminal Editor, 11-18, 12-7 Text, 5-100 Wire Numbering, 5-72 Cable Text, Dialog Box, 12-4 Character Sets, 7-10 I–1
Index
Character Size, 3-10
Connection Search Priorities, 9-15, 11-4
Characters, Reserved, 4-12, 5-15, 5-54
Connections, 9-16 Search Priorities, 9-15 Reports, 9-10
Child Symbol, 5-18, 5-25, 6-28, 6-34 Circle, 5-56 2 Points, 5-56 3 Points, 5-56 Filled Circle, 5-56 Tan Tan Radius, 5-56
Connections Point, Dialog Box, 12-3 Contacts, Form C, 6-72 Continuous Wire, 5-8
Load Editor, Function, 1-5
Copy, 5-105 Device Type, 6-95 From Page to Page, 4-35 Function, 3-16, 4-20, 4-40 Installation, 4-40 Macro, 6-95 Page, 4-20 Project, 3-16 Symbol, 6-95 Wire Numbers, 4-22, 4-41
Command Dispatch, 4-34
Copy Installation, Dialog Box, 4-40
Command Protection, 7-11
Copy Project, Dialog Box, 3-16
Commands Aliases (Shortcuts), 1-6 List of, 4-34
Copy To Clipboard, Function, 5-93
Clear Page, 4-17 Clip Jumper, 11-16 Remove, 11-17 Close Page. See Quit Page Color, Wire, 5-101 Comma Separated, List, 14-5
Comparison Check, Panel Layout With Schematic, 10-8 Compile Connections, 9-10 Compile Parts File, Function, 9-21 Configure, Lists, 14-1 Connection List, 9-10 Delete, 9-12 Dialog Box, 9-10 With Page Save, 7-25 Connection List Parameters, Dialog Box, 9-13 Connection Point, 6-3, 6-11 Designations, 5-18 Display, 7-16 Function, 5-47 Modify, 5-98 Text, 6-3, 6-11, 6-36, 6-91, 7-23 Connection Points, Dialog Box, 5-17
I–2
Create Device Type, 6-89 Field, 5-52 Function, 5-47 Icon Macro, C-3 Symbol, C-2 Language, 5-45 Macro, 6-81 Page, 4-11 Project, 3-5 Symbol, 6-6 Cross Reference Cable, 12-14 Device Definition, 6-34 Distance from Device ID, 7-21 JIC or IEC, 7-21 Position, 7-21 Signal IEC, 5-65 JIC, 5-58
Index
Suppress, 5-100, 7-25 Symbol, 6-31 Toggle, 5-100 with Child Symbol, 6-27, 6-30, 6-54, 6-60, 7-25 Zone, 7-22, 7-36
Definition of Text Attributes, Dialog Box, 10-9
Cut, 5-93
Delete, 5-104 Device Type, 6-93 Function, 3-14, 4-18, 5-77, 5-120 Installation, 4-39 Macro, 6-93 Page, 4-18 Project, 3-14 Symbol, 6-93 Wire Number, 5-77, 5-120
Cut & Paste, 4-35
Delete Connection Point, Function, 5-47
Cross Reference Point , Function, 6-16 Current Pages, Function, 8-2 Custom Symbol, Stored, 6-17
Delete Language, Function, 5-46
D
Delete Page(s), Dialog Box, 4-18 Delete Unused Text, 7-38
Dashed Lines, 5-102
Delete Wire Numbers, Dialog Box, 5-77, 5-120
Data Source Name, 3-10
Device. See Device Type
Database Accessing, 13-18 Add New Record, 13-23 Adding Fields, 13-34 Delete Record, 13-24 Field Sizes, 13-32 Manipulation, 13-29 Parts, 5-79, 13-1 Edit Form Function, 13-19 Edit Table Function, 13-28 Print, 13-39 Restructure, 13-36 Table View, 13-28
Device and Default Selection, Dialog Box, 8-6
Default Device ID Format, 3-9 Font, 7-49
Device ID, 6-2, 6-9 1, 2, or 3 Lines, 7-43 Angle, 5-101 Color, 5-100, 6-10 Display with Installation, Location, 7-44 Duplicate, 5-15, 5-30, 5-32, 5-55 Find/Replace, 5-114 Height, 5-101, 6-10 Label Origin, 5-101, 6-10 Macro, 5-30 Modify, 5-97 Nested, 7-44 Prompt, 7-23 Renumber, 5-110 Replace, 5-110 Repositioning, 5-99 Reserved Characters, 5-15 Search, 5-20 Suppress, 5-15 Symbol, 5-14 Tag, 6-2
Default Settings, 7-4
Device ID Assignment, Dialog Box, 5-14
Define Names, Dialog Box, 8-31
Device ID Sign (–), 5-24
Database Data Dialog Box, 13-37 Record, 13-19 Date, General Default, 7-21 DDINSERT, Command, 6-21
I–3
Index
Device Type, 5-17, 5-25, 13-21 Backup, 3-21 Cable, 12-11 Copy, 6-95 Create, 6-89 Definition, 6-34 Delete, 6-93 Dialog Box, 5-17, 12-3 List, 9-6 Modify, 5-97, 6-99 Rename, 6-96 Without Parent, 9-30 Device Type Brief, Report, 9-7 Device Type Full, Report, 9-6 Diagonal Wire Connection, 7-24, 9-16 Dialog Boxes, Customize, 2-13 Dialog Language, 7-4 Digitizer, 1-7 Dimension List, Function, 9-27 Dimensions Align Text, 5-85 Alternate Units, 7-60 Angular, 5-84, 5-87 Annotation, 7-58 Drawing, 5-83 Family, 7-54 Format, 7-57 Geometry, 7-54 Leader, 5-84, 5-87 Linear, 5-84, 5-85 Ordinate, 5-84, 5-86 Radial, 5-84 Radius, 5-86 Settings, 7-52 Style, 7-54 Tolerance, 5-84
Draw Arc, 5-56 Box, 5-47 Empty, 5-49 Filled, 5-49 Circle, 5-56 Dimensions, 5-83 Field, 5-52 Line, 5-10 Polyline, 5-10 Single, 5-10 Logical Box, 5-47 Connection Point, 5-47 Create, 5-47 Delete Connection Point, 5-47 Macro, 5-27 Symbol, 5-11 Text, 5-31 Undo, 5-92 Wire, 5-3 3 Phase, 5-6 90 Degree Down, 5-9 90 Degree Up, 5-9 Continuous, 5-8 Repeat Last, 5-8 Single, 5-4 Wire Number, 5-72 Automatic, 5-66 Manual, 5-72 Wire/Line, 5-3 Drawing Box, 5-49 Drawing Entity List, 5-132 Duplicate Device ID, 5-15, 5-30 DW Symbol, 9-16 DWF Files, Plot to, 8-22
Directory, RSWire Directories, 1-2
DWG File, 4-3, 4-9, 6-82 Plot To, 8-23 Symbol Import, 6-21
Disable Settings, 5-33
DWT File, 4-9
Display Only Attribute Text, 5-16
DXF File, 4-9 Plot to, 8-24
Display Settings, 7-15
I–4
Index
DXF Import, Function, 6-22
Field Wire, Report, 9-18 Field Wire List, 12-21
E Edit Copy To Clipboard, 5-93 Cut , 5-93 I/O Device ID, 5-121 Part Number Multiple, 5-119 Single, 5-118 Replace Symbol, 5-108 Text Find/Replace, 5-114 Modify, 5-103 Wire Number Delete, 5-77, 5-120 Modify, 5-104
File Backup/Restore, 6-5 New Page, 4-11 New Project, 3-5 Open Page Previous, 4-7 Refresh, 4-6 Select, 4-4 Plot Current Pages, 8-2 Multiple Pages, 8-2 Preview, 8-2, 8-3 Break, 4-16 Save, 4-8 Save As, 4-9 File Locking, 3-13
Edit Menu, 5-92
Files, B-1
Edit Phrases, Function, 5-44
Filled Circle, Function, 5-56
Edit Symbol, Dialog Box, 5-97
Filter, 7-6 Dialog Box, 14-27 Lists, 14-23
Edit Wire/Line Type, Dialog Box, 5-101 Enable Settings, 5-33 Entity List, 5-132 Error Checking, List, 9-30
Find/Replace, Function, 5-114 Find/Replace Text, 5-114
Exit, Without Saving, 1-4
Font Default, 7-49 Selecting, 5-39
Explode Function, 6-21, 6-82
Foreign Languages. See Language Text
Exchange Title Block Text, Dialog Box, 4-25
Form C Contacts, 6-72
F Field Delete, 5-55 Draw, 5-52 Function, 5-52 Mixed device IDs in, 5-54 Modify, 5-103 Rules, 5-52
Format Color, 5-101 Layers, 5-123 Linetype, 5-101, 5-122 Multiline Styles, 6-100 Page, 4-12 Text Style, 5-39 Formats Available For All Projects, Function, 7-36 Function, DXF Import, 6-22
Field Parameters, Dialog Box, 5-53 I–5
Index
Function Text, 5-32, 6-14 Functionality, 2-2
G
Definition of, 3-2 Delete, 4-39 Device ID Format, 7-43 NO_INST, 3-4 Rename, 4-42 Installation (of Software), 1-2
General Defaults, Settings, 7-19
Installation and Location, 3-2
Generate Graphical Plans, Function, 11-30
Installation Guide, 1-1
Graphical Terminal Plan See also Terminal Plan Configuration, 11-24 Create, 11-30
Installation List, 9-4
Grid, 3-10 Draw/Hide, 7-23 Grid Settings, 7-2 Group, Device ID, 3-9
H Height, Dialog Box, 5-34 Help Screens, 2-11
Installations, Function, 9-4 Internal/External Connections, 7-41 Definition, 11-3 Display Format, 11-27
J Job Costing, Function, 9-25 Job Costing List, 9-25 Dialog Box, 9-25 Job Number, 3-6
Hourly Cost, 9-25
Jumper, 11-3 Clip, 7-42, 11-16 Wire, 11-17
I
L
Hidden Symbol, Display, 7-16
I/O Device ID, Function, 5-121
Label Origin, 5-38, 5-101
Icon, Create Using Macro, C-3 Using Symbol, C-2
Label Origin Text Justification, Dialog Box, 5-38
IEC, Connection Search, 9-16 Import, Text File, 5-88 Insert, Symbol/Macro From Icon, 5-27 Insert Spare Terminals, Dialog Box, 11-13 Installation Copy, 4-40
I–6
Ladder Line Number, 7-21 Two Line, 7-33 Ladder Line Number X Direction, 7-33 Y Direction, 7-33 Ladder Macro, 7-33, 7-35 Language, Of Dialogs, Menus, etc., 7-4
Index
Language Text, 3-9, 5-41 Create, 5-44 Font, 5-45 Replace, 9-22 Report, 9-7 Search, 5-32
List Generator, 14-1 Assigning Files, 14-3 File Structure, 14-6 Filenames, 14-4 Path to, 15-2 Variables, 14-29
Language Text Database, Dialog Box, 9-7
List Generator Settings, Function, 7-5
Layer Control, Dialog Box, 5-123
List Object Function, 5-132
Layer Printing Control, Dialog Box, 8-26
Lists, 9-1 Bill Of Materials, 9-23 Cable, 9-18 Comma Separated, 9-29 Connection, 9-10 Customizing, 14-1 Device Type, 9-6 Device Without Parent, 9-30 Dimension, 9-27 Field Wire, 9-18 File Assignment, 14-3 File Structure, 14-6 Filtering, 7-6, 14-23 Foreign Text, 9-7 Graphics, 7-6, 7-8 Installation, 9-4 Job Costing, 9-25 Macro, 9-6 Master Parts, 9-22 On Drawing, 5-88 Open Connections, 9-11, 9-12 Output, 7-6, 7-8 Page, 9-4 Page Format, 9-9 Parts Dimension. See Lists, Dimension PLC, 9-20 Printing, 7-6, 9-3 Project, 9-4 Error Checking, 9-30 Purchase Order, 9-24 Signals, 9-18 Sort Function, 14-11 Sorting, 7-6 Symbol, 9-6 Terminal Connections, 9-19
Layers Function, 5-123 Plotting, 8-26 Layout Function, 10-3 Leader, Function, 5-84 Leader Lines, 5-87 Line, 5-3 Adjusting Length, 5-5 Change Type, 5-101 Draw, 5-10 Edit, 5-101 Logical, 5-3 Numbers, 7-31 Stretch, 5-107 Line Numbers, 7-21, 7-31 Columns, 7-35 With Page No., 7-24 Linear, Function, 5-84 Linetype, 5-101 Properties, 5-122 List, Comma Separated, 14-5 List File Arithmetic, 14-17 Assigning, 14-3 Data Formatting, 14-15 Rules, 14-9 Sort Function, 14-11 Strings, 14-22 Structure, 14-6 Using Variables, 14-14
I–7
Index
Terminal Strip, 9-19 Variables, 14-29 Wire, 9-10 Load Project, Function, 1-5 Location Device ID Format, 7-43 NO_LOC, 3-4 Lock Project, 3-13 Logical Box, 5-47 Line (Wire), 5-3 Online Control, 4-14 Logical Box Function, 5-47 Nested Symbols, 5-49 Logo file, 7-18
M Macro Backup, 3-21 Copy, 6-95 Create, 6-81 Delete, 6-93 Device IDs, 5-30 Edit, 6-97 Ladder, 7-33, 7-35 List, 9-6 Modify, 6-97 Page, 4-14 Placing, 5-29 Rename, 6-96 Report, 9-6 Select, 5-27 Settings, 7-48 Terminal Plan, 11-20 Title Block, 6-83 Wire Numbers, 5-30, 6-83 Macro by Name, Function, 5-27 Macro Settings, 5-29 Maintenance Agreement, 1-1 I–8
Manage Installation Copy, 4-40 Rename, 4-42 Page Copy, 4-20 Delete, 4-18 Modify, 4-23 Move, 4-30 Page Variables, 4-25 Page , Rename, 4-28 Project Copy, 3-16 Delete, 3-14 Modify, 3-17 Page Count, 4-49 Rename, 3-19 Manual, 2-3 Conventions, 2-4 Function, 5-72 Organization, 2-3 Master List, 9-22 Report, 9-22 Master Parts List, Dialog Box, 9-21 Menu, 2-4 Functions, 2-4 Menus, 2-6 Mirroring, 5-24 Modify Connection Point, 5-98 Device Type, 5-97, 6-99 Field, 5-103 Function, 3-17, 4-23 Line, 5-101 Macro, 6-97 Move, 5-106 Page, 4-23 Project Parameters, 3-17 Properties, 5-107 Stretch, 5-107 Symbol, 5-96, 6-97 Symbol Text, 5-95, 5-99, 5-115
Index
Terminal Destination, 5-99 Text, 5-103 Wire, 5-101 Modify Device Type, Dialog Box, 5-98 Modify Groups, Dialog Box, 8-27
90 Degree Down, Function, 5-9 90 Degree Up, Function, 5-9
O
Modify Page, Dialog Box, 4-23
Oldb.mdb File, 3-25
Modify Project, Dialog Box, 3-17
Online, Set Page Online, 4-23
Move Function, 4-30, 5-106 Page, 4-30 Symbol, 3-10
Online Function, 4-14, 5-16
Move Page(s), Dialog Box, 4-30
Options for RSWire, 2-14
MS Access, Reports, 9-28
Ordinate, Function, 5-84
MS–Access, Database Files, 13-2
Overview, 2-1
Online function, Change, 4-23 Open Connections, List, 9-11, 9-12
Multi–language Text, 5-41 Multi–Line Text, Replace, 9-22 Multi–Page View, 4-35 Multiline Styles, 6-100 Multiple Pages, Function, 8-2 Multiple Placement, of Cable Conductors, 12-2
N Navigator Function, 4-43 Zoom Setting, 7-13 Navigator Function, 4-43 Nested Device ID, 7-44 Nested Symbols, in Logical Box, 5-49 New Language, Function, 5-45 New Page, 4-11 Dialog Box, 5-91 Function, 4-11 New Project, Dialog Box, 3-5 Next Page Function, 4-7
P Page Break, 4-16 Browse, 5-79 Browse Copy, 4-35 Close (without save), 4-16 Copy, 4-20 Count, 3-26 Create, 4-11 Delete, 4-18 Displaying, 4-4 DWG File, 4-3, 4-9 EC1 File, 4-3 Erase. See Page – Clear Page Error Checking, 7-27 Filenames, 4-3 Format, 4-12 Macro, 4-14 Management, 4-1 Modify, 4-23 Move, 4-30 Name Field, 4-6 Clear Page, 4-17 Next Page, 4-7
I–9
Index
Page Count, 4-49 Parameters, 4-25 Open, 4-4 Refresh, 4-6 Rename, 4-28 Save, 4-8, 7-24 Save As, 4-9 Save Automatic, 4-8 Scale, 4-14 Storage, 4-3 Variables, 4-25 View, 4-32 Without Control, 7-28, A-3 Page – Parameter 2, Dialog Box, 4-15, 4-26 Page Brief, Function, 9-5 Page Control Function, Settings, 7-27 Page Count Dialog Box, 4-49 Function, 4-49 Page Count Function, 3-26 Page Format Default, 7-21 List of, 4-12, 9-9 Saving, 7-36 Settings, 7-29 Page Formats, Report, 9-9 Page Full, Function, 9-4 Page List, 9-4 Page Macro, 4-14 Default, 3-6 Page Name Field, 4-6 Page Number, With Line No., 7-24 Page Parameters Modify, 4-23, 4-25 Modify in title block, 4-27 Page Type Field, 4-14 Page Variables Dialog Box, 4-25 Function, 4-25
I–10
Modify in title block, 4-27 Pan, 4-33 Panel Layout, 10-1, 13-21 Comparison With Schematic, 10-8 Dialog Box, 10-3 Function, 10-3 Item Placement, 10-6 Preliminary Steps, 10-2 Procedure, 10-3 Symbol Create, 10-9 Text Parameters, 10-6 Parent Symbol, 5-25, 6-24, 6-34 Parent/Child, 5-17, 5-25 Device Without Parent, 9-30 Search, 5-20 Part Number, 5-79, 13-20 Additional, 13-22 Automatic Assignment, 6-18 Check, 7-23 Copied Pages, 4-22 Display, 7-16 Duplication, 5-55 Entering, 5-15 Edit, 5-118 Modify, 5-82 Multiple, 5-15, 5-80 Multiple Replace, 5-119 Replace Globally, 5-119 Search, 5-82 Symbol Create, 6-18 Symbol without, 7-28 Terminal, 7-41 Text, 6-3 Parts Database, 5-79 See also Database Button, 3-10 Reports, 9-7 Parts Dimension List, 9-27 Parts File, Create, 9-21 Password Protection, 7-11 Pin Charts, 6-66
Index
Pin–Plug Plan, 11-31
Polyline, Function, 5-10
PLC Address Separator, 7-39 Addressing, 7-39 Attribute, 6-43 Child Symbol IEC, 6-57 JIC, 6-52 Duplicate Checking, 7-39 Input File, 7-38 List, 9-20 Octal Address, 7-39 Parent Symbol, 6-39 Placing Symbol in a Drawing, 6-49 Replace Text, 7-38 Text, 5-99, 6-50, 7-38 Wire Numbering, 5-71
Position Cross Reference, 5-99 Device ID, 5-99
PLC Online File, 7-38
Primary Units, 7-59
PLC Text, 6-50 Input File, 7-38 Modify, 5-99
Print/Plot Configuration, Dialog Box, 8-5
Plot, 8-1 Configuration, 8-5, 8-10 Current Page (ACAD 2000), 8-10 Current Page R14, 8-5 Dialog Box, 8-10 DXF File, 8-24 Layers, 8-26 Multiple Pages (ACAD 2000), 8-18 Multiple Pages (R14), 8-15 PLT File, 8-21 Preview, 8-3, 8-9 Scale, 8-9 Sequence, 8-17, 8-20 To File, 8-21 Plotting, Dialog Box, 8-16, 8-19 PLT File, Plot to, 8-21 Plug, 6-66 Device IDs, 7-41 Plug ID, Settings, 7-40 PMG, 5-82, 13-20
Power–Editor, 5-94 Preferences AutoCAD 2000 Version, 7-61 AutoCAD R14 Version, 7-64 Standalone Version, 7-69 Preferred Direction, 6-7 Preferred Manufacturer’s Group, 5-82, 13-20 Preview, Function, 8-2 Previous, Function, 4-7 Previous Page Function, Next, 4-7
Printer Configuration, 7-9 Select, 7-9 Printing Lists, 9-3 Programmable Controller See also PLC Report, List, 9-20 Settings, 7-37 Programmable Controller Settings, Function, 7-37 Programmable Controller Text Definition, Dialog Box, 5-99 Project Backup, 3-21 Copy, 3-16 Create, 3-5 Data, 3-25 Default Character Size, 3-10 Default Symbol Library, 3-5 Default Title Block, 3-6 Delete, 3-14 Description, 3-6 Device ID Format, 3-9
I–11
Index
Directory Names, 3-4 Grid, 3-10 List, 9-4 Lock and Unlock, 3-13 Management, 3-1 Modify Parameters, 3-17 Organization, 3-2 Page Count, 3-26 Parameters, 3-6, 3-7, 3-17 Preselect, 3-12 Rename, 3-19 Renumber, 5-110 Reorganize, 3-25 Reports, 9-4 Settings, 3-10, 7-19 Project Brief, Function, 9-4 Project Cable List, 12-21 Project Full, Function, 3-20, 9-4 Project Preselect, Dialog Box, 3-12
Open, Page, 4-4 Real Time Pan, Function, 4-33 Record, Parts Database, 13-19 Redraw, 4-32 Reference Guide, VBA, 1-5 Reference Point, 6-2, 6-9 Display, 7-16 Refresh, Function, 4-6 Regen, 4-32 Rename Device Type, 6-96 Function, 3-19, 4-28, 4-42 Installation, 4-42 Macro, 6-96 Page, 4-28 Project, 3-19 Symbol, 6-96
Project Settings Backup, 3-22 Grid, 7-2
Rename Page, Dialog Box, 4-28
Properties, Function, 5-107
Renumber Terminal Strip, Dialog Box, 11-11, 11-12
Purchase Order, Function, 9-24 Purchase Order List, 9-24 Dialog Box, 9-24
Q
Renumber, Terminals, 5-111 Device ID, Formats, 3-9
Reorganize, Project, 3-25 Repeat, Last Wire, 5-8 Repeat Last, Function, 5-8
Quit, Page, 4-16
Replace Device ID, 5-110 Part Number, 5-119 Symbol, 5-108 Symbol Text, 5-115 Wire Number, Replace, 5-76
Quit Page, 4-16
Replace Part Number, Dialog Box, 5-119
Quadrant Function, 4-34 Question Mark, Alert, 7-28
R
Replace Symbol Dialog Box, 5-108 Function, 5-108
Radial, Function, 5-84
Replace Symbol Text, Function, 5-115
Ratio, Dialog Box, 5-37
Replace Text, Dialog Box, 5-114
I–12
Index
Replace Wire Numbers, Dialog Box, 5-76 Report Settings, Tab, 5-88 Reports See also Lists Cable, 9-18 Cable List, 12-21 Comma Separated, 9-29 Connections, 9-10 Device Type Brief, Device Brief, 9-7 Device Type Full, Device Full, 9-6 Field Wire, 12-21 Field Wire, Field Wire List, 9-18 Foreign Languages, Language, 9-7 Library, 9-6 Macro, Macro, 9-6 Master List, 9-22 MS Access, 9-28 Parts, 9-21 Bill Of Materials, 9-23 Compile Parts File, 9-21 Dimension List, 9-27 Job Costing, 9-25 Purchase Order, 9-24 Parts Database, 9-7 PLC List, Compile, 9-20 Project, 9-4 Installations, 9-4 Page Brief, 9-5 Page Full, 9-4 Project Brief, 9-4 Project Full, 3-20, 9-4 Settings, 7-5 Signals, 9-18 Symbols, Symbol, 9-6 Table of Contents, 9-5 Terminals, 9-19 Wire, Wire List, 9-10 Wire Labels, 9-18 Wire List, Compile Connections, 9-10
RSWire Base System, 2-14 Concept, 2-1 Exiting, 1-4 Optional Modules, 2-14 Starting, 1-3 VBA, 1-5 Run Macro, Function, 1-5
S Save, Page, 4-8 Save As Function, 4-9 Save Function, 4-8 Scale Drawing, 4-14 Symbol, 5-23 Scan Direction, 6-7 Schematic Elements, 5-1 Search, Device ID, 5-20 Search Device ID, Dialog Box, 5-21 Select, Project, 3-12 Select Color, Dialog Box, 5-39 Select Devices, Dialog Box, 10-4 Select Icon, 5-11 Select Page, Dialog Box, 4-46 Select Quadrant, Dialog Box, 4-34 Settings, 3-10, 7-1 Display, 7-15 Grid, 7-2 Short Circuit, 7-28 Shortcuts, 1-6
Reserved Characters, 4-12, 5-15, 5-54
Signal Analysis Type, 3-9
Restore, Projects, Symbols, 3-24
Signal Cross Reference Analysis Types, 5-61
Rotate, Symbol, 5-23
I–13
Index
Device ID, 5-61 in the Wire List, 5-60 Include Page/Line, 7-22 Notation Formats, 5-60 Star Type, 5-62, 5-63, 5-64 Symbol Create, 6-77 Symbols, 5-59 Wire Numbering and, 5-66 Signals, Report, 9-18 Single, Function, 5-4, 5-10 Slant, Dialog Box, 5-36 Snapmode, 6-7 SODSETT.CFG, 7-47 Software Modules, 2-14 Sort Function, 14-11 Standalone, Version of software, 2-1 Stretch, Function, 5-107 Suppress Device ID, 5-15 Suppress Device Sign (–), Toggle, 7-44 Symbol Alternate search, 15-1 Attribute Text, 6-15, 14-40 Backup, 3-21 Cable, 12-8 Catalog, 6-4, 6-17 Catalog Path, 5-109, 6-5 Child, 6-28, 6-34 Connection Point, 6-11 Copy, 6-95 Create, 6-6 Cross Reference Symbol, 6-31 Delete, 6-93 Device Definition, 6-34 Device ID, 3-9, 5-14 Dialog Box, 5-23 DWG Import, 6-21 Elements of, 6-2 Example Creation, 6-24 Groups, 6-8 Layout, 10-9
I–14
Libraries, 6-4 List, 9-6 Mirroring, 5-24 Modify, 5-96, 6-97 Move, 3-10, 5-106 Multiple Placement, 5-19 Nested, 5-49 Panel Layout, 10-9 Parent, 6-24, 6-34 Placement Rules, 5-13 PLC Child IEC, 6-57 JIC, 6-52 PLC Parent, 6-39 Power–Editor, 5-94 Reference Point, 6-9 Rename, 6-96 Replace, 5-108 Report, 9-6 Rotate, 5-23 Rotation (Automatic), 5-13, 6-13 Scale, 5-23 Selecting, 5-11 Settings, 5-23 Signal Cross Reference, 6-77 IEC, 5-65 JIC, 5-58 Terminal, 6-63 Text, 5-99, 6-3 Without Connection, 7-28 Without Part Number, 7-28 Symbol By Name, Function, 5-11, 5-12 Symbol Sets, 7-10 Symbol Text, 6-3 Angle, 5-101 Assign, 6-13 Color, 5-100 Dialog Box, 5-16 Find/Replace, 5-114 Height, 5-101 Label Origin, 5-101 Modify, 5-95, 5-99 Replace, 5-115
Index
Window, 5-30 Symbol/Macro From Icon, Function, 5-27 SYMBOL_REF, 5-82
T Table, Text, 13-27
Configuration File, 11-25, 11-33 Editor, 11-6 Functions, 11-5 Graphical, 11-20 Internal vs. External, 11-3 Jumper, 11-16, 11-17 Macro, 11-20 Overview, 11-2 Update Existing Pages, 11-29
Table of Contents, 9-5
Terminal Plan Editor, Dialog Box, 12-7
Tablet, 1-7
Terminal Strip, Report, 9-19
Tabs, 14-28
Terminal Strip Selection, Dialog Box, 11-6
Terminal Assign Cable, 11-18 Branch Between, 7-28 Change Number, 11-9 Connection Report, 9-19 Connection Search, 9-15 Delete Spare, 11-14 Device IDs, 7-41 Editing Functions, 11-9 Editor Mode, 11-6 Equals Wire Number, 5-72 In Macro, 6-82 Internal vs. External Connection, 11-3 Modify Destination, 5-99 Move, 11-13 Multiple Placement, 5-19 Part Number, 11-18 Part Number Enable, 7-41 Renumber, 5-110, 5-111, 11-10, 11-11 Settings, 7-40 Sort, 11-12 Spare, 11-13 Switch Targets, 11-15 Symbol, 6-63 Target Setting, 5-99
Terminal=Wire Number, 5-72, 6-65
Terminal Connections, Priorities, 11-4 Terminal Editor, Dialog Box, 11-7 Terminal Plan, 11-1 Basic Steps, 11-2 Configuration, 11-24
Text Alignment, 5-38 Angle, 5-35 Attributes, 6-14, 6-15, 14-40 Color, 5-39 Dialog Box, 5-31 Edit, 5-103 Entry, 5-31 Find/Replace, 5-114 Font, 5-39 Foreign Language, 5-41, 9-7 Function, 5-31 Function Text, 5-32 Height, 3-10, 5-34, 7-23 Hidden, 5-40 Invisible, 5-40 Label Origin, 5-38, 6-42 Language, 3-9, 5-41 Modify, 5-103 Multi–line, 5-32 On Drawing, 5-88 Ratio, 5-37 Settings, 5-34 Size, 5-34 Size (Default), 3-10 Slant, 5-36 Styles, 7-49 Table, 13-27 Text File on Drawing, 5-88, 7-6
I–15
Index
Text On Drawing, Dialog Box, 5-89
Unreferenced Signals, Function, 9-30
Text Style, Default, 7-23
Update Existing Pages, 11-29
Text Styles, 7-49
Upper/lower case, 7-4
Text Window, 2-10
User Name, 7-21
3 Phase, Customize, 6-100 3 Phase, Function, 5-6 Title Block, 4-15 Address in, 7-17 Create, 6-83 Default, 3-6 Display/Hide, 7-22 Logo File, 7-18 Modify Page Variables, 4-27 Reassign, 4-23 Variables, 6-87 Tolerance, 7-60 Toolbar, 2-9 Set Position, 2-10 Toolbars, 4-34 Tools Error Checking Device Without Parent, 9-30 Unreferenced Signals, 9-30 Panel Layout, 10-3 Project Settings, 11-24, 11-32 System Settings Grid Settings, 12-8 Report Settings, 14-3 Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan Edit Terminals, 11-31 Generate Graphical Plans, 11-20, 11-30 Two Line Ladder, 7-33
U Undo, 5-92 Undo Delete, 5-104 Units, 7-23 Unload Project, Function, 1-5 I–16
V Variables Database, 14-31 List, 14-29 Terminal Plan, 11-22 Title Block, 6-87 VBA Load Editor, 1-5 Load Project, 1-5 Reference Guide, 1-5 Run Macro, 1-5 Unload Project, 1-5 View, 4-32 List, 5-132 Navigator, 4-43 Quadrant, 4-34 Redraw, 4-32 Regen, 4-32 Toolbars, 4-34
W Windows, Using, 2-12 Wire, 5-3 Change Type, 5-101 Color, 5-71 Continuous, 5-8 Draw, 5-3 Gauge, 5-71 Modify Number, 5-104 Multiple Cable Check, 7-28 90 Degree, 5-9 Numbers, 5-66 Repeat, 5-8 Reports, 9-10
Index
Size, 5-71 Without Connection, 7-28 Wire Labels, Function, 9-18
X X–Direction, Ladder Line Number, 7-33
Wire List, Function, 9-10 Wire Number, Display, 7-16 Wire Number Manual, Dialog Box, 5-73 Wire Numbers, 5-66 Automatic, 5-66 Before/After Terminal, 3-10 Color (Display), 5-71 Copied Pages, 4-22, 4-41 Delete, 5-77, 5-120 Duplicate, 5-73, 5-75 Height, 5-71 Invisible Text in, 5-75 Macro, 5-30, 6-83 Manual, 5-72 Modify, 5-104 Page select, 5-67 Position, 5-71 Replace, 5-76 Repositioning, 5-78 Same as PLC Address, 5-71 Same Over Terminal, 3-10 With Color/Gauge, 7-26
Y Y–Direction, Ladder Line Number, 7-33
Z Zone Configuration, 7-36 Select, 7-22 Zoom All, 4-33 Center, 4-33 Dynamic, 4-32 Extents, 4-33 In, 4-33 Out, 4-33 Previous, 4-32 Real Time, 4-32 Scale, 4-33 Window, 4-32
Wire/Line, Function, 5-101
Zoom Off, Function, 7-13
Wires, (Logical Lines), 5-3
Zoom Parameters, System Settings, 7-13
Wiring Diagram, 13-21
I–17
Index
I–18
User’s Guide
Contacting Rockwell Software
Technical Support Telephone—1–440–646–7800 Technical Support Fax—1–440–646–7801 World Wide Web—www.software.rockwell.com
Copyright Notice
© 2000 Rockwell Software Inc. wishes to ackknowledge the use of copyrighted material provided under license from ECT International, Inc. Printed in the United States of America Portions copyrighted by Allen–Bradley Company,LLC, a Rockwell Automation company. This manual and any accompanying Rockwell Software products are copyrighted by Rockwell Software Inc. Any reproduction and/or distribution without prior written consent from Rockwell Software Inc. is strictly prohibited. Please refer to the license agreement for details.
Trademark Notices
The Rockwell Software logo, RSAlarm, RSAnimator, RSAssistant, RSBatch, RSBreakerBox, RSButton, RSChart, RSCompare, RSControlRoom, RSData, RSDataPlayer, RSEventMaster, RSGauge, RSJunctionBox, RSLogix Emulate 5, RSLogix Emulate 500, RSGuardian, RSHarmony, RSKeys, RSLadder, RSLadder 5, RSLadder 500, RSLibrary Builder, RSLinx, RSLogix 5, RSLogix 500, RSLogix Frameworks, RSLogix SL5, RSMailman, RSNetWorx for ControlNet, RSNetWorx for DeviceNet, RSPortal, RSPower, RSPowerCFG, RSPowerRUN, RSPowerTools, RSRules, RSServer32, RSServer, RSServer OPC Toolkit, RSSidewinderX, RSSlider, RSSnapshot, RSSql, RSToolbox, RSToolPak I, RSToolPak II, RSTools, RSTrainer, RSTrend, RSTune, RSVessel, RSView32, RSView, RSVisualLogix, RSWheel, RSWire, RSWorkbench, RSWorkshop, SoftLogix 5, A.I. Series, Advanced Interface (A.I.) Series, AdvanceDDE, AutomationPak, ControlGuardian, ControlPak, ControlView, INTERCHANGE, Library Manager, Logic Wizard, Packed DDE, ProcessPak, View Wizard, WINtelligent, WINtelligent LINX, WINtelligent LOGIC 5, WINtelligent Series, WINtelligent VIEW, WINtelligent RECIPE, WINtelligent VISION, and WINtelligent VISION2 are trademarks of Rockwell Software Inc., a Rockwell Automation company. Data Highway Plus, DH+, DHII, DTL, MicroLogix, Network DTL, PLC, PLC–2, PLC–3, PLC–5, PowerText, Pyramid Integrator, PanelBuilder, PanelView, PLC–5/250, PLC–5/20E, PLC–5/40E, PLC–5/80E, SLC, SLC 5/01, SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, SLC 5/05, and SLC 500 are trademarks of the Allen–Bradley Company, LLC, a Rockwell Automation company. Microsoft, MS–DOS, Windows, and Visual Basic are registered trademarks, and Windows NT, Windows 98, Microsoft Access, and Visual SourceSafe are trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. ControlNet is a trademark of ControlNet International. DeviceNet is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendors Association. Ethernet is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation, Intel, and Xerox Corporation. Pentium is a registered trademark of the Intel Corporation. Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. AIX, PowerPC, Power Series, RISC System/6000 are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/ Open Company Limited. AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc.
Warranty
All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged. This Rockwell Software product is warranted in accord with the product license. The product’s performance will be affected by system configuration, the application being performed, operator control and other related factors. The product’s implementation may vary among users. This manual is as up–to–date as possible at the time of printing; however, the accompanying software may have changed since that time. Rockwell Software reserves the right to change any information contained in this manual or the software at anytime without prior notice. The instructions in this manual do not claim to cover all the details or variations in the equipment, procedure, or process described, nor to provide directions for meeting every possible contingency during installation, operation, or maintenance.
Technical Support:
Rockwell Software provides technical support to RSWire Designer users currently under warranty or support contracts. Technical support is available Monday through Friday from 8 am to 5 pm Eastern Standard Time. Phone (440) 646–7800
Fax (440) 646–7801
Please have your RSWire Designer serial number available when contacting Rockwell Software Technical Support. For Additional Support Services such as support contract renewal and product information, contact the following: 440–646–7700 SW Services Phone 440–646–7701 SW Services Fax 440–646–7777 AutoFax Product Info Email: [email protected] Information on RSWire training courses is available by contacting: 414–321–8000 Chris Sessions [email protected]
Table of Contents
Table of Contents 1
Installation and Start–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting RSWireTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exiting From RSWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unload Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Aliases (AutoCAD Add–On Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphics Tablet Configuration (AutoCAD Add–On Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-6 1-7
2
Introduction to RSWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSWire Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The RSWire Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSWire Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menus and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional Software Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using RSWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1 2-1 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-12 2-14 2-16
3
Project Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Preselect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lock and Unlock Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1 3-2 3-5 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-16 3-17
i
Table of Contents
ii
Rename Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup and Restore Projects and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup a Symbol Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup Selected Symbols, Macros, or Device Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restore a Project or Symbol Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Reorganize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Page Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-19 3-20 3-21 3-22 3-22 3-23 3-24 3-25 3-26
4
Page Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Pages (Select, Refresh, Next, Previous) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Page Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save As Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clear Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Page Variables Globally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Page Variables in Title Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Browse Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigator Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-8 4-8 4-9 4-11 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-20 4-23 4-25 4-27 4-28 4-30 4-32 4-35 4-38 4-39 4-40 4-42 4-43 4-49
5
Schematic Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire/Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1 5-3 5-3 5-10 5-11
Table of Contents
Multiple Placement of Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Search Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parent and Child Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Macro Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Invisible Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreign Language Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circles and Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal Cross Reference – JIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal Cross Reference – IEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Wire Number Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Wire Number Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicate Wire Numbers Using Invisible Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repositioning Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text File on Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Schematic Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replace Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clear Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replace Device IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replace Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replace Symbol Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replace Part Number Globally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Wire Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linetype Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19 5-20 5-23 5-25 5-27 5-31 5-34 5-40 5-41 5-47 5-52 5-56 5-58 5-65 5-66 5-66 5-72 5-75 5-76 5-77 5-78 5-79 5-83 5-85 5-88 5-92 5-92 5-94 5-105 5-106 5-108 5-110 5-110 5-114 5-115 5-118 5-119 5-120 5-121 5-122 5-123 iii
Table of Contents
iv
Selecting Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSWire Layer Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Object Function (for drawing elements) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-124 5-125 5-127 5-132
6
Create Schematic Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Libraries and Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Creation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Part Number During Symbol Creation (for automatic assignment) . . . . Creating a Symbol from an AutoCAD DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DXF Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Creation Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Example Parent Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Example Child Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Example Cross Reference Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Example Device Type Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Example Programmable Controller (Parent) Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Example PLC (Child) Symbol (JIC Format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Example PLC (Child) Symbol (IEC Format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Example Terminal Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Pin Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Form C Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Signal Cross Reference Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Title Block Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Device Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete, Copy, Rename for Symbols, Macros, and Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Symbol, Macro, or Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Symbol, Macro, or Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename Symbol, Macro, or Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Symbol, Macro, or Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiline Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1 6-2 6-2 6-4 6-6 6-18 6-21 6-22 6-24 6-24 6-28 6-31 6-34 6-39 6-52 6-57 6-63 6-66 6-72 6-77 6-81 6-83 6-89 6-93 6-93 6-95 6-96 6-97 6-100
7
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grid Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Report Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Report Format Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1 7-2 7-2 7-4 7-5 7-7
Table of Contents
8
Printer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable Controller Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal and Plug ID Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device ID Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Plan Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin–Plug Plan Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Macro Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire/Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Styles (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Styles (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preferences (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preferences (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preferences (Standalone Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9 7-11 7-13 7-15 7-17 7-19 7-19 7-27 7-29 7-37 7-40 7-43 7-45 7-47 7-47 7-48 7-48 7-48 7-48 7-49 7-52 7-53 7-61 7-64 7-69
Plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Current Page (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Current Page (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Multiple Pages (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Multiple Pages (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plotting to Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLT Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWG Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DXF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plotting Selected Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Selecting Layer Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Custom Drawing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1 8-2 8-3 8-5 8-10 8-15 8-18 8-21 8-21 8-22 8-23 8-24 8-26 8-26 8-31 v
Table of Contents
9
vi
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Lists from RSWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Library Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device Type Full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device Type Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreign Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connections Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminals Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC–List Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compile Parts File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bill of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purchase Order List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Job Costing List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS Access Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comma Separated Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Checking Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unreferenced Signals Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device Without Parent Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1 9-3 9-4 9-4 9-4 9-4 9-4 9-5 9-5 9-6 9-6 9-6 9-6 9-7 9-7 9-7 9-9 9-10 9-10 9-18 9-18 9-18 9-18 9-19 9-19 9-19 9-20 9-21 9-21 9-22 9-23 9-24 9-25 9-27 9-28 9-29 9-30 9-30 9-30
Table of Contents
10 Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preliminary Panel Layout Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel Layout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel Layout/Schematic Comparison Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Layout Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-1 10-2 10-3 10-8 10-9
11 Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Plan Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steps of Terminal Plan Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal/External Connections and Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Plan Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Plan Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editor Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Editing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphical Terminal Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphical Terminal Plan Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphical Terminal Plan Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphical Terminal Plan Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin–Plug Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin–Plug Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphical Pin–Plug Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1 11-2 11-2 11-3 11-5 11-6 11-8 11-9 11-20 11-20 11-24 11-30 11-31 11-31 11-31
12 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Cable in the Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Cable in the Terminal Plan Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Cable Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Cable Device Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Cable Cross Reference Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1 12-2 12-7 12-8 12-11 12-14 12-21
13 Parts Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS–Access Database Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UI.mdb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ARTICLE.mdb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TDB.mdb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USER.mdb and DEFAULT.mdb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing the Parts Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Database Edit Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Database Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a Parts Database Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a Parts Database Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-1 13-2 13-3 13-10 13-14 13-17 13-18 13-19 13-20 13-23 13-24
vii
Table of Contents
Find a Parts Database Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit a Parts Database Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table View of Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Database Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Database Manipulation Outside of RSWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing the Database Outside of RSWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Field Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Database Complete Restructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Previewing the Parts Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing the Parts Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing from MS–Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing from RSWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-25 13-27 13-28 13-29 13-30 13-30 13-32 13-34 13-36 13-37 13-39 13-39 13-40
14 List Generator Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning List Generator Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List File Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sort Criteria Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Variable Data in Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arithmetic Operations With Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . String Manipulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Static Filter for Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab Formatting in Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Generator Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Database Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field Wiring Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Checking Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-1 14-3 14-6 14-11 14-14 14-15 14-17 14-22 14-23 14-28 14-29 14-32 14-34 14-36 14-37 14-41 14-45
15 Alternate Search Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15-1
A
RSWire Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
B
RSWire Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
C
Creating Symbol Icon Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1
Index
viii
Installation and Start–up
1 Installation and Start–up Unpacking The following items are included in the RSWireTM Designer package. When unpacking, if any of these items are missing or damaged, contact Rockwell Software or your RSWire distributor. Package contents:
Software CD Activation Floppy Disk(s) w/Serial Numbers (Not applicable for RSWire Detailer) Document On–Line and Resource CD
All Rockwell Software Inc. products include a serial number which identifies the software. For RSWire , these serial numbers will be on the Activation Software disk(s). These serial numbers are required to access technical support for your RSWire software, so please store the serial number in a secure location.
1-1
Installation and Start–up
Installation To install the software, follow the instructions in the Installation Guide booklet. Refer to the section of the Installation Guide that covers the version of RSWire (AutoCAD–compatible or Standalone) that you purchased. The installation process creates the following directory structure on your hard disk. Some of these directories may contain additional subdirectories. Rs
Bmp (not applicable to RSWire Standalone)
toolbar button bitmap files
Catalog
JIC (or other catalog)
block definitions device definitions macro definitions icon selection group files
Db
Custom Lg Logos
address files foreign language files title block logo files
Dbs
Db
parts database files font directory
Fonts Menu
Dialog Mnu
dialog (prompt) & help files menu files DWG and PLT plot files
Plot
1-2
Block Device Macro Wmf
Program
System
executables and DLL files
Project
Work
user’s project files
Syscon
List System
list generator files configuration files
Tmp
temporary (scratch) files
User
user interface files (upgrades only)
Work
working directory
Installation and Start–up
Starting RSWire 1.
In Windows you can run RSWire from the Start button menu or, if you have created an icon (shortcut) for RSWire on the desktop, you can double click on the icon.
2.
The RSWire set of menus (File, Edit, View, Insert, Format, etc.) will appear on the screen. RSWire is now ready to operate.
1-3
Installation and Start–up
Exiting From RSWire To exit from RSWire: Select the Exit function in the File pull–down menu. File New Open Close Break Save Save As Next Page Previous Page Print/Plot DXF Import Backup/Restore ACAD Menu Exit
You will then exit from RSWire. Exit without saving: RSWire will automatically save any changes you have made to the current drawing page when you exit from the software using the File > Exit function. If you wish to exit without saving the changes to the current drawing page, execute the File > Break function before exiting with the File > Exit function. Note
1-4
In RSWire version 4.0, if you use the “X” button in the upper right corner of the window to exit from the AutoCAD add–on version of RSWire, the software will ask if you wish to save changes to the current drawing. If you select Yes, the RSWire menu will be displayed the next time you enter AutoCAD. If this happens, you can select the File > Exit function to return to the AutoCAD menu.
Installation and Start–up
VBA The add–on version of RSWire functions as an application inside AutoCAD. This allows access to Visual Basic Applications (VBA) pertaining to RSWire. (The standalone version of RSWire does not support VBA functionality.) The Tools > VBA pull–down menu provides functions which allow a variety of parameters to be set within VBA.
Tools VBA Load Project Unload Project Run Macro Load Editor
Load Project Provides access to VBA.
Unload Project Takes the user out of VBA
Run Macro Allows the user to choose a subroutine or function to run and debug its VBA code while in VBA Run Mode.
Load Editor Allows the user to edit and debug VBA code and to create forms while in the Design Mode.
Reference Guide For an explanation of VBA within RSWire, refer to the RSWire Visual Basic Application (VBA) Reference Guide.
1-5
Installation and Start–up
Command Aliases (AutoCAD Add–On Version) Keyboard command aliases (shortcuts) are available for functions in the AutoCAD add–on version of RSWire. To see a list of these aliases, view the ACAD.PGP file in the RS\MENU\MNU directory.
1-6
Installation and Start–up
Graphics Tablet Configuration (AutoCAD Add–On Version) A graphics tablet (digitizer) can be used with the AutoCAD add–on version of RSWire for drawing and for selecting symbols, macros, menu functions, etc. A tablet template drawing named RSWIRETAB.DWG is provided in the RS\WORK directory. This drawing is sized for a 11 x 11 inch tablet and contains a variety of JIC symbols, macros, and RSWire commands. You can plot this drawing and use it on your tablet. Configure the Template: 1.
Mount the template drawing on your tablet.
2.
Open a new or existing drawing in AutoCAD (not RSWire).
3.
On the command line enter the command: TABLET
4.
When prompted for an option (ON/OFF/CAL/CFG), enter: CFG
5.
When prompted for the number of tablet menus desired, enter: 4
6.
You will be prompted to pick three points for each menu area on the template followed by prompts for number of column and rows. Pick the points indicated on the following diagram and enter the indicated column and row values.
7.
When prompted to define the Screen Area, select the two points indicated in the diagram.
1-7
Installation and Start–up
MENU AREA 1 25 Columns 9 Rows
MENU AREA 2 11 Columns 8 Rows
SCREEN AREA
MENU AREA 3 3 Columns 8 Rows
MENU AREA 4 25 Columns 7 Rows
Refer to the AutoCAD manual for additional information on configuring tablets.
1-8
Introduction to RSWire
2 Introduction to RSWire This section introduces RSWireTM Designer and explains the use and conventions of this reference manual. A description of menu functions and their use is included.
RSWire Overview The RSWire Concept RSWireTM Designer is an advanced productivity tool for designers of electrical control systems. Because of its customizable, open architecture, RSWire can also be adapted to other applications such as hydraulics, pneumatics, and process control. RSWire allows schematic diagrams to be rapidly constructed using pre–defined symbols and macros. Wires are automatically broken at symbol connection points and sections of drawings can be cut and pasted to save time. Many functions are performed automatically by the software including the generation of unique device IDs for each symbol, cross referencing of related symbols (such as contacts and coils), and numbering of wires. RSWire recognizes logical interconnections between devices in a schematic. A wire is recognized as a wire and not just a graphic line. The system can check for errors such as duplicate device IDs while the schematic is being created. The software can perform automatic cross referencing and wire numbering. In combination with a parts database,the software can automatically generate a variety of support documentation such as terminal diagrams, cable plans, panel layouts, bills of material, and a job costing analysis. Because work is divided into projects, many related drawing pages can be included in these automatic functions. The AutoCAD add–on version of RSWire runs as an application inside AutoCAD to take advantage of that software’s drawing capabilities. There are add–on versions for AutoCAD Release 14 and AutoCAD 2000. RSWire Standalone is a self–contained software system: it does not run inside another CAD software package. There are standalone versions that incorporate the AutoCAD “OEM engines” for AutoCAD Release 14 and AutoCAD 2000, offering DWG file compatibility with the corresponding RSWire add–on versions.
2-1
Introduction to RSWire
RSWire Functionality This chart shows the interrelationship of RSWire functions.
RSWire
CUSTOMIZE:
Page Format Title Block Dialog Boxes Pull–down Menus Language Lists List Formats Symbol Libraries
STRUCTURE
Project Installations Locations
SCHEMATIC DRAWINGS
Symbols Device Types Lines Macros Fields Cross References
CREATE TERMINAL / CABLE PLAN
EXTERNAL INTERFACES
LAN Operation CAD Software (DXF, DWG Files) PLC Programming Software
2-2
LISTS
Master Parts List Quantified Parts (PO) List Bill of Material Job Costing List Wiring List Labels
Introduction to RSWire
Using This Manual Purpose This manual is a reference for the operation of the RSWire system. Information provided in this manual is sufficient for learning how to use the majority of the software’s operating functions and advanced customization capabilities. However, to realize the full potential of RSWire it is recommended that you participate in the training programs offered by Rockwell Software. These training programs are accelerated learning courses designed to ensure quick startup for users, and mastery of the software’s advanced customizing and interfacing features for system administrators and key operators.
Manual Organization The sections of this manual are organized into four main groups: I.
II.
III.
IV.
INSTALLATION / INTRODUCTION 1. Installation and Start–up 2. Introduction to RSWire PROJECTS AND SCHEMATICS 3. Project Management 4. Page Management 5. Schematic Elements 6. Create Schematic Elements 7. Settings 8. Plotting LAYOUTS, LISTINGS, TERMINAL PLANS AND CABLES 9. Reports 10. Panel Layout 11. Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan 12. Cables CONFIGURATION AND CUSTOMIZATION 13. Parts Database 14. List Generator Configuration 15. Alternate Search Paths
2-3
Introduction to RSWire
Manual Conventions RSWire Functions Various functions are available from pull–down menus at the top of the screen. They are accessed by pointing the cursor and clicking the mouse button. In this manual, the first reference to a pull–down menu function is shown as a series of commands in bold type separated by arrows that indicate different levels of the menu. For example:
Draw Wire 3 Phase The above command indicates that one should go to the Draw pull–down menu, select the Wire function and then select the 3 Phase function on the submenu. Draw Wire Text Logical Box Field Graphic Dimension Hatch...
Continuous Center Dashed 3 Phase 90 Degree Down 90 Degree Up Multiline Repeat Last
Keyboard Use If a specific key on the keyboard is to be pressed. The name of the key will be shown enclosed in < > characters. For example: <Enter> (press the Enter key)
2-4
Introduction to RSWire
Menus and Functions RSWire functions are accessible through pull–down menus at the top of the screen. Functions can also be activated by selecting them in dialog boxes. The AutoCAD add–on version of RSWire also allows functions to be entered on the command line. These command line functions are listed in the RSWire help file under Commands. Pull–down menu functions are shown on the following page. The numbers following the first level menu functions indicate which submenu will appear. In the AutoCAD add–on version of RSWire, some of these functions are also displayed as side menu functions to provide faster access during work sessions. The initial side menu is: MAIN Sym–Crea Symbol Macro Icon
the Manage > Symbol (create) submenu the Insert > Symbol by Name function the Insert > Macro by Name function the Insert > Select Icon function
Continuous Wire 3 Text Box Field
the Draw > Wire > Continuous function the Draw > Wire > 3 Phase function the Draw > Text function functions from Draw > Graphic > Box and Draw > Logical Box menus the Draw > Field function
Delete Move Stretch Copy
the Modify > Delete function the Modify > Move function the Modify > Stretch function the Modify > Copy function
System
the Tools > System Settings function
Sym–Edit Page Undo Zoom
the Modify > Symbol function functions from Manage > Page menus the Edit > Undo function the View > Zoom > Window function
You can return to the initial side menu from one of the other side menus by selecting the MAIN menu header.
2-5
Introduction to RSWire
Pulldown Menus: Below are the main pulldown menus and their submenus.
File Edit View Insert Format Draw Modify Manage Tools Reports Help File
New --------------> Page Open Project Close Break Save Preview... Save As Plot Config... Next Page Current Page... Previous Page Print/Plot --------------> Multiple Pages... DXF Import ------------------------------------> Backup/Restore ACAD Menu Exit
Edit
Undo Cut to Clipboard Copy Clipboard Paste Paste Special Browse Copy...
Save Current Page New DXF Page... DXF Import... Save as DWG... Save as Block...
View
Refresh Page Redraw Regen Zoom -------------------------------------------> Pan ----------------------> Real Time Aerial View Point Quadrant... Left Navigator Right List Up Command Dispatch Down Toolbars...
2-6
Insert Real Time Previous Window Dynamic Scale Center In Out All Extents
Select Icon... Symbol by Name... Macro by Name... Raster Image... Text On Drawing... Insert... Modify... Block --------------------> Explode Image... -------------------------------------> Frame Image Clip
Introduction to RSWire
Format
Layer... Color... Linetype... Text Style Dimension Style... Multiline Style...
Draw
Wire -----------------------------------------------------------> Create Text... Logical Box ---> Conn. Point Delete Conn. Point Field Graphic ------------------------------------> Line Dimension ---------> Linear Polyline Aligned Hatch... Box Empty Ordinate Box Filled Radius Arc Diameter Circle Angular Ellipse Baseline Continue Leader Tolerance Center Mark Oblique Align Text Style Override Update
Continuous Center Dashed 3 Phase 90 Degree Down 90 Degree Up Multiline Repeat Last
Modify
Power-Editor Symbol Line Text Field Wire Number Delete Copy Move Stretch Properties...
Manage
Project 1> Installation 2> Page 3> Symbol 4> Macro 5> Device Type 6> Parts Database 7> Foreign Language 8>
1> 2> Delete... Delete Copy... Copy Modify... Rename Rename... Project Preselect Page Count... Reorganize
6> New/Modify... Delete... Copy... Rename...
3> Clear Delete Copy Rename Move Modify Page Variables Update
7> Edit Form... Edit Table... Duplicates Check...
4> New/Modify... Reference Point Device ID Connection Point Delete Conn. Point Cross Ref. Position Save Cancel Delete... Copy... Rename...
5> New/Modify... Reference Point Select Items Save Cancel Delete... Copy... Rename...
8> New... Delete... Edit Phrases...
2-7
Introduction to RSWire
Tools
Project Settings... System Settings... Wire Number ------------------------------------------------------------> Automatic... Terminal/Pin-Plug Plan ---> Edit Terminals/Pin-Plugs... Manual... Panel Layout... Generate Graphical Plan... Delete... Wiring Diagram Layout Create Icon I/O Device ID Replace --------------------------------------------------------> Part Number... Wire Number... Osnap Symbol... VBA * -------------------------> Load Project Unload Project Text... Install Tablet Run Macro Symbol Text... Customize Menus... Load Editor Device ID... Preferences... * Not in Standalone version
Reports
Project 1> Libraries 2> Connections 3> Terminals 4> PLC-List... Parts 5> MS Access Reports 6> Comma Separated 7> Error Checking 8>
1> Project Full... Project Brief... Installations... Page Full... Page Brief... Table of Contents...
4> Terminals... Terminal Strips... 6> Preview... 9> Print... 9>
Help
RSWire Help AutoCAD Help Connect to Internet About RSWire...
2-8
2> Macros... Symbols... Device Type Full... Device Type Brief... Parts Foreign Languages... Page Formats...
5> Compile Parts File Master List... Bill of Materials... Purchase Order... Job Costing... Dimension List...
7> Project Libraries Connections Terminals PLC-List... Parts Error Checking
3> Wire List... Wire Labels... Cable List.. Field Wire... Signals... 8> Unreferenced Signals... Device Without Parent... 9> Master List... Bill of Materials... Purchase Order... Job Costing... Dimension List...
Introduction to RSWire
Third Mouse Button Menu If your mouse has a third (middle) button configured to function in Windows, you can press the third button to display the following pop–up menu. This menu includes a selection of functions found in the pull–down menus. (On Standalone systems, this menu appears when the right mouse button is clicked – the third button activates the pan function.) Delete Move Copy Modify Symbol Select Icon... Navigator Browse Copy... Open New Page... Refresh Page Pan Window Zoom Extents OSNAP >
Note
If the third button menu does not appear, enter the command mbuttonpan on the AutoCAD command line. Then enter the value 0. (Entering a value of 1 makes the third button activate the Pan function.)
Toolbars Toolbars are groups of buttons that can be positioned along the edge of the drawing area or as floating “palettes.” These buttons allow a variety of RSWire functions to be accessed more quickly than using a pull–down menu. When you place the cursor over one of these buttons and pause for a few seconds, a label will appear describing the function.
Toolbar Toolbar Handle
2-9
Introduction to RSWire
Each toolbar has a handle. By placing the cursor on the handle, you can drag the toolbar to different positions at the edge of the drawing area. You can also drag a toolbar into the drawing area to create a floating toolbar. Once the toolbars are positioned you can set the position so that the toolbars will always appear in the same place. Use the Tools > Preferences function. Select the Profiles tab, make sure the RSWire profile is highlighted and then select the Set Current button. Command Line / Text Window The command line is an area at the bottom of the drawing screen where the most recently executed commands are displayed. The software also displays prompts here for certain functions. By placing the cursor on its border, the command line area can be dragged to the top of the drawing screen or out onto the desktop to become a floating text window. The floating window can display more lines and therefore is useful for such functions as View > List. You can drag the floating window back to the drawing screen to reattach it. You can also display a floating text window without moving the command line by pressing the
Regenerating drawing. Command: ECS_START
Text Window Command Line
Command: Command: Command: All/Center/Dynamic/Extents/Left/Previous/Vmax/W First corner: Other corner: Command:
2-10
Introduction to RSWire
Help Screens Online help information is available to describe RSWire functions. Many of the dialog boxes displayed by RSWire have a Help button which can be selected to display information. Windows Help File Edit Bookmark Options Help Contents Index
Back
Device Types A device type is a definition that specifies how many and what type of child symbols are associated with a parent symbol. For example, 2 normally open and 2 normally closed contacts for a 4 pole relay. The device type can also specify a cross reference symbol to indicate contact usage near the parent symbol.
The following buttons are available in the Windows help screens: Contents – Select a topic from the help table of contents. Index – View a list of indexed topics in the help file. Back – Display the previously selected help screen. Print – Print the current help screen. The help file can also be accessed through the “Help” pull–down menu in the upper right corner of the screen. This provides a function called RSWire Help which displays the main help file screen (from which you can select the Contents or Index tab). Help RSWire Help AutoCAD Help Connect to Internet About RSWire
2-11
Introduction to RSWire
Dialog Boxes When the software requires information from you, a dialog box will be displayed that contains fields for the appropriate data. For example, the following New/Modify Symbol dialog box allows you to specify various parameters for a new symbol. New/Modify Symbol Symbol Name:
Radio Button Checkbox
List...
XCAB4REF
Preferred Direction Vertical
Horizontal
Snapmode: Endpoint
Data Field Description: Example cable cross reference symbol Search Language Text... Symbol Group:
Buttons
CS3 Cable Cross Reference Symbol OK
Cancel
Help...
You can select a data field by pointing the cursor and clicking the button. You can also move from field to field by pressing the
Introduction to RSWire
You can change the label text that appears in the dialog boxes by editing the file Rs\Menu\Dialog\Dcl_eng.txt (for English versions).
2-13
Introduction to RSWire
Optional Software Modules RSWire is available as a base system to which optional modules are added. RSWire Base System Functions include:
2-14
Schematic creation and editing Single and 3 phase lines (wires) Logical and drawing lines Move and modify routines Real time cross referencing Real time error checking Auto device ID assignment Auto wire break Parent/child symbol relationships Fields (remote location areas) Electrical symbol library Macro library Multi–page view (Cut & Paste) function Text on drawing function Programmable Controller List Automatic wire number assignment Multiple language text DWG and DXF file support
Introduction to RSWire
Optional Modules Parts Database – Parts database functions and panel layout Allows access to the parts database and master list function. Allows assignment of part numbers to device IDs. Auto generation of: Master parts list, Bill of materials, P.O. list, Job costing list. Allows creation and editing of language text database. Panel Layout mode. Prompts the user with layout symbols for creation of panel layout drawings based on schematics. Wire List – Allows creation of a wire (connection) list and related output. Point to point wire list Wire labels
Terminal Plans – Edit and graphically display terminal information.
Terminal plan editor Graphical terminal plan drawings Cable list Field wiring list Terminal connection list
Wiring Diagram/Shortest Distance Generator – Generates wiring diagrams based on schematics. Requires Parts Database and Wire List options. Separate instructions provided.
Wiring diagrams Connection list on wiring diagram Shortest distance on wire list
DeviceNet Module – Allows generation of DeviceNet layout drawings and related connection lists. Requires Parts Database and Wire List options. Separate instructions provided.
Network layout diagrams Symbol library Component parts data Connection list generator
PLC Schematic Generator – Allows automatic generation of PLC I/O module wiring diagrams. Separate instructions provided.
Automatic PLC drawing generation
2-15
Introduction to RSWire
Using RSWire Generally, doing a job with RSWire involves the following stages:
2-16
1.
If the optional database is to be used to allow the automatic generation of support documentation, component (parts) information must be entered or imported into the database. This information includes catalog numbers, manufacturer, price, dimensions, etc. If the same database is to be used for all jobs, this data entry step will not be necessary for subsequent projects unless new components are to be included. Part numbers can be assigned to symbols in the schematics.
2.
Create the schematic drawings. For the first project, most RSWire users create custom page formats, title blocks, symbols, etc., to match existing company standards. This customization is not necessary for subsequent projects.
3.
Generate panel layout drawings. RSWire has an optional semi–automatic panel layout mode that will prompt the user for each component in the schematic diagram. The user then positions the component as desired in the layout drawing.
4.
Generate a connection list. This automatically generated list contains connection information used in the terminal plan and other documentation lists.
5.
Generate terminal plan. RSWire automatically places terminal connection information on a graphical diagram page. The user can edit this plan as desired, for example, to assign cables and conduits.
6.
Generate documentation lists. Using information in the schematics and in the database, RSWire can automatically generate other useful lists such as bills of material, wire lists, wire labels, component labels, job cost analysis, programmable controller lists, and so on.
Project Management
3 Project Management This section explains the concept of projects, which is how work is organized in RSWireTM Designer. Project organization is presented first followed by sections on how to create, delete, copy, modify, rename and back up projects. The following sections are included:
Project Organization Create New Project Project Preselect Lock and Unlock Project Delete Project Copy Project Modify Project Renumber Project Rename Project Project List Backup and Restore Projects and Symbols Project Reorganize Project Page Count
3-1
Project Management
Project Organization A project is a collection of work done in RSWire, all of which relates to the same job. This work includes both graphical drawings (schematics, layouts, etc.) and support documentation (part lists, labels, connection information). By associating every drawing and list with a specific project, the software is able to recognize which information to use when performing automatic functions such as list generation, cross referencing, wire numbering, cost analysis, and so on. PROJECT Drawings
Schematic diagrams Panel layouts Graphical terminal plans
Documentation
Bill of materials Wire list Terminal list Purchase order list Wire and device labels Job cost analysis etc.
Installations and Locations – Projects can be subdivided into installations and locations. These usually correspond to physical locations. For example, the project could consist of an entire production facility while each production line within the facility is designated as an installation and each control cabinet on a line is a location.
3-2
Project Management
PROJECT
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION LOCATION
LOCATION
LOCATION
LOCATION
When graphical (drawing) pages are created, they are assigned to a specific installation and location. (This is what creates the installation and location.) When support documentation is generated, it can also be sorted by installation and location. Drawing page numbers within a single installation must be unique, even if they are in different locations (see Project 1, Installation 2 in the following illustration – page numbers in the second location continue from the first). PROJECT 1
INSTALLATION 1
INSTALLATION 2
LOCATION
LOCATION
4
8
3
2
4
7
2 1
(No Installation or Location)
LOCATION
4
3 1
PROJECT 2
6 5
3
Drawing Pages
2 1
3-3
Project Management
The use of installations and locations is optional. In Project 2 shown in the previous figure, no installations or locations have been assigned. All drawing pages in the project, therefore, are part of the same number sequence. Also, an installation does not have to be divided into locations. Some RSWire functions require an installation and location name. In these cases, if the user has not assigned an installation or location name, the system will use the default installation name NO_INST and location name NO_LOC. When a project is created (see page 3-5) the system creates a directory for it in the RS\PROJECT\WORK subdirectory. Project directories are assigned a short name such as: ______10.EC1 ______11.EC1 The file NAMES.EC2 in the RS\PROJECT\WORK directory describes which of these directories belongs to each project. In each project’s directory, separate subdirectories are automatically created for each installation and also for various support documentation.
3-4
Project Management
Create New Project To create a new project, use the File > New > Project function. Select:
File New Project The following New Project dialog box will appear. New Project Project
Title Block Macro
Default Page Macro
Select ...
Select ...
Symbol Library JIC Use Parameters From: Address File
Project Description Job Number Drawing Number Search Language Text... Description...
Parameter... OK
Settings... Cancel
Parts Database...
Help...
The following fields are provided in this dialog box: Project – Enter the name of the project, up to 14 characters (no spaces allowed). Symbol Library – The name of the subdirectory containing the graphic symbols to be used in this project. The selection here will be JIC, IEC, or another library of control symbols that exists under the RS\CATALOG directory.
3-5
Project Management
Use Parameters From – You may use parameters and settings from an existing project. This eliminates the need to make the same settings for the new project. If you wish to do this, select the name of the existing project from the drop–down list. The parameters that carry over will include the Project Description, Job Number, Drawing Number, as well as the settings from the Project Parameters and Project Settings dialogs (see below). Title Block Macro – The name of a macro file (a stored combination of drawing elements) that will automatically be placed on the drawing as a title block. The default entry is TITLED. This is one of the title block macros provided with RSWire. The user can also create custom title block macros. Use the Select button to display the macro list from which selections can be made (you can make wildcard entries). Note
Before you can use the Select button you must first have opened a page that uses the current symbol catalog. You must also remove any default entry from the Title Block Macro field. Default Page Macro – This field allows a macro to be named that will automatically be placed on every page of the project. Use the Select button to display the macro list from which selections can be made. Address File – A text file containing information such as the user’s street address which the software can automatically place on lists so that the user need not enter it manually. These files can be created or edited with the Tools > System Settings function (Address File tab). Project Description – A brief project description (49 characters) may be entered in this field which can be placed in title blocks of drawings and on various lists created by the system. Job Number, Drawing Number – These fields for project descriptions or identifiers which can be included in drawings and documentation. Project Description 4 through 20 – These are additional fields for project descriptions or identifiers which can be included in drawings and documentation. These fields are accessed through the use of the scroll bar to the right of the fields. Search Language Text – Selecting this button accesses the language text database, allowing you to insert language text phrases into the Project Description fields (put the cursor in the desired field first). See page 5-32 for more on language text. Four option buttons, Description, Parameters, Settings, and Parts Database are available in the New Project dialog box. These allow additional information and settings to be entered.
3-6
Project Management
Description Button – Selecting this button produces a dialog box with fields for entering ten lines (49 characters per line) of additional project description. There is also a Search Language Text button that allows you to select and enter language text phrases (see page 5-32). Enter the desired description and select OK to continue. Project Description Description Description Description Description Description Description Description Description Description Description Search Language Text... OK
Cancel
Parameter Button – Selecting this button displays the Project Parameters dialog box which allows various project–wide default values to be altered.
3-7
Project Management
Project Parameters Default Device ID Display:
Device ID – Page – Line No.
Signal Cross Reference Analysis Type:
Ascending by Inst. and Pages Language
Default Text Size Device ID
0.1250
Connection Point
0.1250
Strip/Plug Device ID
0.0000
2:
Terminal/Plug ID Cross Reference
0.1250 0.1250
3:
Signal Cross Reference
0.1250
1:
English
Default Grid Default Text Style
ROMANS
Adjust Device ID When Symbols Are Moved
X
0.5000
Y
0.5000
Wire Numbering Mode: Wire Number Same Over Terminal Connection List/Term. Plan: Replace CP With I/O Address OK
Note
Cancel
Help...
Values shown in inches. The following fields are available in this dialog box:
3-8
Project Management
Default Device ID Display – This field allows the user to select the format that the system will use to assign device IDs. By clicking on the down arrow button, the following device ID formats will be listed: Device ID Format
Description
Example
Device ID - Seq.No.
Device ID tag and sequential number
PB1
Device ID - Page - Line No.
Device ID tag, page number, line number
PB109
Page-Device ID - Line No.
Page number, Device ID tag, line number
1PB09
Device ID - Continuous Line No.
Device ID tag, continuous line number
PB86
Group-Device ID - Seq.No.
Prompt, Device ID tag, sequential number
APB1
Seq.No. - Device ID
Sequential number, Device ID tag
1PB
Page - Line No. - Device ID
Page number, line number, Device ID tag
109PB
Page Line - Device ID - Seq. No.* Page line, Device ID tag, sequential number
10PB1
Page-Device ID - Seq. No.
1PB1
Page number, Device ID tag,sequential number
* There are three versions of this format: Page Checked, Line Checked and Project Checked. These differ in what the the software checks for duplicate IDs: the current page, the current line, or the entire project. Note
“Device ID tag” is the mnemonic abbreviation (such as PB for pushbutton) associated with a given type of symbol. The “Continuous Line No.” format causes line numbering on each page to begin where the previous page ended. The “Group” format will place a number (or other character) in front of every device ID. When the user changes this character when placing a symbol, all similar symbols placed thereafter (in the same work session) will have the new character in the device ID. Signal Cross Ref. Analysis Type – This field determines how signal cross references are analyzed. Choices include Ascending Order by installations and pages (default), Pairs (signal cross references that exist only in pairs – page order not taken into account), or Ascending Numbers (ascending number order for all cross references – page order not taken into account). Language 1, 2, 3 – Certain descriptive text strings in a drawing can be displayed in up to three different languages simultaneously. In the Language fields, the user selects which languages will be used. By selecting the down arrow button the following list of languages can be selected from: English, German, French, Spanish, Dutch, Italian.
3-9
Project Management
Default Text Style – Allows the user to define the size of various types of drawing text. Fields are provided for Device ID, Connection Point, Strip/Plug Device ID, Terminal Device ID, Cross Reference, and Signal Cross Reference. These values will be used provided that the Use Text Height from Project Parameters checkbox is set in the General Defaults dialog box (see page 7-19). If this checkbox is not set, text heights defined for each symbol will be used. Default Grid – Allows the user to define the default size of the grid in the drawing area. Adjust Device ID When Symbols Are Moved – This checkbox determines if the device ID of an existing symbol will be adjusted automatically if the symbol is moved to a new position (with the Modify > Move function). This affects only projects that use one of the device ID formats based on page and line number. Select the checkbox to enable automatic device ID adjustment. Note
The device IDs of symbols that have a cross reference relationship are not changed when moved. This must be done with the Modify > Symbol > Device ID function. Wire Numbering System: Wire Number Same Over Terminal – Selects whether or not the same wire number will be assigned before and after a terminal when wires are numbered. When a checkmark appears in the box, the same wire number will appear before and after the terminal symbol. If the box is empty, a different wire number will be assigned after the terminal as shown below. 15
TB2
16
Connection List/Term. Plan: Replace CP With I/O Address – Selects whether or not to replace PLC connection point text in the connection list with the full PLC I/O address. For example, for input 05 of a PLC module (rack 01, module 02) selecting this toggle will replace “05” in the connection list with “I0102/05.” When the project parameters are entered as desired, select the OK button to enter them and return to the New Project dialog box. Settings Button – Selecting this button displays the Project Settings dialog box which allows various page and display setting values to be altered. These settings are described in Section 7 (see Page 7-19). Parts Database Button – Selecting this button allows you to select or create an ODBC data source name that points to database file other than the default parts database. No setting is necessary here if you plan to use the default parts database.
3-10
Project Management
To finish creating the project, select the OK button in the New Project dialog box. The system will create the necessary directory for the project and drawing pages can then be created. Immediately after creating the new project, the software will display the New Page dialog box allowing you to begin creating drawing pages. See page 4-11.
3-11
Project Management
Project Preselect Certain functions that affect an entire project require you to select a project so that the software knows which project to act upon. When you open a drawing page (with the File > Open functions) the software will treat the project to which the page belongs as the currently selected project. However, at the beginning of a work session before any pages have been opened, or if you have been working on one project and wish to make settings in a different project, you can use the Manage > Project > Project Preselect function to select another project.
Manage Project Project Preselect The Project Preselect dialog box will appear listing the names of all the projects on your system. Project Preselect Project: TOOL ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE WEB
Search... Lock Project OK
Unlock Project Cancel
Help...
Select a project from the list by pointing the cursor and clicking the left mouse button. The selected project name will be highlighted in the list and will appear in the Project field above the list. Use the Search button to display a list of projects with descriptions. You can also make selections from this list. Select the OK button to open the project, making it the currently selected project.
3-12
Project Management
Lock and Unlock Project When operating RSWire on a network you can use the Lock Project toggle in the Project Preselect dialog box (see previous page) to prevent another user on the network from accessing the same project. This is important during such critical operations as automatic wire numbering, project renumbering, project parameter modification, project/installation deletion, or project/installation renaming. To Lock a Project: 1.
Select the File > Project Preselect function. The Project Preselect dialog box will appear.
2.
Select the desired project name from the displayed list.
3.
Select the Lock Project checkbox.
4.
Select the OK button to lock the project.
The project will remain locked to other users until you unlock the project. To Unlock a Project: 1.
Select the File > Project Preselect function. The Project Preselect dialog box will appear.
2.
Select the desired project name from the displayed list.
3.
Select the Unlock Project checkbox.
4.
Select the OK button to unlock the project.
3-13
Project Management
Delete Project The Manage > Project > Delete function will erase a set of project files from the system. Warning: Deleting a project will erase all the files for the selected project from the computer.
Select:
Manage Project Delete The Select: Project dialog box will appear, listing all the projects currently on your system. Select: Project Project: TOOL ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE WEB
Search...
OK
Cancel
Help...
Select a project from the list by pointing the cursor and clicking the left mouse button. The selected project name will be highlighted in the list and will appear in the Project field above the list. Use the Search button to display a list of projects with descriptions. You can also make selections from this list.
3-14
Project Management
To delete the selected project, select the OK button. The message “Select OK to delete the project:” will appear in a dialog box along with the project name. Select the OK button in this dialog box to delete the project. Select the Cancel button to cancel the deletion.
3-15
Project Management
Copy Project The Manage > Project > Copy function creates a copy of an existing project under a different name. Select:
Manage Project Copy The Copy Project dialog box will appear, listing all the projects currently on your system. Copy Project From:
To:
TOOL ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE WEB
Search... OK
Cancel
Help...
Select the project to be copied. Its name will appear in the From field. Use the Search button to display a list of projects with descriptions. Enter the name that the copy of the project is to have in the To field. Select the OK button to create a copy of the project.
3-16
Project Management
Modify Project The Manage > Project > Modify function allows you to alter project parameters (descriptions, device ID format, etc.) that were entered when the project was originally created. Select:
Manage Project Modify The Select: Project dialog box will appear, listing all the projects currently on your system. Select: Project Project: TOOL ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE WEB
Search...
OK
Cancel
Help...
Select a project from the list by pointing the cursor and clicking. The selected project name will be highlighted in the list and will appear in the Project field above the list. Use the Search button to display a list of projects with descriptions. Select the OK button to continue. The Modify Project dialog box will appear.
3-17
Project Management
Modify Project Project
Title Block Macro
Default Page Macro
Select ...
Select ...
Symbol Library JIC
Address File No. of Pages:
1
Project Description Job Number Drawing Number Search Language Text... Description...
Parameter... OK
Settings... Cancel
Parts Database...
Help...
This dialog box is the same as the New Project dialog box, except that the Project name field cannot be accessed or changed. A No. of Pages field also appears. The other fields, including those accessed with the Description, Parameter, Settings and Parts Database buttons, will display information for the selected project, and this may be modified. For descriptions of these fields, see page 3-5, New Project. When the desired modifications have been made, select the OK button to put the modifications into effect.
3-18
Project Management
Rename Project The Manage > Project > Rename function allows you to assign a new name to an existing project. Select:
Manage Project Rename The Rename Project dialog box will appear, listing all the projects currently on your system. Rename Project From:
To:
TOOL ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE WEB
Search... OK
Cancel
Help...
Select the project to be renamed. Its name will appear in the From field. Use the Search button to display a list of projects with descriptions. Enter the new name that the project is to have in the To field. Select the OK button to rename the project.
3-19
Project Management
Project List To generate a list of all the projects currently on your system, use the Reports > Project > Project Full function. Select:
Reports Project Project Full For more information on this function, see page 9-4.
3-20
Project Management
Backup and Restore Projects and Symbols The Backup/Restore function allows you to make backup copies of project files and symbol catalogs. The backups are stored as .ZIP files. The symbol catalog backup will also store macros and device types found in the selected symbol catalog directory. The restore function allows you to load backed–up projects or catalogs back into your system. Select:
File Backup/Restore When you select the Backup/Restore function, the Backup/Restore dialog box appears. Backup/Restore Backup/Restore Path: Browse
A: Backup Select Project
Restore Select Catalog
Selected: Symbol
Macro
Device
Available for Restoring
Selected: OK
Cancel
Help
Save...
3-21
Project Management
Backup a Project
Note
1.
In the Backup/Restore Path field, enter the drive and path to the directory where the backup is to be stored. The default path is A:. Use the Browse button to locate an existing directory on your system. Select the Save button to save the path you have entered for future work sessions.
2.
Select the Backup button.
3.
Pick the Select Project button.
4.
The Select Project dialog box will appear. Select the project that you wish to back up and select the OK button. The name of the selected project will be displayed in the Selected field of the Backup/Restore dialog box.
Do not enter project names directly in the Selected field, use the Select Project button. 5.
Select the OK button in the Backup/Restore dialog box to create the backup .ZIP file.
For each backup file created, a similarly named file with a .EC3 extension will be created which contains the name of the project contained in the .ZIP file. Important
It is recommended that you only save one project per floppy disk set. (If you backup one or more projects on a floppy disk and then do another backup that fills the first disk and extends to a second disk, you will only be able to restore the last project – the other projects on the first disk will become inaccessible.)
Note
Whenever project settings are saved (the various tabs under Tools > Project Settings), configuration files are created in a Config subdirectory under the directory for that project. These configuration files are automatically saved with a project backup and are restored automatically when the project is restored.
Backup a Symbol Catalog
3-22
1.
In the Backup/Restore Path field, enter the drive and path to the directory where the backup is to be stored. The default path is A:. Select the Save button to save the path you have entered for future work sessions.
2.
Select the Backup button.
3.
Pick the Select Catalog button.
Project Management
4.
Note
The Select Path–Catalog dialog box will appear. Select the catalog that you wish to back up and select the OK button. The name of the selected catalog will be displayed in the Selected field of the Backup/Restore dialog box.
Do not enter catalog names directly in the Selected field, use the Select Catalog button. 5.
Select the OK button in the Backup/Restore dialog box to create the backup .ZIP file.
For each backup file created, a similarly named file with a .EC3 extension will be created which contains the name of the catalog contained in the .ZIP file. Important
It is recommended that you only save one catalog per floppy disk set. (If you backup one or more catalogs on a floppy disk and then do another backup that fills the first disk and extends to a second disk, you will only be able to restore the last catalog –– the other catalogs on the first disk will become inaccessible.)
Backup Selected Symbols, Macros, or Device Types You can back up selected symbols, macros or device types. You can then restore the selected items on another computer or in a different symbol catalog without copying over an entire catalog. Use the following procedure: 1.
In the Backup/Restore Path field, enter the drive and path to the directory where the backup is to be stored. The default path is A:. Use the Browse button to locate an existing directory on your system. Select the Save button to save the path you have entered for future work sessions.
2.
Select the Backup button.
3.
Pick the Select Catalog button.
4.
The Select Path–Catalog dialog box will appear. Select the catalog from which you wish to make the backup and select the OK button. The name of the selected catalog will be displayed in the Selected field of the Backup/Restore dialog box.
5.
Select the Symbol, Macro or Device Type button depending on the type of item you wish to back up. (If you are not backing up the entire catalog you must create separate files for each type of item.)
6.
The Select Files dialog box will appear, listing all the symbols, macros, or device types in the selected catalog. Select (highlight) the items you wish to include in the backup file. Select the OK button to continue. 3-23
Project Management
7.
Select the OK button in the Backup/Restore dialog box to create the backup file.
For each backup file created, a similarly named file with a .EC3 extension will be created which contains the names of the symbols, macros or device types contained in the .ZIP file. When you restore the backed up items (see following procedure), they will be added to the selected catalog path. Any existing item in the catalog having the same name as an item in the backup file will be overwritten by the backed up item.
Restore a Project or Symbol Catalog
3-24
1.
In the Backup/Restore Path field, enter the drive and path to the directory where the backup files are stored. Use the Browse button to locate an existing directory on your system.
2.
Select the Restore button.
3.
Names of the available projects or catalogs will be displayed in the Available for Restoring field. Pick the desired project or catalog. The selected name will appear in the Selected field.
4.
Select the OK button in the Backup/Restore dialog box to restore the project or catalog.
5.
If a project with the same name already exists on your system you will be prompted “Project already exists. Overwrite?” Select the Yes button to overwrite the existing project. Select No or Cancel to abort the restore operation.
Project Management
Project Reorganize This function re–creates the project database file, Oldb.mdb. The function is only needed in cases where your project data becomes corrupted. Select:
Manage Project Reorganize The software will display the Project Preselect dialog box. Select the project that you wish to reorganize and select OK. The software will open each page in the project and store the relevant information in the project’s Oldb.mdb file. When this process is complete the software will display a text logfile that lists all the pages that were processed.
3-25
Project Management
Project Page Count This function updates the total page count for the project. Ordinarily this is done automatically, but occasionally after performing multiple page move and delete functions, the page count can become inaccurate. If you notice an error in the page total for a project (for example in the “page __ of __” field in a title block) use the Manage > Project > Page Count function. Select:
Manage Project Page Count The software will update the total page count for the project.
3-26
Page Management
4 Page Management This section describes functions related to RSWireTM Designer drawing pages. The first section covers how pages are organized within the project. Other sections describe how to display (open), create, delete and copy pages. Installation functions allow all the pages within an installation to be copied, deleted, or renamed as a unit. For information on configuring page formats, see page 7-29 (Tools > Project Settings > Page Format function). The following sections are included:
Page Organization
Page Storage
Displaying Pages (Open, Refresh, Next Page, Previous Page)
Save Page
Save As Page
Create New Page
Quit Page
Clear Page
Delete Page
Copy Page
Modify Page
Rename Page
Move Page
Viewing Pages
Browse Copy
Page List
Delete Installation
Copy Installation
Rename Installation
Navigator Function
Page Count 4-1
Page Management
Page Organization As described in Section 3, projects can be (optionally) divided into installations and locations. An installation or location does not exist until a drawing page is created and assigned to that installation and location. A page need not be assigned to an installation or location, but it must be associated with an existing project. Page numbering for each installation can be independent. Two locations in the same installation can not have the same page numbers (see Project 1, Installation 2 in the illustration below). PROJECT 1
INSTALLATION 1
INSTALLATION 2
LOCATION
LOCATION
4
8
3
2
4
7
2 1
(NO INSTALLATION OR LOCATION)
LOCATION
4
3 1
PROJECT 2
6 5
3
DRAWING PAGES
2 1
If no installations or locations have been created in a project, all the pages in the project will be part of the same numbering series (see Project 2 in the above illustration). Page numbering need not be continuous; there can be “gaps.”
4-2
Page Management
Page Storage When a RSWire drawing page is created and stored, the graphical information is stored in a DWG file while the logical information is stored in the project’s Oldb.mdb file.
stored as
Drawing Page
.DWG file (graphics) Oldb.mdb file (project logical data)
The DWG file contains the graphical information for the drawing: everything that is seen when the drawing is plotted. The Oldb.mdb file contains logical information about all the drawings in the project. This data includes device IDs, wire coordinates, and connection information and is used by various software functions. By having this information in the Oldb.mdb file, the software is able to perform project–wide operations such as cross referencing and list generation without having to open and analyze every DWG file. When changes are made in the currently open page that affect another page in the project, the software will place the change in the Oldb.mdb file. The next time the user opens the second drawing page, the DWG file is updated from the information in the Oldb.mdb file. Within the DWG file the software follows a layering standard that places different types of information on separate layers. See page 5-125. The Oldb.mdb and DWG files are stored in the directory for the project to which they belong. As each page in an installation is created, the software assigns a name to the DWG files in the following format: _______1.DWG The number in the filename is incremented for each new page in the installation that is created. When you create a new installation, the filename numbering begins again. 4-3
Page Management
Displaying Pages (Select, Refresh, Next, Previous) Four functions are available for displaying drawing pages. These functions are Open, Refresh, Next Page, and Previous Page.
Open Page The File > Open function allows an existing drawing page to be loaded into RSWire and displayed on the screen for viewing and editing. To open a page, select:
File Open The Select Page dialog box will appear, listing all the currently available projects. Select Page Project:
Installation:
Page:
MACHINE1 ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE WEB Search...
Search...
Search...
Preview Description:
User: Date: Format: Page Type: Installation: Location: OK
4-4
Cancel
Online: Scale:
Help...
Page Management
Select the desired project from the list by pointing the cursor and clicking. The names of all the installations in the selected project will appear in the Installation column. When you select an installation, the existing pages in that installation will be listed in the Page column. You can then select the desired page. When you select a page, a thumbnail view of the page will appear in the preview area of the dialog box. In the following example, page 1 of the installation LINE1 in the project MACHINE1 has been selected. Information about the page appears in the lower right corner of the dialog box. Select Page Project:
Installation:
Page:
LINE1 LINE2
1 2 3 4 5 6
MACHINE1 ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE WEB Search...
Search...
Search...
Preview Description: Motor Control Center
User: Date: Format: Page Type: Installation: Location: OK
Cancel
USER 8/10/98 D–2COL Circuit Diagram LINE1 ENC1
Online: Off Scale: 1
Help...
In each column you can use the Search button to display a list of projects, installations or pages with descriptions. You can also make selections from these lists. Select the OK button to proceed. The selected page will be displayed on the screen. 4-5
Page Management
Page Name Field – There is a page name field that indicates the project name, installation name, location name, page name, and online/offline status of the currently displayed page. This field appears in the lower left corner of the window. In the following example, the current page is page 1 of the project Machine1, installation LINE1, location EN1 and the page is an online page (On). (See page 4-14 for an explanation of the Online function.) If the page is assigned to no particular installation or location the words NO_INST and NO_LOC will appear in this field. .................................... .................................... ....................................
Page Name Field
LED
181
LED
182
LED
183
Command: Command: MACHINE1, LINE1, EN1, 1, On
2.5000, 0.5000
Refresh Page If, during an RSWire session, the drawing screen is cleared, selecting the View > Refresh Page function will bring back the last drawing page that was displayed. Select:
View Refresh Page
4-6
Page Management
Next and Previous Page The File > Next Page and Previous Page functions allow you to display the next and previous drawing pages in numerical order without having to enter the specific page name. Select:
File Next Page or
File Previous Page
4-7
Page Management
Save Page Use the File > Save function to save (store) a drawing page onto disk. After saving, the page remains on screen, available for further editing. Select:
File Save When the save operation is complete, the message “The page was saved” appears on the command line.
Automatic Page Save You can configure the software to automatically save the currently open page at a regular time interval. Use the following procedure:
4-8
1.
Using Notepad or another text editor, create an ASCII text file named autosave.cfg containing a time interval value in minutes. In other words, if the file contains the number 15, the page will be saved every 15 minutes. The file need only contain this number.
2.
Place the autosave.cfg file in the RS\SYSCON\SYSTEM directory.
Page Management
Save As Page Use the File > Save As function to save an RSWire drawing as a DWG file under another name for use outside of RSWire. The logical information for the DWG file that is created with this function will not be saved in the project Oldb.mdb file and therefore will not work with the RSWire logical functions (error checking, cross referencing, etc.). It will only be a graphical view of the drawing page. You can also save drawings as DXF or DWT files. Therefore, do not use the Save As function to create files that you wish to use later in RSWire. Use the Manage > Page > Copy command to make copies of pages for use inside RSWire. Warning: Use the Save As functions only for DWG files that will be used outside of RSWire. The logical information for the DWG file that is created with this function will not be saved and therefore will not work with the RSWire logical functions if you attempt to use the new DWG file later in RSWire. The File > Save As function will save an AutoCAD DWG file in the following formats: AutoCAD 2000, Release 14/LT98/LT97, AutoCAD Release 13/LT95. You can also select to save as a Drawing Template File (*.dwt) or as a DXF file in the following formats: AutoCAD 2000, R14/LT98/LT97, R13/Lt95, R12/LT2. To use this command, first display the RSWire drawing page that you wish to save. Then, select:
File Save As The Save Drawing As dialog box will appear.
4-9
Page Management
Save Drawing As Save in
Work
_______1.dwg
File Name:
_______1.dwg
Save as type:
AutoCAD R14/LT98 Drawing (*.dwg)
Save Cancel Options
In the Save in Field, select the path and folder in which you want to save the drawing from the dropdown list. The drawing’s current name is indicated in the File Name field. Enter the new name under which you wish to save the drawing in this field. Do not enter the .DWG extension; it will be added automatically. In the Save as type: field, select the file type that you want the file saved as, from the dropdown list. Select the Save button to save the new DWG file. Select Cancel to abort the Save As function. Select Options to save proxy images of custom objects. The Export Options dialog box will appear. If you save to the Release 14 or Release 13 file type, and the drawing contains custom objects from another application, you can select the Save Proxy Images of Custom Objects checkbox. Images of the custom objects are saved in the drawing file. If you do not choose this option, a frame for each object is saved in the drawing file. Refer to your AutoCAD manual for more information.
4-10
Page Management
New Page Use the File > New > Page function to create a new drawing page. Select:
File New Page The New Page dialog box will appear. New Page Project:
Select...
Installation:
Select...
Location:
Select...
Format Name
D–2COL
Select Page Format... Scale 1:
1
Online Page Type
Page:
Schematic Diagram Title Block
Select ...
Page Macro
Select ... OK
Parameters 1...
2...
3...
4...
5...
6...
7...
8...
9...
10...
Cancel
Help...
If a project is currently active, the name of the project (and installation) will be prompted in the Project and Installation fields. These can be changed if desired. Project – In this field, enter the name of the project to which the page will belong. An entry must be made in this field and the project must exist, otherwise the error message “Project does not exist” will be displayed. Use the Select button to view and pick from a list of existing projects. Installation – In this field enter the name of the installation to which the drawing page will belong. An entry in this field is optional. If the installation name entered does not yet exist, a new installation will be created. (See page 4-2 for more information on installations and locations.) The installation name can have up to 14 characters. Use the Select button to view and pick from a list of existing installations. 4-11
Page Management
Location – In this field enter the name of the location to which the page will belong. An entry in this field is optional. If the location name entered does not yet exist, a new location will be created. The location name can have up to 14 characters. Use the Select button to view and pick from a list of existing locations. Page – In this field enter the page number (name). If you wish to be automatically prompted for the next available page number in the specified installation, place the cursor in the Page field, delete any existing number, and then point and click at a different field – the next available number will then appear in the Page field. Note
Do not use any of the following reserved characters in the installation, location, or page names that you enter: # = + – ^ / : ~.@ (includes spaces and periods). These characters are used for various purposes by the software and may cause unexpected results if entered in these fields. Format Name – This field selects the page size format. Fifty different formats are possible. The pre–defined formats provided with RSWire are as follows:
4-12
Page Management
Format Name
Dimensions/Description
DEFAULT
1180.0 x 810.0 in. - System Default (do not modify)
A-0VCOL
8.5 x 11 in. - A Size Vertical Without Line Numbers
A-0HCOL
11.0 x 8.5 in. - A Size Horizontal Without Line Numbers
B-0COL
17.0 x 11.0 in. - B Size Without Line Numbers
C-0COL
22.0 x 17.0 in. - C Size Without Line Numbers
D-0COL
34.0 x 22.0 in. - D Size Without Line Numbers
E-0COL
44.0 x 34.0 in. - E Size Without Line Numbers
A-1VCOL
8.5 x 11.0 in. - A Size 1 Line Number Column
A-1HCOL
11 x 8.5 in. - A Size 1 Line Number Column
B-1COL
17.0 x 11.0 in. - B Size 1 Line Number Column
C-1COL
22.0 x 17.0 - C Size 1 Line Number Column
D-1COL
34.0 x 22.0 in. - D Size 1 Line Number Column
E-1COL
44.0 x 34.0 in. - E Size 1 Line Number Column
B-2COL
17.0 x 11.0 in. - B Size 2 Line Number Columns
C-2COL
22.0 x 17.0 - C Size 2 Line Number Columns
D-2COL
34.0 x 22.0 in. - D Size 2 Line Number Columns
E-2COL
44.0 x 34.0 in. - E Size 2 Line Number Columns
D-3COL
34.0 x 22.0 in. - D Size 3 Line Number Columns
E-3COL
44.0 x 34.0 in. - E Size 3 Line Number Columns
E-4COL
44.0 x 34.0 in. - E Size 4 Line Number Columns
A0
1189.0 x 841.0 mm - IEC Size A0
A1
841.0 x 594.0 mm - IEC Size A1
A2
594.0 x 420.0 mm - IEC Size A2
A3
420.0 x 297.0 mm - IEC Size A3
A4V
210.0 x 297.0 mm - IEC Size A4 vertical
A4H
297.0 x 210.0 mm - IEC Size A4 horizontal
ZONE
34.0 x 22.0 in. - Zone Cross Referencing
HEX-LAD-D1
34.0 x 22.0 in. - D Size Hexagon Ladder
HEX-LAD-D2
34.0 x 22.0 in. - D Size Hexagon Ladder
HEX-LAD-C1
22.0 x 17 in. - C Size 1 Column Hexagon Ladder
HEX-LAD-C2
22.0 x 17 in. - C Size 2 Column Hexagon Ladder
HEX-LAD-B1
17.0x11.0 in. - B Size 1 Column Hexagon Ladder
HEX-LAD-A1V
8.5 x 11 in. - A Size Vertical, Hexagon Ladder
HEX-LAD-A1H
11.0x8.5 in. - A Size Horizontal, Hexagon Ladder
UNDEFINED
0.0 x 0.0 - The remaining formats are undefined
4-13
Page Management
To display the list of page formats, use the Select Page Format button. This will display a dialog box from which you can select a format. Any formats with a width and height of 0.0 are undefined (unused) formats. Undefined page formats are available to the user for custom page formats. These can be set up using the Tools > Project Settings function (see page 7-29) and selecting the Page Format tab. Existing page formats also can be re–defined using this function. Note
You must assign a name to a page format before you can create a page with the format.
Note
Do not re–define the first (“DEFAULT”) page format. The system requires this format in its default state for certain display functions. You can also display or print a list of page formats with the Reports > Libraries > Page Formats function. Scale – This optional field specifies the drawing scale to be used for the page being defined. This is mainly used for panel layout drawings so that symbols can be placed at less than full size. Online – This checkbox determines whether or not logical functions are active on the page. When the Online checkbox is selected, the page is online, meaning that automatic functions such as error checking and cross referencing will be performed on the drawing. When the Online box is empty, the page is not online (it is “offline”). The software does not recognize the connections on offline pages. The Online checkbox should be turned off only when no logically connected control devices will be placed on the page, such as for panel layouts, creating new symbols, or general mechanical CAD work where no error checking or cross referencing is required. You can change the online status of a page after it is created by using the Manage > Page > Modify function. Page Type – This field provides a number of page type options: Schematic Diagram is for online schematic diagram pages. This type should be selected for the majority of RSWire drawings. Select Panel Layout for panel layout diagrams. The Graphical Terminal Plan is assigned to pages generated by the graphical terminal plan function. The Graphical Contents List type is assigned to pages generated when a report is sent as output to a project page. Select the Wiring Diagram Layout type when creating a wiring diagram layout drawing. Page Macro – This optional field allows a macro to be placed on the page automatically. Unlike the Default Page Macro specified when a project is created, the Page Macro here only applies to the page currently being created. A Select button under the field allows the macro list to be displayed and selected from.
4-14
Page Management
Title Block – This optional field specifies the title block macro to be used only on the page being created. A title block named on the New Page dialog box will override the title block specified on the New Project dialog box when the project was created. A Select button under the field allows the macro list to be displayed and selected from. Parameters – This area of the dialog box contains ten buttons labeled 1 through 10. Selecting any of these buttons will display a list of ten page information parameters (selecting 1 will display parameters 1 through 10, selecting 2 will display parameters 11 though 20, and so on). These parameters are associated with and stored with the page. Some are used in title blocks. When a button is activated the following Page Parameter dialog box will appear. Page Parameter 2 11. Para 12. Para 13. Para 14. Para 15. Para 16. Para 17. Para 18. Para 19. Para
,
20. Para Search Language Text OK
Cancel
Help...
Select the Search Language Text button to access the language text database, allowing you to insert language text phrases into the page parameter fields (put the cursor in the desired field first). See page 5-32 for more on language text. Enter the desired information in the parameter fields and select the OK button to continue. When the desired information is entered in the New Page dialog box, select the OK button to create the page. The blank page will then appear on the screen, ready for further editing. 4-15
Page Management
Page Break The File > Break function removes the currently active drawing page from the screen without saving any changes that have been made since the page was opened (or since it was last saved). Warning: You will lose any edits that have been made since the page was last saved.
To exit from a drawing page without saving any changes that have been made, select:
File Break The current drawing page will be removed from the screen without being saved. The software will display a dialog box asking you to confirm the page break function. Select the OK button to proceed. Select the Cancel button to cancel the break function.
4-16
Page Management
Clear Page The Manage > Page > Clear function erases all drawing elements from the currently active drawing page. The page becomes blank as if it had just been created. This function therefore should be used with caution. Warning: This function deletes all current page data completely.
To erase everything from the current drawing page, select:
Manage Page Clear The software will display a dialog box asking you to confirm the Page Clear. Select the OK button to proceed. Select the Cancel button to cancel the clear operation. Note
If you perform Manage > Page > Clear by accident, you can recover the data by performing the File > Break function immediately after the Manage > Page > Clear.
4-17
Page Management
Delete Page The Manage > Page > Delete function allows you to delete RSWire drawing pages. Note
You can also use the Manage > Installation > Delete function to delete an entire installation of pages. Select:
Manage Page Delete The following Delete Page(s) dialog box will appear. Select a project name and a list of installations will appear. Select an installation name and a list of pages in that installation will appear. You can then select (highlight) the pages that you wish to delete. Delete Page(s) Project:
Installation:
Page:
MACHINE1 ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE WEB Search...
Search...
Search...
Preview Description:
User: Date: Installation: Format: Online: OK
Cancel
Location: Scale: Page Type: Help...
In each column you can use the Search button to display a list of projects, installations or pages with descriptions. 4-18
Page Management
When the desired pages have been selected, select the OK button. The message “Delete the selected pages?” will appear. Select the OK button again to delete the pages, or select Cancel to abort the page deletion.
4-19
Page Management
Copy Page The Manage > Page > Copy function allows you to copy drawing pages. Note
You can also use the Manage > Installation > Copy function to copy an entire installation of pages. Select:
Manage Page Copy The following Copy Page(s) dialog box will appear. Copy Page(s) From: Project:
Installation:
Page:
ABACK TOOL Search...
Search...
To: Project:
Search...
Installation:
Location:
TOOL Page:
Convert Device IDs to New Page/Line Number Reference Set Pages Online Renumber All Terminals Modify Field Settings Wire Numbers: Maintain
Add Prefix: OK
4-20
Add Suffix: Cancel
Help...
Page Management
In the From: fields, select the pages you wish to copy. Select a project name and a list of installations will appear. Select an installation name and a list of pages in that installation will appear. You can then select (highlight) the pages that you wish to copy. In each column you can use the Search button to display a list of projects, installations or pages with descriptions. In the To: fields select the installation in which the copy is to reside (the “To” project will always be the currently selected project). A location and page number can also be specified. If you selected multiple pages to be copied, the number entered in the To: Page field will be assigned to the lowest numbered page being copied. The spacing of the copied pages will be maintained; in other words, if you select pages 1 and 3 and assign a destination of page 5, the copies will become pages 5 and 7. The Convert Device IDs to New Page/Line Number Reference checkbox determines whether device IDs on the copied pages will be automatically changed to match the new page number. When the checkbox is selected, the device IDs will be converted. When the checkbox is not selected, device IDs will remain the same if the page is copied to an offline page. If you copy to an online page you will be prompted for a new device ID for each item (see important note below). The Set Pages Online checkbox determines whether the copied pages will be online or offline. Select the checkbox to make the copied pages online pages. If the pages are offline no error checking or cross referencing will be performed. Important
If you turn off the Convert Device IDs... checkbox and copy to an online page (i.e., the Set Pages Online checkbox is turned on) the software’s error checking will detect duplicate device IDs on the copied page and will prompt you for a new ID for each item on the page. This can be time–consuming if the schematic is large. It may be preferable to let the system automatically convert the device IDs (i.e., leave the Convert Device IDs checkbox on) and then manually change IDs as needed with the Edit > Symbol function. The Renumber All Terminals checkbox determines whether or not terminals in the copied page will be renumbered automatically to avoid duplication. Select the checkbox to automatically renumber terminals. If the checkbox is not selected, you will be prompted to enter a new ID for each terminal that is duplicated within the same installation. The Modify Field Settings checkbox determines whether or not field settings of the existing page will be duplicated into the copied page. If the checkbox is selected, you will be prompted with the Field Parameters dialog box to make modifications to the field settings of the copied page. If the checkbox is not selected, existing field settings will copy into the copied page. 4-21
Page Management
The Wire Numbers area of the dialog box allows you to set how existing wire numbers in the copied page will be copied. Because the software considers duplicate wire numbers to be an error, the system will alter any wire numbers (as described below) that already exist in the project receiving the copied page. The Maintain checkbox determines whether or not wire numbers will be copied. If you do not select the Maintain checkbox, wire numbers will not be copied. If you do select the Maintain checkbox, wire numbers will be copied under the following rules: 1.
If the copied wire numbers do not exist in the destination project, the wire numbers will be maintained without changes.
2.
If copied wire numbers are connected to a signal cross reference connecting to an existing wire number, the existing wire number will be used on the copied portion.
3.
If copied wire numbers duplicate existing wire numbers in the destination project, the system will add a question mark (?) to any copied wire number that duplicates an existing wire number. For example, if wire number 100 is copied to a project that already has a wire number 100, the copied wire number will be changed to 100?. (This can be avoided by adding a prefix or suffix to the copied numbers. See the following paragraph.)
The Add Prefix and Add Suffix fields allow you to specify a prefix or suffix that will be added to all copied wire numbers. The added prefix and/or suffix will make the copied wire numbers unique, thus avoiding duplicate numbers (unless the prefix or suffix is already used in the destination project.) Select the OK button to copy the pages. Note
Part numbers that are assigned to device IDs on the original page will be assigned to corresponding IDs on the copied pages.
Note
Pages can only be coped into the open project.
4-22
Page Management
Modify Page The Manage > Page > Modify function allows you to change the title block used on an existing drawing page and also change the page parameters and turn the Online function off and on. To modify a drawing page, first display the page (File > Open Page) and then select:
Manage Page Modify The Modify Page Data dialog box will appear. This dialog box is similar to the New Page dialog box (see page 4-11) except that only the Title Block, Page Format, Online, and Parameters fields are accessible for modification. See pages 4-12 through 4-15 for a description of these fields. Modify Page Data Format Name D–2COL
Select
Select Page Format...
Select Select
Online Page Type
Title Block
Page Macro
Select
Select OK
Parameters 1...
2...
3...
4...
5...
6...
7...
8...
9...
10...
Cancel
Help...
Make the desired changes to the title block, page macro, parameters and online status and select the OK button to load the changes. Set Page Online When you use the Manage > Page > Modify function to turn a page from offline to online, the page is once again subject to error checking for conditions such as duplicate device IDs. When you select the Online checkbox in the Modify Page Data dialog box and select OK, the following dialog box will appear. 4-23
Page Management
Online Page Keep existing Device IDs Rename Device IDs Automatically
OK
Cancel
Help...
Select the Keep existing Device IDs checkbox to keep device IDs as they currently exist on the page. De–select the Keep existing Device IDs checkbox to allow the software to change device IDs to match the currently selected device ID format (i.e., page/line number, sequential number, etc.). Select the Rename Device IDs Automatically checkbox to allow the software to change device IDs without prompting you. De–select the Rename Device IDs Automatically checkbox to cause the software to prompt you before changing each device ID. Select OK to complete setting the page online.
4-24
Page Management
Modify Page Variables Globally The Manage > Page > Page Variables function allows you to globally change page parameter text across a range of pages, installations, or across an entire project. Select:
Manage Page Page Variables The Page Variables dialog box is displayed. Page Variables Select Pages... Select Text 1...
2...
3...
4...
5...
6...
7...
8...
9...
10...
OK
Cancel
Help...
Select the Select Pages button in the Page Variables dialog box. The Exchange Title Block Text dialog box will appear, listing the projects on your system. Exchange Title Block Text Project:
Installation:
Page:
ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE WEB
Search...
Search... OK
Cancel
Search... Help...
4-25
Page Management
This dialog box allows you to select which pages are affected by the text change. Select the desired project from the list by pointing the cursor and clicking. The names of all the installations in the selected project will then appear in the Installation column. When you select an installation, the existing pages in that installation will be listed in the Page column. Then select the desired pages. If you select only a project name, all pages in that project will be affected. If you select only the installation name (and no pages) then all pages in that installation will be affected. Select OK to continue with the change function. Select Text – This area of the dialog box contains ten buttons labeled 1 through 10. Selecting any of these buttons will display a list of ten page information parameters (selecting 1 will display parameters 1 through 10, selecting 2 will display parameters 11 though 20, and so on). These parameters are associated with and stored with the page. Some are used in title blocks. When a button is activated the following Page Parameter dialog box will appear. Page Parameter 2 11. Para 12. Para 13. Para 14. Para 15. Para 16. Para 17. Para 18. Para 19. Para
,
20. Para Search Language Text OK
Cancel
Help...
Enter the text that you wish to assign globally in the desired field. Note
This text will replace any existing parameter text for the selected pages. Select the OK button when the text has been entered. You will return to the Page Variables dialog box and a different group of parameters can be selected. Select the OK button in Page Variables dialog box to execute the change title block text function.
4-26
Page Management
Modify Page Variables in Title Block You can modify the values of page variables that appear in page title blocks by pointing the cursor at the desired value and clicking the right mouse button. DRAWN BY
PROJECT Warehouse
DRAWING NO. 900–178–01
D. Smith
Unit One Storage LIne
JOB NO. 178
DATE
PAGE DESCRIPTION
SHEET
03/04/2000
Line Cabinet A
1 OF 3
Right click on value to modify
An appropriate dialog box will appear that will allow you to edit the variable value. Note
You can also edit the page description, page number, and project description by right clicking on the value in the title block.
4-27
Page Management
Rename Page The Manage > Page > Rename function allows you to rename RSWire drawing pages within a project. Select:
Manage Page Rename The following Rename Page dialog box will appear. Rename Page From: Project:
Installation:
Page:
ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE Search...
Search...
To: Project:
Search...
Installation: Location:
Page:
Convert Device IDs to New Page/Line Number Reference OK
Cancel
Help...
In the From: fields, select the pages you wish to rename. First select a project name and a list of installations will appear. Select an installation name and a list of pages in that installation will appear. You can then select (highlight) the page that you wish to rename. In each column you can use the Search button to display a list of projects, installations or pages including descriptions. 4-28
Page Management
In the To: fields, enter the installation, location, and page number that the renamed page is to have. The location assignment is optional. The Convert Device ID to New Page/Line Number Reference checkbox determines whether device IDs on the renamed page will be automatically changed to match the new page number. When a checkmark appears in the box, the device IDs will be converted. When the box is empty, device IDs will remain the same. Select the OK button to rename the page.
4-29
Page Management
Move Page The Manage > Page > Move function allows you to move drawing pages within an installation. You may wish to move pages to rearrange the page order or to make room for inserting new pages. Or, you may wish to move pages to close gaps in the page order. Note
If you wish to move a page to another installation, or to another project, use the Manage > Page > Copy function and then delete the original page. To move a page, select:
Manage Page Move The Move Page(s) dialog box will appear. Move Pages(s) From: Project:
Installation:
Page:
ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE Search...
Search...
Search...
Increment Page Numbers By +/–: Convert Device IDs to New Page/Line Reference OK
Cancel
Help...
Use the Project and Installation fields to identify the project and installation containing the page(s) to be moved. In the Page field select one or more pages to be moved. In each column you can use the Search button to display a list of projects, installations or pages including descriptions. Use the Increment Page Numbers By field to specify the number of positions forward (+) or backward (–) you wish to move the pages. For example, enter “2” to move the page(s) two page positions forward, or enter “–1” to move them one position backward. 4-30
Page Management
The Convert Device IDs to New Page/Line Number Reference checkbox allows you to select whether or not the device IDs in the moved drawings will be automatically changed to reflect the new page number. When a checkmark appears in the checkbox, IDs will be renamed automatically. When the checkbox is empty, the original IDs will be retained. Select the OK button to perform the page move operation. Rules for Page Move: A page cannot be moved into a position already occupied by another page. This will cause a “Page already exists” error message to appear. A page cannot be moved backward to a page number of less than zero. If this is attempted, the message “Incorrect input” is displayed on the command line. The following illustration shows an installation containing five drawing pages, numbered 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6. There is no page 3. Pages 1 and 2 could be moved forward one position (+1) in which case they would become pages 2 and 3, respectively. They could not be moved forward two positions (+2) because this would conflict with the existing page 4. However, they could be moved ahead six positions (+6) where they would become pages 7 and 8. Pages 6
Move Pages 1 and 2:
5 4
+1 Allowed +2 Not Allowed
2 1
+6 Allowed –1 Allowed –2 Not Allowed (+ = forward, – = backward)
Pages 1 and 2 could also be moved backward one position (–1) where they would become pages 0 and 1. They could not be moved back any further than this.
4-31
Page Management
Viewing Pages The View pull–down menu contains a number of functions that control the user’s view of drawing pages.
View Refresh Page Redraw Regen Zoom Pan Aerial View Quadrant... Navigator List Command Dispatch Toolbars... Refresh Page – If, during an RSWire session, the drawing screen is cleared, selecting the View > Refresh Page function will bring back the last drawing page that was displayed. Redraw – Redraws the current drawing. Regen – Regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen coordinates for all objects. Zoom – There are a number of zoom functions: Real Time Zoom – This option is used for interactive zooming. With this Zoom function, you can zoom in or out of the drawing by holding down the left button of the pointing device and moving the cursor vertically up or down. Press <Esc> to exit this mode. Zoom Previous – Displays the previous zoom view of the drawing. Zoom Window – Allows the user to enlarge (zoom) the view of a selected area of the drawing. When selected, the software prompts you to select the first corner followed by the opposite corner. This allows you to define a rectangular area on the drawing which will be enlarged to fill the screen. Zoom Dynamic – Allows the user to zoom out as well as in. Selecting the function produces a reduced view of the entire drawing with a square area window. Position the area window and click the left button. The window can now be re–sized as desired by moving the mouse. Click the right button to zoom to the selected area. 4-32
Page Management
Zoom Scale – Allows you to zoom at a specified scale factor. When you select this function you will be prompted on the command line to enter a scale factor. Entering a value followed by “x” specifies a scale relative to the current view (“2x” magnifies objects to twice their current size). Entering a value followed by “xp” specifies a scale relative to paper space units (the first view is considered 1xp). Zoom Center – Zooms to display a window defined by a center point and a magnification factor or height. When you select the function you will be prompted to specify a center point and then enter a height or magnification factor. Zoom In – Zooms in to the drawing in 2X increments. Zoom Out – Zooms out from the drawing in .5X increments. Zoom All – Zooms to the smallest view that includes everything in the drawing. Zoom Extents – Zooms to display the drawing extents. Pan – The following Pan functions are available: Real Time – This option is used for interactive panning. You can pan the drawing image to a new location by holding down the left button of the pointing device and moving the cursor. Press <Esc> to exit this mode. Point – Moves the view of the drawing by the specified distance. Left – Moves the drawing to the left. Right – Moves the drawing to the right. Up – Moves the drawing up. Down – Moves the drawing down. When you are using the Real Time option of Zoom or Pan, you can right–click the pointing device and use the cursor menu to move quickly between zooming and panning. Aerial View – Aerial View is a navigation tool that displays a view of the drawing in a separate window so that you can quickly move to that area. If you keep the Aerial View window open as you work, you can zoom and pan without selecting a command. In the Mode menu you can choose Pan or Zoom. Pan mode allows you to move a rectangle to the part of the drawing you wish to view. Zoom mode allows you to define a window to move and resize the drawing at the same time. 4-33
Page Management
Quadrant – Allows you to zoom to a specific quadrant of the drawing page. The following Select Quadrant dialog box is displayed. Select the radio button for the desired page quadrant. Select the All radio button to display the entire page. Select Quadrant
2–Upper Left
1–Upper Right
3–Lower Left
4–Lower Right
All OK
Cancel
Help...
Navigator – The Navigator function allows you to move quickly from one drawing page to another by clicking on a device ID, a cross reference or a signal. For more information, see page 4-43. List – The List function allows you to view data relating to specific entities in a drawing. See page 5-132. Command Dispatch – Displays a drop down list containing RSWire commands. Select the desired command and then select the checkmark button to execute the command. Toolbars – This function allows you to select which toolbars are displayed on the screen.
4-34
Page Management
Browse Copy The Edit > Browse Copy function allows you to simultaneously display up to four drawing pages. It is possible to copy portions from these pages and paste them onto the current drawing page. The pages copied from can exist in the same or in a different project from the current page. To use the Browse Copy function: 1.
Display the page that you wish to receive the copied items.
2.
Then select the Edit > Browse Copy function.
Edit Browse Copy The Browse Copy dialog box will appear. This dialog box operates in a similar manner to the File > Open dialog box, except that multiple pages can be selected that will be displayed on the screen. These selected pages must exist in the same project and installation (however they can be in a different project or installation from the currently active page). 3.
Select the name of the Project and Installation that contains the pages you wish to view and/or copy from. The pages in the selected installation will be listed. In each column you can use the Search button to display a list of projects, installations or pages including descriptions.
4.
Select the page (number) of the first page that you wish to view. This page and the three pages that follow it in numerical order will be displayed in the Browse Copy dialog box. The number of each page is displayed above the thumbnail view. In the following figure, page 2 has been selected, so pages 2 through 5 are displayed.
4-35
Page Management
Browse Copy Project
Page
C2HOUSE C2HOUSE EX2 EXAMPLE MACHINE1
1 2 3 4 5 6
Preview Select... 2
Select... 3
Search...
Installation
Select...
LINE1 LINE1
Select... 5
4
Single Selection
Search...
Search...
Maintain Device IDs As Created OK
Cancel
Previous
Next
Help...
Display Page To Be Copied In This Quadrant
You can use the Next button to display the next four pages in the installation (if any). Use the Previous button to display the previous group of four pages. You can check the Single Selection checkbox to display individual pages in the order they were selected in the page column. If this checkbox is not selected, the next pages (if any) in the installation will be displayed. 5.
Note
4-36
Check the Maintain Device IDs As Created checkbox if you wish to maintain the existing device ID of the copied portion. If this checkbox is not selected, the device IDs will acquire the numbering sequence of the destination page.
If you are copying symbols within the same project, the Maintain Device ID As Created checkbox option has no effect. RSWire will not allow duplicate device IDs within the same project.
Page Management
Note
Note
6.
Display the page from which you wish to copy in the upper left quadrant of the Browse Copy dialog box. Do this by selecting the desired page number in the Page column.
7.
Select the OK button. The selected page will fill the screen.
You can also select a page to copy from by selecting the Select button above the thumbnail view. 8.
You will be prompted to “Define Base Point.” Select a reference point for the copied portion.
9.
Just as with the standard copy function, you will be prompted to “Select objects.” Select the portion of the drawing that you wish to copy and click the right mouse button (or press the <Enter> key).
If you want to exit this function, select Edit > Browse Copy. You will return to the original page that you wanted to receive copied items. 10. The destination page (selected in the first step) will fill the screen. Select a position for the copied elements. 11. The Device ID Assignment dialog box will appear with a device ID shown for each copied symbol (the copied items are treated as a macro by the software). You can accept the prompted IDs or enter new ones.
Note
If you copy a field, the destination page must have an installation and location assigned or the field will not be copied.
4-37
Page Management
Page List To generate a list of drawing pages for a given project, use the Reports > Project > Page Full function. See page 9-4 for more information. Select:
Reports Project Page Full
4-38
Page Management
Delete Installation The Manage > Installation > Delete function allows you to delete an installation from a project. Warning: All drawing pages in the selected installation will be deleted.
To delete an installation, select:
Manage Installation Delete The following Select Project–Installation dialog box will appear, listing all projects currently on your system. Select Project – Installation Project:
Installation:
ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE WEB
Search...
Search... OK
Cancel
Help...
When you select a project name, a list of all installations in the project will appear in the installation column. Select the installation that you wish to delete. Use the Search button to display a list of projects or installations including descriptions. Select the OK button to proceed with the deletion. The software will prompt “Delete the selected installation?” Select the OK button to delete the installation or select Cancel to abort the deletion. 4-39
Page Management
Copy Installation The Manage > Installation > Copy function allows you to copy an installation (and all the drawing pages it contains). To copy an installation, select:
Manage Installation Copy The following Copy Installation dialog box will appear. In the From: fields, select the installation you wish to copy. First select a project name and a list of installations will appear. You can then select (highlight) the installation that you wish to copy. The Search buttons display a list of projects or installations with descriptions. Copy Installation From: Project:
Installation:
ABACK TOOL Search...
Search... To: Project:
Installation:
TOOL Location:
Set Pages Online Wire Numbers: Add Prefix:
Maintain
Add Suffix: OK
4-40
Cancel
Help...
Page Management
In the To: fields, the current project is automatically selected as the destination. Enter the name that the copied installation is to have. Optionally, a location can also be assigned which will apply to all the pages in the copied installation. The Set Pages Online checkbox determines whether the copied pages will be online or offline. Select the checkbox to make the copied pages online pages. If the pages are offline no error checking or cross referencing will be performed. The Wire Numbers area of the dialog box allows you to set how existing wire numbers in the copied installation will be copied. Because the software considers duplicate wire numbers to be an error, the system will alter any wire numbers (as described below) that already exist in the project receiving the copied installation. The Maintain checkbox determines whether or not wire numbers will be copied. If you do not select the Maintain checkbox, wire numbers will not be copied. If you do select the Maintain checkbox, wire numbers will be copied under the following rules: 1.
If the copied wire numbers do not exist in the destination project, the wire numbers will be maintained without changes.
2.
If copied wire numbers are connected to a signal cross reference connected to an existing wire number, the existing wire number will be used on the copied portion.
3.
If copied wire numbers duplicate existing wire numbers in the destination project, the system will add a question mark (?) to any copied wire number that duplicates an existing wire number. For example, if wire number 100 is copied to a project that already has a wire number 100, the copied wire number will be changed to 100?. (This can be avoided by adding a prefix or suffix to the copied numbers. See the following paragraph.)
The Add Prefix and Add Suffix fields allow you to specify a prefix or suffix that will be added to all copied wire numbers. The added prefix and/or suffix will make the copied wire numbers unique, thus avoiding duplicate numbers (unless the prefix or suffix is already used in the destination project). Select the OK button to copy the installation.
4-41
Page Management
Rename Installation The Manage > Installation > Rename function allows you to assign a new name to an installation. To rename an installation, select:
Manage Installation Rename The following Rename Installation dialog box will appear. Rename Installation From: Project:
Installation:
ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL
Search...
To: Project:
Search...
Installation:
Location:
OK
Cancel
Help...
In the From: fields, select the installation you wish to rename. First select a project name and a list of installations will appear. You can then select (highlight) the installation that you wish to rename. The Search buttons display a list of projects or installations with descriptions. In the To: fields, enter the new installation name. Optionally, a location can also be assigned which will apply to all pages in the renamed installation. Select the OK button to rename the installation. 4-42
Page Management
Navigator Function The Navigator function allows you to move quickly from one drawing page to another by clicking on a device ID, a cross reference or a signal. It is useful when you wish to go from one place where a particular ID is used to another place in the project where the same ID occurs. The Navigator can also jump from a displayed part number to the parts database screen for that part. To activate the Navigator, select:
View Navigator (There is also a navigator button in the toolbar – the one with binoculars on it.) You will then be prompted to “Select attribute,” which means you can now pick an ID or cross reference to initiate a navigator “jump”. You must re–activate the Navigator function for each jump that you make. The following types of navigator jumps are possible: Signal Cross References – By clicking on the signal cross reference you will jump from the current page to the page where the signal continues (or originates). The point of continuation is marked with an inverted triangle. 125
CR124
AH126
126 127 128
Select Signal Cross Reference L1/2.01
L2/2.01
4-43
Page Management
Device Cross References – When clicking on symbol cross reference information, the display will jump to the page containing the symbol to which the cross reference refers. If you select the cross reference at a parent symbol you will jump to the page containing the selected child symbol. Similarly, if you select the cross reference at the child symbol you will jump to the page containing the parent symbol. The parent or child symbol that is jumped to is marked with an inverted triangle. CR112 220
Select Cross Reference To Parent Or Child symbol (JIC)
CR112
112
13
A1
–K1 /3.2
3 –K1 4
13 21
4-44
14
A2
14 22
/2.6
Select Cross Reference To Parent Or Child Symbol (IEC)
Page Management
Schematic/Panel Layout/Wiring Diagram – Clicking on a symbol’s device ID in a schematic page will cause the display to jump to the panel layout page or wiring diagram page containing the same device ID. (Wiring diagrams are generated by the optional Wiring Diagram Generator routine.) If you select the device ID on a panel layout page or wiring diagram page, you will jump to the schematic page containing that device ID.
PB206
WIRE 1381
WIRE
PB206 1
1441
2
PB206
Schematic Drawing
Panel Layout Drawing
Wiring Diagram Drawing
Select Device ID (JIC) WIRE 1381 2 –S1
–S1 10250T101 –51X
1
–S1
Schematic Drawing
Panel Layout Drawing
WIRE 1441
Wiring Diagram Drawing
Select Device ID (IEC)
4-45
Page Management
Terminal Device ID – By selecting a terminal device ID or number, you can jump between the schematic, panel layout, or terminal plan pages containing that ID.
Select Device ID TB2
W21
4
W73
FROM SOURCE
WIRE NO.
TERMINAL STRIP =L1+CAB1–TB2
WIRE NO.
LS101:4
W10
1
W62
LS103:4
W14
2
W66
LS105:4
W18
3
W69
LS107:4
W21
4
W73
Select Terminal Number Schematic (or Panel Layout) Page
Terminal Plan Page JIC Terminal
FROM SOURCE
4
W21
Select Device ID
–X2
WIRE NO.
TERMINAL STRIP =L1+CAB1–X2
WIRE NO.
LS101:4
W21
1
W21
LS103:4
W22
2
W22
LS105:4
W23
3
W23
LS107:4
W24
4
W24
Select Terminal Number
Terminal Plan Page
Schematic (or Panel Layout) Page IEC Terminal
When you select a terminal device ID in the schematic or panel layout pages, the following dialog box will appear, allowing you to select which type of page you wish to go to. (The current page type will be unavailable for selection.) 4-46
Page Management
Select Page Schematic Terminal Plan Panel Layout Wire Diagram Layout OK
Cancel
Help...
When you select the terminal number in the terminal plan page, you will be returned automatically to the schematic page. Part Number – Another function of the Navigator is to jump from a displayed part number to the Parts Database window. When part numbers are displayed on the schematic screen, you can activate the Navigator, select a part number, and the parts database will be displayed with the complete information for that part.
Select Displayed Part Number
PB118 800T–B6D2 118 JIC Example
–S1 10250T10151X
IEC Example
Navigator Search – You can also use the Navigator to search for and go to any device ID or function text in the current project. To use it, first select the Navigator function and then click in any empty area of the drawing screen. The following Navigator dialog box will appear.
4-47
Page Management
Navigator Installation:
Search...
Location:
Search...
Device ID:
Search...
Function Text:
Search... OK
Cancel
Help...
If you wish to narrow your choices down to a specific installation and location, make entries in the Installation and Location fields. Use the Search button next to each field to display a list of installations or locations from which you can pick. (You must select an installation before you can select a location.) When you select the Search button for Device ID, the following Select Device dialog box will appear, listing the device IDs that currently exist. Select Device
Installation LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1
Location BAY1 BAY1 BAY1 BAY1 BAY2 BAY2 BAY3 BAY3 BAY3 CAB1 CAB1
Device ID MTR110 TB1 MTR117 TB1 MTR124 TB1 IAD247 TB CR2 CR164 CR166
Device Type Function Text CONVEYOR PUMP MOTO
OK Cancel Help
PRESS MOT 1771-IAD 22 22 40
Select the desired device ID followed by the OK button. The selected ID will appear in the Navigator dialog box. Select OK in the Navigator dialog box to display the page containing the selected device ID.
4-48
Page Management
Page Count In some cases, after copying or moving pages, the software’s internal page count for a given project will need to be updated. Use the Manage > Project > Page Count function. 1.
Select the following pull–down menu:
Manage Project Page Count 2.
The Select: Project dialog box will appear. Select (highlight) the desired project name(s).
3.
Select the OK button. The project(s) will be internally updated.
4.
Select the following pull–down menu:
Manage Project Page Count 5.
Select the Search button. A list of all the projects with page counts will appear.
6.
Select the OK button. The Select: Project dialog box will appear.
7.
Select the Cancel button. The Select: Project dialog box will close.
4-49
Page Management
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
4-50
Schematic Elements
5 Schematic Elements This section covers schematic elements within RSWireTM Designer: the various lines, symbols, macros, texts, and other items that make up a drawing. Included are sections on the various types of elements as well as sections on placing, deleting, copying, and moving the schematic elements. See Section 6 for information on how to create custom schematic elements. The following sections are provided:
Wire/Line Drawing Wires Drawing Lines Symbol Select Symbol Settings Parent and Child Symbols Macro Select Entering Text Text Settings Invisible Text Foreign Language Text Box Field Circles and Arcs Signal Cross Reference Wire Numbers Part Numbers Dimensions Text File on Drawing
5-1
Schematic Elements
5-2
Edit Schematic Elements Edit Menu Modify Menu Replace Symbol Clear Page Replace Device IDs Replace Text Replace Symbol Text Edit Part Number Replace Part Number Globally Deleting Wire Number I/O Device ID Linetype Properties Layers List Object Function (for drawing elements)
Schematic Elements
Wire/Line RSWire is capable of creating two types of lines: wires and drawing lines. Wires – Wires are lines that have logical properties. Wires must be used to connect the symbols in schematic drawings. Wires will break automatically at symbol connection points. Wires allow RSWire to recognize the connections between symbols and perform other functions such as automatic wire numbering. Drawing Lines – Drawing lines are simple graphic lines with no logical properties. They should only be used for borders or for drawing when you create a new symbol. They should not be used to represent wires. Select the Draw > Wire function when you wish to create wires on the drawing screen. (A drawing page must be active before selecting this function.) Select the Draw > Graphic > Line function to create drawing lines.
Wires Use the Draw > Wire function to draw wires, pipes or other elements that connect the symbols on a drawing. Wires are necessary for RSWire to recognize the from/to connections between the symbols. When wires are drawn over symbols (or when symbols are placed on a wire), the line is broken automatically at the symbol connection points. When two wires are connected, the connection points are drawn automatically. Important
You must draw wires using the Wire functions in order for RSWire to recognize connections and perform other automatic functions. Drawing lines will not work for this purpose.
Draw Wire Continuous Center Dashed 3 Phase 90 Degree Down 90 Degree Up Multiline Repeat Last
5-3
Schematic Elements
The following wire drawing functions are available: The Continuous function is used when you wish to create single wire segments or two or more connected wire segments. The Center and Dashed functions create dash–dot and dashed wires, respectively. The 3 Phase function allows automatic drawing of three parallel wires. With the 90 Degree Down and 90 Degree Up functions, you can connect two points with wire segments at a 90 degree angle in one step. The angle is either above or below the vertical wire. The Multiline function allows multiple parallel wires to be drawn in a single step. Multilines can have various combinations of solid, dashed and dotted lines in various colors. These are called multiline styles. You can select and customize multiline styles using the Format > Multiline Style function. See page 6-100. The Repeat Last function allows you to draw a wire parallel to the previously drawn wire. Only the end point needs to be entered. For horizontal wires the X coordinate is the same as for the previous wire, for vertical wires the Y coordinate is the same as for the previous wire. To Draw a Single Wire: Select the Draw > Wire > Continuous function. 1.
Locate the starting point of the wire by clicking the left mouse button.
2.
Click on end point with the left mouse button.
3.
Click the right mouse button to complete the wire.
Click On Start And End Points 117 PB118
PB118.1
CR118
118 119
Connection Points (Drawn Automatically)
Symbol Connection Points (Wire Broken Automatically)
JIC Single Wires
5-4
Schematic Elements
Click On Start Point 21 13
–S5
–K1
/.6
22 14
21
21 –S6
–S4
22
22
3 –H4
–K1 4
13 21
Click On End Point
14 22
/.4
IEC Single Wires
Adjusting Wire Length – You can extend an existing parallel wire by drawing another line and connecting it to the first. The system will treat the two wires as a single wire. You can also adjust wire length by stretching the wire’s endpoint (Modify > Stretch function). Note
If a wire is drawn over one or more symbols, the wire will automatically break between symbols. Wire/Line Coordinates Display – While wires and lines are being drawn, x–y coordinates of the line endpoint are displayed on the status line below the drawing area.
5-5
Schematic Elements
To Draw 3–Phase Wires: Use the Draw > Wire > 3 Phase function to automatically draw 3 parallel wires spaced one grid unit apart. 3–phase wires are used for power circuit diagrams. Select the Draw > Wire > 3 Phase function. 1.
Locate starting point of wires by clicking left mouse button.
2.
Click the left mouse button again on the desired end point. 3–Phase Drawing Example: 101
Wire Starting Point
102 T1
103
M1
M
PUMP 5 HP 1000 RPM
T2
104
7.2 AMP
T3
105
Wire End Point
106 107
Wire Starting Point 101
Wire End Point
102
T1
M
103 104
3–Phase Connections 105 (Drawn Automatically) 106 107
JIC 3–Phase Wires
5-6
M1
PUMP 5 HP
T2
1000 RPM
T3
7.2 AMP
Schematic Elements
Wire Starting Point
Wire End Point
3–Phase Connections (Drawn Automatically)
Wire End Point
Wire Starting Point U
–M1
V
W
PE
U
M 3~
–M1
V
PE
M 3~
PUMP
PUMP
5 HP
5 HP 7.2 AMP
7.2 AMP 1000 RPM
W
1000 RPM
IEC 3–Phase Wires
Note
The software automatically connects two intersecting sets of 3 phase wires. However, you must draw the second set of wires into the first set. See the above examples.
5-7
Schematic Elements
To Draw Repeat Wires: Use the Repeat Last function to repeatedly draw parallel wires. Once a wire is drawn, only the end points of subsequent wires need to be defined. For horizontal wires the X coordinate is the same as for the previous wire, for vertical wires the Y coordinate is the same as for the previous wires. Wires or drawing lines can be drawn using the Repeat option. Select the Draw > Wire > Repeat Last option.
Note
1.
Draw the first wire (using the Draw > Wire > Continuous function).
2.
Select the Draw > Wire > Repeat Last option.
3.
Click on end points of all subsequent parallel wires.
The starting points for wires are along the x or y axis of the starting point of the first wire. Repeat Wires Example: Y–AXIS
First Wire Starting Point
End Point Click Here To Draw Second Wire Click Here To Draw Third Wire
Click Here To Draw Fourth Wire
To Draw Continuous Wires or Lines: The Continuous function allows you to draw multiple, connected wire segments. Select the Draw > Wire > Continuous function.
5-8
1.
Locate starting point of the first wire by clicking the left mouse button.
2.
Click on end point of first wire with the left mouse button.
3.
Create second and all subsequent lines by clicking on the destination point of each wire segment with the left mouse button.
Schematic Elements
4.
Complete the last segment by clicking the right mouse button (or pressing the <Enter> key).
Step 1
First Segment
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
To Draw Wires Using 90 Degree Up / Down: Use the Draw > Wire > 90 Degree Up and 90 Degree Down options to draw right angles automatically. This allows a pair of wires to be drawn in one operation. See examples below for procedure. “90 Degree Up” means the angle is above the diagonal. “90 Degree Down” places the angle below the diagonal. 90 Degree Up Example:
3) Angle Drawn Automatically
1) Click On Start Point 2) Click On End Point
90 Degree Down Example:
1) Click On Start Point
2) Click on End Point 3) Angle Drawn Automatically
5-9
Schematic Elements
Drawing Lines Use the Draw > Graphic > Line function to create drawing lines. Note
Unlike wires, RSWire does not recognize drawing lines as having any electrical or connective properties. Drawing lines are used for mechanical layouts, device layouts, assembly layouts, borders, etc. Connection points are not automatically drawn.
Draw Graphic Line Polyline The following line drawing functions are available: The Single function allows a single graphic line segment to be drawn by defining a start and end point with the left mouse button. You can create multiple, connected line segments in a manner similar to the continuous wire drawing function. Click the right mouse button to complete the line. The Polyline function activates the AutoCAD Polyline function.
5-10
Schematic Elements
Symbol Select There are two functions for selecting symbols located under the Insert menu.
Insert Select Icon Symbol By Name Select Icon allows you to select symbols by picking a graphical representation of the symbol. Symbol By Name allows you to select symbols by entering the symbol name. Both options display the following symbol selection dialog box.
5-11
Schematic Elements
Select Icon On the lower left side of the dialog box is a list of symbol groups. Selecting one of these groups displays graphical images of the symbols in the selected group. Individual symbols can be selected by pointing and clicking on the icons. When you place the cursor on one of the icons, a pop–up symbol description tag will appear. Pull–down menus are provided in the select icon window. The Edit menu provides a function to delete symbol groups from the list (caution: this function will delete the WMF file for the symbol group) and a function to refresh the display. The Settings menu gives access to the symbol and macro setting dialog boxes, and to a background color function for the Select Icon window. The Exit menu will close the window. The user can create his or her own symbol groups for use in the Select Icon mode. The procedure for creating these groups is described in an appendix. See page C-1. Symbol by Name If you know the symbol name, you can enter it in the Name field of the Select Icon dialog box and select OK. Otherwise, wildcard searches can be made by making entries containing asterisks (*) in the Name or Description fields. For example, enter *PUSHBUTTON* in the Description field to search for any symbols with the word PUSHBUTTON in the description. If any symbols matching the search string are found they are displayed on screen in a list which can be selected from by pointing and clicking. You can also select the Search button to see a list of all the symbols in the current project’s symbol catalogs. As shown in the following figure, this Symbol Database dialog includes the symbols’ Catalog, Name, Type and Description. By clicking on one of these column headings you can determine how the listed symbols are sorted. In the Path field you can select which catalogs are displayed. The available selections are those listed in the catalog path line of the ecs.cfg file in the Rs\Work directory.
5-12
Schematic Elements
Symbol Database
All Catalogs
Path:
Catalog JIC JIC JIC JIC JIC JIC JIC JIC
Name CRNO CRNC CRC CR CP COS CONN CI
OK
Type PS2 PS2 PS2 PS1 CP1 GS1 TS5 GS1
Description NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACT CONTROL RELAY FORM C CON CONTROL RELAY COIL NECESSARY SYMBOL FOR LIB CABLE-OPERATED (EMERG.) CHILD PIN CONNECTOR CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER 3PHAS
Symbol Settings Also displayed in the Select Icon dialog box under Symbol Settings are the current Angle, Scale, and Mirror settings. If you wish to change these settings, click inside the desired field. For more on these symbol settings, see page 5-23. Placing a Symbol Once a symbol is selected, its outline is visible on the drawing screen at the cursor location. Position the symbol by pointing the cursor at the desired location and pressing the left mouse button. The symbol is then placed in the diagram. The reference point of the symbol will snap to the nearest grid line. If the symbol is placed on a wire, the wire will break automatically at the symbol connection points. If a symbol is placed first and a wire is drawn over the symbol, the wire will also break automatically. The symbol will be rotated automatically to match the horizontal or vertical alignment of a wire. (For this to occur, symbol rotation must be set to 0 degrees and the symbol reference point must be on the wire. Certain 3–phase symbols will not be rotated automatically.) Note
No more than one wire should be connected to a single symbol connection point.
5-13
Schematic Elements
PB118
PB118
Wrong
Right
Auto Device ID Assignment Once the symbol is placed, the Device ID Assignment dialog box appears. You can accept the prompted device ID, or you can type a different ID in the fields provided. A device ID can have up to 14 characters. (The drop–down list beside the Device ID field will show all the device IDs that have been assigned in the current work session.) The format of the device ID can consist of sequential numbers or letters, in combination with page and/or line numbers. The device ID format is selected in the Project Parameters dialog box when the project is created (see page 3-9). The prompted device ID is the lowest available ID. Device ID Assignment Installation:
Search...
Location:
Search...
Device ID:
Search Device ID
Suppress Device ID
Duplicate Device ID
Multiple Placement
Part Number Assigned Part No./Select to Delete
Search... Addit.Part Number
OK
5-14
Cancel
Help...
Schematic Elements
Note
Do not use any of the following reserved characters in the device ID that you enter: # = + – ^ / : ~.@ (includes spaces and periods). These characters are used for various purposes by the software and may cause unexpected results if entered in the device ID. (You can use dashes if you intend to use the Nested Device IDs function. See page 7-44.) If you wish the device ID to be hidden on the screen and on plots of the drawing, select the Suppress Device ID checkbox. The device ID will still be assigned to the symbol; it will simply not be shown. Selecting the Duplicate Device ID checkbox allows you to place two symbols with the same device ID (ordinarily, the software’s error checking prevents duplicate IDs). The two symbols must belong to the GS1 symbol group. You must select the Duplicate Device ID checkbox when placing both symbols. Cross referencing will appear at both symbols indicating the page and line number where the other symbol appears. If you place more than two symbols with the same ID using this method, some of the symbols will have two cross references, one indicating the related symbol that comes before it and one indicating the symbol that comes after it (in page/line order). If you wish to avoid duplicate part numbers, you should only assign a part number to one of the symbols. The Multiple Placement checkbox applies only when placing a series of similar symbols (allows automatic placement on consecutive lines). See page 5-19. The Search Device ID button is active when parent or child symbols are placed (see page 5-25 for more on parent and child symbols). It allows you to search for existing device IDs of a given type (see page 5-20). To assign a part number to a symbol, select the Search button in the Device ID Assignment dialog box. This will display a list of part numbers in the Assign Part Number screen. You can select one or more of the displayed part numbers. See page 5-79 for more information on the Assign Part Number screen. If you wish to assign additional part numbers to the same symbol you can simply use the Search button again to return to the Assign Part Number screen. Or, if you know the part number, you can type the additional part number in the the Additional Part Number field and select the Addit. Part Number button. Selected part numbers for the current device ID are listed in the Assigned Part No./Select to Delete field. To delete (un–assign) part numbers that have already been assigned simply click on the part number you wish to delete. Select the OK button to accept the device ID and any part numbers that have been selected. This ID will be placed on the symbol in the drawing.
5-15
Schematic Elements
If the symbol has symbol text associated with it, the Symbol Text dialog box will appear displaying the text. Symbol text is functional attribute text that is associated with a specific symbol (rather than ordinary text which can be placed anywhere in a drawing). If a symbol text entry is required, the text will be displayed as a “?”. Enter the desired symbol text and select OK. Symbol Symbol Text: Full load current:
? AMP
Attributes Only Next
Note
Previous
OK
Cancel
Help...
Some symbols have fixed symbol text which does not require an entry. If you only wish to have the “?” symbol text displayed in the Symbol Text dialog box, select the Attributes Only checkbox in the symbol text dialog box. This reduces the chance that someone might make an entry in the wrong text field. The system will check for duplicate device IDs unless the Online function is turned off for the page. The online function is selected when the page is created by activating the Online checkbox in the New Page dialog box (see page 4-14). You can activate the Online function for an existing page through the Manage > Page > Modify function. If you attempt to assign a duplicate device ID (when the Online function is active), the message “Device ID already exists” is displayed on the screen along with the ID and page/line location of the existing symbol. After selecting the OK button, the next available device ID will be displayed.
5-16
Schematic Elements
Parent Symbols – If the symbol you are placing is a “parent” symbol (one that may have associated contacts elsewhere in the diagram such as a relay), you will also be prompted to select a “Device Type.” This device type is a definition that associates a parent symbol, one or more child symbols, and a cross reference symbol. By selecting a device type you tell the software how many child symbols are to be associated with this parent symbol and which cross reference symbol to place next to the parent. (See page 5-25 for more on parent and child symbols.) The following Device Type dialog box will appear. Device Type Device Type: Description: OK
Search...
Cancel
Help...
Enter the desired device type in the Device Type field. The drop–down list in this field will show all the device types that have been assigned in the current work session. Select the Search button to display a list of device names and descriptions that are associated with the symbol type you are currently placing. After you enter the device type, the Connection Points dialog box is displayed which lists the connection point designations for the parent symbol and its associated child symbols. Connection Points Select Connection Points Device ID: =LINE1+EN1–CR108 Device:
Installation
22
Pg.Line
Symbol CR CRNO CRNO CRNC CRNC
Modification Field
Connection Points A1 A2 13 14 23 24 31 32 11 12 41 42 21 22
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 OK
Cancel
Help
5-17
Schematic Elements
This dialog box displays the connection point designations for the parent symbol and each child symbol. If desired, you can select the parent symbol line (“CR A1 A2” in the example above) to display the connection point designations in the modification field. These designations can be reversed if desired by entering the designations in reverse order (“A2 A1”). The designations will then appear on the opposite sides of the symbol. Select the OK button to place the parent symbol in the drawing. A cross reference box will appear next to the parent symbol which will be automatically updated as each child symbol is placed. Child Symbols – When placing a child symbol (such as a relay contact) the software will prompt a device ID containing a “?”. For example, “CR?”. You must enter the same device ID as the parent symbol to allow the software to recognize the relation between the parent and child symbol. After entering the child symbol device ID, the same Connection Points dialog box shown for the parent symbol will be displayed. The connection point designations of the first available child symbol of the selected type (CRNO or CRNC) will be displayed in the modification field. If desired, you can select a different child symbol of the same type if you prefer that these connection designations be assigned to the symbol you are currently placing (for example, 23 and 24 rather than 13 and 14). You can also enter the connection designations in reverse order in the modification field. Select the OK button to place the symbol in the drawing. If you select the wrong child symbol type or enter connection designations that were not defined for this symbol the error message “Connection point description not possible” will be displayed. As each child symbol is placed, its position (page and line number) will be automatically placed in the cross reference box beside the parent symbol.
5-18
Schematic Elements
Multiple Placement of Symbols When the Multiple Placement checkbox in the Device ID Assignment dialog box is enabled you can automatically place symbols on parallel wires. Device ID Assignment Installation:
Search...
Location:
Search...
Device ID:
Search Device ID
Suppress Device ID
Duplicate Device ID
Multiple Placement
Part Number Search...
Assigned Part No./Select to Delete
Multiple Placement checkbox
Addit.Part Number
Cancel
OK
Help...
To place multiple symbols use the following steps: 1.
Select a symbol (such as X1) using the Insert > Select Icon or Insert > Symbol By Name function.
2.
Place the symbol on the first wire of the range of wires to be included.
3.
The Device ID Assignment dialog box will appear (see above). Enter the desired device ID in the Device ID field.
4.
Select the Multiple Placement checkbox.
5.
Select the OK button to continue. The symbol will appear on the wire.
6.
Press the <Esc> key to end the Insert Symbol function.
5-19
Schematic Elements
7.
Select the last wire in the range of wires by pointing the cursor and clicking on the desired terminal position (do not select a symbol draw function again). If terminal symbols are being placed, consecutively numbered terminals will appear on all wires between the first and last selected wires. For non–terminal symbols, a device ID will be prompted for the symbol on each wire. –TB4
1
Place First Symbol Here
2 3
Click On Last Line
Terminals 2 And 3 Placed Are Numbered Automatically
Note
For terminal symbols: when grid lines are visible between wires, the device ID of the terminal will be displayed on all terminal symbols placed with the Multiple Placement function. When no grid line is displayed between wires then the function will automatically suppress the device ID of all multiple terminal symbols except the first (as shown above).
Search Device ID Related parent and child symbols share the same device ID. Therefore, when placing a parent or child symbol it is useful to know which device IDs have already been used. For this purpose, a Search Device ID button is provided in the Device ID Assignment dialog box. This button is only active when a parent or child symbol is being placed.
5-20
Schematic Elements
Device ID Assignment Installation:
Search...
Location:
Search...
Device ID:
Search Device ID
Suppress Device ID
Duplicate Device ID
Multiple Placement
Part Number Search...
Assigned Part No./Select to Delete
Search Device ID Button
Addit.Part Number
Help...
Cancel
OK
When you select the Search Device ID button, the following Search Device ID dialog box will appear. Search Device ID Installation: Location: Device ID: Function Text: OK
Cancel
Help...
The Device ID field will contain a wildcard string based on the symbol that is currently being placed. This determines what kind of device IDs will be included in the search. You can also narrow the search by entering installation and location names in the Installation and Location fields. In addition the Function Text field allows your search to be based on existing function text. 5-21
Schematic Elements
When you select the OK button, all existing device IDs that match the search parameters will be displayed along with their installation, location, device type, and function text. This search will cover the entire project.
If desired, you can pick one of these device IDs and it will appear in the Device ID Assignment dialog box to be assigned to the symbol you are currently placing. If this ID cannot be used because the parent symbol already exists or because all the child symbols have been assigned, an error message will appear when you place the symbol.
5-22
Schematic Elements
Symbol Settings Various settings can be made that govern how the symbol appears on the drawing. In general, these settings remain in effect until a different setting is made. Symbol Scale, Rotation, and Mirroring – Use the Symbol Settings function to set symbol scale, rotation and mirroring. (These settings do not affect symbols that already exist on a drawing, only those symbols placed after the setting is made.) First, right click on the desired symbol, then, from the pop–up menu, select:
Block Settings Symbol Settings The following Symbol dialog box will be displayed. Symbol Scale Factor
Rotate
1.000
0
2.000
45
5.000
60
0.500
90
0.250
180
Mirror None x–axis y–axis
Current Values 1.000 OK
Note
0 Cancel
Help...
Save
You can also make these settings in the Select Icon dialog box when placing symbols. See page 5-13. Scaling and rotation values can be selected from the Scale Factor and Rotate fields by pointing and clicking. The currently selected values appear in the Current Values fields. The Scale values allow the symbol to be reduced (0.500) or enlarged (2.000). Rotate values allow rotation of the symbol in degrees. If desired, you can enter other scale and rotation values in the fields (including negative rotation values) and then select them. Use the Save button to store any values you enter in the selection fields for future work sessions.
5-23
Schematic Elements
Note
When scaling symbols with the AutoCAD R14 Add–on version of the software, do not use a scale that results in symbol connection points being spaced at a distance that involves units smaller than one thousandth of an inch (.001 inch). The software cannot correctly position such symbols on a grid and will not be able to recognize connections. The AutoCAD 2000 Add–on version of the software provides an additional decimal place of precision (.0001 inch). The Mirror radio buttons allow the symbol to be mirrored on the X or Y axis. Select None for no mirroring (normal orientation).
None – No Mirroring
X Axis Mirroring
Y Axis Mirroring
Other Symbol Settings: Suppressing Device ID Sign (–) – Use the Tools > Project Settings function, Device ID Style tab to display the Device ID Style dialog box. Then turn on the Suppress Device ID Sign checkbox to remove the leading “–” from the device ID on the schematic drawing.
5-24
Schematic Elements
Parent and Child Symbols Certain symbols can have a “parent” or “child” relationship with other symbols in a schematic. Examples include relays and motor starters (parent) which have related contacts (child) appearing throughout a drawing. If child symbols are given the same device ID as the parent, the system can automatically provide cross referencing.
Parent Symbol CR112 114
(Line 112) Cross Reference To Child Child Symbol
CR112
(Line 114)
Cross Reference To Parent 112
JIC Cross Reference
21 –K1
/.6
22 A1
Parent Symbol
A2
Cross Reference To Parent
3
Child Symbol –K1
4
13 21
14 22
/.4
Cross Reference To Child IEC Cross Reference
You may wonder how the system knows how many children a parent symbol has. This is accomplished with a “Device Type” definition that establishes the type and number of child symbols that are associated with the parent and which cross reference symbol to place next to the parent symbol.
5-25
Schematic Elements
When you place a parent symbol on a drawing, the software will ask what its device type is. Once the system knows the device name, it can also perform error–checking functions by keeping track of how many of the available child symbols have been used. The same symbol types can be assigned to different devices. For example, you can use the CR parent symbol with various device types to represent relays with different combinations of normally open and normally closed contacts. Or, you can create devices for a relay and a motor starter that both use the same cross reference symbol. A number of device type definitions are provided with RSWire (you can list them with the Reports > Libraries > Device Type Full function), or the user can create custom device definitions. The example above could use the standard device type named “20.” This device consists of a parent relay with two normally open and no normally closed contact children. Put simply, the device type definition contains the following information: Device Name: 20 Parent Symbol Name: CR Cross Reference Symbol Name: Q20 Child Symbol: CRNO Child Symbol: CRNO
5-26
Schematic Elements
Macro Select A macro is a collection of symbols and other elements that can be placed on a drawing in one step. A number of macros are provided with RSWire. You can also create your own macros. See page 6-81 for instructions on creating a macro. To select a macro, use one of these functions.
Insert Select Icon Macro By Name Selecting Insert > Select Icon function allows you to select pictorial representations (icons) of macros. Selecting Insert > Macro By Name function allows macro selection by entering the macro name. Both options display the following Select Icon dialog box.
5-27
Schematic Elements
To select macros by graphical icon, select one of the macro groups from the list in the lower left side of the dialog box. Then select one of the displayed macros by pointing and clicking on the icons. The macro groups provided with the software begin with the word “MACRO_”. To select macros by name, first select the Macro radio button in the Select Icon dialog box. Then enter the name in the Macro Name field and select OK. Otherwise, wildcard searches can be made by making entries containing asterisks (*) in the Name or Description fields and selecting the Search button. For example, enter *MOTOR* in the Description field to search for any macros with the word MOTOR in the description. If any macros matching the search string are found, they are displayed on screen in a list which can be selected from by pointing and clicking.
5-28
Schematic Elements
In the Macro Settings area of the Select Icon dialog box, there is a field labeled Maintain Device IDs as Created. You can click inside this field to select between “Yes” and “No” values. If you select “Yes,” the device IDs of any symbols in the macro will not be automatically updated to reflect their new position (however you will still be prompted with the original device ID). This is useful when using a macro (such as for L1 and L2 lines) that will always have the same device IDs. Also displayed in the Select Icon dialog box under Macro Settings are the current Rotate and Scale settings. If you wish to change these settings, click in the desired field and enter a value. These settings do not affect macros that already exist on a drawing, only those macros placed after the setting is made. Scale and rotation values are selected similar to symbol scaling and rotation (see page 5-23). No mirroring is possible with macros. Placing a Macro Once a macro is selected, its outline is visible on the drawing screen at the cursor location. Position the macro by pointing the screen cursor at the desired location and pressing the left mouse button. The macro is then placed in the diagram and the following Device ID Assignment dialog box appears. Device ID Assignment Installation:
Search...
Location:
Search...
Device ID:
Search Device ID
Suppress Device ID
Duplicate Device ID
Part Number Search...
Assigned Part No./Select to Delete
Addit.Part Number
OK
Accept All
Cancel
Help...
5-29
Schematic Elements
Device ID – The device IDs of the symbols within the macro are prompted one by one in the Device ID Assignment dialog box. The prompted IDs will reflect the new position of the symbols unless you selected the Maintain Device IDs as Created checkbox when the macro was selected. Select the Suppress Device ID checkbox if you wish the device ID to be hidden on the screen and on plots of the drawing. The device ID will still be assigned to the symbol; it simply will not be shown. Selecting the Duplicate Device ID checkbox allows you to place two symbols with the same device ID (ordinarily, the software’s error checking prevents duplicate IDs). The two symbols must belong to the GS1 symbol group. You must select the Duplicate Device ID checkbox when placing both symbols. Cross referencing will appear at both symbols indicating the page and line number where the other symbol appears. If you wish to avoid duplicate part numbers, you should only assign a part number to one of the symbols. Selecting the Accept All button causes all the default device IDs to be accepted and entered in one step. You will not be prompted for symbol text. You can assign part numbers to each symbol with the Search button. This will display the Assign Part Number dialog box for part selection. See page 5-79. Any special symbol text (such as Amp and horsepower values) will also be prompted. The example dialog box shows the prompt for a text requiring an Amp value. Simply replace the “?” with the desired value and select OK. Values entered here can be changed with the Modify > Symbol function. Symbol Symbol Text: Full load current:
? AMP
Attributes Only Next
Previous
OK
Cancel
Help...
Macro Wire Numbers – If wire numbers were stored as part of the macro, these will appear when the macro is placed. If the macro’s wire numbers are connected to or duplicate existing wire numbers in the project, the existing wire numbers will take precedence. See page 6-81 for more information. 5-30
Schematic Elements
Entering Text Although RSWire automatically enters device IDs and other descriptive labels when placing symbols, the user may wish to include additional text to further describe various drawing elements. Text can be entered on a drawing by selecting the Draw > Text function.
Draw Text Entering Text – To enter text on a drawing, first select the Draw > Text function. The following Text dialog box will appear. Text Text
Function Text Language Text Number:
Text:
Search...
Height:
0.1500
Select...
Position X:
0.0000
Angle:
0
Select...
Position Y:
0.0000
Slant:
0
Select...
Attribute Number:
Ratio:
0.0000
Select...
Label Origin:
5
Select...
Color:
0
Select...
Object Default Settings Disable Settings
Font: OK
Cancel
Help...
In the Text field, enter the desired text. Text strings up to 256 characters in length can be entered (the text will scroll within the field).
5-31
Schematic Elements
Multi–line text – If you wish to enter multi–line text, enter a “^” character to cause a line break. For example, the entry “EMERGENCY^STOP” will be displayed as: EMERGENCY STOP The Function Text checkbox allows you to assign the text from the Text Input field as function text to be associated with a particular device ID in the Master List. When this checkbox is selected and you select OK to close the Text dialog box, you will be prompted to “Select objects” on the drawing screen. Select the desired symbol and press <Enter>. The software will prompt you to “Define point.” Select a point near the symbol. The text that was entered in the Text Input field will appear here. This text will then be associated with the symbol’s device ID when a Master List is generated. For parent/child symbols, assign the function text to the parent symbol. If you have used the Duplicate Device ID checkbox in the Device ID Assignment dialog box to allow a duplicate device ID, you should assign function text to only one of the two symbols. If you wish to place a text string more than once, you can select the down arrow button next to the Text field to see a drop–down list of text strings that have been entered in the current work session. You can select from this list. Use the Language Text fields to search for entries from the RSWire language text lists (see page 5-41). Enter either the text number in the Number field or the text itself in the Text field (wildcard searches are permitted) and select the Search button. Any text matching the entered value will be displayed and can be selected by pointing and clicking. The list that is accessed will be the number 1 language selected when the project was created. Note
If you wish to enter a language text number directly in the Text Input field, the text number must be preceded by a tilde (~) character. The Position X and Position Y fields indicate the coordinates of the last text to be entered, and by making an entry you can determine the coordinates of the next text to be entered. The Attribute Number field is used when creating a new symbol to define a sequence of text attributes. When you are not in the symbol–create mode, the field is not accessible. See page 6-14 for more information. The remainder of the dialog box consists of fields and buttons that allow various text parameters to be set. These are described in the following subsection, Text Settings.
5-32
Schematic Elements
Selecting the Object Default Settings checkbox will change the text parameters to match the settings listed in the Object Defaults tab in the Project Settings dialog box under Tools > Project Settings. If this checkbox is not selected, the text parameters can be changed. The Disable Settings checkbox will remove the text parameter fields and buttons (Height, Angle, Slant, etc.) from the Text dialog box on subsequent text entries. The figure below shows how this reduced Text dialog box will appear. The parameters can be returned by selecting an Enable Settings checkbox which will then be present. Text Text
Function Text Position X:
23.5000
Position Y: 15.0000
Attribute No.
Language Text Number:
Search...
Text:
Enable Settings OK
Cancel
Help...
To place the text, select the OK button. If you have not entered coordinates in the dialog box, the system will prompt, “Define point or select parameter” allowing you to choose a point for placing text on the drawing.
5-33
Schematic Elements
Text Settings When you select the Draw > Text function, the Text dialog box that appears contains fields for various text parameters. Parameters are entered with the Select buttons that list available values for these parameters and allow selections to be made. The Disable Settings checkbox will remove the text parameter fields (Height, Angle, Slant, etc.) from the Text dialog box on subsequent text entries. The parameters can be returned by selecting an Enable Settings checkbox which will then be present. The following parameters are available: Height – This option allows you to set the height of the text characters. When you select the Choice button, the following Height dialog box appears. Height Text Height Text Height 1:
0.1000
Text Height 2:
0.1250
Text Height 3:
0.2500
Text Height 4:
0.5000
Text Height 5:
0.7500
Text Height 6:
1.0000
Text Height 7:
0.2500
Last Selection: OK
Note
0.250 Cancel
Help...
Save
Values shown in inches. This dialog box provides seven different height values which can be selected. If desired, you can also enter new values in these fields (use the Save button to save these newly entered value so they will be available in future work sessions). To select a value, point and click so that the cursor appears in the desired field. Then select the OK button. The currently selected value is displayed in the Last Selection field.
5-34
Schematic Elements
Angle – This option sets the angle at which text strings will appear on the drawing. Selecting Select displays the following Angle dialog box. Angle Text Angle Text Angle 1:
0
Text Angle 2:
90
Text Angle 3:
–90
Text Angle 4:
180
Text Angle 5:
0
Last Selection: OK
0 Cancel
Help...
Save
Five angle values (in degrees) are available for selection. If desired, you can also enter new values in these fields (use the Save button to save any newly entered values so they will be available in future work sessions). To select a value, point and click so that the cursor appears in the desired field. Then select the OK button. The currently selected value is displayed in the Last Selection field.
5-35
Schematic Elements
Slant – This option selects the text slant – the angle that individual characters will have. Selecting Select displays the following Slant dialog box. Slant Text Slant Text Slant 1:
0
Text Slant 2:
15
Text Slant 3:
30
Text Slant 4:
0
Last Selection: OK
0 Cancel
Help...
Save
Four slant values (in degrees) are available for selection. If desired you can also enter new values in these fields (use the Save button to save any newly entered values so they will be available in future work sessions). To select a value, point and click so that the cursor appears in the desired field. Then select the OK button. The currently selected value is displayed in the Last Selection field.
5-36
Schematic Elements
Ratio – This option allows selection of a width–to–height ratio for text characters. For example, a ratio value of 4 would produce characters 4 times wider than their height. Selecting Select displays the following Ratio dialog box. Ratio Text Ratio Text Ratio 1:
1.0000
Text Ratio 2:
0.0000
Text Ratio 3:
0.0000
Text Ratio 4:
0.0000
Text Ratio 5:
0.0000
Last Selection: OK
Ratio 0.000
Cancel
Help...
Save
Five ratio values are available for selection. If desired, you can enter new values in these fields (use the Save button to save any newly entered values so they will be available in future work sessions). To select a value, point and click so that the cursor appears in the desired field. Then select the OK button. The currently selected value is displayed in the Last Selection field.
5-37
Schematic Elements
Label Origin – This option allows you to set where the text will appear in relation to the reference point you select on the drawing. When you select Select, the following Label Origin dialog box will be displayed. Label Origin 7 Top Left
8 Top Center
9 Top Right
4 Middle Left
5 Middle Center
6 Middle Right
1 Bottom Left
2 Bottom Center
3 Bottom Right
10 Baseline Left
11 Baseline Center
12 Baseline Right
Last Selection: OK
5 Cancel
Help...
Save
The current label origin is shown in the Last Selection field. Select the desired label origin by pointing and clicking on the appropriate button. Then select the OK button. Text will be placed in relation to the origin point as shown in the following illustration. Top Left:
TEXT
Top Center:
TEXT
Top Right:
TEXT
Middle Left:
TEXT
Middle Center:
TEXT
Middle Right:
TEXT
Baseline Left:
TEXT
Baseline Center:
TEXT
Baseline Right:
TEXT
Bottom Left:
TEXT
Bottom Center:
TEXT
Bottom Right:
TEXT
5-38
Schematic Elements
Color – This parameter sets the color of the text. When you select the Select button, the following Select Color dialog box appears. Select Color Standard Colors
Gray Shades
Logical Colors BYLAYER
BYBLOCK
Full Color Palette
Color: OK
BYBLOCK Cancel
Help...
Select a color either from the Standard Colors or the Full Color Palette areas. The selected color is indicated by a square to the right of the Color: field. The BYLAYER and BYBLOCK buttons allow selection of these two methods of coloring. The current selection is indicated in the Color field. Font – This field indicates the currently selected font. To set the text font, use the Format > Text Style function and select one of the displayed fonts.
5-39
Schematic Elements
Invisible Text It is possible to hide all or part of a text string on a drawing by beginning and ending the text to be hidden with an “@” character. The text is otherwise entered as normal using the Draw > Text function. Example: Text as entered: Text as it appears on drawing:
Main @Class B@Motor Main Motor
The hidden text will be visible only when editing the text using the Modify > Text function. Note
5-40
Invisible text can also be used in symbol (function) text and in wire number prefixes.
Schematic Elements
Foreign Language Text RSWire has the capability to automatically display selected text words and phrases in multiple languages. RSWire includes a file containing lists of commonly used technical words and phrases in six languages (English, German, French, Spanish, Italian and Dutch). The words and phrases in each list are numbered, and the corresponding term is given the same number in each language list. By entering the number for the word or phrase in the drawing (instead of the word itself), the software can automatically display the word or phrase in up to three of the available languages. The text is entered on the drawing (using the Draw > Text function) as a tilde character “~” followed by the desired text number. For example, ~187. The user can edit and add to any of the word lists and can create new word lists for additional languages. Up to 20 language lists can be stored. The text in each language is restricted to 80 characters per phrase. Selecting Languages To select which languages will appear in a drawing, one first specifies up to three languages in the Language fields of the Project Parameters dialog box when creating a project. See page 3-9. (You can change these settings with the Manage > Project > Modify function.) In the following Project Parameters dialog box, English has been chosen as Language 1, French as Language 2, and German as Language 3.
5-41
Schematic Elements
Project Parameters Default Device ID Display:
Device ID – Page – Line No.
Signal Cross Reference Analysis Type:
Ascending by Inst. and Pages
Language Fields
Language
Default Text Size Device ID
0.1250
Connection Point
0.1250
Strip/Plug ID Terminal/Plug ID
1:
English
0.0000
2:
French
Cross Reference
0.1250 0.1250
3:
German
Signal Cross Reference
0.1250 Default Grid
Default Text Style
ROMANS
Adjust Device ID When Symbols Are Moved
X
0.5000
Y
0.5000
Wire Numbering Mode: Wire Number Same Over Terminal Connection List/Term. Plan: Replace CP With I/O Address OK
Note
Cancel
Help...
Values shown in inches.
Placing Language Text Text codes are placed on the drawing in the form of a number preceded by a “~”. This text is displayed in the languages selected in the Project Parameters dialog box. Example: Text number 380 is “YES/NO” in English. If the selected languages are English–French–German as shown previously, and the text “~380” is placed on a drawing the following text will be displayed: YES/NO OUI/NON JA/NEIN
5-42
Schematic Elements
Viewing Language Lists Functions for viewing the contents of the language lists are accessed through the Reports > Libraries > Foreign Languages function. See page 9-7 for more information.
5-43
Schematic Elements
Language List Phrases To view a list of language phrases, select the Manage > Foreign Language > Edit Phrases function. Select:
Manage Foreign Language Edit Phrases The contents of the language phrase lists are accessed through Microsoft Access. The following form will appear. TEXT: Form
Language Database Text Number
1
Find Text Number
English:
DRIVE
German:
ANTRIEB
French:
ENTRAINEMENT
Spain:
DRIVE
Italy:
AZIONAMENTI
Dutch:
AANDRIJVING
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
The dialog lists a selected text phrase in all the languages for which a translation exists in the language text database. To display a specific text number – Enter the number of the desired phrase in the Find Text Number field and select the Find Text Number button (the button with the binoculars icon). You can step forward or backward through the list in numerical order by using the Next Record and Previous Record buttons at the bottom of the dialog box (the buttons with the triangle icons). To edit a phrase – Edit the displayed phrases as desired. To save your changes, select the Save Record button (the button with the disk and pencil icon). 5-44
Schematic Elements
To add a new phrase – Select the Add Record button (the button with the triangle and asterisk). Enter an unused text number at the prompt. Enter the desired words for each language. Select the Save Record button (the button with the disk and pencil icon). Language List Additions To add a language to the language list, use the Manage > Foreign Language > New function. Select:
Manage Foreign Language New... The result will be the New Language dialog box with a list of current languages. Add the additional language(s) to the list. The list can accept up to 20 languages. Select the OK button to save the changes. New Language Index Language
Font
Index Language
1.
English
11.
2.
German
12.
3.
French
13.
4.
Spanish
14.
5.
Italian
15.
6.
English
16.
7.
17.
8.
18.
9.
19.
10.
20. OK
Cancel
Font
Help
If desired, you can use the Font field to assign a text style for each language. This allows you to distinguish each language on a drawing with a different font.
5-45
Schematic Elements
Language List Deletions To delete a language from the language list, use the Manage > Foreign Language > Delete... function. Select:
Manage Foreign Language Delete... The result will be the Delete Language dialog box with a list of current languages. Select (highlight) the language(s) to be deleted from the list. Select the OK button to save the changes. Delete Language Language English German French Spanish Italian Dutch
OK
5-46
Cancel
Help...
Schematic Elements
Box You can draw two types of boxes: Logical boxes and Drawing boxes. Logical boxes are processed like symbols and include a device ID and connection points. Drawing boxes are simple graphic elements with no logical properties. Filled or empty drawing boxes can be drawn.
Draw Logical Box Graphic
Box Empty Box Filled
Logical Boxes Logical boxes are used as symbols in a schematic drawing. Like other symbols, they are assigned a device ID and have connection points.
Connection Point D426
A
B
Connection Point Text
Device ID
Logical Box
There are a number of functions in the Draw > Logical Box submenu.
Draw Logical Box Create Conn. Point Delete Conn. Point To draw a logical box, select the Draw > Logical Box > Create function. The software will prompt you to define the first corner of the box and then the opposite corner. Then the software will display the Device ID Assignment dialog box and prompt you to enter a device ID for the logical box. The device ID is entered in the same way as for a symbol. If desired, you can also assign a part number to the logical box.
5-47
Schematic Elements
The default position for the device ID is to the left of the logical box. It can be moved with the Modify > Symbol function. Next, select the Draw > Logical Box > Conn. Point function and select a connection point by pointing and clicking. You will be prompted to select the location for connection point text. (If you don’t want connection point text, pick any point near the symbol.) Then you will be prompted to enter the connection point text in the following dialog box. Connection Point Parameters Device ID:
–D426
Device ID at Connection Point Connection Point:
?
Label Origin:
5
Select...
Height:
0.1500
Select...
Angle:
0
Select...
Color:
0
Select...
Conn.Pt. X Offset:
0.0000
Conn.Pt. Y Offset:
0.0000
Text X Offset:
0.0000
Text Y Offset:
0.0000
OK
Cancel
Help...
Select the Device ID at Connection Point checkbox if you wish the symbol’s device ID to be part of the connection point label. For example, if the device ID is D426 and if you enter “A” in the Connection Point field, the full connection point label will then be –D426:A. Select OK to enter the connection point parameters. Enter additional connection points as required. Important
5-48
To delete the connection point of a logical box, you must select the Draw > Logical Box > Delete Conn. Point function. Then click directly on the connection point you wish to delete. The Modify > Delete function will not affect these connection points.
Schematic Elements
Logical Box With Nested Symbols It is possible to place symbols inside a logical box. This allows the symbols inside the box to have a device ID that combines the ID of the logical box with the ID of the nested symbol. One application of this feature would be to use the box to represent a circuit board and then insert pin/plug symbols to represent the connectors on the board. The box could also represent a special controller module with terminal symbols inside that are related to that module.
Symbols inside logical box can have combined device IDs
LB1
LB1–TB1
Logical Box LB1–TB2
Nested Symbols
LB1–TB3
To correctly display the combined device IDs of the nested symbols, you must use the Tools > Project Settings function, select the Device ID Style tab, and then select the Complete radio button in the Nested Device ID section. Drawing Boxes Drawing boxes are simple graphic objects. The software does not recognize drawing boxes as having any logical properties. Empty or filled drawing boxes can be created. (To change the fill color, use the Tools > Project Settings > Object Defaults function.) To create a drawing box, select the Draw > Graphic function and either the Box Empty or Box Filled option.
Draw Graphic Box Empty Box Filled The software will prompt you to define the first corner of the box and then the opposite corner.
5-49
Schematic Elements
Box Settings To set the line type and fill of boxes that are not yet drawn: 1.
Select the Tools > Project Settings function.
2.
Select the Object Defaults tab.
3.
Select the Activate Object checkbox.
4.
Select “Drawing Box” from the drop down list of objects.
5.
Select the desired linetype or color.
These functions display the available color and line type options which may be selected. The color selection affects both the border and fill of the box when drawing filled boxes. To set the line type and fill of existing boxes: AutoCAD 14 1.
Select the Modify > Properties function.
2.
Select the desired box in the drawing.
3.
Select the desired color.
AutoCAD 2000
5-50
1.
Select the Tools > Preferences function.
2.
Select the Selection tab.
3.
Select the Enable grips checkbox.
4.
Select OK.
5.
Select the desired box in the drawing.
6.
Select the Modify > Properties function.
7.
In the Properties dialog, select the desired color.
8.
Close the Properties dialog.
Schematic Elements
9.
Turn off the Enable grips function.
5-51
Schematic Elements
Field RSWire software has the ability to recognize devices on a schematic that originate from a remote location, in other words, devices that exist in a different physical locale than the other devices on the schematic page. One way the user can identify these remote devices is by placing them in a “field.” (Another way is to use the Modify > Symbol function to change a symbol’s device ID to a different installation and location.) Overview – RSWire is an intelligent software package that can identify locations as well as logical connections. However, in the two–dimensional schematic world, the user must provide RSWire with the means to distinguish between real–world, physical locations and theoretical callouts on the drawing. To allow the software to recognize remote devices, the user can assign a field as an area of the schematic to contain the remote devices. A different Installation and Location can then be assigned to the field. RSWire will associate the devices in the field with this new Installation and Location rather than the Installation and Location of the page where the field appears. Rules for Field Creation: 1.
Fields can only be created on a page that has been given an Installation or Location name when created.
2.
A field can be drawn around existing devices, or devices can be drawn inside an existing field.
3.
A field can be drawn within another field.
Procedure for Field Creation: 1.
Select the Draw > Field function.
Draw Field Note
If you cannot select the Field function, the page may not have an installation or location assigned. See “Rules for Field Creation” above. 2.
5-52
On the command line, you will be prompted to define the first corner and opposite corner of the field in the desired area of the drawing. A box will indicate the field area.
Schematic Elements
3.
Next a prompt will appear on the Command Line asking you to “Locate the text position.” This means to select a point near the field where the field’s Installation/Location name will be printed. Select the point by pointing the cursor and clicking.
4.
The following Field Parameters dialog box will then appear. Field Parameters Installation:
Search...
Location:
Search...
Rename existing symbols to Inst./Loc. of the field
Text Color:
0
Select...
Label Origin:
5
Select...
Height:
0.2500
Select...
Angle:
0
Select...
Slant:
0
Select...
Ratio:
1.0000
Select...
Font: Text–X–Offset:
0.5000
Text–Y–Offset:
0.5000
Line Color:
1
Select...
Line Type:
CENTER
Select...
OK
Note
Cancel
Help...
Values shown in inches. At the top of this dialog box you can enter the Installation and/or Location name to which you wish the field to be assigned. This can be an existing installation/location, or one that has not yet been used. (The field can have the same installation name as the drawing page where it appears, but it should have a different location name if the field is to indicate remote devices.) Use the Search buttons to display a list of existing installations and locations.
5-53
Schematic Elements
Note
Do not use any of the following reserved characters in the installation and location names that you enter: # = + – ^ / : ~.@ (includes spaces and periods). These characters are used for various purposes by the software and may cause unexpected results if entered in these fields. The Rename existing symbols to inst/loc of the field checkbox determines whether or not any existing symbols in the field area will be renamed (reassigned) to the field’s installation and location. When the checkbox is on, existing symbols are renamed. The Text Position checkbox is only available with the Modify > Field function. It is used to change the position of the field’s installation/location label. There is also a set of fields for determining the characteristics of the text that will label the field on the drawing. See page 5-34 for more information on these text functions. The Text–Offset values indicate the distance from the field reference point (first corner) to the reference point (write position) of the text. These values can be altered if desired. The Line Color and Line Type fields allow the characteristics of the field border line to be set. Buttons are available on the right side of the dialog box for displaying and selecting most of these text and line parameters. 5.
When the desired values are entered, select the OK button to complete creation of the field.
Mixed Device Assignment – In some cases, you may wish to have some devices within a field remain associated with the Installation and Location of the drawing page, i.e., be local rather than remote devices. In such a case, use the following procedure:
5-54
1.
Before creating the field, draw the devices that are to remain local.
2.
Draw the field around the local devices. During the field creation process, set the Rename symbols to inst/loc to name of the field checkbox to off (no checkmark). This will cause the symbols to remain associated with the Installation/Location of the current page.
3.
Add the remote devices to the field area. Any new devices will be assigned to the Installation/Location of the field.
Schematic Elements
Deleting a Field – To delete a field, you must select the Modify > Delete function and then click on the border of the field. Note
The logic functions of RSWire ordinarily do not allow two devices with the same name to be assigned to the same Installation/Location. However, you may wish the devices in a field to represent devices that exist on another page, and therefore you would give the field the same Installation name as the other page where the devices appear. As shown in the following illustration, the device PB123 appears in Installation A, Location B as a local device and also as a remote device in Installation X, Location Y. The remote field has been assigned to Installation A, Location B.
Installation A Location B
PB123
Installation X Location Y
Field Assigned To Inst. A Location B
PB123
Ordinarily, when the device ID PB123 was entered a second time for the same Installation/Location, a “Device already exists” error would be displayed and the ID would not be allowed. This restriction can be overridden by selecting the Duplicate Device ID checkbox in the Device ID Assignment dialog box when both symbols are placed. Therefore in the example above, the ID PB123 would be assigned to both pushbuttons when they are placed (or after they have been placed by using the Modify > Symbol > Device ID function). Note
To avoid duplication, part numbers should only be assigned to one of the devices.
5-55
Schematic Elements
Circles and Arcs Functions are included in the Draw > Graphic pull–down menu for drawing Circles and Arcs. Circles – Selecting the Circle function displays the following submenu which provides a variety of methods for circle drawing:
Draw Graphic Circle Center, Radius Center, Diameter 2 Points 3 Points Tan, Tan, Radius Tan, Tan, Tan Filled Circle Center, Radius – Creates a circle by defining a center point and radius on the drawing. Center, Diameter – Creates a circle by defining a center point and a diameter on the drawing. 2 Points – Creates a circle by defining two endpoints of the circle’s diameter. 3 Points – Creates a circle by defining three points on the surface of the circle. Tan, Tan, Radius – (Tangent/Tangent/Radius) creates a circle by selecting two lines or arcs to which the circle is to be tangent and then entering a radius value. Filled Circle – Creates a circle with a fill color. Select the fill color with the Arcs – Use the Draw > Graphic > Arc functions to draw arcs. You will be prompted to select a center point (of the arc’s circle), a start point for the arc and an endpoint that establishes the length of the arc.
5-56
Schematic Elements
Draw Graphic Arc 3 Points Start, Center, End Start, Center, Angle Start, Center, Length Start, End, Angle Start, End, Direction Start, End, Radius Center, Start, End Center, Start, Angle Center, Start, Length Continue Filled Arc Arcs are drawn by making three selections on the drawing, as determined by the name of the specific arc function. Use the Draw > Graphic > Arc > Filled Arc function to create an arc with a filled interior.
5-57
Schematic Elements
Signal Cross Reference – JIC To allow RSWire to cross reference the devices in long schematics that extend over multiple columns and pages, the wires at the end of a column must be logically connected to the wires in the next column or next page so that the software knows that they are to be treated as one continuous circuit. To make this connection, a Signal Cross Reference symbol is placed at the end of the lines in one column and at the beginning of the next column. Note
Because they are used to bring wires together, signal cross references should be assigned before wire numbers are assigned.
125
CR124
AH126
126 127 128
Signal Cross Reference Symbols
129 L1/1
L2/1
If different page formats are used within a project, be sure to use identical cross referencing. When referencing from page to page, use the same reference on each page such as L1. The signal lines leaving or entering a location can be in the horizontal or in the vertical direction (shown below). When the reference is to be within the same sheet, the reference input used must be followed with /1, /2, etc. For example:
5-58
Schematic Elements
JIC Single Page Signal Cross Reference Vertical Layout Three Columns
L1
L2
L1/2
L2/2
L1/4
L2/4
L1/1
L2/1
L1/3
L2/3
L1
L2
Incoming Signal
Outgoing Signal
The following signal cross reference symbols are provided with the software (in the JIC symbol catalog). The user can also create custom symbols (see page 6-77). Symbol name
Description
SIG1
Outgoing, horizontal, right side of drawing, ID to right
SIG2
Incoming, horizontal, left side of drawing, ID to left
SIG3
Incoming, vertical, top of drawing, ID above
SIG4
Incoming, vertical, bottom of drawing, ID below
SIG5
Outgoing, vertical, top of drawing, ID above
SIG6
Outgoing, vertical, bottom of drawing, ID below
SIGIN
Incoming, vertical, ID in box
SIGOUT
Outgoing, vertical, ID in box
STARHEX2L
(Star type) for use with the HEXOUT2L macro
STARHEX2R
(Star type) for use with the HEXOUT2R macro
STARHEXOUT5
(Star type) for use with the HEXOUT5 macro
STARIN1
(Star type) Incoming, printed on 1 line
STARIN2
(Star type) Incoming, printed on 2 lines
STAROUT5
(Star type) Outgoing, 5 references
STAROUT10
(Star type) Outgoing, 10 references
STAROUT15
(Star type) Outgoing, 15 references
These symbols are selected and placed like other symbols. After the signal cross reference symbols are placed, they will automatically display the current cross reference values (i.e., they will indicate where the circuit continues or originates). 5-59
Schematic Elements
Note
If a signal cross reference ID appears in the wire list (see page 9-10) this is an indication that the signal is not matching correctly with its mate. Signal Cross Reference Notation Formats – You can select the format of the signal cross reference with the Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function (see page 7-22). The following formats for the cross reference information are available in the Signal Cross Ref. Type field
Note
Where you see the character string <=Inst/> in the following format names it means the installation name will be included in the cross reference only if it differs from the installation where cross reference symbol is located): Notation Format:
DevID/<=Inst/>Page.Linenumber Shows signal designation with page.line number. Example: L1/1.42 Installation is shown only when cross reference is outside current installation.
DevID=Inst/Page.Linenumber Shows signal designation, installation, and page.line number. Example: L1/=INST1/1.8
DevID/Page.Linenumber Shows signal designation, page.line number. Never shows installation. Example: L1/1.8
DevID/<=Inst/>Page Linenumber Shows signal designation, page and line number (without period between page and line number). Example: L1/1218 (for signal 1 on page 12, line 18)
<=Inst/>Page Linenumber Shows page and line number (without period or signal designation). Example: 1218 (for page 12, line 18)
Note
Page^Linenumber Do not use with star type references. Shows page and line number on separate lines. Example: 12 18 (for page 12, line 18)
5-60
<=Inst/>Page.Linenumber
Schematic Elements
Shows page.line number (without signal designation). Example: 1218 (for page 12, line 18) The device ID of the signal can take any form (L1, L2, etc.); the program suggests the identification letters based on the device ID tag entered when the symbol was created. The cross reference symbol you choose (see above) determines whether the cross–reference is printed on one or two lines. Cross Reference Device ID Format – The symbol group that was selected when the cross reference symbol was created (see list below) determines whether the cross–reference is printed on one or two lines. In the case of groups SG2 and SG4, it can be placed according to definition (the cross reference will appear at the connection text location designated when the signal cross reference symbol was created). See page 6-6 for more on symbol creation. Symbol Group
Description
SG1
Incoming signal (1 line combined label)
SG2
Incoming signal (2 line separated label)
SG3
Outgoing signal (1 line combined label)
SG4
Outgoing signal (2 line separated label)
SG5
Incoming signal (star configuration, 1 line label)
SG6
Incoming signal (star configuration, 2 line label)
SG7
Outgoing signal (star configuration, written upwards)
SG8
Outgoing signal (star configuration, written downwards)
Signal Analysis Types – When creating a project (or when using the Manage > Project > Modify function) the user can select from three types of signal cross referencing analysis in the Project Parameter dialog box. Choices include Ascending by Installations and Pages (default), Pairs (signal cross references that exist only in pairs – page order not taken into account), and Ascending Numbers (ascending order for all cross references). Ascending By Inst. and Pages – Signal cross–references are analyzed in ascending order for all installations and pages. Note
The outgoing symbol must be placed ahead of the incoming signal in the page order.
5-61
Schematic Elements
Example: Ascending By Inst. and Pages Signal Cross Reference L1
L2 L1/1.22
2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
L1/2.01
L2/2.01
L2/1.22
2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
L1/2.22
L1/3.01
Page 1
L2/3.01
Page 2
L2/2.22
2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
L1 Page 3
L2
Pairs Analysis – The signal cross–references only exist in pairs. Each pair is recognized and analyzed as such. Installation and sequence of the pages are not taken into account. The sub–group (incoming/outgoing) is ignored. Example: Pairs Signal Cross Reference L1
L2 L5/3.22
2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
L3/3.01
L4/3.01
2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
L3/1.22
P.1 P.2
L3 And L4 On Page 1 Lead To L3 And L4 On Page 3 Which Lead To Page 2.
5-62
L6/3.22 L4/1.22
2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
L5/2.01 P.3
L6/2.01
Schematic Elements
Ascending Numbers Analysis – These signal cross–references link outgoing and incoming signals regardless of page and installation order if the signals have a slash followed by the same number. For example, you can have the outgoing signal L1/3 on page 10 and the incoming signal L1/3 on page 2. Signal symbols need not be placed in page order. Example: Ascending Numbers Signal Cross Reference L1
L2 L1/3
2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
L1/3 P.3
L2/3
L2/3
2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
L1/4 P.1
L1/3 And L2/3 On Page 3 Lead To L1/3 And L1/3 On Page 1 From Which L1/4 and L2/4 Lead To Page 2.
L2/4
L1/4
L2/4
L1/5
L2/5
2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
P.2
Star Type Signal Processing: The symbols for star–type signal processing are created as symbols in Symbol Groups SG5, SG6, SG7 and SG8. They must have a connection point and a write position for connection point text. The cross–reference will later be entered at this write position. The format of the cross–reference depends on the symbol group: Incoming Signals – Symbol group SG5 – cross–reference is printed on one line. SG6 – cross–reference is written on two lines. Outgoing Signals – With star–type signal processing there is only one outgoing signal but several incoming signals. The outgoing signal has references to all incoming signals. The outgoing signal does not have to be placed on a page before the first incoming signal; it can be correctly analyzed in other positions as well. The software includes outgoing star type symbols that can accommodate 5, 10 and 15 references (symbol names STAROUT5, STAROUT10, STAROUT15).
5-63
Schematic Elements
Example: Star Type Signal Processing (Ascending Order Analysis) L1 2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
P.1
L2 L1/1.22
L1 2.01 3.01 4.01
L2 2.01 3.01 4.01
Outgoing Signals On Page 1 Lead To Incoming Signals On Pages 2, 3 And 4
2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
L2/1.22 L1/1.22
P.2
2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
L2/1.22 L1/1.22
P.3
L2/1.22
2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22
P.4
Notes on Star Type Signal Cross Reference: If you are cross referencing within a single page with star type symbols, it is not necessary to use the “/” character in the device IDs. Important
It is important not to mix star type signal cross references with regular signal cross references using the same device ID. For example if you use a SIG3 incoming signal symbol and a STAROUT5 outgoing signal symbol on the same page, they must not have the same device ID.
Each outgoing star type cross reference symbol must have a unique device ID. For example, you cannot have outgoing signals on two different pages both called L1.
5-64
Schematic Elements
Signal Cross Reference – IEC To allow RSWire to cross reference the IEC devices in long schematics that extend over multiple pages, the wires at the end of a page must be logically connected to the wires in the next page so that the software knows that they are to be treated as one continuous circuit. To make this connection, the software requires a Signal Cross Reference symbol to be placed at the end of the lines in one page and at the beginning of the next page. Note
Because they are used to bring wires together, signal cross references should be assigned before wire numbers are assigned.
IEC Signal Cross Reference Symbols P1/1
P1/2
P1/3
N1/2
N1/3
N1/1
Page 1
Page 2
5-65
Schematic Elements
Wire Numbers RSWire schematic diagrams are created with wire lines which the system can recognize as wires (unlike drawing lines which are not recognized as having any logical properties). The Tools > Wire Number > Automatic function allows the software to automatically assign wire numbers throughout the project. The format of the wire numbers is user–selectable: it can be based on line numbers or sequential numbers with alphanumeric prefixes or suffixes. Color and gauge (size) also can be assigned to each wire. Wire numbers can be assigned automatically or manually as described in the following sections.
Automatic Wire Number Assignment The software can automatically assign wire numbers. The automatic wire numbering function does not overwrite existing wire numbers. Therefore, if you wish to redo the wire numbers, you must first delete the existing numbers using the Tools > Wire Number > Delete function (see page 5-77). Important
Before the system can assign wire numbers across columns and pages, signal cross reference symbols must be placed in the drawing to tie together the “hot” and “common” lines on each column and page. See page 5-58. If this step is performed, automatic wire numbering can extend across the pages of a project. To automatically assign wire numbers, first use the Tools > Project Preselect function to select a project for numbering (otherwise the currently selected project will be numbered). Then select:
Tools Wire Number Automatic The following Wire Number Automatic dialog box will appear.
5-66
Schematic Elements
Wire Number Automatic Select Pages
Numbering Format:
Page – Line Number
Parameters
Values
Prefix
Wire Number Gauge Color
Suffix
Color...
0
Height...
0.1250
Text Position Additional
Beginning
Additional
Middle
End
Wire Numbering System
Additional
Wire Number = I/O Address
Additional
Terminal = Wire Number Wire Number With Suffix Over Terminal
Additional
Wire Numbering Omitted on Cables OK
Cancel
Help...
Save
Select Pages – Activating the Select Pages checkbox allows you to select the pages on which the automatic wire numbering will be performed. After you make the other wire number settings and select the OK button in the Wire Number Automatic dialog box, a page select dialog box will appear, allowing you to pick the project, installation, and pages to which the automatic wire numbering will be applied. If you do not select the Select Pages checkbox, the automatic wire numbering will apply to the entire project. Note
If you select individual pages for wire numbering, you may be using different wire number formats in different parts of the project. Be aware that wire numbers can pass through signal cross referencing and may come from or go to a page having a different format from the current page.
5-67
Schematic Elements
Wire Numbering Formats – The Numbering Format field allows you to select one of the following five formats. Note
You can add a prefix or suffix to any of these formats. Page–Line Number – Page and line number plus sequential number. Example: 123
LS124
1241
LS124.1
1242
CR124
124 125
CR124
1261
LS126
1262
AH126
126
Page–Line Number – ABC suffix – Page and line number plus letter. Example: 123
LS124
124A
LS124.1
124B
CR124
124 125
CR124
126A
LS126
126B
AH126
126
Sequential Wire Numbers – sequential number. Example: 123
LS124
17
LS124.1
18
CR124
124 125 126
5-68
CR124
19
LS126
20
AH126
Schematic Elements
Seq. Wire Number – Page Number – Sequential number plus page number. Example (page 5): 523
LS124
175
LS124.1
CR124
185
524 525
CR124
195
LS126
AH126
205
526
Branch Numbering – The wire numbers have a prefix consisting of the first two letters of the installation name. This is followed by the page number and a sequential number beginning with 00. For each branch of a potential that connects to an additional device, the software adds a decimal point and a sequential number. In order to see the decimal point wire number extensions, you must select Branch Numbering in the Wire Number Display field in the Tools > Project Settings General Defaults tab. ZB0100
LS124
ZB0101
LS124.1
CR124 ZB0102.1 ZB102.2
124 125 126
ZB0103.1 AH126
127 AH128
Installation Name “ZBX” Page Number 01
ZB0102.3
ZB0103.2
The Values column of the Wire Number Automatic dialog contains a group of fields that allow the following parameters to be assigned.
5-69
Schematic Elements
JIC Wire Number – When numbering formats involving sequential numbers are selected, the value entered in this field is the first sequential number that will be assigned. If no value is entered, numbering will start with 1. This field does not affect the Branch Numbering format which always starts with 0100. IEC Wire Number – On IEC format pages, wires are automatically numbered from left to right and then from top to bottom within a column, and by column from left to right across the page. When a 3–phase circuit is drawn, the placement of all three wire phases will determine the automatic wire numbering sequences. The following illustrates the wire numbering of a 3–phase circuit placed within two columns and within one column.
U
–M1
1
W
PE
U
M 3~
–M1
W3 W6 V
W
PE
M 3~
PUMP
PUMP
5 HP
5 HP
7.2 AMP 1000 RPM
7.2 AMP 1000 RPM
Placement Within Two Columns
Placement Within One Column
IEC 3–Phase Wire Numbering
5-70
W9
W1 W7
W4
W7 W9 V
3
W2
2
W5
3
W5
W4 W6 W8
W3
W2
W1
2
W8
1
Schematic Elements
Gauge (Size in IEC version) – Allows a wire gauge (size) value to be assigned which will be associated with the wires. Color – This field (left side of the dialog box) allows a wire color to be assigned which will be associated with the wires. Additional – Five additional fields are available for any other information the user may wish to associate with wires. The Prefix and Suffix fields allow you to specify an alphanumeric prefix or suffix that will be added to each wire number. If, for example, a prefix of “WN” and a suffix of “A” is entered for a sequential wire numbering format, the numbers will appear on the drawing as “WN1A, WN2A”, etc. The Color button and field (right side of dialog box) allow a color to be assigned to the wire numbers that appear on the drawing. Enter the color number in the field or select the button to select from a display of colors. The Height button and field allow a text height value to be assigned to the wire numbers that appear in the drawing. Enter the height value in the field or select the button to display a dialog box of height values to select from. Text Position – These three radio buttons, Beginning, Middle, and End, allow you to set a default position on the wire segment for the wire number. On wires having multiple segments, the number will be placed on the first segment. Note
After wire numbers have been assigned, individual wire numbers can be repositioned with the Modify > Wire Number function and Wire Number Manual dialog box (Text Position checkbox). Wire Numbering System – The following checkboxes determine how wire numbering will interact with certain symbols such as terminals and PLCs. Wire Number = I/O Address – This checkbox selects the format of the wire numbering for wires connected to PLC I/O module symbols. If the checkbox is selected, the PLC I/O address will be used for the wire number. If the checkbox is not selected, the wire numbering sequence used in the rest of the project will be continued through the PLC symbol. Attribute text in the PLC symbol must have been set for Address when the symbol was created for this numbering to work (see page 6-44).
5-71
Schematic Elements
Terminal = Wire Number – Determines whether or not terminals will take on the same number as the wire connected to them. This happens when the wire number function is executed. If this feature is disabled, terminals will keep the number assigned when the terminal symbol is placed. When a checkmark appears in the box, the terminal will take the same number as the wire. When the box is empty, terminals will keep the same number assigned when the terminal symbol was placed. Wire Number With Suffix Over Terminal – When wire numbering is set to be the same over terminals in the Project Parameters dialog box, selecting this checkbox will add an incrementing letter suffix (A, B, C, etc.) to the wire number after each terminal. 1A
TB2
1B
TB3
1C
Wire Numbering Omitted on Cable – When this function is selected, wire numbering will not be performed on any wires that are assigned as conductors of a cable. Select the Save button if you wish to save the wire numbering settings for future work sessions. When all wire number parameters are entered, select the OK button to proceed with the wire numbering.
Manual Wire Number Assignment To manually assign wire numbers, select:
Tools Wire Number Manual You can also use the Modify > Wire Number function. The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Select the wire that you wish to number by clicking the left mouse button and then click the right mouse button (or press the <Enter> key. The following dialog box will appear.
5-72
Schematic Elements
Wire Number Manual Values
Parameters Manual
Duplicate Text Position
Wire Number Gauge Color
Beginning
Change All Middle
End
Additional Color...
Additional Additional
Angle...
Additional Height...
Additional
Label Origin... OK
Cancel
Help...
Save
The Wire Number field displays the number currently assigned to the wire (if any) and allows you to enter a new number. Up to 20 characters can be entered. This field corresponds to the variable ?pot1 listed on page 14-36. The Gauge (Size in IEC version) and Color fields display the selected wire’s current gauge (size) and color. Changes can be made here that affect only the selected wire. These fields correspond to the variables ?pot2 and ?pot3 listed on page 14-36. The Additional fields display any additional data associated with the selected wire. New information can be entered. These fields correspond to the variables ?pot4 through ?pot8 listed on page 14-36. The Duplicate checkbox allows you to place a copy of an existing wire number on a different segment of a wire (potential) with multiple segments. This checkbox is only available when the selected potential is multi–segment with a wire number already assigned. After a wire number has been assigned to one segment, you can: 1.
Select the Tools > Wire Number > Manual function
2.
Select the segment on which the duplicate number is to appear
3.
Select the Duplicate checkbox in the Manual Wire Number dialog box
4.
Select the OK button. 5-73
Schematic Elements
If you attempt to place a duplicate wire number on a segment that is connected to a signal cross reference an error message will appear indicating this fact. If you select the OK button in the error message dialog box you will still be allowed to duplicate the wire number. Note
After you assign duplicate wire numbers, you can modify any of the segments so that they have different color or gauge values (or any of the five Additional wire description fields). Use the Tools > Wire Number > Manual function to assign color and gauge values. Assigning different values to the segments can result in unpredictable results in the wire list unless there is a terminal symbol separating the segments having different values. Select the Text Position checkbox if you wish to change the position of the wire number. After the OK button is selected, you will be prompted to “Define target position” on the drawing. Select the desired new position for the wire number. The Manual checkbox determines whether the software considers this wire number to be manually assigned or automatically assigned. This is relevant when using the delete wire numbers function (Tools > Wire Number > Delete) where you are given the option of deleting all wire numbers (both manually and automatically assigned) or just the automatically assigned numbers. When this checkbox is checked the software considers the wire number a manually assigned number. When the checkbox is unchecked, the wire number is considered automatically assigned. If you select a group of wires for modification, the Change All checkbox determines whether or not the parameters you change will apply to all the selected wires. When the checkbox is checked, the parameters will be assigned to all the selected wires in one step. When the checkbox is unchecked, you will be prompted for each wire separately. The three position radio buttons, Beginning, Middle and End, allow you to set a default position on the wire segment for the wire number that is about to be assigned. The Color, Angle, Height and Label Origin buttons allow you to alter these attributes of the wire number to change its appearance on the drawing. Selecting each button will display a list of available values to choose from. Select the Save button to save the wire number parameters as a default for future work sessions. Select the OK button to load the new wire number parameters. If you selected more than one wire, the Wire Number Manual dialog box will be displayed for each wire in turn.
5-74
Schematic Elements
Note
This function should not be used to modify the number of a wire with a signal cross reference (an error may result). For these wires you should use the Tools > Replace > Wire Number function (see page 5-76 ).
Duplicate Wire Numbers Using Invisible Text The software’s error checking functions prevent two different wires in the same project from having the same wire number. However some users may wish to have duplicate wire numbers (for example if they wish each installation to start with the same wire number). It is possible to have what appear to be duplicate numbers by using invisible text in the wire number prefix. Any text beginning and ending with an “@” character will not be visible in the drawing. Therefore, the user can run the automatic wire number function for different parts of the project with different invisible text in the wire number prefix. The visible part of the wire number will be the same. For example if one page was sequentially numbered from 1 with the prefix W@AA@ and another page was similarly numbered with the prefix W@BB@ both pages would appear to have wire numbers W1, W2, etc. Wire numbers with invisible prefixes can also be assigned using the manual wire numbering function. The hidden text will not be visible in the wire list. It will be visible only when editing the wire number using the Tools > Wire Number > Manual function. Note
Invisible text can also be used in symbol (function) text and in normal text.
5-75
Schematic Elements
Changing Wire Numbers The Tools > Replace > Wire Number function allows existing wire colors and gauges to be changed on a project–wide basis. A single wire number can also be changed. Select:
Tools Replace Wire Number
Replace Wire Numbers Select One Wire Number
Color
Gauge
Installation Old Values
New Values
Wire Number
Wire Number
Gauge
Gauge
Color
Color Additional Additional Additional Additional Additional OK
Cancel
Help...
In the Select group of checkboxes, select whether you wish to change Wire Number, Color, or Gauge. There is also an Installation button and field that allows you to restrict the wire number replace function to a selected installation. Select the button to view a list of installations in the current project. You can select from this list. In the Old Values field, enter the existing value that you wish to change. In the New Values field, enter the new value that you wish to assign.
5-76
Schematic Elements
Color and Gauge changes affect all wires. Number changes affect only the single wire number that is changed. Select OK to make the change. If you enter an old color or gauge value to change without entering a new value, the software will ask if you wish to delete the old value. Select the OK button to delete the old value. Select No to return to the change dialog box.
Deleting Wire Numbers To delete a single wire number: You can delete the wire itself, or use the Modify > Wire Number function, select the wire, and delete the existing wire number from the Wire Number field of the dialog box. Then select OK. To globally delete existing wire numbers, use the following procedure: Select:
Tools Wire Number Delete The following Delete Wire Numbers dialog box will appear. Delete Wire Numbers All (including manually assigned) Only Automatically assigned Select Pages OK
Cancel
Help...
The All radio button will cause all wire numbers to be deleted including those that were manually assigned. The Only Automatically Assigned radio button will cause only those wire numbers that were automatically assigned to be deleted.
5-77
Schematic Elements
Activating the Select Pages checkbox allows you to select the pages on which the wire numbering will be deleted. After you select the OK button in the Delete Wire Numbers dialog box, a page select dialog box will appear, allowing you to pick the project, installation, and pages on which the wire numbering will be deleted. If you do not select the Select Pages checkbox, wire numbering (of the selected type) will be deleted throughout the entire project. Select the OK button to proceed with wire number deletion. The software will ask “Are you sure?” Select OK to delete the wire numbers.
Repositioning Wire Numbers If you wish to reposition wire numbers, use the Tools > Wire Number > Manual function and select the Text Position checkbox in the Wire Number Manual dialog box. See page 5-74. The software will then prompt “Define target position.” Click at the point where you wish the wire number to be moved.
5-78
Schematic Elements
Part Numbers The parts database allows RSWire users to assign part numbers to device IDs in the schematic. This allows the system to generate bills of material and other informative lists based on the items in the schematics and the information in the database. See Section 13 for information on accessing and editing the parts database. See page 5-119 for information on the Replace Part Number function (replacing one assigned part number with another throughout a project). Assigning Part Numbers – Part numbers can be assigned when a symbol is placed or at a later time. Note
You can also assign a part number when a symbol is created so that the part number is always prompted whenever the symbol is placed. See page 6-18. Part numbers are assigned to device IDs within a given project. They are not automatically assigned to the same symbols in a new project unless you use the Edit > Browse Copy function to copy part of an existing project with part numbers assigned.
Note
If you create a macro containing elements which have been assigned part numbers, these part numbers will be stored with the macro. (If desired, they can be altered after the macro is placed by right clicking on the symbol and selecting the Part Number function from the pop–up menu.) When a symbol is placed, the Device ID Assignment dialog box appears, prompting the user with a device ID for the symbol. This dialog box also contains a Part Number field and a part number Search button.
5-79
Schematic Elements
Device ID Assignment Installation:
Search...
Location:
Search...
Device ID:
Search Device ID
Suppress Device ID
Duplicate Device ID
Multiple Placement
Part Number Assigned Part No./Select to Delete
Search... Addit.Part Number
OK
Cancel
Use To Select Part Numbers From Parts Database
Help...
Delete Assigned Part Numbers By Clicking On Part Number
To assign a part number from the parts database select the Search button. This will display the Assign Part Number dialog box, which allows you to search the database and make part number selections (see next page). If you wish to assign additional part numbers to the same symbol you can simply use the Search button again to return to the Assign Part Number screen. Or, if you know the part number, you can type the additional part number in the the Additional Part Number field and select the Additional Part Number button. To delete (un–assign) part numbers that have already been assigned (listed in the Delete area of the Device ID Assignment dialog box) simply click on the part number you wish to delete.
5-80
Schematic Elements
_
Assign Part Number Device ID Filter SYMB_REF =
SYMB_REF PREGROUP PARTNUMBER DESCR MANUFACT
CR Refresh
SYMB_REF PREFGROUP
PARTNUMBER
CR CR CR CR CR
500FL-COA93 500FL-COB93 500FL-COC93 500FL-COD93 500FL-COF93
SYMB_REF PREFGROUP
PARTNUMBER
CR
500FL-COA93
DESCR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR DESCR
=”CR” = = = =
MANUFACT
TECHDATE_1
A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B
AC CONTACTOR (NE AC CONTACTOR (NE AC CONTACTOR (NE AC CONTACTOR (NE AC CONTACTOR (NE
MANUFACT
TECHDATE_1
CONTACTOR A-B
AC CONTACTOR (NE
Selected Part Numbers Are Listed Here . . . OK
Cancel
Help...
The Assign Part Number dialog box above shows a part selection that could be displayed when a control relay (JIC symbol name “CR”) is entered on a drawing. The Assign Part Number dialog box contains the following fields and columns: Device ID – The device ID of the currently selected symbol. (This field will be blank if the symbol has not yet been placed.) The Filter area allows you to to select criteria that determine the parts that are displayed. To to filter the parts, select one of the database field names (SYMB_REF, PARTNUMBER, etc.) and enter a specific value (PBNO, A–B, etc.) in the left field. To remove parameters, select one of the database field names and delete the parameter listed in the left field. Use the Refresh button to update the parts display after each parameter has been entered or deleted. You can enter wildcard (*) strings in the left field – for example, select the DESC field and enter *MOTOR* to display all parts with the word “MOTOR” in the description.
5-81
Schematic Elements
The part number information is listed in columns. The width of these columns can be adjusted by pointing the cursor at the dividing line in the column heading area and dragging the column wider or narrower. The following columns of information are available: SYMB_REF – This column indicating what symbol name the part number is usually associated with. (The Ref Symbol field is the primary search criteria when you first enter the Assign Part Number dialog box. If you get a message “No data found”, try searching by an entry in a different field.) PREFGROUP – This column indicates which Preferred Manufacturer’s Group (PMG) product category the part number is associated with. (See page 13-20 for more information.) PARTNUMBER – This column is the product part number. DESCR – Product part description. MANUFACT – Part manufacturer name. TECHDATE_1 – An additional part description. To select a part number, click twice on the desired part in the list. The selected part will be listed in the area just below the part list. (You can select multiple part numbers.) Then select the OK button. The Assign Part Number dialog box will close and the selected part number will be displayed in the part number field of the Device ID Assignment dialog box. Existing Symbols: Assigning or Modifying Part Number – To change the part number assigned to a symbol (or assign one to an existing symbol), Right click on the desired symbol and select Part Number from the pop–up menu. The Assign Part Number dialog box will then appear, allowing you to select a new or different part number. To remove a part number when multiple part numbers have been assigned, simply click on the part number you wish to remove in the list of assigned part numbers.
5-82
Schematic Elements
Dimensions The Draw > Dimensions function provides a submenu of the various AutoCAD dimension functions. These are useful for adding dimensions to panel layout diagrams and for drawing leader lines to annotate items. Consult the AutoCAD User’s Guide for additional information. To make settings to the dimension function, use the Draw > Dimension > Style function. See page 7-52.
Draw Dimensions Linear Aligned Ordinate Radius Diameter Angular Baseline Continue Leader Tolerance Center Mark Oblique Align Text Style Override Update The dimensioning function allows one to pick two points on a drawing and automatically display the distance between the two. Angular dimensions display the angle between two lines.
5-83
Schematic Elements
Parts of a Dimension Dimension Text Arrowhead
Dimension Line
1.50 in
22 mm
Extension Line
JIC
IEC
The following dimension function are available: Linear – Measures the distance between two points. Aligned – Creates an aligned linear dimension. Ordinate – Measures the perpendicular distance from an origin point called a datum to another point. The current UCS is used to determine the distance. Radius – Creates radius dimensions for a circle or arc. Diameter – Creates a diameter dimension for circles and arcs. Angular – Measures the angle between two lines or three points. Baseline – Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the previous dimension or a selected dimension. Continue – Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the second extension line of the previous dimension or a selected dimension. Leader – A leader is a line that connects annotation text to some item in a drawing. This leader is not the same as the leader that is generated automatically as part of a dimension line. Tolerance – Creates geometric tolerances. Tolerances specify the required accuracy for proper function and fit of the objects you draw. The software adds geometric tolerances to a drawing in feature control frames. These are frames divided into compartments that contain the geometric characteristic symbols followed by one or more tolerance values.
5-84
Schematic Elements
Center Mark – Creates a center mark for circles and arcs. Oblique – Makes the extension line of linear dimensions oblique. Align Text – Submenu: Home moves dimension text back to its default position. Angle rotates dimension text to an angle. Left will left justify dimension text. Center will center dimension text. Right will right justify dimension text. Style – Creates and modifies dimension styles. Override – Overrides dimension system variables. Update – Updates dimensions so they use the most current dimension style settings.
Drawing a Dimension Use the following procedures to draw the various dimension types. Note
After you select a dimensioning function the software will prompt the steps on the command line.
Linear Dimension 1.
Select Draw > Dimensions > Linear or one of the following related dimension functions: Aligned – The dimension line runs parallel to the dimensioned distance. Baseline – Multiple dimensions measured from the same baseline. Continue – Multiple dimensions placed end to end.
2.
Select the first extension line origin point (i.e., one end of the distance to be dimensioned).
3.
Select the second extension line origin point (the other end of the distance to be dimensioned).
4.
Select a location for the dimension line. This determines the length of the extension lines.
5-85
Schematic Elements
Circle/Arc Dimensions 1.
Select Draw > Dimensions > Radius or one of the following related dimension functions: Diameter – The diameter of a circle or arc. Center Mark – Marks the center point of a circle or arc.
2.
Select the circle or arc.
3.
Select a position for the dimension line.
4.
Press the <Enter> key (or click the right mouse button).
Ordinate Dimensions
5-86
1.
Select Draw > Dimensions > Ordinate. The software automatically determines whether the datum is X or Y.
2.
Select the feature location.
3.
Select an endpoint for the leader.
4.
The software will display the dimension text (distance) on the command line.
Schematic Elements
Angular Dimensions To measure the angle between two lines: 1.
Select Draw > Dimensions > Angular.
2.
Select the first line.
3.
Select the second line.
4.
Select a position for the dimension line arc.
Leader Lines To draw a leader line between two objects, 1.
Select Draw > Dimensions > Leader.
2.
Select a position for the arrowhead end of the leader.
3.
If you wish the leader to have sections (bends), select a point for each bend and continue the leader from there.
4.
Press <Enter> to complete the leader line.
5.
Enter annotation text string(s).
6.
Press <Enter> to complete the leader.
5-87
Schematic Elements
Text File on Drawing Lists, reports and other text file information can be placed on drawing pages. This would, for example, allow a bill of material to appear on the same page with a panel layout drawing. Important
You must place the text first on a blank page because the Text On Drawing function will erase any existing elements on that page. Two methods for placing text on drawings are given below: A) for information that is already in a text file, and B) for sending text directly from an RSWire report function to a drawing page. To Use an Existing Text File – To place an existing text file on a drawing, first select the Insert > Text on Drawing function. The Text On Drawing dialog box will then appear. To Place an RSWire Report on a Drawing – To send an RSWire list to a drawing page, first select the Tools > System Settings > Report Settings function and select the Project radio button in the Output section. This will cause the list generator to access the Text On Drawing function whenever a list is created. The Text On Drawing dialog box will appear after the desired list function is selected. X
System Settings Report Settings
Filter
OFF
Reports: Description Files
Printer Configuration
Sort
Command Protec
Output
Screen
OFF
Printer File ON
Project
ON
Interactive
Graphic Output
Select Project Output Option OK
5-88
Cancel
Save
Help...
Schematic Elements
Text On Drawing Dialog Box – The Text On Drawing dialog box appears as a result of having the Project output radio button selected under Tools > Systems Settings > Report Settings (or by executing the Draw > Text on Drawing function). Text On Drawing File:
C:\BOM.TXT
Search...
Text: Height:
0.1
Select...
Angle:
0
Select...
Slant:
0
Select...
Ratio:
0.000
Select...
Label Origin:
1
Select...
Color:
0
Select...
Font: Lines: Line Spacing:
.2
First Line:
18
Last Line:
2.5
Columns: 1:
20
OK
2: Cancel
3:
4: Help...
Save
The following fields are provided: File – Enter the name of the text file to be placed on a page. When the Project output radio button has been selected, this field will automatically contain the name of an ASCII file in the RS\TMP directory. The Search button allows you to look through various directories and select a file name. Text – This group of fields allow you to set various text parameters. See page 5-34 for descriptions of these parameters. For each parameter there is a Search button that provides a selection dialog box.
5-89
Schematic Elements
Note
The Label Origin setting affects how the text lines will appear on the drawing (centered, left justified, etc.) in relation to the values entered in the Column fields. Lines – This group of fields allows entries for Line Spacing (space between lines), First Line (distance from the bottom of the page where text will begin), and Last Line (distance from the bottom of the page where text will stop). In the example above, text will start 18 inches from the page bottom and stop 2.5 inches from page bottom.
Note
If the text area defined by the Lines fields is not large enough to hold the entire text file, the software will create one or more additional pages to accommodate the rest of the file. Columns – This group of fields allows up to four text columns to be defined on the drawing page. The values entered in the fields represent the distance from the left side of the drawing page. In the previous example, there will be only one column located 20 inches from the left side of the drawing. Text appears at the column positions according to the value entered in the Label Origin field (i.e., centered, left justified, etc.). When the desired parameters have been entered in the Text On Drawing dialog box, select the OK button. A dialog box will appear that indicates how many pages will be required to hold the text according to the settings you have made. For example, “Create Pages: 3”. Select Cancel to abort the process or select OK to continue. The New Page dialog box will then appear, allowing you to specify the (first) page on which the text is to appear.
5-90
Schematic Elements
New Page Project:
Select...
Installation:
Select...
Location:
Select...
Format Name
D–2COL
Select Page Format... 1
Scale 1: Online Page Type
Page:
Schematic Diagram Title Block
Select ...
Page Macro
Select ... OK
Parameters 1...
2...
3...
4...
5...
6...
7...
8...
9...
10...
Cancel
Help...
Enter the desired Project, Installation, and Page name just as you would when creating a new page. You can also select page formats, title blocks, etc. Warning: if you specify an existing drawing page to receive the text, any existing elements on that page will be erased and replaced with the text. Be aware that the software will create multiple pages in the specified range if the text does not fit on one page. Select OK to create the pages to receive the text. If more than one page is required to receive the text, RSWire will create additional pages continuing from the specified page number. You can view the newly created pages with the File > Open function.
5-91
Schematic Elements
Edit Schematic Elements The Edit and Modify pull–down menus contain functions for editing existing schematic elements in a drawing. These functions are described in the following sections.
Edit Menu Edit Undo Cut to Clipboard Copy Clipboard Paste Paste Special Browse Copy... Undo The Edit > Undo function will remove the most recently placed drawing element from the screen. Select:
Edit Undo If you execute Edit > Undo multiple times, items will be removed in the reverse order in which they were placed. This will only affect the most recently selected drawing element type. For example, if you draw some lines, a box, and then more lines, only the lines will be affected by the Undo function.
5-92
Schematic Elements
Cut to Clipboard The Edit > Cut to Clipboard function will remove a drawing element and place it in the Windows clipboard where it can be pasted into another application. Copy to Clipboard Use the Edit > Copy Clipboard function to copy portions of an RSWire drawing to the Windows clipboard. The copied portion exists as a Windows metafile in the clipboard and can be pasted as graphics into other Windows applications. Select:
Edit Copy Clipboard The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Select the portion of the drawing that you wish to copy either by selecting individual objects or by windowing an area. Press the <Enter> key when all the desired objects have been selected. The objects will be copied to the Windows clipboard where they will be available for pasting into other applications. Warning: It is strongly recommended that you exit from RSWire before pasting the copied items into another application. The pasted items have a link to the original drawing which can cause the original drawing to be inadvertently affected.
Paste Selecting the Edit > Paste function will allow the user to paste items copied or cut from a non–RSWire application. Paste Special Selecting the Edit > Paste Special function will allow the user to paste items copied or cut from a non–RSWire application. The user is given a number of options as to what format the pasted items will assume (text, AutoCAD entities, etc.). If the source application supports an OLE link, this can be set.
5-93
Schematic Elements
Warning: Do not use the Edit > Cut, Copy Clipboard or Paste functions to copy items within an RSWire drawing. Any items so copied (symbols, wires, etc.) will lose their logical properties. Use the Modify > Copy function to copy RSWire drawing elements within RSWire.
Browse Copy The Browse Copy function allows you to simultaneously display up to four drawing pages and copy portions of these drawings into the current drawing page. For more information, see page 4-35.
Modify Menu Modify Power–Editor Symbol Line Text Field Wire Number Delete Copy Move Stretch Properties Power–Editor The Power–Editor allows you to edit a variety parameters for drawing elements. You can access the Power–Editor through the Modify > Power–Editor function (you will be prompted to “Select Entity”) or by pointing at the desired element and clicking the right mouse button. The following menu of functions will appear.
5-94
Schematic Elements
Device ID Part Number Connection Point Symbol Text Move Rotate Text Position Text Angle Attribute Settings Block Settings
Device ID – Displays the Device ID Assignment dialog box, allowing you to change the current device ID of the selected symbol. Part Number – Displays the Part Number Assignment dialog box, allowing you to change the current part number of the selected symbol. Connection Point – Displays the Modify Connection Point dialog box, allowing you to change the connection point designations of the selected symbol. Symbol Text – Displays a dialog box containing any symbol text associated with the selected symbol. You can edit the text as desired. Move – Activates the Modify > Move function, allowing you to reposition the selected drawing element. Rotate – Displays a dialog box with angle values that allow you to rotate the selected symbol. Highlight the desired angle value and select the OK button. Text Position – Allows you to reposition text associated with the selected symbol. You will be prompted to “Select Attribute.” Select the desired text and then define a new position for it. Text Angle – Allows you to change the angle of text associated with the selected symbol. You will be prompted to “Select Attribute.” Select the desired text. A dialog box with angle values will appear. Highlight the desired angle value and select the OK button. Attribute Settings – Allows you to modify the color, height and label origin of text associated with the selected symbol. You will be prompted to “Select Attribute.” Select the desired text. A dialog box with values will appear. Select the desired value and select the OK button.
5-95
Schematic Elements
Block Settings – Allows you to modify the appearance of the graphic portion of the selected symbol. There are two submenu selections: Color and Symbol Settings. Color allows you to change the color of the symbol. Symbol Settings allow you to change Scale, Rotation and Mirror settings. Modify Symbol The Modify > Symbol function allows you to alter a variety of parameters for existing symbols on a drawing. Note
To edit the default appearance of a symbol and permanently store it in a symbol catalog, use Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function. Select:
Modify Symbol The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Select individual object by pointing and clicking or define a box (window) on the screen around the desired object(s) by selecting one corner and then the opposite corner with the left mouse button. The selected objects(s) will be indicated by dashed lines. Press the <Enter> key to complete the selection. The following Modify Symbol dialog box will appear.
5-96
Schematic Elements
Modify Symbol Device ID Device Type Connection Point Symbol Text
Terminal Dest.
Cable Text
Text Position
Prog. Controller
Cross Reference Toggle
Color Text
Symbol
Color...
Text Angle
Select...
Height
Select...
Label Origin
Select...
Settings Settings...
Symbol Settings OK
Cancel
Help...
A group of checkboxes and buttons are provided in the dialog box for various symbol parameters. In general, by selecting the desired checkbox you will be given the opportunity to select or enter a new value. The following checkboxes and buttons are provided. Device ID – Assign a new device ID to the symbol. A dialog box will appear showing the current device ID. Modify it as desired and select the OK button. Device Type – Assign a new device type to the symbol. A dialog box will appear showing the current device type. Use the Search button to search for existing device types. Enter the desired new device type. You will be prompted for “Automatic copy? Y/N” Answer yes if you wish existing child symbols to be copied into the new device relationship automatically. If you answer no, the following dialog box will appear which allows you to manually select where the information will be copied.
5-97
Schematic Elements
In the above example, a relay (CR) is being modified from a device type 20 (2 normally open, 0 normally closed contacts) to a device type 22 (2 normally open, 2 normally closed contacts). To copy the information manually, one must first select the relay name on the “old” side and then select the relay line (“CR”) on the ’new” side followed by the Exchange button. One can then pick contacts on the old side and then select the order you wish them to occupy on the new side. When all existing contacts have been reassigned, the dialog box will close and device modification will be complete. Note
If a device type was automatically assigned because it is associated with a part number, you will be prompted if the new device type does not match the part number’s device type. Connection Point – Assign new connection point labels. A connection dialog box will appear, listing the current connection point labels. (When a cable symbol has been selected, this function lists cable conductor designations.) Modify Connection Points
Current No. 1 2
Description X1 X2
OK Cancel Help
5-98
Schematic Elements
Enter the desired new label in the appropriate field. (For parent/child symbols, you must edit the text in the field at the bottom of the dialog box.) These entries cannot differ from the labels that were defined when the symbol was created, except in order (for example, you can enter 14 13 instead of 13 14). When finished, select OK. Symbol Text – Assign new symbol text (this is text that is part of the symbol, either fixed or prompted when the symbol is placed). A dialog box will appear showing the current symbol text. Modify it as desired and select the OK button. Text Position – Assign a new position for device IDs, symbol text, connection point text, and cross references. After the OK button is selected you will be prompted to “Select attribute” on the drawing. Pick the text item that you wish to move and select a new position. Terminal Dest. – Change the connection point designations of terminal symbols. Terminal symbol connection points can be designated as Internal, External, or Jumper (see page 11-3). This function lets you make or change this assignment. After selecting this checkbox and OK, the following Terminal Target Settings dialog box will appear (the number of connection points will reflect the type of terminal symbol selected). Make the desired selection for each connection point. Terminal Target Settings
Connection Point 1 Connection Point 2 Connection Point 3 Connection Point 4 Connection Point 5
Internal X X X
External X X
Jumper
OK Cancel Help Accept All Reset
Prog. Controller – Assign new function text for programmable controller symbols. A dialog box will appear listing existing text including rack and module number and function text. The Insert Text button will access and insert function text from an external file (see page 7-38.) Edit the information as desired and select OK.
5-99
Schematic Elements
Programmable Controller Text Definition Device ID:
PLC377
Module:
02
Rack:
01 Address
Function Text
0
I0102/00
Limit switch 1
1
I0102/01
Pushbutton 1 – Start
2
I0102/02
3
I0102/03
4
I0102/04
5
I0102/05
6
I0102/06
7
I0102/07 Next
Previous
I/O Text
OK
Cancel
Cable Text – Allows you to change the descriptive texts associated with a cable symbol. After selecting this checkbox and OK, the Cable Text dialog box will appear, listing any texts associated with the selected cable. Enter or change the texts as desired and select OK to continue. Cross Reference Toggle – Use this checkbox to turn off (hide) the cross references at individual parent and child symbols. Color – Use these checkboxes to change the color of the text. First select either the Text checkbox (to color various symbol labels) or the Symbol checkbox (to color the symbol itself). Use the Color button to display a color selection dialog box. Select the desired color. Select OK for the color, and OK for the Modify Symbol dialog box. You will then be prompted to “Select attribute.” Point and click on the part of the symbol that you wish to modify. This will then appear in the new color. When the Text checkbox is selected you can selectively color device IDs, function text, and connection point labels. The functions in the Text area of the dialog box allow parameters for the various symbol–related texts (device ID, symbol text, programmable controller function text, etc.) to be modified.
5-100
Schematic Elements
Angle – Use this checkbox and button to change the angle of the text. First select the Angle checkbox. Use the Select button to display an angle selection dialog box. Select the desired angle. Select OK for the angle, and OK for the Modify Symbol dialog box. You will then be prompted to “Select attribute.” Point and click on the text that you wish to modify. The text will then appear at the new angle. Height – use this checkbox and button to change the height of the text. First select the Height checkbox. Use the Select button to display a height selection dialog box. Select the desired height. Select OK for the height, and OK for the Modify Symbol dialog box. You will then be prompted to “Select attribute.” Point and click on the text that you wish to modify. The text will then appear with the new height. Label Origin – use this checkbox and button to change the label origin of the text. First select the Label Origin checkbox. Use the Select button to display a label origin selection dialog box. Select the desired label origin. Select OK for the label origin, and OK for the Modify Symbol dialog box. You will then be prompted to “Select attribute.” Point and click on the text that you wish to modify. The text will then appear with the new label origin. Settings – If you wish to change the symbol’s Scale, Rotation, or Mirror settings, select the Settings button. The Symbol Settings dialog box will appear. Select the desired settings followed by OK. Once you have set the parameter for one symbol, you need only select the Settings checkbox to make the same modification to other symbols. Modify Wire/Line Type The Modify > Line function allows you to change three characteristics of a wire or line in an RSWire drawing:
Line Type (Wire vs. Drawing Line) Line Color Line Style (solid, dashed, etc.)
Select:
Modify Line The following Line Modify dialog box will appear. Note
The Format > Linetype and Format > Color functions apply only to lines created in AutoCAD.
5-101
Schematic Elements
Line Modify Line Type
Color
Wire
1
Line Style OK
Drawing
Select
CONTINUOUS Cancel
Select Help...
On the left side of the dialog box are three checkboxes: Line Type, Color and Line Style. You must select these to determine which line characteristics you are going to modify. Line Type – Select this checkbox to change a wire to a drawing line or vice versa. Select the Wire radio button if you want to change drawing lines to wires. Select the Drawing radio button if you wish to change wires to drawing lines. See page 5-3 for a description of the differences between wires and drawing lines. Color – Select this checkbox to change the color of a wire or line. You can enter a number for the color or select the Select button to choose from a color display. Line Style – Select this checkbox to change the line style. Select the Select button to display a list of available choices from which you can make selections.
Continuous (Solid) Border (Dot 2 Dash) Center (Long Dash, Short Dash) Dashed (Short Dashes)
After you have selected the line characteristics that you wish to change, select the OK button. The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Select the lines you wish to modify. When you press <Enter> the selected lines will be modified.
5-102
Schematic Elements
Modify Text The Modify > Text function allows you to edit existing text on the drawing. This function affects only text that was entered with the Draw > Text function. Other text such as device IDs must be modified with the appropriate modify function, (such as Modify > Symbol in the case of device IDs, Modify > Wire Number functions for wire numbers, etc.). Select:
Modify Text The software will prompt you to “Select object.” Select the desired text and press <Enter>. A dialog box will appear displaying the existing text which can be edited as desired. This is the same dialog box used for entering text (see page 5-31). Other text parameters such as height, angle, etc., can also be changed at this time. Select the OK button to load the changes. Modify Field The Modify > Field function allows you to alter parameters of existing fields. Select:
Modify Field The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Click on the field you wish to modify and press <Enter>. A dialog box will appear listing current parameter values for the field. Any of these values can be altered as described for creating fields on page 5-53.
5-103
Schematic Elements
Modify Wire Number The Modify > Wire Number function allows you to alter the parameters of existing wire numbers. You can also reposition wire numbers with this function. This function is identical to the Tools > Wire Number > Manual function. Select:
Modify Wire Number The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Select the wire that you wish to modify and press <Enter>. The Wire Number Manual dialog box will appear. See page 5-73. Note
This function should not be used to modify the number of a wire with a signal cross reference (an error may result). For these wires you should use the Tools > Replace > Wire Number function.
Delete, Undo Delete To delete selected objects from a drawing page, use the Modify > Delete function. Select:
Modify Delete The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” To Delete an Object or Objects – Select individual object by pointing and clicking or define a box (window) on the screen around the desired object(s) by selecting one corner and then the opposite corner with the left mouse button. The selected objects(s) will be indicated by dashed lines. Press the <Enter> key to complete the deletion. In the AutoCAD add–on version of RSWire, when selecting items you can use the AutoCAD “R” and “A” command line options to remove and add items to the set of entities to be deleted. Also, holding <Shift> and selecting an item will remove it from the selection set. The Edit > Undo function will restore the most recently deleted objects. Note
5-104
If you are unable to delete a selected object, the object may be an imported item which would require the use of the Edit > Cut to Clipboard function.
Schematic Elements
Copy To copy objects on the drawing page, use the Modify > Copy function. When items with device IDs are copied, the device IDs will be updated to reflect the position of the copy. Select:
Modify Copy The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Select individual object by pointing and clicking or define a box (window) on the screen around the desired object(s) by selecting one corner and then the opposite corner with the left mouse button. The selected objects(s) will be indicated by dashed lines. Press the <Enter> key to complete the selection. The software will then prompt you to “Select base point.” Select a point on the drawing with the left mouse button that is to be the reference point of the copied object(s). The software will then prompt you to “Select second point of displacement.” Select the destination reference point for the copied objects with the left mouse button. The copied objects will appear at the new location. You can place multiple copies of the selected objects, one after the other. Note
If you are unable to copy a selected object, the object may be an imported item which would require the use of the Edit > Copy Clipboard function.
5-105
Schematic Elements
Move To relocate objects on the drawing page, use the Modify > Move function. Select:
Modify Move The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” To Move an Object or Objects – Select individual object by pointing and clicking or define a box (window) on the screen around the desired object(s) by selecting one corner and then the opposite corner with the left mouse button. The selected objects(s) will be indicated by dashed lines. Press the <Enter> key to complete the selection. The software will then prompt you to select “Base point or displacement.” Select a point on the drawing with the left mouse button that is to be the reference point of the moved object(s). This point determines where the cursor will be positioned on the items being moved. The software will then prompt you to select “Second point of displacement.” Select the destination reference point for the objects with the left mouse button. The moved objects will appear at the new location. Device IDs of Moved Symbols – When a project is created or modified there is a checkbox in the Project Parameters dialog box labeled Adjust Device ID When Symbols Are Moved (see page 3-10). This checkbox determines if the device ID of an existing symbol will be adjusted automatically when the symbol is moved to a new position. This affects only projects that use one of the device ID formats based on page and line number. Select the checkbox to enable automatic device ID adjustment. To change this setting on an existing project, use the Manage > Project > Modify function and select the Project Parameters button.
5-106
Schematic Elements
Stretch Use the Modify > Stretch function to make wires and drawing lines longer or shorter. Select:
Modify Stretch The software will prompt “Define first corner of the field.” You must define a field (box) on the screen that contains the endpoint of the line that you wish to extend. After the first corner is selected, the software prompts you to “Define the opposite corner of the field.” The software prompts “Select base point.” Select a point on the line (usually the endpoint you wish to reposition). The software prompts “Specify second point of displacement.” Select a new point to extend or shorten the line by the desired amount. If you select the endpoints of multiple lines, all will be stretched. Warning: Do not stretch wires in a direction perpendicular to the original direction of the wire. This can cause unexpected results in the drawing. Wires should only be stretched in a direction that is parallel to the wire.
Properties The Modify > Properties function allows you to change the color, line weight and other properties of imported AutoCAD drawing objects. This function will not affect objects created with RSWire drawing functions. Select:
Modify Properties The Properties dialog box will appear listing a variety of object properties. You can select new values by clicking in the desired field. Refer to the AutoCAD manual for further information.
5-107
Schematic Elements
Replace Symbol The Tools > Replace > Symbol function allows you to replace one type of symbol with another. You can select individual symbols for replacement or globally replace one symbol type throughout a page or an entire project. Note
The existing symbol and the symbol used to replace it must belong to the same symbol group (GS1, PS1, etc.). If the existing symbol uses a device type, the replacement symbol must be able to use the same device type. Select:
Tools Replace Symbol The Replace Symbol dialog box will appear. Replace Symbol Replace All Pages
Current Page
Existing Symbol Select Individually Search...
Name: New Symbol
Search...
Name: Maintain On New Symbol Device ID
Part Number
Connection Point Text
Symbol Text With Attributes
All Symbol Text
Terminal Target Settings
Settings Take New Symbol Settings OK
Cancel
The following selections are provided:
5-108
Settings... Help...
Schematic Elements
Replace – Select whether you wish a global replacement to occur on All Pages of the project or only the Current Page. Existing Symbol – Enter the name of the symbol that you wish to replace. This should be a symbol name (PBNO, LSNC, etc.) and not a device ID (PB102, LS5, etc.). Pick the Select Individually checkbox if you wish to select specific occurrences of the symbol for replacement. Otherwise, all occurrences of the symbol on the current page or in the current project will be replaced. Use the Search button to display a symbol list from which selections can be made. New Symbol – Enter the name of the symbol that is to replace the current symbol. This can be any symbol from the libraries on the software’s symbol (catalog) path. This path is listed in the RS\WORK\ECSCAD.CFG file. Example: CATALOG_PATH=C:\RS\CATALOG\JIC C:\RS\CATALOG\IEC (See Section 15 for more on search paths.) Use the Search button to display a symbol list from which selections can be made. Maintain on New Symbol – This series of checkboxes allows you to select items from the current symbol that you wish to keep: Device ID – Select this checkbox to keep the current device ID. Otherwise you must enter a new device ID after the replace function by using the Modify > Symbol function. Connection Point Text – Select this checkbox to keep the current connection point text. Otherwise, the connection point text defined for the new symbol will be used. All Symbol Text – Select this checkbox to keep all symbol text including attribute text from the current symbol. Part Number – Select this checkbox to keep any part numbers assigned to the current symbol. Symbol Text With Attributes – Select this checkbox to keep symbol text with attributes from the current symbol (attribute text only). Terminal Target Settings – Select this checkbox to keep the terminal target destination settings (internal, external, jumper). Settings – Select the Take New Symbol Settings checkbox if you wish the new symbol to have different settings (Scale, Rotation, etc.) from the current symbol. Select the Settings button to display a dialog box where new settings can be made. Select the OK button to begin the symbol replacement. If you selected the Select Individually checkbox, you will be prompted to select symbols on the drawing. 5-109
Schematic Elements
Clear Page The Manage > Page > Clear function erases everything on the current drawing page. Use this function with extreme caution. See page 4-17.
Replace Device IDs The Tools > Replace > Device ID function allows you to renumber device IDs and terminals across an entire project. This is useful if there has been editing within the project and the symbol IDs no longer represent their positions in the schematic, or if there are gaps in the ID sequences. Select:
Tools Replace Device ID The Select Project dialog box will appear. Select the desired project name and select OK to continue. The Replace Device ID dialog box will appear. Replace Device ID Device ID Terminals First Number
1
Sort Direction X
Y
OK
5-110
Cancel
Help...
Schematic Elements
Renumber Device IDs Select the Device ID checkbox followed by the OK button. All the devices IDs in the project will be renumbered according to the format that was selected in the Default Device ID Selection field of the Project Parameters dialog box when the project was created (or when the Manage > Project > Modify function was used). See page 3-9 for more on device ID formats. Renumber Terminals The Tools > Replace > Device ID function allows you to automatically renumber terminals throughout a whole project, starting with a specified number. Procedure: 1.
Select the Tools > Replace > Device ID function. Select the desired project.
2.
In the Replace Device ID dialog box select the Terminals checkbox.
3.
In the First Number field enter the number that the first terminal in each strip is to have. If you want continuous numbering of the terminals through the whole project, you must use identical terminal strip designations (installation, location, device ID). Terminals are then numbered in the order of the existing pages.
4.
Select either the X or Y sort direction radio button to determine the direction in which terminal numbering will proceed (x=horizontal, y=vertical). Terminals are numbered in ascending order of x coordinate and descending order of y coordinate. If direction x is specified, terminals on the same x coordinate as one another are numbered first, followed by terminals on the next higher x coordinate, and so on across the page. The same applies by analogy for direction y. Terminal numbers which are part of a macro are treated as a single unit and numbered in such a way as to indicate their association with one another. See the next page for X and Y terminal numbering examples.
5.
Select the OK button to execute the renumbering.
The terminal number can also be an alphanumeric expression. In this case, it is only included in the numbering operation if it meets the following conditions:
it consists of a single number (number is replaced by new number) it has a number at the beginning, the remaining sequence is alphanumeric (number is replaced, rest remains unchanged) it consists of a question mark only (question mark is replaced by number)
5-111
Schematic Elements
Terminal Numbering – JIC Examples Note
Terminals within a macro are always numbered consecutively. TB1 TB1 11 TB1
10
TB1 1
4
7
2
5
8
TB1
TB1
15
13
TB1
16
14
Macro
Symbols X Direction Terminal Numbering
12
Symbols
Macro Rotated 90 Degrees Symbols
TB1 3
6
9
Macro Rotated 90 Degrees
TB1 TB1 3 TB1
6
Symbols Y Direction Terminal Numbering
9
10
Macro Rotated 90Degrees
12
13
Symbols
TB1 14 15
16
TB1 8
TB1
5-112
11
1
TB1
2
4
TB1
5
7
Macro
Macro Rotated 90 Degrees
Symbols
Schematic Elements
Terminal Numbering – IEC Examples Note
Terminals within a macro are always numbered consecutively. –X1 –X1 11 –X1
10
Symbols Terminal Numbering X Direction
–X1 1
4
7
2
5
8
–X1
15
13
–X1
16
14
Macro
Symbols
Macro
6
9
Macro
–X1 –X1 3 –X1
6
Symbols 9
10
Macro
12
13
Symbols
–X1 14 15
16
Macro
–X1 8
–X1
–X1
Symbols
–X1 3
Terminal Numbering Y Direction
12
11
1
–X1
2
4
–X1
5
7
Macro
Symbols
5-113
Schematic Elements
Replace Text The Tools > Replace > Text function allows you to globally replace device IDs, symbol text or standard text on the currently active drawing page. With the desired drawing page displayed, select the Tools > Replace > Text function. Select:
Tools Replace Text The Replace Text dialog box will appear. Replace Text Select Text Type Device ID Symbol Text Text Case Sensitive Old: New: OK
Cancel
Help...
In the Select Text Type area, select which kind of text you wish to replace: Device ID – Device IDs; the numbered symbol identifiers. Symbol Text – Text that is defined when the symbol is created or automatically prompted when the symbol is placed. Text – Standard text that was entered with the Draw > Text function.
5-114
Schematic Elements
In the Old field enter the text that you wish to replace. You must match the upper/lower case of the existing text. Any text entered will be treated as a wildcard entry. In other words, it will find the specified characters even if they exist in a longer string of text (of the selected type). In the New field enter the new text that is to replace the old text. Select the Case Sensitive checkbox to make the replace function apply only to text that exactly matches the upper/lower case letters entered in the Old field. Select the OK button to execute the replace. The software will search for the first occurrence of the old text on the current page. It will then display the new text in the dialog box. Replace Text =L1+E1–MDS1 Exchange
Exchange All
Next
Cancel
To Replace One Occurrence of the Text – Select the Exchange button. To Replace All Occurrences of the Text on the Current Page – Select the Exchange All button. To Skip the Replace for the Current Occurrence – Select the Next button. The current occurrence will remain unchanged and the software will seek the next occurrence. To Exit the Exchange Function – Select the Cancel button.
Replace Symbol Text The Tools > Replace > Symbol Text function allows you to replace any symbol text of any existing symbols based on device ID and attribute number from a text file. (Symbol text is text defined when the symbol is created or automatically prompted when the symbol is placed.)
5-115
Schematic Elements
Select:
Tools Replace Symbol Text When you activate the Tools > Replace > Symbol Text function, the Select File dialog box will appear. Select the file that contains the replacement text. (See next page for information on creating and formatting this file.)
Scrolling lists of filenames and directories are provided from which you can search for and select the desired file. The Find File button allows you to search for files matching given criteria. When you select Find File the Browse/Search dialog box is displayed. Here you can enter a Search Pattern for the file name (such as symbol* to find files that begin with “symbol”). You can also select which File Type (extension) will be searched for, minimum Time and Date values, and which drives and paths will be searched. The Locate button allows you to search for a specific filename. When you have selected the desired file in the Select File dialog box, select the OK button to execute the symbol text replace operation. When a page is active the function will only change devices found on the open page. If the function is run when no page file is open, the program will query the user to select a project. All devices on all pages of the selected project selected will then be available for symbol text replacement. 5-116
Schematic Elements
Symbol Text Replace File Format: The file containing the replacement symbol text should be an ASCII file with lines containing the following information, each item in quotes and separated by commas: “device ID”,“attribute number”, “new text string” Here is an example file: ”=LINE1+EN1–RES1”,”31”,”560 OHMS^3.25 WATTS” ”=LINE1+EN1–CAP1”,”31”,”1400 MFD, 100VDC” ”=LINE1+EN1–OVPR”,”1”,”OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION^RELAY” ”=LINE1+EN1–L1”,”1”,”FUSE F1^AVAILABLE” ”=LINE1+EN1–L1”,”31”,”G” ”=LINE1+EN1–D1”,”31”,”IR206D” ”=LINE1+EN1–PS”,”14”,”24VDC^INPUT” ”=LINE1+EN1–PS”,”14”,”24VDC^OUTPUT” ”=LINE1+EN1–PS”,”31”,”75 WATTS” ”=LINE1+EN1–PC”,”31”,”PWR322^POWER SUPPLY” ”=LINE1+EN1–R1S1”,”4”,”1” ”=LINE1+EN1–R1S2”,”4”,”2” ”=LINE1+EN1–L6”,”1”,”FUSE F6 AVAILABLE” ”=LINE1+EN1–L6”,”31”,”G” ”=LINE1+EN1–L7”,”1”,”FUSE F7 AVAILABLE”
For a list of symbol text attributes, see page 6-15. Note
Text attributes are defined in the file RS\MENU\DIALOG\ATT_ENG.TXT. Users can edit this file to define unused attributes, however this file may be overwritten when a new version (update) of RSWire is installed. The user can also define his own attributes in a file called ATT_CUST.TXT (which the user must create). The software will first read ATT_ENG.TXT and then ATT_CUST.TXT. Any values in ATT_CUST.TXT will then overwrite the attributes in the first file. The file ATT_CUST.TXT must begin with attribute 42 which is the first user–definable attribute. Example format of ATT_CUST.TXT: 42 43 44 45
Note
customer customer customer customer
defined defined defined defined
attribute attribute attribute attribute
The part number attribute (number 10) cannot be replaced using this method. The part number is converted to text at the time of symbol placement and is no longer an attribute.
5-117
Schematic Elements
Edit Part Number To change the part number assigned to existing symbols in a drawing, use the following procedure: 1.
If assigned part numbers are not currently displayed in the drawing, select the Tools > System Settings function and select the Display Settings tab. Select the Display Part Numbers checkbox. Assigned part numbers will now be displayed in the drawing.
2.
Point the cursor at the part number you wish to change and click the right mouse button. Select Part Number from the pop–up menu. The Assign Part Number dialog box will appear. This dialog box will list any currently assigned part numbers. See page 5-79 for more information.
3.
To remove a part number when multiple part numbers have been assigned, double click on the part number you wish to remove in the list of assigned part numbers. New part numbers can then be searched for and selected. _
Assign Part Number Device ID Filter SYMB_REF =
SYMB_REF PREGROUP PARTNUMBER DESCR MANUFACT
CR Refresh
SYMB_REF PREFGROUP
PARTNUMBER
CR CR CR CR CR
500FL-COA93 500FL-COB93 500FL-COC93 500FL-COD93 500FL-COF93
SYMB_REF PREFGROUP
PARTNUMBER
CR
500FL-COA93
DESCR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR DESCR
=”CR” = = = =
MANUFACT
TECHDATE_1
A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B
AC CONTACTOR (NE AC CONTACTOR (NE AC CONTACTOR (NE AC CONTACTOR (NE AC CONTACTOR (NE
MANUFACT
TECHDATE_1
CONTACTOR A-B
AC CONTACTOR (NE
Assigned Part Numbers Are Listed Here OK
5-118
Cancel
Help...
Schematic Elements
Replace Part Number Globally The Tools > Replace > Part Number function allows you to replace assigned part numbers throughout a project. Select:
Tools Replace Part Number The Replace Part Number dialog box will appear. Replace Part Number
Old
New
OK Cancel Help Search Save
In the Replace Part Number dialog box there are two columns of fields labeled Old and New. In one of the Old fields enter the existing part number that you wish to change. (You can see a list of existing part numbers in the current project by double clicking in any of the Old fields. You can select from this list.) In the corresponding New field to the right, enter the new part number that will replace the old part number. Select the Save button to save the replacement list to a text file. This file can be used in future work sessions (for other projects) by selecting the Search button. Select the OK button to execute the change. The old part number will be changed to the new part number wherever it has been assigned in the current project.
5-119
Schematic Elements
Deleting Wire Number To Delete a Single Wire Number: You can delete the wire itself, or use the Modify > Wire Number function, select the wire, and delete the existing wire number from the Wire Number field of the dialog box. Then select OK. To Globally Delete Existing Wire Numbers: Select:
Tools Wire Number Delete The following Delete Wire Numbers dialog box will appear. Delete Wire Numbers All (including manually assigned) Only Automatically Assigned Select Pages OK
Cancel
Help...
The All radio button will cause all wire numbers to be deleted including those that were manually assigned. The Only Automatically Assigned radio button will cause only those wire numbers that were automatically assigned to be deleted. Activating the Select Pages checkbox allows you to select the pages on which the wire numbering will be deleted. After you select the OK button in the Delete Wire Numbers dialog box, a page select dialog box will appear, allowing you to pick the project, installation, and pages on which the wire numbering will be deleted. If you do not select the Select Pages checkbox, wire numbering (of the selected type) will be deleted throughout the entire project. Select the OK button to proceed with wire number deletion. The software will ask “Are you sure?” Select OK to delete the wire numbers. 5-120
Schematic Elements
I/O Device ID The Tools > I/O Device ID function goes through the current drawing page and changes the device IDs of symbols connected to a programmable controller symbol to match the I/O address to which it is attached.
Tools I/O Device ID Only the symbol that is closest to the programmable controller symbol will be renamed. If a terminal symbol is closest to the programmable controller symbol, then the terminal will be skipped over and the next closest symbol will be renamed.
5-121
Schematic Elements
Linetype Properties To modify linetypes, use the Format > Linetype function. Select:
Format Linetype The Linetype Manager dialog box will appear.
5-122
Schematic Elements
Layers In RSWire each category of drawing object (symbols, texts, wires, etc.) is automatically placed on a separate “layer” in the drawing. This separation allows a single setting to be made that will affect everything on that layer (and not affect items on other layers). Each layer has a name that distinguishes it from other layers. The user can create new layers and place things on these layers, however the RSWire drawing and editing functions will only recognize items placed on the standard RSWire layers. See page 5-128 for a list of RSWire layers. The Format > Layer function allows you to select drawing layers and make various settings for these layers. This function is useful for selectively hiding portions of a drawing when plotting or for locking layers to prevent editing. You can also set colors and line types for an entire layer. Select:
Format Layer The Layer Properties dialog box will appear.
5-123
Schematic Elements
The Layer Properties dialog box lists each layer in the current drawing and shows each layer’s on/off status, color and line type.
Selecting Layers You can select one or more individual layers by clicking on the desired layer name to highlight it. To Select All Layers – Select the first layer, hold down the <Shift> key, slide the scroll bar down to the bottom, and select the last layer. To Deselect All Layers – Select any single layer.
5-124
Schematic Elements
To Select Specific Layers – Select the first layer, hold down the
Layer Settings The following settings are possible in the Layer& Linetype Properties dialog box: Show – Select one of the following layer types to be listed: All All in use All unused All Xref dependent All not Xref dependent All that pass filter Set Filter dialog Current – When a layer is current, you can create new objects on that layer. To make a layer current, select the layer name and select the Current button A layer is current when the layer name is shown next to the Current button. (O...) On/Off – Select the icon to turn the currently selected layer on and off. When a layer is off it is invisible on the drawing screen and on plots. An On layer is identified by a highlighted icon in the column. (F...) Freeze/Thaw in All Viewpoints, Current Viewpoints, New Viewpoints – Freezing a layer is similar to turning a layer off in that it is invisible on the screen and in plots. Additionally, a frozen layer is not included in drawing regenerations. By freezing layers, the regenerating speed of complex drawings can be improved. To freeze the currently selected layer, select the Freeze icon. To un–freeze a layer, select the Freeze icon. A frozen layer is identified by a highlighted icon in the column. Note
The Freeze in Current Viewpoints and Freeze in New Viewpoints properties are valid only when tilemode is off. (L...) Lock/Unlock – When a layer is locked you cannot edit the objects on that layer (although you can add objects to the layer). The locked layer is visible provided it has not also been turned off or frozen. To lock the currently selected layer, select the Lock icon. To unlock a locked layer select the Lock icon. A locked layer is identified by a highlighted icon in the column.
5-125
Schematic Elements
(C...) Color – To change the color of a layer, first select the layer, then select the Set Color button. A Select Color dialog box will appear allowing you to choose a color. Select OK. The current color of the layer is indicated in the Color column of the Layer Control dialog box. Linetype – To change the line type of objects on a layer, first select the layer, then select the Linetype text. A Select Linetype dialog box will appear allowing you to choose a line style. Select OK. The current line type of the layer is indicated in the Linetype column.
New – The New button is used to create new layers. To create a new drawing layer, select the New button and enter the layer name in the text field. The layer name can be up to 31 characters long. The new layer name will appear in the layer list. Note
To rename a layer first select a layer name from the list. Its name will appear in the text field. Enter the new name in this field. The layer name will be changed to the new name. Do not rename the standard RSWire drawing layers (layer names starting with “ECS”). Renaming these layers will make them inaccessible to the RSWire software. Delete – The Delete button is used to delete layers. To delete a layer first select a layer name from the list. Select the Delete button and the layer will be deleted.
Note
5-126
You cannot delete the current layer (name listed next to the Current button), layer 0, an Xref layer, or a layer that contains objects.
Schematic Elements
RSWire Layer Names RSWire drawing layers follow a naming standard that indicates the type of object found on that layer. All RSWire layer names begin with the characters ECS_L. The next letter indicates whether the objects on this layer are evaluated (E) or not evaluated (X). An evaluated object is part of the online control or can be changed by the program automatically, e.g. the ladder text, frame size, etc. The next letter indicates whether the objects on this layer are visible (V) or invisible (X). Visible objects are normally always shown except when switched off by the LAYER command. Example: Standard symbols in the schematic. Invisible objects are normally invisible independent of the other (visible) objects. Example: The shape of a drill hole in a panel layout. The remainder of the layer name is a description of the type of object or portion of object on that layer. Example: ECS_LEV_SYM_DEVID for symbol device ID.
5-127
Schematic Elements
Symbol: Evaluated – Visible (standard symbol) Layer Name
Description
ECS_LEV_SYM
Initial insert layer
ECS_LEV_SYM_GEO
Geometry (app. variable)
ECS_LEV_SYM_GEO3D
Geometry 3D panel layout
ECS_LEV_SYM_GEO_SCM
Geometry (schematic)
ECS_LEV_SYM_DEVID
Device ID
ECS_LEV_SYM_CPOINT
Connection point text
ECS_LEV_SYM_TPOINT
Terminal text
ECS_LEV_SYM_TEXT
Symbol text
ECS_LEV_SYM_PARTNO
Part number
ECS_LEV_SYM_PCR
Potential cross reference text
ECS_LEV_SYM_EED_PNT
Extended Entity Data at Point
ECS_LEV_SYM_M_RP
Reference point mark
ECS_LEV_SYM_M_CP
Connection point mark
ECS_LEV_SYM_M_PN
Part number mark
ECS_LEV_SYM_DEVICE
Device Type
ECS_LEV_SYM_NAME
Symbol name
ECS_LEV_SYM_MARK
Selected symbol mark
Symbol: Evaluated – Invisible
5-128
ECS_LEX_SYM
Initial insert layer
ECS_LEX_SYM_CPOINT
Connection point text
ECS_LEX_SYM_DEVICE
Device type
ECS_LEX_SYM_DEVID
Device ID
ECS_LEX_SYM_GEO
Geometry (app. variable)
ECS_LEX_SYM_GEO_SCM
Geometry (app. variable)
ECS_LEX_SYM_NAME
Symbol name
ECS_LEX_SYM_TPOINT
Terminal text
ECS_LEX_SYM_TEXT
Symbol text
ECS_LEX_SYM_PARTNO
Part number
ECS_LEX_SYM_PCR
Potential cross reference text
ECS_LEX_SYM_EED_PNT
Extended Entity Data at Point
ECS_LEX_SYM_M_RP
Reference point mark
ECS_LEX_SYM_M_CP
Connection point mark
ECS_LEX_SYM_M_PN
Part number mark
Schematic Elements
Symbol: Not Evaluated – Visible ECS_LXV_SYM
Initial insert layer
ECS_LXV_SYM_CPOINT
Connection point text
ECS_LXV_SYM_DEVICE
Device type
ECS_LXV_SYM_DEVID
Device ID
ECS_LXV_SYM_GEO
Geometry (app. variable)
ECS_LXV_SYM_GEO_HEX
Geometry (app. variable)
ECS_LXV_SYM_GEO_SCM
Geometry (app. variable)
ECS_LXV_SYM_NAME
Symbol name
ECS_LXV_SYM_TPOINT
Terminal text
ECS_LXV_SYM_TEXT
Symbol text
ECS_LXV_SYM_PARTNO
Part number
ECS_LXV_SYM_PCR
Potential cross reference text
ECS_LXV_SYM_EED_PNT
Extended Entity Data at POINT
ECS_LXV_SYM_M_RP
Reference point mark
ECS_LXV_SYM_M_CP
Connection point mark
ECS_LXV_SYM_M_PN
Part number mark
ECS_LXV_NAV_MARK
Navigator mark
ECS_LXV_CR_POS
Connection point position during symbol create
Symbol: Dummy Symbol – Evaluated – Visible (rotated symbol placement) ECS_LED_SYM
Initial insert layer
Macro: Evaluated – Visible ECS_LEX_MC_M_RP
Reference point mark
Cross Reference Symbol: Evaluated – Visible ECS_LEV_SYMCR
Geometry + all texts
ECS_LEV_SYMCR_M_RP
Reference point mark
5-129
Schematic Elements
Field: Evaluated Visible ECS_LEV_FIELD
Geometry + device ID
ECS_LEV_LINE
Wire (evaluated)
Line: Evaluated
Line: Not Evaluated Visible ECS_LXV_LINE
Drawing line (not evaluated)
Wire Number: Evaluated Visible ECS_LEV_LINE_WNO
Wire number
Free Texts: Not Evaluated Visible ECS_LXV_TEXT
Free text
Page Header: Evaluated Visible
5-130
ECS_LEV_PH_DATA
Drawing data
ECS_LEV_PH_EED
EED data at POINT
ECS_LEV_PH_TMP
EED data temporarily
ECS_LEV_PH_LOGO
Logo
Schematic Elements
Page: Evaluated Visible ECS_LEV_PG_FRAME
Page frame
ECS_LEV_PG_LADDER
Ladder Marks
Temporarily Used Layers ECS_LXV_CURSOR
Symbol as cursor
ECS_LXX_JUST_MOD
Modify justification
5-131
Schematic Elements
List Object Function (for drawing elements) The View > List function allows you to view data relating to specific entities in a drawing. Select:
View List With a drawing page displayed, select the View > List function. The software will prompt you to “select objects.” Select one or more drawing entities (wires, symbols, circles, etc.) by pointing the cursor and clicking the left mouse button. Then press the <Enter> key. The software will then display a text window containing data for the selected drawing entities. If there is more information than will fit in the window, the listing will stop and you can press the <Enter> key to display the next screen of data. The information listed depends on the type of entity, but its type, its x,y,z position, and the layer on which it is drawn are always listed. Color and line type are displayed if either are not done by layer. The data displayed for symbols includes the symbol name and catalog (example: “JIC–PBNO”) as well as descriptions of the graphic elements in the symbols. Data for the various symbol attributes (device ID, connection point text, etc.) are also displayed. For lines and wires, information includes the x,y,z coordinates of the endpoints, the length, and the angle in the x–y plane from start point to end point. For circles, information includes center point, radius, area, and circumference. You can toggle between the list window and the drawing window by pressing the
5-132
Create Schematic Elements
6 Create Schematic Elements This section describes how users can create custom symbols, macros, and other elements for use in RSWireTM Designer drawings. The following sections are included:
Create Symbols Symbol Elements Symbol Creation Procedure Creating a Symbol from an AutoCAD DWG File Symbol Creation Examples Creating an Example Parent Symbol Creating an Example Child Symbol Creating an Example Cross Reference Symbol Creating an Example Device Type Definition Creating an Example PLC (Parent) Symbol Creating an Example PLC (Child) Symbol Creating an Example Terminal Symbol Creating Pin Charts Creating Form C Contacts Creating Signal Cross Reference Symbols Create Macro Create Title Block Macro Create Device Type Delete, Copy, Rename, for Symbols, Macros, Devices Modify Symbol, Macro, Device
6-1
Create Schematic Elements
Create Symbols Symbol Elements Creating a symbol involves drawing the symbol itself and also defining the related information shown in the following illustration. ELEMENTS OF A JIC SYMBOL Device ID Part Number
CR 103 8501XD1000V02 Reference Point
Connection Points A
Connection Point Text
B
CONTROL RELAY
Symbol Text
ELEMENTS OF AN IEC SYMBOL Reference Point A1
Device ID
Connection Points
–K2 8501XD1000V02 A2
Connection Point Text
Part Number
LOW TEMP RELAY
Symbol Text
Device ID – A device ID tag must be defined for intelligent symbol types. The rest of the device ID is added to this tag at the time the symbol is placed on the drawing. In the illustration above, “CR” is used as the tag for control relay device IDs. The rest of the ID is filled in automatically when the symbol is placed in a drawing and might consist of consecutive numbers, page number, line number, or a combination of these (this is determined in the Project Parameters dialog box when a new project is created). Reference Point – A reference point must be defined. This point will be positioned on the cursor when the symbol is placed in the drawing.
6-2
Create Schematic Elements
Connection Points – These points determine where lines will break when the symbol is placed on a line or when a line is drawn through the symbol. If desired, Connection Point Text can be defined that will automatically label the connection points when the symbol is placed (such as A and B terminations on a relay coil). Symbol Text – This is optional, additional text which will appear with the symbol. Symbol text can be fixed text, or it can be configured to prompt the user for information (Amp values, for example) when the symbol is placed. Part Number (Optional) – You can enter a part number during symbol creation so that this part number will be automatically prompted whenever the symbol is placed.
6-3
Create Schematic Elements
Symbol Libraries and Directories Symbols for a given type of application or drawing format are organized into symbol libraries, also known as symbol catalogs. There are available RSWire catalogs for JIC (electrical), IEC (electrical), ISA (process control), hydraulic, and pneumatic symbols. A sub–directory (folder) exists for each symbol catalog inside the RS\CATALOG directory. Inside each symbol catalog directory there are the following subdirectories: BLOCK – Contains graphics files (.DWG) and definition data files (.EC1) for each symbol in the catalog. DEVICE – Contains device type definition files (.EC1) for device types associated with this symbol catalog. MACRO – Contains graphics files (.DWG) and definition data files (.EC1) for each macro associated with this catalog. In each of the above directories there is a file called NAMES.EC2 that lists which symbol, device type or macro is associated with each file. WMF – This directory contains the graphics files (.WMF) for the symbol selection groups used with the Insert > Select Icon function.
6-4
Create Schematic Elements
Symbol Catalog Path The file RS\WORK\ECSCAD.CFG contains a path statement that determines where symbols are stored and which catalogs are available when creating projects. For example: CATALOG_PATH=C:\RS\CATALOG\CUSTOM\ C:\RS\CATALOG\JIC\ C:\RS\CATALOG\AB_CAT\
The first directory named in this path (CUSTOM in this example) is the directory where all newly created symbols will be stored. Edit the path statement if you wish symbols to be stored in a different directory. Moving Symbols From Catalog to Catalog Symbols can be moved from one catalog to another using the File > Backup/Restore function. Selected symbols can be saved to a file using the backup function and then loaded into the desired catalog using the restore function. See page 3-21. If you decide to move symbols by manually copying the files from one catalog directory to another, the copied symbols will not be listed in the new catalog until the NAMES.EC2 file is updated. To do this, delete the existing NAMES.EC2 file in the destination directory. The software will then generate a new, updated file when that catalog is accessed.
6-5
Create Schematic Elements
Symbol Creation Procedure Symbols created with this procedure become part of an RSWire symbol library and can be accessed at any time during schematic creation. The symbol will be stored in the first catalog search path (listed in the RS\WORK\ECSCAD.CFG file). The default library for new user–created symbols is CUSTOM. Note
During symbol creation, if you wish to cancel the symbol creation, select the Cancel function from the Manage > Symbol menu. This will erase any symbol information that has been entered but not yet stored. 1.
Use a blank page. Display a blank drawing page. There can be drawing elements such as lines, circles and boxes on the page, but no symbols can exist on the page. If a blank page is not available, create one using the File > New > Page function (see page 4-11). Turn off the Online function. When you create the page, turn off the Online checkbox in the New Page dialog box. Symbols cannot be created when the Online function is active. For an existing online page, use the Manage > Page > Modify function to turn off the Online checkbox.
2.
Select Manage > Symbol > New/Modify.
Manage Symbol New/Modify If the page has symbols on it, the message “Caution: Symbols are already placed on this page” will be displayed and the symbol creation function will be canceled. You must use a page that contains no symbols. 3.
6-6
Enter symbol name, type, description. The software will next display the New/Modify Symbol dialog box. Enter a symbol name of up to 14 characters in the Symbol Name field. Do not use an existing symbol name unless you wish to replace or edit the existing symbol. Use the List button to see a list of existing symbol names.
Create Schematic Elements
New/Modify Symbol List...
Symbol Name: Preferred Direction Vertical
Horizontal
Snapmode: Nearest Endpoint Description:
Search Language Text... Symbol Group: GS1 General Symbol (no cross ref.) OK
Cancel
Help...
The Preferred Direction checkboxes determine how the software will look at the symbol when generating a connection list. It also determines how wires will be broken or closed when the symbol is placed or moved. Select the Horizontal checkbox if the symbol is to be scanned from left to right (in other words, if the wire will be horizontal in relation to the symbol). Select the Vertical checkbox if the symbol is to be scanned from top to bottom (i.e., if the wire will be vertical in relation to the symbol, as in IEC format drawings).
Preferred direction horizontal
Preferred direction vertical
Use the Snapmode: Nearest Endpoint checkbox to create a symbol that will automatically snap to the end of a wire. The reference point of the symbol will be positioned at the nearest endpoint of the wire on which it is placed. This function is mainly used to create signal cross reference symbols and PLC child symbols.
6-7
Create Schematic Elements
Enter a description of the symbol up to 100 characters long in the Description field. This description will appear in symbol lists. If you wish to include foreign language text strings in the description, select the Search Language Text button to select from the available strings. In the Symbol Group field, select the type of symbol that you are creating. Select the down arrow button to display a list of symbol types. The following types are available: GS1
General Symbol, no cross ref. (e.g., lights, pushbuttons)
GS2
General Symbol, no cross ref. treated as wire (trailing cables)
PS1
Parent symbol with cross ref. (e.g., coils of relays, etc.)
PS3
Child symbol with cross ref. (e.g., normally open contact, normally closed contact, form C contact, etc.) Cross reference symbol
TS1
Terminal block
TS2
Plug - multi-pole
TS3
Plug - single pole
TS4
Parent plug with cross reference
TS5
Child pin with cross reference
TS6
Connector Cross reference symbol (pin chart)
SG1
Incoming signal (1 line text)
SG2
Incoming signal (2 line text)
SG3
Outgoing signal (1 line text)
SG4
Outgoing signal (2 line text)
SG5
Incoming signal (star configuration, 1 line text)
SG6
Incoming signal (star configuration, 2 line text)
SG7
Outgoing signal (star, same as SG8)
SG8
Outgoing signal (star, same as SG7)
CP1
Connection point
DW1
Diagonal wiring connection symbol
BOX
Rectangular symbol
RES
Reserved for future use - Do not use
CS2
Cable Child Symbol
CS3
Cable Cross Reference Symbol
SG9
Outgoing Signal, Device ID Reference (1 line text)
SGA
Outgoing Signal, Device ID Reference (2 line text)
PS2
6-8
Create Schematic Elements
Select the OK button when the New/Modify Symbol dialog box is complete. If the symbol name is already assigned, the following message will appear: “Symbol already exists. Modify ?” Select the Yes button to redefine the symbol. Select the No button to cancel symbol creation.
Important
4.
Select reference point. After you select OK in the New/Modify Symbol dialog box, the software will prompt you on the command line to define a reference point. This is the insertion point of the symbol in relation to the rest of the symbol. Point to the desired reference point on the drawing page and click the left mouse button. The reference point will be marked on the screen with a small inverted triangle.
5.
Draw the symbol. Now use RSWire drawing functions such as lines, circles, boxes, text, etc., to create the symbol shape. You may call up existing symbols and use them as part of a new symbol. You may wish to change grid spacing (use the Tools > System Settings > Grid Settings tab) while creating symbols.
When drawing the symbol, be aware of the grid spacing that will be used in your schematic drawings so that connection points are properly spaced. Connection points must always be on this grid. 6.
Enter Device ID. Once the symbol is drawn, return to the Manage > Symbol menu and select the Device ID function. The software will prompt you to “Define Device ID position.” Select a point near (usually above for JIC and to the left for IEC) the symbol where you wish the device ID to appear on drawings. The following Device ID Parameter dialog box will appear. Device ID Parameter
Device–ID:
?
Label Origin:
5
Select...
Height:
0.150
Select...
Angle:
0
Select...
Color:
0
Select...
x–offset:
0.500
y–offset:
0.500
OK
Note
Cancel
Help...
Values shown in inches.
6-9
Create Schematic Elements
The following fields are provided: Device ID – Enter a device ID tag. The tag is just a prefix or mnemonic for the type of device for which you are creating a symbol. For example, you might use “PB” for pushbutton, or “K” for IEC relays. Complete device IDs are generated by the system when a symbol is placed. Label Origin – Enter a value to select whether the ID will appear to the left, right, above, below, or centered on the device ID origin point (i.e., select “5” to center the label on the origin point). The numbers correspond to the following positioning: 7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 10 11 12 If you cannot remember these numbers, use the Select button to select from verbal descriptions (Top Left, Middle Center, etc.). Height – Enter a character height value for the device ID. The default entry is 0. If no other entry is made the default text sizes set during project creation will apply when the symbol is placed. If a different entry is made it will override the project default text sizes. Angle – Enter a value to determine the angle at which the device ID will appear. Use the Select button to display a list of values. Color – Enter a color number to determine the color of the device ID. You can also use the Select button to display and select the available colors. X–offset, Y–offset – These values represent the x and y distance from the symbol reference point to the device ID reference point. If a device ID reference point has already been selected with the mouse, this point’s position will be reflected in the values shown, which can be changed. When you select the OK button, the device ID tag will appear on the symbol at the selected position. Note
6-10
The currently selected text font is used for the symbol’s device ID, connection point text, and symbol text. You can select a different font for each, if desired. The fonts used when the symbol is created will be used whenever the symbol is placed. Select the Format > Text Style function to select fonts.
Create Schematic Elements
7.
Note
Define connection points. Next, select the Connection Point function from the Manage > Symbol menu. The software will prompt you to “Define the connection point.” Select a point on the symbol where a wire is to connect (be aware of the grid spacing that will be used in your drawings). The selected point is marked with an “X”.
The first connection point should be placed at the reference point. (You can relocate the reference point to this location before you save.) You will then be prompted to “Define label origin of text.” This is the point where connection point text will appear. You must select a point, even if you do not plan to have any connection point text. When you select a point, the following Connection Point Parameter dialog box appears. Connection Point Parameters
Connection Point:
?
Label Origin:
5
Select...
Height:
0.150
Select...
Angle:
0
Select...
Color:
0
Select...
Conn.Pt. X Offset:
0.000
Conn.Pt. Y Offset:
0.000
Text X Offset:
0.000
Text Y Offset:
0.000
Sequence Number:
1
Terminal Undefined
Internal
External
Jumper
Display Connection Point in the Graph. Terminal Plan OK
Note
Cancel
Help...
Values shown in inches.
6-11
Create Schematic Elements
The following fields are provided: Connection Point – Enter a label for the connection point such as “CP1”. Label Origin – Enter a value to select whether the label will appear to the left, right, above, below, or centered on the selected point (i.e., select “5” to center the label on the origin point). The numbers correspond to the following positioning: 7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 10 11 12 If you cannot remember these numbers, use the Select button to select from verbal descriptions (Top Left, Middle Center, etc.). Height – Enter a character height value for the label. Use the Select button to display a list of values. Angle – Enter a value to determine the angle at which the label will appear. Use the Select button to display a list of values. Color – Enter a color number to determine the color of the label. You can also use the Select button to display and select the available colors. Conn.Pt.–X–offset, Conn.Pt.–Y–offset – These values represent the x and y distance from the symbol reference point to the selected connection point. If desired, these values can be changed. Text–X–offset, Text–Y–offset – These values represent the distance from the connection point to the selected reference point of the connection point label (text). If desired, these values can be changed. Sequence Number – The value in this field indicates the order of connection points in the symbol. It can be altered if desired. Terminal – There are also four radio buttons to determine the type of connection point: Undefined, Internal, External, or Jumper. These are only used with terminal symbols (symbol group TS1). For more information see page 11-3. Display Connection Point in the Graph. Terminal Plan – Select this checkbox to determine whether the terminal connection point will always appear in the graphical terminal plan or only when it is used. Selecting the checkbox will cause the connection point to always appear in the terminal plan. Select the OK button when the Connection Point Parameter dialog box is complete. You can define additional connection points as required. 6-12
Create Schematic Elements
If you need to remove a connection point you have placed, select the Manage > Symbol > Delete Conn. Point function and click on the “x” of the connection point you wish to remove. (If the connection point is not located on a grid line, you must use the Tools > Osnap function.) Note
The software has an automatic rotation feature that will automatically rotate a symbol to match the horizontal or vertical orientation of the wire on which it is placed. The software does this by checking the orientation of the first two connection points that were defined when the symbol was created. If you are creating a symbol with more than two connection points you may wish to define the first two connection points so that they lie in a direction parallel to the wire. 8.
(Optional) Modify Device ID and Connection Points – If necessary, during symbol creation you can modify the text and position of the device ID and connection points. Use the following procedures: Modify Device ID a.
Point the cursor at the device ID and click the right mouse button. The following popup menu will appear Device ID Modify Text Position
b.
Select Device ID Modify if you wish to change the text or text parameters of the device ID. Select Text Position if you wish to change the position of the device ID.
Modify Connection Points a.
Point the cursor at the connection point text (not at the connection point itself) and click the right mouse button. The following popup menu will appear Connection Point > Modify Text Position Move Delete
b.
9.
Select Connection Point if you wish to change the connection point. Select Text Position if you wish to change the position of the connection point text.
Add symbol Text – Text entered during symbol creation is part of the symbol definition and appears with the symbol each time it is placed in the schematic. Symbol text can be set up to contain input entered at the time of symbol placement. Additionally, it can be set up to prompt for a certain type of input. Use the following procedure to enter symbol text. 6-13
Create Schematic Elements
a.
Select the Draw > Text function.
b.
In the Text dialog box enter the text itself and set other text parameters as desired. See page 5-31. If you wish to have prompted input at the time of symbol placement, enter a “?” where the text is to appear. Enter, for example: ? Hours (leave enough spaces after “?” for any valid input). When the symbol is placed on a drawing, text input will be requested that will take the place of the question mark. Select OK when ready.
c.
Select a reference point for the text in the drawing.
d.
Next, the Text Attribute Definition dialog box will appear. If you turn on the Attribute – Activate checkbox, you can select an attribute for the text from the attribute list (see list on next page), or you can enter the number of the text in the No: field instead. An attribute will provide a prompt when the symbol is placed that indicates what units or other information is to be entered.
These attributes are defined in the file RS\MENU\DIALOG\ATT_ENG.TXT (for English). You can edit this file to add additional prompts in the 52 through 120 positions in the list. Alternatively, you can create a file called RS\MENU\DIALOG\ATT_CUST.TXT to hold your additional attribute texts. This ATT_CUST.TXT file will not be replaced during software updates. Text Attribute Definition Symbol Text: I/O Attribute
Attribute Activate
Activate No:
Address I/O Text
No:
Hidden
Visible OK
6-14
Cancel
Hidden Fixed Help...
Create Schematic Elements
If the text is related to a PLC symbol, select the I/O Attribute – Activate checkbox. The following additional items will be enabled: Select the Address checkbox if the text will be a PLC module address. Select the I/O Text checkbox if the text will be PLC function text. In the No: field you must enter a sequence number starting with 0 to determine which place this text attribute has in the sequence of addressing. This number can be modified during symbol creation in the Attribute Number field in the Edit – Text dialog box. The group of radio buttons at the bottom of the dialog box are selected to determine if the text will be Visible, Hidden, or Hidden Fixed (cannot be modified). List of Symbol Text Attributes (numbers are for internal reference only) 1
Function Text:
2
PLC Function Text:
3
Rack:
4
Module:
5
Reserved
6
Reserved
7
DID, SDW:
8
Wire Diagram, CP:
9
DID,Panel/Wire Dia:
10
Part Number:
11
Reference Symbol Name:
12
Horsepower [P]:
13
Revolutions per minute [n]:
14
Voltage [V]:
15
VA:
16
Current (A) [I]:
17
Frequency [f]:
18
Temperature [T]:
19
Pressure [p]:
20
Resistance (ohm) [R]:
21
Velocity [v]:
22
Density [D]:
23
Quantity [Q]:
24
Capacitance [Cap]:
25
Inductance [L]:
6-15
Create Schematic Elements
List of Symbol Text Attributes 26
Seconds [s]:
27
Minutes [min}:
28
Hours [h]:
29
Channel:
30
Manufacturer:
31
Type
32
Length [l]:
33
Weight, mass [m]:
34
Amount of Material [mol]:
35
Luminous Intensity [lv]:
36
Area [A]:
37
Volume [V]:
38
Power [Pow]:
39
Quantity of Heat [Qj]:
40
Conductance [G]:
41
Field Strength [E]:
42
Magnetic Flux [Phi]:
43
time [t]:
44
sound level [dB(A) ]:
45
acceleration [a]:
46
current density [J]:
47
permittivity [F/m]:
48
permeability [My]:
49
permeance [H]:
50
thermal conductivity [W/(m*K)]:
51
temperature conductivity [m2/s]:
52 - 120
Free for user entries
10. Select cross reference position (child symbols only) – A cross reference can appear at a child symbol to indicate the location of the parent symbol. Ordinarily, the position of this cross reference can be adjusted by entering a value in the Dist. Device ID Cross Ref. field in the Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults tab (see page 7-21). However, if you wish to set a fixed position for the cross reference (which will not be affected by the above value), select the Manage > Symbol > Cross Ref. Position function and select the desired position on the drawing. The position will be marked by a blue “X”.
6-16
Create Schematic Elements
If you wish to reposition the cross reference position, simply use the same function to place it again. If you wish to remove the blue X (i.e., not use this feature), place the cross reference position at the symbol reference point (red triangle). When the symbol is saved, the blue X will be removed. 11. Store the symbol. Select the Save function from the Manage > Symbol menu to store the symbol. The software will prompt you to “Define first corner” and “Define opposite corner” which means that you should define a window around all the elements that you wish to store as the symbol. The software will display the message “The symbol was added to the catalog.” All symbols created by the user are stored automatically in the first symbol catalog defined by the catalog path statement in file ECSCAD.CFG. Note
You can cancel the symbol creation process at any time by selecting the Manage > Symbol > Cancel function. This will abort the symbol creation.
6-17
Create Schematic Elements
Entering Part Number During Symbol Creation (for automatic assignment) You can enter a part number during symbol creation so that this part number will be automatically prompted whenever the symbol is placed. Use the following procedure:
Note
1.
During the symbol creation process (after the New/Modify Symbol dialog box has been completed) select the Draw > Text function.
2.
In the Text field of the Text dialog box, enter the desired part number.
This number must exactly match the number used in the parts database (case sensitive). None of the text parameters (Height, Angle, etc.) need be set; the part number will be displayed with the same parameters as the device ID (except for color). Text Text
Enter Part Number Here
Function Text Language Text Number:
Note
6-18
Text:
Search...
Height:
0.150
Select...
Position X:
23.500
Angle:
0
Select...
Position Y:
15.000
Values shown in inches. 3.
Select the OK button. The software will prompt you to select a position for the text. Select any position (the part number will be automatically positioned below the device ID when the symbol is placed).
4.
The Text Attribute Definition dialog box will appear. Select the Attribute– Activate checkbox and select “Part Number” from the attribute list.
Create Schematic Elements
Text Attribute Definition
Select Activate checkbox
Symbol Text: 800T–A1D1 I/O Attribute
Attribute
Select “Part Number” From List
Activate
Activate No:
10
Address Part Number I/O Text
5.
Select the OK button. The part number will appear on the drawing.
6.
Complete the symbol creation and save the symbol.
When you place a symbol that has had a part number assigned during symbol creation, the part number will automatically appear in the Assigned Part Numbers area of the Device ID Assignment dialog box. If desired, you can delete the part number by clicking on it. You can then search the database for a different part number by selecting the Search button. Device ID Assignment Installation:
Search...
Location:
Search...
Device ID:
Search Device ID
Suppress Device ID
Duplicate Device ID
Multiple Placement
Part Number Assigned Part No./Select to Delete
Search...
800T–A1D1 Addit.Part Number
Part Number Appears Here. Delete By Clicking On Part Number.
OK
Cancel
Help...
6-19
Create Schematic Elements
The part number will appear below the symbol’s device ID (assuming the part number display has been activated with the Tools > System Settings > Display Settings function).
6-20
Create Schematic Elements
Creating a Symbol from an AutoCAD DWG File Graphics from existing AutoCAD DWG files can be converted into RSWire symbols. Note
DWG files must be in a format compatible with AutoCAD Release 14 or AutoCAD 2000, depending on the Version of AutoCAD under which you are running the software. Use the following steps:
Note
1.
In RSWire, display a blank drawing page with the Online checkbox turned off. (Use the Manage > Page > Modify function to access this checkbox.)
2.
Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function. Enter a symbol name and description in the New/Modify Symbol dialog box. Choose an appropriate symbol group. (For more information on this part of the symbol creation process, see page 6-8.) Select OK to continue.
3.
Define a reference point for the symbol. You can redefine this point later, if desired.
4.
Bring in the AutoCAD drawing using the Insert > Block > Insert function. Select an insertion point on the drawing page.
RSWire AutoCAD add–on users can also use the command line command DDINSERT. 5.
It is not necessary to explode the inserted drawing elements unless there are items within blocks that you wish to change or remove. Explode the DWG elements with the Insert > Block > Explode function.
6.
As with normal symbol creation, add connection points, device ID, text, etc. Redefine the reference point if desired. Remember that connection points must be placed on a grid line.
7.
Store the symbol: select Manage > Symbol > Save and define a window around the symbol elements.
6-21
Create Schematic Elements
DXF Import The File > DXF Import function allows the importing of drawings in the DXF format.
File DXF Import Save Current Page New DXF Page DXF Import Save as DWG Save as Block Selecting the File > DXF Import > Save Current Page function will save and close current page. (You must close the current RSWire page and create a blank AutoCAD page on which to place the DXF drawing.) Selecting the File > DXF Import > New DXF Page function will bring up a blank AutoCAD page. Selecting the File > DXF Import > DXF Import function allows the user to pick a DXF file and open it in the current page. Selecting the File > DXF Import > Save as DWG function will save the current page as a .DWG file. Selecting the File > DXF Import > Save as Block function will group all items within the current page and save them as a block. Note
To ungroup items grouped with the File > DXF Import > Save as Block function, use the Insert > Block > Explode function. Rules for DXF Import: 1.
Save and close any current RSWire page with the File > DXF Import > Save Current Page function.
2.
Create a blank AutoCAD page with the File > DXF Import > New DXF Page function.
Use the following procedure:
6-22
1.
Select the File > DXF Import > DXF Import function.
2.
Select the DXF file that you want to import.
Create Schematic Elements
3.
Save the imported DXF drawing as a DWG file (File > DXF Import > Save as DWG) or as an AutoCAD block (File > DXF Import > Save as Block).
You can insert the saved DWG file by using the Insert > Block > Insert function.
6-23
Create Schematic Elements
Symbol Creation Examples Creating an Example Parent Symbol Certain symbols can have a “parent/child” relationship with other symbols in a schematic. Examples include relays and motor starters (parent) which have related contacts (child) appearing throughout a drawing. The child symbols are given the same device ID as the parent, and the system can automatically provide cross referencing. The system requires a “Device” definition that establishes which type and number of child symbols are associated with the parent. This section and the following sections describe how to create your own parent symbols, child symbols, cross reference symbols, and device definitions. Use the following procedure to create a parent relay symbol called XRELAY. 1.
Display a blank drawing page.
2.
Turn off the Online function (use Manage > Page > Modify function).
3.
Set the drawing grid to 0.5 inch for JIC or 5 mm for IEC (use the Tools > System Settings > Grid Settings tab).
4.
Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function.
5.
In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XRELAY. Press the <Enter> key. New/Modify Symbol Symbol Name:
List...
XRELAY
Preferred Direction Vertical
Horizontal
Select Preferred Direction
Snapmode: Nearest Endpoint Description: Example parent symbol Symbol Group: PS1 Parent Symbol with cross ref. OK
6-24
Cancel
Help...
Create Schematic Elements
6.
Symbols are drawn based on the wire passing through the symbol. Usually the orientation of a symbol is drawn, but not limited too, Horizontal for JIC or Vertical for IEC. Select a preferred direction.
7.
Enter the description “Example parent symbol.”
8.
Select symbol group PS1 Parent Symbol with cross ref.
9.
Select the OK button to continue.
10. The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a JIC symbol reference point on a 0.5 inch grid line (symbol should be 0.5 inches wide, overall). Select a IEC symbol reference point on a 5 mm grid line (symbol should be 10 mm wide, overall). Zoom in for a better view of the work area. 11. Draw reference lines to mark the width of the symbol (this will help when we change the size of the grid). ref. lines .5 in. apart
ref. lines 5 mm apart
JIC Symbol
IEC Symbol
12. Set grid to 0.05 inch (JIC only). 13. As shown above, draw a circle 0.3 inch in diameter for JIC. (Draw a 5 mm by 10 mm rectangle for IEC.) Draw 0.1 inch lines on each side of the circle. (Draw a 5 mm line from the bottom center of the rectangle for IEC.) 14. Delete the reference lines. 15. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. The software will prompt you to “Define Device ID position.” Select an appropriate device ID reference point above the symbol for JIC (left of the symbol for IEC). Enter the device ID XRE for JIC (–XK for IEC).
6-25
Create Schematic Elements
Device ID Position XRE –XK
IEC Symbol
JIC Symbol 16. Select the OK button to continue.
17. Select the Manage > Symbol > Connection Point function. 18. Locate the left connection point for JIC (top connection point for IEC) at the symbol reference point. You will be prompted to “Define reference point of text.” Select a point below the connection point for JIC (upper right of the connection point for IEC). When the Connection Point Parameters dialog box appears, delete the “?” in the Connection Point field and select the OK button to continue (no text will be entered at this time). 19. Locate the right connection point on the right side of the symbol (bottom connection point on the bottom for IEC). Select a point below the connection point for JIC (lower right of the connection point for IEC). Again, enter no connection point text.
Connection Point Position
JIC Parent Symbol
6-26
Connection Point Text Position
IEC Parent Symbol
Create Schematic Elements
20. (Optional.) If you wish the position of the cross reference information to be fixed, select the Manage > Symbol > Cross Ref. Position function and select a point near the symbol. If you do not use this function, the position of the cross reference will be offset from the device ID position and can be adjusted using the Device ID to Cross Ref. Offset field of the Manage > Project Settings > General Defaults function. 21. Select the Manage > Symbol > Save function to complete the creation of the symbol. Define a window around the symbol elements. The message “The symbol was added to the catalog” will be displayed.
6-27
Create Schematic Elements
Creating an Example Child Symbol Use the following procedure to create a child contact symbol called XNO for the XRELAY parent symbol created in the previous section. 1.
Display a blank drawing page.
2.
Turn off the Online function (use Manage > Page > Modify function).
3.
Set the drawing grid to 0.5 inch for JIC or 5 mm for IEC (use the Tools > System Settings > Grid Setting function).
4.
Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function.
5.
In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XNO. Press the <Enter> key. New/Modify Symbol List...
XNO
Symbol Name: Preferred Direction Vertical
Horizontal
Select Preferred Direction
Snapmode: Nearest Endpoint Description: Example child symbol Symbol Group: PS2 Child Symbol with cross ref. OK
6-28
Cancel
Help...
6.
Symbols are drawn based on how the wire passes through the symbol. Usually the orientation of a symbol is drawn, but not limited too, Horizontal for JIC or Vertical for IEC. Select a preferred direction.
7.
Enter the description “Example child symbol”.
8.
Select symbol group PS2 Child Symbol with cross ref.
9.
Select the OK button to continue.
Create Schematic Elements
10. The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a JIC symbol reference point on a 0.5 inch grid line (symbol should be 0.5 inches wide, overall). Select a IEC symbol reference point on a 5 mm grid line (symbol should be 10 mm height). Zoom in for a better view of the work area. 11. Draw reference lines to mark the width of the symbol (this will help when we change the size of the grid). Ref. Lines
Ref. Lines
JIC Child Symbol
IEC Child Symbol
12. Set grid to 0.05 inch for JIC or 5 mm for IEC. 13. As shown above, draw a pair of vertical lines about 0.3 inches apart. Draw horizontal 0.1 inch lines on each side of the vertical lines. 14. Delete the reference lines. 15. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. The software will prompt you to “Define Device ID position.” Select an appropriate device ID reference point above the symbol for JIC (left of the symbol for IEC). Enter the device ID XRE for JIC (–XK for IEC). Note
A child symbol must have same device ID as the parent symbol. 16. Select the OK button to continue. 17. Select the Manage > Symbol > Connection Point function.
6-29
Create Schematic Elements
XRE
Connection Point Location –XK
Connection Point Text Location JIC Child Symbol
IEC Child Symbol
18. Locate the left connection point for JIC (top connection point for IEC) at the symbol reference point. You will be prompted to “Define reference point of text.” Select a point below the connection point for JIC (upper right of the connection point for IEC). When the Connection Point Parameters dialog box appears, delete the “?” in the Connection Point field and select the OK button to continue (no text will be entered at this time). 19. Locate the right connection point on the right side of the symbol (bottom connection point on the bottom for IEC). Select a point below the connection point for JIC (lower right of the connection point for IEC). Again, enter no connection point text. 20. (Optional.) Users can select whether or not a cross reference appears at the child symbol. If you wish the position of this information to be fixed, select the Manage > Symbol > Cross Ref. Position function and select a point near the symbol. If you do not use this function, the position of the cross reference at the child symbol will be offset from the device ID position and can be adjusted using the Device ID to Cross Ref. Offset field of the Manage > Project Settings > General Defaults function. 21. Select the Manage > Symbol > Save function to complete the creation of the symbol. Define a window around the symbol elements. Note
Make sure complete text elements are included within the window around the symbol elements. The message “The symbol was added to the catalog” will be displayed.
6-30
Create Schematic Elements
Creating an Example Cross Reference Symbol In this section we will create a cross reference symbol that will appear beside the XRELAY coil symbol and indicate where its contacts (child symbols) are located. A number of cross reference symbols are included with the software (with names such as Q22, Q42, etc.), but you may need to make your own for special requirements. Use the following procedure: 1.
Display a blank drawing page.
2.
Turn off the Online function (use Manage > Page > Modify function).
3.
Set the drawing grid to 0.5 inch for JIC or 5 mm for IEC (use the Tools > System Settings > Grid Settings function).
4.
Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function.
5.
In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XCROSS (the name of our example symbol). Press the <Enter> key. New/Modify Symbol Symbol Name:
XCROSS
List...
Preferred Direction Vertical
Horizontal
Snapmode: Endpoint
Select Preferred Direction
Description: Example cross reference symbol Symbol Group: PS3 Cross Reference Symbol OK
6.
Cancel
Help...
Symbols are drawn based on how the wire passes through the symbol. Usually the orientation of a symbol is drawn, but not limited too, Horizontal for JIC or Vertical for IEC. Select a preferred direction.
6-31
Create Schematic Elements
7.
Enter the description “Example cross reference symbol”.
8.
Select symbol group PS3 Cross Reference Symbol.
9.
Select the OK button to continue.
10. The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a symbol reference point on a grid line. Zoom in for a better view of the work area.
Reference Point
JIC Cross Reference Symbol
IEC Cross Reference Symbol
11. Use the Draw > Graphic > Line function to draw boxes as shown. 12. Set grid to 0.05 inch (JIC only). 13. Use drawing lines to create the relay contact symbol as shown.
Relay Contact Symbol
JIC Cross Reference Symbol
6-32
Relay Contact Symbol
IEC Cross Reference Symbol
Create Schematic Elements
14. Using the Draw > Text function, place the texts “?1” and “?2” (separately) as shown. This text will later hold cross reference information.
Symbol Text
?1
Symbol Text
?2
?1 ?2
JIC Cross Reference Symbol
IEC Cross Reference Symbol
Note
If you wish to make a cross reference symbol that includes normally closed symbols as well as normally open, you could simply add another row (or rows) of boxes, draw a normally closed symbol, and place additional text (?3, ?4, etc.). The information that appears in the ? text locations is determined in the Device Type New/Modify dialog box (see following section).
Note
Some applications require that the cross reference text be underlined for normally closed contacts. Add “%%U” before text “?1”, “?2”, etc., for cross references that are normally closed only. Do not add “%%U” before the text of normally open contacts. This is usually done when no open or closed symbol graphics are used in the cross reference. When prompted for an attribute for these texts, select the OK button (no attribute). 15. Select the Manage > Symbol > Save function to complete the creation of the symbol. Define a window around the symbol elements. The message “Symbol added to the catalog” will be displayed.
6-33
Create Schematic Elements
Creating an Example Device Type Definition In the previous sections, we have created a parent symbol, a child symbol, and a cross reference symbol. We now need to tie these three together somehow so that RSWire knows which child symbol(s) are associated with a parent symbol and which cross reference symbol to place next to the parent symbol. This is accomplished by defining a device type. A device type is a combination of parent symbol, child symbol(s) and cross reference symbol. The same symbols can be assigned to different devices. For example, you can have various devices to represent relays with different combinations of normally open and normally closed contacts. Or, you can create devices for a relay and a motor starter that both use the same cross reference symbol. When you place a parent symbol on a drawing, the software will ask for its device type. Once the software knows the device type, it can also perform error–checking functions by keeping track of how many of the available child symbols have been used. For more information on creating devices, see page 6-89.
6-34
Create Schematic Elements
We will use the following procedure to define a device called X20. 1.
Select the Manage > Device Type > New/Modify function. The Device Type New/Modify dialog box will appear.
Device Type New/Modify Device Type Group
X20
Search
Relay, I/O, Plug
Symbol Name Parent Child 1 Child 2 Child 3 Child 4 Child 5 Child 6 Child 7 Child 8 Child 9 Cross Ref.
XRELAY XNO XNO
Connection Points AB 12 34
Delta X 0.0000
XCROSS
Delta Y 0.0000
Absolute Position OK
Note
Cancel
Help
Description...
Example shown is in the JIC format. Same principles apply to IEC. 2.
In the Device Type field, enter the name X20. Press the <Enter> key.
3.
Select the Description button and enter “Example device” in the first description field. Select OK. This description will appear on device listings.
4.
In the Group field leave the default selection Relay, I/O, Plug.
5.
Enter XRELAY for Parent symbol name. This is the symbol name of the parent symbol of the device.
6-35
Create Schematic Elements
6.
Enter XNO for Child 1 and Child 2. Enter the names of child symbols in the order in which they will be used in the cross reference symbol (i.e., the first child corresponds to the “?1” text in the cross reference symbol, the second child corresponds to “?2”, etc.).
7.
Enter the connection point text shown in the previous dialog box (A B, 1 2, 3 4). Optional connection point text can be entered in these fields which will overwrite any connection point text that was specified when the parent or child symbol was created. Separate each connection point text with a space. If more than two texts are entered, they will all be displayed when the symbol is placed, and the unwanted texts can be deleted at that time. In the example, the connection points for the relay coil will be labeled A and B. The connection points for the first contact will be labeled 1 and 2. Connection points for the second contact will be labeled 3 and 4.
8.
Note
6-36
Enter XCROSS for the Cross Ref. field. This is the name of the cross reference symbol that will hold the cross reference information for the parent/child symbols (we created this symbol in the previous section).
If you are creating a device type for which there will be no cross reference symbol, enter the name DUMMY in the Cross Ref. field.
Create Schematic Elements
9.
Note
Enter 1.50 for dx (delta x) and –0.5 for dy (delta y) for JIC values. The values entered in these fields determine where the cross reference symbol will appear on the drawing in relation to the parent symbol. Refer to the following illustration. The distances entered are between the reference point of the parent symbol and the reference point of the cross reference symbol. (If the Absolute Position checkbox is selected, these values are measured from the drawing origin point (0, 0) rather than from the parent symbol.)
For IEC, enter 0 for dx, 75 for dy, and select Absolute Position checkbox. The IEC cross reference symbol will start at 75 mm from the bottom of the page. dx=0 mm
dx=1.50”
dy=–0.5” dy=75 mm
Bottom of Page JIC Distance Values
IEC Distance Values
10. Select OK to complete the creation of the device type.
6-37
Create Schematic Elements
Testing the Device Type – To test the operation of the example device type, cross reference, and parent/child symbols created thus far, use the following procedure: Note
Example shown is in the JIC format. Same principles apply to IEC. 1.
Use a drawing page with the Online function turned on.
2.
On one line place the parent symbol, XRELAY.
3.
Accept the prompted device ID by selecting OK in the Device ID Assignment dialog box (the format of the device ID will vary according to how your project was set up.
4.
When prompted for a device type, enter X20. The connection points dialog box will appear on the screen, prompting the connection point text. Select OK to continue. The parent symbol should appear on the screen with the cross reference symbol beside it.
5.
On another line of the drawing, place the child symbol, XNO.
6.
Give the child symbol the same device ID as the parent symbol. The connection points dialog box will appear on the screen, prompting the connection point text. Select OK to continue.
The cross reference symbol should indicate the location (line number) of the child symbol.
XRE1 A1
(line 112)
A
114
1
–XK
–XK
4
14
XRE1
(line 114)
3
13
B
A2
2 13
14
Bottom of Page JIC Device IDs
6-38
IEC Device IDs
Create Schematic Elements
Creating an Example Programmable Controller (Parent) Symbol Programmable logic controllers (PLCs) are a part of many control systems. With RSWire, symbols can be created that represent PLC input and output modules. The symbol can be designed to prompt the user for information such as rack and module number, and automatically place address numbers and descriptive text. In this section we will create an example PLC symbol like the one shown below called XPLC8. L2
L1
101 102 103
PLC102
Device ID
RACK: 1 MODULE: 0
104
106
00
107 108
1001
Limit sw. 3
1004
Limit sw. 4
1005
Limit sw. 5
1006
Limit sw. 6
1007
Limit sw. 7
Descriptive Text
05
117 118
1003
I/O Addresses
04
115 116
Limit sw. 2
03
113 114
1002 02
111 112
Terminal Numbers
01
109 110
Rack And Module Group
1000
105
06
119
07
6-39
Create Schematic Elements
P22
16 11.05
12
10
=M –S8
11.04 14
=M –S7
=M –S6
11.02
6
8 11.01
1N
=M –S5
11.03
=M –S4
11.00
F– F–
F+
=M –S3
1N
=M –S2
F+
=M –S1
PLC1 6ES5 436–4UA11
DIGITAL INPUT MODULE 220 VAC
Terminal Numbers Rack And Module/Slot Group
I/O Addresses
Device ID
Descriptive Text
This symbol is considered a parent symbol. Child symbols for the individual I/O points can be located throughout the schematics in the same project. The following procedure describes how to create a symbol for an eight point PLC input module.
6-40
1.
Display a blank drawing page.
2.
Turn off the Online function (use the Manage > Page > Modify function).
3.
Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function.
4.
In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XPLC8 (this is the symbol name we will use for this particular example). Press the <Enter> key.
Create Schematic Elements
New/Modify Symbol Symbol Name:
List...
XPLC8
Preferred Direction Vertical
Horizontal
Snapmode: Endpoint
Select Preferred Direction
Description: Example 8 point PLC input module Symbol Group: PS1 Parent Symbol with cross ref. OK
Cancel
Help...
5.
Symbols are drawn based on the wire passing through the symbol. Usually the orientation of a symbol is drawn, but not limited too, Horizontal for JIC or Vertical for IEC. Select a preferred direction.
6.
Enter the description “Example 8 point PLC input module”.
7.
Select symbol group PS1 Parent Symbol with cross ref.
8.
Select the OK button to continue.
9.
The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a symbol reference point on a 0.5 inch (5 mm for IEC) grid line. Zoom in for a better view.
10. Use the Draw > Graphic > Line function to draw the sides of a rectangle about 2 x 9 inches (it must be long enough for the input lines and wide enough for the address text). If necessary the rectangle can be redrawn before saving the symbol. If desired, use the circle and drawing line functions to draw terminal screw heads. You will have to select a smaller grid size to do this, but place the screws on your standard schematic line spacing. Leave about 1 inch (25 mm) free at the top of the box for rack and module information.
6-41
Create Schematic Elements
101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115
Note
Text Label Origin – When placing text in this or any symbol, it is important to decide how you want the text to appear on the drawing in relation to the reference point selected for the text. By selecting an appropriate label origin before entering the text, you can determine whether the text will appear above, below, to the left, to the right, or centered on the origin point. By selecting an appropriate label origin, you can prevent one text from overwriting another or extending outside its intended location. 11. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. The software will prompt you to “Define Device ID position.” Select a device ID reference point above the symbol. Enter the device ID “PLC”. 12. Use the Draw > Text function to enter the words “RACK:” and “MODULE:” at the top of the symbol. After selecting the reference point for each word you will be prompted for text attributes. Simply select the OK button.
6-42
Create Schematic Elements
Device ID Standard Text
PLC RACK:
Attribute Text ?
MODULE:
?
13. To the right of the words “RACK:” and “MODULE:” use the Draw > Text function to enter a “?”. After selecting the reference point for each “?” you will be prompted for text attributes. In the attribute dialog box, select the Attribute – Activate checkbox and from the attribute list select “Rack:” for the “?” that you place next to the word RACK, and “Module” for the one next to MODULE. Text Attribute Definition Symbol Text: ? I/O Attribute
Attribute
Select “Activate” checkbox
Activate
Activate No: Address I/O Text
No: 000 +
PLC Function Text Rack: Module: Combination of attributes Reserved
Select “Module” or “Rack”
14. Use the Draw > Text function to place a series of “?” characters beside each screw location. For each “?”, select the I/O Attribute–Activate checkbox and the Address checkbox in the text attribute dialog box. These texts will display the individual I/O addresses when the symbol is placed in a drawing.
6-43
Create Schematic Elements
Important
You must place these texts in the order they will be addressed and you must number each of these attributes the Number field of the text attribute dialog box starting with 0 as shown below. If you lose track of which number you have assigned to these texts use the Edit > Text > Modify function and select the text in question. The assigned number will be displayed in the Attribute Number field of the Modify Text dialog box. Internally, RSWire assigns address numbers to the “300” range, so the text codes displayed here will start at 300, rather than 00. PLC RACK: ? MODULE: ?
Number the first “?” 0, the next one 1, etc.
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
Text Attribute Definition
Select “Activate” and “Address”
Symbol Text: ? I/O Attribute
Attribute Activate
Activate No: Address I/O Text
No: 300 +
6-44
0
Create Schematic Elements
15. Enter another series of ”?” attribute texts to the right of the module. These attribute will contain PLC function text. Therefore for each “?”, select the I/O Attribute–Activate checkbox and the I/O Text checkbox in the text attribute dialog box. Like the address texts, each of these must be numbered sequentially starting with 0. If you lose track of which number you have assigned to these texts use the Modify > Text function and select the text in question. The assigned number will be displayed in the Attribute Number field of the Text dialog box. Internally, RSWire assigns function text numbers to the “600” range, so the text codes displayed here will start at 600, rather than 00.
6-45
Create Schematic Elements
PLC RACK: ? MODULE: ? ?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
Number The First “?” 0, The Next One 1, etc.
Text Attribute Definition Symbol Text: ? I/O Attribute
Select “Activate” and “I/O Text”
Attribute Activate
Activate No: Address I/O Text
Visible No: 600 +
0
Hidden
16. Select the Manage > Symbol > Connection Point function. Place a connection point beside each screw symbol. Be sure the connection points match your standard line spacing. Place the connection point text below each screw.
6-46
Create Schematic Elements
Important
You must place connection points in the same order as the I/O addresses. If your symbol includes additional non–addressable terminals such as hots or commons (our example does not) the connection points for these terminals must be assigned last regardless of where they are located on the module. PLC
Place This Connection Point First
RACK: ? MODULE: ? ?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
00 01 02
Connection Point Text Locations 03 04 05 06 07
17. Store the symbol: select the Manage > Symbol > Save function and define a window around the symbol elements. Create PLC Device Type – Before the symbol will function correctly, we must create a device type that specifies the cross reference and child symbols to be associated with the parent symbol. 1.
Select the Manage > Device Type > New/Modify function. In the Device Type field, enter the name XPLC8 (we will give the device type the same name as the parent to make it easier to remember). Press the <Enter> key.
6-47
Create Schematic Elements
Device Type New/Modify Device Type Group
XPLC8
Search
Relay, I/O, Plug
Symbol Name Parent Child 1 Child 2 Child 3 Child 4 Child 5 Child 6 Child 7 Child 8 Child 9
XPLC8 INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT
Cross Ref.
Connection Points 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Delta X 0.0000
XPLC
Delta Y 0.0000
Absolute Position OK
2.
3.
6-48
Cancel
Help
Description...
Enter the information shown in the example above. a.
For Cross Ref. enter XPLC. This is a standard PLC cross reference provided with RSWire.
b.
In the Connection Points field enter the same series of connection point designations we placed as connection point text in the symbol.
c.
In the Child symbol fields, enter the symbol name INPUT. This is a PLC child symbol provided with RSWire (you can also create custom child symbols). These child symbols can be placed throughout the schematics. They can be given the same address as the parent and assigned one of the terminal numbers.
Select OK to save the device.
Create Schematic Elements
Testing the PLC Symbol – To test the functioning of the PLC symbol use the following steps: 1.
Make settings: The Tools > Project Settings > Programmable Controller Settings function allows various PLC related parameters to be set such as octal vs. decimal addressing, the word/bit separator character for addresses, etc. See page 7-37 for more information.
2.
Select the symbol using the Insert > Symbol by Name function. Enter the symbol name XPLC8 (or whatever other name you gave the symbol).
3.
Place the symbol (page must be Online). The Device ID Assignment dialog box will appear. Accept the prompted device ID or enter a different one.
4.
The Device Type dialog box will appear. Enter the device type XPLC8.
5.
The Connection Points dialog box will appear, showing the device ID, the parent and child symbol names, and the connection point designations. Select OK to continue.
Connection Points Select Connection Points Device ID: =LINE1+NO_LOC–PLC377 Device Item:
Installation
XPLC8
Pg.Line
Symbol XPLC8 INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT
Connection Points 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 8
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 OK
Cancel
Help
6-49
Create Schematic Elements
6.
The Programmable Controller Text Definition dialog box will appear. This dialog box allows you to set rack and module numbers, the addressing numbers, and function text for each point on the module. (See next page.) I/O Text Definition Device ID:
PLC377
Module:
02
Rack:
01 Address I0102/00
Limit switch 1
1
I0102/01
Pushbutton 1 – Start
2
I0102/02
3
I0102/03
4
I0102/04
5
I0102/05
6
I0102/06
7
I0102/07 Next
6-50
Function Text
0
Previous
I/O Text
OK
Cancel
a.
Enter the Module and Rack numbers in the appropriate fields.
b.
In the Address fields, it is only necessary to enter an address in the first field: once you move the cursor to another field, the remaining addresses will be filled in automatically, continuing from the first. If you wish to use a word/bit address, use the separator character that was specified in the Address Separator field of the Programmable Controller Settings dialog box (Tools > Project Settings > Programmable Controller Settings function). In the example above, “/” is the separator character.
c.
In each Function Text field you can enter descriptive text. Two examples are entered above.
d.
If you select the I/O Text button, entries for the Function Text fields will be taken from an external file. This filename is specified in the Active Input File field of the Tools > Project Settings > Programmable Controller Settings tab. See page 7-38.
Create Schematic Elements
7.
Select the OK button. The module symbol should appear on the drawing with the appropriate Rack and Module numbers, addresses, and function texts.
6-51
Create Schematic Elements
Creating an Example PLC (Child) Symbol (JIC Format) RSWire includes several PLC child symbols (symbol names: INPUT, OUTPUT). These can be used to represent individual PLC I/O points throughout the schematic, as opposed to showing all wiring connected directly to a single parent symbol. L2
L1
Device ID
101 102
LS103
TB2:2
IAD343
104 105
I/O Address
01 I:000/01
103
343 Limit switch 2
Connection Point Text
106
Cross Reference to Parent
107
Function Text
JIC Format
Use the following procedure to create a PLC (input) child symbol:
6-52
1.
Display a blank drawing page.
2.
Turn off the Online function (use the Manage > Page > Modify function).
3.
Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function.
4.
In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XINPUT (this is the symbol name we will use for this particular example. Press the <Enter> key.
Create Schematic Elements
New/Modify Symbol Symbol Name:
List...
XINPUT
Preferred Direction Vertical
Select Preferred Direction
Horizontal
Snapmode: Nearest Endpoint Description: Example PLC child input Search Language Text... Symbol Group: PS2 Child Symbol with cross ref. OK
Cancel
Help...
5.
Select the Snapmode:Nearest Endpoint checkbox. (The symbol will be automatically positioned at the end of the wire.)
6.
Symbols are drawn based on the wire passing through the symbol. Usually the orientation of a symbol is drawn, but not limited too, Horizontal for JIC or Vertical for IEC. Select a preferred direction.
7.
Enter the description “Example PLC child input”.
8.
Select symbol group PS2 Child Symbol with cross ref.
9.
Select the OK button to continue.
10. The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a symbol reference point on a 0.5 inch grid line. Zoom in for a better view. 11. Use the Draw > Graphic > Line function to draw lines to form a box about 1.5 x 0.5 inches. Draw a line to divide the box into two parts: one part to hold the connection point designation and a larger part to hold the full I/O address. If necessary the box can be redrawn before saving the symbol. You will have to select a smaller grid size to place some elements, but be aware of your schematic line spacing when placing connection points.
6-53
Create Schematic Elements
12. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. The software will prompt you to “Define Device ID position.” Select a device ID reference point above the symbol. Enter the device ID “PLC”. Note
This default device ID tag can be overwritten when the symbol is placed. 13. Select the Manage > Symbol > Connection Point function. 14. Locate the connection point at the symbol reference point. You will be prompted to “Define reference point of text.” Select a point inside the smaller part of the box. When the Connection Point Parameters dialog box appears, select the OK button to continue. There are no other connection points on the symbol.
Reference Point
PLC ?
Connection Point Connection Point Text
15. (Optional.) Users can select whether or not a cross reference (to the parent symbol) appears at the child symbol. If you wish the position of this information to be fixed, select the Manage > Symbol > Cross Ref. Position function and select a point near the symbol. If you do not use this function, the position of the cross reference at the child symbol can be adjusted using the Device ID to Cross Ref. Offset field of the Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function.
6-54
Create Schematic Elements
16. Use the Draw > Text function to place a “?” character in the larger part of the box (see following figure). (Be aware of how the label origin value you select for the text will affect the placement of information later.) Select the I/O Attribute–Activate checkbox and the Address checkbox in the text attribute dialog box. This text will display the individual I/O address when the symbol is placed in a drawing.
PLC ?
Place Text
?
Text Attribute Definition
Select “Activate” and “Address”
Symbol Text: ? I/O Attribute
Attribute Activate
Activate No: Address I/O Text
No: 300 +
0
17. Use the Draw > Text function to place a “?” character below the box. Select the Attribute–Activate checkbox and the PLC Function Text selection in the text attribute pull down list. This text will display the I/O function text from the parent symbol when the symbol is placed in a drawing.
6-55
Create Schematic Elements
PLC ?
? Place Text
? Text Attribute Definition
Select “Activate” checkbox
Symbol Text: ? I/O Attribute
Attribute Activate
Activate No:
2
Address
Select “PLC Function Text”
I/O Text
No: 000 +
PLC Function Text Rack: Module: Combination of attributes
18. Select the Manage > Symbol > Save function to complete the creation of the symbol. Define a window around the symbol elements. The message “Symbol added to the catalog” will be displayed.
6-56
Create Schematic Elements
Creating an Example PLC (Child) Symbol (IEC Format) RSWire includes several PLC child symbols (symbol names: INPUT, OUTPUT). These can be used to represent individual PLC I/O points throughout the schematic, as opposed to showing all wiring connected directly to a single parent symbol.
13 –S7 14
1
Function Text –X1
Device ID
I/O Address
Cross Reference to Parent
I0.00 INPUT CP:00 Start Motor
–A1 .1
Text Label
Connection Point Text
PLC Function Text
IEC Format
6-57
Create Schematic Elements
Use the following procedure to create a PLC (input) child symbol: 1.
Display a blank drawing page.
2.
Turn off the Online function (use the Manage > Page > Modify function).
3.
Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function.
4.
In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XINPUT (this is the symbol name we will use for this particular example. Press the <Enter> key. New/Modify Symbol Symbol Name:
List...
XINPUT
Preferred Direction Vertical
Select Preferred Direction
Horizontal
Snapmode: Nearest Endpoint Description: Example PLC child input Search Language Text... Symbol Group: PS2 Child Symbol with cross ref. OK
6-58
Cancel
Help...
5.
Select the Snapmode:Endpoint checkbox. (The symbol will be automatically positioned at the end of the wire.)
6.
Symbols are drawn based on the wire passing through the symbol. Usually the orientation of a symbol is drawn, but not limited too, Horizontal for JIC or Vertical for IEC. Select a preferred direction.
7.
Enter the description “Example PLC child input”.
8.
Select symbol group PS2 Child Symbol with cross ref.
9.
Select the OK button to continue.
Create Schematic Elements
10. The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a symbol reference point on a 5 mm grid line. Zoom in for a better view. 11. Use the Draw > Graphic > Line function to draw lines to form a box about 20 x 15 mm. Draw a line to divide the box into two parts: one part to hold the I/O address and a larger part to hold the full connection point text . If necessary the box can be redrawn before saving the symbol. You will have to select a smaller grid size to place some elements, but be aware of your schematic line spacing when placing connection points.
Reference Point
12. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. The software will prompt you to “Define Device ID position.” 13. Select a device ID reference point below the symbol. 14. Enter the device ID “PLC”. Note
This default device ID tag can be overwritten when the symbol is placed. 15. Select the Manage > Symbol > Connection Point function. 16. Locate the connection point at the symbol reference point. You will be prompted to “Define reference point of text.” Select a point inside the smaller part of the box.
6-59
Create Schematic Elements
Reference Point
Connection Point
?
PLC
Connection Point Text
17. When the Connection Point Parameters dialog box appears, select the OK button to continue. There are no other connection points on the symbol. 18. (Optional.) Users can select whether or not a cross reference (to the parent symbol) appears at the child symbol. If you wish the position of this information to be fixed, select the Manage > Symbol > Cross Ref. Position function and select a point near the symbol. If you do not use this function, the position of the cross reference at the child symbol can be adjusted using the Device ID to Cross Ref. Offset field of the Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function. 19. Use the Draw > Text function to place a “?” character in the larger part of the box (see following figure). (Be aware of how the label origin value you select for the text will affect the placement of information later.) 20. Select the I/O Attribute–Activate checkbox and the Address checkbox in the text attribute dialog box. This text will display the individual I/O address when the symbol is placed in a drawing.
6-60
Create Schematic Elements
I/O Address
?
PLC
?
Text Attribute Definition
Select “Activate” and “Address”
Symbol Text: ? I/O Attribute
Attribute Activate
Activate No: Address I/O Text
No: 300 +
0
21. Use the Draw > Text function to place a “?” character below the box. Select the Attribute–Activate checkbox and the PLC Function Text selection in the text attribute pull down list. This text will display the I/O function text from the parent symbol when the symbol is placed in a drawing.
6-61
Create Schematic Elements
I/O Address
?
PLC
?
Text Attribute Definition
Select “Activate” checkbox
Symbol Text: ? I/O Attribute
Attribute Activate
Activate No:
2
Address
Select “PLC Function Text”
I/O Text
No: 000 +
PLC Function Text Rack: Module: Combination of attributes
22. Select the Manage > Symbol > Save function to complete the creation of the symbol. Define a window around the symbol elements. The message “Symbol added to the catalog” will be displayed.
6-62
Create Schematic Elements
Creating an Example Terminal Symbol A number of terminal symbols are provided with RSWire. The user may wish to create custom terminal symbols. This section describes how to create an example terminal symbol called XTERM. Use the following procedure: 1.
Display a blank drawing page.
2.
Turn off the Online function (use Manage > Page > Modify function).
3.
Set the drawing grid to 0.5 inch (use the Tools > System Settings > Grid Settings tab).
4.
Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function.
5.
In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XTERM. Press the <Enter> key. New/Modify Symbol Symbol Name:
List...
XTERM
Preferred Direction Vertical
Horizontal
Snapmode: Nearest Endpoint Description: Example terminal symbol Search Language Text... Symbol Group: TS1 Terminal Block OK
Cancel
Help...
6.
Select Horizontal for preferred direction. Enter the description “Example terminal symbol.” Select symbol group TS1 Terminal Block.
7.
Select the OK button to continue.
6-63
Create Schematic Elements
8.
The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a symbol reference point where two 0.5 inch grid lines intersect. Zoom in for a better view of the work area.
9.
Set the grid to 0.05 inch.
10. Draw a small circle, about 0.2 inches in diameter. 11. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. When prompted to “Define Device ID position,” select a point above the symbol. 12. In the Device ID Parameter dialog box, enter TB in the Device ID field. Enter a label origin of 6 (Middle Right). Select OK to continue. 13. Select the Manage > Symbol > Connection Point function. 14. When prompted to “Locate connection point,” select the point at the center of the circle.
Device ID
TB
Connection Point 1 Text Origin Point
?
15. When prompted to “Define reference point of text”, select a point to the right of the device ID (the text for connection point 1 will be part of the device ID). 6-64
Create Schematic Elements
16. In the Connection Point Parameters dialog box leave the “?” in the Connection Point field and enter a label origin of 4 (Middle Left). In the Connection Point Parameters dialog there are also four radio buttons to determine the type of connection point for terminal symbols: Undefined, Internal, External, or Jumper. These determine how the connection information is displayed in the terminal plan editor. The default is Undefined. For more information see page 11-3. 17. Select OK to continue. Note
If you activate the Terminal=Wire Number checkbox in the Tools > Wire Number > Automatic function dialog box, the wire number will replace the terminal number at the text reference point of the first connection point (indicated by the “?” in the above figure). 18. Locate four more connection points at the top, bottom, left and right side of the circle (i.e. at the 0, 90, 180, and 270 degree positions of the circle). For these four connection points, delete the “?” in the Connection Point field of the Connection Point Parameters dialog box. You can select a reference point for text anywhere for each of these points (there will be no text).
TB
Note
?
Because of the defaults that the system will use to interpret terminal symbol connection points, it is best to place these five points in the following order (see page 11-4 for more information).
5 2
1
Connection Point Order 4
3 JIC
2 3
1 4
5
IEC
19. Store the symbol: select the Manage > Symbol > Save function and define a window around the symbol elements. 6-65
Create Schematic Elements
By placing the five connection points as shown, it is possible to connect wires to the terminal symbol from left, right, above, and below. When a wire is drawn over the symbol (or when the symbol is placed on a wire) the wire will break at the two outer connection points. When the terminal symbol is placed, you can specify in the Device ID field a terminal strip number and an individual terminal number separated by a colon. For example TB1:1. The next terminal symbol placed will be automatically prompted for TB1:2, then TB1:3, etc., until you enter a new terminal strip number. You can also use letters for the individual terminal designations.
Creating Pin Charts A pin chart is a combination of a plug symbol, pin symbols, and a device (parent/child) relationship between them that provides cross referencing. The plug symbol is placed somewhere on a drawing page and displays cross reference information (such as page/line number) that indicates where each pin is located in the project drawings. The pin and plug symbols are part of the “TS” symbol groups (when a symbol is created it is assigned to a symbol group such as general symbols, parent symbols, etc.). With pin charts, this means you can have cross referencing like a parent symbol and terminal plan connection information like a terminal symbol. The characteristics of “TS” symbol groups are: 1.
They allow the circuit’s potential (wire number) to flow through the symbol.
2.
They are connection devices and the user may assign a cable to the pin (child) symbol.
3.
If they are to be treated the same as a terminal symbol, the user may work in the Terminal Plan area of the program. The discipline (prompts, menu picks, listing formats, etc.) of the program may need to be changed to reflect the Pin Plan instead of the Terminal Plan. The end result is a connection symbol with the ability to graphically show all target destinations off the symbol’s device identification.
In addition, symbols from groups TS4, TS5, and TS6 have these characteristics of parent and child symbols:
6-66
Create Schematic Elements
1.
They allow a cross referencing relationship between graphical entities on the schematic pages. The plug symbol may be located on a page, while all its associated pin symbols are placed throughout the entire schematic. Much like the coil–to–contact cross referencing relationship, the pin chart will display the page / line number of all associated pin symbols.
2.
They allow the parent component of the relationship to receive a part number from the parts database. The user may use all variables associated to the parts database.
3.
The symbols then will be included in a device relationship which the user defines. Through error checking, this device relationship will prevent the user from using the same pin number twice and assigning too many pin numbers to the selected plug.
Creating a pin chart involves creating the three components: pin symbol, plug symbol, cross reference symbol, and creating the device relationship between them. If you are unfamiliar with the basic process of creating symbols and devices in RSWire, refer to the previous subsections. Plug Symbol Creation – Using the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function, create a parent symbol (Plug ) used for cross referencing. The symbol can be created graphically as a 8 pin “D” type plug end. Label the pin numbers A1 through A8. Use the following symbol creation criteria.
Symbol Name: PLUGA Layout Direction: Horizontal Description: Parent symbol for pin charts Symbol Group: TS4
The symbol will require a device ID such as “PLUG”. Connection points with associated text are not necessary. This symbol is primarily used to display the page and line number of its associated pins across the schematic. Make the circles in the plug large enough to hold cross reference data (circles 0.6 inch in diameter will hold 0.1 inch text).
6-67
Create Schematic Elements
A5 A1 A6 A2 A7
Plug
A3 A8 A4
Cross Ref Symbol Creation – Using the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function, create a cross reference symbol which will display Page / Line Number of child components. The symbol can be created using only 8 text variables, and no graphic entities. The variables are arranged so that the appropriate cross reference information will appear directly inside of the pin holes of the plug symbol. Be aware of the label origins and text size to ensure proper fit. Use the following symbol creation criteria:
Symbol Name: XPLUG Layout direction: Horizontal Description: Cross reference symbol for pin charts Symbol Group: TS6
The symbol will require no device ID, and no connection points with associated text. The symbol will only be used for cross referencing the pin symbol to the plug symbol. The reference point of this symbol should match the reference point of the plug symbol so the cross references will be positioned correctly. Use the Draw > Text function to enter “?1” through “?8”.
Cross Reference Symbol For Plug Symbol
?5 ?1 ?6 ?2 ?7 ?3 ?8 ?4
6-68
Create Schematic Elements
Pin Symbol Creation – Using the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function, create a child symbol (Pin) used for cross referencing. Use the following symbol creation criteria.
Symbol Name: PIN Layout Direction: Horizontal Description: Child symbol for pin charts Symbol Main Group: TS5
Give the pin symbol the same device ID tag used by the parent symbol (“PLUG”). For the first (right) connection point, place the connection point text next to the device ID and enter a “?” for the text. For the second connection point, place the text reference point anywhere and enter no text. The pin device ID is handled much like a terminal symbol; the device ID tag serves as the plug identifier, and the first connection point text serves as the pin number inside of the plug. Be aware of the label origin of the connection point text so that it does not run into the symbol.
Device ID
Connection Point Text For Connection Point 1
= Symbol Reference Point
PLUG
?
= Connection Points
Device Type Creation – Finally, create a device type relationship between the previously created plug symbol, pin symbol, and cross reference symbol using the Manage > Device Type > New/Modify function. Allow the relationship to contain 8 pin symbols, with associated connection point text calling out the pin number being used. Use the following criteria.
6-69
Create Schematic Elements
Device Type New/Modify Device Type Group
PLUGA
Relay, I/O, Plug
Symbol Name Parent Child 1 Child 2 Child 3 Child 4 Child 5 Child 6 Child 7 Child 8 Child 9 Cross Ref.
Search
PLUGA PIN PIN PIN PIN PIN PIN PIN PIN
Connection Points A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 Delta X 0.0000
XPLUG
Delta Y 0.0000
Absolute Position OK
Cancel
Help
Description...
Pin Chart Usage – You can test the pin chart on a drawing page (it must be online). Place the PLUGA plug symbol anywhere on a page. When prompted for the device name, enter PLUGA. Then place pin symbols elsewhere in the drawing, assigning the same device ID as the plug symbol and with connection point text of A1, A2, etc. The location of the pins will appear in the plug symbol as shown below.
6-70
Create Schematic Elements
Plug 418
6-71
Create Schematic Elements
Creating Form C Contacts There are two methods of creating and displaying Form C contacts in RSWire: 1.
Create a child symbol with three connection points
2.
Use two child symbols that share a common connection point designation
The first method reduces the likelihood of connection errors (e.g. different wires connected to the same connection point). The second method allows more flexibility in where the two contacts are placed in the schematic. However the system cannot determine that both common connections share the same wire number. The two methods are described in the following sections.
6-72
Create Schematic Elements
Method 1: Create a child symbol with three connection points This method allows creation of Form C contact symbols which are graphically shown as a single symbol with three connection points (see examples below). The three connection points are indicated by the 1, 2 and 3 designations. CR1
CR1 2
2 1
1
3
3
The steps to implement this method are:
Important
1.
Create the child symbol. See page 6-6 for the symbol creation procedure. When you define the symbol, select the PS2 symbol group (Child symbol with cross reference). Assign three connection points as indicated by the “x’s” in the above figure (remember the order in which you assign them). Assign a device ID tag that corresponds to the desired parent symbol (such as “CR” for a relay). Use the Manage > Symbol > Cross Ref. Position function to select a position for cross reference information.
2.
Create a device type that associates the Form C child symbol with the desired parent symbol. See page 6-89 for device type creation procedure. Enter three connection point designations for each Form C child symbol in the device (see example figure on next page). In the example, the device type has been named 2C, and the Form C child symbol name (the symbol created in step 1) is FORMC.
The order of the connection point designations entered in the Device Type New/Modify dialog box must match the order in which the connection points were defined when the child symbol was created.
6-73
Create Schematic Elements
Device Type New/Modify Device Type Group
2C
Search
Relay, I/O, Plug
Symbol Name Parent Child 1 Child 2 Child 3 Child 4 Child 5 Child 6 Child 7 Child 8 Child 9 Cross Ref.
CR FORMC FORMC
Q20
Connection Points 10 11 123 456
Delta X 0.0000
Delta Y 0.0000
Help
Description...
Absolute Position OK
Note
Cancel
In the example shown above, the cross reference symbol Q20 is specified. This symbol will serve to show the location of the Form C child symbols, but graphically it suggests that these are normally open contacts. You may wish to create a cross reference symbol that shows the Form C contact symbol. 3.
When you place the parent symbol in the schematic the software will ask for its device type. Use the device type created in step 2.
4.
When you place the Form C child symbols, assign the same device ID as the parent symbol.
Method 2: Use two child symbols that share a common connection point designation In this method you use two separate child symbols that share a common connection point designation. These two symbols are tied to the parent symbol through a device type definition and by assigning the same device ID as the parent symbol. This method allows you to place the two child symbols on separate lines or even separate pages of the project.
6-74
Create Schematic Elements
Parent Symbol CR112 CR 1 2 10
Child Symbol Common Connection Point Designation
11
114 CR 1 3
CR112 1
2
LT114
116
G
112
Child Symbol CR112
LT116
R 1
Important
3
When using this method, RSWire has no way of checking the potential of the common connection point. It might be possible in the schematic to have a different wire connected to the child symbol’s common connection point. The user must be aware of this possibility. The steps to implement this method are:
Important
1.
You can use existing child symbols or create custom Form C child symbols. If you create custom symbols, select the PS2 symbol group (Child symbol with cross reference). Assign a common connection point designation for the two symbols (in the previous figure “1” is the common designation.) See page 6-6 for the symbol creation procedure.
2.
Create a device type that associates the Form C child symbols with the desired parent symbol. See page 6-89 for device type creation procedure. In the example below the device type has been named FC2. The existing child symbols CRNO and CRNC are used in this example.
The order of the connection point designations entered in the Device Definition dialog box must match the order in which the connection points were defined when the child symbol was created. On most existing RSWire symbols the left connection point was defined first.
6-75
Create Schematic Elements
Device Type New/Modify Device Type Group
FC2
Search
Relay, I/O, Plug
Symbol Name Parent Child 1 Child 2 Child 3 Child 4 Child 5 Child 6 Child 7 Child 8 Child 9 Cross Ref.
CR FORMC FORMC
Connection Points 10 11 12 13
Delta X
Q11
0.0000
Delta Y 0.0000
Absolute Position OK
Cancel
Help
Description...
3.
When you place the parent symbol in the schematic the software will ask for its device type. Use the device type created in step 2.
4.
When you place the Form C child symbols, assign the same device ID as the parent symbol.
Recall that by using this second method with separate child symbols you have more flexibility in where the two contacts are placed in the schematic. But because you can place the symbols on separate lines the system cannot determine that both common connections share the same wire number.
6-76
Create Schematic Elements
Creating Signal Cross Reference Symbols The various kinds of signal cross reference symbols are described beginning on page 5-59. If desired, you can create custom signal cross reference symbols. There are outgoing signal cross references and incoming signal cross references. The symbol group that you choose when creating the symbol determines whether the reference is written on one line or multiple lines. The symbol group also determines whether or not the symbol is a star type signal cross reference. Symbol Group
Description
SG1
Incoming signal (1 line text)
SG2
Incoming signal (2 line text)
SG3
Outgoing signal (1 line text)
SG4
Outgoing signal (2 line text)
SG5
Incoming signal (star configuration, 1 line text)
SG6
Incoming signal (star configuration, 2 line text)
SG7
Outgoing signal (star configuration, same as SG8)
SG8
Outgoing signal (star configuration, same as SG7)
Symbol Creation Procedure – The following is the general procedure for creating a signal cross reference symbol. The selections and entries you make will vary depending on the specific type of symbol being created. 1.
Display a blank drawing page.
2.
Turn off the Online function (use Manage > Page > Modify function).
3.
Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function.
4.
In the Symbol Name field, enter the desired symbol name. Press the <Enter> key.
6-77
Create Schematic Elements
New/Modify Symbol Symbol Name:
List...
name
Preferred Direction Vertical
Horizontal
Snapmode: Nearest Endpoint Description: Signal Cross Reference Symbol Search Language Text... Symbol Group: SG_ _________ OK
Cancel
Help...
5.
Select Horizontal or Vertical for Preferred Direction (varies with symbol type).
6.
Select the Snapmode:Nearest Endpoint checkbox so that the symbol will automatically position itself on the end of a wire when placed.
7.
Enter the desired description in the Description field.
8.
In the Symbol Group field, select one of the SG symbol groups (described above), depending on whether the symbol is incoming or outgoing, star type or non–star type, one line notation or multi–line notation.
9.
Select the OK button to continue.
10. The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a symbol reference point at the intersection of two 0.5 inch grid lines. Zoom in for a better view of the work area.
6-78
Create Schematic Elements
11. Set the grid to 0.05 inch (1 mm). 12. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. When prompted to “Define Device ID position,” select the appropriate position. 13. In the Device ID Parameter dialog box, enter the desired device ID tag (such as “L”) in the Device ID field. Select an appropriate label origin. Select OK to continue. 14. Select the Manage > Symbol > Connection Point function. When prompted to “Locate connection point,” select the same point selected for the reference point. When prompted to “Define reference point of text,” select a point. In some cases you will need to delete the “?” in the Connection Point field of the Connection Point Parameters dialog box so that no connection point text is used. Connection point text is used only if a single reference is to appear at some point other than the device ID. Select OK to continue. 15. Draw the remainder of the symbol, (which in many cases may consist only of a single drawing line perpendicular to the wire). 16. For a star type outgoing signal with multiple references, enter an appropriate number of attribute texts. Use the Draw > Text function to place “?” characters. When prompted for attributes, select Attribute–Activate and enter a number in the 2000 series (2000 for the first reference, 2001 for the next one, etc.).
6-79
Create Schematic Elements
Text Attribute Definition
Select “Activate” checkbox
Symbol Text: ? I/O Attribute
Attribute Activate
Activate No:
Enter Attribute Number
2000
Address I/O Text
17. Save the symbol: select the Manage > Symbol > Save function and define a window around the symbol elements.
6-80
Create Schematic Elements
Create Macro A macro is a group of schematic elements that are stored as a group and can be placed in a drawing in one step. The macro can contain multiple symbols. If, for example, there is a particular circuit which is needed repeatedly, you can store it as a macro and place it quickly and easily. Symbols within the macro are recognized and automatically addressed by the software (and can be modified by the user) just as when individual symbols are placed in a drawing. Custom title blocks and drawing borders can be stored as macros and can be placed automatically on any new drawing. See page 4-14 for how to assign page macros. Macros can be created on a blank page, or a portion of an existing drawing can be stored as a macro. In this section, an overview of the macro creation procedure will be given first, followed by an example. Macro Creation Procedure – The drawing elements that will comprise the macro should be put down before selecting the Manage > Macro > New/Modify function. 1.
Select the Manage > Macro > New/Modify function.
Manage Macro New/Modify The New/Modify Macro dialog box will appear. New/Modify Macro Macro Name:
List...
Macro Description:
Search Language Text... Maintain Sequence of Terminal Numbers During Renumbering OK
Cancel
Help...
6-81
Create Schematic Elements
Note
2.
Enter macro name, description. Fields are provided for the macro name (up to 14 characters) and description. Use the List button to see a list of existing macro names. If you wish to include foreign language text strings in the description, select the Search Language Text button to select from the available strings.
3.
Does macro contain sequential terminals? There is a checkbox labeled Maintain Sequence of Terminal Numbers During Renumbering. This should be selected if the macro contains any terminals that must be treated as a group in the terminal plan (must not be split up in the terminal sorting process). If the checkbox is selected, the terminals in the macro will also be renumbered as a group if terminals are renumbered.
4.
Select the OK button to continue.
5.
Select base point. The software will then prompt you to Define Base Point. This is the reference point that determines where the macro will appear in relation to the point selected when it is placed in a drawing. (For macros such as title blocks that are automatically placed by RSWire in the same location, select a base point of x:0.000, y:0.000.)
Before the macro is saved you can change the base point with the Manage > Macro > Reference Point function. 6.
Note
Select objects. The software will prompt you to Select objects. Select objects by windowing them (or selecting individually) on the drawing page. Press the <Enter> key when all items have been selected. The Manage > Macro > Select Items function allows you to select additional items at any time before the macro is stored. Line numbers and other automatically placed elements will not be included in the macro.
If you wish to bring in an AutoCAD drawing use the Insert > Block > Insert function. Select an insertion point on the drawing page. It is not necessary to explode the inserted drawing elements unless there are items within blocks that you wish to change or remove. Explode the DWG elements with the Insert > Block > Explode function. 7.
Store the macro. Select the Manage > Macro > Save function to store the macro. The software will display the message “Macro stored.”
6-82
Create Schematic Elements
Note
Attribute text: if the macro is to contain symbols with attribute text (text that prompts you for a value when the symbol is placed), note the following. When the macro is created, this text must consist of an unanswered prompt, indicated by a “?” on the screen. If the attribute has already been assigned a value and a macro is then created, a new value will not be prompted when the macro is placed. Use the Modify > Symbol function to change this text back to a “?” before creating the macro. (You can also place the symbol again and press <Enter> when prompted for the attribute value.) You can cancel the macro creation procedure with the Manage > Macro > Cancel function. Macro Wire Numbers – Wire numbers can be stored as part of the macro. These will appear when the macro is placed. They will be altered by the system according to the following rules: 1.
If a numbered wire in the macro is connected to an existing wire that already has a wire number, the existing wire number will be used.
2.
If the macro contains a signal cross reference that already exists in the project, any existing wire number connected with that signal will be used.
3.
If any wire numbers in the macro duplicate wire numbers that already exist in the project, a “?” will be added to the duplicate wire numbers in the macro.
Create Title Block Macro RSWire users can create page title blocks which automatically appear on schematic drawing pages. A title block is created and stored as a macro. Variable text can be placed in the title block when it is created, and these texts are automatically replaced with project data (date, project name, page number, etc.) when the page is displayed. A default title block can be named in the New Project dialog box when a project is created (see page 3-6). This will be placed automatically on every page in the project. An appropriate title block can also be specified in the New Page dialog box when a drawing page is created (see page 4-14) which will override the default title block. Existing title blocks in a drawing can be changed using the Manage > Page > Modify function.
Manage Page Modify Title Block Creation Procedure – Use the following steps to create a title block macro:
6-83
Create Schematic Elements
1.
Open a blank drawing page (see page 4-11).
2.
Select Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function.
Tools Project Settings General Defaults 3.
The General Defaults dialog box will appear. De–select the Display Title Block checkbox and select the OK button.
4.
Now you can draw the elements of the title block. These will usually consist of drawing lines and text. If you wish to include an existing graphic element, such as a company logo, in the title block, it is best to do this before creating the rest of the title block. You may bring ACAD .dwg files using Insert > Block > Insert (AutoCAD text attributes will not be reorganized).
Insert Block Insert Typically, the title block consists of an area at the bottom of the page divided into boxes for different pieces of information. Use the Draw > Graphic > Line or Draw > Graphic > Box function to draw these areas. Do not use Wires or Logical Boxes when drawing these lines or boxes. Note
RSWire has a Frame function which automatically draws a single line border around the extents of the page format when the page is plotted. Therefore it is not necessary to make this frame part of the title block. The Format > Layer function can be used to turn off the frame layer, if desired. Use the Draw > Text function to label the various areas of the title block. Variable text which will be replaced with project data is entered as a question mark followed by the appropriate variable name (for example, ?page for page number). A list of available variables is given on page 6-87. The following figure shows the macro TITLED, one of the title blocks included with RSWire. Note the variable (?) text.
6-84
Create Schematic Elements
Title block macro TITLED PROJECT:
DATE DRAWN BY
CKD BY
NAME
?pgdescr02?pgdescr04
?pgdescr03 ?pgdescr05
?addr01 ?addr02 ?addr03 ?addr04 ?addr05
?project ?title01
DRAWING–NO.:
?title03 JOB–NO.:
?title02 SHEET
PAGE DESCRIPTION:
?pgdescr01
?page of ?prpgno
?pgdescr18
5.
Select the Manage > Macro > New/Modify function (see page 6-81).
6.
Enter an appropriate name and description for the macro in the New/Modify Macro dialog box. Select OK.
7.
The software will prompt you to Define Base Point. The base point of the title block macro must be at the origin (0.0000, 0.0000) of the page XY coordinate system, i.e. at the bottom left corner. Therefore, when prompted for a base point, you can either enter these coordinates on the command line or you can position the cursor at the 0.0000, 0.0000 point (coordinates are displayed above the drawing area) and press the left mouse button.
8.
When the block is drawn as desired, you must select all the items to be included in the macro. Use the Manage > Macro > Select Items function. The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Select objects by windowing them (or selecting individually) on the drawing page. (Or enter ALL in the Command Line.)
9.
The software will highlight all of the selected objects. Click the right mouse button, or press the <Enter> key, to confirm the selected objects are grouped.
10. Use the Save function on the Manage > Macro submenu to store the macro. The software will display the message “Macro was stored.” 11. After the macro is stored, delete the title block from your page by selecting the Manage > Page > Clear function. 12. To add the title block to your current project: Select Manage > Project > Modify. Add the title block macro name to the Title Block Macro field. To add the title block to a single page: Display the page and select Manage > Page > Modify. Add the macro name to the Title Block field.
6-85
Create Schematic Elements
Note
6-86
The above example shows the variables ?addr01, ?addr02, etc., each of which represents one line of the address file. See page 7-17 for more information on the address file. Using these variables instead of a fixed address allows you to change the address without editing the title block macro.
Create Schematic Elements
Available Title Block Variables: Project–Related Variables (File > New > Project function) Variable: ?project ?install ?location ?page ?prpgno ?inpgno ?nextpgfl ?nextpgno ?plotdate ?plottime ?prdescr01 ?prdescr02 ?prdescr03 etc. ?prdescr09 ?title01 ?title02 ?title03 etc. ?title20
Description: Current Project Current Installation Current Location Current Page Total drawing pages in project Total drawing pages in installation Next Page Flag: + following pages - no more pages Next page number in current installation Displays current date when page is created or plotted Displays current time when page is created or plotted Project description 1 (Comment") Project description 2 Project description 3 Project description09 Project title data 01 (Description") Project title data 02 (Job Number") Project title data 03 (Drawing Number") Project title data 20
6-87
Create Schematic Elements
Address File Variables (enter using Tools > System Settings > Address File) Variable:
Description:
?addr01
Address file: line 01
?addr02
Address file: line 02
?addr03 etc. ?addr20
Address file: line 03 Address file: line 20
Page–Related Variables (File > New > Page function) Variable:
?pgdescr02
Page description 1 (File > New > Page, Parameter" button) Page description 2 - date
?pgdescr03
Page description 3
?pgdescr01
?pgdescr04 etc. ?pgdescr100
6-88
Description:
Page description 4 - user name Page description 100
Create Schematic Elements
Create Device Type The Manage > Device Type function is used to create a device type. When you place a parent symbol on a drawing, the software will ask for its device type. A device type specifies a combination of parent symbol, child symbol(s) and cross reference symbol. This allows RSWire to know which child symbols are associated with a parent symbol and which cross reference symbol to place next to the parent symbol. Once RSWire knows the device type, it can also perform error–checking functions by keeping track of how many of the available child symbols have been used. For more information on parent and child symbols, see page 5-25. A number of device types are provided with the software. These can be listed with the Reports > Libraries > Device Type Full (or Device Brief) function. You may also wish to create your own, custom device types. For this, use the Manage > Device Type > New/Modify function. (An example device is created on page 6-34.) Select:
Manage Device Type New/Modify The following Device Type New/Modify dialog box will appear.
6-89
Create Schematic Elements
Device Type New/Modify Device Type Group
Search
Relay, I/O, Plug
Symbol Name
Connection Points
Parent Child 1 Child 2 Child 3 Child 4 Child 5 Child 6 Child 7 Child 8 Child 9 Delta X
Cross Ref.
0.0000
Delta Y 0.0000
Absolute Position OK
Cancel
Help
Description...
The following fields are provided: Device Type – Enter a name for the device type up to 14 characters long. Press the <Enter> key. Select the Search button to see a list of existing device types. Group – Two choices are available: Relay,I/O,Plug and Cable. Choose Cable when defining a cable device type and Relay,I/O,Plug for all other device types. Note
You must select a group for the device type before entering a description (see next paragraph). Failure to follow this order of entry may result in the device type not appearing on the device type list. Description – This button allows a description of the device to be entered which will appear on device listings. Three description fields are available. If you wish to use foreign language text strings in the descriptions, select the Search Language Text button to select from the available strings. If a Cable device group was selected, three additional fields will be accessible which allow the user to enter a cable type description, gauge and a part number.
6-90
Create Schematic Elements
Device Type Description Description Descr. 1 Descr. 2 Descr. 3
Search Language Text... Cable Cable Type Gauge Part No.
OK
Cancel
Help...
Parent Symbol Name – Enter the symbol name of the parent symbol of the device. Child 1, 2, etc. – Enter the names of child symbols in the order in which they will be used in the cross reference symbol (i.e., the first child corresponds to the “?1” text in the cross reference symbol, the second child corresponds to “?2”, etc.). 256 Child fields are available. Connection Points – Optional connection point text can be entered in these fields which will overwrite any connection point text that was specified when the parent or child symbol was created. Separate each connection point text with a space. If more than two texts are entered, they will all be displayed when the symbol is placed, and the unwanted texts can be deleted at that time. Cross Ref. – Enter the name of the cross reference symbol that will hold the cross reference information for the parent/child symbols. Delta X, Delta Y – The values entered in these fields determine where the cross reference symbol will appear on the drawing in relation to the parent symbol. Refer to the following illustration. (If the Absolute Position checkbox is selected, the Y measurement will be from the drawing origin point: 0.0, 0.0.) The distances entered are between the reference point of the parent symbol and the reference point of the cross reference symbol.
6-91
Create Schematic Elements
dx=0 mm
dx=1.50”
dy=–0.5” dy=75 mm
Bottom of Page JIC Distance Values
IEC Distance Values
Absolute Position – Determines whether the Delta Y field is measured from the drawing origin (0.0, 0.0) or from the reference point of the parent symbol. Select the checkbox to measure from the drawing origin. This setting is typically used for IEC format drawings where the cross references appear in a row below the parent symbols. Once the Device Type New/Modify dialog box has been filled out, select the OK button to complete the creation of the device type.
6-92
Create Schematic Elements
Delete, Copy, Rename for Symbols, Macros, and Devices Existing symbols, macros, and devices can be deleted, copied and renamed in the RSWire database by using the appropriate Manage submenu function.
Manage Symbol Delete Copy Rename The above figure shows a portion of the Manage > Symbol submenu. Similar submenus are provided for the Manage > Macro and Manage > Device Type functions.
Delete Symbol, Macro, or Device You can delete a symbol, macro or device to remove it from the RSWire database, making it unavailable for use. Symbols – If you delete a symbol from the database, it will not be available for placing in new drawings and the system will not be able to display the symbol when existing drawings containing the system are loaded. When you read such a page the system will display the message “Warning: Symbol not in the catalog” and will include the name of the missing symbol. When the page is displayed, the symbol will not appear, although the device ID will remain. Macros – If you delete a macro from the database, it will not be available for placing in new drawings. In most cases, a page containing a deleted macro will still display the macro when the page is loaded. However title block macros and ladder line number macros will not appear if they have been deleted from the database. Device Types – If you delete a device type from the database, it will not be available for new drawings. If you read a page containing a device type that has been deleted or is otherwise not in the database, the system will display a message “Error while reading project data. Device not defined.” It will then list the parent and child symbols that are part of the device in question.
6-93
Create Schematic Elements
To delete a symbol, macro, or device from the RSWire database: 1.
Select the appropriate Delete function.
Manage Symbol Delete or
Manage Macro Delete
or Manage Device Type Delete
2.
The Delete dialog box will appear. In the Name field, enter the name of the symbol, macro, or device you wish to delete from the database. Select the Search button to display a list of symbols, macros, or devices. Select the OK button to delete the selected item. Delete Symbol
Symbol Delete or Macro Delete or Device Delete
Symbol Name: Search OK
Note
6-94
Cancel
Help...
If you get the message “No catalog loaded” when attempting to delete a symbol, it indicates that no symbol catalogs are currently open. To open the catalog, load (read) a drawing page that contains at least one symbol from the desired symbol catalog.
Create Schematic Elements
Copy Symbol, Macro, or Device You can copy existing symbols, macros, and devices, assigning a different name to the copy. This is useful if you wish to create a new symbol, macro, or device type that is similar to an existing one. You can modify the copy as desired instead of creating the new symbol, macro, or device from scratch. See page 6-97. To copy a symbol, macro, or device in the RSWire database: 1.
Select the appropriate Copy function.
Manage Symbol Copy or
Manage Macro Copy
or
Manage Device Type Copy
2.
The Copy dialog box will appear (Macro Copy dialog box shown). Copy Macro Macro Name:
To Macro Name: Search OK
Note
Cancel
Help...
3.
Enter the existing symbol, macro, or device type name in the left Name field. (If you wish to see a list of existing items, use the Search button to display a list which can be selected from.)
4.
Enter the name the copy is to have in the To Name field on the right.
5.
Select the OK button to create copy.
If you get the message “No catalog loaded” when attempting to copy a symbol, it indicates that no symbol catalogs are currently open. To open the catalog, load (read) a drawing page that contains at least one symbol from the desired symbol catalog.
6-95
Create Schematic Elements
Rename Symbol, Macro, or Device You can rename existing symbols, macros, and devices, assigning a different name to the original item. To rename a symbol, macro, or device in the RSWire database: 1.
Select the appropriate Rename function.
Manage Symbol Rename or
Manage Macro Rename
or
Manage Device Type Rename
2.
The Rename dialog box will appear (Device Rename dialog box shown). Device Type Rename
Device Name:
To Device Name: Search OK
Note
6-96
Cancel
Help...
3.
Enter the existing symbol, macro, or device type name in the left Name field. (If you wish to see a list of existing items, use the Search button to display a list which can be selected from.)
4.
Enter the new name the item is to have in the To Name field on the right.
5.
Select the OK button to rename the item.
If you get the message “No catalog loaded” when attempting to rename a symbol, it indicates that no symbol catalogs are currently open. To open the catalog, load (read) a drawing page that contains at least one symbol from the desired symbol catalog.
Create Schematic Elements
Modify Symbol, Macro, or Device This section describes how to change a symbol, macro or device type as it is stored in the catalog, in other words, changing its basic definition in the software. (To change a single use of a symbol in a drawing use the Modify > Symbol function.) To Modify an Existing Symbol: 1.
Display a blank, offline page.
2.
Use the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function and enter the name of the existing symbol. Press the <Enter> key.
3.
The software will prompt you that it already exists and ask if you wish to modify it. Select Yes to modify.
4.
Make changes (if any) in the New/Modify Symbol dialog box and select OK.
5.
The software will prompt you to select a reference point in the drawing for the symbol. Select a point. If the symbol you have chosen to modify exists in the first symbol catalog in the symbol catalog search path, it will appear automatically at the selected reference point. If no symbol appears, it probably exists in a different catalog. If so you must place the symbol in the drawing using the Insert > Symbol by Name or Insert > Select Icon function. (The symbol catalog path can be found in the RS\WORK\ECSCAD.CFG file.
6.
Perform the desired modifications. To change the symbol’s reference point, device ID, connection points, or cross reference position, use the appropriate function in the Manage > Symbol submenu.
7.
Store the symbol to save the changes. (Use the Manage > Symbol > Save function and define the area to be included in the symbol.)
6-97
Create Schematic Elements
To Modify an Existing Macro:
6-98
1.
Use the Manage > Macro > New/Modify function and enter the name of the existing macro. Select OK.
2.
The software will prompt you that it already exists and ask if you wish to overwrite it. Select Yes followed by OK to modify.
3.
The software will prompt you to select a base point (reference point). Select any point. You can change it later.
4.
The software will prompt you to select objects. At this point press the <Esc> key to escape from the macro creation process. The software will prompt “Selected item not valid.” Select OK to continue.
5.
Place the existing macro on the page. a.
Select the Insert > Macro By Name function. Enter the macro name in the Name field and select OK.
b.
The macro will appear at the cursor. Click the left mouse button to place the macro in the drawing.
c.
Select the Accept All button to insert device IDs in the macro.
6.
Perform the desired modifications on the macro.
7.
Select the items to be included in the macro. (Use the Manage > Macro > Select Items function and select the objects. Press <Enter> when all objects have been selected.)
8.
Select a reference point for the macro. (Use the Manage > Macro > Reference Point function and select the desired reference point.)
9.
Store the macro. (Use the Manage > Macro > Save function.)
Create Schematic Elements
To Modify an Existing Device Type: 1.
Use the Manage > Device Type > New/Modify function and enter the name of the existing device type in the Device Type field. Press the <Enter> key.
2.
The software will prompt you that the device type already exists and ask if you wish to modify it. Select OK to modify.
3.
Perform the desired modifications in the Device Type New/Modify dialog box and select the OK button to save the changes.
6-99
Create Schematic Elements
Multiline Styles Multilines are wires consisting of multiple parallel elements. Multiline wires are drawn with the Draw > Wire > Multiline function (or using the Multiline button on the toolbar). Multilines can have various combinations of solid, dashed and dotted lines in various colors. These combinations are called multiline styles. You can select from the available multiline styles using the Format > Multiline Style function.
Format Multiline Style The Multiline Styles dialog box will appear. Multiline Styles Multiline Style Current:
3_PHASE
Name:
3_PHASE
Description:
L1,L2,L3
Load...
Save...
Add
Rename
Element Properties... Multiline Properties...
OK
Cancel
Help...
The following fields and functions are available: Current – This field displays and sets the current multiline style. Select a name from the list to make it current. If there are multiple styles, the name of the current style is selected.
6-100
Create Schematic Elements
Name – This field names a new multiline style or renames one. The element and multiline properties are unavailable until you enter a new name and make it current by choosing Add. Enter a name and choose Add, and then save the multiline style to a multiline library (MLN) file. The software saves the definition in the MLN file you specify. If you specify an MLN file that already exists, the new style definition is added to the file and existing definitions are not erased. The default file name is pr/menu/mnu/acad.mln. To rename a style, enter a name and choose Rename. You cannot rename, modify, or delete the default STANDARD multiline style. To make a copy of the current style, enter a name and then choose Save. Multiline style names adhere to the naming conventions for named objects. Description – This field allows you to enter a description for a multiline style. Enter up to 255 characters, including spaces. Load – This button displays the Load Multiline Styles dialog box, in which you can load multiline styles from a specified MLN file. Save – This button saves or copies a multiline style. Enter a name and then choose Save. Add – This button adds the multiline style in the Name field to the Current list. Rename – This button renames a multiline style. Enter a name and then select Rename. Element Properties – This button displays the Element Properties dialog box. You cannot edit the element properties of an existing multiline style. Here you can set the properties, such as the number, offset, color, and linetype, of new and existing multiline elements. Multiline Properties – Displays the Multiline Properties dialog box. Here you can set multiline properties, such as the display of segment joints, the start and end caps and their angle, and the background color.
6-101
Create Schematic Elements
Element Properties Select the Element Properties button in the Multiline Styles dialog box. Element Properties Elements:
Add
Offset
Color
Ltype
2.0 1.5 1.0
BYLAYER BYLAYER BYLAYER
CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS
Delete
Offset
Color...
BYLAYER
Linetype...
CONTINUOUS OK
Cancel
2.000
Help...
Elements – displays the elements in the current multiline style. Each line element in the style is defined by its offset from the multiline origin (0.0), color and linetype. The line elements are always displayed in descending order of their offsets. Add – Select this button to add a new line element to the multiline style. Delete – Select this button to delete a line element from the multiline style. Offset – This field specifies the offset of the line element in the multiline style. Color – Select this button display and set the color of line elements in the multiline style. The software will display the Select Color dialog box. Linetype – Select this button to display and set the linetype for line elements in the multiline style.
6-102
Create Schematic Elements
Multiline Properties Select the Multiline Properties button in the Multiline Styles dialog box. Multiline Properties Display joints Caps Start
End
Line Outer arc Inner arcs Angle
90.000
90.000
Fill On
BYBLOCK
Color...
OK
Cancel
Help...
Display joints – Controls the display of the joints at the vertices of each multiline segment. A joint is also known as a miter. Joints typically would not be used for wires. Caps – These functions control the start and end caps of the multiline. Line – Creates a straight line across each end of the multiline. Outer arc – Creates an arc between the outermost elements of the multiline. Inner arcs – Creates an arc between pairs of inner elements. If there’s an odd number of elements, the center line is unconnected. For example, if there are 6 elements, inner arcs connect elements 2 and 5 and elements 3 and 4. If there are 7 elements, inner arcs connect elements 2 and 6 and elements 3 and 5. Element 4 is left unconnected. Angle – Specifies the angle of the end caps.
6-103
Create Schematic Elements
Fill – These functions control the background fill of the multiline. On – Turns background fill on. Color – Displays and sets the color of the background fill. The software will display the Select Color dialog box. You can also enter a color name or number in the box.
6-104
Settings
7 Settings There are a variety of parameters that can be set that determine how RSWireTM Designer will operate. The functions that allow these settings to be made are found mainly in the Tools and Format pulldown menus. The following sections are included:
System Settings Report Settings Reports: Description Files Printer Configuration Command Protection Navigator Display Settings Grid Settings Address Files Project Settings General Defaults Page Control Functions Page Formats Programmable Controller Settings Configuration: Terminal and Plug IDs Device ID Style Object Defaults Terminal/Plug Plan Configuration Terminal Plan Configuration Pin–Plug Plan Configuration Object Styles Text Styles Dimension Styles Preferences
7-1
Settings
System Settings Grid Settings The Tools > System Settings > Grid Settings function defines the grid size of the drawing. The size of the drawing grid determines how drawing elements are positioned and where connections can be made. When placed on the drawing, the reference points of symbols, text, lines, etc., snap to the nearest grid line. To set the grid size, select:
Tools System Settings Grid Settings The Grid Settings dialog box will appear. System Settings Grid Settings
Default Settings
Report Settings
Format Files
Printer Configura
Command Protection
Current Value:
X
Y
0.0500
0.0500
0.0100
0.0100
0.1250
0.1250
0.2500
0.2500
0.5000
0.5000
1.0000
1.0000
2.0000
2.0000
0.0500
0.0500
OK
7-2
Cancel
Save
Help...
Settings
Note
Values shown in inches. This dialog box lists a group of fields for X and Y values from which the user may choose (these values represent the current drawing units – inches or millimeters). The user can select these values by placing the cursor and pressing the <Enter> key. Alternately, the user can select a radio button beside the desired value to select both x and y values. The selected value will then appear in the Current Value field. Select the OK button to put the newly selected values into effect. The user can also enter new grid values in any of the X and Y fields. These values can then be selected as described above. Select the Save button to save these newly entered values for future work sessions.
Important
(AutoCAD R14 Add–on version only) Do not use a grid value having units smaller than thousandths of an inch (.001 inch). Use of such a grid value can result in unrecognized connections in the schematic drawings.
7-3
Settings
Default Settings The Tools > System Settings > Default Settings function allows several settings to be made. System Settings Grid Settings
Default Settings
Printer Configuration
Command Protectio
General System Settings Default to Uppercase
Dialog Language
OK
Cancel
Save
Help...
Symbol and macro names in RSWire are case sensitive – they must be entered exactly as they exist in the symbol catalog. When you select the Default to Uppercase checkbox, any symbol or macro names you enter will be converted to uppercase letters, which is how the symbols provided with the software are named. The Dialog Language section, allows you to select the language used for dialog boxes, menus, text attributes, and help screens. The choices are German, English, French, Italian and Spanish. Select the Save button to save your settings for future work sessions. Select the OK button to load the new settings. Note
7-4
To change back to English from another language, the System Settings function is located under the Format menu.
Settings
Report Settings The Tools > System Settings > Report Settings function displays a dialog box that allows a number of list related parameters to be set. These settings determine how the lists will be formatted and handled by the system.
Tools System Settings Report Settings
System Settings Report Settings
Filter
OFF
Format Files
Printer Configuration
Sort
Command Protection
Output
Screen
OFF
Printer File ON
Project
ON
Interactive
Graphic Output
OK
Cancel
Save
Help...
7-5
Settings
The following parameters can be set: Filter – When On is selected, lists can be filtered according to wildcard strings entered by the user when the list is generated. For example, when Filter is On and the symbol list function is selected, a dialog box with the following fields will appear: Symbol:
=
*
Description:
=
*
By entering “P*” in the Symbol field, the list will contain only those symbols whose names begin with P. By entering “*NC*” only those symbols containing NC will be listed. An entry of “*” will include all information. Similarly, the Description field can also be used to filter the list. When the Filter radio button is Off, no filtering is performed. Sort – When On is selected, lists will be sorted by selected fields according to sort variables in the list generator file (the format of each list is determined by a list generator file located in the RS\SYSCON\LIST directory). When Off is selected, no sorting is performed. See page 14-11. Output – These five radio buttons allow you to select the list output medium. Selecting Screen will cause the list to be displayed on the screen. Printer will send the list to the currently active LPT port (which may be different than the default AutoCAD printer). Selecting File will cause the list to be stored as a text file in the RS\TMP subdirectory. Selecting Project will activate the Text On Drawing function which allows the list to be placed on a drawing page (see page 5-88). Selecting the Interactive option will cause the software to prompt you for the output type (screen, printer, file, project) whenever you generate a report. This removes the need to make the output setting before you generate the report. Graphic Output – This checkbox allows extended IBM graphic characters in the lists for borders and other purposes. When the Graphic Output checkbox is turned off these characters are translated to pipes and dashes for use where the extended graphic characters are not supported. Select the Save button to save the current settings for future work sessions.
7-6
Settings
Report Format Files The Tools > System Settings > Reports: Description Files function assigns a file to either a report or list function. If you create a custom list generator file you must assign this file to the appropriate report or list function within RSWire. Select:
Tools System Settings Reports: Description Files The following dialog box appears: System Settings Report Settings
Reports: Description Files
Printer Configuration
Command Protec
List Name
File Name
Printer
Conn. List I/O List Conn. List Wire Diagram List Conn. List Wire Label List Conn. List Wiring List Fld. Wire Cable + Wire List Fld. Wire Cable List Fld. Wire Terminal List Fld. Wire Terminal Strip List Gen. Info Device Types [Brief] Gen. Info Device Types [Detailed] Gen. Info Macro Directory Gen. Info Page Formats
PLC.LST WIREDG.LST WIRELAB.LST WIRE.LST FLDWIRE.LST CABLE.LST TERM.LST TSTRIP.LST DEVICE2.LST DEVICE1.LST MACRO.LST FORMAT.LST
Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default
Conn. List I/O List
PLC.LST
Printer
Default
1
2
3
OK
4
Cancel
5
Save
File
Help...
7-7
Settings
The following parameters can be set: List Name, File Name, and Printer – This is a description of available reports listed in alphabetical order by name of report. A corresponding file name for each report as well as the defined printer for the report is also listed. (List Name/File) – When you select a report name from the upper list, this field displays the name of the operator file that will be used to print the selected (highlighted) list. If you wish to use a different file to generate the selected list, you can enter the filename in this field. Note
The name of this field will change, depending on which list is selected. Printer – These radio buttons select to which printer a file will print. Choose from a default printer or one of five printers listed in the Printer Configuration dialog box. Each report can be defined to go to a print file for printing at a later time.
7-8
Settings
Printer Configuration Use the Tools > System Settings > Printer Configuration tab to select the printer to be used for lists and other printed information. Select:
Tools System Settings Printer Configuration The following dialog box appears: System Settings Report Settings
Reports: Description Files
Printer
Printer Configuration
Symbol Set
Lines
Options
1.
Printer
60
850
ISO
2.
Printer
60
850
ISO
3.
Printer
60
850
ISO
4.
Printer
60
850
ISO
Printer
60
850
ISO
60
850
ISO
5. File
Command Protec
Default Printer
1
2
3
4
OK
Cancel
5
Save
File
Help...
7-9
Settings
The following parameters can be set: The Printer column lists the available printer drivers. These are batch files located in the RS\WORK directory. See page 9-3 for more information. The Lines column allows the number of lines per page to be specified for each printer. This applies to list outputs. The Symbol Set area allows you to select standard ASCII character set (850) or ISO (International Standards Organization) foreign language symbol sets. If you select ISO certain inappropriate characters may appear in lists generated using the default format files supplied with RSWire. Use the Options column to enter appropriate options for each printer. The Default Printer area allows one of the printer drivers to be selected as the default printer. Selecting File will send print outputs to file in the RS\TMP directory. Select the Save button to save the printer settings for future work sessions. Select the Cancel button to quit, discard all changes and exit the dialog box. Select OK to exit the printer configuration dialog box.
7-10
Settings
Command Protection The Tools > System Settings > Command Protection tab allows password protection for access to functions. Functions can be assigned to one of three security categories: Unprotected (level 0), Constructor (level 1) or Administrator (level 2). This allows functions to be available or unavailable to different categories of users. Select:
Tools System Settings Command Protection The following dialog box appears. System Settings Command Protection
Navigator
Display Settings
Grid Settings
Address Files
Passwords
Level 2 [Administrator]:
Change
Level 1 [User]:
Change
Level
Command
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1
ACAD_INI AD_DWG BACKUP BROWSE CHECK_PARENT CHECK_SIGNAL CIR_2POINT CIR_3POINT CIR_DIA CIR_RAD CIR_TTR CMD_DISPATCH CONF_LANGUAGE CONF_LAYER
OK
Cancel
Save
Help...
7-11
Settings
When the user begins a work session, all unprotected commands are available. With the first attempt to access a level 1 command, the software will prompt for a password. Entering the level 1 password gives access to all level 0 and level 1 commands for the remainder of the session. With the first attempt to use a level 2 command the software will prompt for a level 2 password which will give access to all level 0, 1 and 2 commands for the remainder of the session. Access to the command level and the password function can also be password protected. Enter the password in the appropriate field making certain that it is spelled correctly. Note
One password is used for all same level access. To password protect a command, click on that command in the dialog box. With each click, the software will toggle through the 0–2 levels of password protection. Select level 0 for no password protection. Select level 1 for Constructor password access. Select level 2 for Administrator level password access. Select the Change button to revise an existing password. Select Cancel to discard any changes and exit the dialog box. If you wish to use the same settings for future work sessions, select the Save button to store the settings. Select the OK button if you only wish to load the settings for the current sessions. The settings are save in the cp.cfg file located in the RS\SYSCON\SYSTEM directory. It is recommended that the cp.cfg file be made read–only to ensure that users cannot change the settings.
7-12
Settings
Navigator The Tools > System Settings > Navigator tab allows you to set the zoom parameters that are used in conjunction with the Navigator function. Type the percentage of zoom (0–100) in the text box or click and drag the slide bar. The percentage of zoom will appear in the text box as you move the slide bar. Smaller percentage values will result in a closer zoom view. Zoom Off – This checkbox activates the default settings for the Navigator Zoom function. When checkbox is not selected, the zoom function is on. When the checkbox is selected, the zoom function is off. Select:
Tools System Settings Navigator The following dialog box appears. System Settings Command Protection
Navigator
Display Settings
Grid Settings
Address Files
Parameter
Zoom Off
Zoom
0
Percent
OK
Cancel
Save
Help...
7-13
Settings
When the desired settings have been made, select the OK button to load them for the current sessions only and exit the dialog box. If you wish to use the same settings for future work sessions, select the Save button to store the settings. Select Cancel to discard any changes and exit the dialog box.
7-14
Settings
Display Settings The Tools > System Settings > Display Settings function allows you to select whether or not the screen display will indicate symbol connection points, reference points, and part numbers. To set the display settings, select:
Tools System Settings Display Settings The following dialog box will appear: System Settings Command Protection
Navigator
Display Settings
Grid Settings
Address Files
All On Display Connection Points Display Reference Points Display Part Numbers Display Wire Numbers Display Hidden Symbols [Cable...] All Off
OK
Cancel
Save
Help...
7-15
Settings
The following check boxes are available: All On – Display connection points, reference points, part numbers, and wire numbers for symbols on the drawing screen. Display Connection Points – Display symbol connection points on the drawing screen (marked by a green “X”). Display Reference Points – Display symbol reference points on the drawing screen (marked by an inverted red triangle). Display Part Numbers – Display symbol part numbers on drawing screen. Display Wire Numbers – Display wire numbers on drawing screen. Display Hidden Symbols (Cable...) – Display invisible symbols on the drawing screen. For example, when you create a cable in the terminal plan editor, a graphic representing the cable is added to the schematic page. This graphic is suppressed unless this checkbox is selected. All Off – Do not display connection points, reference points, part numbers, wire numbers, and invisible symbols on the drawing screen. When the desired settings have been made, select the OK button to load them for the current sessions only and exit the dialog box. If you wish to use the same settings for future work sessions, select the Save button to store the settings. Select Cancel to discard any changes and exit the dialog box.
7-16
Settings
Address File The Tools > System Settings > Address File tab allows you to create or edit a text file containing information such as the user’s street address which the system can automatically place on drawings, list headings, and title blocks. (In the New Project dialog box there is a Address field for specifying an address file name to be used in the project.) Select:
Tools System Settings Address File The following dialog box appears. System Settings Command Protection
Navigator
Display Settings
Grid Settings
Address File
File Name
Delete Title Block-Logo
Search...
File Name: X-Coord:
Y-Coord:
Edit Area
Next
OK
Previous
Cancel
Save
Help...
7-17
Settings
The following parameters can be set: The right File name field allows you to select from an existing list of address files. The left File name field allows you to enter the name of a new address file. These files must exist in the RS\DB\CUSTOM directory. When a file name is entered or selected, the contents of that file will appear in the Edit Area fields. There are 20 fields, each of which holds 60 characters. Five fields are displayed at a time. Use the Next and Previous buttons to move through the groups of fields. The Title Block–Logo fields allow you to specify a DWG file (such as a logo) to be placed automatically in the title block. X and Y positions can be set for the logo. The logo .DWG file must exist in the RS\WORK directory. Use the Save button to save any newly entered or edited information for future work sessions. Use the Delete button to delete the currently selected address file. Use the Cancel button to exit the Address File dialog box. Select OK to exit the address files dialog box. Note
7-18
On title blocks, if you wish the currently selected address file to be inserted in the title block automatically, you must create the title block with the variables ?addr01, ?addr02, etc., in the position where the address is to appear. Each variable represents one line of the address file. See page 6-83, create title block macro.
Settings
Project Settings General Defaults Note
If you use the Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function to change units from inches to millimeters (or vice versa) during a work session, the on–screen markings for symbol reference points, connection points, etc., may appear either too large or too small. To avoid this, after selecting the units select the Save button, exit from RSWire and then restart RSWire. Select:
Tools Project Settings General Defaults The following dialog box appears.
7-19
Settings
Project Settings Page Control Functions
General Defaults
Page Formats Programmable Controller Settings Configuration: Terminal a
User Name
USER
Digits in Line Numbers
2
Default Page Format
D-2COL
Date Format
MM/DD/YY
Display Title Block Display Grid Units=Inch Prompt For Device ID Prompt For Conn. Point Text Part Number Check
Cross Ref. Display Format IEC
JIC
Device ID to Cross Ref. Offset
3.0000
Use Text Height from Project Parameters Use Text Style from Project Parameters Prompt For Page Store Ladder Without Page Numbers
Zone Cross Ref. Display Format Line Number Signal Cross Ref. Display Format DevID/<=Inst/>Page.Linenumber
Diagonal Wire Display Cross Ref. at Child Create Connection List When Saving Page Wire Number Display
OK
7-20
Cancel
Normal
Save
Help...
Settings
The following parameters can be set: User Name – This field allows you to change the default name that appears in the page title block. Changing this entry does not affect existing pages, only pages created after the change. Any entry made here is automatically placed in the fourth page parameter field when a new page is created. Digits in Line Numbering – Determines number of digits used in ladder diagram line numbers. Note
This value does not include page number if page number is part of the line number. Default Page Format – Determines the default page format name that will be prompted in the New Page dialog box when a new drawing page is created. Date Format – Determines the default format for the dates that appear in the title block of drawing pages. Specify the order of day, month and year by using “DD” for day, “MM” for month and “YY” or “YYYY” for year. Example: MM/DD/YYYY Cross Ref. Display Format – Selects IEC or JIC style cross reference. Device ID to Cross Ref. Offset – Sets the distance between the device ID and the cross reference text. When device IDs with sequential numbers are used (rather than page and line numbers), or when the Display Cross Ref. at Child checkbox described below is set, RSWire adds cross reference information at child symbols to indicate where the parent symbol is located. This field is used to adjust the vertical position of the cross reference text. The value entered does not represent drawing units; it is a factor that is multiplied with the cross reference character size. It affects all relevant symbols in the project.
CR1
Device ID Cross Reference Text
104
You can adjust the position of cross references at individual child symbols using the Modify > Symbol function (Text Position checkbox). The cross reference box at individual parent symbols can be positioned with the Modify > Move function.
7-21
Settings
Zone Cross Ref. Display Format – This pull–down list allows you to select from the following cross reference types:
Line Number (no zones) Line/Zone Number (example 105A) Zone/Line Number (example: A105)
Cross referencing in RSWire can be configured to indicate page/line number, zones, or a combination of the two. Zones are areas you define to divide a page into columns. Each zone has a letter name (A, B, C, etc.). A zone cross reference will indicate the zone where the reference point of a given item is located. The cross referencing in the figure below indicates that the relay coil is located in zone B (line 102) while the contact is in zone A (line 105). For zone cross referencing to work you must have page formats in which the zones have been defined (see page 7-36). A
B
101
C
Zones
CR1
102 105A
103 104
CR1
105 106
102B
Signal Cross Ref. Display Format – Here the user can select from a list signal cross reference formats by selecting the down arrow button. The following formats are available (see page 5-60 for more information): DevID/<=Inst/>Page.Linenumber DevID=Inst/Page.Linenumber DevID/Page.Linenumber DevID/<=Inst/>Page Linenumber <=Inst/>Page Linenumber Page^Linenumber (Do not use with star type references) <=Inst/>Page.Linenumber Note
Where you see the character string <=Inst/> in the above format names it means the installation name will be included in the cross reference only if it differs from the installation where the cross reference symbol is located. Display Title Block – Determines whether or not the page title block is visible on the screen. If the checkbox is selected, the title block will be displayed.
7-22
Settings
Display Grid – Determines whether or not the grid appears on the drawing screen. Units=Inch – Determines the default units of measurement (length) used in drawings. If the checkbox is selected, the units are inches. If the checkbox is not selected, millimeters are the units. Changing this entry does not affect existing pages, only pages created after the change. Note
If you change units during a work session, the on–screen markings for symbol reference points, connection points, etc., may appear either too large or too small. To avoid this, after selecting the units select the Save button in the General Defaults dialog box, exit from RSWire then restart RSWire. Prompt For Device ID – This checkbox determines whether or not the system will prompt the user for a device ID when a symbol is placed. When the checkbox is selected, the Device ID Assignment dialog box will appear as described on page 5-14. If the checkbox is not selected, the Device ID Assignment dialog box will not appear; the default device ID (based on project parameters) will be assigned automatically. This latter option speeds up the drawing process. Prompt For Conn. Point Text – This checkbox determines whether or not the system will prompt the user for connection point text when a parent or child symbol is placed. When the checkbox is selected, the Connection Points dialog box will appear as described on page 5-17. If the checkbox is not selected, the default (next available) connection point text will be assigned automatically. Part Number Check – Determines whether or not the system will flag the entry of part numbers that do not exist in the database. When the checkbox is selected, the system will display a warning message when the user attempts to enter a non–existent part number. If the checkbox is not selected the system will allow any part number to be entered without checking. Use Text Height from Project Parameters – This checkbox determines whether or not you will use the project default text height values for device IDs, connection point text, terminal IDs and cross reference text. These default values are set in the Project Parameters dialog box (see page 3-8). When this checkbox is selected, the default text heights will be used on any symbols placed after you make the setting. When the checkbox is not selected, the software will use the text heights that were defined when the symbol was created. Use Text Style from Project Parameters – This checkbox determines whether the various texts associated with a symbol (device ID, connection point text, terminal ID, cross reference text) will use the currently selected font (Format > Text Style) or the font that was defined when the symbol was created. This setting only affects symbols placed after the setting is made.
7-23
Settings
Prompt For Page Store – When this checkbox is selected, you will be prompted if you wish to store (save) the page when you perform a Page Next, Page Previous, or other operations that clear the drawing screen (except the File > Break operation). This prompt will appear only if changes have been made to the current page. If the checkbox is not selected the page is stored automatically when performing these operations (except the File > Break operation). Ladder Without Page Numbers – Determines whether or not page numbers will be included as part of the line numbers. (Example: 201 for page 2, line 01.) When the checkbox is selected, the page numbers will not be included in the line number. When the checkbox is not selected, page numbers will be included. Changing this entry does not affect existing pages, only pages created after the change. Diagonal Wire – Determines whether a diagonal or perpendicular connection symbol will be used at nodes. If the checkbox is selected, the diagonal symbol (symbol name DW) is used. If the checkbox is not selected, a perpendicular connection (symbol name CP) is used. Changing this entry does not affect existing pages, only drawings created after the change.
Diagonal Connection
7-24
Perpendicular Connection
Settings
Display Cross Ref. at Child – Selects whether or not a cross reference to the parent symbol will appear at a child symbol. The project must be using one of the following device ID formats:
Device ID/Page/Line number Page/Device ID/Line number Device ID/Continuous line number
When the checkbox is selected, the reference will appear at the child symbol. If the checkbox is not selected, the reference will not appear at the child symbol. Note
You must re–open the page to see the result of this setting. CR124
124 125
126
CR124
AH126
126 124
Cross Reference To Parent
You can also turn off cross references individually at parent and child symbols using the Modify > Symbol function. See page 5-96. Create Connection List When Saving Page – This checkbox, when selected, causes the software to update the connection list every time a page is saved. This ensures that any wire list or other report based on the connection list will always use the latest information. When you first turn on the checkbox and select OK in the Project Settings dialog box, a dialog will appear that asks if you wish to create a connection list. Select the Yes button. This dialog will not appear subsequently. If the checkbox is not selected, the software will only update the connection list when the user generates a report that requires connection information. Note
When the Create Connection List When Saving Page checkbox is selected, performance of the software may be slowed somewhat because the connection information must be updated each time is page is saved.
7-25
Settings
Wire Number Display – This pull–down menu with three selections determines whether or not wire color and gauge are included with the wire number on the drawing screen. Normal – The wire number only is displayed. (Example: 126) Complete – The wire number, color, and gauge are displayed. (Example: 126/14/RED Branch Numbering – The wire number and decimal point are displayed (Example: AL126.1) Note
For the branch numbering display option to work, wire numbers must be created using the branch numbering option. Select the Save button to save your general settings for future work sessions. Select the OK button to activate the entries made in the General Defaults dialog box. Select the Cancel button to discard any changes made to the entries in the General Defaults dialog box.
7-26
Settings
Page Control Functions The Tools > Project Settings >Page Control Functions function allows a variety of error checking settings to be made. These are conditions that RSWire will check for and flag with an error message when a drawing page is saved. For each condition the user can select from three options: take no action, prompt the user with a screen message, or send the error message to a file. Select:
Tools Project Settings Page Control Functions The following dialog box appears. Project Settings General Defaults
Page Control Functions
Page Formats Programmable Controller Settings Configuration: Terminal a
Page Without Control
No Ctrl
Prompt
File
Question Mark Alert
No Ctrl
Prompt
File
Short Circuit
No Ctrl
Prompt
File
Symbol Without Connection
No Ctrl
Prompt
File
Tie Point Between Terminals
No Ctrl
Prompt
File
Wire Without Connection
No Ctrl
Prompt
File
Cable
No Ctrl
Prompt
File
Symbol Without Part Number
No Ctrl
Prompt
File
Do Not Exit Page With Error
OK
Cancel
Save
Help...
7-27
Settings
By clicking on the appropriate checkbox for each condition the user can select :
No Ctrl (No Control) Take no action; disregard condition. Prompt Notify user with an on–screen error message dialog box. File Send the error message to the file RS\TMP\DWGCTL.
The following conditions are detected: Page Without Control – Checks for drawing pages that do not have the Online function activated. Question Mark Alert – Checks for question marks (?) in device IDs, connection points, wire numbers and texts. Question marks indicate that prompts have been unanswered. Short Circuit – Checks for direct connections between potentials. Wire numbers must be assigned for this function to work. Symbol Without Connection – Checks for symbols without logical line (wire) connections. Tie Point Between Terminals – Checks for a branch on a wire between two terminals. Wire Without Connection – Checks for an open end on a wire. Cable – Checks for wires that are assigned to more than one cable. Symbol Without Part Number – Checks for symbols that do not have a part number assigned. Do Not Exit Page With Error – When selected, this checkbox will not allow you to leave a page on which any error conditions are detected. The message “Page not stored” is displayed. You must either correct the error condition or turn off the prompting checkbox for that error condition. When the desired options have been set, select the OK button to load the selections, or select the Save button to save the selected settings for future work sessions.
7-28
Settings
Page Formats The Tools > Project Settings > Page Formats function allows you to view and modify the parameters of the 50 drawing page formats available in RSWire. Select:
Tools Project Settings Page Formats The following dialog box appears. Project Settings General Defaults
Page Control Functions
Page Formats Programmable Controller Settings Configuration: Terminal a
Select Format:
A-1VCOL (A Size Vertical 1 Line Number Column, 9x11.0)
Format Name:
A-1VCOL
Description:
A Size Vertical 1 Line Number Column
Page Format Size:
X Min.
0
X Max.
8.5
Y Min.
0
Y Max.
11
Max.
10.75
Increment
0.5
First Number
1
Line Number Range:
Min.
1 X Direction
Position of Line Numbers:
Y Direction
Two Line Ladders
Ladder Macro
1
0.25
2
0
3
0
4
0
LADDERA-V
Hexagon Zone Number Range:
Max.
0
Min.
0
Increment
1
Start Number
1
Save
Help...
Zone Macro Format Available For All Projects
OK
Cancel
7-29
Settings
The following parameters can be set: Select Format – Use this pull–down list to select the page format that you wish to edit. If you wish to create a new page format, select one of the “UNDEFINED” formats from the list. Format Name – This field indicates the name of the selected page format. A format must be assigned a name before it can be used to create a page. If you are creating a new format, enter a name for it here. Description – This field shows the description of the page format. If you are creating a new format, enter a description for it here. Page Format Size – The fields on this line define the size limits of the page. The X Min. and Y Min. values determine the origin (lower left corner) of the page. The X Max. and Y Max. determine the upper right corner of the page. X Max., Y Max.
Drawing Page
X Min., Y Min.
7-30
Settings
Line Number Range – This group of fields allows the user to define the position of the ladder diagram line numbers. In RSWire page formats, the allowable drawing area is defined by the Min. and Max. line number range values.
Line No. Increments
Y Direction Example
Max.
Drawing Page
Allowable Drawing Area
Min.
X Direction Example
Line Number Increments Drawing Page
Min.
Allowable Drawing Area Max.
7-31
Settings
The Min. field value determines the lower limit of the line numbering area. It is the distance from the bottom of the page to the bottom of the allowable drawing area (assuming a Y–direction format where line numbers run from top to bottom). For X–direction example, see previous page.
Maximum
101
107
102
108
Distance Increment 103
Allowable Drawing Area
109
104
110
105
111
106
112
Minimum Distance
The Max. field value is the distance from the drawing origin to the top of the allowable drawing area. For example, on a page that is 22 inches high, with a drawing area that starts 1 inch from the top, this value would be 21 (assuming a Y–direction format where line numbers run from top to bottom). For X–direction example, see previous page. The Increment field value is the increment (distance) allowed for each line number row. This works in conjunction with the ladder macro. Any “?” characters from the macro that fall within a given line number row will receive a line number value that is one greater than the previous row. See the ladder macro note on next page. The First Number field value determines the number at which the line numbering will begin. Note
7-32
This value should not include the page number.
Settings
X Direction, Y Direction – Select one of these radio buttons to determine the X or Y axis orientation of the ladder line numbering. When Y is selected, the Line Number Range field is measured from the bottom of the page and the Position of Line Number values are measured from the left side of the page. When X is selected, the Line Number Range is measured from the left side of the page and the Position of Line Number values are measured from the bottom of the page. Two Line Ladders – This checkbox allows the page number to appear over each line number. When selected, the page number appears over each line number. When not selected, the page number appears next to the line number. 1 01
101
Page Number
102
Page Number
Line Number
1 02
Line Number
Ladder Macro – Enter the name of the ladder line number macro to be used on this drawing page format. The following ladder macros are provided with RSWire. (The user can also create custom ladder macros – see note on next page.) For pages that are to have no ladders, see note on page 7-35. Macro
Note
Description
LADDERAH
ASize Horizontal (11 x 8.5 inches)
LADDERAV
ASize Vertical (8.5 x 11 inches)
LADDERB
BSize
LADDERC
CSize
LADDERD
DSize
A ladder macro consists of a series of question mark characters (?) placed using the Draw > Text function and stored as a macro. If this macro is named as the ladder macro in a page format definition, RSWire will place this macro on every page using that format and will replace each question mark with a line number. This line numbering is controlled by the line number rows established by the value in the Increment field described previously. If two question marks from the ladder macro fall within the same line number row, they will receive the same line number.
7-33
Settings
Increment
?
Increment
?
Line Number Rows Increment Established By The Increment Value Increment
? ?
Increment
?
Increment
?
Ladder Macro Locate Ladder Macro Base Point One Grid Unit Left Of “?”
If you wish to have the line numbers on the drawing increment by some value other than one, you must define the increments and ladder macro so that there are empty line number rows between each question mark. Multiple line number columns are established by the Position of Line Number fields described previously. If coordinates for more than one column are entered, the ladder macro will be repeated at each position. When defining a ladder macro that will be used on multiple column pages, locate the macro base (reference) point at least one grid unit to the left of the ? characters. This will ensure that the ? characters are placed within the intended column.
7-34
Settings
The Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function includes several functions that affect line numbering. The Digits in Line Numbers field determines how many digits the line number will contain (not including page number). The Ladder without Page Numbers checkbox determines whether or not the page number is included in the line number. See page 7-24. Note
Blank (ladder–less) Pages – If you wish to create a page format with no line numbering, you must still make the following entries: Max. – The value in the Max. field must be greater than the value in the Min. field. Increment – This field must contain a value (any value). Ladder Macro – This field must contain the macro name DUMMY (this is an empty macro provided with RSWire). Hexagon – This field allows a hexagon (or other defined symbol) to be placed around a star cross reference (as shown below). If no symbol name is entered, RSWire will not suppress the symbol around the star cross reference.
Note
You will need to create a hexagon symbol of the appropriate size. See page 6-6 on how to create a symbol.
Note
For RSWire to suppress the hexagon symbol when a signal is not linked, the hexagon symbol must be placed on top of the reference point of the cross reference text of the star cross reference. This can be simplified by creating a macro of the hexagon symbol and the signal symbol. See page 6-81 on how to create a macro. 1 01 1 02
1.02
Page Number
1 02
Line Number
Position of Line Number – These four fields allow you to specify the distance of each column of line numbers (from column 1 up to column 4) from the page origin. For unused columns, enter a value of 0.00. When all values for a page format have been entered, select the Save button to load the values.
7-35
Settings
Zone Number Range – Cross referencing in RSWire can be configured to indicate page/line number, zones, or a combination of the two. Zones are areas you define to divide a page into columns. Each zone has a letter name (A, B, C, etc.). A zone cross reference will indicate the zone where the reference point of a given item is located. Zone cross reference display format is selected with the Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function (see page 7-22). The Zone Number Range fields allow you to set the following values:
Min. – Where the first zone will begin (in default units) measured from the left side of the page. Max. – Where the last zone will end measured from the left side of the page. Increment – The width of each zone. First Number – A code number that sets the letter name of the first zone. A=65, B=66, etc. Zone Macro – The name of a macro that provides zone labels across the top of the page.
When you have made the desired page format settings, select the Save button to save the values for future work sessions. Format Available For All Projects – Selecting this checkbox will cause the page format to be stored in the RS\Syscon\System\dwg.cfg file when the Save button is selected. This matches the format available to all projects. When this checkbox is not selected, new or edited page formats will only be available in the project that is open when the format is saved. (New or edited page formats are always saved in the cfg directory of the current project, regardless of the settings of this checkbox.)
7-36
Settings
Programmable Controller Settings Use the Tools > Project Settings > Programmable Controller Settings function to set parameters related to PLC (programmable logic controller) module symbol addressing and labeling. Select:
Tools Project Settings Programmable Controller Settings The following dialog box appears. Project Settings General Defaults
Page Formats Programmable Controller Settings Configuration: Terminal a
Page Control Functions Active Input File
Search... File Format
Replace Text in Current Project Delete Unused Text Remove Linefeed Character (^) Error Control Switches
Module/Slot
Proj.
Inst.
Loc.
No Ctrl
Address
Proj.
Inst.
Loc.
No Ctrl
Addressing
8-Bit octal
Address Separator
/
Automatic Addressing
OK
Cancel
Save
Help...
7-37
Settings
The following parameters can be set: Active Input File – Specifies a text file containing programmable controller addresses and descriptive text. Once the file is activated (by selecting the Replace Text in Current Project button), the relevant text is automatically taken from the text file and placed in the drawing when placing programmable controller symbols. The format of the text file is as follows: 1 6 (first and last column holding the PLC address) 8 60 (first and last column holding descriptive text) I00100 CONVEYOR START PUSHBUTTON (first address and text) I00101 CONVEYOR STOP PUSHBUTTON (second address and text) etc. Use the Search button to view and select available files. The File Format field allows you to select the format of the programmable controller file. The current selections include: Standard Siemens S5 RSI RSLogix/AI for Allen–Bradley controllers Festo FPC405 Siemens S7
(see above) (tab delimited) (comma delimited)
Replace Text in Current Project – Selecting this button will cause programmable controller descriptive text throughout the project to be replaced by text in the file that is specified in the Active Input File field. Delete Unused Text – If this function is activated and a PLC child symbol is deleted, the corresponding function text will be deleted from the parent symbol and from the output (report) file. (The page must be refreshed before the text will be removed from the parent symbol.) If the checkbox is not selected, the text will be kept and reused with the same address when a new symbol is placed. Remove Line Feed Character (^) – Selecting this character will cause line feeds to be removed from function text strings in reports. The line feeds are set by “^” characters entered in the function text.
7-38
Settings
Error Control Switches – These radio buttons determine whether or not the system will check for duplicate PLC symbol addressing. The Module row of buttons determines error checking for duplicate module numbers. The Address row of buttons determines error checking for duplicate I/O address numbers. Within each row there is a Proj., Inst., Loc., and No Ctrl button to determine whether checking is performed over the entire project (select Proj.), over the installation containing the PLC symbol (select Inst.), over the location containing the PLC symbol (select Loc.), or whether no duplicate checking will be performed (select No Ctrl). Addressing – This field selects decimal or octal I/O address numbering for programmable controller symbols. The addressing will proceed in the selected numbering system from the starting address entered by the user when the symbol is placed. The following selections are available: decimal 8–bit octal 8–bit decimal 16–bit octal 16–bit decimal 32–bit octal 32–bit decimal 16–bit hexadecimal 32–bit hexadecimal Address Separator – This field allows a word/bit separator character to be specified for programmable controller I/O addresses. Automatic Addressing – This checkbox selects automatic or manual I/O addressing of programmable controller module symbols. When the checkbox is selected, automatic addressing is in effect; the system will take the rack and module number and the beginning address number entered by the user, and assign consecutive addresses to the remaining I/O points on the module. This addressing will be octal or decimal depending on the setting of the Addressing field (see above). If the Automatic Addressing checkbox is de–selected, manual addressing is in effect; the system will prompt consecutive addresses one at a time for each I/O point, which the user can either accept or type over. When the desired settings have been made, select the Save button to save the settings for future work sessions. Select the OK button to load the settings and exit the dialog box.
7-39
Settings
Terminal and Plug ID Settings The Tools > Project Settings > Configuration: Terminal and Plug IDs function allows a number of parameters to be set that relate to terminal symbols. Select:
Tools Project Settings Configuration: Terminal and Plug IDs The following dialog box will appear: Project Settings Configuration: Terminal and Plug IDs
Device ID Style
Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration
Object Defaults
Default IDs Terminal Strips
TB
Plug
PL
Include With Terminals Part Number Target Configuration Control
Internal/External/Jumper
Terminal IDs Without Duplicate Checking PE
L1
L2
L3
GND
U1
U2
U3
1000
Number of Terminals per Clip Jumper
OK
7-40
N
Cancel
Save
Help...
Settings
The following fields are provided: Default IDs: Terminal Strips and Plug – Use these two fields to set the default prefix for terminal strip and plug device IDs. If desired, the user can write over these default prefixes during symbol placement. Note
You must leave and restart RSWire before changes in the above two fields will take effect. Include With Terminals: Part Number – Use this checkbox to determine whether the system will allow you to enter a part number when a terminal symbol is placed in the drawing. Select the checkbox to allow part number entry, de–select the checkbox to prevent part number entry.
Note
These checkboxes work only on newly defined projects (projects that are created after you make the setting); they will not change existing projects. Target Configuration Control – Terminal symbol connection points can be designated as Internal, External, or Jumper (see page 11-3). When the Internal/External/Jumper checkbox is selected, the software will prompt the user with the following Terminal Target Settings dialog box when a terminal symbol is placed on a wire. The user selects whether the target of each connection point is to be Internal, External, a Jumper, or Undefined. The dialog box will appear for each connection point on the terminal that is being connected to a wire (the current connection point will be highlighted). Terminal Target Settings
Connection Point 1 Connection Point 2 Connection Point 3 Connection Point 4 Connection Point 5
Internal X X X
External X X
Jumper
OK Cancel Help Accept All Reset
Terminal IDs without Duplicate Checking – Terminal symbol IDs entered in these fields will not be subject to RSWire error checking that prevents duplicate device IDs.
7-41
Settings
Number of Terminals per Clip Jumper – The value in this field is the maximum number of terminals that can exist in a clip jumper. If you edit a terminal strip in the terminal editor and attempt to define a clip jumper that matches or exceeds this number of terminals, a message will appear stating that a “Clip jumper is not possible.” When the desired terminal and plug parameters have been set, select the OK button to load the settings. Select the Save button to save the settings for future work sessions.
7-42
Settings
Device ID Styles The Tools > Project Settings > Device ID Style function allows you to select in what format a complete device ID (including installation and location) will be displayed: one line, two lines, or three lines. It also allows you to select which part of the device ID is placed on each line. Select:
Tools Project Settings Device ID Style The Device ID Style dialog box will appear. Project Settings Configuration: Terminal and Plug IDs
Device ID Style
Object Defaults
Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration
First Line Installation
Device ID
Location
Second Line
Third Line
Suppress Device ID Sign (-) Show Installation
Default
Never
Always
Never
Always
Show Location
Default Nested Device ID
Partial
Complete
OK
Cancel
Save
Help...
7-43
Settings
The following parameters can be set: The First Line, Second Line, Third Line fields in this dialog box allow you to select the three components of the complete Device ID: Installation, Location, and Device ID. If you wish the complete device ID to appear on one line, then all components of the ID should appear in the First Line area (as shown above). If you wish the ID to appear on two lines, then one or two components can be placed in the First Line, and the remainder can be selected in the Second Line area. Similarly, for a three line display, place one component on First Line, one on Second Line, and one on Third Line. You cannot select a given component in more than one field at a time. Select the Suppress Device Sign (–) checkbox to hide the “–” character that will otherwise appear before each device ID. The Show Installation and Show Location radio buttons control whether or not Installation and Location names will be included with each device ID in the drawing. The following options are provided: Default – The default RSWire setting is to not include installation/location names with device IDs unless the symbol represents a device from a different installation/location than the current drawing page. Never – This setting will not include installation/location with device IDs under any circumstances. Always – This setting will include installation/location with every device ID in the drawing. The Nested Device ID radio buttons apply to logical boxes only. This allows symbols inside the logical box to have a device ID that combines the ID of the logical box with the ID of the nested symbol. One application of this feature would be to use the box to represent a circuit board and then insert pin/plug symbols to represent the connectors on the board. The box could also represent a special controller module with terminal symbols inside that are related to that module. Selecting the Partial button will display only the device ID of the nested symbol. Selecting the Complete button will display the entire, combined device ID. Select the Save button to save the device ID settings for future work sessions. Select the OK button to enter the selected device ID style. You will need to re–read the current drawing page to see the effects of any changes in the device ID setting.
7-44
Settings
Object Defaults The Tools > Project Settings > Object Defaults function lets you set default drawing element parameters that will apply to any projects and drawings that are created after the settings are made. Select:
Tools Project Settings Object Defaults The following dialog box will appear. (You must select an object from the pull–down list before any of the fields will become active. Only those fields relevant to the selected object will be active.) Project Settings Configuration: Terminal and Plug IDs
Device ID Style
Activate Object
Object Defaults
Activate All
Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration
Deactivate All
Text Color
Select...
Line Type
Select...
Line Color
Select...
Height
Select...
Label Origin
Select...
Angle
Select...
Slant
Select...
Ratio
Select...
Font
OK
Cancel
Save
Help...
7-45
Settings
The following parameters can be set: Objects – To set drawing defaults, first select which kind of drawing object you wish to set in the pull–down list at the top of the dialog box. The following objects can be selected:
Drawing Line Logical Line (wire) Logical Line N (neutral) Logical Line PE (potential earth) Drawing Box Logical Box Field Text Function Text Circle
Activate Object – This checkbox determines whether or not the default settings will override the settings made to an element elsewhere (for example with the Tools > Project Settings > Object Defaults > Color function). When the Activate Object checkbox is selected, the settings made with the Defaults function will always be in effect for the selected drawing element. When the Activate Object checkbox is not selected for the selected element, the parameters for that element can change depending on the most recently made settings. To activate a specific element, select element, change settings, and select the Save button. Activate All – This checkbox determines whether or not the default settings will override settings made to all elements elsewhere (for example with the Tools > Project Settings > Object Defaults > Color function). When the Activate All checkbox is selected, the settings made with the Defaults function will always be in effect for all drawing elements. When the Activate All checkbox is not selected for a given element, the parameters for each element can change depending on the most recently made settings. Deactivate All – This checkbox turns off the Activate checkbox for all drawing elements. Text Color, Line Type, Line Color, Height, Label Origin, Angle, Slant, Ratio, and Font – These text parameters are the same listed in the Text dialog box with the Draw > Text function. (See page 5-31 on how to set the appropriate fields.) Use the Select button beside each field to see a list of available values.
7-46
Settings
Deactivate All – This checkbox turns off the Activate checkbox for all drawing elements. When the desired settings have been made you must select the Save button to save the settings for future work sessions. Selecting the OK button (without Save) will only enter the settings for the current work session. Default values are saved in the file RS\SYSCON\SYSTEM\SODSETT.CFG. Note
Settings made for the three logical line types, when activated, will be in effect when the toolbar buttons for those functions are used.
Terminal Plan Configuration The Tools > Project Settings > Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration function allows a number of graphical terminal plan configuration settings to be made. See page 11-24.
Pin–Plug Plan Configuration The Tools > Project Settings > Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration function allows a number of graphical Pin–Plug plan configuration settings to be made. See page 11-24.
7-47
Settings
Object Settings There are a number of functions for setting drawing object parameters.
Symbol Settings To make scaling, rotation and mirroring settings for symbols, first right click on the symbol and select Block Settings > Symbol Settings from the pop–up menu. See page 5-23.
Macro Settings When you place a macro using the Insert > Macro by Name function, the Select Icon dialog box contains Macro Settings fields that allow macro scale and angle (rotation) to be set. See page 5-28. These settings do not affect macros that already exist on a drawing, only those macros placed after the setting is made.
Wire/Line Type The Modify > Linetype function allows wire and line color to be selected as well as line type (dashed, solid, etc.). See page 5-101.
7-48
Settings
Text Styles The Format > Text Style function displays a list of available drawing text styles with graphic samples. This function also allows new text styles to be defined. A text style is a combination of a font, a height value and possibly other effects such as boldness, vertical orientation, etc. Various RSWire functions such as Draw > Text and Project Parameters allow you to select a text style that will apply to texts. Select:
Format Text Style The Text Style dialog box is displayed. Text Style Style Name
Apply
STANDARD
New...
Rename...
Delete
Cancel Help...
Font Font Name:
Font Style:
Height:
romans.shx
1.0000
Use Big Font Effects
Preview
Upside Down
Width Factor:
1.0000
Backwards
Oblique Angle:
0
Vertical
AaBbCcD AaBbCcD
Preview
In the Style Name area, there are the following items: Style Name – A drop down list of currently available styles. New – Select this button to create a new style. Displays the New Text Style dialog box. You can accept the default name or enter a name in the box and choose OK to apply the current style settings to the new style name.
7-49
Settings
To Create a New Text Style:
Note
1.
Select the desired font and make any other settings for the font.
2.
Select the New button.
3.
Enter a name for the new text style.
4.
Select OK.
5.
Save the current drawing page.
When you create a new text style, it will only be available on the drawing page that is currently open when you define it. To make the style available on all drawing pages, you must have the default RSWire drawing page RSWire.dwg open when you define the style. RSWire.dwg is active when you first enter RSWire but have not yet selected a project or page. You can also open RSWire.dwg using the command line command, OPEN (the RSWire.dwg file is located in the RS\WORK directory). Because RSWire.dwg is does not belong to a project you cannot use the File > Save command to save it; you must use the File > Save As command. Rename – Select this button to rename an existing style. The text style listed in the box is renamed when you enter a new name and choose OK. Delete – Select this button to delete an existing style. Select a name from the list to make it current, and then choose Delete. In the Font area, there are the following items: Font Name – Lists the font family name for all registered TrueType fonts and all AutoCAD compiled shape (SHX) fonts in the AutoCAD Fonts directory. When you select a name from the list, AutoCAD reads the file for the specified font. The file’s character definitions are loaded automatically unless the file is already in use by another text style. You can define several styles that use the same font. Font Style – Specifies font character formatting, such as italic, bold, or regular. When Use Big Font is selected, this option changes to Big Font Name and is used to select a Big Font file name. Height – Sets the text height based on the value you enter. If you enter 0.0, AutoCAD prompts for the text height each time you enter text using this style. Entering a height greater than 0.0 sets the text height for this style. TrueType fonts may be displayed at a smaller height than SHX fonts with the same height setting.
7-50
Settings
Use Big Font – Use the Big Font option to specify an Asian–language Big Font file; Use Big Font is available only if an SHX file is specified under Font Name; only SHX files are valid file types for creating Big Fonts. Note
The text height you specify may not be accurately represented by uppercase letters in TrueType fonts supplied with AutoCAD. In the Effects area, there are the following items: Upside Down – Displays the characters upside down. Backwards – Displays the characters backwards. Vertical – Displays the characters aligned vertically. Vertical is available only if the selected font supports dual orientation. Vertical orientation is not available for TrueType fonts. Width Factor – Sets the character spacing. Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses the text. Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it. Oblique Angle – Sets the oblique angle (italicizing) of the text. Entering a value between –85 and 85 makes the text oblique.
7-51
Settings
Dimension Styles (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) The Format > Dimension Style function allows you to make settings for the dimensioning function. Refer to the AutoCAD User’s Guide for more information. The dimensioning function allows you to pick two points on a drawing and automatically display the distance between the two. Angular dimensions display the angle between two lines. Select:
Format Dimension Style The following dialog box will appear: Dimension Style Manager Current Dimstyle: STANDARD Styles
Styles
Set Current
STANDARD
New... Modify... Override... Compare...
List: All styles
Description STANDARD
Don’t list styles in xrefs Close
7-52
Help
Settings
Dimension Styles (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) The Format > Dimension Style function allows you to make settings for the dimensioning function. The dimensioning function allows you to pick two points on a drawing and automatically display the distance between the two. Angular dimensions display the angle between two lines. Select:
Format Dimension Style The following dialog box will appear: Dimension Styles Dimension Style Current:
STANDARD
Name: Save
Rename
Family Parent
Geometry...
Linear
Diameter
Radial
Ordinate
Angular
Leader
OK
Cancel
Format... Annotation... Help...
7-53
Settings
The following parameters can be set: Dimension Style – A dimension style is a stored group of dimension settings which determines the appearance of the dimensions. The style can be conveniently selected in one step. In the Current field you can select an existing dimension style. STANDARD is the default dimension style. You can define a new dimensioning style by entering the name in the Name field, making the desired settings using the Geometry, Format, and Annotation buttons, selecting the Save button, and then selecting the OK button. Dimension Family –An overall dimension style consists of a family of styles within which there are variations or family members. When you create a new style it becomes the “parent” style. Variations of this parent can be defined for specific types of dimensioning such as linear, radial, angular, etc. This is done by selecting the appropriate button in the Family area of the dialog box, making the desired settings using the Geometry, Format, and Annotation buttons, and then selecting the Save button. If no family members have been defined for a dimension style, the parent style is automatically used. The following style family members can be defined: Linear – Measures the distance between two points. Radial – Measures the radii of arcs and circles. Angular – Measures the angle between two lines or three points. Diameter – Measures the diameters of arcs and circles. Ordinate – Measures the perpendicular distance from an origin point to another point. Leader – A leader is a line that connects annotation text to some item in a drawing. This leader is not the same as the leader that is generated automatically as part of a dimension line. Dimension Geometry – Selecting the Geometry button in the Dimension Styles dialog box displays the Geometry dialog box. Here settings can be made that affect the extension lines, dimension line, arrowheads, and center marks of a dimension. There is also a scale setting so that dimension scale can be set to match that of the page.
7-54
Settings
Geometry Dimension Line Suppress:
Arrowheads 1st
2nd
Extension:
0.000
Spacing:
0.3000
Color...
BYBLOCK
1st:
Extension Line Suppress:
Closed Filled
2nd: Closed Filled Size:
0.1800
Center 1st
Mark
2nd
Extension:
0.2000
Origin Offset:
0.0625
Color...
BYBLOCK
Line None Size:
0.0900
Scale Overall Scale:
1.00000
Scale to Paper Space OK
Note
Cancel
Help...
Values shown in inches. The following settings are available: Dimension Line Suppress – You can select checkboxes to turn off the 1st and/or the 2nd dimension lines (when text divides a dimension line in two). Extension – When using oblique stroke arrowheads, you can set the distance that the dimension line extends beyond the extension lines by entering a value in this field. Spacing – Enter a value to set the distance between dimension lines of neighboring baseline and continue dimensions. Color – Select this button to set a color for the dimension lines. A Select Color dialog box will appear, displaying the available colors.
7-55
Settings
Arrowheads The 1st and 2nd fields allow you to select an arrowhead style for each end of the dimension line. The currently selected style is displayed. In the Size field you can enter a size for the arrowhead. Extension Line Suppress – Select these checkboxes to turn off the 1st and/or the 2nd extension lines. Extension – Enter a value to set how far beyond the dimension line the extension line will extend. Origin Offset – Enter a value to set the distance between the extension line origin and the beginning of the extension line. Color – Select this button to set a color for the extension lines. A Select Color dialog box will appear, displaying the available colors. Center Center marks and lines apply only to center, diameter, and radius dimensions. They are drawn only if the dimension line is placed outside the circle or arc. Select Mark, Line, or None as a center mark. The current selection is displayed. In the Size field you can enter a size for the center mark. Scale In the Overall Scale field enter a value to determine the size of the dimension geometry relative to the drawing. It should be set according to the intended plot scaling. Dimension scale affects sizes such as text height and arrowhead size, and offsets, such as extension line origin offset. You should set these sizes and offsets to values that represent their actual plotted size. You can also set a scale relative to paper space. This scale adjusts dimensions in model space to the scale of the paper space view.
7-56
Settings
Dimension Format – Selecting the Format button in the Dimension Styles dialog box displays the following dimension Format dialog box. This dialog box allows the user to make settings that affect placement of dimension text, arrowheads and leader lines relative to the dimension and extension lines. Format Text User Defined Force Line Inside Fit: Inside Horizontal
Best Fit
Outside Horizontal Horizontal Justification
Vertical Justification
Centered
Centered OK
Cancel
Help...
Select the User Defined checkbox if you wish to position dimension text by entering coordinates or by pointing the cursor. If you de–select this checkbox the software will determine the text position automatically. Select the Force Line Inside checkbox if you wish the software to draw a leader line between extension lines when there is no room between the lines for arrowheads or text (i.e., when the arrowheads are placed outside the extension lines). The Fit field allows you to select how the software will place arrowheads, dimension text and leader lines between the extension lines. The Inside Horizontal and Outside Horizontal checkboxes allow you to set dimension text either to remain horizontal or to align with the dimension line.
7-57
Settings
The Horizontal Justification field allows you to select the horizontal position of the dimension text in relation to the dimension line. The current selection is indicated. The Vertical Justification field allows you to select the vertical position of the dimension text in relation to the dimension line. The current selection is indicated. Dimension Annotation – Selecting the Annotation button in the Dimension Styles dialog box displays the Annotation dialog box where settings can be made that affect the formatting of the dimension text. Annotation Primary Units
Alternate Units Enable Units
Units... Prefix:
Prefix:
Suffix:
Suffix:
Units...
1.00 Text
Tolerance Method:
Style:
None 0.0000
Extension:
0.1800
Lower Value:
0.0625
Origin Offset:
0.0900
Height:
Color...
Middle 1.0000 OK
7-58
STANDARD
Upper Value:
Justification:
Note
[25.4]
Values shown in inches.
Round Off: Cancel
Help...
BYBLOCK 0.0000
Settings
Primary Units – Primary Units control the main dimension values. You can specify special prefixes and suffixes for dimension values. The Units button displays the Primary Units dialog box. Primary Units Units
Angles
Decimal
Decimal Degrees
Dimension
Tolerance
Precision:
Precision:
0.0000
0.0000
Zero Suppression Leading
0 Feet
Zero Suppression Leading
0 Inches
Trailing
Trailing
0 Feet 0 Inches
Scale Linear:
Paper Space Only
1.00000 OK
Cancel
Help...
Under Units, select a unit type from the list for all dimension types except angular. For angular dimensions, select a type from the Angles list. Under Dimension, select a precision value for the primary units. Under Tolerance, select a precision value for any tolerance values. There are also Zero Suppression checkboxes for suppressing leading and trailing zeros in decimal dimensions and tolerances (select the Leading and Trailing checkboxes). You can also choose to suppress zero values for dimensions given in feet and inches (select the 0 Feet and 0 Inches checkboxes). Under Scale, set the units scale for primary units.
7-59
Settings
Alternate Units – The Alternate Units area of the Annotation dialog box, select the Enable Units checkbox to activate a second set of units (for example, if you wish to show feet and inches in a metric drawing). The alternate unit values will appear in square brackets [] in the dimension text. Once you select the Enable Units checkbox, you can select the Units button in the Alternate Units area. This displays the Alternate Units dialog box which contains the same fields and settings as the Primary Units dialog box (see above). Tolerance – In the Tolerance area of the Annotation dialog box you can choose to have lateral tolerance values added to the dimensions to indicate the degree of accuracy required. The Method field allows you to select: None (no tolerance values), Symmetrical (same + and – value), Deviation (different + and – values), and Limits (the software calculates a maximum and minimum dimension value). The Upper Value and Lower Value fields allow you to enter tolerance values. The Justification and Height fields allow you to set the alignment and size of tolerance values. Text – In the Text area of the Annotation dialog box you can set the dimension text format. Fields are provided for text Style, Height, and Gap (around base dimension text). A button is also provided for setting text Color. Round Off – The Round Off field in the Annotation dialog box allows you to set a value to which dimension values will be rounded (except angular dimensions). For example, if you specify a round–off value of 0.25 all dimensions are rounded to the nearest 0.25 unit.
7-60
Settings
Preferences (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) Use the Tools > Preferences function to make a number of general settings through the AutoCAD PREFERENCES function. Not all the available settings are relevant to RSWire. Refer to the online help and the AutoCAD User’s Guide for more information. Select:
Tools Preferences The following dialog box appears: Options
?
Current profile: Display
Files
Current drawing:
RSWire Open and Save Plotting System
Window Elements
3
User Preferences
Drafting Selection
Profiles
Display resolution
Display scroll bars in drawing window
100
Arc and circle smoothness
Display screen menu
8
Segments in a polyline curve
0.5
Rendered object smoothness
4
Contour lines per surface
Text lines in command line window
Colors...
Fonts...
Layout Elements
Display performance
Display Layout and Model tabs
Pan and zoom with raster image
Display margins
Highlight raster image frame only
Display paper background
True color raster images and rendering
Display paper shadow
Apply solid fill
Show Page Setup dialog for new layouts
Show text boundary frame only
Create viewport in new layouts
Show silhouettes in wireframe
Crosshair size 5
RSWire.dwg
Reference Edit fading intensity 50
OK
Cancel
Save
Help...
7-61
Settings
Files Tab The Files options let you enter the support directories path which is used by the software to locate help files, fonts, and other support files. Use the Browse button to search for files and subdirectories you wish to add to the support field.
Display Tab The Colors button allows you to set colors of various areas of the software window. Select the element to color in the Window Element field. Then, select a color. The sample Graphic and Text windows will show your color selections. Use the slider controls (or enter a number from 0 to 255) to change the Red , Green, or Blue components of a color. Select the Monochrome Vectors checkbox if you are using a monochrome display. This setting may also be best for gray scale displays. The Fonts button allows you to select the font used in the toolbar and on the command line. This setting has no effect on the text in your drawing. A Font dialog box will appear, allowing you to select fonts from a list. You can also select whether the setting will affect the Graphics window or the (Command) text window.
Open and Save Tab Options for loading and saving AutoCAD drawings.
Plotting Tab Select and configure output devices (printers and plotters).
System Tab Select 3D graphics displays and pointing devices.
User Preferences Tab Settings for accelerator keys, shortcut menus and right mouse button actions.
Drafting Tab Make AutoSnap, AutoTrack, and Alignment Point Acquisition settings. 7-62
Settings
Selection Tab Make settings for selecting objects and configuring grips.
Profiles Tab Available Profiles – Displays a list of the available profiles. Set Current – Makes the selected profile the current profile. Add to List – Add a new profile to the list. Rename – Displays the Change Profile dialog box for changing the name and description of the selected profile. Use Rename when you want to rename a profile but keep its current settings. Delete – Deletes the selected profile. Export – Exports a profile as a REG file. You can import the profile on the same computer or a different computer. Import – Imports a profile created using export. Reset – Resets the values in the selected profile to the default settings.
7-63
Settings
Preferences (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) Use the Tools > Preferences function to make a number of general settings through the AutoCAD PREFERENCES function. Not all the available settings are relevant to RSWire. Refer to the online help and the AutoCAD User’s Guide for more information. Select:
Tools Preferences The following dialog box appears: Preferences Files
Performance
? General
Compatibility
Display Pointer
Printer
Profiles
Drawing session safety precautions Save thumbnail preview image
Automatic save Minutes between saves
Beep on error in user input
120
Create backup copy with each save
File extension for temporary files:
ac$
Full–time CRC validation
Maximum number sorted symbols:
200
Audit after each DXFIN or DXBIN Maintain a log file
Reset
OK
Cancel
Apply
Help...
This dialog box has eight tabs which can be selected to display different sets of parameters. The user can make a variety of AutoCAD–related hardware and software settings. Refer to the AutoCAD manual for additional information. This function is not available in the Standalone version of RSWire.
7-64
Settings
Files Tab The Files options let you enter the support directories path which is used by the software to locate help files, fonts, and other support files. Use the Browse button to search for files and subdirectories you wish to add to the support field.
Performance Tab The Performance options control preferences that relate to performance. Consult your AutoCAD manual for further information.
Compatibility Tab The Compatibility options maintain compatibility with earlier versions of AutoCAD. Consult your AutoCAD manual for further information.
General Tab The General options let you specify a number of general operating preferences. Automatic Save – By selecting the Automatic save checkbox, a DWG format file of the current drawing page will be saved automatically on a selectable time period. The file will be saved in the temporary files directory (default is RS\TMP). Create backup copy with each save – Select this checkbox to create a backup of the drawing each time the drawing is saved. Use the File tab to specify where the backup is saved. Full–time CRC validation – Not applicable. Audit after each DXFIN or DXBIN – Not applicable. Save Thumbnail Preview Image – Specifies whether an image of the drawing should be displayed in the Preview area of the Select File dialog box. Beep on Error in User Input – Select to hear an audible beep when an error occurs. File Extension for Temporary Files – Specifies a unique extension for the current user to identify plot files in a network environment.
7-65
Settings
Maximum Number Sorted Symbols – Specifies the maximum number of items to sort. If you set this preference to 0, the items are listed in the order they were created. Items are sorted in alphabetical order. Reset – resets the General Preferences to the system defaults. Maintain a Log File – Saves a command history file of the current work session. This file is saved under the name ect.log in the RS\PROGRAM directory.
Display Tab The Colors button allows you to set colors of various areas of the software window. Select the element to color in the Window Element field. Then, select a color. The sample Graphic and Text windows will show your color selections. Use the slider controls (or enter a number from 0 to 255) to change the Red , Green, or Blue components of a color. Select the Monochrome Vectors checkbox if you are using a monochrome display. This setting may also be best for gray scale displays. The Fonts button allows you to select the font used in the toolbar and on the command line. This setting has no effect on the text in your drawing. A Font dialog box will appear, allowing you to select fonts from a list. You can also select whether the setting will affect the Graphics window or the (Command) text window.
Pointer Tab The Pointer options set the current pointing device. Current Pointing Device Driver – Displays the name of the current pointing device driver. Current System Pointing Device – Displays a list of the available pointing device drivers. Set Current – Makes the selected pointing device the current pointing device. Accept Input From – Specifies whether input is accepted from both a mouse and a digitizer or ignores mouse input when a digitizer is set.
7-66
Settings
Cursor Size – Controls the size of the crosshairs. The allowable range is from 1 to 100 percent of the total screen. At 100% the ends of the crosshairs are never visible. When the size is decreased to 99% or below, the crosshairs have a finite size, and the crosshairs’ ends are visible when moved to the edge of the graphics area. The default size is 5%.
Printer Tab Customizes printer or plotter settings and sets the current printer. Current Printer – Displays the name of the current printer. List of Printers – Displays a list of the available printers. Printer Description – Displays information about the currently selected printer. Set Current – Makes the selected printer the current printer. Modify – Reconfigures the selected printer. Select a printer from the list of available printers and choose Modify. In the Reconfigure a Printer dialog box, provide a description for the printer. Then choose Reconfigure. New – Displays the Add a Printer dialog box. To add a printer, select a printer from the list of available printers, provide a description, and then choose OK. The text window with prompts for printer settings is displayed. Open – Opens a printer configuration file. In the Select PC2 File dialog box, select the configuration file for the device you want to use. Then choose OK. Save As – Saves the complete configuration information for a printer to a file. Remove – Removes the selected printer from the list of available printers.
7-67
Settings
Profiles Tab The options contained under this tab control use of profiles; a profile is a user–defined configuration. Current profile – Lists the currently selected profile. List of Profiles – Displays a list of the available profiles. Set Current – Makes the selected profile the current profile. Copy – Displays the Copy Profile dialog box to copy an existing profile. Enter a name and description for the new profile. When you choose OK, a copy of the selected profile is created, and the new profile name is added to the list box. Rename – Displays the Change Profile dialog box for changing the name and description of the selected profile. Use Rename when you want to rename a profile but keep its current settings. Delete – Deletes the selected profile. Export – Exports a profile as a REG file. You can import the profile on the same computer or a different computer. Import – Imports a profile created using export. Reset – Resets the values in the selected profile to the default settings.
7-68
Settings
Preferences (Standalone Version) Use the Tools > Preferences function to make a number of general settings. Not all the available settings are relevant to RSWire. The tabs in the Preferences dialog will be similar to those in the add–on version. If you installed the Standalone version that uses AutoCAD R14 format drawings, see page 7-64. If you installed the Standalone version that uses AutoCAD 2000 format drawings, see page 7-61.
7-69
Settings
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
7-70
Plotting
8 Plotting This section explains how to plot drawing pages from RSWireTM Designer. The following sections are included:
Plot Functions Plot Current Page (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) Plot Current Page (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) Plot Multiple Pages (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) Plot Multiple Pages (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) Plotting to Files Plotting Selected Layers
8-1
Plotting
Plot Functions To plot drawing pages from RSWire, select the File > Print/Plot pull–down menu.
File Print/Plot Preview... Plot Config... Current Page... Multiple Pages... There are two plotting functions: Preview – The Plot Preview function displays the drawing on the screen as it will appear when plotted on paper. While using the Plot Preview function, the real–time interactive zooming capability is available. As you move the pointing device, the drawing image zooms in or out. During Plot Preview, zoom–in is limited by the resolution of your plotter. Plot Preview stops your zoom–in at the point where one pixel on your display is equal to one pixel (or plotter step) on your plotter. You can only zoom in to the level of detail that your plotter or printer is capable of plotting. When you have reached the zoom–in limit (the current view), the plus sign (+) is no longer displayed, indicating that you cannot zoom in any further. When you have zoomed out to the limit (the extents of the current view), the minus sign (–) is no longer displayed, indicating that you cannot zoom out any further. You cannot zoom out beyond the extents of the current view. Plot Config. – This function displays the Plotting tab of the the Options (Tools > Preferences) dialog box. Here you can select or add printers and plotters. Configure the drivers and make other printer/plotter settings. Current Page – Select this function for plotting to a plotter or to the Windows system printer. This function displays the Plot Configuration dialog box. See page 8-5. Multiple Pages – Use this function to plot a group of drawing pages in one operation. You can select an entire project, an installation within a project, or individual pages within an installation. You can send the pages to a plotter or to disk files (PLT, DWG, or DXF format).
8-2
Plotting
Plot Preview The File > Print/Plot > Preview function allows you to preview a plot before you send it to the plotter. Select:
File Print/Plot Preview A Plot Preview will appear (example shown below).
While using the Plot Preview function, the real–time interactive zooming capability is available. As you hold down the button and move the pointing device, the drawing image zooms in or out.
8-3
Plotting
During Plot Preview, zoom–in is limited by the resolution of your plotter. Plot Preview stops your zoom–in at the point where one pixel on your display is equal to one pixel (or plotter step) on your plotter. You can only zoom in to the level of detail that your plotter or printer is capable of plotting. When you have reached the zoom–in limit (the current view), the plus sign (+) is no longer displayed, indicating that you cannot zoom in any further. When you have zoomed out to the limit (the extents of the current view), the minus sign (–) is no longer displayed, indicating that you cannot zoom out any further. You cannot zoom out beyond the extents of the current view.
To Exit Plot Preview Press the <Esc> key, or: 1.
Press right mouse button. A sub–menu will appear.
2.
Select the Exit function. The drawing will appear. Exit Plot
Select “Exit”
Pan Zoom Zoom Window Zoom Previous
8-4
Plotting
Plot Current Page (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) Use the File > Print/Plot > Current Page function to plot the currently displayed drawing page. This function (which is equivalent to the AutoCAD PLOT command) also displays a dialog box that allows various plot configuration settings to be made.
File Print/Plot Current Page The following Print/Plot Configuration dialog box will appear. Print / Plot Configuration Device and Default Information
Paper Size and Orientation
Default System Printer
Inches
Device and Default Selection...
Pen Assignments...
Optimization...
Limits
Text Resolution 50
This Checkbox Must Be Selected To Enable The Plot PLT Function.
Window View...
Plot to File
=
14.874
Scaled to Fit Plot Preview
Autospool
OK
Rotation and Origin...
7.93
Hide Lines
Window...
Orientation Icon
Plotted Inches = Drawing Units
Text Fill Adjust Area Fill
View
Plot Area 7.93 by 10.49 Scale, Rotation, and Origin
Additional Parameters
Extents
MAX
MM
Pen Parameters
Display
Size...
File Name... Cancel
Preview...
Partial
Full
Help...
8-5
Plotting
The following settings are available: Device and Default Information Select the Device and Default Selection button to view or change information about the device, to save or get defaults from a Plotting Program Parameters (PCP) file, or to view or change a device–specific configuration. The name of the currently selected printer/plotter is displayed above this button. When you select the Device and Default Selection button, the following Device and Default Selection dialog box will appear. Device and Default Selection Select a Device Configuration Default System Printer Manufacturer:
System Printer ADI 4.3 – By Autodesk, Inc
Port: \\Boggy\B–Size Configuration File Complete (PC2) Save..
Partial (PCP–R12/R13)
Replace..
Save..
Merge..
Show..
Change
Device Specific Configuration Device Requirements: OK
Cancel
Help...
Partial Save – Saves the current default settings to a PCP file. Plot Configuration Parameter (PCP) files store the device independent plot settings you specify. This means you can store settings like paper sizes, pen assignments, orientations, and scaling factors. You can choose to save to a new or existing file. Partial Merge – Retrieves the default settings from a PCP file. The Merge From PCP File dialog box is displayed, in which you can select a PCP file. If the PCP file contains errors, a dialog box is displayed listing the errors. Choose Create Error File to create a file containing any listed errors. A file is created using the PCP filename with an .err file extension. The file is placed in the same directory that contains the PCP file. 8-6
Plotting
Complete Replace – Replaces the default settings from a PC2 file. Current information is lost unless it has been saved to a PC2 file. Complete Save – Saves the current default settings to a PC2 file. Complete Plot Configuration (PC2) files store all the information found in a PCP file, plus device–specific information that would otherwise be defined in the ACAD.CFG file. You can choose to save to a new or existing file. Device Specific Configuration – Displays and changes device–specific configuration requirements. The Show button displays configuration information for the current plotter. The Change button allows you to enter new settings for the current plotter. The dialog boxes are different for different plotters. Pen Parameters Use the Pen Assignments button to assign colors, line types and pen widths for the various pens of the current plotter. The ability to control these parameters depends on the type of plotter you have selected. Use the Optimization button to select various optimizations that can be performed when plotting, minimizing wasted pen motion and reducing plot time. The default setting is dependent on the device you have configured. Additional Parameters In this area you can set additional plotting parameters as follows: Display – Select to plot what is currently displayed on the screen. Extents – Select to plot everything in the drawing (that part of the drawing that currently contains entities). Limits – Select to plot entire drawing area as defined by the drawing limits. View – Not accessible. Window – When selected, allows you to plot any portion of the drawing. You specify a lower left corner and an upper right corner of the area to be plotted. This radio button is grayed out until a window has been specified.
8-7
Plotting
To specify the window, select the Window button. The Window Selection dialog box will appear. If the area you wish to plot is totally visible on the screen you can select the Pick button and use your pointing device to designate the window. The default window is the current display. You can also specify the window by entering drawing unit coordinates in the First Corner and Other Corner fields. When you accept the specified window, you will return to the Plot Configuration dialog box and the Window radio button will be enabled and selected. Text Resolution – Sets the resolution, in dots–per–inch, of True Type fonts while plotting, exporting, and rendering. Lower values decrease resolution and increase plotting speed. Higher values increase resolution and decrease plotting speed. Text Fill – Controls the filling of True Type fonts while plotting, exporting and rendering. If Text Fill is not selected, text is output as outlines. Hide Lines – Not applicable. Adjust Area Fill – Not applicable. Plot To File – Select to send plot output to a file rather than directly to a plotter. Important
The Plot to File checkbox must be selected (on) to allow the RSWire PLT Plot function (File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages > Create PLT Files) to work properly. A plot file will be created with the extension .plt. To specify a file name other than the default name, select the File Name button. If the current drawing is unnamed, a plot file will be created with the name unnamed.plt. Autospool – Select to send plot output directly to a plotter. Paper Size and Orientation Use this area to specify plot size, paper size, and orientation. Use the Inches and MM (millimeters) radio buttons to select the appropriate plotting units. The Orientation icon is a rectangle that indicates the natural orientation (portrait or landscape) of the current plotting device. If your current plotter’s natural orientation is portrait, it may be necessary to rotate the plot 270 degrees to achieve the result you want. Use the Size button to display the paper size dialog box. This dialog box displays the plot sizes that the current plotter supports. “MAX” is the maximum size that the plotter can handle. Select a predefined size or enter the width and height in a USER text box.
8-8
Plotting
Scale, Rotation, and Origin Use this area to set the plot scale, rotation, and origin. The label Plotted Inches = Drawing Units will read Plotted MM = Drawing Units if millimeter was selected as units. The values in these fields indicate the scale of the plot; plot units in relation to drawing units. Use the Rotation and Origin button to display the Plot Rotation and Origin dialog box. Select a rotation value to rotate the plot clockwise. The plot normally begins in the lower left corner of the paper (home position). If you wish to place the plot origin at another location, enter the desired coordinates in the X Origin and Y Origin fields. Select the Scaled to Fit checkbox to scale the plot so the view chosen, the portion of the drawing to be plotted, is made as large as possible for the specified paper size. When this checkbox is selected, the text boxes display the actual scale used to fit. When Scaled to Fit is turned off, the text boxes default to 1=1 except when the scale has been previously set to other values. In this case, the software will use that scale. Plot Preview Select the Preview button to display the plot on screen so you can see that it is correctly placed on the paper. If you select the Partial radio button, the preview will indicate the plot area as a simple rectangle positioned on the paper. If the plot origin has been offset so that the effective area extends outside the graphic area of the preview area, a green line will be displayed along any clipped side. If you select the Full radio button, the preview will show the drawing on the screen as it will appear on paper. Because this requires a regeneration of the drawing it is slower than a partial preview. During a full preview a dialog box is displayed with buttons for Pan and Zoom and End Preview. The Pan and Zoom function is similar to the Dynamic zoom function (see page 4-32). The End Preview function returns you to the Print/Plot Configuration dialog box.
8-9
Plotting
Plot Current Page (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) Use the File > Print/Plot > Current Page function to plot the currently displayed drawing page. This function (which is equivalent to the AutoCAD PLOT command) also displays a dialog box that allows various plot configuration settings to be made.
File Print/Plot Current Page The following Plot dialog box will appear. ?
Plot Layout name
Page setup name <Select page setup to apply>
Save changes to layout
Model Plot Device
Add...
Plot Settings
Plotter configuration Name:
HP LaserJet 6P/6MP-Enhanced
Plotter:
HP LaserJet 6P/6MP-Enhanced-Windows System Driver
Where:
LPT1:
Properties Hints
Description: Plot style table (pen assignments) Name:
None
Edit...
What to plot
Plot to file
Current tab
Plot to file
Selected tabs
File name:
All layout tabs Number of copies Full Preview...
8-10
New...
1
Location:
Partial Preview...
D:\RS\PROJECT\WORK\____6
OK
Cancel
Help
Plotting
Layout name – (Layouts are not used in RSWire – they are the same as Paper Space.) Displays the current layout name or displays ”Selected layouts” if multiple tabs are selected. If the Model tab is current when you choose Plot, the Layout Name shows ”Model.” Select the Save changes to layout checkbox to save changes you make in the Plot dialog box in the layout. This option is unavailable if multiple layouts are selected. Page setup name – Displays a list of any named and saved page setups. You can choose to base the current page setup on a named page setup, or you can add a new named page setup by choosing Add. Selecting Add displays the User Defined Page Setups dialog box. You can create, delete, or rename named page setups.
Plot Device tab Use the Plotter Configuration function to select a printer/plotter driver. Use the Plot style table function to edit pen colors and line weights. Use the What to plot functions to select which tabs to plot and the number of copies to plot. Current tab plots the current Model or Layout tab. (Layouts are not used in RSWire.) If multiple tabs are selected, the tab that shows its viewing area is plotted. Selected tabs plots multiple preselected Model or layout tabs. To select multiple tabs, hold down CTRL while selecting the tabs. If only one tab is selected, this option is unavailable. All layout tabs plots all layout tabs, regardless of which tab is selected. Select the Plot to file checkbox if you wish to create a plot file of the current drawing. You can enter the desired filename and directory.
8-11
Plotting
Plot Settings tab ?
Plot Layout name
Page setup name <Select page setup to apply>
Save changes to layout
Model Plot Device
Add...
Plot Settings
Paper size and paper units Plot device:
HP LaserJet 6P/6MP-Enhanced
Paper size:
Letter
Printable area:
10.60 x 8.10 inches
Drawing orientation Portrait Landscape
Plot area
inches
mm
Plot upside-down
Plot scale
Limits
Scale:
Extents
Custom:
Scaled to Fit
Scale Lineweight
Display
Plot options
Plot offset
View
Center the plot
Window
Window <
Full Preview...
X: 0.00
inches
Y: 0.00
inches
Partial Preview...
OK
Plot object lineweights Plot with plot styles Plot paperspace last Hide objects
Cancel
Help
Paper size and paper units Select the output Paper size. Also select inches or mm as the units for the plot settings. Drawing orientation Select Portrait or Landscape orientation of the drawing on the paper. Selected orientation is indicated by the page icon. Also, select Plot upside down if desired. Plot area
8-12
Plotting
In this area you can set additional plotting parameters as follows: Limits – Select to plot entire drawing area as defined by the drawing limits. Extents – Select to plot everything in the drawing (that part of the drawing that currently contains entities). Display – Select to plot what is currently displayed on the screen. View – Not accessible. Window – When selected, allows you to plot any portion of the drawing. Select the Window button. Then define two opposite corners of the area to be plotted. This radio button is grayed out until a window has been specified.
Plot scale Scale – From the pulldown list, you can select Scaled to Fit to scale the plot as large as possible for the selected paper. You can also select from a number of scale ratios (1:1, 1:2, etc.). Custom – Indicates the relation between plot units of length and drawing units of length. This will change according to the selected scale. Scale lineweights – Scales lineweights in proportion to the plot scale. Lineweights normally specify the linewidth of printed objects and are plotted with the linewidth size regardless of the plot scale. Plot offset Select the Center the plot checkbox to center the plot on the paper. Or, you can set the origin of the plot by entering values in the X and Y fields. Plot options Plot object lineweights – If you have turned off the Plot with plot styles checkbox, you can select this checkbox to use object lineweights in the plot. Plot with plot styles – Select this checkbox to plot using the plot styles applied to objects and defined in the plot style table. All style definitions with different property characteristics are stored in the plot style tables and can be attached to the geometry. This setting can replace pen mapping in earlier versions of AutoCAD.
8-13
Plotting
Plot paperspace last – Plots model space geometry first. Paper space geometry is usually plotted before model space geometry. Hide objects – Plots layouts with hidden lines removed for objects in the layout environment (paper space). Hidden line removal for model space objects in viewports is controlled by the Viewports Hide property in the Object Property Manager. This is displayed in the plot preview, but not in the layout.
8-14
Plotting
Plot Multiple Pages (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) The File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function allows you to plot an entire project or a group of selected pages within the project. Select:
File Print/Plot Multiple Pages The following Print/Plot Pages dialog box will appear. Print/Plot Pages Export Type
File Name Format
Plot Direct
Export Format
Project/Inst./Page
Create PLT Files
AutoCAD R12
Plot Sequence Forward
AutoCAD R13
Create DWG Files Create DXF Files
AutoCAD R14
Consecutive
Layer Groups...
Page Selection... OK
Cancel
Backward
Define Layer... Help...
This dialog box allows the user to select whether pages will be sent to a plotter or to a disk file. There are also radio buttons to select the file naming format and the AutoCAD version format of the files. Plot to a Plotter Select the Plot Direct radio button in the Print/Plot Pages dialog box.
8-15
Plotting
Plot to a File In the Print/Plot Pages dialog box, select the radio button for the file type that you wish to create: PLT, DWG, or DXF. The section on Plotting to Files contains more information (see page 8-21). Select Pages to be Plotted Select the Page Selection button. The following Plotting dialog box will appear. Plotting Project:
Installation:
Page:
ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE
Search...
Search...
OK
Cancel
Search...
Help...
The Project field contains a list of projects currently on your system. Select a project name and a list of installations will appear. Select an installation name and a list of pages in that installation will appear. In each column you can use the Search button to display a list of projects, installations or pages with descriptions. You can also make selections from these lists. To Plot an Entire Project – Select the project name followed by the OK button. (Do not select any installation or page names.) All drawing pages in the project will be plotted. To Plot an Entire Installation – Select the project name and then the desired installation name followed by the OK button. (Do not select any page names.) All drawing pages in the installation will be plotted.
8-16
Plotting
To Plot Individual Pages – Select the project name and then the desired installation name. You can then select one or more individual pages from the Page column followed by the OK button. The selected pages will be plotted. Select the OK button in the Print/Plot Pages dialog box to proceed with the plotting. Plot Sequence You can select the order in which pages plot with the Plot Sequence radio buttons in the Print/Plot Pages dialog box. Select the Forward radio button to print pages in numerical order from lowest to highest. Select the Backward radio button to print pages in reverse numerical order from highest to lowest.
8-17
Plotting
Plot Multiple Pages (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) The File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function allows you to plot an entire project or a group of selected pages within the project. Select:
File Print/Plot Multiple Pages The following Print/Plot Pages dialog box will appear. Print/Plot Pages Export Type
Page Selection...
Plotter Configuration
Plot Direct
Layer Selection...
Create PLT Files Create DWF Files
Define Layer...
Create DWG Files Create DXF Files
File Name Format
Export Format
Plot Sequence
Project/Inst./Page
AutoCAD R12
Forward
Consecutive
AutoCAD R13
Backward
AutoCAD R14 AutoCAD 2000
OK
Cancel
Help...
This dialog box allows the user to select whether pages will be sent to a plotter or to a disk file. There are also radio buttons to select the file naming format and the AutoCAD version format of the files.
8-18
Plotting
Plot to a Plotter Select the Plot Direct radio button in the Print/Plot Pages dialog box. Plot to a File In the Print/Plot Pages dialog box, select the radio button for the file type that you wish to create: PLT, DWF, DWG or DXF. The section on Plotting to Files contains more information (see page 8-21). Select Pages to be Plotted Select the Page Selection button. The following Plotting dialog box will appear. Plotting Project:
Installation:
Page:
ABACK MACHINE1 TOOL WAREHOUSE
Search...
Search...
OK
Cancel
Search...
Help...
The Project field contains a list of projects currently on your system. Select a project name and a list of installations will appear. Select an installation name and a list of pages in that installation will appear. In each column you can use the Search button to display a list of projects, installations or pages with descriptions. You can also make selections from these lists. To Plot an Entire Project – Select the project name followed by the OK button. (Do not select any installation or page names.) All drawing pages in the project will be plotted.
8-19
Plotting
To Plot an Entire Installation – Select the project name and then the desired installation name followed by the OK button. (Do not select any page names.) All drawing pages in the installation will be plotted. To Plot Individual Pages – Select the project name and then the desired installation name. You can then select one or more individual pages from the Page column followed by the OK button. The selected pages will be plotted. Select the OK button in the Print/Plot Pages dialog box to proceed with the plotting. Plot Sequence You can select the order in which pages plot with the Plot Sequence radio buttons in the Print/Plot Pages dialog box. Select the Forward radio button to print pages in numerical order from lowest to highest. Select the Backward radio button to print pages in reverse numerical order from highest to lowest.
8-20
Plotting
Plotting to Files PLT Files To plot drawing pages as PLT files, use the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function and select the Create PLT Files radio button. Files will be saved in the RS\PLOT directory. Note
The Create PLT Files function will not work under AutoCAD R14 unless the Plot to File checkbox in the File > Print/Plot > Current Page function is turned on.
Note
When you use the AutoCAD PLOT command to plot to a file, the system will create a plt extension file in the same directory as the original page file (under RS\PROJECT\WORK). Procedure: 1.
Select the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function.
2.
Select the Create PLT Files radio button in the dialog box.
3.
Select the File Name Format option. Two choices are available: Project/Inst./Page – This option will create subdirectories under the RS\PLOT directory for the project and installation and store the PLT files in these subdirectories. For example, if pages from the project EX2, installation A are plotted, the files will be stored in the directory RS\PLOT\EX2\A. (If there is no installation in the project, the plot file installation subdirectory will be named NO_INST.) The files will have the format pagename.plt where “pagename” is the name of the page created in RSWire. The software creates the file Plot_plt.txt in the project’s plot file directory that indicates which project/installation/location/page are in each plot file. Consecutive – This option will create a subdirectory under the RS\PLOT directory having the project name. Within this directory all selected files will be saved (without being divided by installation). The files will be named in the format ecs0.plt, ecs1.plt, etc. The software creates the file Plot_plt.txt in the project’s plot file directory that indicates which project/installation/location/page are in each PLT file.
4.
Select the Page Selection button to select the project, installation and pages that you wish to plot to file. Select OK once the pages are selected. You will return to the Print/Plot Pages dialog box.
8-21
Plotting
5.
Select OK in the Plot dialog box to create the files.
The software will remind you to select the Plot to File radio button in the Print/Plot > Current Page function. If there are already PLT files in the same subdirectory of the PLOT directory (from a previous use of this function) the software will prompt “There are PLT files in the plot directory. Delete?” Select Yes if you wish to delete the existing files and continue. Select Cancel if you wish to abort the PLT plot function.
DWF Files (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version only) DWF files can be viewed in Internet browsers with the Autodesk WHIP! 4.0 plug–in. To plot drawing pages as DWF files, use the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function and select the Create DWF Files radio button. Files will be saved in the RS\PLOT directory. Procedure: 1.
Select the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function.
2.
Select the Create DWF Files radio button in the dialog box.
3.
Select a configuration file from the drop–down list immediately to the right of the Create DWF Files radio button. There are two choices for DWF files: The DWF Classic.pc3 configuration file creates DWFs that resemble AutoCAD Release 14 DWFs. The output file is created with a black drawing background. The DWF ePlot.pc3 file creates DWFs with a white drawing background and a paper boundary.
4.
Select the File Name Format option. Two choices are available: Project/Inst./Page – This option will create subdirectories under the RS\PLOT directory for the project and installation and store the DWF files in these subdirectories. For example, if pages from the project EX2, installation A are plotted, the files will be stored in the directory RS\PLOT\EX2\A. (If there is no installation in the project, the plot file installation subdirectory will be named NO_INST.) The files will have the format pagename.dwf where “pagename” is the name of the page created in RSWire. The software creates the file Plot_dwf.txt in the project’s plot file directory that indicates which project/installation/location/page are in each plot file.
8-22
Plotting
Consecutive – This option will create a subdirectory under the RS\PLOT directory having the project name. Within this directory all selected files will be saved (without being divided by installation). The files will be named in the format ecs0.dwf, ecs1.dwf, etc. The software creates the file Plot_dwf.txt in the project’s plot file directory that indicates which project/installation/location/page are in each plot file. 5.
Select the Select Pages button to select the project, installation and pages that you wish to plot to file. Select OK once the pages are selected. You will return to the Plot dialog box.
6.
Select OK in the Plot dialog box to create the files.
DWG Files To plot drawing pages as DWG files, use the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function and select the Create DWG Files radio button. Files will be saved in the RS\PLOT directory. Note
You can also use the File > Save As function to save drawings as DWG files (see page 4-9), but these functions only save one page at a time. The plot function allows you to save a range of pages in one operation. Procedure: 1.
Select the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function.
2.
Select the Create DWG Files radio button in the dialog box.
3.
Select the File Name Format option. Two choices are available: Project/Inst./Page – This option will create subdirectories under the RS\PLOT directory for the project and installation and store the DWG files in these subdirectories. For example, if pages from the project EX2, installation A are plotted, the files will be stored in the directory RS\PLOT\EX2\A. (If there is no installation in the project, the plot file installation subdirectory will be named NO_INST.) The files will have the format pagename.dwg where “pagename” is the name of the page created in RSWire. The software creates the file Plot_dwg.txt in the project’s plot file directory that indicates which project/installation/location/page are in each plot file.
8-23
Plotting
Consecutive – This option will create a subdirectory under the RS\PLOT directory having the project name. Within this directory all selected files will be saved (without being divided by installation). The files will be named in the format ecs0.dwg, ecs1.dwg, etc. The software creates the file Plot_dwg.txt in the project’s plot file directory that indicates which project/installation/location/page are in each plot file. 4.
Select the Export Format AutoCAD R12, AutoCAD R13, AutoCAD R14 or AutoCAD 2000 to match the DWG type that you wish to create.
5.
Select the Select Pages button to select the project, installation and pages that you wish to plot to file. Select OK once the pages are selected. You will return to the Plot dialog box.
6.
Select OK in the Plot dialog box to create the files.
If there are already DWG files in the same subdirectory of the PLOT directory (from a previous use of this function) the software will prompt “There are DWG/PLT files in the plot directory. Delete?” Select Yes if you wish to delete the existing files and continue. Select Cancel if you wish to abort the DWG plot function.
DXF Files To plot drawing pages as DXF files, use the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function and select the Create DXF Files radio button. Files will be saved in the RS\PLOT directory. Procedure:
8-24
1.
Select the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function.
2.
Select the Create DXF Files radio button in the Plot dialog box.
3.
Select the File Name Format option. Two choices are available:
Plotting
Project/Inst./Page – This option will create subdirectories under the RS\PLOT directory for the project and installation and store the DXF files in these subdirectories. For example, if pages from the project EX2, installation A are plotted, the files will be stored in the directory RS\PLOT\EX2\A. (If there is no installation in the project, the plot file installation subdirectory will be named NO_INST.) The files will have the format pagename.dxf where “pagename” is the name of the page created in RSWire. The software creates the file Plot_dxf.txt in the project’s plot file directory that indicates which project/installation/location/page are in each plot file. Consecutive – This option will create a subdirectory under the RS\PLOT directory having the project name. Within this directory all selected files will be saved (without being divided by installation). The files will be named in the format ecs0.dxf, ecs1.dxf, etc. The software creates the file Plot_dxf.txt in the project’s plot file directory that indicates which project/installation/location/page are in each DXF file. 4.
Select the Page Selection button to select the project, installation and pages that you wish to plot to file. Select OK once the pages are selected. You will return to the Plot dialog box.
5.
Select OK in the Plot dialog box to create the files.
If there are already DXF files in the same subdirectory of the PLOT directory (from a previous use of this function) the software will prompt “There are DXF files in the plot directory. Delete?” Select Yes if you wish to delete the existing files and continue. Select Cancel if you wish to abort the DXF plot function.
8-25
Plotting
Plotting Selected Layers RSWire has the capability to plot selected drawing layers. This is useful if, for example, you wish to show or hide mounting information on a panel layout drawing, or show or hide certain texts on a schematic drawing. To plot by layer, the user creates a layer group consisting of one or more selected layers. A layer group can then be selected for plotting. All the standard RSWire drawing layers are available for inclusion in a layer group. (See page 5-127 for a list of layers.) If you have created custom drawing layers, these must first be defined in RSWire using the Define Layers function before they can be included in a layer group. See page 8-31.
Creating and Selecting Layer Groups To plot by layer, the layer first must be assigned to a layer group. A group can consist of one or more layers. To create a layer group 1.
Select File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages.
File Print/Plot Multiple Pages The Print/Plot Pages dialog box will appear. 2.
Select the Layer Groups button. The Layer Printing Control dialog box will appear.
8-26
Plotting
Layer Printing Control Active
Layer Control On Off Layer Group
Select Modify... Delete
Add... OK
Cancel
Help...
Enter New Group Name
Enter a name for the new layer group in the field above the Add button. Then select the Add button. 3.
The Modify Groups dialog box will appear.
Modify Groups Layer Names
Layer Group
ECS_LEV_FIELD ECS_LEV_LINE ECS_LEV_LINE_WNO ECS_LEV_PG_FRAME ECS_LEV_PG_LADDER ECS_LEV_PH_DATA ECS_LEV_PH_EED ECS_LEV_PH_TMP
Delete OK
Add Cancel
Help...
8-27
Plotting
Existing layer names are listed in the Layer Names field. Select (highlight) the names of the layers that you wish to include in the layer group. Then select the Add button. The selected layers will be listed in the Layer Group field. When you have added all the desired layers for the group select the OK button. 4.
The Layer Groups dialog box will return. The newly created layer group will be listed in the Layer Group field.
Selecting a Layer Group for Plotting To select a layer group for plotting: 1.
Select File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages.
File Print/Plot Multiple Pages The Print/Plot Pages dialog box will appear. 2.
Select the Layer Groups button.
3.
The Layer Printing Control dialog box will appear. Select the On radio button in the Layer Control section.
Layer Printing Control Active
Layer Control On Off Layer Group
Select
template
Modify... Delete
Add... OK
8-28
Cancel
Help...
Plotting
4.
Existing layer groups are listed in the Layer Group field. Select (highlight) the name of the layer group that you wish to plot.
5.
Then select the Select button. The selected layer group name will appear in the Active field.
6.
Select the OK button. The Print/Plot Pages dialog box will return. You can then select pages for plotting with the Page Selection button.
7.
The plot by layer mode will remain in effect during the work session until you return to the Layer Groups dialog box and select the Off radio button in the Layer Control area.
Modifying a Layer Group To add or remove layers in an existing layer group: 1.
Select the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function.
2.
Select the Layer Groups button. The Layer Printing Control dialog box will appear.
3.
Select (highlight) the name of the layer group to be modified.
4.
Select the Modify button. The Modify Groups dialog box will appear. Layers that are currently in the group are listed in the Layer Group field. All available layer names are listed in the Layer Names field.
5.
Use the Delete button to remove selected layer names from the Layer Group field. To add a layer name to the group, select the layer name in the Layer Names field followed by the Add.
Deleting a Layer Group To delete an existing symbol group: 1.
Select the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function.
2.
Select the Layer Groups button. The Layer Printing Control dialog box will appear.
3.
Select (highlight) the name of the layer group to be deleted.
8-29
Plotting
4.
8-30
Select the Delete button.
Plotting
Defining Custom Drawing Layers If you have created custom drawing layers, these must first be defined in RSWire using the Define Layers function before these layers can be included in a layer group for plotting by layer. Define a Layer 1.
Select File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages.
File Print/Plot Multiple Pages The Print/Plot Pages dialog box will appear. 2.
Select the Define Layer button.
3.
The Define Layers dialog box will appear. A list of existing, defined layer names appears on the left side of the dialog box. Define Layers Existing Layer Names ECS_LEV_FIELD ECS_LEV_LINE ECS_LEV_LINE_WNO ECS_LEV_PG_FRAME ECS_LEV_PG_LADDER ECS_LEV_PH_DATA ECS_LEV_PH_EED ECS_LEV_PH_TMP
Remove
OK
Help
Cancel
Add
Save
Enter Layer Name
4.
Enter the name of the layer that you wish to define in the field above the Add button. Then select the Add button. The name of the newly defined layer will then appear in the list in alphabetical order.
5.
If you wish the layer to remain defined in future work sessions select the Save button. If you only wish to define it for the current work session select OK.
8-31
Plotting
Remove (un–define) a Layer When a layer is removed from the Existing Layer Names list, this layer name can no longer be included in a layer group. The removed layer still exists, it is simply not listed in the Define Layers dialog box. A removed layer can be added to the layer list again at a later time.
8-32
1.
Select the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function and then the Define Layer button.
2.
Select (highlight) the layer name that you wish to remove.
3.
Select the Remove button.
4.
If you wish the layer name to remain un–defined in future work sessions select the Save button. If you only wish to un–define it for the current work session select the OK button.
Reports
9 Reports This section describes the various information reports and lists that can be generated in RSWireTM Designer. The report functions are found under the Reports pull–down menu. They are divided into a number of submenus, each of which contain several specific list functions. These submenus are described in the following sections.
Reports Project Libraries Connections Terminals Wire PLC–List Parts MS Access Reports Comma Separated Error Checking
The Tools > System Settings > Report Settings function displays a dialog box that allows a number of list output settings to be made. See page 7-5. See Section 14, List Generator Configuration, for information on customizing the formats of the various reports and lists. The following sections are included:
Printing Lists from RSWire Project Reports Project Full Project Brief Installations Page Full Page Brief
9-1
Reports
9-2
Table of Contents Library Reports Macro Symbols Device Type Full Device Type Brief Parts Foreign Languages Page Formats Connections Reports Wire List Wire Labels Cable List Field Wire Signals Terminals Reports Terminals Terminal Strips PLC–List Report Parts Reports Compile Parts File Master List Bill of Materials Purchase Order Job Costing Dimension List MS Access Reports Comma Separated Reports Error Checking Reports Unreferenced Signals Report Device Without Parent Report
Reports
Printing Lists from RSWire When a list is sent from RSWire to a printer, the default method for printing is to use the DOS PRINT command. RSWire creates a file and then “shells” out to DOS and calls a batch file in the RS\WORK directory. The name of the file to be printed is sent as a parameter to the batch call (%2). The name of the batch file to be called is named in the Tools > System Settings > Printer Configuration dialog box in one of the numbered Printer fields. See page 7-9. Up to five different batch files can be used at any given time. The batch files can be written to send the print files to different printers or to imbed escape sequences for the printer so that different printer setups for fonts, paper orientations, etc., can be assigned to the five printers. This can be done by the use of an ECHO command with a redirection to the appropriate printer. For example, this line would send “ [ESC] FF” to LPT1 at the start of every print job: ECHO [ESC] FF > LPT1 ] PRINT %2 Or This line would send a whole file of text or escape sequences: TYPE PRINTER1.ESC > LPT1 The standard default batch is PRINTER.BAT. This file uses the DOS PRINT COMMAND. Other methods can also be used in the batch file: “TYPE “TYPE “COPY “COPY
%2 %2 %2 %2
> LPT1” > LPT1.DOS” LPT1” LPT1.DOS”
You can verify that these lines will work on your system by typing them on the DOS command line while shelled out of DOS and substituting an actual text file name for the “%2”. Other methods may also be available with your network or spooling software. NPRINT for example.
9-3
Reports
Project Reports The Reports > Project submenu allows you to generate lists of projects and the installations and pages contained in those projects.
Reports Project Project Full Project Brief Installations Page Full Page Brief Table of Contents Project Full This function generates a list of RSWire projects that currently exist on the system in the designated project directory (RS\PROJECT\WORK). The list includes project name, number of pages, description, job number, drawing number and additional description.
Project Brief This function also lists all RSWire projects, but in a more concise format that does not include the additional description.
Installations This function generates a list of all installations in a selected project.
Page Full This function generates a detailed list of all drawing pages in a project including page descriptions, format number, location, date, etc. When you select this function a Select Project – Installation dialog box appears allowing you to select a project and (if desired) limit the list to a single installation.
9-4
Reports
Page Brief This function generates a more concise list of drawing pages in a project, including only page, description, location, date and name. When you select this function a Select Project – Installation dialog box appears allowing you to select a project and (if desired) limit the list to a single installation.
Table of Contents This function generates a graphical page list. The pages are listed in table format, with columns for installation, page number, description, location, date and macro.
9-5
Reports
Library Reports The Reports > Libraries submenu provides a selection of lists of information that is relevant to all projects. This includes lists of macros, symbols, device types, and language texts.
Reports Libraries Macro Symbols Device Type Full Device Type Brief Parts Full Data Preview Brief Data Preview Full Data Printout Brief Data Printout Foreign Languages Page Formats
Macro This function generates a list of available macros in the currently loaded symbol library. Sorting can be performed by macro name and macro description.
Symbols This function generates a list of all the symbols in the currently loaded symbol library. Note
If you have not looked at any drawing page since entering RSWire, the system may prompt “No catalog loaded” when you select the macro or symbol list. In this case, you can open a drawing page that utilizes the desired symbol catalog.
Device Type Full This function provides a list of device types. (In RSWire, a device type is a definition that ties together a parent symbol, a child symbol, and a cross reference symbol.) The list contains detailed information about the device types including the names of the parent, child and cross reference symbols and the distance of the cross reference symbol from the parent symbol reference point. 9-6
Reports
Device Type Brief This function generates a concise list of available device types consisting of device name and description.
Parts The Library > Parts report functions allow you to create reports on information in the parts database. Full Data Preview – This function displays a detailed listing of parts data on the screen. Brief Data Preview – This function displays a more concise listing of parts data on the screen including part number, description, manufacturer and catalog number.. Full Data Printout – This function generates a detailed printout of parts data. Brief Data Printout – This function generates a more concise printout of parts data on the screen including part number, description, manufacturer and catalog number..
Foreign Languages This function allows foreign language lists to be searched and listed. RSWire includes a file containing lists of commonly used technical words and phrases in multiple languages (English, German, French, etc.). By entering the number for the word or phrase in the drawing (instead of the word itself), RSWire can automatically display the word or phrase in up to three of the available languages. The Foreign Languages function displays the following Language Text Database dialog box.
9-7
Reports
Language Text Database List
Selected Languages English German French Spanish Netherlands Italian
All Selected Languages Translated Texts Not Translated Filter Text Number
Cancel
Help...
The Selected Languages field allows you to select one or more languages for searching and/or listing. Use standard Windows selection keys (hold down
9-8
Reports
Language Text Database
TEXTNO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OK
DRIVE MOTOR DRIVE E-VALVE MOUNTINGS PUMP AMPLIFIER THROTTLE ORIFICE TRANSFORMER
Click in column headers to sort texts
Page Formats This Reports > Libraries > Page Formats function generates a list of RSWire drawing page formats including dimensions and descriptions.
9-9
Reports
Connections Reports The Reports > Connections submenu provides wire related list information.
Reports Connections Wire List Wire Labels Cable List Field Wire Signals
Wire List The Reports > Connections > Wire List function generates a list of wires which includes the following information: wire number, gauge, color, source (from), destination (to). When you select the Wire List function, a dialog box will appear asking if you wish to create a project connection list. This connection list is a source file that is used to generate the wire list. Warning
Create project connection list?
Yes
No
Cancel
If you have not yet created a connection list file for the project, or have made changes since the last connection list was generated, select the Yes button. If you wish to base the wire list on an existing connection list file, select the No button. The Connection List dialog box will appear.
9-10
Reports
Connection List File Name
L1.LST
Installation
LINE1
Search...
Location Comment File Name(s) L1.LST L2.LST WIRELIST
Parameter
Search... LINE1 WIRE LIST
LINE1 WIRE LIST LINE2 WIRE LIST TOTAL WIRE LIST
Open Connections
Delete OK
Cancel
Help...
To create a new connection list: In the File Name field enter the name you wish the connection list to have. In the Installation field enter nothing if you wish to include all installations. Enter an installation name if you wish to restrict the contents of the list to the specified installation. In the Location field enter nothing if you wish to include all locations. Enter a location name if you wish to restrict the contents of the list to the specified location. In the Comment field enter a description of the connection list. This will help you distinguish the various connection lists later. The Parameter button provides additional toggles to include or restrict certain types of terminal information. See page 9-13. Selecting the Open Connections toggle will generate a list consisting only of open connections. 9-11
Reports
Select OK to generate the wire list. To use an existing connection list: The File Name(s) area of the Connection List dialog box lists the available connection lists. Select an existing list by pointing and clicking; the file name and description is listed in the upper part of the dialog box. The Parameter button provides additional toggles to include or restrict certain types of terminal information. See page 9-13. Selecting the Open Connections toggle will generate a list consisting only of open connections. Select OK to generate the wire list. Note
When there are more than two devices connected to a potential, the connections shown in the wire list are determined by the connection search priorities that the software uses when analyzing the schematic drawings. See page 9-15.
Note
To delete an existing connection list, select the list name in the Connection List dialog box and then select the Delete button.
9-12
Reports
Connection List Parameters The Parameter button in the Connection List dialog provides settings to include or restrict certain types of terminal information. The following dialog box is displayed. Connection List Parameters Suppress Terminal Blocks Clip Jumpers Terminal Blocks Wire Jumpers Terminal Block Connections Cable Connections Target Definition Both Targets Match Selection Selection Filters To Target 1 Print Target Complete
OK
Partial
Cancel
Help...
Suppress: Terminal Blocks Clip Jumpers – When this checkbox is Off all connections are shown in the connection list. When On, connections between two consecutively numbered terminals possessing the same device ID (terminal strip) will not appear in the connection list. The jumper connection will then be displayed in the terminal plan interconnection drawings and subsequent lists. Terminal Blocks Wire Jumpers – When Off all connections are shown in the connection list. When On, connections between two non–consecutively numbered terminals possessing the same device ID (terminal strip) will not appear in the connection list. The jumper connection will then be displayed in the terminal plan interconnection drawings and subsequent lists.
9-13
Reports
Terminal Block Connections – When Off all connections are shown in the connection list. When On, connections between two terminals possessing different device IDs (terminal strip) will not appear in the connection list. The cabling information will then be displayed in the terminal plan interconnection drawings and subsequent lists. Cable Connections – When checked, will omit cable connections from the connection list. Target Definition: Both Targets Match Selection – When this checkbox is On, both targets (destinations) in the connection list must match the installation and location defined by the user in the Installation and Location fields of the Create Connection List dialog box. When Off only one of the destinations must match the installation and location defined by the user. The system will display the connection between the devices in their respective installations and locations when connected by wires. For example: suppose a wire list is generated based on the installation L1 and the location E1. Suppose the following wire list is generated with the Both Targets Match Selection checkbox turned OFF. FROM Inst.
Loc.
TO Device ID
Inst.
Loc.
Device ID
= L1
+ E1
PB1
= L1
+ E1
TB1:10
= L2
+ ST1
LS2
= L1
+ E1
SS2
The first connection in the list matches the specified installation and location (L1 and E1) on both the From and the To sides. The second connection matches the specified installation and location only on the To side. If the connection list were created again with the Both Targets Match Selection checkbox turned ON, only the first connection shown above would be listed because both sides would have to match the specified installation and location. Selection Filters To Target 1 – This checkbox works in conjunction with the Both Targets Match Selection checkbox (which must be OFF for this checkbox to serve any purpose). Turning ON the Selection Filters to Target 1 checkbox will place all destinations that match the installation and location specified by the user ( in the Installation and Location fields of the Create Connection List dialog box) on the From side of the list. For the example listing shown above, turning this checkbox ON would have the effect of reversing the second connection the next time a listing was made, as follows:
9-14
Reports
FROM Inst.
Loc.
TO Device ID
Inst.
Loc.
Device ID
= L1
+ E1
PB1
= L1
+ E1
TB1:10
= L2
+ E1
SS2
= L2
+ ST1
LS2
Print Target These radio buttons determine whether the complete target name is listed including installation and location. Selecting Complete will include installation and location. Selecting Partial will exclude the installation and location. Select OK to return to the Connection List dialog box. Then select OK to create the connection list. The Wire List output is done with the Reports > Connections > Wire List function. Connection Search Priorities The software uses a search routine to determine connections on potentials where more than two devices are connected. For most wires, only a “from” and “to” need to be determined; but in some cases there may be many devices all connected to the same potential. The software searches these wires in the following manner: The search of a potential begins on the left–hand side of the lowest line number on the connected symbols. If the page format in use does not have line numbers, the leftmost connection will be used as the starting point. If two connections on a page without line numbers are lined up, the topmost one will take precedence. If a diagonal connection symbol exists on the wire, the connection search will begin at the connection point left of position 1 on the diagonal connection symbol (see diagram on next page). If multiple diagonal connection symbols exist, the search will begin with the upper–leftmost connection. The system will follow the wire from this first connection until it encounters another connection point. Here it analyzes all wires incoming to the connection point and looks for unanalyzed wires. In a vertical (U.S. type) ladder diagram, the system uses the following priorities at each connection point: 1st priority: horizontal line to the left 2nd priority: horizontal line to the right or slanting 3rd priority: vertical line upwards 4th priority: vertical line downwards 5th priority: diagonal line 9-15
Reports
3rd
T1
Connection Search From Left Side of T2
1st
2nd
T2
4th 5th Search Priorities
JIC Style Diagram
For horizontal (IEC, DIN) style diagrams, the system searches for connections using the following priorities: 1st priority: vertical line upwards 2nd priority: vertical line downwards 3rd priority: horizontal line to the left 4th priority: horizontal line to the right 5th priority: diagonal line 1st
3rd
4th 5th
T1
2nd
T2
Connection Search From Left Side Of T2
Search Priorities
IEC Style Diagram
For both diagram types (ladder and IEC), these priorities only apply if a perpendicular connection is used as the connection point. If the diagonal wiring symbol DW is used (selected with Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function), the subsequent course of the search depends on the orientation of the diagonal wiring symbol: incoming at connection point 1 continue at 2 incoming at connection point 3 continue at 2 incoming at connection point 2 continue at 3 incoming at connection point 2 continue at 1 if 3 already processed
9-16
Reports
3 1
2
DW Symbol Connection Points
After the search is completed, each connection along the search path is put on the connection (wire) list. If the list did not contain any diagonal wires, the list will be sorted alphanumerically according to the “From” part of each connection. If ANY diagonal wires exist, connections will be shown on the wire list in the order they were analyzed. The above process is completed for each potential and the information is added to the connection (wire) list.
9-17
Reports
Wire Labels Use the Reports > Connections > Wire Labels to generate a list of wire numbers which can be printed in the form of wire labels. Select:
Reports Connections Wire Labels The wire labels will be printed, displayed on the screen or saved to a file depending on the output mode selected with the Report Settings tab in Tools > System Settings function. Note
Wire labels cannot be filtered using the list generator filter function.
Cable List The Cable List is a list of cables in the project including installation, location, device ID and number of conductors.
Reports Connections Cable List
Field Wire The Field Wire report is a list of cables in the project including the internal and external connections of each conductor. The list indicates which conductors have been used (assigned).
Reports Connections Field Wire
Signals The Signals report function displays a list of signal symbols in the project showing each symbol’s device ID and Installation – page – line number position. It also indicates whether the signal is an incoming or outgoing symbol type.
Reports Connections Signals
9-18
Reports
Terminals Reports The Terminals report functions generate information on terminals strips.
Reports Terminals Terminals Terminal Strips Terminals The Terminals function generates a list of terminal strips. For each strip, the internal and external connections of each terminal are indicated. Select:
Reports Terminals Terminals
Terminal Strips The Terminal Strips function generates a list of terminal strips in the project including installation, location, device ID, and number of terminals. Select:
Reports Terminals Terminal Strips The list shows the terminal strip ID and the number of terminals used in the project.
9-19
Reports
PLC–List Report The PLC–List report function generates a list of programmable controller I/O modules in the project. This list indicates the address and descriptive text of each I/O point of each PLC module parent symbol. Installation and line number are given for PLC child symbols. Select:
Reports PLC–List
9-20
Reports
Parts Reports The Reports > Parts submenu provides a selection of lists jointly compiled from the items included in a project and the data in the parts database.
Reports Parts Compile Parts File Master List Bill of Materials Purchase Order Job Costing Dimension List Compile Parts File The Compile Parts File function creates a source file of parts information from the current project that is used to generate other job lists including the Master Parts List, Bill of Material, Purchase Order List, Job Costing List and Dimension List.
Reports Parts Compile Parts File The Master Parts List dialog box will appear. Master Parts List Project:
Output File Name:
project name
MAST.LST
Replace Language Text
Language
Replace Multi–Line Text (^)
1:
Only On–Line Selected Pages
English
2:
Only Device IDs With Part Number 3:
Include Terminals OK
Cancel
Help...
The Output File field allows the name of the parts file to be entered. The default filename is MAST.LST.
9-21
Reports
The following checkboxes determine what is included in the parts file: Replace Language Text – Select this checkbox to overwrite the user–defined function text language selected in the Project Parameters dialog box (you must then specify new languages in the Language fields of the Compile Parts File dialog box). Replace Multi–Line Text – Select this checkbox to eliminate the control symbol (^) in the lists to be created. When text is entered on a drawing this symbol indicates a line break. For function text printouts, leave this checkbox unselected to maintain text locations for applications such as nameplate generation. Only On–Line Selected Pages – Select this checkbox to create a file only from those pages with online control turned on. Only Device IDs With Part Number – Select this checkbox to restrict the list to only those device IDs that have a part number assigned. Include Terminals – Select this checkbox to include terminals in the list. Select OK to generate the parts file. The parts file will be stored in the RS\PROJECT\WORK directory in the subdirectory for the currently active project.
Master List The master parts list includes the device ID, page/line number, part numbers, and function text for items in the schematics. In order to generate this list, a parts file must first have been created with the Reports > Parts > Compile Parts File function. Select:
Reports Parts Master List A Master List dialog box will appear listing the available parts files. Select a file name and select the OK button to generate the master list.
9-22
Reports
Bill of Materials The bill of materials is a list of parts used in a given project. The list shows every device ID to which a part number has been assigned, the part number, the part description and manufacturer. In order to generate this list, a parts file must first be created with the Reports > Parts > Compile Parts File function. Select:
Reports Parts Bill of Materials The following dialog box will appear: Bill Of Materials Master List:
Select: Installation: Location:
MAST.LST MASTB.LST
OK
Cancel
Help...
You can select from different parts files which are listed on the left side of the dialog box. The output can be limited to information from specific installations or locations by entering the desired installation and location names in the Installation and Location fields. Wildcard (*) entries are allowed. Select OK to generate the list.
9-23
Reports
Purchase Order List The purchase order list is a quantified list of part numbers (with descriptions) used in a project. All items with matching part numbers are combined and shown as a quantity. In order to generate this list, a parts file must first be created with the Reports > Parts > Compile Parts File function. Select:
Reports Parts Purchase Order The following dialog box appears. Purchase Order List Master List:
Select: Installation: Location:
MAST.LST MASTB.LST
Print Device ID’s OK
Cancel
Help...
You can select from different parts files listed on the left side of the dialog box. The output can be limited to information from specific installations or locations by entering the desired installation and location names in the Installation and Location fields. Wildcard (*) entries are allowed. If you select the Print Device ID’s checkbox, each item on the list will include the device IDs to which that part number was assigned. Select OK to generate the list.
9-24
Reports
Job Costing List The job costing list calculates the total cost of the project including material, assembly and wiring time, and mark–up. In order to generate this list, a parts file must first be created with the Reports > Parts > Compile Parts File function. Select:
Reports Parts Job Costing The following dialog box appears. Job Costing List Master List:
Select: Installation: Location:
MAST.LST MASTB.LST Hourly Cost
0.00
Mark–Up
0.00
Print Device ID OK
Cancel
Help...
You can select from different parts files listed on the left side of the dialog box. The output can be limited to information from specific installations or locations by entering the desired installation and location names in the Installation and Location fields. Wildcard (*) entries are allowed. The Hourly Cost field allows you to enter a labor cost value which, in conjunction with the assembly and wiring times from the parts database, will be used to calculate the total assembly and wiring costs. The Mark–Up field allows you to set a mark–up percentage beyond the prices in the parts database.
9-25
Reports
If you select the Print Device ID toggle, each item on the list will include the device IDs to which that part number was assigned. Select OK to generate the list.
9-26
Reports
Dimension List The dimension list calculates the total area, maximum depth and total weight of the components in the project. Subtotals are calculated for each location. In order to generate this list, a parts file must first be created with the Reports > Parts > Compile Parts File function. Select:
Reports Parts Dimension List The software will prompt you to create a master parts file. The following will then appear dialog box appears: Dimension List Master List:
Select: Installation: Location:
MAST.LST MASTB.LST
OK
Cancel
Help...
You can select from different master lists listed on the left side of the dialog box. The output can be limited to information from specific installations or locations by entering the desired installation and location names in the Installation and Location fields. Wildcard (*) entries are allowed. Select OK to create the dimension list.
9-27
Reports
MS Access Reports Parts reports can be generated in Microsoft Access format. See the previous section, Parts Reports, for descriptions of these reports.
Reports MS Access Reports Print Preview
Note
Master List Bill of Materials Purchase Order Job Costing Dimension List
It is not necessary to compile a parts file for these reports. Access obtains the information directly from the project database. To print a MS–Access report – select the Reports > MS Access Reports > Print menu and then the desired list. To view a MS–Access report on screen – select the Reports > MS Access Reports > Preview menu and then the desired list.
9-28
Reports
Comma Separated Reports The Reports > Comma Separated submenu provides list generator functions that produce various lists in a comma separated format. List output files in this format can be imported easily into spreadsheet and database programs for further manipulation and formatting. See previous sections for descriptions of these lists.
Reports Comma Separated
Project Libraries Connections Terminals PLC–List Parts Error Checking
9-29
Reports
Error Checking Reports The Reports > Error Checking submenu allows you to generate lists related to signals and parent/child referencing. These functions are performed for the currently active project. Use the Manage > Project > Project Preselect function to select a different project.
Reports Error Checking Unreferenced Signals Device Without Parent Unreferenced Signals Report This function displays a list of unmatched signal IDs (an outgoing signal without a corresponding incoming signal, or vice versa). The list shows each symbol’s device ID and Installation – page – line number position. It also indicates whether the signal is an incoming or outgoing symbol type. If there are no unreferenced signals, the software will display the message “All signal cross references are matched up.”
Device Without Parent Report This function displays a list of child symbols that exist in the schematics without a corresponding parent symbol. For example, a relay contact for which there is no coil with the same device ID.
9-30
Panel Layout
10
Panel Layout
This section contains instructions for producing a layout of devices in a cabinet or other type of assembly. Overview Although the user can use ordinary drawing functions to produce a panel layout diagram, this would not take advantage of the time–saving features of the RSWireTM Designer panel layout mode. When you create schematic diagrams with RSWire, the system allows you to enter a part number for each device in the drawing. This part number ties the device in the drawing to the parts database (see figure below). The database, in turn, contains information about a specific part, including dimensions and the name of a layout symbol which can graphically represent the part on a layout drawing. The Panel Layout mode can access this information. When the user wishes to create a panel layout, the Panel Layout function will automatically present the user with a list of every item in the drawing for which a part number has been assigned. The user simply selects one or more items from the list and then selects a position on the layout page. The system places the symbol and labels it with the device ID. This greatly speeds the production of the layout drawing. Schematic Diagram
PB206
10250T101–23X
Parts Database
Part Number
10250T101–23X
Description
PUSHBUTTON N.O.
Manuf. ACME Symbols Ref. PBNO Wire
Part number: 10250T101–23X
Lay.
Panel Layout Drawing
PB206
PB223
L–PB
10-1
Panel Layout
Preliminary Panel Layout Steps The following preconditions are necessary to produce panel layouts using the Panel Layout function.
10-2
1.
Ensure that the parts database contains information on the components to be used in the schematic diagrams. If you are using layout symbols (see next step), the layout symbol name should be assigned to each part in the database that the layout symbol will represent. There is a layout symbol name field for this purpose. See Section 13 for information on using the database.
2.
If you want the software to prompt you with a layout symbol (as opposed to a dimensioned box), create the necessary symbols. See page 10-9 for layout symbol creation procedures. A number of layout symbols are provided with RSWire; these symbols all have names that begin with the characters “L–”.
3.
When you create the schematic diagrams, assign part numbers to the symbols, either as you place the symbol or afterwards (right click on symbol and select Part Number from the pop–up menu).
Panel Layout
Panel Layout Procedure Use the following steps (after the preliminary steps on the previous page): 1.
Using the File > New > Page function, create a drawing page for the panel layout in an appropriate scale (e.g. 1:4). You must select “Panel Layout” in the Page Type field. Commonly used portions of layouts can be set up as macros and specified in the Page Macro field.
New Page Project
Select...
Installation
Select...
Location
Select...
Format Name
D–2COL
Select Page Format...
Set Scale
1
Scale 1: Online Page Type
Page
Panel Layout Title Block
Page Macro
Select ...
Select ... OK
Parameters 1...
2...
3...
4...
5...
6...
7...
8...
9...
10...
Cancel
Select “Panel Layout”
Help...
2.
Set an appropriate grid size to allow proper positioning of components (Tools > System Settings > Grid Settings).
3.
Select the Tools > Panel Layout function. The Panel Layout dialog box will appear.
10-3
Panel Layout
Panel Layout Select Devices...
Use Text Parameter
Text Parameter...
Display Placed Components Selected:
0
Place as a Group
OK
4.
Exit
Help...
Select the Select Devices button. The Select Devices dialog box will appear. Select Devices Devices Terminals Installation:
Select...
Location:
Select...
Device ID:
Display All Part Numbers
OK
10-4
Cancel
Help...
Panel Layout
This dialog box allows you to select which items from the schematics will be prompted for placement in the panel layout drawing. Select OK to continue.
5.
a.
Select the Terminals checkbox to display only terminals, or select the Devices checkbox to display all other items.
b.
If desired, you can use the Installation, Location and Device ID fields to restrict the listing to items that match these entries. Wildcard (*) entries are permitted in these fields. Use the Select buttons to view and select from lists of existing installations and locations.
c.
Select the Display All Part Numbers checkbox to display all part numbers in cases where more than one part number is assigned to a single device ID. If this checkbox is not selected, only the first part number assigned to each device ID will be displayed.
The Panel Layout dialog box will then reappear with the selected items displayed.
Panel Layout Select Devices...
Use Text Parameter
Text Parameter...
Display Placed Components Selected:
Place as a Group
0
Pos.
Installation
0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 0011
LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1 LINE1
Location EN1 EN1 EN1 EN1 EN1 EN1 EN3 EN3 EN3 PBS1 PBS1 OK
Device ID CR303 CR307 CR310 CR314 CR337 PB310 GW320 SS325 SS330 PB348 PB350 Exit
Dim X 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
Dim Y 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 2.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
Symbol L–ABNCR L–ABNCR L–ABNCR L–ABNCR L–ABNCR L–PB L–SS L–SS L–PB L–PB
Help...
10-5
Panel Layout
The dialog box lists all the device IDs (including installation and location) for which a part number was assigned. This is the list that you will select from to place items in the panel layout. If any X and Y dimensions have been assigned to the part in the parts database, these are listed in the Dim X and Dim Y columns. If a panel layout symbol has been assigned to the part number in the parts database, this is indicated in the Symbol column.
6. Note
a.
Use the Text Parameter button to make the desired settings (size, label origin, etc.) for the device IDs and other text that will appear on the drawing. See page 5-34 for more information on the text parameter functions.
b.
Selecting the Display Placed Components checkbox will cause items that have been placed in the panel layout to be marked with an “X” in the leftmost column. If Display Placed Components is not selected, items that have been placed are removed from the list as they are placed.
c.
Select the Use Text Parameter checkbox to use the text parameters that you set with the Text Parameter button (see above). If you do not select this checkbox, the software will use the default text settings for device IDs.
d.
Select the Place as a Group checkbox if you wish to simultaneously place multiple items in the panel layout with one click of the button. You can select multiple items in the list (hold down the <Shift> or
To place items in the panel layout select one or more items from the list in the Panel Layout dialog box and select the OK button.
If the item was assigned a layout symbol in the parts database it will be represented on the panel layout by that layout symbol. If the item was assigned no layout symbol but was assigned X and Y dimensions it will be represented by a box having those dimensions. If only the x–coordinate is entered, the part will be represented on a panel layout as a circle having this value as its diameter (if no other symbol is named in the Layout Symbol field). To place a single item, select the item followed by the OK button. The panel layout page will appear. Point at the desired position for the layout symbol and click the left mouse button.
10-6
Panel Layout
To place multiple items, you can select multiple individual items from the list by pointing and clicking on each item while holding the
10-7
Panel Layout
Panel Layout/Schematic Comparison Check The software will automatically check for items in the panel layout that have been deleted from the schematic drawing after the panel layout was created. This check is performed the next time you start the panel layout function. After deleting one or more items from the schematic, when you start the panel layout function again, the following dialog box will appear that lists the items in the panel layout that no longer exist in the schematic. Panel Layout Non placed devices in drawing LINE1 NO_LOC PB106
Mark devices to be deleted
OK
Cancel
Help...
To delete the listed item(s) from the panel layout, select the item(s) and select the OK button. To leave the listed item(s) in the panel layout, select the Cancel button.
10-8
Panel Layout
Creating a Panel Layout Symbol If you want RSWire to prompt you with a layout symbol (as opposed to a dimensioned box), you must assign a layout symbol to the parts data that you use in your project. A selection of layout symbols are provided with RSWire (they have names that begin with the characters “L–”), or you can create your own symbols using the following procedure. 1.
Create a blank drawing page. Select “Schematic Diagram” as the page type. Generally, layout symbols are created in a 1:1 scale, so select this scale for the drawing page. The Online toggle for this page should be turned off.
2.
With the blank page active, select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function.
3.
In the New/Modify Symbol dialog box, enter the symbol name and description. (The layout symbols provided with RSWire all have names that begin with the characters “L–”. This is not required, but makes it easier to find and list the layout symbols.)
4.
Also in the New/Modify Symbol dialog box, select the symbol group GS1–General Symbol (no cross ref.).
5.
Select OK to continue.
6.
Define a reference point for the symbol with the Manage > Symbol > Reference Point function. You can redefine this point later.
7.
Draw the symbol using RSWire drawing functions or import an existing DWG file. If you are importing a file, follow the steps given on page 6-21.
8.
Enter the attribute text that will receive the device ID when the symbol is placed in a panel layout. To do this, first select the Draw > Text function. In the Text dialog box’s Text Input field, enter a “?”. Also select an appropriate text size, label origin, etc. Select OK to continue. Select a position for the text. The Definition of Text Attributes dialog box will appear.
10-9
Panel Layout
Text Attribute Definition
Select Activate Toggle
Symbol Text: ? I/O Attribute
Attribute Activate
Activate Address
Select DID,Panel/Wire Dia
I/O Text
No:
9
Function Text
DID,Panel/Wire Dia
Select the Attribute Activate toggle and select “DID,Panel/Wire Dia” from the list of attribute types. Select OK to continue. 9.
If you wish function text associated with the schematic symbol to appear at the layout symbol, enter another “?” attribute text as in the previous step, but for this text select “Function Text” from the list of attribute types.
10. Add any other drawing elements, texts, etc., that you wish the symbol to have. Redefine the reference point if desired with the Manage > Symbol > Reference Point function. 11. Store the symbol: Select the Manage > Symbol > Save function and define a window around the symbol elements. Remember that if you wish RSWire to automatically prompt the layout symbol in the panel layout mode, the layout symbol must be assigned to the appropriate part numbers in the parts database, and those part numbers must be assigned to device IDs in your project. The layout symbol name is entered in the Parts Database dialog box (Manage > Parts Database > Edit Form function) in the Symbols – Lay. field.
10-10
Panel Layout
Article Parts Database Part Number Description Manuf.
Date Created
Dimensions X 1.81
Changed
Y
2.82
Z
3.31
PMG Symbols Ref.
Catalog Price Price_S
0
Price_B
0
Wire
Units
Weight[lb]
0.00
Power[VA] 0.00
Lay. Discount
0 (C)over or (P)anel
Device Type Technical Description
Time[min] Assembly Wiring
Additional Part Numbers
Enter Layout Symbol Name
10-11
Panel Layout
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
10-12
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
11
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan RSWireTM Designer has functions that automatically compile information on all the terminals that exist in the project drawing pages. The user can view and edit this information in a table format. Graphic drawings of terminal strips can also be generated automatically. There are also Pin–Plug Plan functions that operate in the same manner as the terminal plan functions except that they gather and display pin and plug information rather than terminal and terminal strip information. The following sections are included:
Terminal Plan Overview Steps of Terminal Plan Creation Internal/External Connections and Jumpers Connection Search Priorities Terminal Plan Functions Terminal Plan Editor Graphical Terminal Plan Graphical Terminal Plan Macro Graphical Terminal Plan Configuration Graphical Terminal Plan Generation Pin–Plug Plan Pin–Plug Editing Graphical Pin–Plug Plan
11-1
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Terminal Plan Overview Steps of Terminal Plan Creation Once the schematics in the project are complete, use the following steps to create a terminal/cable plan. (More detailed information is given in the following sections.) 1.
Activate the Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Edit Terminals/Pin Plugs function. This function automatically generates a list of terminals and terminal connections according to the information in the project schematics.
2.
The Terminal Strip Selection dialog box will appear. Select the strip(s) that you wish to edit.
3.
Select the Edit button in the selection dialog box. The connections for the selected terminal strip(s) will be displayed in the Terminal Editor dialog box. Changes can now be made, such as cable assignment, reversing internal and external connections, sorting terminals, inserting spare terminals, and other operations.
4.
Use the Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Generate Graphical Plan function to automatically create a drawing page showing a representation of selected terminal strips.
Terminal Plan Creation Steps
CREATE SCHEMATICS
EDIT TERMINALS New destinations Change terminal numbers Assign part numbers Assign cables
GRAPH TERMINAL PLAN & TERMINAL LISTS
11-2
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Customization – Default formats for terminal lists and graphical terminal plans are included with the software. These formats can be customized to suit the user’s requirements.
Internal/External Connections and Jumpers “Internal” vs. “External” Connections – The terms “internal” and “external” are used to describe the two “sides” of connections to terminals. Other terms such as “from and to” or “source and destination” may be more familiar to you. The assignment of internal and external connections may be based on positioning in the schematic (left or right of the terminal) or by manual assignments made by the user. Terminals can also be designated as jumpers. Internal, External, and Jumper priorities are defined at the connection points of terminal symbols. In other words, a connection point can be “set” so that anything connected to it is considered an internal connection, external connection, or a jumper. This setting can be made in three different ways: 1.
Connection points can be defined as internal, external, or jumper when the terminal symbol is created (see page 6-63).
2.
Connection points can be designated as internal, external or jumper after the symbol is placed in a schematic by activating the Modify > Symbol function, selecting the desired terminal symbol and then selecting the Terminal Destinations toggle in the Modify Symbol dialog box. You can also use the Modify > Power–Editor function (or right click on a terminal symbol) and select “Jumper” from the pop–up menu.
3.
If the connection points of a terminal symbol in a schematic are undefined (have not been designated as internal, external, or jumper) the system has default priorities upon which it will make assumptions. For a terminal symbol with two connection points: 1st Connection Point – Internal 2nd Connection Point – External
1st CP
2nd CP
11-3
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
For a terminal symbol with five connection points: 1st Connection Point – Undefined 2nd Connection Point – Internal 3rd Connection Point – Jumper 4th Connection Point – External 5th Connection Point – Jumper
X1 Symbol – Connection Point Order 5 2
1
2
4
3
3
1 4
JIC
5
IEC
Why does it matter whether connection points are internal or external? Documentation listings, terminal plan macros, and editor screens for terminals show internal destinations on one side of the terminal and external destinations on the other side of the terminal. By changing the connection point designations, we have control over how the information is listed and displayed. Target Internal
Static Header Text Variable Data
–PB201 –PB203 –LS205
TB:No.
Target External
–TB1:1 –TB1:2 –TB1:3
+L1–STRIP2:1 +L1–STRIP2:2 +L1–STRIP2:3
Connection Search Priorities The Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Edit Terminals/Pin Plugs function causes the system to look along the wires in both directions from each terminal in the schematics. Signal cross references are also analyzed. The software uses search priorities in cases where a potential has more than two devices connected. These priorities are the same as those used in generating the connection list. See page 9-15.
11-4
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Terminal Plan Functions Functions related to the terminal plan are found in the Tools >Project Settings > Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration and Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan submenus.
Tools Project Settings Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration
Tools Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan Edit Terminals/Pin–Plugs Generate Graphical Plan
Tools > Project Settings >Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration – Configuration of the graphical terminal plan. See page 11-24. Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Edit Terminals/Pin Plugs – Terminal plan editor (table format). See page 11-6. Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Generate Graphical Plan – Generates a graphical terminal plan. See page 11-30. In addition, terminal lists can be generated under the Reports > Terminals submenu with the Terminals and Terminal Strips functions.
11-5
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Terminal Plan Editor The terminal plan editor mode compiles a list of terminals in the current project and allows the user to select and edit the terminal information. To enter the terminal plan editor select:
Tools Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan Edit Terminals/Pin–Plugs If no page is currently open, you will be asked to select a project. The Terminal Strip Selection dialog box will appear. This dialog box allows you to select which terminal strips will be included in the current editing session. Terminal Strip Selection
Search Installation
*
Location
*
Strip
*
Search...
View All...
Number of Selected Terminal Strips: 8 Terminal Strip Installation =LINE1 =LINE1 =LINE1 =LINE1 =LINE1 =LINE1 =LINE1 =LINE1
Location +BAY1 +BAY1 +BAY1 +CAB1 +EN1 +EN1 +EN1 +EN1
Terminal Strip -TB1 -TB2 -TB3 -TB -STRIP1 -STRIP2 -TB1 -TB2
Total 3 3 3 8 17 30 8 8
Edit... OK
11-6
Help
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
If you wish to limit the editing to a portion of the project, you can make entries in the Installation, Location and Strip fields to filter the list of terminal strips. Use asterisks (*) to make wild card entries. For example enter *BLDG1* in the Installation field to include any installation names containing the characters “BLDG1”. Select the Search button to display the filtered list of terminal strips. By limiting the editing session to part of the project you can improve editor response time for large projects and also make it easier to find a specific strip. The value shown on the Number of selected Terminal Strips line indicates the total number of strips that were found. The Terminal Strip section of the dialog box lists all the terminal strips that the system found in the current project (or selected portion). The strips are listed in alpha–numeric order by installation–location–terminal strip name. To select an individual strip for editing, select (highlight) the strip and select the Edit button. To select all listed strips for editing, select the View All button. The Terminal Editor dialog box will then appear.
11-7
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Editor Display You can resize the Terminal Editor dialog by dragging the lower right–hand corner. You can resize the width of the columns by pointing at the dividing line between the column headings and dragging. The information in the unshaded columns can be edited by double clicking inside a cell. Use the Settings > Wire Number function to select how many columns of wire number information (wire number, color, guage, etc.) are displayed. Use the Settings > Expand Columns to Fit function to expand the columns to display all the information they contain. Note
Installation/Location display – In RSWire a complete identification consists of an installation name (indicated by an “=”) followed by a location name (indicated by a “+”) followed by a device ID (indicated by a “–”). In the terminal editor list, the full name of the current terminal strip is given, but in the listing of internal and external targets, installations and locations are not shown unless they differ from that of the current terminal strip. In the following example, we can assume the Internal Targets belong to Installation “L1” because no other installation name is given. However, they do have a different location name (“E1”). The External Targets consist only of a device ID so we can assume they belong to the same installation and location as the terminal strip. If you are viewing a single terminal strip, its installation and location will be shown at the top of the editing screen but not in the Strip:TB column.
Installation Location Device ID =L1+B1–TB5 Color
Internal Target
Strip: TB
+E1–STRIP1:1 +E1–STRIP1:2 +E1–STRIP1:3
–TB5:1 –TB5:2 –TB5:3
Internal Targets
Type
Page 1.10 1.11 1.12
Jumper
External Target –M110 –M111 –M112
External Targets
The following editing functions are available in the Terminal Editor dialog box.
11-8
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Terminal Editing Functions Note
You can access most of the terminal editing functions using the Edit pulldown menu in the Terminal Editor dialog box. There are also toolbar buttons for most of these functions at the top of this dialog.
Change Terminal Number To change a terminal block number in the terminal editor: 1.
Double click on the desired terminal block ID. The Device ID Assignment dialog box will appear.
2.
Change the terminal block ID as desired
3.
Select OK in the Device ID Assignment dialog box.
Double click to edit terminal ID
Any changes to terminal numbers are reflected in the schematic drawings.
11-9
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Rename Terminal Rename – This function allows you to change the terminal strip to which a terminal belongs. 1.
Display a terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog and select one or more terminals to be reassigned by highlighting the terminal names in the Strip TB column.
2.
Select the Edit > Rename function (use the pulldown menu inside the Terminal Editor dialog box).
3.
The Define Target dialog box will appear. Define Target Installation:
=LINE1
Select...
Location:
+EN1
Select...
Strip ID:
–TB4
Select...
OK
Note
11-10
Cancel
Help...
4.
Enter the Installation, Location and Strip ID of the terminal strip to which you wish the selected terminal block(s) to be assigned.
5.
Select OK. The reassigned terminal blocks will be removed from the terminal editor display (because they no longer belong to the current terminal strip).
If you reassign a terminal block to a strip that already contains a terminal block with the same number, the result will be two terminal blocks with the same number in that strip (unless you edit the terminal number).
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Renumber Terminals This function allows you to renumber all the terminals in the selected strip. Changes made with this function are reflected in the schematic drawings. 1.
Display a terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog.
2.
Select the Edit > Renumber function (use the pulldown menu inside the Terminal Editor dialog box) or use the Renumber toolbar button. The Renumber Terminal Strip dialog box will appear. Renumber Terminal Strip First Number:
1
Renumber Terminals with the Same Number OK
Cancel
Help...
3.
In the First Number field enter the number that you want to assign to the first terminal in the strip. Select the Renumber Terminals with the Same Number checkbox if you wish to renumber duplicate terminals as well.
4.
Select the OK button. All the terminals in the strip will be numbered sequentially from the first number. Changes made with this function will also be reflected in the schematic.
11-11
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Sort Terminals This function lets you change the order in which terminals are listed in the terminal editor. 1.
Display a terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog.
2.
Select the Edit > Sort function (use the pulldown menu inside the Terminal Editor dialog box) or select the Sort toolbar button. The Sort Terminals dialog box will appear. Sort Terminals Sort Terminal Blocks Sort by Terminal Number Sort by Internal Target Sort by External Target OK
3.
Note
Cancel
Help...
This dialog box lets you select whether terminals will be listed in order of Terminal Number, Internal Target, or External Target. Select the desired option followed by the OK button. The terminals will be listed in the selected order.
The Sort by Internal and External Target functions will take into account Installation and Location names even if these names are not displayed (installation and location names of targets are not displayed if they are the same as the current terminal strip). Generally, terminal sorting is done before renumbering.
11-12
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Move Terminals Move – This function allows you to move a terminal or a group of terminals from one position in the strip to another. This function will only affect the listing of terminals in the graphical terminal plan. 1.
Display a terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog.
2.
Select the group of terminals that you wish to move. Do this by selecting the first terminal in the group, holding down the <Shift> key and then selecting the last terminal in the group.
3.
Select the Edit > Move function (use the pulldown menu inside the Terminal Editor dialog box) or select the Move toolbar button.
4.
The system will prompt “Mark Destination Position.” By double clicking, select the terminal just ahead of where you want the moved terminals to be inserted. The terminals will be moved to that position.
5.
The software will ask you “Maintain Terminal Sequence?” Select OK if you wish the moved terminals to remain in the new position when you exit the terminal editor. Select No if you wish the move to last only for the current work session.
Create Spare This function allows you to insert additional terminals into a terminal strip. 1.
Display a terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog.
2.
Select the terminal just ahead of where you want the spare terminal inserted.
3.
Select the Edit > Create Spare function (use the pulldown menu inside the Terminal Editor dialog box) or select the Create Spare toolbar button.
4.
The Insert Spare Terminal dialog box will then appear, prompting you with the next available terminal number in the Terminal Number field. You can type over this number if desired. If you enter the number of an existing terminal, the software will ask if you wish to duplicate the terminal. If you answer Yes it will create a spare terminal with the same number.
5.
In the Quantity field you can specify how many spare terminals are to be inserted.
11-13
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Insert Spare Terminals Terminal Number
4
Quantity
1
OK
6.
Cancel
Help...
Select the OK button. The new terminals will appear in the list. The spare terminal number is followed by an “R” in the Type column to indicate it is a “Reserve” terminal.
Delete Spare Terminal To delete spare terminals from a terminal strip: 1.
In the terminal editor, select (highlight) the spare terminal(s) that you wish to delete
2.
Select the Edit > Delete function (use the pulldown menu inside the Terminal Editor dialog box) or select the Delete toolbar button.
3.
The selected spare terminal(s) will be removed from the list.
Edit Spare Terminal Targets The Internal Target and External Target for spare terminals can be edited in the terminal editor. Only spare terminals can be edited in this manner. Use the following procedure: 1.
11-14
In the terminal editor, double click inside the Internal Target cell or the External Target cell for the desired spare terminal. The Define Target dialog box will appear.
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Define Target Installation:
Select...
Location:
Select...
Strip TB:
TB4 OK
Cancel
Help...
2.
In the appropriate fields, enter the Installation, Location and terminal number of another terminal to which you wish to jumper. Use the Select buttons to view and select from lists of existing Installations and Locations.
3.
Select OK to enter the target information.
Switch Targets This function will switch the targets for a terminal from an internal target to an external target and vice versa.
Note
1.
Display a terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog.
2.
For the desired terminal, highlight the cell in either the Internal Target column or the External Target column.
3.
Select the Edit > Switch Targets function (use the pulldown menu inside the Terminal Editor dialog box) or select the Switch Targets toolbar button. The targets will be switched between the Internal and External columns.
Changes made with this function will be reflected in the schematic (but can only be seen by using the Terminal Dest. function in the Modify > Symbol mode).
11-15
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Clip Jumper This function specifies a short jumper symbol to be used in the graphic terminal plan. If the target for a terminal is another terminal, you can specify a jumper symbol rather than listing the terminal as a target. The jumper symbol will connect the two terminals in the graphical terminal plan.
WIRE NO.
TERMINAL STRIP =L1+CAB1–TB2
WIRE NO.
1 2 3
Clip jumper in graphical terminal plan Note
4
To use the clip jumper symbol, the two terminals must be connected by a wire in the schematic drawing. When terminals are jumpered, they are marked as such in the Jumper column of the terminal editor. Numbers in this column indicate to which other terminal a terminal is jumpered. In the following figure terminals 1 and 2 are jumpered. Internal Target
–TB5:2
Strip: TB –TB5:1 –TB5:2 –TB5:3
Type
Page
Jumper
1.10 1.11 1.12
2 1
External Target
–TB5:3 –LT110
Clip jumper information
The connection points on terminals can be set Internal, External, Undefined, or Jumper. If you have used a wire in the schematic drawing to connect two terminal connection points that are defined as Jumper, these will automatically appear in the terminal editor as jumpered. If you wish to assign a jumper in the terminal editor, use the following procedure. 1.
11-16
Display a terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog.
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
2.
For the desired terminals, highlight the cells in either the Internal Target column or the External Target column (depending on which side of the terminals should be jumpered). Hold down the
3.
Select the Edit > Clip Jumper function (use the pulldown menu inside the Terminal Editor dialog box). Numbers will appear in the Jumper column indicating to which terminal the terminals are jumpered.
When a graphical terminal plan is generated, the clip jumper symbol will represent the terminal–to–terminal connection. Removing a Clip Jumper To remove a clip jumper, use the following procedure. 1.
After assigning a clip jumper, you must first exit from the terminal editor and then re–enter the terminal editor before you can delete the clip jumper.
2.
Assign a wire jumper to the two terminals that have the clip jumper assigned. (See the following section). This will have the effect of removing the clip jumper.
Wire Jumper When a wire jumper is assigned between two terminals, they are listed as targets for each other. Note
To assign a wire jumper, the two terminals must be connected by a wire in the schematic drawing. The connection points on terminals can be set Internal, External, Undefined, or Jumper. If you have used a wire in the schematic drawing to connect two terminal connection points that are defined as Internal or External, these will automatically appear in the terminal editor as a wire jumper. If the two connection points are defined as Jumper, this will default to a clip jumper in the terminal editor and you will not be able to assign a wire jumper. The user must redefine these connection points as Internal and External using the Terminal Dest. function in the Modify > Symbol mode. To assign a wire jumper, use the following procedure: 1.
Display a terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog.
11-17
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
2.
For the desired terminals, highlight the cells in either the Internal Target column or the External Target column (depending on which side of the terminals should be jumpered). Hold down the
3.
Select the Edit > Wire Jumper function (use the pulldown menu inside the Terminal Editor dialog box) or use the Wire Jumper toolbar button. The internal or external targets will become the terminal that is at the other end of the jumper.
To change a wire jumper to a clip jumper, highlight the two Internal Target or External Target cells that are jumpered, and select the Edit > Clip Jumper function. Assign Terminal Part Number You can assign a part number to a terminal or a group of terminals in the terminal editor. 1.
Select (highlight) the Part Number cells for the desired terminals.
2.
Click a second time in the last selected cell.
3.
The Assign Part Number screen will appear. This screen allows you to search the parts database for appropriate part numbers and assign them. See page 5-81.
Assign Cable In the terminal editor, you can assign the conductors of a cable to a group of terminal targets. Use the following procedure.
11-18
1.
Display the terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog.
2.
For the desired terminals, highlight the cells in either the Internal Cable column or the External Cable column (depending on which side of the terminals should be cabled).
3.
Click on the highlighted cells. The Device ID Assignment dialog box will appear.
4.
Assign a device ID to the cable. Select the OK button to continue.
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
5.
The Device Type dialog box will appear. Enter an appropriate device type for the cable. (Use the Search button to display a list of existing cable device types.) Select the OK button to continue.
6.
The Connection Points dialog box will appear, listing the conductor designations for the cable. Select the OK button to continue.
7.
The Cable Text dialog box will appear. This allows you to enter a length value and other descriptive texts to be associated with the cable. Enter the desired texts and select OK to continue.
The cable device ID and conductor designations will appear in the terminal list. Note
When you create a cable in the terminal plan editor, a graphic representing the cable is added to the schematic page. This graphic is suppressed unless you select the Tools > System Settings > Display Settings function and select the Display Hidden Symbols checkbox.
Delete Cable To delete an existing cable in the terminal plan editor: 1.
Display the terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog.
2.
Highlight the cells in either the Internal Cable column or the External Cable column to which the cable has been assigned.
3.
Select the Edit > Delete function (use the pulldown menu inside the Terminal Editor dialog box).
The cable will be removed from the terminal list.
11-19
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Graphical Terminal Plan The software can create a graphical terminal plan, automatically generating drawing pages that show terminal strips with connection information for each terminal. To do this, the software uses a designated terminal plan macro, which graphically represents each terminal strip. Appropriate terminal information is then automatically placed at each terminal position. The user can select from a number of terminal plan macros provided with the software, or the user can create a custom macro. The terminal plan configuration mode allows the user to set up the format, content and positioning of items in the graphical terminal plan pages. The Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Generate Graphical Plan function causes the graphical terminal plan pages to be generated according to the preselected formats. The following subsections describe the elements of the graphical terminal plan.
Graphical Terminal Plan Macro The graphical terminal plan layout is created and stored as a macro. This macro can consist of a realistic drawing of a terminal strip (see below). It can also consist of columns of boxes containing various texts, or any other format the user requires. When the macro is first defined, variables (?values) are entered at appropriate places in the drawing. Note the variables in the terminal plan macro shown below.
FROM SOURCE ?t1devid
Terminal Plan Macro (similar to FTW20 Provided With The Software)
11-20
WIRE NO. ?t1wn
TERMINAL STRIP ?strip ?term
WIRE NO. ?t2wn
TO DESTINATION ?t2devid
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
When a graphical terminal plan is generated for a given project, the correct value is automatically substituted for each variable in the terminal plan macro. Information for each individual terminal proceeds from the variable positions with spacing determined by offset values entered in the graphical terminal plan configuration mode. In the following figure, after the Generate Graphical Plan function has been run, the software has filled out the macro with information for the terminal strip TB2 in the installation L1, location CAB1. The left side indicates the device IDs and wire numbers connected to the internal side of the terminal. (The “:4” at the end of the device IDs is connection point text for those limit switches.) The right side of the diagram shows connection information for the external side of the terminals. In this example, the external connection is to items in a different location, CAB2.
FROM SOURCE
WIRE NO.
TERMINAL STRIP =L1+CAB1–TB2
WIRE NO.
TO DESTINATION
LS101:4
W10
1
W62
+CAB2–LT301:X1
LS103:4
W14
2
W66
+CAB2–LT303:X1
LS105:4
W18
3
W69
+CAB2–AH307:X1
LS107:4
W21
4
W73
+CAB2–LT311:X1
LS109:4
W26
5
W75
+CAB2–LT313:X1
LS111:4
W29
6
W79
+CAB2–LT315:X1
Creating a Terminal Plan Macro – Use the following steps (see page 6-81 for more information on creating macros.) Note
You can use existing terminal macros provided with the software to build up your own macro. For example the FTW5– macro provides a group of five terminals which you can use to build longer strips. Other macros provide columns of cable information, etc., complete with variable texts. Look in the macro list for descriptions of “Construction Macro” and “Term Plan Macro”. 1.
Use a blank drawing page of the appropriate format size.
2.
Create the drawing elements of the terminal plan. Position them where they should appear on the finished terminal plan pages.
3.
Place the desired terminal plan variables using the Draw > Text function. Each variable must begin with a “?”. A list of available variables is given on the next page. For individual terminals it is necessary to place the variable only at the first terminal position. Information for the remaining terminals is positioned according to offset values entered in the configuration mode (see page 11-24).
11-21
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
4.
Select the Manage > Macro > New/Modify function.
5.
Enter an appropriate name and description for the macro in the New/Modify Macro dialog box.
6.
The software will prompt you to “Define Base Point.” Select any point on the drawing for now.
7.
The software will prompt you to Select objects. Select all the objects to be included in the macro. (You can also select items later with the Manage > Macro > Select Items function.)
8.
Select the Manage > Macro > Reference Point function. The reference point of a terminal plan macro must be at the origin (0.0000, 0.0000) of the page XY coordinate system, i.e. at the bottom left corner. Therefore, after selecting the Reference Point function, position the cursor at the 0.0000, 0.0000 point (coordinates are displayed above the drawing area) and press the left mouse button.
9.
Use the Manage > Macro > Save function to store the macro.
To select your new macro for use in generating terminal plans, select Tools > Project Settings, select the Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab and then enter the macro’s name in the Plan Macro field (see page 11-25). Terminal Plan Variables Variable
Location designation
?locstrip
Location designation and terminal strip
?strip
Terminal strip
?strip_inst
Display installation
?strip_loc
Display location
?strip_name
Display strip name
?term
Terminal number
?t1devid
Internal cable designation complete: includes installation + location + device ID External cable designation complete: includes installation + location + device ID Internal: device ID
?t2devid
External: device ID
?xref
Cross-reference
?t1cablec ?t2cablec
11-22
Description
?location
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Variable
Description
?xrefinst
Cross-reference with installation
?t1cable
Internal: cable designation
?t1wire
Internal: wire designation of cable conductor
?t2cable
External: cable designation
?t2wire
External: wire designation of cable conductor
?partno
Part number(Ident.number)
?consno
Consecutive number
?t1cabtype
Internal: cable type
?t2cabtype
External: cable type
?t1cabpartno
Internal: cable part number
?t2cabpartno
External: cable part number
?t1cablen
Internal: cable length
?t2cablen
External: cable length
?t1cabgauge
Internal: cable gauge
?t2cabgauge
External: cable gauge
?t1cabwire
Internal: Number of wires
?t2cabwire
External: Number of wires
?jumper
Evaluated jumpers are displayed
?ftext
Terminal: function text
?t1ftext
Internal: function text
?t2ftext
External: function text
?t1wn
Internal: wire number
?t1wnc
Internal: wire number and color
?t1wng
Internal: wire number and gauge
?t1wncg
Internal: wire number, color and gauge
?t2wn
External: wire number
?t2wnc
External: wire number and color
?t2wng
External: wire number and gauge
?t2wncg
External: wire number, color and gauge
?t1conduit
Internal: conduit
?t2conduit
External: conduit
?t1cabtxt01 etc. ?t1cabtxt50 ?t2cabtxt01 etc. ?t2cabtxt50
Internal cable text 1 Internal cable text 50 External cable text 1 External cable text 50
11-23
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Graphical Terminal Plan Configuration Use the Tools > Project Settings > Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration function to set the defaults for graphical terminal plan generation. Select:
Tools Project Settings Terminal/Plug Plan Configuration (First select the Tools > Project Settings function and then select the Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab.) The following dialog box will appear. X
Project Settings Configuration Terminal and Plug IDs
File:
Device ID Style
Object Defaults
Plug Plan
Title Block Plan Macro Jumper Symbol Name Cable/Wire Used Symbol Installation Starting Page Number Page Format
TITLED FTW20 JUMPER CROSS TCPLAN 1 D-0COL
Title Block Variables pgdescr01 pgdescr06 strip Total Lines Columns 20
Terminal
Cable Internal
Cable External
TPLAN.CFG Terminal Plan
Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration
Columns
10
Columns
10
Offset X:
0.2500
Offset X:
-0.2500
Offset Y:
0.0000
Offset Y:
0.0000
Jumper Offset X
-0.7500
Offset Y
0.0000
Format Of Target Destinations intern Installation extern Location
1 0 0 0
Device ID Connection Point Maximum Characters 25
pgdescr07 Write text as single line
Drawings
Update Existing Pages Offset X:
Offset Y:
0.000 OK
Cancel
Save
-0.500 Help...
In the File field, select a configuration file (such as TPLAN.CFG). The remaining fields will then become active.
11-24
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Select the Terminal Plan toggle to ensure that the settings you make will apply to the terminal plan and not the pin/plug plan. Note
The default configuration file is TPLAN.CFG located in the RS\SYSCON\SYSTEM directory. You can create alternate terminal plan configuration files by copying TPLAN.CFG under another name and then editing it with the Tools > Project Settings function (Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab). This dialog box allows you to set title blocks, page formats, page numbers, installation name, and other variables for the graphical terminal plan.
Note
Values shown in inches. The following fields are provided: File – Indicates the name of the selected terminal plan configuration file. Title Block – You can specify a title block macro name in this field that will override the default title block macro (selected when the project was created) on terminal plan pages. Plan Macro – Determines the macro that graphically represents terminal strips in the terminal plan pages. Jumper Symbol Name – Determines the symbol that represents jumpers in the graphical terminal plan pages. (“JUMPER” is a variable length symbol that is automatically sized to stretch from terminal to terminal.) Cable/Wire Used Symbol – Determines what symbol is used in the graphical terminal plan to mark a cable conductor that has been used (assigned). (The “CROSS” symbol is an “X”.) If the user enters a minus sign (“–”) in this field, the software will fill in the cable conductor colors in the graphical plan, rather than just placing a cross symbol. Installation – Determines what installation the system will create to hold the graphical terminal plan pages. Starting Page Number – Determines the first page number the system will assign to the terminal plan pages. Page Format – Determines the drawing page format to be used for the graphical terminal plan pages.
11-25
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Title Block Variables – The six fields in this area allow you to specify three title block variables and the values that will appear at those variable locations in the title block. This applies to the title block entered in the Title Block field and only to the graphical terminal plan drawing pages. There are three pairs of fields; the upper field contains a variable name, the lower field contains the information to be displayed where that variable exists in the title block (see page 6-83 for more about title blocks). You can also use another variable name in the lower field (for example, ?strip to show the terminal strip name in the title block).
This Variable In The Title Block
Title Block Variables
Will Contain This Information
pgdescr05
pgdescr06
pgdescr07
Terminal
Plan
Drawings
OK
Cancel
Help...
Total Lines The Quantity field sets the maximum number of lines of terminal information on each graphical terminal plan page. Offset X, Offset Y – Determines the spacing between lines in the graphical terminal plan. When lines are listed vertically, enter an Offset Y value and enter 0 for Offset X. When lines are listed horizontally, enter an Offset X value and enter 0 for Offset Y. See the following figure. Offset X Offset Y
=1+LS–PB3
=1+LS–PB1 =1+LS–PB2 =1+LS–PB3
=1+LS–PB2
10 11 12
10 11 12
=1+LS–PB1
11-26
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
The upper right portion of the dialog box allows the user to specify the number of columns available for cable information: Cable External and Cable Internal The Quantity fields establish the number of columns of cable information that will be provided in the terminal plan. The Offset X and Offset Y fields allow you to set the spacing of the columns. Jumper Offset X and Y – These fields determine the position of the jumper symbol in relation to the terminal number. Depending on whether the terminal plan is horizontal or vertical, one of the values will be zero.
10 11 12
Jumper Offset X
10 11 12
Jumper Offset Y
(JIC Example: dx=–0.50, dy=0 in.) (IEC Example: dx=0, dy=–5 mm)
(JIC Example: dx=0, dy=–0.50 in.) (IEC Example: dx=0, dy=–5 mm)
Format of Target Destinations – This area allows the setting of the layout and content of the target information for each terminal. For example, in the figure below, each terminal is labeled with the installation, location, and device ID of the items connected to the terminal (the “=”, “+”, and “–” characters are RSWire conventions used to distinguish installation names, location names, and device IDs, respectively. 10 11 12
=1+LS–PB1 =1+LS–PB2 =1+LS–PB3
The Installation, Location, Device ID, and Connection Point fields let the user set the spacing of this information by assigning a beginning column number to each piece of information.
11-27
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Note
The above example does not include connection point text. If you imagine each character of the above information assigned to a column number, it might look like the following figure. =
1
+
L
S
–
P
B
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
The default entries for these fields are 1 for Installation and 0 for Location and Device ID. The “0” column value means that the location and device ID will immediately follow the installation name with no spaces in between. However, if you wished to space out the information more you could enter, for example, values of 1 for Installation, 10 for Location, and 20 for Device ID. Then the information would have the following column assignments. These values will space the information out more, but note that with these values any installation or location names longer than 9 characters will be truncated in the graphical terminal plan target listings.
=
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
+
L
S
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17 18
19
–
P
B
1
20
21
22
23
24
The Maximum Characters field lets you set how many columns will be allowed for displaying this information. The intern and extern selections allow you to choose whether the column assignments you make in the Installation, Location, and Device ID fields apply to the internal side of the terminal plan or the external side. Select one or the other before entering column values. Write Text as Single Line – When this checkbox is selected, this feature allows you to write function text on a single line. The “return” is over–ridden and the “^” will be replaced with a space on the plan.
11-28
25
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Update Existing Pages – This checkbox determines whether the software will always generate new graphical terminal plan pages or if it will update information on existing pages. If the checkbox is not checked, the software will always generate new pages starting with the page number in the Starting Page Number field. This means that existing pages in the same page number range will be overwritten. If the Update Existing Pages checkbox is checked, the software will update information on existing pages for the selected terminal strips, but will not overwrite existing pages for non–selected terminal strips. When you have finished entering values in the Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab, select the Save button to copy the new information over the existing terminal plan configuration file. Select Cancel to keep the old configuration information. If you select the OK button without first saving any new values, these new values will only be used during the current work session.
11-29
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Graphical Terminal Plan Generation Use the Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Generate Graphical Plan function to generate a graphical terminal plan. This consists of automatically generated drawing pages for each terminal strip in the project. Select:
Tools Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan Generate Graphical Plan The software will prompt you to select the Project, Installation and Pages to be included in the terminal plans. Select OK to continue. The Select Terminal Strip dialog box will then appear, listing all the terminal strips in the selected project or portion thereof. Select (highlight) those strips for which you wish to produce a graphical terminal plan page. Select the OK button. Graphical terminal plan pages will be generated according to the variables set in the terminal plan configuration mode. See page 11-24. The system will create a separate installation for the graphical terminal plan pages (provided the installation name specified in the configuration mode does not already exist). The default installation name is TCPLAN. A different installation name can be specified in the configuration mode. If there are more terminals in a strip than will fit on the terminal plan macro (designated in the configuration mode) the software will create additional pages in the same number sequence, for example, page 5, page 5.1, page 5.2, etc. To view the graphical terminal plan pages use the File > Open function. Note
11-30
The software will generate the graphical terminal plan based on the configuration file that was most recently selected in the Tools > Project Settings function under the Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab. Configuration files are selected from the File pulldown list.
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Pin–Plug Plan The software is capable of accessing pin and plug information in the same way it can access information about terminals and terminal strips. Information can be gathered, edited and presented in a graphical plan. The same functions that are used for editing and generating a terminal plan are used for pin–plug plans. There is a separate function for configuring the pin–plug plan.
Pin–Plug Editing Use the Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Edit Terminals/Pin Plugs function. Any plugs in the selected project/installation will be available for editing along with the terminal strips. See page 11-6.
Graphical Pin–Plug Plan Graphical Pin–Plug Plan Macro A pin–plug plan macro named PPLAN is provided with the software. This macro can be specified in the pin–plug plan configuration mode so that it will be used when generating graphical pin–plug plans. You can also create custom pin–plug plan macros. Following the procedures for creating a terminal plan macro. See page 11-20.
11-31
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Graphical Pin–Plug Plan Configuration Use the Tools > Project Settings > Terminal/Plug Plan Configuration function to set the defaults for graphical pin–plug plan generation. Select:
Tools Project Settings Terminal/Plug Plan Configuration (Select the Tools > Project Settings function, then select the Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab.) The following dialog box will appear. X
Project Settings Configuration Terminal and Plug IDs
File:
Device ID Style
Object Defaults
Plug Plan
Title Block Plan Macro Jumper Symbol Name Cable/Wire Used Symbol Installation Starting Page Number Page Format
TITLED PPLAN JUMPER CROSS PPLAN 1 D-0COL
Title Block Variables pgdescr01 pgdescr03 strip Total Lines Columns 20
Pin Plan
Cable Internal
Cable External
PPLAN.CFG Terminal Plan
Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration
Columns
10
Columns
10
Offset X:
0.2500
Offset X:
-0.2500
Offset Y:
0.0000
Offset Y:
0.0000
Jumper Offset X
-0.7500
Offset Y
0.0000
Format Of Target Destinations intern Installation extern Location
1 0 0 0
Device ID Connection Point Maximum Characters 25 pgdescr05 Write text as single line
Drawings
Update Existing Pages Offset X:
Offset Y:
0.000 OK
Cancel
Save
-0.500 Help...
In the File field, select a configuration file (such as PPLAN.CFG). The remaining fields will then become active.
11-32
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
Select the Plug Plan toggle to ensure that the settings you make will apply to the Plug Plan rather than the Terminal Plan. Note
The default configuration file is PPLAN.CFG located in the RS\SYSCON\SYSTEM directory. You can create alternate pin–plug plan configuration files by copying PPLAN.CFG under another name and then editing it with the Tools > Project Settings function (Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab). The Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration dialog box will appear.
Note
Values shown in inches. This dialog box allows you to set title blocks, page formats, page numbers, installation name, and other variables for the graphical pin–plug plan. It is the same dialog box used for terminal plan configuration. See page 11-25. Use the Macro File field in this dialog box to specify the macro to be used for generating the graphical plan. Use the Installation field to set the name of the installation that will be created for the pin–plug plan drawings.
Graphical Pin–Plug Plan Generation Use the Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Generate Graphical Plan function to generate a graphical pin–plug plan. This consists of automatically generated drawing pages for each plug in the project. Pin–plug plan pages are generated along with terminal plan pages. These can be placed in different installations according to the settings made in the terminal plan and pin–plug plan configuration modes. Select:
Tools Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan Generate Graphical Plan The Select Terminal Strip dialog box will appear, listing existing plugs and terminal strips. Select (highlight) the plugs for which you wish to generate a graphical plan. Graphical pin–plug plan pages will be generated according to the variables set in the pin–plug plan configuration mode. The system will create a separate installation for the graphical pin–plug plan pages (provided the installation name specified in the configuration mode does not already exist). The default installation name is PPLAN. A different installation name can be specified in the configuration mode.
11-33
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
If there are more pins in a plug than will fit on the pin–plug plan macro (designated in the configuration mode) the software will create additional pages in the same number sequence, for example, page 5, page 5.1, page 5.2, etc. To view the graphical pin–plug plan pages use the File > Open function. Note
11-34
The software will generate the graphical pin–plug plan based on the configuration file that was most recently selected in the Tools > Project Settings function under the Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab. Configuration files are selected from the File pulldown list.
Cables
12
Cables
This section explains various aspects of creating and assigning cables in RSWireTM Designer. The user can create device types and enter part numbers that represent various types of cables. Wires can be assigned to cables either in the schematic or in the terminal plan editor. The following sections are included:
Assigning a Cable in the Schematic Assigning a Cable in the Terminal Plan Editor Creating a Cable Symbol Creating a Cable Device Type Creating a Cable Cross Reference Symbol Cable Lists
12-1
Cables
Assigning a Cable in the Schematic You can assign a group of wires to a cable by placing a cable symbol in the schematic drawing. Cables assigned in the schematic will be listed in the terminal plan editor mode (see page 11-18). To assign a group of wires in a schematic to a cable, use the following steps: 1.
While viewing the schematic, select the Insert > Symbol by Name function. When prompted for a symbol name enter a cable symbol name. The symbol named CABLE is provided with RSWire.
2.
Select the desired cable symbol position on the first wire that you wish to assign to the cable.
3.
The Device ID Assignment dialog box will appear. A device ID tag will be prompted in the Device ID field. Enter a device ID for the cable in this field.
4.
The Multiple Placement checkbox will default to the “On” setting when placing cable symbols. This allows you to assign multiple consecutive wires to the cable in one step. (You can also assign wires to a cable individually by placing the cable symbol on each wire and assigning the same device ID on each wire).
Device ID Assignment Installation:
Search...
Location:
Search...
Device ID:
Search Device ID
Suppress Device ID
Duplicate Device ID
Multiple Placement
Part Number Assigned Part No. / Select to Delete
Search... Addit.Part Number
OK
12-2
Cancel
Help...
Multiple Placement checkbox
Cables
Note
5.
At this time, if desired, you can also assign a part number to the cable. Select the Search button and the parts database Assign Part Number dialog box will be displayed. You can search the database for cable part numbers. Select these part numbers by pointing and clicking. Caution: assign a part number to only one of the cable’s conductors. Select OK to return to the Device ID Assignment dialog box.
6.
The Device Type dialog box will appear allowing you to select a device type for the cable. The device type determines how many conductors the cable has and what the designation (such as color) is for each conductor. Use the Search button to display and select device types that apply to cables.
If you assigned a part number to the cable, and a device type was defined in the data for that part number, the device type will be assigned automatically and the Device Type dialog box will not appear. Device Type Device Type: Description: Search...
7.
OK
Cancel
Help...
The Connection Points dialog box will appear next, listing all the conductor designations for the cable. The first available (unassigned) conductor will be assigned to the cable symbol you are currently placing unless you select a different conductor by pointing and clicking. The selected conductor’s designation will appear in the field at the bottom of the widow.
12-3
Cables
Connection Points Select Connection Points Device ID: =LINE1+LOC1–CAB50 Device:
Installation
8444
Pg.Line
Symbol CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE
Connection Points BLK WHT RED GRN
BLK OK
Cancel
Help
If any of the conductors have already been assigned in the schematic, a page and line number will be indicated in the Connection Points dialog box. These conductors cannot be assigned again unless you delete the existing cable symbol where they have been assigned. Select the OK button to continue. 8.
The Cable Text dialog box will appear. This dialog box allows you to enter up to 50 descriptive texts related to the cable. Ten text fields are displayed at a time. You can move from one group of texts to another with the Next and Previous buttons. Select the OK button when the desired texts have been entered.
12-4
Cables
Cable Text Length Text 2: Text 3: Text 4: Text 5: Text 6: Text 7: Text 8: Text 9: Text 10: Next OK
9.
Previous Cancel
Help...
The cable symbol will appear at the selected position with the device ID and the designation of the first conductor. If the Multiple Placement toggle was selected, the software will then prompt, “Mark position of last symbol.” By pointing and clicking, select the last wire (or below the last wire) to be assigned to the cable.
L1
101 102
PB103
TB1
CAB50
103 104
1 PB105
BLK
Original Symbol Position
105 106
2 LS107
Select Last Wire
107 108
3 LS109
109 110
4 LS110
111 112
5 LS113
113
6
12-5
Cables
Cable conductor designations will be automatically assigned to each wire up to the last selected wire. The cable device ID appears at the first wire; conductor designations appear at subsequent wires (see following figure). Note
To cancel out of the multiple placement mode (if you decide you wish to assign only one conductor) use the
101 102
PB103
TB1
CAB50
103 104
PB105
WHT
105 106
2 LS107
RED
107 108
3 LS109
GRN
109 110
4 LS110
111 112
5 LS113
113
6
12-6
BLK
1
Conductor Designations Automatically Assigned
Cables
Assigning a Cable in the Terminal Plan Editor In the terminal plan editor mode you can assign a group of terminals to the conductors of a cable. See page 11-18 for more information. Cables assigned in this manner will automatically appear in the schematic (see the following note). Cables that were assigned in the schematic will be listed in the Cable columns of the terminal plan editor. Note
When you create a cable in the terminal plan editor, a graphic representing the cable is added to the schematic page. This graphic is suppressed unless you select the Tools > System Settings > Display Settings function and select the Display Hidden Symbols toggle. The terminal plan editor is accessed through the Tools > Terminal Pin–Plug Plan > Edit Terminals/Pin–Plugs function. After selecting one or more terminal strips from a list, the Terminal Editor dialog box will appear. There are columns indicating any cables that are assigned.
Cable columns
12-7
Cables
Creating a Cable Symbol A cable symbol named CABLE is provided with RSWire. The user may wish to create other cable symbols to meet specific requirements. The following example shows how a cable symbol is created. Use the following procedure to create a symbol called XCABLE. 1.
Display a blank drawing page.
2.
Turn off the Online function (use the Manage > Page > Modify function).
3.
Set the drawing grid to the desired spacing (use the Tools > System Settings function and Grid Settings tab).
4.
Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function. The New/Modify Symbol dialog box will appear.
5.
In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XCABLE (or whatever symbol name you wish to use). Press the <Enter> key. New/Modify Symbol Symbol Name:
List...
XCABLE
Preferred Direction Vertical
Horizontal
Snapmode: Nearest Endpoint Description: Example cable symbol Search Language Text... Symbol Group: CS2 Cable Symbol OK
12-8
Cancel
Help...
Cables
6.
Select Horizontal for preferred direction. Enter the description “Example cable symbol.” Select symbol group CS2 Cable Symbol.
7.
Select the OK button to continue.
8.
The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a symbol reference point where the cable symbol will cross a wire. Zoom in for a better view of the work area.
9.
Draw the graphic elements that will represent the symbol.
10. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. The software will prompt you to “Define Device ID position.” Select a device ID reference point above the symbol. 11. The Device–ID–Parameter dialog box will be displayed. Enter the device ID tag “CB” (or whatever you want your cable ID prefix to be). 12. Select the Manage > Symbol > Connection Point function. Select a connection point position.
12-9
Cables
Important
The connection point itself is not required for this symbol (the connection point text is) but the connection point must not be located where it will contact the wire on which the cable symbol is placed. Place the connection point above or below the symbol itself.
Device ID
Connection Point Text Position
CB
Connection Point Position
13. After you place the connection point you will be prompted to “Define label origin of text.” Select a position for the connection point text where you wish the cable conductor designations (such as BLACK, RED, etc.) to appear. These designations are defined as part of a cable device type (see page 12-11). When the Connection Point Parameters dialog box appears, select the desired text parameters and select the OK button to continue. 14. Select the Manage > Symbol > Save function to complete the creation of the symbol. Define a window around the symbol elements. The message “The Symbol was added to the catalog” will be displayed. After you create an appropriate cable device type (see page 12-11), the symbol can be placed in schematics and should appear as shown below.
CB22 BLACK
12-10
Cables
Creating a Cable Device Type A cable device type is a definition that tells RSWire how many conductors a cable has and what designation (color, etc.) each conductor should have. This information allows the software to automatically assign conductor designations, and keep track of which conductors have been assigned. When you place a cable symbol in a schematic, the software will ask which device type to use with the symbol. By having different device types available you can make the cable symbol represent various types of cables. Use the following procedure to define a device called X4CON. 1.
Select the Manage > Device Type > New/Modify function. The Device Type New/Modify dialog box will be displayed.
2.
In the Device Type field, enter the name X4CON. Press the <Enter> key.
Device Type New/Modify Device Type Group
X4CON
Search
Cable
Symbol Name Parent Child 1 Child 2 Child 3 Child 4 Child 5 Child 6 Child 7 Child 8 Child 9
XCABLE XCABLE XCABLE XCABLE
Cross Ref.
Connection Points BLK WHT RED GRN
Delta X
0.0000
Delta Y 0.0000
Absolute Position OK
Cancel
Help
Description...
12-11
Cables
3.
In the Group field select the Cable device group.
4.
Select the Description button. The Device Description dialog box will be displayed.
5.
Enter “Example device” in the first description field. This description will appear on device listings. Enter “Example cable” in the Cable Type field. Select OK. Device Type Description Description Descr. 1
Example device
Descr. 2 Descr. 3 Search Language Text... Cable Cable Type
Example cable
Gauge Part Number OK
Note
12-12
Cancel
Help...
We could also enter a part number in the Part Number field if we wished a specific part number to be assigned automatically to any cable using this device type. 6.
Enter XCABLE for Parent symbol name. This is the symbol name of the parent symbol associated with this device. (XCABLE is the example cable symbol created in the previous section. If you did not create this symbol use an existing cable symbol name such as CABLE.)
7.
Enter XCABLE for the symbol name of Child 1 through Child 3. With cable device types it is not necessary to enter a different symbol name in the Child fields. The Child fields merely represent additional conductors of the cable. If more conductors are needed, you can scroll down to display additional Child fields (up to 256).
Cables
8.
Enter the connection point text shown in the Device Definition dialog box (BLK, WHT, RED, GRN). These are the conductor designations (sometimes numbered by the cable manufacturer) that will appear in the schematic beside the individual wires assigned to the cable.
9.
Select OK to complete the creation of the device type.
To test the device type, follow the instructions on page 12-2 for assigning a cable in a schematic. Use the parent symbol name and device type name that you used in the Device Type New/Modify dialog box.
12-13
Cables
Creating a Cable Cross Reference Symbol You can create a cable cross reference symbol that will show all the conductor connection information for a given cable in one place. This allows easy generation of interconnection plans. If you have assigned descriptive cable texts to the cable (for cable length, connector type, etc.) these can also be shown on the cross reference symbol. Use the following procedure to create a cross reference symbol for a four conductor cable called XCAB4REF: 1.
Display a blank drawing page.
2.
Turn off the Online function (use Manage > Page > Modify function).
3.
Set the drawing grid to the desired spacing (use the Tools > System Settings > Grid Settings function).
4.
Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function. The New/Modify Symbol dialog box will appear.
5.
In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XCAB4REF (or whatever symbol name you wish to use). Press the <Enter> key. New/Modify Symbol Symbol Name:
List...
XCAB4REF
Preferred Direction Vertical
Horizontal
Snapmode: Nearest Endpoint Description: Example cable cross reference symbol Search Language Text... Symbol Group: CS3 Cable Cross Reference Symbol OK
12-14
Cancel
Help...
Cables
6.
Select Horizontal for preferred direction. Enter the description “Example cable cross reference symbol.” Select symbol group CS3 Cable Cross Reference Symbol.
7.
Select the OK button to continue.
8.
The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a symbol reference point somewhere in the center of the drawing area. Zoom in for a better view.
9.
Use the graphical line and box functions (not wires) to draw the graphic elements that will represent the symbol. For this example we will draw a rectangle with four branches at each end.
10. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. The software will prompt you to “Define Device ID position.” Select a device ID reference point above the reference point of the symbol. Select a label origin of 5 for the device ID. Enter the text “CAB” for the device ID tag. Select the OK button. “CAB” will appear at the device ID position.
12-15
Cables
The remainder of the creation of this symbol consists of entering a series of symbol texts with attribute numbers to determine which piece of information will be displayed at each text position. The following text attribute numbers have been set aside for cable information: Cable Destination Left: Conductor Description Left: Cable Destination Right: Conductor Description Right:
Attribute numbers 3000 to 3255 Attribute numbers 3600 to 3855 Attribute numbers 3300 to 3555 Attribute numbers 3900 to 4155
11. Assign the destination symbol text for each conductor on the left side of the symbol. Use the Draw > Text function and place a “?” as the text. Use a label origin of 6. When the Text Attribute Definition dialog box appears, select the Attribute – Activate checkbox and enter the appropriate attribute number in the No. field. Then select the OK button. The first (top) conductor should be assigned attribute 3000, the second conductor 3001, and so on. Text Attribute Definition Symbol Text: ? I/O Attribute
Select Activate checkbox Attribute Activate
Activate No:
Enter Attribute Number 3000 to 3003
3000
Address I/O Text
12-16
Assign attribute 3000
?
Assign attribute 3001
?
Assign attribute 3002
?
Assign attribute 3003
?
CAB
Cables
12. Next assign the description symbol text for each conductor on the left side of the symbol. Use the Draw > Text function and place a “?” as the text just below each text placed in the previous step. Use a label origin of 6. When the Text Attribute Definition dialog box appears, select the Attribute – Activate checkbox and enter the appropriate attribute number in the No. field. Then select the OK button. The first (top) conductor should be assigned attribute 3600, the second conductor 3601, and so on. Text Attribute Definition Symbol Text: ? I/O Attribute
Select Activate checkbox Attribute Activate
Activate No:
Enter Attribute Number 3600 to 3603
3600
Address I/O Text
?
Assign attribute 3600
? ?
Assign attribute 3601
CAB
? ?
Assign attribute 3602
? ?
Assign attribute 3603
?
13. Now repeat the symbol text assignment steps for the conductors on the right side of the symbol. First, place symbol text for the destinations. Use a label origin of 4. Assign attribute numbers 3300 to 3303.
12-17
Cables
?
?
Assign attribute 3300
?
Assign attribute 3301
?
Assign attribute 3302
?
Assign attribute 3303
? ?
CAB
? ? ? ? ?
14. Assign conductor description symbol texts to the right side of the symbol. Place them just below the destination texts placed in the previous step. Use a label origin of 4. Assign attribute numbers 3900 to 3903. ?
?
?
?
?
CAB
Assign attribute 3900
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
Assign attribute 3901
Assign attribute 3902
Assign attribute 3903
15. Place a label for the text length symbol text. Use the Draw > Text function and place the word “LENGTH” below the symbol reference point. Do not assign an attribute number, simply select OK in the Text Attribute dialog box. 16. Below the “LENGTH” text, place a text consisting of the string “?cabtxt01”. Use a label origin of 5. This text will display the cable length when the symbol is placed. Note
12-18
All other cable texts can be extracted in this manner using ?cabtxt02–?cabtxt50.
Cables
?
?
?
? CAB
?
? ?
? ?
LENGTH
?
?
?cabtxt01
?
?
?
?
?
17. Save the symbol: Select the Manage > Symbol > Save function and define a window around all the symbol elements. The message “The symbol was added to the catalog” will be displayed. Testing the cable cross reference symbol To test the operation of the symbol cross reference symbol you must first assign a cable in a schematic. Note
There is no need to specify the cable cross reference symbol when assigning the cable in the schematic. Suppose you had assigned the following cable in a schematic. TB2
CAB77
BLK
1
TB9 1
WHT 2
2 RED
3
3 GRN
4
4
You can then place the cable cross reference symbol on any online drawing page in the same project and assign the same device ID as the existing cable (CAB77).
12-19
Cables
After placing the symbol you must perform a View > Refresh Page function to update the cross reference symbol with the correct information for the cable as shown in the following figure. = LINE1/108/=line1+EN1–TB9:1
= LINE1/108/=line1+EN1–TB2:1
BLK
BLK = LINE1/108/=line1+EN1–TB2:2
CAB77
= LINE1/108/=line1+EN1–TB2:3 RED = LINE1/108/=line1+EN1–TB2:4 GRN
= LINE1/108/=line1+EN1–TB9:2 WHT
WHT LENGTH 50
= LINE1/108/=line1+EN1–TB9:3 RED = LINE1/108/=line1+EN1–TB9:4 GRN
The following information is displayed for each conductor: Cable Installation/Cable Page–Line/= Symbol Installation+Location–Device ID Note
12-20
For a length value to appear, you must have assigned a length value as the first cable text when assigning the cable in the schematic. See page 12-4.
Cables
Cable Lists There are two cable–related list functions in the Reports > Connections submenu: Cable List – This is a list of all the cables in a given project. Field Wire – This is a list of all cables in a project including descriptions and destinations of each conductor within each cable. The list indicates which conductors have been used (assigned).
12-21
Cables
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
12-22
Parts Database
13
Parts Database
This section describes the RSWireTM Designer parts database. This database contains information about the physical devices that will be used to build the projects that are designed with RSWire. As the user creates schematic drawings with RSWire, the user can assign part numbers to each symbol. Then, when the schematics are completed, RSWire can use the information in the database to generate an appropriate bill of material, purchase order list, etc., based on the schematic. For information on assigning part numbers to symbols, see page 5-79. The Manage > Parts Database pull–down menu provides functions which allow a variety of parameters to be set for parts data.
Manage Parts Edit Form Edit Table Duplicates Check The following sections are included:
MS–Access Database Files Accessing the Parts Database Parts Database Edit Form Add a Parts Database Record Delete a Parts Database Record Find a Parts Database Record Edit a Parts Database Record Table View of Database Database Manipulation Previewing the Parts Database Printing the Parts Database
13-1
Parts Database
MS–Access Database Files The parts database and language text databases in RSWire are based on Microsoft Access database software. If you do not have MS–Access installed on your computer at the time that you install RSWire, the run–time version of Access will be installed. Warning: Make sure all Microsoft Access applications are closed before starting RSWire. Otherwise, data from RSWire could override your open database files. When RSWire starts for the first time, it creates a UI.mdb database file in the WORK directory. The UI.mdb file links to tables within two database files, ARTICLE.mdb (parts data) and TDB.mdb (language text). The UI.mdb file also contains a number of queries. The database files ARTICLE.mdb and TDB.mdb are located in the DB and the LG directories respectively. Once the UI.mdb database file is created, RSWire copies forms and reports from either USER.mdb or DEFAULT.mdb located within the LIST directory. The DEFAULT.mdb will contain the default reports and forms shipped with RSWire. If you would like to create your own reports or forms, store them in USER.mdb. Pr
Main RSWire Directory Bmp Catalog Db Custom Lg Logos Dbs Db Fonts Menu Plot Program Project Syscon List System Tmp User Work
13-2
Location of TDB.mdb File
Location of ARTICLE.mdb File
Location of USER.mdb File and DEFAULT.mdb File
Location of UI.mdb File
Parts Database
UI.mdb UI.mdb is a database file located in the RS\WORK directory.
Contents of 'Work' Name
Rs Bmp Catalog Db Dbs Fonts Menu Plot Program Project Syscon Tmp User Work
Select UI.mdb File
To access the UI.mdb file, go to the RS\WORK directory and select the UI.mdb icon. The following UI: Database dialog box will appear: UI: Database Tables
ARTICLE TDB
Queries
Forms
Reports
Macros
Modules
Open Design New
The UI: Database dialog box contains five functions; Tables, Queries, Forms, Reports, Macros, and Modules. To review the links to any of these functions, select the applicable tab. 13-3
Parts Database
Tables The Tables function contains links to two files with tables, ARTICLE and TDB. These are the ARTICLE.mdb and TDB.mdb files discussed further in this section. UI: Database Tables
Queries
Forms
Reports
Macros
ARTICLE TDB
Modules
Open Design New
Note
The Open, Design, and New buttons are not functional in the Run–Time version of Access. These buttons are available in the Full version of Access only. Open – Use this button to open the selected (highlighted) table. Design – Use this button to modify the table. New – Use this button to create a new table in the database.
13-4
Parts Database
Forms The Forms function contains two forms, ARTICLE and TEXT. These forms are copied into UI.mdb from USER.mdb or DEFAULT.mdb files. Note
The Open, Design, and New buttons are not functional in the Run–Time version of Access. These buttons are available in the Full version of Access only. Open – Use this button to open the selected (highlighted) form. Design – Use this button to modify a form. New – Use this button to create a new form for the database. Article Form
UI: Database Queries
Tables
Forms
Macros
Reports
Open
Article
Design
ARTICLE
Parts Database Part Number 100A09NA3 IEC CONTACTOR Description PMG Manuf. A–B Catalog 100A09NA3 Supplier M31 Price Price_S Price_B Device Type
Article Form
Modules
0 Units 0
Discount M31
Technical Description
Date Created 04/23/96 Changed 06/05/96 Symbols M Ref. Wire W–ABCOA010 L–ABCOA010 Lay. 0 (C)over or (P)anel
Dimensions 1.81 X (in) Y (in) 2.92 3.31 Z (in) Weight[lb] Power[VA] Time Assembly Wiring
0.95 0
Sort By: PARTNUMBER
Filter By: PARTNUMBER
Filter Remove Filters
Additional Part Numbers
220VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ
MS3, CRNO
Record:
QM31
*
13-5
Parts Database
Text Form
UI: Database Tables
Queries
Forms
Reports
Macros
Modules
Open
Article Text
Design
TEXT: Form
Language DatabaseNew Text Number
Text Form
13-6
1
Find Text Number
English:
German:
French:
Spain:
Italy:
Dutch:
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Parts Database
Reports The Reports function contains links to two reports, Full “ARTICLE1” and Brief “ARTICLE1”. The full report lists all parts database information about a part. The brief report lists only specified parts database information. Note
The Open, Design, and New buttons are not functional in the Run–Time version of Access. These buttons are available in the Full version of Access only. Preview – Use this button to view the selected (highlighted) report. Design – Use this button to modify a report. New – Use this button to create a new report from the database. Article Report
UI: Database Tables
Queries
ARTICLE ARTICLE_BRIEF
Forms
Macros
Reports
Modules
Preview ARTICLE1
Design New
Parts Database Part Number
Manufacturer
Description
Catalog #
PMG
List Price
Units
Sell Price
Discount
Technical Description
100-A09NA3
A-B
0
IEC CONTACTOR
100-A09NA3
0
220VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ MS3, CRNO 100-A09NB3
Full “Article1” Report
Record:
A-B
0
*
13-7
Parts Database
UI: Database Tables
Queries
ARTICLE ARTICLE_BRIEF
Forms
Macros
Reports
Modules
Preview ARTICLE1
Design New
Parts Database Part Number
Description
Manufacturer
Technical Description 100-A09NA3 IEC CONTACTOR 220VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ
A-B MS3, CRNO
100-A09NB3 IEC CONTACTOR 440VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ
A-B MS3, CRNO
100-A09NC3 550VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ
Brief “Article1” Report
13-8
Record:
*
IEC CONTACTOR
A-B
Parts Database
Macros The Macros function contains no links to files or reports at time of installation. Macros can be defined and created after initial installation. Note
The Open, Design, and New buttons are not functional in the Run–Time version of Access. These buttons are available in the Full version of Access only. Run – Use this button to run the selected (highlighted) macro. Design – Use this button to modify a macro. New – Use this button to create a new macro for the database.
Modules The Modules function contains no links to files or reports at time of installation. Modules can be defined and created after initial installation. Note
The Open, Design, and New buttons are not functional in the Run–Time version of Access. These buttons are available in the Full version of Access only. Run – Use this button to run the selected (highlighted) module. Design – Use this button to modify a module. New – Use this button to create a new module for the database.
13-9
Parts Database
ARTICLE.mdb The ARTICLE.mdb is a database file located in the RS\DBS\DB directory.
Contents of 'Db' Name
Pr Bmp Catalog Db Custom Lg Logos Dbs Db
Select ARTICLE.mdb File
To access the ARTICLE.mdb file, go to the RS\DBS\DB directory and select the ARTICLE.mdb icon. The following ARTICLE: Database dialog box will appear: ARTICLE: Database Tables
ARTICLE DICTION
Queries
Forms
Reports
Macros
Modules
Open Design New
The ARTICLE: Database dialog box contains five functions; Tables, Queries, Forms, Reports, Macros, and Modules. To access any of these functions, select the applicable tab.
13-10
Parts Database
Tables The Tables function contains two files with tables, ARTICLE and DICTION. ARTICLE: Database Tables
ARTICLE DICTION
Queries
Forms
Reports
Macros
Modules
Open Design New
13-11
Parts Database
ARTICLE Table To select the ARTICLE table, select (highlight) the ARTICLE icon and select the Open button. The following ARTICLE: Table will appear: ARTICLE:Table
PART NUMBER DESCR SYMBOL 100-A9NA3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NB3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NC3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9ND3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NE3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NF3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NG3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NH3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NI3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NJ3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NK3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NKA3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NKD3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 Record:
MANUFACT A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B
PREFGROUP
*
The ARTICLE: Table contains records on each of the parts within the parts database.
13-12
Parts Database
DICTION Table To select the DICTION table, select (highlight) the DICTION icon and select the Open button. The following DICTION: Table will appear: DICTION:Table
DIC_NAME ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE Record:
DIC_TABLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE ARTICLE
DIC_FIELD PARTNUMBER DESCR SYMBOL MANUFACT PREFGROUP ORDNUMBER PRICE_S PRICE_B DISCOUNT UNITS X Y Z
DIC_INTERN partno descr symb_wir manufact prefgrp ordno price_s price_b discount units dim_x dim_y dim_z
DIC_KEY 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2007 2006 2025 2008 2011 2012 2013
*
The DICTION: Table defines the structure for each field record within the ARTICLE table.
13-13
Parts Database
TDB.mdb The TDB.mdb file is located in the RS\DB\LG directory. Rs
Contents of 'Lg' Name
Bmp Catalog Db Custom Lg Logos Dbs
Select TDB.mdb File
To access the TDB.mdb file, go to the RS\DB\LG directory and select the TDB.mdb icon. The following TDB: Database dialog box will appear: TDB: Database Tables
TEXT
Queries
Forms
Reports
Macros
Modules
Open Design New
The TDB: Database dialog box contains five functions; Tables, Queries, Forms, Reports, Macros, and Modules. To access any of these functions, select the applicable tab.
13-14
Parts Database
Tables The Tables function contains one table, TEXT. TDB: Database Tables
TEXT
Queries
Forms
Reports
Macros
Modules
Open Design New
13-15
Parts Database
TEXT Table To open the TEXT table, select (highlight) the TEXT icon and select the Open button. The following table will appear: TEXT: Table
TEXT NO 1 10 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 11 Record:
English MOTOR '.' DIRECTION MAIN SPINDL MAIN SPINDL FEED ON FEED HOLD INDEX TABLE SAFETY DOO MANUAL TOO CHECK CLAM LUBRICATION RECTIFIER
German
French
MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR BEWEGUNGS DIRECTION '.' DIR. DE MOVI HAUPTSPINDL BROCHE PRIN HAUPTSPINDL BROCHE PINC VORSCHUB S DEPART AVAN VORSCHUB H AVANCE STOF UEBERWACH CONTROLE ^P UEBERWACH CONTROLE PO WERKZEUGW CHANGEM.MA UEBERWACH CONTROLE DI STOERUNG ZE DERANGEMEN RECTIFICADO GLEICHRICHTEREDRESSEUR
*
The TEXT: Table contains records on each language database.
13-16
Spanish
Parts Database
USER.mdb and DEFAULT.mdb Once the UI.mdb database is created by RSWire, it looks for two files (USER.mdb and DEFAULT.mdb) to link forms and reports. These files contain reports and forms for data to be entered. Both files are located in the RS\Syscon\List directory. UI.mdb conditionally looks for the USER.mdb and then for the DEFAULT.mdb file. If USER.mdb exists (and contains reports or forms), UI.mdb will stop and obtain data from USER.mdb for the form and report information. If USER.mdb either exists but contains no reports or forms, or does not exist, UI.mdb will look to DEFAULT.mdb for the form and report information. RSWire currently is shipped with an empty USER.mdb file. This file is created by the user to either put their own reports and forms, or copy DEFAULT.mdb, change name to USER.mdb, and modify the reports or forms. Pr Bmp Catalog Db Dbs Fonts Menu Plot Program Project Syscon List System Tmp User Work
Contents of 'List' Name
Select USER.mdb File (If Present) Or Select DEFAULT.mdb File
13-17
Parts Database
Accessing the Parts Database As delivered, the parts database contains one ARTICLE file with a collection of sample parts data. The Manage > Parts Database pull–down menu provides functions which allow access to the parts data.
Manage Parts Database Edit Form... Edit Table... Duplicates Check
13-18
Parts Database
Parts Database Edit Form You can view and enter data about a part number using the parts database edit (Article) form. Note
The ARTICLE mdb database file is located in RS\DBS\DB. If you use metric units you may wish to edit the Article Form to change the labels for the Dimensions and Weight fields from “in.” and “lb.” to “mm”, “kg”, etc.
Note
RSWire is supplied with the Run–Time version of Access which will allow you to view and edit only the data files. If you wish to edit the Article form itself, or create a custom form, you will need to have a Full Version of Access installed on your system. To access the parts database edit form, select:
Manage Parts Database Edit Form The following form will appear: ARTICLE
Parts Database
Date Created 04/23/96 Changed 06/05/96
100A09NA3 Part Number IEC CONTACTOR Description A–B PMG Manuf. Catalog 100A09NA3
Supplier
Symbols M Ref. Wire W–ABCOA010 L–ABCOA010 Lay.
M31
Price Price_S Price_B Device Type
0
Units
0
Discount
0
(C)over or (P)anel
Dimensions 1.81 X (in) Y (in) 2.92 3.31 Z (in) Weight[lb] Power[VA] Time Assembly Wiring
0.95 0
Sort By: PARTNUMBER
Filter By: PARTNUMBER
Filter Remove Filters
M31
Technical Description
Additional Part Numbers
220VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ
MS3, CRNO
Record:
QM31
*
13-19
Parts Database
This form contains the various data fields available for each part in the database. Each time a database query is requested, Microsoft Access opens the database and provides an output based on the type of query.
Database Data Fields Part Number – This field holds the part number by which the part is identified both in the database and when entering part numbers on the schematic screen. Important
Do not include spaces in the part number. Description – Use this field to enter a description of the part. Manuf.– Use this field to enter the manufacturer’s name. Up to 15 characters are allowed. Catalog – Use this 20 character field to enter the manufacturer’s catalog part number for the part. Supplier – Use this 20 character field to enter the name of the company from which you purchase the part. PMG – Use this field to assign the part a Preferred Manufacturer’s Group (PMG) number of up to 3 characters. Each part in the database can be assigned to a preferred manufacturer’s group. These groups can consist of parts from a single manufacturer, parts from a certain supply company, etc. Once the groups are created, you can filter parts data by the PMG field so that only the parts from the selected group(s) will be listed in the Assign Part Number dialog box (the dialog box that appears when you search for part numbers from the drawing screen). Price: Price_S – Use this field to enter the selling price that you charge for the part. Price_B – Use this field to enter the billing price that the manufacturer charges for the part. Units – Use this field to enter a description of the units that the part is measured in, such as inches, millimeters, gallons, etc. These units are not taken into account in the default RSWire lists.
13-20
Parts Database
Discount – Use this field to enter the percent discount. Device Type – You can assign a device type to the part. If this is done, when the part is assigned to a symbol the device type is automatically assigned to the symbol and the Device Type selection dialog box will not be displayed. In other words, it saves a step when placing parent symbols. (You have the option of changing this automatically assigned device type when the symbol is placed.) Technical Description – Use these four fields to enter an extended description of the part. Date: Created – This field holds the date that the part data was entered in the database. Changed – This field holds the date that the part data was altered (edited). Symbols: Ref. – Use this field to enter the name of the symbol that will represent the part in schematic diagram. For example, enter the symbol name PBNO for parts that are normally open pushbuttons (JIC format). This ensures that when the symbol is used in a schematic, the part will be listed on the Assign Part Number dialog box (that allows users to select a part number). You can have many different part numbers assigned to one symbol name. If a part number applies to more than one symbol, you can enter multiple symbol names in the Ref. field separated by commas up to the maximum width of the field (example: TBC1,X1). Wire – Use this field to enter the name of a wire diagram symbol that will represent the part on wiring diagrams. (This is an optional routine that automatically generates a wiring diagram showing connection information for devices in the schematics.) Lay. – Use this field to name the symbol that will represent the part on panel layout diagrams. If no symbol is named here, the part will be shown on panel layouts as a box having the size entered in the Dimensions fields. (C)over or (P)anel – Enter a “C” or “P” to indicate whether the part is usually mounted on an enclosure door (cover) or on an inside panel. Dimensions (X, Y, Z) – Use these fields to enter the size of the part. Fields are provided for width (x), height (y), and depth (z). If only the x–coordinate is entered, the part will be represented on a panel layout as a circle having this value as its diameter (if no other symbol is named in the Lay. field). If no x or y values are entered, the user can make a box of any size in the layout mode.
13-21
Parts Database
Weight – Use this field to enter the weight of the device. Power[VA] – Use this field to enter the power requirements of the part in VA. Time: Assembly – Use this field to enter an assembly time value in minutes. Wiring – Use this field to enter a wiring time value in minutes. Additional Part Numbers – Use these four fields for additional part numbers that are associated with this part. This is useful for parts that are assemblies of multiple parts. These additional part numbers should have their own data records elsewhere in the parts database. Sort By – The dropdown list allows records to be sorted by a specific database field. The selections in the list are the internal names of the parts database fields. Filter By – This pair of fields allows you to restrict the range of parts records that are displayed. In the lower of the two fields, use the dropdown list to select the database field to which you wish the criteria to apply (part number, manufacturer, etc.). In the upper field, enter the alphanumeric string that the desired parts records must match. This can include wildcard (*) strings. When the desired criteria are entered, select the Filter button to put the filter into effect. Now only those parts records that match the entered criteria will be displayed. To remove the filter, select the Remove Filter button. Record 1 of ? Count – Displays the number of records contained within a specific regular or filtered search.
13-22
Parts Database
Add a Parts Database Record 1.
Display the parts database edit form (Manage > Parts Database > Edit Form).
2.
Select the Add Record ( >* ) button at the bottom of the form for new data entry. A blank data entry form will be displayed. Enter the desired part data.
3.
You can store the newly entered data by a.) selecting the Add Record button again, b.) displaying another part record, or c.) selecting the Save Record button (the button with the disk and pencil icon).
Undo Record You can use the Undo Record button to clear the form of any parts data that has not yet been saved (if you wish to start over). This is the button with the curved arrow and pencil icon.
13-23
Parts Database
Delete a Parts Database Record
13-24
1.
Display the parts database edit form (Manage > Parts Database > Edit Form).
2.
Display the part record that you wish to delete. See page 13-25.
3.
Select the Delete Record button (the button with the “X” icon).
4.
The software will ask, “Are you sure you wish to delete this record?” Select the Yes button to delete the record from the Article.mdb file.
Parts Database
Find a Parts Database Record 1.
In the Parts Datadabase edit form, place the cursor in the field for the type of information for which you plan to search (part number, manufacturer, etc.)
2.
Select the Find button. (This is the button with binoculars icon.) The Find and Replace dialog will appear.
3.
The Look In field will show the name of the database field that you selected in step 1. The database search will be confined to entries in this field. If you wish to include all database fields in the search, select “Article” in the Look In field.
4.
In the Find What field, enter the alphanumeric string for which you wish to search. You can use wildcard (*) searches.
5.
In the Match field select whether the search string you entered should match Any Part of the part number, the Whole part number or the Start (beginning) of the part number. (This step is not necessary if you entered a wildcard string in the previous step.)
6.
Select the Find Next button to find the next part number record that matches your search criteria.
13-25
Parts Database
Filtering Parts Database Records The Parts Database edit form contains filtering functions that allow you to narrow down the range of parts records that are displayed. This makes it easier to find and view parts data that matches a given set of criteria. Filter By: PARTNUMBER
Filter
Filtering functions
Remove Filters
The two Filter By fields allow you to restrict the range of parts records that are displayed. 1.
In the lower of the two fields, use the dropdown list to select the database field to which you wish the criteria to apply (part number, manufacturer, etc.).
2.
In the upper field, enter the alphanumeric string that the desired parts records must match. This can include wildcard (*) strings.
3.
When the desired criteria are entered, select the Filter button to put the filter into effect. Now only those parts records that match the entered criteria will be displayed.
You can add additional criteria to the current filter by repeating the above steps. To remove the filter, select the Remove Filter button. More complex filters can be created by using the Edit Filter button (the button with the filter and pencil icon). This displays a table where multiple filter criteria can be entered with conditional statements. Refer to MS–Access documentation for more information.
13-26
Parts Database
Edit a Parts Database Record To edit individual parts records using the Parts Database edit form.
Note
1.
Display the desired parts database record.
2.
Enter the desired new data in the appropriate field(s).
3.
Select the Save Record button. (This is the button with the disk and pencil icon.)
The new data also will be saved if you display a different parts record.
13-27
Parts Database
Table View of Database You may choose to edit parts data using the table view of the database. New data can be entered into a table using the Edit function within Access. To add a new record to the database, select:
Manage Parts Database Edit Table The following TEXT table will appear: ARTICLE:Table
PART NUMBER DESCR SYMBOL 100-A9NA3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NB3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NC3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9ND3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NE3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NF3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NG3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NH3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NI3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NJ3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NK3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NKA3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 100-A9NKD3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 Record:
MANUFACT A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B
PREFGROUP
*
The columns in the table correspond to the data fields in the parts database edit form.
13-28
Parts Database
Database Manipulation This section provides information for the advanced RSWire user who wishes to work with the structure of the RSWire parts database. It is vital that complete backup copies of database information be made before attempting to alter the structure or content of the database.
13-29
Parts Database
Database Manipulation Outside of RSWire The form for Parts Data entry and Editing work well for manipulation of data within RSWire, but some users may wish to manipulate the parts database outside of RSWire using a separate Database Management System (DBMS). The reasons for doing this vary with each company. Some possible reasons for working with the database outside of RSWire are: 1.
Data entry may be done outside of the RSWire environment by clerical personnel who have data entry experience but no CAD knowledge.
2.
The users can use the DBMS that they are the most experienced with.
3.
The data entry interface can be customized by the use of the chosen DBMS tools which may be more familiar than dialog box modification.
4.
DBMS programming tools such as macros, scripts and database application languages can be used to manipulate data and automate data entry.
5.
The RSWire parts database can be linked to a company–wide DBMS parts management / inventory system.
6.
Actions can be performed on the database which are not available through RSWire (spell checking, search and replace, etc.).
7.
External manipulation can help to minimize limitations of table locking. (AutoCAD does not support record locking.)
Editing the Database Outside of RSWire The DBMS you choose depends on the import / export functionality of the DBMS and the format that you wish to use for your parts table. (The terms import and export are used because .MDB may not be the native format of your DBMS and an import / export function may be needed. If your software does use .MDB directly you would simply use a file open or save.)
13-30
Parts Database
If you choose to stay with the default format of MS–Access you need to be sure that your software will do a true Access or .mdb export. This means the database structure MUST be kept intact and the structure exported must match what is imported. If you have any doubt, back up the DB directory. Import the tables ARTICLE and DICTION from the ARTICLE.MDB file and try every manipulation that you intend to perform (add, delete, sort, edit, etc.). Export the database back to RSWire and thoroughly check the database’s integrity. You may be able to use a spreadsheet software as well as true DBMS software, although this may limit the size of the files that you may need to work with. Be especially careful of spreadsheet programs such as Excel which will change the field width when you graphically widen a column to view its entire contents. To read the parts database simply open the ARTICLE.MDB and read it into your DBMS. The user may now make any modifications to the table as long as they do not change the structure. The ARTICLE.MDB can then be saved.
13-31
Parts Database
Changing Field Sizes The simplest restructuring of the database is to change the field width. Always backup your database file before restructuring! Losses of data can occur which become un–retrievable. The first step is to bring the tables from ARTICLE.MDB into a DBMS as discussed above. Use the tools within the DBMS to modify the field desired. Save the file. The DICTION table has the following structure: DIC_NAME – Database Name used in RSWire (Several “virtual databases” may be created from one Physical table.) DIC_TABLE – Database .MDB file (Table) name DIC_FIELD – Database structure field name DIC_INTERN – Variable name used within RSWire for dialog boxes and lists Note
All entries to DIC_INTERN must be at least 4 characters long. Otherwise, the field will not appear in the list. DIC_KEY – A field number used internally by RSWire. The range is 2000 to 2099. This number determines the order of the fields listed in the Assign Part Number dialog box.) DIC_LENGTH – The character width of the field. DIC_TYPE – The type of information stored in the Field Database Structure 0 – String (Characters) 1 – Integer (Whole Numbers) 2 – Floating Point (Decimals) DIC_PREC – Precision (Not used at this time.) DIC_ITYPE – Type of index (Not used at this time.) DIC_INDEX – The name of the .NDX file in which the field is the key for the index. (Not used at this time.) DIC_DCL – The name of the dialog box for entry in the database within RSWire. (Not used at this time.)
13-32
Parts Database
In the DIC_FIELD column, search for the field name that you wish to change the size of. In the DIC_LENGTH field for the record change the number to the new field width. Note that some fields may be listed more than once in the DICTION table with different DIC_NAME entries. This is because RSWire may internally divide one physical database file into several tables and an individual entry may act as a field in several of these virtual tables. Be sure that you change all of the entries to match the same width as that which is actually used in the MDB file. After the edits are complete, save the file. Now that RSWire will be able to use the new column widths to read the database and handle it internally it is necessary to allow the users to make use of the new width. This will require the modification of all forms and List Generator files to reflect the new field widths. Typically the files to be modified are ARTICLE form and several of the parts related List Generator files. An easy way to get a list of the files that need changing is to use a utility such as Norton File Find to find all occurrences of the DIC_INTERN entries for the records that were modified in the DICTION table.
13-33
Parts Database
Adding Fields To add or delete fields the process is the same as for modifying fields. First you read in the ARTICLE table with a DBMS and restructure the database with the new fields. Then edit the DICTION table. You will have to insert new lines for the new fields. The position in the file where you place the new records does not matter. For the sake of clarity you should use the same order as the actual database field order. Add the internal variables into the appropriate list generator and files. Example: Three new fields are needed for parts information; one floating point, one integer and one string. New fields: Name
Type
Length
MY_INT
new integer field
4
MY_FLOAT
floating point field
6
MY_STRING
new character field
5
1.
Enter the DBMS and add the three fields to the ARTICLE table. Give the new fields the appropriate width and type.
2.
Modify the DICTION table within the DBMS. Add the corresponding 3 rows to the table:
DIC_NAME
DIC_TABLE
DIC_FIELD
DIC_INTERN
DIC_KEY
DIC_LENGTH
ARTICLE
ARTICLE
MY_INT
int1
2099
4
ARTICLE
ARTICLE
MY_FLOAT
float
2098
6
ARTICLE
ARTICLE
MY_STRING
string
2097
5
DIC_INDEX
DIC_DCL
DIC_TYPE
DIC_PREC
DIC_ITYPE
1
0
0
db_rec
2
0
0
db_rec
0
0
0
db_rec
The positions of the new columns and the new rows don’t matter. Save the file and enter RSWire. 3.
13-34
Create a new form within Access.
Parts Database
4.
Edit the description file of the database list description (db2.lst): Add three lines in the part data section: |Int |Float |String
: : :
?int1 ?float ?string
| | |
When the list is used the new fields will be displayed in the list.
13-35
Parts Database
Database Complete Restructure Through the use of the methods already discussed it seems possible to completely restructure the RSWire database to match one that the customer may already have. This attractive proposition would allow the customer to have real time interaction between RSWire and his other parts inventory software. Unfortunately there are two roadblocks to this goal. The first is the already mentioned limit to record locking. In most true DBMS’s, locking is accomplished on a record level. This means that any number of people can be using the database simultaneously to do edits, lists, data entries, etc. The only limitation is that the software will not allow two people to modify the same record at the same time. In RSWire, whole tables are locked at the same time. This makes the system difficult to use in a large multi–user environment where several people may need to change part information at the same time. If you must have this type of data entry flexibility, the only solution at this time is to maintain the database using the current DBMS software and use a script or custom software to transfer the parts information in a separate parts database file to be used by RSWire on a read–only basis. The second limitation to tying directly to an existing database is that there are a few fields which must be left alone for RSWire to function correctly. These fields are:
symb_ref prefgrp partno dim_x dim_y addparton symb_lay descr
These fields must be left alone with regard to DIC_FIELD and DIC_INTERN.
13-36
Parts Database
Previewing the Parts Database To access the RSWire parts database, and view the detailed data, select:
Reports Libraries Parts Full Data Preview The following Parts Database dialog box will appear.
Parts Database Part Number
Manufacturer
Description
Catalog #
PMG
List Price Units
Device Type
Sell Price Discount
(C)over or (P)anel X
Technical Description
Ref. Symbol Wire. Symbol Lay. Symbol Weight Y
Z
Power
Assembly Time Created Wiring Time
Changed
Additional Part Numbers
100-A09NA3
A-B
0
IEC CONTACTOR
100-A09NA3
0
M31
M
0
W-ABC0A010 1.81
2.92
L-ABC0A010 3.31
0.95
04/23/96
0
06/05/96
0.95
04/23/96
220VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ MS3, CRNO
QM31
100-A09NB3
A-B
0
IEC CONTACTOR
100-A09NB3
0
M31
M
0
W-ABC0A010 1.81
2.92
L-ABC0A010 3.31
0
440VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ MS3, CRNO
QM31
100-A09NC3
A-B
0
IEC CONTACTOR
100-A09NC3
0
M31
M
0
W-ABC0A010 1.81
2.92
L-ABC0A010 3.31
0.95
04/23/96
0
550VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ MS3, CRNO
QM31
100-A09ND3
A-B
0
IEC CONTACTOR
100-A09ND3
0
M31 0
M
W-ABC0A010 1.81
2.92
L-ABC0A010 3.31
0.95
04/23/96
0
110VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ MS3, CRNO
Wednesday, December 30, 1998
QM31
Page 1 of 898
The Parts Database list in the Full Data Preview function is viewed in a landscape format.
13-37
Parts Database
To access the RSWire parts database, and view a more concise data listing, select:
Reports Libraries Parts Brief Data Preview The following Database Data dialog box will appear.
Parts Database Part Number
Description
Manufacturer
Catalog #
A-B
100-A9NA3
Technical Description 100-A09NA3 IEC CONTACTOR 220VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ
MS3, CRNO 100-A09NB3 IEC CONTACTOR 440VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ
MS3, CRNO 100-A09NC3 IEC CONTACTOR 550VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ
100-A9NG3 QM31 100-A9NH3 QM31 100-A9NI3 QM31 100-A9NJ3 QM31 100-A9NK3 QM31 100-A9NKA3 QM31
A-B MS3, CRNO
Wednesday, December 30, 1998
QM31
A-B MS3, CRNO
100-A09NKD3 IEC CONTACTOR 24VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50/60HZ
100-A9NF3
A-B MS3, CRNO
100-A09NKA3 IEC CONTACTOR 48VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50/60HZ
QM31
A-B MS3, CRNO
100-A09NK3 IEC CONTACTOR 24VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ
100-A9NE3
A-B MS3, CRNO
100-A09NJ3 IEC CONTACTOR 24VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 60HZ
QM31
A-B MS3, CRNO
100-A09NI3 IEC CONTACTOR 415VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ
100-A9ND3
A-B MS3, CRNO
100-A09NH3 IEC CONTACTOR 440VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 60HZ
QM31
A-B MS3, CRNO
100-A09NG3 IEC CONTACTOR 440VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 60HZ
100-A9NC3
A-B MS3, CRNO
100-A09NF3 IEC CONTACTOR 277VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 60HZ
QM31
A-B MS3, CRNO
100-A09NE3 IEC CONTACTOR 380VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 60HZ
100-A9NB3
A-B MS3, CRNO
100-A09ND3 IEC CONTACTOR 110VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ
QM31
A-B
100-A9NKD3 QM31 Page 1 of 321
The Parts Database list in the Brief Data Preview function is viewed in a portrait format. 13-38
Parts Database
Printing the Parts Database Printing from MS–Access Note
Printing options will vary depending on which version of Access (Run–Time or Full) is on your system. You can verify which version of Access you have by using the Help > About Microsoft Access drop–down menu. The Run–Time version will allow printing of the complete list only. The Full version will allow printing of the complete list, range of pages, or the current page. Use the following procedure to print the Full Data Preview list or the Brief Data Preview list from Access: 1.
Open the project.
2.
Select either the Reports > Libraries > Parts > Full Data Preview or the Reports > Libraries > Parts > Brief Data Preview function.
3.
Select the page you want to print.
4.
Select File > Print pull–down menu in Access. The Print dialog box will appear.
5.
Select one of the printing options: all pages, range of pages, or current page.
6.
Select the OK button.
Once printing is complete, exit Access. You will return to RSWire.
13-39
Parts Database
Printing from RSWire In order to print the complete Full Data Preview list or Brief Data Preview list from RSWire , you must perform the Reports > Libraries > Parts > Brief Data Printout or the Reports > Libraries > Parts > Full Data Printout function. Select:
Reports Libraries Parts Full Data Printout or
Reports Libraries Parts Brief Data Printout Access will open, the Printing dialog box will appear, and the complete list will print. Note
Selecting one of these functions will result in the printing of the complete parts database list. Some lists could be over 850 pages. If only a specified range of pages are required, refer to the Printing from Access section. Once printing is complete, exit Access. You will return to RSWire.
13-40
List Generator Configuration
14
List Generator Configuration
The RSWire list generator generates information reports and lists with a variable format. The format of a list is determined by a list description file. These files are stored in the directory RS\SYSCON\LIST. When one of the RSWire list functions is executed (from one of the Reports submenus), the system uses a list description file to determine which data are used in the listing and how they are positioned.
List Generator RSWire Project Information
List File (provides format)
Formatted Information Listing
A number of list description files are provided with RSWire. The user can also create custom list files. Caution: If you create your own list description files, keep a backup copy of your new files on a separate disk. Do not edit the existing list generator files as these will be overwritten when you update to a new software version. Instead, make a copy of list generator files under a different name and edit the copy. The following sections are included:
Assigning List Generator Files List File Structure Sample List File Sort Criteria Function Using Variable Data in Lists List Data Formatting Arithmetic Operations With Variables String Manipulations Static Filter for Lists Tab Formatting in Lists
14-1
List Generator Configuration
14-2
List Generator Variables Project Lists Database Lists Wire Lists Parts Lists Field Wiring Lists Error Checking Lists
List Generator Configuration
Assigning List Generator Files If you create a custom list generator file you must assign this file to the appropriate report or list function within RSWire. 1.
To assign list generator files, select:
Tools System Settings 2.
Select the Reports: Description Files tab. The following dialog box will appear. X
System Settings Report Settings
Reports: Description Files
Command Protec
Printer Configuration
List Name
File Name
Printer
Conn. Conn. List ListI/O I/OList List Conn. List Wire Diagram List Conn. List Wire Label List Conn. List Wiring List Fld. Wire Cable + Wire List Fld. Wire Cable List Fld. Wire Terminal List Fld. Wire Terminal Strip List Gen. Info Device Types [Brief] Gen. Info Device Types [Detailed] Gen. Info Macro Directory Gen. Info Page Formats
PLC.LST PLC.LST WIREDG.LST WIRELAB.LST WIRE.LST FLDWIRE.LST CABLE.LST TERM.LST TSTRIP.LST DEVICE2.LST DEVICE1.LST MACRO.LST FORMAT.LST
Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default
Conn. List I/O List
Select List Here
PLC.LST
Printer
Default
1
2
3
OK
4
Cancel
5
Save
File
Enter Filename Here
Help...
After selecting the desired list name, you can enter the new file name in the field below the list. You can also select a printer for each list. Select the Save button to save the assignment for future work sessions.
14-3
List Generator Configuration
The following list generator files are provided with the software. The default directory for these files is RS\SYSCON\LIST. (See next page for comma–separated “CS” list generator files.) List File
14-4
Description
BRADY.LST
Brady label list
CABLE.LST
Cable list
DB1.LST
Database list (brief)
DB2.LST
Database list (detailed)
DEVICE1.LST
Device type list (detailed)
DEVICE2.LST
Device type list (brief)
DEVWP.LST
Device without parent list
DIM.LST
Parts dimension list
FLDWIRE.LST
Field wiring list
FORMAT.LST
Page format list
INST.LST
Installation list
JOB.LST
Job costing list
MACRO.LST
Macro list
MASTER.LST
Master parts list
P_O.LST
Purchase order list
PAGE1.LST
Page list (brief)
PAGE2.LST
Page list (detailed)
PAGE3.LST
Project all list (project paths/directories)
PAGE4.LST
Alternative format page list
PARTS.LST
Bill of Materials
PLC.LST
PLC (programmable logic controller) list
PROJECT1.LST
Project list (brief)
PROJECT2.LST
Project list (detailed)
SIGNAL.LST
Signal list
SYMBOL.LST
Symbol list
TERM.LST
Terminal list
TEXT1.LST
Language text list (single language)
TEXT2.LST
Language text list (multi-language)
TSTRIP.LST
Terminal strip list
WIRE.LST
Wire list
WIRELAB.LST
Wire labels
List Generator Configuration
The following list generator files produce comma separated lists (qualified with ” ”) which can be imported into a spreadsheet program. List File
Description
CSCABLE.LST
Comma separated cable list
CSDB1.LST
Comma separated Database list (brief)
CSDB2.LST
Comma separated Database list (detailed)
CSDEVICE1.LST
Comma separated Device type list (detailed) Comma separated Device type list (brief)
CSDEVICE2.LST CSDEVWP.LST CSDIM.LST
Comma separated Device without parent list Comma separated Parts dimension list
CSFLDWIR.LST
Comma separated field wire list
CSFORMAT.LST
Comma separated Page format list
CSINST.LST
Comma separated Installation list
CSJOB.LST
Comma separated Job costing list
CSMACRO.LST
Comma separated Macro list
CSMASTER.LST
Comma separated master list
CSP_O.LST
Comma separated purchase order list
CSPAGE1.LST
Comma separated Page list (brief)
CSPAGE2.LST
Comma separated Page list (detailed)
CSPARTS.LST
Comma separated parts list
CSPLC.LST
Comma separated PLC list
CSPROJECT1.LST
Comma separated Project list (brief)
CSPROJECT2.LST
Comma separated Project list (detailed)
CSSIGNAL.LST
Comma separated Signal list
CSSYMBOL.LST
Comma separated Symbol list
CSTERM.LST
Comma separated Terminal list
CSTSTRIP.LST
Comma separated Terminal strip list
CSWIRE.LST
Comma separated wire list
14-5
List Generator Configuration
List File Structure The list file is organized in blocks of lines. Each block has a specific purpose as described below. These blocks are always output “en bloc”, in other words, without page breaks. The following blocks must be listed in every list description file: Control sequence:
Block Description:
!lh
List header (beginning of first page)
!ph
Page header (beginning of all subsequent pages)
!d1
Data block (output of data)
!pf
Page footer (end of all pages with the exception of the last page)
!lf
List footer (end of the last page)
The following is a sample list file, with an example of the listing that is generated from the list file.
14-6
List Generator Configuration
Sample List File (TSTRIP.LST)
List Header (first page)
Page Header (2nd page, and Following) Data Block Page Filler Page Footer List Footer (Last Page)
!lh 0 First Page Header –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Terminal strip list Date : ?date Page : ?pgno | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Project : ?project * ?addr01 | | Description: ?title01 * ?addr02 | | Drawing–No.: ?title02 * ?addr03 | | Job–Number : ?title03 * ?addr04 | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Number | Terminal strip | %3.3s ?pgno %.22s ?title01 %.22s ?title02 %.22s ?title03 %.33s ?addr01 %.33s ?addr02 %.33s ?addr03 %.33s ?addr04 !ph 0 Second Page Header (all following page headers) –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– * Terminal strip list Project: ?project Date : ?date Page : ?pgno* –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Number | Terminal strip | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– !d1 1 Database | ?count | ?install&?location&?strip | !fill 0 | | !pf 0 Page Footer –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | continued on page ?nextpgno | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– !lf 0 End of List ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
14-7
List Generator Configuration
Sample List Generated from the List File –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Terminal strip list Date : 02.20.99 Page : 1 | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Project : PROJECT * Company Name | | Description: SAMPLE PROJECT * Company’s Address | | Drawing–No.: 1000 * City, State Zip | | Job–Number : NONE * Phone Number | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Number | Terminal strip | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | 24 | =LINE1+JBOX–TB1 | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | 6 | =LINE1+PANEL–TB1 | –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | 18 | =LINE1+PANEL–TB2 | ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
In each block of the list file, text that will not change is entered as it should appear in the listing. RSWire variables are entered as a ? followed by the variable name. When the list is generated, the variable is replaced with the appropriate piece of data from the project. See page 14-29 for lists of available variables. Also see page 14-14 for information on formatting the appearance of variable data in the listing. List Header Block – This block specifies the information that will appear at the top of the first page of the listing. In the example list file on the previous page, the header block begins with the positioning of the various fields and descriptions of these fields. Below this, the field size of the variables are defined. For example, “%.22s ?title01” means that variable ?title01, the project description, is a string of which a maximum of 22 characters will be displayed. See page 14-14 for more information on formatting variables. Page Header Block – Specifies the page header that will appear at the top of the second and all subsequent pages. In the example file, the page header has been configured to display the project name (?project), the date (?date), and the page number (?pgno). Data Block – This block specifies the main content of the listing. In the example file, the variable ?termno (Quantity of terminal blocks) is specified, followed by variables ?install, ?location, and ?strip (terminal block installation, location and device ID).
14-8
List Generator Configuration
Page Filler Block – (Optional) If the user requires that page and list footers are always positioned at the lower edge of the page, the output block “page filler” should be listed in the list description file. The control sequence for the page filler block is “!fill”. This block must only contain one line. It is output repeatedly so that the pages end precisely with the final line of the page or list footer. Note
When outputting a list, in some circumstances, only one page with a large number of lines will be created. In order to avoid the generation of the corresponding number of fill lines, in such a case, the list generator will ignore the page filler. Page Footer Block – Specifies what will appear at the bottom of every page except the last page of the listing. In the example file, the text “continued on page” is specified, followed by variable ?nextpgno which represents the next page number. List Footer Block – Specifies what appears at the end of the last page of the listing.
Rules for list files
The beginning of each block is signaled by a control sequence composed of an exclamation mark and a block identifier. It is essential that the control sequences begin in the first column. The end of each block is signaled either by the beginning of the following block or by the end of the file. Each line must be completed with a carriage return. If the output of a block is not required, it must nevertheless be listed (otherwise an error message will appear), but it may be specified with 0 output lines. In some lists, provision is made for additional output blocks. These must be listed in the corresponding description files.
Other List File Functions Page Break – Normally, the list generator automatically controls page breaks. Following the last block which will fit in full on the page started, the output of the page footer is activated. If the user requires a new page to begin after each group of data, this can be achieved by adding the letter “n” to the control sequence !d1. Example: Control sequence:
Description:
!d1
Data block is output with maximum page utilization.
!d1n
Page break prior to output of the data block.
!h1
Headline is output if block output before is not page header.
!h1n
Headline is output only on the first page of the list, later on only a page break is initiated.
14-9
List Generator Configuration
Caution: The unconditional page break must not be used for list headers, list footers, page headers and page footers.
Page Counter Variables – The list generator has two counters that keep track of:
The number of the current page The number of the following page
Output of page numbers is initiated by the variable ?pgno (current page of list) or ?nextpgno (next page of list). Recommended method: use ?pgno in list and page headers; use ?nextpgno in page footers (“continued on page ?nextpgno”). Consecutive Number – The list generator holds a range of indices which can be output in every list at any given point. The starting value for the indices is 1; the expression of an index automatically leads to its incrementation. These indices can be used, for example, for numbering items in the list. The following variables may be specified: Variable:
Description:
?ix1
Index 1
?ix.1
Index 1.1; is reset in the event of incrementation of index 1
?ix..1
Index 1.2; is reset in the event of incrementation of index 1 or 1.1
?ix2
Index 2
?ix3
Index 3
Suppress Individual Lines – Occasionally, when replacing variables, the list generator will access strings with a length of 0. It is possible to suppress such lines. For this purpose, the control sequence ?nopr should be entered at any point in the list description file. The line thus marked will be suppressed if only zero strings are accessed during data access. Control sequence: ?nopr
14-10
Description: Line is suppressed
List Generator Configuration
List to File – When outputting a list to a disk file, the file path is generated automatically. However, automatic generation can be prevented via the entry of the control block !outfile at the end of the list file. The control sequence !outfile or !outfile ? will cause the system to request path/filename for the file. The sequence !outfile <path/filename> will automatically save the file to <path/filename> Control sequence:
Description:
!outfile
request filename for list
!outfile? <path/filename>
save list as <path/filename>
Sort Criteria Function The user can place sort statements in the list generator files which specify variables by which the list will be sorted. This sorting will only occur when the Sort On toggle is selected in the Report Settings dialog box (Tools > System Settings > Report Settings tab). X
System Settings Report Settings
Filter
OFF
Reports: Description Files
Printer Configuration
Sort
Command Protec
Output
Screen
OFF
Printer File
Sort Toggles
ON
Project
ON
Interactive Graphic Output
OK
Cancel
Save
Help...
14-11
List Generator Configuration
When the Sort Off toggle is selected, sorting occurs in default order. In the list file on the following page (P_O.LST), the sort criterion is found at the end of the file and is identified by the key phrase “!sort”. Following the sort command is the “!h2” descriptor identifying the data block to be sorted and the variable name (?manufact) to be used in the static sort method. Also specified is a numeric constant (0) which describes the sorting method. These numeric constants are defined as follows: Sort Constants Sort Mode
Ascending
Descending
Alphabetical
[0]
[1]
Ignore Case
[2]
[3]
Numerical
[4]
[5]
Mixed: Alpha + Num.
[6]
[7]
Date
[8]
[9]
New Page
[n]
Therefore, in the following P_O.LST example the list would be sorted by the information in the !h2 block by manufacturer name in alphabetical order. The inclusion of the “n” switch indicates that a new page should be started for each manufacturer.
14-12
List Generator Configuration !lh 0 First Page Header ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Purchase Order List Date: ?date Page: ?pgno| ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Project Name: ?project | ?addr01 | | Install. Name: ?title01 | ?addr02 | | Drawing No.: ?title03 | ?addr03 | | Job Number: ?title02 | ?addr04 | ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Part No. Qty. Description Catalog No. Manufacturer | %3.3s ?pgno %.24s ?title01 %.24s ?title02 %.24s ?title03 %.32s ?addr01 %.32s ?addr02 %.32s ?addr03 !ph 0 Second Page Header (all following page headers) ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Purchase Order List Project: ?project Date: ?date Page: ?pgno| ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | Part No. Qty. Description Catalog No. Manufacturer | %3.3s ?pgno !h2 1 Database ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | ?partno ?quant ?descr ?ordno ?manufact | | ?nopr ?tech01 | | ?nopr ?tech02 | | ?nopr ?tech03 | | ?nopr ?tech04 | %–14.14s ?partno %–6.6s ?quant %–21.21s ?descr %–12.12s ?ordno %–13.13s ?manufact %.48s ?tech01 %.48s ?tech02 %.48s ?tech03 %.48s ?tech04 !d1 2 | | | ?ins01 ?ins02 ?ins03 ?ins04 ?ins05 ?ins06 ?ins07 ?ins08 | | ?loc01 ?loc02 ?loc03 ?loc04 ?loc05 ?loc06 ?loc07 ?loc08 | | ?did01 ?did02 ?did03 ?did04 ?did05 ?did06 ?did07 ?did08 | !fill 0 Fill Command | | !pf 0 Page footer ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– | continued on page ?nextpgno | ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– !lf 0 End of list ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– !sort !h2 ?manufact 0n !outfile ?
14-13
List Generator Configuration
Using Variable Data in Lists The list description file contains references to data assigned in the program. These references (? values) are composed of a question mark and a variable name, for example ?date. The list generator replaces the string ?date in the output list with the current date. Because the date comprises 8 characters, the 6 characters following ?date in the list description file are ignored and are overwritten in the output list. Note
The variables that can be accessed by each list are limited. If an attempt is made to access variables that are not valid for a given list then it is possible for nonsense values to appear in the output list (see page 14-29 for lists of the variables available for each type of list). The “&” Separator – For many variables, the list generator will access values of different lengths. If these data are to be written consecutively in flush format, the symbol “&” should be added to the data identifier to ensure that the first value does not write over the second. The following examples show various methods of separating the values. Where:
Note
14-14
?title01 is replaced by Installation12 ?title02 is replaced by 0815 ?title03 is replaced by 4711 Control sequence:
?title01?title02
Produces output:
Installa0815
Control sequence:
?title01&?title02
Produces output:
Installa120815
Control sequence:
?title01&?title02&?title03
Produces output:
Installation1208154711
Control sequence:
?title01&/?title02&/?title03
Produces output:
Installation12/0815/4711
Control sequence:
?title01& / ?title02& / ?title03
Produces output:
Installation12 / 0815 / 4711
– the “&” character must be directly after the data identifier – all symbols between & and ? will be inserted flush – if there is no ? after the &, all symbols until the end of the line will be inserted in flush format
List Generator Configuration
List Data Formatting As a general rule, the data in the lists are output left–aligned. It is also possible to change the output to other formats including right–aligned. Reformatting is conducted separately for each output block. Format specifications are listed below the last output line of the output block in question. Each format specification is in its own line, terminated by a carriage return. The formatting instruction is identified by its leading percentage symbol %. The formatting instruction is followed by the data identification number, separated at least by a blank. Note
The formatting instruction must begin in the first column.
Example format instruction %10.2f
%
Indicates A Format Specification
10
Field Width
.
2
Number Of Digits To The Right of Decimal Point (Floating Point) Or Number Of Characters Displayed
f
Indicates Format Of Value
If no field width value is given, as many characters will be displayed as is necessary to show the value. Note
Most listings will require a field width to establish columns. A minus sign preceding the field width value will cause the listing to be left–aligned. Examples:
Note
In the following examples, colons have been used to show the beginning and end of the string; these are not output by the list generator. a.
String output:
An “s” at the end of the format instruction represents a string.
14-15
List Generator Configuration
Format instr.:
Result:
%5s
:EXAMPLE1:
%-5s
:EXAMPLE1:
%10s
: EXAMPLE1:
%-10s
:EXAMPLE1 :
%10.5s
:
%-10.5s
:EXAMP
%.5s
:EXAMP:
b.
EXAMP: :
Output as whole number: (E.g.: 123)
A “d” at the end of the format instruction represents a whole number value. Format instr.:
Result:
%d
:123:
%10d
:
123:
%10.4d
:
0123:
%-10.2d
:123
%-10.4d
:0123
%.2d
:123:
%.4d
:0123:
c.
: :
Output as floating point number: (E.g.: 123.321)
A “f” at the end of the format instruction represents a floating point number. Format instr.:
14-16
Result:
%f
:123.321000:
%10.2f
: 123.32:
%10.4f
: 123.3210:
%-10.2f
:123.32 :
%-10.4f
:123.3210 :
%.2f
:123.32:
%.4f
:123.3210:
List Generator Configuration
Arithmetic Operations With Variables By means of arithmetic operations, it is possible to import additional information into the lists from the data defined in RSWire. For this purpose, the list generator provides two types of variables:
Type i (integer) variables for whole numbers Type f (float) variables for floating point numbers
Expression in the list description file: Variable:
Meaning:
?i1
1. Whole number variable
?i2
2. Whole number variable
?f1
1. Floating point variable
?f2
2. Floating point variable
Up to 30 of each type of variable are allowed. Formatting List Generator Variables Equations must exist in the control sequence block where the variable is defined. Formatting instructions for variables must be located at the end of the block, after all the output lines. They are likewise identified by the leading percentage symbol. Whole number variables must be formatted using the conversion symbol d, and floating point variables using the characters ?f. Examples: %d
?i1
%f
?f1
%4.2f
?f2
Value assignment to List Generator Variables Values can be assigned to the variables via expressions following the corresponding format specification. These expressions are composed of a sequence of operands and operators.
14-17
List Generator Configuration
Permissible operands: ?c
Purpose: constants
(no character)
RSWire variable
?i
whole number variable
?f
floating point variable
Permissible operators:
Function:
+
for addition
-
for subtraction
*
for multiplication
/
for division
Examples: %d ? i1 ?c4*25 %d ?i2 ?i2+?i1 %f ?f1 ? i1*?i1*?c3.14
Note
Effect: The list generator variable ?i1 is allocated the value of the constant 4 multiplied by the RSWire variable 25. The value of the list generator variable ?i1 is added to the list generator variable ?i2. ?f1 is allocated the approximate value of the circle area with a radius of ?i1.
– The starting value for all variables is zero. – All variables can be freely assigned in all List Generator lists. – The expressions are processed sequentially; there are no operator priorities (no point–before–dash rule) – All data are converted to the type of variable to which they are assigned (for floating point data, floating point variables are used in some circumstances, even though no places after the point are outputted) – Do not forget the character “c” before constants. – Expressions are processed in the order in which they are listed in the list description file (exception: brackets, see below.)
Example of a list description: The database supplies:
14-18
The part number under data variable ?partno The quantity used under data variable ?quant The list price under data variable ?price_b
List Generator Configuration
This information should be extended by the total item price and the overall costs. List description: !lh Calculation list !ph !d1 Part number : ?partno Quantity : ?quant List price : ?price_b Total price : ?f1 %5.2f ?price_b %5.2f ?f1 ?quant*?price_b %f ?f2 ?f2+?f1 !pf !lf The sum of overall costs is: ?f2 %.2f ?f2 Caution: In this example, the overall costs (?f2) are calculated in data block !d1, but not printed until the list footer !lf. Irrespective of the order of the value assignments listed under the print lines of the data block !d1, the value is not assigned to ?f2 until all variables printed in block !d1 have been allocated their values.
Parentheses Not all calculation formulae can be transformed in such a way that sequential processing displays the required result. Example: The user wishes to calculate the overall area of all devices in an installation in the dimensions list. Variable for overall installation area:
?f11
Variable for x dimension coordinate:
?dim_x
Variable for y dimension coordinate:
?dim_y
The following actions must be executed:
Initialize the variable ?f11 with 0 (in installation header !h2) Add the individual areas to ?f11 (in data set !d1) Output the variables ?f11 (in installation footer !f2)
14-19
List Generator Configuration
Problems will occur when adding up in the data block; according to the rules outlined above, the instruction in the data block must be as follows: %f ?f11 ?price_s * ?units + ?f11 However, this will not produce the desired result. The list generator will assign the first operand, ?price_s, to the variable ?f11 when processing the expression. This means that the sum of all areas formerly calculated will be overwritten, and instead of this, the double area of the most recent device will appear in ?f11. The solution to this situation is to use parentheses. In order to achieve the required result, the instruction should therefore be as follows: %f
?f11
?f11 + (?price_s * ?units)
The parentheses may also be nested, but note that no error message will appear if the bracketing is incorrect. Minimum/Maximum Determination With the aid of the comparative operators, it is possible to determine extreme values of RSWire variables and list generator variables. The greater than symbol “>” serves as maximum determination, and the less than symbol “<” as minimum determination. Caution: The list generator does not recognize the intended use of a variable for extreme value determination and initializes all list generator variables with zero. Accordingly, the variables must be set “manually” in the list header to values beyond the expected values.
14-20
List Generator Configuration
Example: !lh
%f
f2
. . . c99999 . . .
!d1 Item no.: ?partno Depth : ?ordno %f f1 f1>?ordno assignment %f f2 f2
Conditional value Conditional value
?f1 ?f2
In the first line, with the comment “conditional value assignment” the value of f1 is compared with the value of the RSWire variable ?ordno. If the latter value is greater, it is assigned to f1; otherwise, no action is initiated. This conditional assignment is repeated until the data block !d1 is output. Once all data blocks have been output, the maximum of the depths is printed in the list footer. The same applies analogously to the processing of f2. Note
In the case of aborted lists (screen output), only the extreme values of the output section of list are determined, as the arithmetic operations do not take place until a block is output.
14-21
List Generator Configuration
String Manipulations As outlined above, the strings present in RSWire may be output in a formatted form. In order to be able to cut the beginning of a string, another mechanism of the list generator connected prior to formatting must be initiated. The list generator provides memory space for 30 manipulated strings which can be re–allocated in every list. Output of strings (in this case list generator strings) is conducted as follows: Data ID:
Meaning:
?s1
1. List Generator string
?s2
2. List Generator string
?s3
3. List Generator string
:
:
The contents of all list generator strings are pre–assigned the string length 0. These contents may be modified by manipulation terms which are appended to the formatting instructions described above. Example: The RSWire variable ?ftext contains the string: “1st line^2nd line^3rd line” Format spec.
14-22
Effect of ?s1 or ?s2, ?s3 in the relevant output block
%s ?s1 ?ftext
1st line^2nd line^3rd line
%s ?s1 ?ftext t^1
1st line (positioned by separator)
%s ?s2 ?ftext f^1 t^2
2nd line (positioned by separator)
%s ?s3 ?ftext f^2
3rd line (positioned by separator)
%s ?s2 ?ftext f10 t17
2nd line (positioned absolutely)
List Generator Configuration
The leading data identification number specifies the RSWire variable from which the string is to be taken. The letter “f” in the manipulation term means “from symbol”, the letter “t” means “up to symbol”. The sequence directly following “t” or “f” may contain a non–numerical symbol and a number. If only one number (n) is contained, the string is copied into the list generator string from or up to the nth symbol inclusively. If a non–numerical symbol (c) is also included, then the string is copied into the list generator string from the nth symbol c exclusively or up to the nth symbol c exclusively. Caution: The sequences f[symbol][number] or t[symbol][number] must not contain any spaces (exception: when the symbol itself is a space).
Static Filter for Lists The filter feature for list generators enables the user to filter specific data into the lists. An example would be the purchase order list. Not all of the parts are purchased from one vender. We might need a separate P.O. list for each vender. Through filtering, we can print only the parts we need. To filter a list the user must do two things: 1.
Put a filter statement in the list generator file that specifies how the list is to be filtered.
2.
Turn on the Filter function in the Tools > System Settings > Report Settings tab before generating the list.
If the filter statement contains variables, the user will be prompted for values at the time the list is generated. The filter statement consists of the following information.
14-23
List Generator Configuration
!filt
(Filter statement identifier)
!h2
(The data block in which the variable resides.)
&
(Logical operand and for the AND junction and allows the filter description to be displayed in the Filter DCL. NOTE: If no other operands are used the & must be in place.)
&!
(Logical operand for a negated AND junction, AND NOT".)
|
(Logical operand for an OR junction.)
|!
(Logical operand for a negated OR junction, OR NOT".)
?manufact
(The name of the variable to filter. manufact" is one example.)
0-8
(The filter mode). See below.
= *
(The equation which the filter path is to take). See below. (The preset value *" *" appears in the filter data entry field of the filter DCL and can be used as a wild card, card i.e. i e S*, S* which would display all manufacturers g g with S) ) Keepp in mind case sensitive data beginning S). data. In a static filter the & | may bbe usedd tto acceptt values which l hi h are nott case sensitive, iti ii.e. *S or **s. (Text that appears in the Filter window to identify the filter variable name). name)
Manufacturer"
Statement Format – (the actual statement is separated by spaces, not commas) !filt, block identifier, logical junction, field identifier, comparison mode, comparison operator string Example statement: !filt !h2 & ?manufact 0 = * “Manufacturer” This statement will filter for manufacturers in alphabetical order. Filter Criteria: The following values in the filter statement determine the order in which the data will be listed. Filter Mode
14-24
Constants (Ascending)
Alphabetical
[0]
Ignore Case
[2]
Numerical
[4]
Mixed: Alpha-Numeric
[6]
Date
[8]
List Generator Configuration
For filtering, the block identifier !filt is used in conjunction with the following logical operators: &
= AND junction
&!
= AND NOT junction
|
= OR junction
|!
= OR NOT junction
Several entries may be made in the Filter window; only those data records which satisfy all entries are output. For the “equal to” and not equal to”, partial qualifications are evaluated, i.e. it is possible to use “*” and “?” in the entries you make in the Filter window. Example: AC* to list all parts from companies beginning with “AC” . Example: 4??? to list all wire numbers with four digits starting with 4. For the “equal to” and not equal to”, multiple entries are possible in the Filter window; they must be separated by a pipe “|” (OR). Example: ABLE | BAKER to display only Able or Baker manufacturers. Up to sixty characters may be entered on one line for multiple manufacturers names, separating each name by a “|” character. For “not equal to” (!=) suppression is implemented, i.e. the list is output with the exception of the entries listed in the Filter window. Example: I:000/??|O:000/?? to list all wire numbers except the I:000/ and O:000/ I/O addresses. List Filter Restrictions – In the filter statement the user must indicate the manner in which the list for this variable is to be restricted. The following modes may be specified. =
equal to
!=
not equal to
<
less than
>
greater than
<=
less than or equal to
>=
greater than or equal to
14-25
List Generator Configuration
Example: to filter for a specific quantity of parts (quantity of 3). !filt !d1 & ?quant 4 > 2 !filt !d1 & ?quant 4 <= 4 After the list generator has been modified with the filter statement, the filter function must be selected by picking Tools > System Settings from the pull–down menu, and Report Settings tab. Select the On toggle in the Filter field. Save this setting for future work sessions by selecting the Save button. X
System Settings Report Settings
Filter
OFF
Reports: Description Files
Printer Configuration
Sort
Command Protec
Output
Screen
OFF
Printer File
Filter Toggles
ON
Project
ON
Interactive Graphic Output
OK
Cancel
Save
Help...
When filter statements are present that require variable entries, the Filter dialog box will appear when a list is generated. The entry fields will be labeled as specified in the filter statement. For example, if the following pair of filter statements was added to the list generator file: !filt !h2 & ?manufact 0 = * “Manufacturer name” !filt !h2 & ?ordno 6 = * “Part number”
14-26
List Generator Configuration
Then the Filter dialog box would appear as follows: Filter Manufacturer name = Part number
=
OK
Note
Cancel
Help...
Due to the number of variables used to extract wire numbers, wire labels cannot be filtered using the filter function.
14-27
List Generator Configuration
Tab Formatting in Lists You can format tab stops in lists so that information appears in columns. Tabs are specified in the data block portion of the list generator file following the sort constant value (see following example). The tab values represent distance from the left edge of the page in the default units (inches or millimeters) of the system. On the next line of the list generator file, place the variable names whose values are to appear at each tab stop. After each variable name, press the
Example tab format instruction !d1 2 1 3 5 ?install ?page
!d1 Data block
2
1 3 5 Sort constant
?install
Variable names
14-28
?pagedescr01
Tab values (represent inches or millimeters depending on default units)
?page
?pagedescr01
Include spaces and at least one tab between each variable name
List Generator Configuration
List Generator Variables This section describes the variables that are used in list files to represent various pieces of RSWire project data. Each variable has been assigned a name consisting of an alphanumeric string. This variable is entered in a list file as a question mark (?) followed by the variable name. For example: use ?project to get the name of the current project in a parts list. Note
Under MS–Windows the lists are printed on screen using the OEM_FIXED_SYS – font. This font may be smaller than the standard Windows font. Dimensions of the window are set by MS–Windows only: lines and screen output:columns. The number of lines per page is set by screen output: lines. Correct the number of output lines per page (screen output: lines) by using a list including page filler and list settings: scrolling by page. Graphic Characters (All Versions) – Some lists contain the extended IBM graphic characters for borders. These signs can be transformed to Pipes and Dashes (| and –) by switching off the Graphic Output toggle in the Tools > System Settings function, and the Report Settings tab.
14-29
List Generator Configuration
All Lists Variable:
Workstation name
?user
User name
?date
Current date
?inst
Current installation
?loc
Current location
?page
Current project page
?pgno
Current list page
?nextpgno
Next list page
?ix1
Index 1 (used for item numbers)
?ix.1
Index .1 (used for item numbers)
?ix..1
Index ..1 (used for item numbers)
?ix2
Index 2 (used for item numbers)
?ix3
Index 3 (used for item numbers)
?path
Directory path
?sins
Sign: Installation (=)
?sloc
Sign: Location (+)
?sdid
Sign: Device ID
?addr01
Address file: line 01
?addr02
Address file: line 02
?addr03 etc. ?addr20
14-30
Description:
?host
Address file: line 03 Address file: line 20
List Generator Configuration
Parts Database Data Variables Variable:
Note
Description:
?partno
Part number
?descr
Description
?manufact
Manufacturer
?prefgrp
PMG
?ordno
Catalog #
?price_b
List price
?price_s
Selling price
?units
Units
?discount
Discount
?devtype
Device type
?date_cr
Date created
?date_ch
Date changed
?symb_ref
Reference symbol
?symb_wir
Wiring diagram symbol
?symb_lay
Layout symbol
?dbloc
On (C)over or (P)anel
?dim_x
Dimension[in] X
?dim_y
Dimension[in] Y
?dim_z
Dimension[in] Z
?weight
Weight[lb]
?power
Power[VA]
?time1
Assembly Time [min]
?time2
Wiring Time [min]
?tech01
Technical Description 1
?tech02
Technical Description 2
?tech03
Technical Description 3
?tech04
Technical Description 4
?addpart01
Additional Data 1
?addpart02
Additional Data 2
?addpart03
Additional Data 3
?addpart04
Additional Data 4
If the database has been customized by the user, the above variable names (keys) may be different.
14-31
List Generator Configuration
Project Lists All Project–Related Lists Variable:
Description:
?project
Current Project
?prdescr01
Project Description 1
?prdescr02
Project Description 2
?prdescr03 etc. ?prdescr09
Project Description 3
?addrfile
Address File
?title01
Project title data 01
?title02 etc. ?title20
Project title data 02
Project Description 9
Project title data 20
Project List Variable:
14-32
Description:
?project
Project name
?title_blk
Page title block
?catalog
Symbol catalog (active)
?tablet
Tablet overlay file
?devid
Device ID (default)
?xgrid
x-grid
?ygrid
y-grid
?devidsz
Device ID text size
?connpntsz
Connection point text size
?prpgno
Total drawing pages in project
?xrefsz
Cross-reference text size
?termsz
Terminals text size
?lang1
1st language
?lang2
2nd language
?lang3
3rd language
List Generator Configuration
Installation List Variable:
Description:
?inpgno
Total drawing pages in installation
?install
Installation name
Page List Variable:
Description:
?ingpno
Total drawing pages in installation
?page
Page
?install
Installation
?location
Location
?cont
Online control checking (Y/N)
?scale
Page scale
?form
Page format number
?titblk
Title block
?termpl
Is page a terminal plan (Y/N)
?crdate
Creation date
?crname
Creation user
?pgdescr01
Page description 1
?pgdescr02
Page description 2
?pgdescr03 etc. ?pgdescr100
Page description 3
?path
File path for page
Page description 100
14-33
List Generator Configuration
Page Format List Variable:
Description:
?format
Format
?formno
Format number
?descr
Description
?xmin
Dimension: xmin
?ymin
Dimension: ymin
?xmax
Dimension: xmax
?ymax
Dimension: ymax
?lrmin
Line range: min
?lrmax
Line range: max
?lrinc
Line range: increment
?macro
Macro
?lpos1
Line position: 1
?lpos2
Line position: 2
?lpos3
Line position: 3
?lpos4
Line position: 4
Database Lists Macro List Variable:
Description:
?path
Macro path
?macro
Macro name
?descr
Macro description
?term
Terminal macro symbol
Symbol List Variable:
14-34
Description:
?path
Symbol path
?symbol
Symbol name
?descr
Symbol description
?type
Symbol type
List Generator Configuration
Device Type List Variable:
Description:
?path
Device path
?device
Device name
?xrefsym
Cross-reference symbol
?xrefdx
dx
?xrefdy
dy
?parsym
Parent symbol
?parcpnt
Connection points parent symbol
?descr
Device Description
?contact01
Contacts
?contact02
Contacts
?contact03 etc ?contact16
Contacts
?cpnt01
Connection points of contacts
?cpnt02
Connection points of contacts
?cpnt03 etc ?cpnt16
Connection points of contacts
Contacts
Connection points of contacts
Device Type List Brief Variable:
Description:
?path
Device path
?device
Device name
?descr
Device description
Language List Variable:
Description:
?textno
Text number
?crdate
Date of creation
?text
Text
?lang
Language
?pattern
Search string
14-35
List Generator Configuration
Wire Lists Wire List (Connection List) Variable:
Description:
?install
Installation
?location
Location
?t1p
Internal - page/line number
?t1i
Internal - installation
?t1l
Internal - location
?t1d
Internal - device ID
?t2p
External - page/line number
?t2i
External - installation
?t2l
External - location
?t2d
External - device ID
?diffinst
* (asterisk) for different instal.
?t1sym
Internal - symbol
?t2sym
External - symbol
?pot1
Internal - potential string 1 (Wire Number)
?pot2
Internal - potential string 2 (Gauge)
?pot3
Internal - potential string 3 (Color)
?pot4
Internal - potential string 4 (Additional)
?pot5
Internal - potential string 5 (Additional)
?pot7
Internal - potential string 7 (Additional)
?pot8
Internal - potential string 8 (Additional)
?pot9
Internal - potential string 9 (Additional)
Wire Labels Variable: ?did01 etc ?did20
14-36
Description: Device ID 1 Device ID 20
List Generator Configuration
Programmable Controller List Variable:
Description:
?descr
I/O address description
?devid
Device ID
?install
Installation where child symbol is located
?location
Location of child symbol
?pglnno
Page/line number where child symbol is located
?ftext
PLC function text
?targ1
1. target after PLC (only child)
?targ2
2. target after PLC (only child)
See also Symbol Attribute Text variables.
Parts Lists Master Parts List Variable:
Description:
?install
Installation
?location
Location
?devid
Device ID
?pglnno
Page/Line number
?partno1
Part number 1st line
?partno2
Part number 2nd line
?ftext
Function text
?instdraw
Installation where device ID is drawn
See also Parts Database Data variables. See also Symbol Attribute Text variables.
14-37
List Generator Configuration
Bill of Material Variable:
Description:
?install
Installation
?devid
Device ID
?location
Location
?pglnno
Page.Line number
?partno
Part Number
?ftext
Function Text
See also Parts Database Data variables. See also Symbol Attribute Text variables. Purchase Order List Variable: Part Number
?quant
Quantity
?ins01 etc. ?ins20
Installation 1
?loc01 etc. ?loc20
Location 1
?did01 etc. ?did20
Device ID 1
See also Parts Database Data variables.
14-38
Description:
?partno
Installation 20
Location 20
Device ID 20
List Generator Configuration
Job Costing List Variable:
Description:
?hour_cost
Hourly cost
?mark_up
Mark up
?partno
Part number
?quant
Quantity
?ins01 etc. ?ins20
Installation 1
?loc01 etc. ?loc20
Location 1
?did01 etc. ?did20
Device ID 1
Installation 20
Location 20
Device ID 20
See also Parts Database Data variables. See also Symbol Attribute Text variables. Dimension List Variable:
Description:
?install
Installation
?devid
Device ID
?location
Location
?pglnno
Page.Line number
?partno
Part Number
?ftext
Function Text
See also Parts Database Data variables. See also Symbol Attribute Text variables.
14-39
List Generator Configuration
Symbol Attribute Text Attribute text entered for symbols can be accessed in the Master Parts list and Bill of Material. These variables correspond to the numbered items in the RS\MENU\DIALOG\ATT_ENG.TXT file. Variable:
14-40
Description:
?stxt001
Function text
?stxt002
PLC function text
?stxt003
Rack
?stxt004
Module
?stxt005
Combination of attributes
?stxt006
Reserved
?stxt007
Reserved
?stxt008
Wire diagram, CP
?stxt009
Device ID, panel layout, wire diagram symbol
?stxt010
Part number
?stxt011
Reference symbol name
?stxt012
Horsepower
?stxt013
Revolutions per minute
?stxt014
Voltage
?stxt015
VA
?stxt016
Full load current
?stxt017
Frequency
?stxt018
Temperature range
?stxt019
Pressure
?stxt020
Resistance
?stxt021
Velocity
?stxt022
Density
?stxt023
Quantity
?stxt024
Capacitance
?stxt025
Inductance
?stxt026
Seconds
?stxt027
Minutes
?stxt028
Hours
?stxt029
Channel
?stxt030
Manufacturer
?stxt031
Type
?stxt032 - ?stxt041
reserved
?stxt042 - ?stxt120
free for user entries
List Generator Configuration
Field Wiring Lists Terminal Strip List Variable:
Description:
?install
Installation
?location
Location
?strip
Strip
?count
Number of terminals
Terminal Connections List Variable:
Description:
?location
Terminal Strip - location
?strip
Terminal Strip
?term
Terminal
?termtxt
Terminal CP Text
?termftxt
Terminal Function Text
?termpno
Terminal Part no.
?xpos
Terminal X Position
?ypos
Terminal Y Position
?termt1txt
Terminal side t1: CP Text
?termt1cpno
Terminal side t1: CP No.
?termt2txt
Terminal side t2: CP Text
?termt2cpno
Terminal side t2: CP No.
?instdraw
Installation of page
?pagedraw
Page
?lineno
Line no.
?t1_pot1
Wire description 1 (Wire Number)
?t1_pot2
Wire description 2 (Gauge)
?t1_pot3
Wire description 3 (Color)
?t1_pot4
Wire description 4 (Additional)
?t1_pot5
Wire description 5 (Additional)
?t1_pot6
Wire description 6 (Additional)
?t1_pot7
Wire description 7 (Additional)
?t1_pot8
Wire description 8 (Additional)
?t2_pot1
Wire description 1 (Wire Number)
14-41
List Generator Configuration
Variable:
14-42
Description:
?t2_pot2
Wire description 2 (Gauge)
?t2_pot3
Wire description 3 (Color)
?t2_pot4
Wire description 4 (Additional)
?t2_pot5
Wire description 5 (Additional)
?t2_pot6
Wire description 6 (Additional)
?t2_pot7
Wire description 7 (Additional)
?t2_pot8
Wire description 8 (Additional)
?jumper
Jumper
?t1inst
Internal: installation
?t1loc
Internal: location
?t1did
Internal: device ID
?t1cp
Internal: connection point
?t1cptxt
Internal: connection point text
?t1cpno
Internal: connection point no
?t1sym
Internal: symbol
?t1ftxt
Internal: function text
?t1cab
Internal: cable
?t1cond
Internal: conductor
?t2inst
External: installation
?t2loc
External: location
?t2did
External: device id
?t2cp
External: connection point
?t2cptxt
External: connection point text
?t2cpno
External: connection point no
?t2sym
External: symbol
?t2ftxt
External: function text
?t2cab
External: cable
?t2cond
External: conductor
List Generator Configuration
Project Cable List Variable:
Description:
?install
Installation
?location
Location
?name
Cable name
?wireno
Number of wires (database)
?used
Number of wires being used
?device
Device type
?devtxt1
Device type: description 1
?devtxt2
Device type: description 2
?devtxt3
Device type: description 3
?partno
Device: partnumber
?devtype
Device: type
?gauge
Device: gauge
?t1ins
Target1: =installation
?t1loc
Target1: +location
?t1did
Target1: -device ID
?t1no
Target1: terminal No./Conn. Point
?t1txt
Target1: terminal text
?t1ftxt
Target1: function text
?t2ins
Target2: =installation
?t2loc
Target2: +location
?t2did
Target2: -device ID
?t2no
Target2: terminal No./Conn. Point
?t2txt
Target2: terminal text
?t2ftxt
Target2: function text
?cabtxt01
Cable text 1
?cabtxt50
Cable text 50
14-43
List Generator Configuration
Field Wire List Variable:
14-44
Description:
?install
Installation
?location
Location
?name
Cable name
?wire
Number of wires (database)
?used
Number of wires being used
?device
Device type
?devtxt1
Device type: description 1
?devtxt2
Device type: description 2
?devtxt3
Device type: description 3
?partno
Device: part number
?devtype
Device: type
?gauge
Device: gauge
?t1ins
Target1: =installation
?t1loc
Target1: +location
?t1did
Target1: -device ID
?t1no
Target1: terminal No./Conn. Point
?t1txt
Target1: terminal text
?t1ftxt
Target1: function text
?t2ins
Target2: =installation
?t2loc
Target2: +location
?t2did
Target2: -device ID
?t2no
Target2: terminal No./Conn. Point
?t2txt
Target2: terminal text
?t2ftxt
Target2: function text
?pot1
Wire description 1 (Wire Number)
?pot2
Wire description 2 (Gauge)
?pot3
Wire description 3 (Color)
?pot4
Wire description 4 (Additional)
?pot5
Wire description 5 (Additional)
?pot6
Wire description 6 (Additional)
?pot7
Wire description 7 (Additional)
?pot8
Wire description 8 (Additional)
?cabtxt01 etc. ?cabtxt50
Cable text 1 Cable text 50
List Generator Configuration
Error Checking Lists Signal List, Unreferenced Signal List Variable:
Description:
?devid
Device ID
?inst
Installation
?page
Page
?lineno
Line number
?xpos
X Position
?ypos
Y Position
?type
Signal type
Device Without Parent List Variable:
Description:
?device
Device
?instdraw
Installation of page
?locdraw
Location of page
?devi
Device ID
?inst
Installation
?loca
Location
?pglnno
Page.Line number
14-45
List Generator Configuration
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
14-46
Alternate Search Paths
15
Alternate Search Paths
Ordinarily, RSWireTM Designer uses a default directory structure (established during installation) to access the files it needs. The Alternate Search Path sets a different search path that the system can use to locate RSWire files. More than one set of directories can be specified in the alternate path, and a search priority is established. This is useful, for example, when working with several symbol catalogs (electrical, pneumatic, etc.) in a single project, or if every user on a network operates with his or her own symbol or macro library or has otherwise customized RSWire. When RSWire is used on a network, an alternate search path allows standard files (symbol libraries, etc.) to be shared over the network while customized files located at each workstation can be accessed by the local user. Alternate search paths can be set for dialog boxes, list descriptions (.LST files), catalog libraries (symbols–macros–devices), and configuration files. You set alternate search paths by editing the ECSCAD.CFG file in the RS\WORK directory (default). With a default install to the C drive this file appears as follows. The statements that can accept alternative search paths are shown in bold. WORK_PATH=C:\RS\PROJECT\ PROGRAM_PATH=C:\RS\ CATALOG_PATH=C:\RS\CATALOG\?\ TMP_PATH=C:\RS\ LIST_PATH=C:\RS\SYSCON\LIST\ CONFIG_PATH=C:\RS\SYSCON\SYSTEM\ TEXT_PATH=C:\RS\DB\ PLOT_PATH=C:\RS\PLOT\ It contains a number of path statements telling RSWire where to find various system files. These paths are described below.
15-1
Alternate Search Paths
Path Descriptions WORK_PATH= This variable points to the directory where RSWire will store all projects. (Cannot use alternate search path.) PROGRAM_PATH= This variable points one directory above where the program is stored. This is the promise program path. (Cannot use alternate search path.) CATALOG_PATH= This variable points directly to the directory where RSWire stores all of the various symbol catalogs which can be loaded. The question mark at the end allows the system to load the symbol catalog defined in the project parameters dialog box. TMP_PATH= This variable points one directory above where RSWire stores the temporary files. This is a temporary file path for lists and file imports and exports. This path must be the same as the program path. Each user must have their own TMP directory. (Cannot use alternate search path.) LIST_PATH= This variable points to the directory where the list generator files are stored. These files determine the format of lists and reports. CONFIG_PATH= This variable points directly to the directory where the configuration and settings files for various RSWire functions are located.
15-2
Alternate Search Paths
TEXT_PATH= This variable points to the directory that contains subdirectories for the language database and the address files. (Cannot use alternate search path.) PLOT_PATH= This variable points to the directory where the software files generated by the plot functions. (Cannot use alternate search path.) Alternate Search Paths – You create an alternate search paths by adding additional paths to the path statements shown in bold above. This allows the software to search through more than one directory to find the files for which it is searching. The first path listed is the first directory to be searched. Added directories are searched in the order that they appear in the declaration. When files are saved they are always placed in the primary (first) directory. This occurs even if the file originated in one of the secondary directories. A question mark wild card may be used in paths. The “?” will be replaced by the catalog loaded for the project that is active. Question Mark Variable Example: CATALOG_PATH=C:\RS\CATALOG\?\
H:\RS\CATALOG\JIC\
Assume that the catalog for the project is “USER.” When a symbol is selected for placement the C:\RS\CATALOG\USER directory is searched first. If the file is not found in the USER directory, the H:\RS\CATALOG\JIC\ directory is searched. If a symbol from H:\RS\CATALOG\JIC\ is re–created, it will be read from H:\RS\CATALOG\JIC\ and stored in C:\RS\CATALOG\USER. The original version of the symbol is left in the H:\RS\CATALOG\JIC\ directory. Alternate search paths allow for a great deal of flexibility in a network environment. By making the shared network directory a secondary directory, users cannot modify the “company standard” symbols, but symbols that they create in the course of creating a new project can be stored as needed (in the user’s first directory). These symbols can then be reviewed by the “RSWire administrator” and placed into the “company standard” directory if they are of use to other users. Another application of alternate search paths is to allow a catalog of symbols specific to only one project to be kept in a separate symbol catalog that can be archived with the project. In a similar way, list formats, dialog boxes, and configurations can be customized by individual users and saved in the first path, while “standard” files remain unchanged in the secondary directories.
15-3
Alternate Search Paths
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
15-4
Appendix A – RSWire Error Messages
A
RSWire Error Messages This sections lists error messages that are displayed by RSWireTM Designer for various conditions. Error 0:
Page not stored.
Remedy:
You may not leave this page because an error condition exists which must be corrected. Correct the error condition, or turn off the page error checking function. Use the Tools > Error Checking > Page Error Check function to set or disable page error checking functions.
Error 1:
The file does not exist in the Path as is listed in the Environment Variable LIST_PATH Check file name or add the name to the Environment Variable LIST_PATH
Remedy: Error 2: Remedy:
The file list.vz" on the 1st path of the Environment Variable LIST_PATH is missing. Check the RSWire installation.
Error 3:
Project already exists.
Remedy:
Select a new project name or delete the existing project.
Error 4:
The ASCII-Project file in the 'TMP' directory cannot be opened.
Reason:
The file does not exist. No read/write permission on file for user. Incorrect file beginning (PN
Error 5: Remedy: Error 6:
Verify the ADS module of AutoCAD is installed correctly. Reinstall the AutoCAD software selecting to install ALL files. No color configuration setup file existing.
Remedy:
Check the RSWire installation.
Error 7:
Search path or file name incorrect.
Remedy:
Enter the correct search path or correct file name.
Error 8:
No symbol library active.
Remedy:
Read page from a project in which the symbol library is defined.
Error 9:
No RSWire Menu found.
Remedy:
Verify the installation process and input selections.
Error 10:
The address file cannot be read or written to.
Remedy:
Verify that the path setting is correct.
Error 11:
The configuration file cannot be read or written to.
Remedy:
Verify that the path setting is correct. No read/write permission on file for user.
Error 12:
The Text function is locked.
A-1
Appendix A – RSWire Error Messages
A-2
Remedy:
Verify that the text function is not being accessed at another location.
Error 13:
Hard drive is full.
Remedy:
Back up and/or delete files.
Error 14:
Error in calling up the ADS-Function.
Remedy: Error 15:
Verify the ADS module of AutoCAD is installed correctly. Reinstall the AutoCAD software selecting to install ALL files. The desired symbol is not in the Library.
Remedy:
Verify that correct symbol name is entered.
Error 16:
The device already exists in the working Device directory path
Remedy:
Use new name.
Error 17:
The page already exists.
Remedy:
Use new page number.
Error 18:
Application presently in use.
Remedy:
Close use by other application and try again.
Error 19:
The file is write protected.
Remedy:
Remove write protection (e.g. DOS command ATTRIB)
Error 20:
The Installation name already in use.
Remedy:
Use new Installation name.
Error 21:
There is not enough RAM memory available.
Remedy:
Close any other open applications, or install additional RAM memory.
Error 22:
The requested project does not exist.
Remedy:
Enter the correct project name.
Error 23:
No page active.
Remedy:
Select a page using the File > Open Page > Select function.
Error 24:
No files exist for plotting.
Remedy:
Call up the Plot function again.
Error 25:
No Plot list exists.
Remedy:
Verify installation of RSWire.
Error 26:
Browse copying not possible.
Reason:
Incorrect screen viewports used. 1. Copied objects can only be placed in view 0 (lower left quadrant). 2. The subject and reference point not in the same viewport. 3. An attempt was made to place the subject into viewport 1, 2 , or 3.
Error 27:
The password file cannot be read.
Remedy:
Check password input for correctness, or no password existing.
Error 30:
Device ID for symbol exists
Remedy:
Use another device ID - verify checking logic.
Error 31:
Part number not available.
Remedy:
The part is not in the database
Error 32:
Wire number already exists.
Appendix A – RSWire Error Messages
Remedy:
Enter a different wire number.
Error 33:
Device cannot be on-line checked.
Remedy:
Please call Hot Line.
Error 34:
Page Without Control
Remedy:
The current page is offline; no error checking or cross referencing will be performed. If you need these functions, select the Manage > Page > Modify function and turn on the Online toggle.
Error 35:
Wrong part number entered when placing or modifying.
Remedy:
Part number already exists in database or the part number input field is empty.
Error 36:
Description phrase not found
Remedy:
Enter description or change the search criterion.
Error 40: Remedy:
Address description already exists using present PLC control switch settings See Tools> Project Settings > Programmable Controller Settings function.
Error 41:
Module description already exists using present PLC control switch settings
Remedy:
See Tools> Project Settings > Programmable Controller Settings function.
Error 42:
A temporary file cannot be created
Remedy:
Verify the path or the user rights to the file.
Error 43:
The selected list generator file is formatted incorrectly.
Reason:
It does not begin with the control sequence identifier !lh
Error 44:
The requested data block is missing in the list generator file
Remedy:
Check the list generator file and correct the situation
Error 45:
The requested file cannot be opened (read)
Remedy:
Verify the path or the user rights to the file
Error 46:
The requested file cannot be saved
Remedy:
Remove the write protection or the path is not available
Error 47:
The requested sort format is incorrect
Error 48:
Warning: Device does not exist in device list or device data.
Error 49:
Description data does not match with device.
Remedy:
The selected device does not match the part device.
Error 50:
Data format incorrect. The function is expecting a different format.
Error 51:
Selected text font is not available. The STANDARD" text font will be used.
Error 52:
The revision number of the data to be read in does not match.
Error 53:
Symbol does not exist.
Remedy:
Verify existence of desired symbol.
Error 54:
Font configuration file in config file - does not exist
Error 55:
Child symbols are missing in the device type definition in order to place the PLC function text
A-3
Appendix A – RSWire Error Messages
Error 56: Remedy: Error 57: Error 58:
An attempt was made to attach a wire number to a wire that has one existing through a signal cross reference symbol at another location SQL cannot be initialized when ASE was initialized, an error resulted.
Reason:
ASE (AutoCAD SQL extension) was not installed completely or correctly.
Error 59:
SQL driver cannot be initialized. The error message contains ? text from the ASE environment. Logging into the database is not possible. The error message contains ? text from the ASE environment. Error in accessing the database. The error message contains ? text from the ASE environment. An attempt was made to change a wire number to a wire that also exists at another location through a signal cross reference symbol. After selecting OK, other wire parameters such as text size and position can be changed. If you must change the number itself, use the Edit > Wire/Line > Change Number function.
Error 60: Error 61: Error 62: Suggestion: Error 63:
Text with question mark.
Error 64:
Device ID with question mark.
Error 65:
Connection point text with question mark.
Error 66:
Symbol text with question mark.
Error 67:
Wire number with question mark.
Error 68:
Connection between terminals.
Error 69:
The symbol is not connected.
Error 70:
Wire is not connected.
Error 71:
Page offline.
Error 72:
Logical line (wire) without a connection.
Error 73:
The entered wire description does not exist in the cable definition (device type).
Suggestion:
Allow the wire name choices to be prompted and select the next available wire.
Error 74:
Wire number already assigned.
Suggestion:
Allow the wire number choices to be prompted and select the next available wire.
Error 75:
Cable not yet placed. This is why no cable listing can be made and the next available wire cannot be found. Error in EED Structure. EED structure not set correctly in DWG file.
Error 76: Error 77: Suggestion: Error 78:
A-4
After reading in ACAD file (DXF or DWG), blocks must be exploded in for RSWire to recognize and take over the graphical elements. Execute the EXPLODE command multiple times until no additional blocks exist.
Line number positions and the line numbers actually used in a page do not match. Set the Digits in Line Numbers value correctly in the Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function. You may need to be manually correct the device IDs. Page format not found, system will refer to default page format number 0.
Appendix A – RSWire Error Messages
Error 79: Error 80: Suggestion: Error 81: Suggestion:
Wire number not found. You have entered a wire number that does not exist in the current project. Catalog cannot be imported into the first search catalog. First string in CATALOG_PATH has no question mark in the config file. Add a question mark to CATALOG_PATH in the config file. Symbol definition cannot be activated. Symbol already on page. Delete all symbols on page or activate new page".
Error 82:
Clip jumper not possible. Number of terminal blocks connected by a clip jumper exceeds the predefined maximum.
Suggestion:
Change Target Modify selection in the Terminal Plan Editor dialog box from Clip Jumper to Wire Connection. Terminal jumper is neutral. No Internal/External/Jumper defined for the terminal block center point. Check the Internal/External/Jumper toggle in the Tools> Project Settings > Con figuration Terminal and Plug IDs function. Change target in Terminal Connection Point Definition dialog box .
Error 83: Suggestion: Error 84: Suggestion: Error 85: Suggestion: Error 86:
Short circuit found. Two lines with different wire numbers are connected. Delete one of the wires to remove one of the wire numbers. Page should be reorganized. RSWire page was modified with AutoCAD. Reorganize the page by selecting OK in the Error dialog box.
Suggestion:
Wire couldn't be connected. No Internal/External target available. Delete Internal/External wire. Check the Internal/External/Jumper toggle in the Tools> Project Settings > Configuration Terminal and Plug IDs function. Change target in Terminal Connection Point Definition dialog box .
Error 87:
Open drawing limit exceeded.
Suggestion:
Restart your computer.
Error 88:
Error in ODBC: text from ODBC driver. ODBC exception caught ODBC runtime system or driver couldn't execute function. Error in ODBC: can't update/append current record. File system write protection or ODBC driver does not support changes.
Error 89:
A-5
Appendix A – RSWire Error Messages
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
A-6
Appendix B – RSWire Files
B
RSWire Files This sections lists the directories and files included when RSWireTM Designer is installed. The default setup of files and subdirectories under the RS\ directory is as follows:
RS\ BMP
Directory of bitmap files for toolbar buttons (not available in Standalone)
CATALOG
Symbol, device, and macro catalog directories
DB
Text database, custom data files (i.e. address files, and logos)
DBS
Parts database directory
FONTS
Additional fonts directory (not available in Standalone)
MENU
Directory containing menu, dialog, and help files
PLOT
Directory containing plot scripts for RSWire
PROGRAM
Directory containing EXE files
PROJECT
Project directory and DWG files
SYSCON
System configuration files, and list generator files
TMP
Temporary file directory
USER
User customized files
WORK
Default DWG file for the startup of RSWire. Also configuration files for printer and alternate search paths
The following pages list the subdirectories and major files included in each directory.
B-1
Appendix B – RSWire Files
BMP The BMP directory contains bitmap files used for toolbar function buttons. CATALOG Sub Directories: JIC (or IEC or other symbol catalog) Sub Directories: BLOCK
Symbol files
DEVICE
Device type files, Cable device type files
MACRO
Macro files
WMF
WMF format files for symbol select icon groups
DB Sub Directories: CUSTOM RSI
LG
Rockwell Software address file
Text database. TDB.MDB
LOGOS
B-2
Address files.
Text Access file (only if converted to MS Access)
Title block logo information.
Appendix B – RSWire Files
DBS Sub Directories: DB
Parts database files ARTICLE.MDB
Article parts database file
FONTS Additional font files (.SHX) MENU Sub Directories: DIALOG
Dialog prompts and help files: All files can be renamed through configuration settings.
ATT_ENG.TXT
Symbol attribute file (English)
DCL_ENG.TXT
Symbol attribute file (English)
DIA_ENG.TXT
Dialogs and prompts for dialog boxes and the Command Line (English)
ATT_FRA.TXT
Symbol attribute file (French)
DCL_FRA.TXT
Symbol attribute file (French)
DIA_FRA.TXT
Dialogs and prompts for dialog boxes and the Command Line (French)
ATT_GER.TXT
Symbol attribute file (German)
DCL_GER.TXT
Symbol attribute file (German)
DIA_GER.TXT
Dialogs and prompts for dialog boxes the Command Line (German)
ATT_ITA.TXT
Symbol attribute file (Italian)
DCL_ITA.TXT
Symbol attribute file (Italian)
DIA_ITA.TXT
Dialogs and prompts for dialog boxes and the Command Line (Italian)
ATT_SPA.TXT
Symbol attribute file (Spanish)
DCL_SPA.TXT
Symbol attribute file (Spanish)
DIA_SPA.TXT
Dialogs and prompts for dialog boxes and the Command Line (Spanish)
RSWIRE.HLP
RSWire help file
RSWIRE.CNT
RSWire help table of contents file
B-3
Appendix B – RSWire Files
MNU
PLOT
Menu files and command files. ACAD.MLN
AutoCAD multiline definition files (not available in Standalone)
ACAD.MNC
Compiled AutoCAD menu supplied with RSWire
ACAD.MNS
Source file for AutoCAD menu supplied with RSWire
ACAD.PGP ECSCAD.LIN
AutoCAD program parameters file (short cut commands) supplied with RSWire add-on AutoCAD line type definition file for RSWire
ECSCAD.MNL
RSWire command file, all program commands
ECSCAD.MNC
Compiled application menu for RSWire
ECSCAD.MNR
Resource file for application menu for RSWire
ECSCAD.MNS
Source file for application menu for RSWire
ECS_ENG.MNS
Source file for application menu (English source)
ECS_FRA.MNS
Source file for application menu (French source)
ECS_GER.MNS
Source file for application menu (German source)
RSWi.PGP
Parameters file (short cut commands) supplied with RSWire standalone
Plot spool directory. Directory where “Plotting to File” files are stored.
B-4
Appendix B – RSWire Files
PROGRAM
Directory where all linking library and executable files are located for the RSWire software. ECSCAD.ARX
RSWire executable
ECSAPI.DLL
Combined linking library (Version 4.1 and later)
ECSDRSET.DLL
Drawing set linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSDRSET.TLB
Drawing set linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSEVALUATION.DLL
Evaluation linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSFIELD.DLL
Field linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSMACRO.DLL
Macro linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSPAGE.DLL
Page linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSPROJECT.DLL
Project linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSSYMBOL.DLL
Symbol linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECS TEXT.DLL
Text linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSWIRE.DLL
Wire linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSWIRENO.DLL
Wire number linking library (Version 4.0 only)
WKSVMON.EXE
Wibu key server monitor executable
WKSVW32.EXE
Wibu key license manager executable
RSW.HLP
RSWire help file (Standalone Version 4.0 only)
RSWi.HLP
RSWire help file (Standalone Version 4.1only)
SYSTEM
Directory where system linking library and executable files are located.
DAO350.DLL
linking library (Version 4.1 and later)
DDAO35.DLL
linking library
DDAO36.DLL
linking library (Version 4.1 and later)
DUNZIP32.DLL
linking library
DZIP32.DLL
linking library
MSORCL10.CNT
linking library
MSORCL10.DLL
linking library
MSORCL10.HLP
linking library
MSRDC20.OCX
linking library
ODBCINT.DLL
linking library
RDOCURS.DLL
linking library
B-5
Appendix B – RSWire Files
PROJECT
Directory for the user’s projects. Sub Directory: WORK
SYSCON
Under WORK a subdirectory is created for each project. The NAMES.EC2 file identifies the contents of each subdirectory.
System configuration directory Sub Directories: LIST
List generator files
(The LIST.VZ file contains all the names of the list generator files being used for a given session of RSWire. These file names are assigned through the Tools > System Settings > Reports: Description Files function.)
B-6
CABLE.LST
CSPAGE2.LST
DEVICE2.LST
PAGE4.LST
CSCABLE.LST
CSPARTS.LST
DEVWP.LST
PARTS.LST
CSDEVIC1.LST
CSPLC.LST
DIM.LST
PLC.LST
CSDEVIC2.LST
CSPROJE1.LST
FLDWIRE.LST
PROJECT1.LST
CSDEVWP.LST
CSPROJE2.LST
FORMAT.LST
PROJECT2.LST
CSDIM.LST
CSSIGNAL.LST
INST.LST
SIGNAL.LST
CSFLDWIR.LST
CSSYMBOL.LST
JOB.LST
SYMBOL.LST
CSFORMAT.LST
CSTERM.LST
CSINST.LST
CSTSTRIP.LST
LIST.VZ
TERM.LST
CSJOB.LST
CSWIRE.LST
MACRO.LST
TEXT1.LST
MASTER.LST
TEXT2.LST
CSMACRO.LST
CSWIRELA.LST
CSMASTER.LST
DB1.LST
P_O.LST
TSTRIP.LST
CSMASTER1.LST
DB2.LST
PAGE1.LST
USER.MDB
CSP_O.LST
DEFAULT.MDB
PAGE2.LST
WIRE.LST
CSPAGE1.LST
DEVICE1.LST
PAGE3.LST
WIRELAB.LST
Appendix B – RSWire Files
SYSTEM
System configuration files
BACKUP.CFG
Backup/Restore function path settings
BANGLE.CFG
Symbol angle settings configuration file
BSCALE.CFG
Symbol scale settings configuration file
COLOR.CFG
Color mapping configuration file
CONNLIST.CFG
Default setting for Create Connection List When Saving Page"
CP.CFG
Command protection configuration file
DEVSTY.CFG
Device ID style configuration file
DID.CFG
Terminal settings configuration file
DLG_TABS.CFG
Project Settings and System Settings tabs
DWG.CFG
Drawing format configuration file
DWGCTL.CFG
Page control settings configuration file
GENERAL.CFG
General default settings configuration file
GRID.CFG
Grid settings configuration file
HW.CFG
Report settings configuration file
LAYER.CFG
Layer names
LNG.CFG
Language settings configuration file
MANGLE.CFG
Macro angle settings configuration file
MARK.CFG
Marking settings configuration file
MSCALE.CFG
Macro scale settings configuration file
NAVIGA.CFG
Navigation scale settings configuration file
PLC.CFG
PLC symbol settings configuration file
PPLAN.CFG
Pin-Plug plan configuration file
PRESET.CFG
Sets LT scale (dash line size)
PRT.CFG
Printer settings configuration file
PT.CFG
Terminal/Pin-Plug default configuration filenames
SAVEAS.CFG
Save settings configuration file
SODDEF.CFG
Project definition default configuration file
SODSETT.CFG
Project parameters settings configuration file
SSETUP.CFG
Device ID delimiter configuration file
STYLE.CFG
Font style configuration file
TANGLE.CFG
Text angle settings configuration file
TERM.CFG
Terminal settings configuration file
THEIGHT.CFG
Text height settings configuration file
TLORG.CFG
Text label origin settings configuration file
TPLAN.CFG
Terminal plan configuration file
TPMAC.CFG
Terminal plan macro configuration file
TRATIO.CFG
Text ratio settings configuration file
B-7
Appendix B – RSWire Files
TSLANT.CFG
Text slant settings configuration file
TSTYLE.CFG
Text font style settings configuration file
TXTOD.CFG
Text on drawing settings configuration file
UNDEF.CFG
AutoCAD undefined commands configuration file
VERSION.CFG
Indicates default to DWG or non-DWG drawing format
WIRE.CFG
Automatic wire numbering configuration
WIRE1.CFG
Manual wire numbering configuration
TMP
Temporary swap files (delivered empty)
USER
Backup of files that the user may have customized. Directory is automatically created when an update install is performed. DOCUMENT.MDB
WORK
Default DWG files used on start–up of program. ACAD14.CFG
AutoCAD R14 configuration
ACAD2000.CFG
AutoCAD 2000 configuration
ADD_CU.BAK
Backup of registry files
ADD_CU.REG
Registry files (modified at install)
ECS.DVB
Default VBA project
ECS_$$$.DWG
Temporary files
ECS_CAD.MSG
Message file
RSWIRETAB.DWG Tablet overlay drawing (JIC symbols)
B-8
PASSWD.TXT
RSWire password file
PRINTER.BAT
Printer batch file
RSWire.ARG
Registry data
RSWire.DWG
Default drawing file
RSWire.ICO
RSWire icon file
SAMPLE.DVB
Sample VBA project
TYPELIB.BAK
Backup to registry
TYPELIB.REG
Registry files (modified at install)
UI.MDB
User interface database file
Appendix C – Creating Symbol Icon Groups
C
Creating Symbol Icon Groups This sections describes how to make custom graphical symbol selection groups for use with the Insert > Select Icon function.
Selection groups are provided for the symbol catalog that is included with the software. However the user may wish to create new groups to arrange commonly used symbols in one group or to allow selection of new symbols that the user has created. Macros can also be selected from these groups.
C-1
Appendix C – Creating Symbol Icon Groups
Each new selection group is drawn in RSWireTM on a drawing page. The page is then converted to the WMF (Windows Metafile) format. This WMF file is stored in a WMF subdirectory under the symbol catalog directory selected for the current project (example: \RS\CATALOG\JIC\WMF). Icon Group Creation Procedure: Note
You must use a white drawing background when creating icon groups in order for the icons to work properly. 1.
In RSWire, create a blank drawing page. This page can be online or offline. Most of the groups provided with the software were created using the B–1COL page format although this format is not required. Use a separate page for each group you create. When creating the page, select the page parameter 1 button and enter the name that you wish the group to have as page parameter number 1. The groups provided with the software follow a group naming format where the first three letters are the symbol catalog name (example: JIC_Relay1). Although this format is not mandatory it helps organize the groups if you have multiple symbol catalogs
2.
C-2
On the new page, draw a box to define the total area for the new symbol group. This box can be any size; it will be scaled to fit in the Select Icon dialog box. (Most of the groups provided with the software were drawn in a box 3 inches high by 8 inches wide – 7.6 x 20.3 cm). Do not use the logical box drawing function.
Appendix C – Creating Symbol Icon Groups
3.
Inside the box draw smaller boxes. Each smaller box defines the pick area for one symbol. These boxes can touch (share sides) as shown in the following figure, but the reference points for two boxes must not occupy the same point. Allow a margin of at lease 1/2 inch (1.3 cm) between the smaller boxes and the edge of the larger box.
4.
Inside each small box, place the desired symbol using the Insert > Symbol by Name function. All parts of the symbol (reference point, connection points, text) must fit inside the box to ensure proper operation.
CB125 PB125
LS128
If the symbol is too large to be conveniently shown in a box you can instead place a text string in the format S=SYMBOLNAME. For example, place the string S=1771–IAD in the selection box for the symbol 1771–IAD. Note
If you wish to select a macro, place the desired macro in the box. For macros, the box must also contain a text string in the format M=MACRONAME. For example, place the string M=MOT1 in the selection box for the macro MOT1.
C-3
Appendix C – Creating Symbol Icon Groups
5.
Modify the symbol to the appearance you wish it to have in the selection box. For example, you might wish to remove the device ID or function text by using the Modify > Symbol function. You must turn off displayed symbol reference and connection points (use the Tools > System Settings > Display Settings function).
6.
Add any other elements you wish to appear in the selection window such as text or borders. The symbol groups included with the software have text giving the symbol name and symbol group (PS1, etc.) in each selection box. Place nothing outside the large box drawn in step 2.
CB3M PBNO G G
LSNO G
C-4
7.
Save the drawing page (File > Save).
8.
Select the Tools > Create Icon function (or enter the command CREATE_WMF on the command line).
9.
You will be prompted to select objects. Select the large box and everything inside it. Press <Enter>. The WMF file will be created. It will be stored in the WMF directory for the symbol catalog that you have selected for the current project.
Appendix C – Creating Symbol Icon Groups
10. To verify that the new selection group exists, select the Insert > Select Icon function. If the group name does not appear in the list, select the Edit > Refresh function from the menu inside the Select Icon dialog box. The WMF files are stored in the WMF subdirectory for the symbol library that was selected in the New Project dialog box for the project in which the symbol group drawings were created (example: \RS\CATALOG\JIC\WMF). If you wish to move or copy WMF files from one symbol library to another, you can copy the WMF files to the appropriate directory. However, you must then edit the WMFLIST.INI file to add or delete the names of the symbol groups (see following paragraph). If you wish to change the names of existing groups you can edit the WMFLIST.INI file located in the appropriate WMF directory. The group names are listed as folders (example: FOLDER=JIC_Motor). Be careful not to alter any other information in this file. It is a good idea to keep the original drawing page after the WMF is created in case you wish to modify the symbol group in the future. You can add or delete items on the original page and then run the CREATE_WMF function again. You should delete the existing WMF file before running the Tools > Create Icon function, otherwise you will have two selection groups with the same name. The name of the relevant WMF file is shown in the WMFLIST.INI file two lines above the group (folder) name.
C-5
Appendix C – Creating Symbol Icon Groups
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
C-6
Index
Index A ACAD.PGP File, 1-6 Access Database Files, 13-2 Full Version, 13-19 Run–Time Version, 13-19 Active Input File, 7-38 Address File, 3-6 Edit, Select, 7-17 Aerial View, 4-33 Aliases, 1-6 Alternate Search Path, 15-1 Angle, Dialog Box, 5-35 Angular, Function, 5-84 Arc, 5-56 Filled Arc, 5-56 Article, Form, 10-11, 13-19 Assign Part Number, Dialog Box, 5-81, 5-118 Attributes List of, 6-15 Text, 5-16, 6-14, 14-40 User Created File, 5-117 Visible/Hidden, 6-15 Automatic, Function, 5-66 Automatic Wire Numbers, Dialog Box, 5-66
B Backup Device Type, 3-21 Macro, 3-21 Projects, 3-21 Selected Symbols, Macros, Device Types, 3-23
Symbol Catalogs, 3-21 Backup/Restore, Function, 3-21, 6-5 Bill Of Materials Dialog Box, 9-23 Function, 9-23 Blank Drawing Pages, 7-35 Block, 6-21, 6-82 Box, 5-47 Drawing, 5-49 Function, 5-47 Logical, 5-47 Settings, 5-50 Box: Connection Point Parameters, Dialog Box, 5-48 Break, 4-16 Browse Copy, 4-35
C Cable, 12-1 Assign, 11-18 Assign in Schematic, 12-2 Conductor Designations, 5-98 Cross Reference Symbol, 12-14 Delete, 11-19 Device Type, 12-11 Hidden Symbol, 7-16 List, 9-18, 12-21 Multiple Assignment Check, 7-28 Part Number, 12-12 Symbol Create, 12-8 Terminal Editor, 11-18, 12-7 Text, 5-100 Wire Numbering, 5-72 Cable Text, Dialog Box, 12-4 Character Sets, 7-10 I–1
Index
Character Size, 3-10
Connection Search Priorities, 9-15, 11-4
Characters, Reserved, 4-12, 5-15, 5-54
Connections, 9-16 Search Priorities, 9-15 Reports, 9-10
Child Symbol, 5-18, 5-25, 6-28, 6-34 Circle, 5-56 2 Points, 5-56 3 Points, 5-56 Filled Circle, 5-56 Tan Tan Radius, 5-56
Connections Point, Dialog Box, 12-3 Contacts, Form C, 6-72 Continuous Wire, 5-8
Load Editor, Function, 1-5
Copy, 5-105 Device Type, 6-95 From Page to Page, 4-35 Function, 3-16, 4-20, 4-40 Installation, 4-40 Macro, 6-95 Page, 4-20 Project, 3-16 Symbol, 6-95 Wire Numbers, 4-22, 4-41
Command Dispatch, 4-34
Copy Installation, Dialog Box, 4-40
Command Protection, 7-11
Copy Project, Dialog Box, 3-16
Commands Aliases (Shortcuts), 1-6 List of, 4-34
Copy To Clipboard, Function, 5-93
Clear Page, 4-17 Clip Jumper, 11-16 Remove, 11-17 Close Page. See Quit Page Color, Wire, 5-101 Comma Separated, List, 14-5
Comparison Check, Panel Layout With Schematic, 10-8 Compile Connections, 9-10 Compile Parts File, Function, 9-21 Configure, Lists, 14-1 Connection List, 9-10 Delete, 9-12 Dialog Box, 9-10 With Page Save, 7-25 Connection List Parameters, Dialog Box, 9-13 Connection Point, 6-3, 6-11 Designations, 5-18 Display, 7-16 Function, 5-47 Modify, 5-98 Text, 6-3, 6-11, 6-36, 6-91, 7-23 Connection Points, Dialog Box, 5-17
I–2
Create Device Type, 6-89 Field, 5-52 Function, 5-47 Icon Macro, C-3 Symbol, C-2 Language, 5-45 Macro, 6-81 Page, 4-11 Project, 3-5 Symbol, 6-6 Cross Reference Cable, 12-14 Device Definition, 6-34 Distance from Device ID, 7-21 JIC or IEC, 7-21 Position, 7-21 Signal IEC, 5-65 JIC, 5-58
Index
Suppress, 5-100, 7-25 Symbol, 6-31 Toggle, 5-100 with Child Symbol, 6-27, 6-30, 6-54, 6-60, 7-25 Zone, 7-22, 7-36
Definition of Text Attributes, Dialog Box, 10-9
Cut, 5-93
Delete, 5-104 Device Type, 6-93 Function, 3-14, 4-18, 5-77, 5-120 Installation, 4-39 Macro, 6-93 Page, 4-18 Project, 3-14 Symbol, 6-93 Wire Number, 5-77, 5-120
Cut & Paste, 4-35
Delete Connection Point, Function, 5-47
Cross Reference Point , Function, 6-16 Current Pages, Function, 8-2 Custom Symbol, Stored, 6-17
Delete Language, Function, 5-46
D
Delete Page(s), Dialog Box, 4-18 Delete Unused Text, 7-38
Dashed Lines, 5-102
Delete Wire Numbers, Dialog Box, 5-77, 5-120
Data Source Name, 3-10
Device. See Device Type
Database Accessing, 13-18 Add New Record, 13-23 Adding Fields, 13-34 Delete Record, 13-24 Field Sizes, 13-32 Manipulation, 13-29 Parts, 5-79, 13-1 Edit Form Function, 13-19 Edit Table Function, 13-28 Print, 13-39 Restructure, 13-36 Table View, 13-28
Device and Default Selection, Dialog Box, 8-6
Default Device ID Format, 3-9 Font, 7-49
Device ID, 6-2, 6-9 1, 2, or 3 Lines, 7-43 Angle, 5-101 Color, 5-100, 6-10 Display with Installation, Location, 7-44 Duplicate, 5-15, 5-30, 5-32, 5-55 Find/Replace, 5-114 Height, 5-101, 6-10 Label Origin, 5-101, 6-10 Macro, 5-30 Modify, 5-97 Nested, 7-44 Prompt, 7-23 Renumber, 5-110 Replace, 5-110 Repositioning, 5-99 Reserved Characters, 5-15 Search, 5-20 Suppress, 5-15 Symbol, 5-14 Tag, 6-2
Default Settings, 7-4
Device ID Assignment, Dialog Box, 5-14
Define Names, Dialog Box, 8-31
Device ID Sign (–), 5-24
Database Data Dialog Box, 13-37 Record, 13-19 Date, General Default, 7-21 DDINSERT, Command, 6-21
I–3
Index
Device Type, 5-17, 5-25, 13-21 Backup, 3-21 Cable, 12-11 Copy, 6-95 Create, 6-89 Definition, 6-34 Delete, 6-93 Dialog Box, 5-17, 12-3 List, 9-6 Modify, 5-97, 6-99 Rename, 6-96 Without Parent, 9-30 Device Type Brief, Report, 9-7 Device Type Full, Report, 9-6 Diagonal Wire Connection, 7-24, 9-16 Dialog Boxes, Customize, 2-13 Dialog Language, 7-4 Digitizer, 1-7 Dimension List, Function, 9-27 Dimensions Align Text, 5-85 Alternate Units, 7-60 Angular, 5-84, 5-87 Annotation, 7-58 Drawing, 5-83 Family, 7-54 Format, 7-57 Geometry, 7-54 Leader, 5-84, 5-87 Linear, 5-84, 5-85 Ordinate, 5-84, 5-86 Radial, 5-84 Radius, 5-86 Settings, 7-52 Style, 7-54 Tolerance, 5-84
Draw Arc, 5-56 Box, 5-47 Empty, 5-49 Filled, 5-49 Circle, 5-56 Dimensions, 5-83 Field, 5-52 Line, 5-10 Polyline, 5-10 Single, 5-10 Logical Box, 5-47 Connection Point, 5-47 Create, 5-47 Delete Connection Point, 5-47 Macro, 5-27 Symbol, 5-11 Text, 5-31 Undo, 5-92 Wire, 5-3 3 Phase, 5-6 90 Degree Down, 5-9 90 Degree Up, 5-9 Continuous, 5-8 Repeat Last, 5-8 Single, 5-4 Wire Number, 5-72 Automatic, 5-66 Manual, 5-72 Wire/Line, 5-3 Drawing Box, 5-49 Drawing Entity List, 5-132 Duplicate Device ID, 5-15, 5-30 DW Symbol, 9-16 DWF Files, Plot to, 8-22
Directory, RSWire Directories, 1-2
DWG File, 4-3, 4-9, 6-82 Plot To, 8-23 Symbol Import, 6-21
Disable Settings, 5-33
DWT File, 4-9
Display Only Attribute Text, 5-16
DXF File, 4-9 Plot to, 8-24
Display Settings, 7-15
I–4
Index
DXF Import, Function, 6-22
Field Wire, Report, 9-18 Field Wire List, 12-21
E Edit Copy To Clipboard, 5-93 Cut , 5-93 I/O Device ID, 5-121 Part Number Multiple, 5-119 Single, 5-118 Replace Symbol, 5-108 Text Find/Replace, 5-114 Modify, 5-103 Wire Number Delete, 5-77, 5-120 Modify, 5-104
File Backup/Restore, 6-5 New Page, 4-11 New Project, 3-5 Open Page Previous, 4-7 Refresh, 4-6 Select, 4-4 Plot Current Pages, 8-2 Multiple Pages, 8-2 Preview, 8-2, 8-3 Break, 4-16 Save, 4-8 Save As, 4-9 File Locking, 3-13
Edit Menu, 5-92
Files, B-1
Edit Phrases, Function, 5-44
Filled Circle, Function, 5-56
Edit Symbol, Dialog Box, 5-97
Filter, 7-6 Dialog Box, 14-27 Lists, 14-23
Edit Wire/Line Type, Dialog Box, 5-101 Enable Settings, 5-33 Entity List, 5-132 Error Checking, List, 9-30
Find/Replace, Function, 5-114 Find/Replace Text, 5-114
Exit, Without Saving, 1-4
Font Default, 7-49 Selecting, 5-39
Explode Function, 6-21, 6-82
Foreign Languages. See Language Text
Exchange Title Block Text, Dialog Box, 4-25
Form C Contacts, 6-72
F Field Delete, 5-55 Draw, 5-52 Function, 5-52 Mixed device IDs in, 5-54 Modify, 5-103 Rules, 5-52
Format Color, 5-101 Layers, 5-123 Linetype, 5-101, 5-122 Multiline Styles, 6-100 Page, 4-12 Text Style, 5-39 Formats Available For All Projects, Function, 7-36 Function, DXF Import, 6-22
Field Parameters, Dialog Box, 5-53 I–5
Index
Function Text, 5-32, 6-14 Functionality, 2-2
G
Definition of, 3-2 Delete, 4-39 Device ID Format, 7-43 NO_INST, 3-4 Rename, 4-42 Installation (of Software), 1-2
General Defaults, Settings, 7-19
Installation and Location, 3-2
Generate Graphical Plans, Function, 11-30
Installation Guide, 1-1
Graphical Terminal Plan See also Terminal Plan Configuration, 11-24 Create, 11-30
Installation List, 9-4
Grid, 3-10 Draw/Hide, 7-23 Grid Settings, 7-2 Group, Device ID, 3-9
H Height, Dialog Box, 5-34 Help Screens, 2-11
Installations, Function, 9-4 Internal/External Connections, 7-41 Definition, 11-3 Display Format, 11-27
J Job Costing, Function, 9-25 Job Costing List, 9-25 Dialog Box, 9-25 Job Number, 3-6
Hourly Cost, 9-25
Jumper, 11-3 Clip, 7-42, 11-16 Wire, 11-17
I
L
Hidden Symbol, Display, 7-16
I/O Device ID, Function, 5-121
Label Origin, 5-38, 5-101
Icon, Create Using Macro, C-3 Using Symbol, C-2
Label Origin Text Justification, Dialog Box, 5-38
IEC, Connection Search, 9-16 Import, Text File, 5-88 Insert, Symbol/Macro From Icon, 5-27 Insert Spare Terminals, Dialog Box, 11-13 Installation Copy, 4-40
I–6
Ladder Line Number, 7-21 Two Line, 7-33 Ladder Line Number X Direction, 7-33 Y Direction, 7-33 Ladder Macro, 7-33, 7-35 Language, Of Dialogs, Menus, etc., 7-4
Index
Language Text, 3-9, 5-41 Create, 5-44 Font, 5-45 Replace, 9-22 Report, 9-7 Search, 5-32
List Generator, 14-1 Assigning Files, 14-3 File Structure, 14-6 Filenames, 14-4 Path to, 15-2 Variables, 14-29
Language Text Database, Dialog Box, 9-7
List Generator Settings, Function, 7-5
Layer Control, Dialog Box, 5-123
List Object Function, 5-132
Layer Printing Control, Dialog Box, 8-26
Lists, 9-1 Bill Of Materials, 9-23 Cable, 9-18 Comma Separated, 9-29 Connection, 9-10 Customizing, 14-1 Device Type, 9-6 Device Without Parent, 9-30 Dimension, 9-27 Field Wire, 9-18 File Assignment, 14-3 File Structure, 14-6 Filtering, 7-6, 14-23 Foreign Text, 9-7 Graphics, 7-6, 7-8 Installation, 9-4 Job Costing, 9-25 Macro, 9-6 Master Parts, 9-22 On Drawing, 5-88 Open Connections, 9-11, 9-12 Output, 7-6, 7-8 Page, 9-4 Page Format, 9-9 Parts Dimension. See Lists, Dimension PLC, 9-20 Printing, 7-6, 9-3 Project, 9-4 Error Checking, 9-30 Purchase Order, 9-24 Signals, 9-18 Sort Function, 14-11 Sorting, 7-6 Symbol, 9-6 Terminal Connections, 9-19
Layers Function, 5-123 Plotting, 8-26 Layout Function, 10-3 Leader, Function, 5-84 Leader Lines, 5-87 Line, 5-3 Adjusting Length, 5-5 Change Type, 5-101 Draw, 5-10 Edit, 5-101 Logical, 5-3 Numbers, 7-31 Stretch, 5-107 Line Numbers, 7-21, 7-31 Columns, 7-35 With Page No., 7-24 Linear, Function, 5-84 Linetype, 5-101 Properties, 5-122 List, Comma Separated, 14-5 List File Arithmetic, 14-17 Assigning, 14-3 Data Formatting, 14-15 Rules, 14-9 Sort Function, 14-11 Strings, 14-22 Structure, 14-6 Using Variables, 14-14
I–7
Index
Terminal Strip, 9-19 Variables, 14-29 Wire, 9-10 Load Project, Function, 1-5 Location Device ID Format, 7-43 NO_LOC, 3-4 Lock Project, 3-13 Logical Box, 5-47 Line (Wire), 5-3 Online Control, 4-14 Logical Box Function, 5-47 Nested Symbols, 5-49 Logo file, 7-18
M Macro Backup, 3-21 Copy, 6-95 Create, 6-81 Delete, 6-93 Device IDs, 5-30 Edit, 6-97 Ladder, 7-33, 7-35 List, 9-6 Modify, 6-97 Page, 4-14 Placing, 5-29 Rename, 6-96 Report, 9-6 Select, 5-27 Settings, 7-48 Terminal Plan, 11-20 Title Block, 6-83 Wire Numbers, 5-30, 6-83 Macro by Name, Function, 5-27 Macro Settings, 5-29 Maintenance Agreement, 1-1 I–8
Manage Installation Copy, 4-40 Rename, 4-42 Page Copy, 4-20 Delete, 4-18 Modify, 4-23 Move, 4-30 Page Variables, 4-25 Page , Rename, 4-28 Project Copy, 3-16 Delete, 3-14 Modify, 3-17 Page Count, 4-49 Rename, 3-19 Manual, 2-3 Conventions, 2-4 Function, 5-72 Organization, 2-3 Master List, 9-22 Report, 9-22 Master Parts List, Dialog Box, 9-21 Menu, 2-4 Functions, 2-4 Menus, 2-6 Mirroring, 5-24 Modify Connection Point, 5-98 Device Type, 5-97, 6-99 Field, 5-103 Function, 3-17, 4-23 Line, 5-101 Macro, 6-97 Move, 5-106 Page, 4-23 Project Parameters, 3-17 Properties, 5-107 Stretch, 5-107 Symbol, 5-96, 6-97 Symbol Text, 5-95, 5-99, 5-115
Index
Terminal Destination, 5-99 Text, 5-103 Wire, 5-101 Modify Device Type, Dialog Box, 5-98 Modify Groups, Dialog Box, 8-27
90 Degree Down, Function, 5-9 90 Degree Up, Function, 5-9
O
Modify Page, Dialog Box, 4-23
Oldb.mdb File, 3-25
Modify Project, Dialog Box, 3-17
Online, Set Page Online, 4-23
Move Function, 4-30, 5-106 Page, 4-30 Symbol, 3-10
Online Function, 4-14, 5-16
Move Page(s), Dialog Box, 4-30
Options for RSWire, 2-14
MS Access, Reports, 9-28
Ordinate, Function, 5-84
MS–Access, Database Files, 13-2
Overview, 2-1
Online function, Change, 4-23 Open Connections, List, 9-11, 9-12
Multi–language Text, 5-41 Multi–Line Text, Replace, 9-22 Multi–Page View, 4-35 Multiline Styles, 6-100 Multiple Pages, Function, 8-2 Multiple Placement, of Cable Conductors, 12-2
N Navigator Function, 4-43 Zoom Setting, 7-13 Navigator Function, 4-43 Nested Device ID, 7-44 Nested Symbols, in Logical Box, 5-49 New Language, Function, 5-45 New Page, 4-11 Dialog Box, 5-91 Function, 4-11 New Project, Dialog Box, 3-5 Next Page Function, 4-7
P Page Break, 4-16 Browse, 5-79 Browse Copy, 4-35 Close (without save), 4-16 Copy, 4-20 Count, 3-26 Create, 4-11 Delete, 4-18 Displaying, 4-4 DWG File, 4-3, 4-9 EC1 File, 4-3 Erase. See Page – Clear Page Error Checking, 7-27 Filenames, 4-3 Format, 4-12 Macro, 4-14 Management, 4-1 Modify, 4-23 Move, 4-30 Name Field, 4-6 Clear Page, 4-17 Next Page, 4-7
I–9
Index
Page Count, 4-49 Parameters, 4-25 Open, 4-4 Refresh, 4-6 Rename, 4-28 Save, 4-8, 7-24 Save As, 4-9 Save Automatic, 4-8 Scale, 4-14 Storage, 4-3 Variables, 4-25 View, 4-32 Without Control, 7-28, A-3 Page – Parameter 2, Dialog Box, 4-15, 4-26 Page Brief, Function, 9-5 Page Control Function, Settings, 7-27 Page Count Dialog Box, 4-49 Function, 4-49 Page Count Function, 3-26 Page Format Default, 7-21 List of, 4-12, 9-9 Saving, 7-36 Settings, 7-29 Page Formats, Report, 9-9 Page Full, Function, 9-4 Page List, 9-4 Page Macro, 4-14 Default, 3-6 Page Name Field, 4-6 Page Number, With Line No., 7-24 Page Parameters Modify, 4-23, 4-25 Modify in title block, 4-27 Page Type Field, 4-14 Page Variables Dialog Box, 4-25 Function, 4-25
I–10
Modify in title block, 4-27 Pan, 4-33 Panel Layout, 10-1, 13-21 Comparison With Schematic, 10-8 Dialog Box, 10-3 Function, 10-3 Item Placement, 10-6 Preliminary Steps, 10-2 Procedure, 10-3 Symbol Create, 10-9 Text Parameters, 10-6 Parent Symbol, 5-25, 6-24, 6-34 Parent/Child, 5-17, 5-25 Device Without Parent, 9-30 Search, 5-20 Part Number, 5-79, 13-20 Additional, 13-22 Automatic Assignment, 6-18 Check, 7-23 Copied Pages, 4-22 Display, 7-16 Duplication, 5-55 Entering, 5-15 Edit, 5-118 Modify, 5-82 Multiple, 5-15, 5-80 Multiple Replace, 5-119 Replace Globally, 5-119 Search, 5-82 Symbol Create, 6-18 Symbol without, 7-28 Terminal, 7-41 Text, 6-3 Parts Database, 5-79 See also Database Button, 3-10 Reports, 9-7 Parts Dimension List, 9-27 Parts File, Create, 9-21 Password Protection, 7-11 Pin Charts, 6-66
Index
Pin–Plug Plan, 11-31
Polyline, Function, 5-10
PLC Address Separator, 7-39 Addressing, 7-39 Attribute, 6-43 Child Symbol IEC, 6-57 JIC, 6-52 Duplicate Checking, 7-39 Input File, 7-38 List, 9-20 Octal Address, 7-39 Parent Symbol, 6-39 Placing Symbol in a Drawing, 6-49 Replace Text, 7-38 Text, 5-99, 6-50, 7-38 Wire Numbering, 5-71
Position Cross Reference, 5-99 Device ID, 5-99
PLC Online File, 7-38
Primary Units, 7-59
PLC Text, 6-50 Input File, 7-38 Modify, 5-99
Print/Plot Configuration, Dialog Box, 8-5
Plot, 8-1 Configuration, 8-5, 8-10 Current Page (ACAD 2000), 8-10 Current Page R14, 8-5 Dialog Box, 8-10 DXF File, 8-24 Layers, 8-26 Multiple Pages (ACAD 2000), 8-18 Multiple Pages (R14), 8-15 PLT File, 8-21 Preview, 8-3, 8-9 Scale, 8-9 Sequence, 8-17, 8-20 To File, 8-21 Plotting, Dialog Box, 8-16, 8-19 PLT File, Plot to, 8-21 Plug, 6-66 Device IDs, 7-41 Plug ID, Settings, 7-40 PMG, 5-82, 13-20
Power–Editor, 5-94 Preferences AutoCAD 2000 Version, 7-61 AutoCAD R14 Version, 7-64 Standalone Version, 7-69 Preferred Direction, 6-7 Preferred Manufacturer’s Group, 5-82, 13-20 Preview, Function, 8-2 Previous, Function, 4-7 Previous Page Function, Next, 4-7
Printer Configuration, 7-9 Select, 7-9 Printing Lists, 9-3 Programmable Controller See also PLC Report, List, 9-20 Settings, 7-37 Programmable Controller Settings, Function, 7-37 Programmable Controller Text Definition, Dialog Box, 5-99 Project Backup, 3-21 Copy, 3-16 Create, 3-5 Data, 3-25 Default Character Size, 3-10 Default Symbol Library, 3-5 Default Title Block, 3-6 Delete, 3-14 Description, 3-6 Device ID Format, 3-9
I–11
Index
Directory Names, 3-4 Grid, 3-10 List, 9-4 Lock and Unlock, 3-13 Management, 3-1 Modify Parameters, 3-17 Organization, 3-2 Page Count, 3-26 Parameters, 3-6, 3-7, 3-17 Preselect, 3-12 Rename, 3-19 Renumber, 5-110 Reorganize, 3-25 Reports, 9-4 Settings, 3-10, 7-19 Project Brief, Function, 9-4 Project Cable List, 12-21 Project Full, Function, 3-20, 9-4 Project Preselect, Dialog Box, 3-12
Open, Page, 4-4 Real Time Pan, Function, 4-33 Record, Parts Database, 13-19 Redraw, 4-32 Reference Guide, VBA, 1-5 Reference Point, 6-2, 6-9 Display, 7-16 Refresh, Function, 4-6 Regen, 4-32 Rename Device Type, 6-96 Function, 3-19, 4-28, 4-42 Installation, 4-42 Macro, 6-96 Page, 4-28 Project, 3-19 Symbol, 6-96
Project Settings Backup, 3-22 Grid, 7-2
Rename Page, Dialog Box, 4-28
Properties, Function, 5-107
Renumber Terminal Strip, Dialog Box, 11-11, 11-12
Purchase Order, Function, 9-24 Purchase Order List, 9-24 Dialog Box, 9-24
Q
Renumber, Terminals, 5-111 Device ID, Formats, 3-9
Reorganize, Project, 3-25 Repeat, Last Wire, 5-8 Repeat Last, Function, 5-8
Quit, Page, 4-16
Replace Device ID, 5-110 Part Number, 5-119 Symbol, 5-108 Symbol Text, 5-115 Wire Number, Replace, 5-76
Quit Page, 4-16
Replace Part Number, Dialog Box, 5-119
Quadrant Function, 4-34 Question Mark, Alert, 7-28
R
Replace Symbol Dialog Box, 5-108 Function, 5-108
Radial, Function, 5-84
Replace Symbol Text, Function, 5-115
Ratio, Dialog Box, 5-37
Replace Text, Dialog Box, 5-114
I–12
Index
Replace Wire Numbers, Dialog Box, 5-76 Report Settings, Tab, 5-88 Reports See also Lists Cable, 9-18 Cable List, 12-21 Comma Separated, 9-29 Connections, 9-10 Device Type Brief, Device Brief, 9-7 Device Type Full, Device Full, 9-6 Field Wire, 12-21 Field Wire, Field Wire List, 9-18 Foreign Languages, Language, 9-7 Library, 9-6 Macro, Macro, 9-6 Master List, 9-22 MS Access, 9-28 Parts, 9-21 Bill Of Materials, 9-23 Compile Parts File, 9-21 Dimension List, 9-27 Job Costing, 9-25 Purchase Order, 9-24 Parts Database, 9-7 PLC List, Compile, 9-20 Project, 9-4 Installations, 9-4 Page Brief, 9-5 Page Full, 9-4 Project Brief, 9-4 Project Full, 3-20, 9-4 Settings, 7-5 Signals, 9-18 Symbols, Symbol, 9-6 Table of Contents, 9-5 Terminals, 9-19 Wire, Wire List, 9-10 Wire Labels, 9-18 Wire List, Compile Connections, 9-10
RSWire Base System, 2-14 Concept, 2-1 Exiting, 1-4 Optional Modules, 2-14 Starting, 1-3 VBA, 1-5 Run Macro, Function, 1-5
S Save, Page, 4-8 Save As Function, 4-9 Save Function, 4-8 Scale Drawing, 4-14 Symbol, 5-23 Scan Direction, 6-7 Schematic Elements, 5-1 Search, Device ID, 5-20 Search Device ID, Dialog Box, 5-21 Select, Project, 3-12 Select Color, Dialog Box, 5-39 Select Devices, Dialog Box, 10-4 Select Icon, 5-11 Select Page, Dialog Box, 4-46 Select Quadrant, Dialog Box, 4-34 Settings, 3-10, 7-1 Display, 7-15 Grid, 7-2 Short Circuit, 7-28 Shortcuts, 1-6
Reserved Characters, 4-12, 5-15, 5-54
Signal Analysis Type, 3-9
Restore, Projects, Symbols, 3-24
Signal Cross Reference Analysis Types, 5-61
Rotate, Symbol, 5-23
I–13
Index
Device ID, 5-61 in the Wire List, 5-60 Include Page/Line, 7-22 Notation Formats, 5-60 Star Type, 5-62, 5-63, 5-64 Symbol Create, 6-77 Symbols, 5-59 Wire Numbering and, 5-66 Signals, Report, 9-18 Single, Function, 5-4, 5-10 Slant, Dialog Box, 5-36 Snapmode, 6-7 SODSETT.CFG, 7-47 Software Modules, 2-14 Sort Function, 14-11 Standalone, Version of software, 2-1 Stretch, Function, 5-107 Suppress Device ID, 5-15 Suppress Device Sign (–), Toggle, 7-44 Symbol Alternate search, 15-1 Attribute Text, 6-15, 14-40 Backup, 3-21 Cable, 12-8 Catalog, 6-4, 6-17 Catalog Path, 5-109, 6-5 Child, 6-28, 6-34 Connection Point, 6-11 Copy, 6-95 Create, 6-6 Cross Reference Symbol, 6-31 Delete, 6-93 Device Definition, 6-34 Device ID, 3-9, 5-14 Dialog Box, 5-23 DWG Import, 6-21 Elements of, 6-2 Example Creation, 6-24 Groups, 6-8 Layout, 10-9
I–14
Libraries, 6-4 List, 9-6 Mirroring, 5-24 Modify, 5-96, 6-97 Move, 3-10, 5-106 Multiple Placement, 5-19 Nested, 5-49 Panel Layout, 10-9 Parent, 6-24, 6-34 Placement Rules, 5-13 PLC Child IEC, 6-57 JIC, 6-52 PLC Parent, 6-39 Power–Editor, 5-94 Reference Point, 6-9 Rename, 6-96 Replace, 5-108 Report, 9-6 Rotate, 5-23 Rotation (Automatic), 5-13, 6-13 Scale, 5-23 Selecting, 5-11 Settings, 5-23 Signal Cross Reference, 6-77 IEC, 5-65 JIC, 5-58 Terminal, 6-63 Text, 5-99, 6-3 Without Connection, 7-28 Without Part Number, 7-28 Symbol By Name, Function, 5-11, 5-12 Symbol Sets, 7-10 Symbol Text, 6-3 Angle, 5-101 Assign, 6-13 Color, 5-100 Dialog Box, 5-16 Find/Replace, 5-114 Height, 5-101 Label Origin, 5-101 Modify, 5-95, 5-99 Replace, 5-115
Index
Window, 5-30 Symbol/Macro From Icon, Function, 5-27 SYMBOL_REF, 5-82
T Table, Text, 13-27
Configuration File, 11-25, 11-33 Editor, 11-6 Functions, 11-5 Graphical, 11-20 Internal vs. External, 11-3 Jumper, 11-16, 11-17 Macro, 11-20 Overview, 11-2 Update Existing Pages, 11-29
Table of Contents, 9-5
Terminal Plan Editor, Dialog Box, 12-7
Tablet, 1-7
Terminal Strip, Report, 9-19
Tabs, 14-28
Terminal Strip Selection, Dialog Box, 11-6
Terminal Assign Cable, 11-18 Branch Between, 7-28 Change Number, 11-9 Connection Report, 9-19 Connection Search, 9-15 Delete Spare, 11-14 Device IDs, 7-41 Editing Functions, 11-9 Editor Mode, 11-6 Equals Wire Number, 5-72 In Macro, 6-82 Internal vs. External Connection, 11-3 Modify Destination, 5-99 Move, 11-13 Multiple Placement, 5-19 Part Number, 11-18 Part Number Enable, 7-41 Renumber, 5-110, 5-111, 11-10, 11-11 Settings, 7-40 Sort, 11-12 Spare, 11-13 Switch Targets, 11-15 Symbol, 6-63 Target Setting, 5-99
Terminal=Wire Number, 5-72, 6-65
Terminal Connections, Priorities, 11-4 Terminal Editor, Dialog Box, 11-7 Terminal Plan, 11-1 Basic Steps, 11-2 Configuration, 11-24
Text Alignment, 5-38 Angle, 5-35 Attributes, 6-14, 6-15, 14-40 Color, 5-39 Dialog Box, 5-31 Edit, 5-103 Entry, 5-31 Find/Replace, 5-114 Font, 5-39 Foreign Language, 5-41, 9-7 Function, 5-31 Function Text, 5-32 Height, 3-10, 5-34, 7-23 Hidden, 5-40 Invisible, 5-40 Label Origin, 5-38, 6-42 Language, 3-9, 5-41 Modify, 5-103 Multi–line, 5-32 On Drawing, 5-88 Ratio, 5-37 Settings, 5-34 Size, 5-34 Size (Default), 3-10 Slant, 5-36 Styles, 7-49 Table, 13-27 Text File on Drawing, 5-88, 7-6
I–15
Index
Text On Drawing, Dialog Box, 5-89
Unreferenced Signals, Function, 9-30
Text Style, Default, 7-23
Update Existing Pages, 11-29
Text Styles, 7-49
Upper/lower case, 7-4
Text Window, 2-10
User Name, 7-21
3 Phase, Customize, 6-100 3 Phase, Function, 5-6 Title Block, 4-15 Address in, 7-17 Create, 6-83 Default, 3-6 Display/Hide, 7-22 Logo File, 7-18 Modify Page Variables, 4-27 Reassign, 4-23 Variables, 6-87 Tolerance, 7-60 Toolbar, 2-9 Set Position, 2-10 Toolbars, 4-34 Tools Error Checking Device Without Parent, 9-30 Unreferenced Signals, 9-30 Panel Layout, 10-3 Project Settings, 11-24, 11-32 System Settings Grid Settings, 12-8 Report Settings, 14-3 Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan Edit Terminals, 11-31 Generate Graphical Plans, 11-20, 11-30 Two Line Ladder, 7-33
U Undo, 5-92 Undo Delete, 5-104 Units, 7-23 Unload Project, Function, 1-5 I–16
V Variables Database, 14-31 List, 14-29 Terminal Plan, 11-22 Title Block, 6-87 VBA Load Editor, 1-5 Load Project, 1-5 Reference Guide, 1-5 Run Macro, 1-5 Unload Project, 1-5 View, 4-32 List, 5-132 Navigator, 4-43 Quadrant, 4-34 Redraw, 4-32 Regen, 4-32 Toolbars, 4-34
W Windows, Using, 2-12 Wire, 5-3 Change Type, 5-101 Color, 5-71 Continuous, 5-8 Draw, 5-3 Gauge, 5-71 Modify Number, 5-104 Multiple Cable Check, 7-28 90 Degree, 5-9 Numbers, 5-66 Repeat, 5-8 Reports, 9-10
Index
Size, 5-71 Without Connection, 7-28 Wire Labels, Function, 9-18
X X–Direction, Ladder Line Number, 7-33
Wire List, Function, 9-10 Wire Number, Display, 7-16 Wire Number Manual, Dialog Box, 5-73 Wire Numbers, 5-66 Automatic, 5-66 Before/After Terminal, 3-10 Color (Display), 5-71 Copied Pages, 4-22, 4-41 Delete, 5-77, 5-120 Duplicate, 5-73, 5-75 Height, 5-71 Invisible Text in, 5-75 Macro, 5-30, 6-83 Manual, 5-72 Modify, 5-104 Page select, 5-67 Position, 5-71 Replace, 5-76 Repositioning, 5-78 Same as PLC Address, 5-71 Same Over Terminal, 3-10 With Color/Gauge, 7-26
Y Y–Direction, Ladder Line Number, 7-33
Z Zone Configuration, 7-36 Select, 7-22 Zoom All, 4-33 Center, 4-33 Dynamic, 4-32 Extents, 4-33 In, 4-33 Out, 4-33 Previous, 4-32 Real Time, 4-32 Scale, 4-33 Window, 4-32
Wire/Line, Function, 5-101
Zoom Off, Function, 7-13
Wires, (Logical Lines), 5-3
Zoom Parameters, System Settings, 7-13
Wiring Diagram, 13-21
I–17
Index
I–18
Related Documents
Designer User's Guide V4x
November 2019 3
Designer Guide
November 2019 12
Ds Designer Guide
April 2020 4
Designer Style Guide
April 2020 3
Mule-2.2.0-users-guide
June 2020 28